<<

RESUME

ED 232 698 IR 050 352 Roberts, Matt T.; Etherington, Don and the Conservation of . A Dictionary of Descriptive Terminology. INSTITUTION of Congress, Washington, D.C. REPORT NO ISBN-0-8444-0366-0 PUB DATE 82 NOTE 318p.; Photographs will not reproduce. AVAILABLE FROM Superintendent of , U.S. Government Office, Washington, DC 20402 (LC 1.2:864/3). PUB TYPE Reference Materials - (131) reference Meterials - Vocabularies/Classifications/Dictionaries (134) EDRS PRICE MF01/PC13 Plus Postage. DESCRIPTORS ; Biographies; *Books; Definitions; *Preservation IDENTIFIERS * Binding; Rare Books Intended for bookbinders and conservators oflibrary and archival material and for those workingin related fields, such as and librarianship, this dictionary contains definitions for the nomenclature of bookbindingand the conservation of archival material, illustrations ofbookbinding equipment and processes, and biographical vignettes of notable binders. Detailsof the history of bookbinding and discussionsof materials used are included, where applicable, in the definitions.In addition, definitions provide answers to questions,e.g., the best treatment for bindings, and useful items ofinformation, e.g., the standard sizes of . It is notedthat the definitions were drawn, whenever possible, from the most authoritativesources available. Sources for definitions are indicated by numberswhich refer to the 373-item bibliography included atthe end of the dictionary. A series of 13 color photographs of various bindingsand is also included. (ESR)

*********************************************************************** Reproductions supplied by EDRSare the best that can be made from the original document. *********************************************************************** U.S. DEPARTMENT OF NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF EDUCATION ELUCATIONAL RESOURCES CENTER (ERIC) 4.This document has been reproduced as received from the person or organization originating it. Minor changes have been made to improve reproduction quafity

Points of view or opinions stated in this docu ment do not necessarily represent official ME position or policy. co BOOKBINDING ,0 AND THE CONSERVATION (NJ OF BOOKS

A DICTIONARY OF DESCRIPTIVE TERMINOLOGY

Matt T. Roberts and Don Etherington

Drawings by Margaret R. Brown

LIBRARY OF CONGRESS Washington 1982 A NAHONA1 PlaSURVAI'ION PROGRAM P11111 ICArION

library of ('ongress Cataloging in Publalition

Robots, Matt, 1929 Bookbinding and the conseivinion of books; A dictionary of descriptive ternUnology. Bibliography: p, 289 Supt. of Does, no.: 11 1,2:15M/1 I. Bookbinding,Dictionaries, 2. Books Conservation and testorationDictionaties. I.Mhoington, Dom11,Thk, Vol site by Z266.7,R62 686,3'03 81607974 the Superintendent of Dociunrnis, I J S ( ioveininenI Planing °Owe MIN 0.8444,0,166-0 AACR2 Washington, 1)('

FOREWORD BY FREDERICK R. GOFF vii

P REFACE ix

A DICTIONARY OF DESCRIPTIVE TERMINOLOGY 1

PLATES facing page134

SOURCES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY 289 a

The old saw that you can't judge a book by its cover is these original covers. We know, for example, thata not precisely true. Actually, it cannot be appliedto the number of copies of Johann Gutenberg's famous Bible earliest known form of the book,the . Many sur- of 1455 were bound not at Mainz, where this Bible viving Codices possess bindings which are almost an was printed, but at Erfurt; and we also know thatone integral part of the text. Their fundamentaldesigns and of the binders in that communitywas named Johannes the frequent sumptuous embellishment of the covers with Fogel, since one of the blind stamps usedto embellish and mounts encrustedwith jewels or semi- the leather stretched over the original wooden boards precious gems or enamels offer compelling insight into contained his own name. Other bindings ofa slightly the contents of the books theyprotect. These magnificent later period carry on their leather coversa stamp which survivor's of many centuries ofuse and adoration are is a recognizable portrait ofan early , Johann de among the great bibliophilic treasures of those fortunate Westphalia; another group reveals thearms of the city and museums whopossess them. It is a matter of Cologne, providing valid evidence of theplace of of great regret that inmany instances the bindings have binding. Indeed, the study of the basic of early been stripped, stolen, or otherwise removed fromthe bindings and the blind stamps used to decorate them texts they encased, for such bindings frequently offer has become the object of intensive bibliographicre- valid evidence of their places of execution.What would search. The late Ernst Kyriss devotedmany years of we not give to know what kind of binding originallywas productive scholarship to documenting thesources of placed on the noble ,since it might well innumerable early German bindings carrying blind have provided the missing cluesto the earliest history stamps. For the early years of the sixteenth century, and provenance of this great manuscriptof the Gospels. Konrad Haebler performed a similar service bycategor- In many instances certain bookcovers artistically ad- izing and classifying the numerous rolls usedon German mired for their craftsmanship in theuse of , silver, bindings of that period. The bindings of other countries and, at a later date, leather remain as single objects, and have also received careful attention, but muchmore we can only spec:date about the texts they encased. We work remains to be done. owe a great debt to the Egyptian Christians, the Copts, It is not surprising to find early German books in who most probably were the firstto use leather as covers contemporary Italian bindings, and early Italian printed for their scriptural texts. Once introducedit became the books in German or French bindings, indicating that most common material used for bookbinding throughout the book trade was quite mobile. Stylistically, it is often Europe; it was not supplanted essentially until the nine- possible to identify early and also later bindings by their teenth century when cloth bindings becamecommon. country and even their city of origin. It is also true that Velvet had, of course, been used much earlierfor em- rich al-id affluent bibliophiles such as Matthias Corvinus broidered bindings. (King of Hungary), the King of Naples, and later Jean Early on binding developed as a craft, and itbecame Grolier of Lyons and Paris, one of the greatest of all a highly skilled craft, one which has endured to this day. bibliophiles, took great pains to have their librariesap- Over the years as books proliferated the needfor book- propriately and sumptuously bound. Books from these binding increased; the invention of printingprovided a and other great collections are easily recognizedand new impetus to the craft and probably revolutionized it. highly prized by their present-dayowners. England and, The earliest printed books were issued by theirprinters especially, France have produced countless royal bind- in unbound sheets; those who purchasedthem arranged ings of extraordinary interest and variety. to have them bound according to their individualre- The art of fine bookbinding is well represented in quirements. That isone of the reasons why the study France, where it continues to flourish. One must not and investigation of fifteenth-century bindingscan re- lose sight of the lacquered bindings from Islam (asepa- veal such interesting details about the early history of rate in themselves), the embroidered covers

vii executed by Fnglish needleworkers in the seventeenth he cares to peruse ii, about the contents of the textit century, or the beautiful bindings found on Chinese introduces. The text of the present book is not a history and Japaiwse books of all periods. There isinfinite of bookbindingalthough there is a great deal of his variety to lw found in tlw study of this historic craft, tory about the craft contained herein, and it also dis 'I'hete is also much to be said about early binding in cusses the materials used, the notable binders whose this country and much more to be written. Although in names illuminate it, and other useful information. It is its earliest period it was frankly derivative and with cer rather an up-to dale dictionary. tain exceptions can hardly be regarded as distinguished, The succinct definitions anu explanations, as well as there were attempts at refinement. the biographical vignettes, contained in this dictionary there has been a tionendous interest in the history will be a boon to those who seek this kind of infor of bookbinding in this country in recent years, stimu- mation. 'Mose concerned, whether they are practicing bY die late Dorothy Miner's monumental binders, technicians, rare book librarians, collectors, exhibition of bindings, principally from American col or simply laymen, will find this a welcome source of lemons, which was handsomely mounted at the Balt'', answers to their questions. Not the least of these is the more Museum of Art in145'7. Over seven hundred one frequently asked of ine during my long, service in exceptional bindings, covering more than fourteen cen theI ibrary of Congress as Chief of the Rare Book lurk's, were on display. It was a delight for all those Ilow can Ibest treat the leather bindings in who shared in it or saw it, and its impact is still being my personal library'? But this is only one of the thousands felttoday, Another stimulant to this heightening of of questions to which this dictionary provides the ready interest is the emphasis that has been placed recently answers. The text speaks accurately and helpfully to all on the preservation and restoration of all aspects of the those who will seek it out and profit from the immense book, including , , and paper. Modern amount of informationitpresentsin alucidand scWntific approaches have introduced a new vocabulary, comprehensible form. much of which is not readily comprehended by those FRU DI, RICK K. 601. I,' whose interests are most intimately concerned with the Ihonwary Cotimdtant in books of all ages. l.'arly Printed Books purpose of a foreword is to inform the reader, if Library of ('ongress

vitt a a

Although numerous books, both theoretical andprac- Where a term has more than one definition, each is tical, have been published on the subject of bookbinding numbered and arranged in its descending order of sig- and the conservation of archival materials, there would nificance in relation to bookbinding. seem to be a need for one that approaches the subject The arrangement of the dictionary is letter-by-letter, by examining the meaning andusage of the many terms, rather than word-by-word, which means that, while the expressions, and names pertainingto the various sub- placement of terms such as C-stage, or m.m. system, jects. The nomenclature of bookbinding, itsoffshoots etc., will be within the body of the respective letters of and more recent progeny, has not,at least insofar as the alphabet, and not at the beginning, there should be the present have been able to determine,been no problem with locating hyphenated or one- or two- presented in a comprehensive dictionary, althoughvari- word structures, such as springback, or themore ac- ous aspects of the book and its production have been cepted spring-back, as long as the spelling of theterm is explored in dictionary form, sometimes superlatively,as known. The same is true of fore edge (correct),as in the American Paper and Association'sDictionary opposed to foreedge (sometimes used but awkward). of Paper and 's A B C for BookCollectors. (Foredge would be incorrect.) Fore edge, it should be The of this hope that it willhelp fill a noted, is only hyphenated when usedas a modifier, e.g., considerable gap in the literature of conservation,one fore-edge painting. The arrangement of the dictionary, that has for some time been all too evident. then, is: Although this dictionary is intended first and fore- most for those actively involved in one or more aspects of head head box the overall field of bookbinding and bookconservation, headband headcap including bookbinders, conservators of libraryand headbanding headed outline tool archival materials, and the like, it is perhapsno less headbolt head trim intended for those working in related fields, suchas bibliography and librarianship, where themany terms The most common (sometimes simply the mostcom- and expressions relating to the overall fieldmay be less monly encountered) form or spelling ofa term has been familiar and even more confusing. used, e.g., myrabolans, not myrabalans, gauffered edges, The compilers accept full responsibility for the selec- not gauffred, gaufre, or goffered, with the variations in tion of terms for inclusion, as wellas for the even more spelling being included with the bold-faced heading. difficult task of rejection. The definitions themselves, Where a term is also called by anothername the although herein the responsibility of thesame persons, synonym is given at the end of the definition, e.g.: were, whenever possible, drawn from the most authorita- tive sources available (as indicated by the number in abaca. Also called "manila ." parentheses at the end of a definition, which refers to adhesive binding. Also called "perfect binding"or "un- the Sources and Bibliography ) and supplemented sewn binding." by the experience of the authors. Even though the See references have been used extensively, as have bibliography and sources cited represent buta relatively see also references, which refer the reader to other terms small segment of the extensive corpus of literature in the closely, or sometimes only indirectly, related to the term field of conservation, we believe they providea reason- ably good sampling and may benefit the reader by being discussed. See also references and cross references to the terms defined in this dictionary which are cited offering an authoritative source for the terms andsome- times providing a source for further investigation. Defi- within the definition itself are set in small capitals,e.g.: nitions that do not cite a source are entirely therespon- forel. A grade of made from split sheep- sibility of the authors. skin and dressed in imitation of VELLUM.

ix

A.1 There is always the problem of the extent to which Manager, Graphic Conservation Department, R. R. one wishes to go in defining any one term. While there Donnelly & Sons, Chicago, Illinois, read and offered may be relatively little one can say, or would want to comments on an earlier version of the work. Bernard say, about a material such as Armenian bole, or a pro- Middleton, of London, bookbinder and historian of cedure such as lengthwise lettering, one could offer bookbinding and its related subjects, read and offered quite a lengthy discourse on the finer considerations of extensive comments on the , especially those break or the molecular structure of glue. But this is a terms relating to hand bookbinding and bookbinding dictionary, not an encyclopedia, a guide to the vocabu- history. John Chalmers, bibliophile and former Librarian lary of a field, not a compendium on a specific subject. of the Washington Cathedral Library, Mount Saint A number of persons, both near and far, have gener- Alban, Washington, D.C., read the final version and ously contributed both their time and expertise in wrote many pages of comments and criticism. Betty evaluating and criticizing this work. George Kelly, Re- Roberts read and reread several and proof- search Scientist, Research and Testing Office of the read stillothers. Margaret Schaffer typed the final Library's Preservation Office, read and commented on manuscript and also read the galleys and proof. the chemical terms. Harold Tribolet, retired, formerly Our deep and heartfelt thanks to all. A DICTIONARY OF DESCRIPTIVE TERMINOLOGY

5 a 3 accelerated aging test

a. The front or recto side of a leaf of a printing and bookbinding. See also: book. It is called "a" when the leaves COCKLE (1); WARPING. (17, 72, 144) rather than the pages are numbered. absorbent . A group of soft, un- The back or verso side is referred to sized papers used to soak up water and as "b." See also: FOLIATION (2). other liquids. Although not sized, the 22 pattern. The code designation for a papers may be treated with synthetic book cloth embossed with a watered as a method of enhancing their silk pattern over the T PATTERN, pro- . Absorbent papers include ducing a MoIRg EFFECT. Seealso: blotting papers, as well as the base MOIRII. BOOK CLOTH. papers usedinthe manufacture of abaca. A type of plantain or banana IMITATION LEATHER, vEGETABLE PARCH- (Musa textilis),native to the Philip- MENT PAPER, WET-STRENGTH PAPER, pine Islands. The outer sheaths of its and the like. (17, 290, 324) leaf stems yield a fiber used extensively abrasives. Substances used to wear down absorption. A term used in the adhesive in the manufacture of certain papers, or clean other substances. Abrasives to indicate the capillary or e.g.,saturatingpapers, where great may occur naturally(e.g., , cellular attraction of a surface to draw strength is required. The fibers range corundum, pumice, etc.), or be manu- off a liquid adhesive into the . in length from 3 to 12 mm, the aver- factured(e.g., silicon carbide, fused acacia. A genus of woody plants of the age being 6 mm, and vary in thickness alumina, metallicabrasives, and the family Leguminosae. The sap and pods from 0.016 to 0.032 mm, averaging like). The hardness of an abrasive is of certain species, notable Acacia ara- 0.024 mm. They taper very gradually measured by MOH'S SCALE, which is bica and A. senegal, are used in the towards the ends; the central canal is arbitrary. For numerous grinding and manufacture of GUM . Acacia large, and the fine cross-hatchings are buffering purposes, the graded grains mimoa, A. mollisima and A. catechu numerous. Also called "Manila hemp." of abrasive are bonded together in a (also called Borneo cutch) are also (17, 323) vitreous rubber or metallic to used in the of leather. See also: aberrant . A copy of a book that produce grinding wheels; for hand use, vEGETABLE TANNINS. (130, 175) has unmistakable binding and/or print- the grains are bonded to paper or cloth acacia gum. See: GUM ARABIC. ing errors and not merely simple de- by means of a suitable adhesive. acanthus. The name given a leaf of the fects. (156) absolute humidity. The actual quantity acanthus plant (Acanthus spinosus) in- abhesive. A material having the capa- of water vapor present in a given vol- troduced as ornamentation in ancient bility of resisting ADHESION. Surfaces ume of air. Absolute humidity is ex- Greek architecture.It has been ap- are coated with abhesive substances to pressedeitheringrams per cubic pliedinvarious modified formsin reduce sticking, heat sealing, and the meter, or in grams per cubic foot. See succeeding styles of architecture. In like. Silicone paper is an example of also: HUMIDITY; RELATIVE HUMIDITY. bookbinding, the acanthus ornamenta- an abhesive material. (222) absorbency. The degree of receptivity of tion is a typical impression of the fin- abrasion. The rubbing or wearing away of a material to liquids, either in liquid ishing tool cut to represent two such a material due to contact with another or gaseous form. Measures of absorb- leaves pointing in different directions. material. Some very large books, manu- ency include: 1) the time a material The acanthus decoration was also used scripts, etc., may be damaged by abra- requires to absorb a specific volume as a decorative motif by illuminators of sion because of the large surface area of of liquid; 2) the rate of rise of a liquid manuscripts,especially Carolingian the leaves rubbing over one another along a vertical strip of a material, the artists of the 9th century. (250) (particularly when the publication is end of which is immersed in the liquid; accelerated aging test. A procedure which being opened or closed), as may the 3) the total area of a specimen wetted is designed to indicate in a relatively leather coverings of books when they by the liquid within a specified time short period of time what will happen are removed from the shelves. Dust, period; and 4) the total absorptive ca- to materials, such as paper, , etc., also, is a significant cause of abrasion pacity of a material expressed as the over a period of years in storage. It of book papers and covers. quantity of liquid absorbed by a com- commonly involves heating the speci- abrasion resistance. The ability of ma- pletelysaturated specimen. Absorb- men in an oven under specified con- terials, such as paper, board, cloth, ency is of importance because paper, trolled conditions. Under ideal circum- leather, etc., to withstand the abrading for example, generally has the ability stances, the material is exposed to an action of the same or another material, to absorb or give up moisture depend- environment which increases the rate e.g., other paper, dust, a book shelf, ing upon the wetness,i.e., RELATIVE of its degradation without changing its etc. The property is usually measured HUMIDITY, of the atmosphere around nature. Itisgenerally accepted, for in terms of rate of loss of material by it, and, because the effect is not uni- example, that heating paper for three weight when abraded under specified form in all directions. Because of the days in an oven at 100 C is equiva- conditions and length of time. See latter, the MACHINE DIRECTION of the lent in its effect to approximately 25 also: RESISTANCE TO WEAR. (17, 58, paper used in producing books be- years under normal library storage 72) comes an important factorin both conditions. accordian fold 4 acid-free paper

Although sound in theory, accele- (CH3COOH), prepared by the oxida- Acids, and particularly the inorganic rated aging tests are, at this time, of tion of acetaldehyde, by oxidation of acids (because of their corrosivene3s limited usefulness. The reason is that ethyl alcohol, or by the distillation of and low volatility),are harmful to conditionsofstorage,whichvary wood. Itis used extensivelyin the paper and bookbinding materials. Their widely, have a considerable influence manufacture Of ACETATE, presence weakens the holding power on the degree of permanence; also,it and has been used for washing leather of the individual links of the cellulose is difficult to verify empirically the ac- bindings to remove grease prior to tool- chains of paper, causing brittleness; curacy of such tests except by experi- ing. Being a relatively weak organic resultsincorrosiveeffectsin some ments conducted over a number of acid, as well as volatile, it is not con- ; and weakens the fibers of leather. years. Such tests have actually been sidered to be particularly harmful to The source of acids in archival ma- made, although to a limited extent. It paper or leather, and is to be preferred terials may be intrinsic or extrinsic. isknown,forexample,thatthe to ordinary vinegar in preparing leather They may be present in the materials strength of paper tends to diminish in or book edges for tooling or , used in the manufacture of paper, ad- storage, and experiments have indi- as vinegar is likely to contain traces of hesives, leather, etc., and may be left cated that the de- sulfuric acid. (198) in intentionally, e.g., alum-rosin ; clines to a significantly greater extent acetic ether.See:ETHYL ACETATE. they may be introduced during manu- than such other properties as tensile, acetone. A colorless, volatile, flammable facture and not sufficiently removed, or tearing, strength; consequently, fold- ketone (CH3COCH3), having a pleas- e g., acids used in clearing and/or dye- ing endurance tests conducted subse- ing odor, that occurs in pyroligneous ing leather; or they may gain access quent to accelerated aging may well acid and can be prepared by dehydro- during storage,e.g.,sulfuric acid in provide a good indication of a general genation of isopropyl alcohol, by bac- paper or leather, resulting from the loss of strength. In addition, as to the terial fermentation of corn mash, and atmospheric pollutant, sulfur dioxide rateof deterioration, the effect of heat by other means.Itis miscible with (S00).See also:ACID GASES. (72, 195, is very much like that of natural aging water, alcohol and ether. Acetone is 198, 306) underaverageconditions; therefore, it effective as a solvent in removing pres- acid dyes. A very large class of dyes is probably reasonable to assume that sure sensitive tape from paper because containing acidic groups, such as the heat affords a practical means of ac- it dissolves not only the adhesive but sodiumsaltsofsulfonicacidsor complishing accelerated aging. (18, 62, (in some cases) the tape itself. Its use phenolic groups. They are more solu- 144) islimited, however, because ofits ble and have less tinctorial value than accordian fold. See: CONCERTINA FOLD. tendency to dissolve ink, and its highly BASIC DYES but they also have greater accordian-pleatedfold. A methodof flammable nature. In leather manufac- light fastness. See; FAST COLORS. They folding endpapers so thatthepleat ture, it is used as a solvent for finishes. do not form lakes with tannin. Acid provides a hinge at the inner joint of It is also used to prepare other solv- dyes are used in dyeing leather, paper, the cover. The pleat also provides for ents, such as methyl isobutyl ketone etc., and their particular value lies in expansion to allow the covers to swing and mesityl alcohol, and as a solvent their ability to produce brighter, more open freely and not exert strain on the for paints, varnishes, lacquers, and cel- uniform colors. They are normally ap- first and last leaves of the book. In luloseacetate.Acetone decomposes plied from an acid dye liquor (acetic, certaincases,however,itcanalso photochemicallytoproduceethane, formic,orsulfuricacid); however, create a sharp, knife-like fold which, carbon monoxide and small amounts unless applied from a neutral or only if wide enough, may cause a brittle leaf of diacetyl and methane. (173, 306) slightly acid dyebath, i.e., pH of 6.0 to to bend sharply and crack at that point. acid. A substance capable of forming 7.0, their use is likely to result in acid (81) hydrogen ions when dissolved in water. degradation of the material dyed.See account book. See: BLANKBOOK. The majority of inorganic acids may also:FUGITIVE COLORS; LAKE. (17, 67, account-book binding.See:BLANKBOOK be regarded as compounds of an acidic 72, 363) BINDING. oxide and water; where the oxide in- acid-freeleather.Ostensibly,leather account-.See:LEDGER PAPER. volved is that of a metal, it may ex- manufactured without the use of acids, acetate. The salt or ester of ACETIC ACID. hibitamphotericcharacteristics,i.e., but interpreted by most producers to See also:CALCIUM ACETATE, CELLU- act sometimes as an acid and some- mean leather from whichas much LOSE ACETATE, POLYVINYL ACETATE. times as a base, depending upon the acid as possible has been removed. acetateenvelopes. Envelopes, usually other materials present. Typical or- The removal of acid used in producing made of transparent cellulose acetate, ganic acids contain the COOH group, leather is a costly and time-consuming used for the temporary protection of but otheracidgroupings,e.g.,the process, and calls for repeated washing documents, letters, prints, photographs, sulfonicSO3H, give acidic properties of the stock. Tanning agents which maps, etc. They are superior to paper to organic compounds. contain a relatively high amount of envelopesinthattheysubstantially Aqueous solutions of adds have a salts of weak acids, of which MYRA- reduce the danger of acidtransfer. sharp taste, turn litmus red, liberate BOLANSisone, are saidtoprotect Theiruse, however,isdeclining in CO2, form a metallic carbonate, and leather against acids used in manu- favor of envelopes.See also: evolve hydrogen in reaction with cer- facture or those absorbed from the CELLULOSEACETATE; POLYESTER tain metals, e.g., iron. atmosphere. (175, 306) FIBERS. The 'strength' of an acid is measured acid-freepaper. Inprinciple,papers acetate ink. An ink with special adhering by the value of its dissociation con- which contain no free acid and have qualities intended for or print- stant,a strong acid such as hydro- a pH value of 7.0 or greater. In prac- ing on such materials as films and chloric being substantially fully ionized tice,papermakers considera paper acetates. in solution, and a weak acid such as having a pH value of 6.0 or greater aceticacid. A volatile,colorlessacid formic being predominantly un-ionized. to be acid free. Such papers may he add gases 5 adhesive binding

produced from cottonfibers,rags, books and , may contain adhesion. A termindicatingthat two esparto, jute, chemical wood pulps, or acid and transfer it to otherwise low- surfaces are held together by inter- virtually any other fiber, with special acid or acid-free paper of thetext. facialforces, which may consistof precautions being taken during manu- Also called "acid transfer." See also: valenceforces(chemicaladhesion), facture to eliminate any active acid BARRIER SHEE r. interlockingaction(mechanical ad- that might be presentinthe paper add size. A ROSIN SIZE that contains an hesion), VAN DER WAALS FORCES, Or pulp. However free of acid the paper appreciable part of unsaponified but combinations thereof. (309) may be immediately after manufacture, emulsified free rosin. If, when diluted, adhesive. A generaltermfor any of the presence of residual chlorine from the rosin size produces a milky emul- several substances capable of bonding bleachingoperations, aluminum sul- sion, it is then known as "white size." materials to each other by chemical or fate(alum)from sizing,or sulfur acid transfer. See: ACID MIGRATION. mechanical action, or both, and which dioxide in the atmosphere, may lead acid wash. A solution consiAing of hy- may be activated by water, nonaque- to the formation of hydrochloric or drochloric acid diluted in water. At ous solvents, pressure, heat, cold, or sulfuric acid unless the paper has been one time it was used to clean grease other means. buffered with a substance capable of and other foreign material from the Adhesives may be classified by tem- neutralizing acids. See also: ALKALINE edges of hooks prior to gilding. It was perature(hot-,cold-,intermediate-, RESERVE. (144, 198) usually applied after the initial scrap- room-temperaturesetting,etc.);by acid gases. Gases which may form de- ing and sanding, and before the final type of solvent (water, alcohol, etc.); structive acids in paper, board, leather, light sanding. by type of application (brush, roller, and other book materials. Sulfur di- acme seal. The now obsolete name given spray,etc.);or by origin(animal, oxide (SO2), present in the airas a a , dyed and having a plain, vegetable, or synthetic). They may be pollutant, is one such gas; it can form dull finish and a natural grain. further classifiedas natural or syn- highly destructive sulfuric acid acrylicresin(acryliccoating;acrylic thetic(). The natural adhesives (H2SO4), either by oxidizing to form plastic). A thermoplastic resin prepared are primarily of animal or vegetable sulfur trioxide (S03), which in the by polymerizing acrylic acid (C3H40o) origin (sodium silicate (water glass) presenceof watervapor,istrans- or methacrylic acid (C4HG00), or a de- being virtually the only inorganic nat- formed into H0SO4, or by combining rivative of either, especially an ester, ural product important as an adhe- directly with water vapor to form sul- e.g.,methyl methacrylate. One such sive) and include animal glue, casein, furous acid (H.,S03), which, while a acrylicresin,polymethylacrylate, blood albumen (which is unimportant weak aciditself,reacts with oxygen which is a tough rubbery material, is as an adhesive in archival work), and to form H2SO4. It is suspected that the used, usually as manufactured in emul- vegetableadhesives.Thesynthetic rate of conversion is increased by the sion form, for and leather fin- resinadhesivesincludethethermo- presence in the paper of metallic cata- ishes, lacquers, and pressure sensitive pl^.:tic resins, the thermosetting resins, lysts, such as iron or , which may adhesives, and as a mixture with clay and the elastomeric adhesives. enter the paper during manufacture, to coat papers used in high gloss p.int- The adhesives used in archival work but as yet there is no proof of this. ing. (42, 364) must exhibit three properties: 1) they (193, 265) additives. 1. Substances added in small must wet the surfaces to be joined but acidity. A condition or statein which proportionstoproductstoimprove not so much as to cause the adhered the concentration of hydrogen ions in their performance, or to enhance their materials to cockle; 2) they must have an aqueous solution exceeds that of attractiveness or value. Additives are sufficient flexibility so as not to crack hydroxyl ions. Acidity is probably the also used to prevent bacterial action, when the joint is flexed; and 3) they most important single factor affecting drying, staling, as well as to inhibit cor- must be strong but not as strong as the the permanence of archival materials. rosion, oxidation, decomposition, etc. materials they bond, so that stress to Acidity alone, however, does not neces- 2. All of the nonfibrous raw materials the point of failure of the joint will sarily connote destructiveness; the na- used in making paper. They may be not damage the archival material but ture of the acid, i.e., the strength of added at any point during the paper- will result only in the failure of the itsacidic properties,isof more im- making process or after the paper has adhesive. See also: ALBUMEN; CASEIN; portance than its quantity; e.g., a rela- been manufactured. Treatment of the CEMENT (2); COLD GLUE; DEXTRIN; tively small amount of sulfuric acid entire sheet (internal treatment) entails FISH GLUE; FLEXIBLE GLUE; GLAIR; may have a greater destructive effect mixing the additives with the paper GLUCOSE-GLYCOL PASTE; GLUE; HARD than a larger quantity of lactic acid. pulp, in which case they are known as GLUE; HOT-MELT ADHESIVE; ISINGLASS; Because of this, both pH value and wet-end additives. If only the surface MICROENCAPSULATED ADHESIVE; MUCI- titration are necessary to achieve ade- of the sheet is to be treated, the addi- LAGE; PADDING COMPOUND; PASTE; quate evaluationofthepotentially tives are applied directly to the surface POLYVINYL ACETATE; RABBIT SKIN destructive effect of an acid. See also: of the paper, and are known as ex- GLUE; RESINOUS ADHESIVES; RICE GLUE; HYDROGEN-ION CONCENTRATION. (144) ternal additives. Paper additives are RUBBER ADHESIVES; VEGETABLE GLUE; acid migration. The transfer of acid from used to color and size paper, control WOOD PASTE. (48, 89, 102, 149, 186, a material containing aci0 to one con- pH, improve physical properties, and 198, 222, 309) taining less or no acid. This may occur increase wet strength. They are also adhesive binding. A method of securing either when the two materials are in used as defoamers, dispersants, plasti- loose leaves into a solid text block by contact with each other, or by vapor cizers,preservatives,retentionaids, means of an adhesive rather than by transfer from one material to nearby and the like. (58, 98) means of , stitching, etc. In gen- materials not actually in contact with adherend. A material that is held to an- eral, there are four techniques of ad- it. Boards, endpapers, and protective other material by means of an AD- hesive binding in use today: 1) PAD- tissues, as well as the paper covers of HESIVE. DING (2); 2) manual adhesive binding, adhesive binding machine 6 agar

which is still practiced by hand binders CHINE; ONE-SHOT METHOD; TWO-SHOT notices,simultaneouspublicationin and some library binders; 3)semi- METHOD. (15, 16, 81, 89, 294, 320) two or more places, or for early cata- automatic adhesive binding, which is adhesive binding machine. A machine loging. Advance sheets for review or the usual method in library binderies that applies an adhesive, and some- early cataloging are usually in unbound and some binderies; times a cloth lining, to the edges of gatherings.2. Generally, sheets of a and 4) fully automatic adhesive bind- the leaves or sections of a book. Ad- publication e.g., some serial publica- ing, which is the usual method in edi- hesivebindingmachinesmaybe tions or other documents, printed sepa- tion binding. classified as:1) intermittent, with all rately for use before they are issued Two basic methods are used to se- operations being performed while the collectively. In a stricter sense these cure the leaves in adhesive binding: book is stopped; and 2) continuous, are more appropriately called "pre- 1) application of the adhesive to the withalloperations being performed prints." (69, 140) edges of the collected and clamped while the book is in motion. In adr-,- advertisements bound-in. A statement to leaves, without fanning, in which case tion, they may be classified as: 1) in- theeffectthatadvertisements have there is little if any penetration of ad- line, with the books being carried in been included in the binding of a vol- hesive between the sheets; and 2) fan- one direction at a constant elevation; ume bound from parts or issues, or in ning the clamped leaves, either in one 2) rotary or circular, with books being the rebinding of a volume, usually a direction or both (in the latter case carried in a circular path; and 3) oval, serial publication. Some fibraries in- 1800), so that the adhesive is applied with books being carried over an ex- struct the binder to remove all adver- a slight distance onto the leaves, thus tended oval path. There are variations tisements not containing subject matter forming a more secure bond. A HOT- within all of these categories. Adhesive (on either side of the leaf), or those MELT ADHESIVE is usually employed in bindingmachinesusedinlibrary that are paginated separately. This is thefirstmethod,whereasacold binderies are generally in-line machines done to save shelf space; itis ques- RESINOUS ADHESIVE,e.g.,POLYVINYL which operate intermittantly or con- tionable, however, whcther sufficient ACETATE, istypicalinthelatter tinuously, with the books being inserted space is saved to warrant the effort. method. It is not unusual, however, to and removed from the machine by In addition, the presence of advertise- use a combination of the two adhesives. hand. ments can be of value to scholars and The resinous adhesives are generally Adhesive binding machines date back is of value to collectors. used alone, but hot melts may be used to the latter part of the 19th century, aerosol. A dispersion in which a material in eithera one-shot operation(hot but their greatest period of develop- melt alone), or in a two-shot applica- is dissolved or suspended in a liquid ment was following World War II. which volatilizesto produce afine tion (a primer of polyvinyl adhesive, (89, 320) spray when pressure is released. The followed by the hot melt,in which adhesive dope. A chemical solvent used spray carries the active material. In casetheleavesareusually fanned as a wash for the turn-in areas of imi- archival work, aerosols are used for upon application of the cold adhesive). tation-leather book cloths and other Adhesive binding generally results in dispersing deacidification solutions; in impervious materials to facilitate ad- this case the propellant, which must be a book that opens easily and lies flat. hesion of the board papers. It has very inert and nonflammable, is frequently It is also a relatively economical form limited use today. of binding, especially when long runs a chlorofluorocarbon, e.g.,freon 12, adhesive tape. A gummed glas- dichlorodifluoromethane (CCI2F2). of the same edition are being bound. sine paper, generally of BASIS WEIGHT The method lends itself well to the of 25 pounds (24 X 36 500). It is against the grain. Paper which has been mass production of low-priced paper- sometimes used in mending the leaves folded at right angles to the direction backs, catalogs, telephone directories, of books, as well as for hinges, for in which the fibers tend to lie, i.e., the and the like. It is also greater which purposes it is supplied in rolls MACHINE DIRECTION. A well-produced use in library binding for books that of narrow width. Its use for the repair book always has the grain or machine are not in sections and have relatively of archival materialsisnot recom- direction running from head to tail so narrow margins, as well as for rebind- mended, as it has a tendency to stain that the back or binding fold of the ing books printed on paper thatis the paper and isdifficult to remove. paper is not against the grain. Correct deteriorating. Adhesive binding, how- See also: HEAT-SET TISSUE. (17) grain direction means that the leaves ever, is not a satisfactory method of adhesive paper. A paper coated with a of the book will be more inclined to lie binding coated and similar papers. water-activated, heat-activated, or pres- flat when the book is open. The term Adhesive binding, in one form or sure-activated adhesive. See: GUMMED appliesspecificallyto machine-made another, is not a new concept; in fact, PAPER; HEAT-SET TISSUE; PRESSURE- paper, as HANDMADE PAPER has no defi- it dates back to the 1830s when Wil- SENSITIVE TAPE; SE-LIN LABELING SYS- nite grain direction. liam Hancock inv 'tiltedthe so-called TEM. agalite. A natural fibrous form of talc, CAOUTCHOUC BINE ING in England. adjusted. A MARELING SIZE that has been gray in color and consisting principally Overall,however, even thoughthe put into proper condition to receive ofhydrated magnesiumsilicate.It method is very praci ical for books that the colors by the addition of OX-GALL, gives paper a greasy or soapy feel, and are to receive heavuse over a rela- so that when the colors are dropped enables it to take a high finish. It is tively short period, ( telephone di- on they will spread evenly. The cor- little used today. (62) rectories),adhesivebindingisgen- rect amount of gall will cause a drop agar(agar-agar). The polysaccharides erally considered to be inferior to the of marbling color to expand toits agarose and agropectin, occurring as sewn binding and its permanence has maximum without thinning. See also: cell-wallconstituents of red marine yet to be demonstrated. Also called MARBLING. (335) algae(genera Gelidium,Gracilaria, "perfect binding," or "unsewn bind- advance sheets. 1. A copy of a book, in etc.), from which it is extracted by hot ing." See also: ADHESIVE BINDING MA- sheets or gatherings, for preliminary water. It is available as a dry powder, 7 alder

flakes, or strips. Agar is the metallic is in equilibrium with the atmospheric he may have cut his own finishing (usually calcium)salt of a sulfuric conditionsto whichitisexposed. tools, possible in imitation of Scottish acid ester of a complex polysaccharide Leather is considered to be air dry designs. (45, 200, 347) of gelactose, but its exact structure is when its moisture content is approxi- ajoure bindings. A style of bookbinding not understood. It dissolves in hot wa- mately 14% of the weight of the executed during the last third of the ter and, upon cooling, sets to a jelly leather. Their different moisture con- 15th century in Venice. Ajoure bind- at concentrations as low as 0.5%. It tents in the air dry state makes it diffi- ings were embellished with pierced or isused asagelling and stabilizing cult to regulate the conditions of stor- translucent patterns, in a manner re- agent, as a misciformis sizing for si1k, age of a leather bound book. (17, 363) ferred to as "letting in the daylight." and as an adhesive emulsifying agent. airmail paper. A lightweight paper made They generally featured openwork de- (72) for printing publications such as news- signs of foliage, angels' heads, satyr- agate (agate burnisher). A natural stone, papers that are to be sent by airmail. masks, birds, baskets of fruits,etc. consisting of a form of silica, similar It usually contains fillers to improve (156, 347) to chalcedony, with colored bands of opacity, and isgenerally made in a lacathedral. See: ARCHITECTURAL purple or brown, shaped and polished basis weight of 10 pounds (17 X 22 STYLE. for use as a burnishing tool, particu- 500). Airmail paper isalso used at album. 1. A book of envelopes or jack- larly in edge gilding. See also: BUR- times for guarding sections, mending ets,usually with a decorative cover NISHER (2). tears,etc. For these purposes,itis and often with descriptive notes. It is agatine. A marble pattern consisting of preferable that the paper have a high intended to contain phonograph rec- black in large spots, green in rivers, rag content and an alkaline reserve of ords. 2. A book of blank leaves de- scarlet in sprinkles, and blue in small about 3%. (17, 58) signedtocontainwrittenrecords, spots. Various designs are made from airpermeability. Thepropertywhich clippings, postage stamps, and the like. thi3 combination of colors. (152) permits the passage of air when a dif- albumen. A class of protein found in "agenda" format. A narrow book for- ference in pressure exists across the egg whites. A mixture of egg white and , i.e., one where the height of the boundaries of the material. Air per- vinegar (oLAta)is used in book fin- book is disproportionately greater than meability is one indication of a sub- ishing; its purpose is to secure the gold itswidth,tothe..3xtent of 3:1or stance'sporosity.Seealso: VAPOR leaf to the covering material prior to greater, as compared with the usual PERMEABILITY. (17) the impression of the heated tool. Al- ratio of 2:1 or 3:2. The "agenda" for- Aitken, Robert (1735-1802). One of a bumen is also used as an edhesive in mat proportions are similar to those group of Scottish craftsmeninthe edge gilding. of the consular diptych. The diptych bookbinding trade who immigrated to album paper. A type of cover paper was often adapted in the America in the years immediately be- usedfor photograph albums.Itis for use as covers of ceremonial lists fore the Revolutionary War. Aitken manufactured in gray and black in and processional music, which had to appeared in Philadelphia in 1769, as basisweights of 50 to 80 pounds be written in a format to conform with a bookseller. He returned to Scotland (20 x 26 500). A basic require- these constrictions; the "agenda" pos- that same year, apparently to learn ment of this paper is that it not cockle sibly stems from that format. (347) bookbinding, because upon his return when wetted with adhesives, while an- aggressive tack. See: DRY TACK. two years later he advertised himself as other essential requirement isthatit aging. A general term describing the nat- both bookbinder and bookseller. After containno impuritieswhichmight ural degradation of paper, adhesives, 1773 he began to print books as well, alter or damage the photographs. (17, leather, and other archival materials, and, in1782, published the "Aitken 324) while in storage. With some , Bible," the first complete Bible in Eng- alchemic gold. A gold ink composition aging denotes oxidation by exposure lishto be published on the North developed early in the 20th century to air. Aging is greatly influenced by American continent. as a substitute for imitation gold leaf. the environment in which the materials Aitken produced hundreds of book- It was said to be "free from acid," as arestored.Seealso:ACCELERATED bindings ranging in style from paper wellasnon-tarnishing.Itsprincipal AGING TEST; ENvIRONMENT; PERMA- wrappers (both blue and marbled) to virtue seems to have been that it elimi- NENT MATERIALS; PERMANENT PAPER; more or less richly gilt leather bind- nated the necessity of sizing, laying-on, YELLOWING. ings. His work included blue paper and rubbing off. (164, 264) air-dried. Handmade- and the better ma- boards, raised cords as well asflat aldehyde tanning. Essentially a formalde- chine-made papers dried in a current spines, both plain and marbled end- hyde tannage. Several aldehydes react of air, either at normal or elevated papers, and bindings infull - or with protein to prevent putrefac- temperatures,asdistinguishedfrom sheepskin with red title labels and gilt tion, but only FORMALDEHYDE has been paper which is dried by contact with bandsacrossthespines.Although used to any extent in the manufacture heated rolls. This method cf drying Aitkenproducedscoresof"plain" of leather. Formaldehyde is soluble in reducesstresses,includingDRIED-1N bindings, he was also capable of a water, the resultant solution generally STRAIN, which are imposed on paper binding style that was rich and lux- being known as FORMALIN. Aldehyde while drying, because the sheet isal- urious inits gold tooling, especially tanning is used principally in tanning lowed to dry, and therefore , at for American bookbinding of that time. white, washable , usually sheep- a slower rate. See also: ANISOTROPIC He was,ingeneral, an imaginative or lambskins, with the grain split or BEHAVIOR. (98) and diverse bookbinder, although he shaved off. Such leathers are seldom air dry. A condition usually associated was not known for his exactness and used in bookbinding. See also: ZIRCO- withpaper(and paperpulp)and polish in finishing, nor was he particu- NIUM TANNING. (291, 306, 363) leather. Paper is said to be air dry when larly artistic. Because Aitkin was also alder (bark). The bark of the common its moisture content (usually 3 to 9%) an engraver, it has been suggested that alder tree (Alnus glutinosa), used to Aldine leaves 8 alpha protein

some extent in small tanneries in south- ored tan liquor which before fermen- sectionthat is, from kettle stitch to eastern Europe and Turkey for tanning tation colors leather slightly to a light kettle stitch of each successive section, leather. The bark contains 9 to 16% reddish yellow; however, after fermen- one complete length of thread for each or more tannin, while the dried fruit tation it produces a very bright color. section."Allalong"istraditionally yields about 16% tannin. The use of Itis usually blended with other tan- associated with thebest method of alder barkisnot extensivemainly nins. Although algarobillais one of sewing a book by hand, although books because, when used alone, it imparts the pyrogallol class of tannins, it pene- were sewn TWO-ON and even THREE-ON an objectionable reddish-brown color trates the hide substance very rapidly, when the sections were very thin or to the leather, and also tends to make and has a fairly low natural pH and when an economical method was re- the leather brittle. Other alder barks salts content and a relatively high acids quired. The term is also used, some- have also been used in tanning, includ- content. The tannin content of the pods what incorrectly, to describe machine ing Alnus incana(inEurope and is generally in the range of 45-50%. book sewing when each section is sewn North America), A. nepalesis and A. See also: VEGETABLE TANNINS. (175) with the full number of threads. Also nitida (in ), and A. cordata (in alkali. A substance which has the proper- called "one on" and "one sheet on." Italy). (175) ties of a base, especially a hydroxide (236, 335) Aldine leaves. Small finishing stamps bear- or carbonate of an alkali metal. e.g., alligator grained leather. A grain effect ing a leaf and stem .It was calcium. Since all of these substances, embossed on various types of leathers, employed by thebinders of Aldus when dissolved, increase the hydroxyl such as calf, sheep, or cow, in imitation Manutius, and also extensively by 19th ion concentration, the term alkaliis of the genuine reptilian leather. See: century bookbinders on monastic bind- synonymous with base. An aqueous ALLIGATOR LEATHER. ings. See also: ALDINE (ITALIAN) STYLE. alkaline solution is one with a pH value alligatorleather. A leatherproduced (334) greater than 7.0. Alkalies are used in from the skin of any member of the Aldiw (Italian) style. A style of book- conservation work principally in ad- reptilian order Crocodilla. Generally, binding originated by hesives, and in deac;difying and buffer- only the belly area of the animal is but not restricted to the books printed ing paper. See also: ALKALINE RESERVE; used, the heavily scaled back being too by Aldus or his family. Aldine bind- HYDROGEN-ION CONCENTRATION. course and horny. The beauty of alli- ings, which were produced during the alkaline buffer. See: ALKALINE RESERVE. ttator leather stems in part from the late15th and early16thcenturies, alkaline filler. A FILLER (2) used in the factthatthescales have anatural were characterized by the use of brown manufacture of paper. Calcium carbo- "enamel," which, originally, was usu- or red morocco; by solid-faced orna- nate (CaCO3) is the most commonly ally destroyed by crude tanning meth- ments with no shading (which were used alkaline filler. ods. Later it was preserved, and even similar to those used in printing the alkaline process. A method of treating enhanced, by "" the skin with text); and by title or author in simple fibrous raw materials with alkaline so- heated metal plates which gave itits panels in the center of the upper cover, lutions to liberate fibers or to purify high glaze. Alligator leatherisvery which could be read while the book paper pulps. Lime, sodium carbonate, durable and also very expensive. This lay on a shelf or table. Early examples sodium hydroxide, sodium sulfate, and term is largely confined to the United of the Aldine style were tooled in blind sodium sulfide are used in this process, States; in Europe it is generally called with an outer frame and a center orna- with sodium hydroxide being used most "crocodile leather." (351, 363) ment. often. It may be used in both the sul- 211 on. See: ALL ALONG. PossiblybecauseoftheGreek fate and sulfite processes. (17, 144) all-ortr style.1. A style of finishing in binders Aldus employed, as well as the alkaline reserve. A buffer, or reserve, of which the entire cover, as distinct from fact that gold tooling (probably) origi- an alkaline substance added to a paper the corners, center or , is deco- nated in the Near East, Aldine tools for the purpose of counteracting any rated by a single motif, multiple motifs, display definite signs of Eastern origin. acid which may be introduced into it or a decorative roll. 2. Any pattern in Early Italian bindings convey a con- subsequent to DEACIDIFICATION. Soaking a book cloth which runs both across sistent feeling of the shape and propor- paper in a solution of calcium bicarbo- and down the roll. (130, 155) tion of the book, which is demonstrated nate or magnesium bicarbonate adds a alpha cellulose. That part of a cellulosic by: 1) the use of border and panel as small amount of calcium or magnesium material that is insoluble in a 17.5% schemes of design; 2) a remarkable carbonate which neutralizes any acid solution of sodium hydroxide at 20° C. sense of the value accorded ornamen- present and also provides a reserve to under specified conditions. While alpha tation; 3)the areas of leatherleft counteract acid which may enter the cellulose consists principally of cellu- undecorated; and 4)restraint in the paper at some future time. (The bi- lose, it does include other components decorative detail with the result that it carbonates are converted to the carbo- that are insoluble under the test condi- was always in proper subordination to nates during the drying of the paper, tions. Because the permanence of paper the overall effect of the embellishment. with the liberation of carbon dioxide.) depends to some extent on the absence See PLATE iv. (124, 172, 280, 334) The treatment is effective only as long of non-cellulosic impurities, the deter- algarobilla. The dry pods of a shrub as free alkali remains. Papers which mination of true cellulose (alpha cellu- nativetoChile(Caesalpiniabrevi- are to remain acid free for long periods lose) gives an indication of the stability folia), from which a tanninisex- of time, e.g., 500 years, should have of the paper, and therefore its perma- tracted. As a tanning material, algaro- approximately 3% precipiated carbo- nence. See also: BETA CELLULOSE; CEL- billasomewhatresembles DIW-DIVI; nate by weight of paper. (198) LULOSE; GAMMA CELLULOSE. (17, 72, however, itisless prone to discolor all along (all across; all on). A method of 144) the leather. It also produces a better sewing a book, usually by hand and alpha grass. See: ESPARTO (GRASS). weight and imparts greater firmness to generally on cords or tapes. The thread alpha protein. A soy bean protein used leather. Algarobilla gives a light-col- goes "all along," inside the fold of the in the manufacture of adhesives that alum 9 aniline ink

are to be combined with casein glues, most powerful of all acids in its effect amyl acetate. A colorless, volatile liquid or used for coating paper. on cellulose. ester (C7H1402), that is very slightly alum. A salt used in and in Alum is sometimes used in solution soluble in water, but miscible in alcohol the TAWING of skins. True (potash) to wash the leaves of books; in the past and ether. It is used as a solvent for alum is chemically a double salt of it was added to paste to act as a pre- CELLULOSE ACETATE. Although at one aluminum, or potassium aluminum sul- servative, or as a hardener to render time it was believed to have a preserva- fate (K2SO4 A10(SO4)3 241120). the dry paste less water soluble. It is tive effect when applied to leather, it The papermaker's alum in use today also used at times as a mordant for is much too volatile to have afforded is not true alum, but either aluminum marblingcolors.Seealso: ALUM lasting protection, even if initially effec- sulfate (AL (SO4) 3 141100), WATER. (32, 43, 72, 195, 236) tive. (AL(SO4)3 18H.,0), or a mixture aluminum leaf. A bright leaf orfoil anchoring. See: TYING DOWN. See also: of these hydrates, and is manufactured made of aluminum and often substi- HEADBAND. by treatingpulverized bauxite with tutedforsilverin blocking edition anglos. An imitationRUSSIA LEATHER sulfuric acid. It is soluble in water, and, bindings. While it tarnishes less rapidly made in Great Britain from cowhide. while slightly alkaline in the dry form, than silver, it lacks the appearance of See also: AMERICAN RUSSIA. (343) it is decidedly acidic when dissolved in richness and depth of silver leaf. It is anhydrous. A term normally used with water. Alum has two major functions also less expensive. (83, 140) reference to the chemical salts and in papermaking: 1) to control pH; and aluminum sulfate. A salt of aluminum solvents,lanolin,etc., meaning that 2) because of its floculating ability, to (A1.(SO4)3), occurring naturallyin they are free of water. retain other additivesin the paper, considerablequantitiesinalumstone anhydrous lanolin. See LANOLIN. notably the sizing agent. (alumite) and feather alum. It is manu- aniline.An aromaticprimaryamine ROSIN isa basic material used in f-ictured by treating bauxite with 80% (C6H5NH2). It is a derivative of am- sizing paper today. As a sizing agent it sulfuric acid at 110° C., the resulting monia in which one hydrogen atom is impartswater(ink)resistanceto solution being purified, concentrated, replaced by the phenyl group.Itis paper; however, in order for the rosin and allowed to solidify. See also: ALUM. manufactured by the reduction of nitro- to be able to impart water resistance it alum-size bath. A size bath consisting of benzene with iron filings and either must be rendered insoluble, which is ALUM dissolved in water and used by hydrochloric acid or ferrous chloride, the function if alum. some restorers to remove coffee, tea, and subsequent steam distillation after Although the full role of alum in the blood and some ink stains from paper. the addition of lime. Aniline is an oily, sizing of paper is not completely under- (335) colorless, toxic liquid, which darkens stood, one of its functions is to make alum-tawed skin (alum "tanning"; alum- upon exposure to air. It is soluble in rosin come out of solution(precipi- tawed "leather"). See: TAWING. water, alcohol, and ether, and forms a tate) while it is in close contact with alum water. num dissolved in water and number of salts. It is the base from the fibers of the paper-making slurry. used to sponge paper and the edges of which a great number of intermediates The fibers are thus coated and impreg- books before laying on the marbling for dyes are prepared, including di- nated with a solid and water-resistant colors. The alum acts as a binding methylaniline and diethylaniline, which mixture of rosin and what is probably medium, attracting and securing the inturnyield many so-calledBASIC a compound of rosin and aluminum ox-gall and colors to the paper. It also DYES, such as methyl violet, methyline oxide. acts as a mordant and is also useful in blue and green. (195) Although the excessive use of alum counteracting excessive gall. (161, 264, aniline dyed. A leather that has been dyed is considered detrimental to the perma- 335) by immersion in a dyebath and has not nence of paper, the papermaker tends American leather. An obsolete term for received any coating or pigment finish. to overdose with alum rather than un- one of the varieties of enameled cloth (61) derdose, so as to avoid soft-sizing. In made to imitate leather. See also: IMI- analine dyes. A class of synthetic, organic addition, alum is considered by some TATION LEATHER. (256) dyes originally obtained from analine papermakers to be a panacea for other American marble. A drawn marble pattern (coal tars), which were, in fact, the first troubles, such as frothing, sticking of usually used on the edges of synthetic dyes. Today the term is used the paper web to the wet presses of the bindings, and consisting of black, blue with reference to any synthetic organic papermaking machine, etc. Overdosing surrounding the black, yellow on the dyesandpigments,regardlessof with alum leads to excessive acidity blue,and red on theyellow. The source, in contrast to animal or vege- and, under certain circumstances, may marble is drawn in the same manner table coloring materials, natural earth leadtoseveredeterioration of the as the cOmb NONPAREIL MARBLE, with pigments, and synthetic inorganic pig- paper. While alum is not a particularly an additional drawing of the comb the ments. Analine dyes are classified ac- strong acid, in the presence of certain width of the trough. (264, 339) cording to their degree of brightness, other substances it can assume a greater American Russia. An imitation RUSSIA or their light fastness. Basic dyes are strength.Chlorides,which may be LEATHER produced from cowhide Of known for their extreme brightness, as present in the paper as a result of thehideoftheAmerican buffalo well as for their lack of COLOR FAST- bleaching processes, or natural to the (bison). It is usually a straight-grained NESS. Aniline dyes are used to impart water itself, can be particularly harm- leather. Also called "Russia cowhide." color to paper, cloth, leather, etc. Also ful. Excessive alum, in the form of amorphous. A term applied to adhesives, called "coal tar dyes." See also: ACID aluminumsulfate,may reactwith with reference to their non-crystalline DYES; BASIC DYES; DIRECT DYES; DYE; chlorides present to form aluminum structure. LAKE. (17, 164, 343) chloride (AIC13), which in the pres- amylaceous. Pertaining to, or of the na- aniline ink. An inexpensive volatile print- ence of moisture and heat, will form tureof STARCH;starchy.Seealso: ing ink consisting of a dyestuff dissolved hydrochloric acid (HCI)one of the PASTE. in a methylated spirit and bound with 10 antique book paper

a resin. It is considered to be a very 1.5 to 4.0 times that in the machine sueded on the flesh side and finished to fast dry ing ink. Aniline inks are con- direction. resemble antelope leather. (61) siderably inferiorin permanence to Paper exhibits anisotropic behavior antiblocking agent. A substance used in many other types of ink, and are also basically because of two factors: 1) as either a coating mixture or as an over- subject to smudging by water. Although stated above, the orientation of the coating to prevent one sheet of paper all colors are available, they are lacking fibers in the machine direction causes from adhering to another, or to any in COLOR FASTNESS. (144) them, and therefore the sheet, to ex- other object, within a specified range of aniline leather. A hide or skin that has pand or contract preferentially in the temperature and humidity. Antiblock- been tanned with a vegetable material cross direction. In fact, at one time it ing agents are usually waxes or syn- and then colored either by immersion was thought that this was the major thetic polymers;alightdusting of in a dyebath or by staining, and has not reasonforanisotropicbehaviorin talcum powder is sometimes used for been coated or pigmented. Leather so paper; 2) more recently, however, al- the same purpose. colored has a depth of coloring said to though orientation of the fibers is still antichlor. A substance used in removing be superiortopigmentcoloration. thought to play a role in the behavior, the remaining traces of free chlorine or (351) the major reason is considered to be hypochlorite not removed from a paper aniline stained. A leather that has been built-in strain, also known as dried-in pulp by washing. Typical antichlors in- colored by brushing, padding, or spray- strain. The matting of fibers formed clude sodium bisulfite (NaHS03) and ing, but which has not received any from the wet slurry on the wire of the sodiumthiosulfite(Na2S203).The coating or pigmented finish. machine moves into the dry end of the antichlor is usually added to the pulp animal glue. See: GLUE. papermaking machine andisdried stock near the end of the bleaching animals-in-foliage panel. A form of dec- rapidly in the drier sections. Because it stage, and is allowed to react until no oration consisting of a PANEL (1) di- is wet, the web will contract during blue coloration is obtained with a po- vided in half vertically, each half con- drying. Because the tension of the web tassium-starch indicator. This removes taining curving foliage with an animal is in the plane of the machine direction, the last traces of hypochlorous acid, within each curve. (250) the paper is able to contract consider- hypochlorite ion, and free chlorine. The animal size. See: SIZE. (2, 3) ably in the cross direction but not in reaction products are then washed out. animal sized. A paper sized with a gelatin the machine direction, which results in Antichlors are seldom used in multi- or glue (and sometimes alum, which a built- or dried-in strain. The drying stage bleaching operations, as they are acts as an insolubilizer). The gelatin or is actually so rapid that relaxation of considered to be wasteful of bleaching glue-and-alum solution acts as a pre- the strain is impossible on the machine, agents. (72) servative and enhances the water re- nor does it occur after the web of paper antifoam agents. See: DEFOAMERS. sistance of the paper. Generally, only leaves the machine as the dried paper antimony. A metalloid element (Sb) that high-grade papers, bonds, ledg- does not have sufficient plasticity for is usually a metallic silvery white, but ers, and handmade paper are animal this to happen. Consequently, a ma- is also found in the black amorphous sized. See also: SURFACED SIZED; TUB chine-madepaperhasaninherent form. It has been used since at least SIZED. (17, 82, 316) dried-in strain. Actually, there is some the late 17th century to blacken the dried-in strain in the cross direction edgesofbooks, anionic (substances). Substances, suchas especiallyBibles, dyes, tannins, oils, etc., that dissolve in also, as the of the machine reduce prayer books, and the like. See also: water and ionize so that the character- shrinkage somewhat in that direction. BLACK EDGES. istic ion (dye, tannin, oil, etc.) is the This characteristic results in an aniso- antique. A term used to describe:1) anion and carries a negative charge. tropic sheet, one which will expand BLIND TOOLING; 2) a marble pattern They tend to precipitate with CATIONIC more in the cross direction than in the (See: ANTIQUE MARBLE); 3) a form of machine direction when exposed to an edge decoration (See: ANTIQUE EDGES); (positive charge) SUBSTANCES. (98, 306 ) increase in ill( relative humidity of the 4)leather finished with an old or surrounding atmosphere. If,at some aniseed. The seed of anise (Pimpinella natural grain; and 5) a paper with a time in the future, the paper is wetted natural rough surface or finish. See: anisum), which produces a pungent oil in water, the dried-in strains will be re- once used as a preservative for paste. ANTIQUE BOOK PAPER. leased and, if the sheet is then allowed antique binding. 1. A modern binding anisotropic behavior. A material,e.g., to dry freely and without restraint, its executed in the style of some earlier paper, that exhibits different properties anisotropiccharacteristicswillbe period, but generally with no intent to when tested along axes of different di- largely lost. Anisotropic characteristics deceive.Seealso: CONTEMPORARY rection. Because paper is hygroscopic, in paper are of great importance in BINDING (2). 2. See: ECCLESIASTICAL a change in the dimension of its fibers printing, especially in printing proc- BINDINGS. takes place when the relative humidity esses which involve wetting the paper. antique book paper. A book paper gen- around it changes; the change is trans- annatto. A yellowish-re(' coloring material erally produced in the United States mitted to the entire sheet, with there- obtained from the pulp surrounding the from bleached chemical wood pulp sult that its length and width are in- seeds of the annatto tree (Bixa orel- with a large amount of short-fibered creased or decreased. As the majority lana), and sometimes used in coloring pulp and given a soft, relatively rough of the fibers in machine-made paper leather and cloth. It is soluble in both finish. In Great Britain it is produced lie in the direction of the moving wire alcohol and oil. Its lack of COLOR FAST- largely from ESPARTO (GRASS) pulp. of the papermaking machine, i.e., the NESS makes it unsuitable for archival Antique book paper varies from light- MACHINE DIRECTION, by far the greater use. weight to relatively heavy weight; 60- expansion or contraction of dimension antelope-finish . A fine, soft leather pound, basis weight antique bulks ap- of such a paper is in the CROSS DIREC- having a velvety, lustrous nap. It is pro- proximately 330 pages to the inch. TION, sometimes being on the order of duced from lamb-, goat-, or , Many books, and particularly , antique cover paper 11 armorial bearings

are printed on this type of paper, espe- When the applique was not very large, cially those containing only textual in the 8th century. Arabic numerals are a variation was to make a series of commonly used for paginating the text matter and/or bold line . An- small stitches along all edges, masking of a hook, although Roman numerals tique papers generally are not suitable the stitches with an overlaid gold cord. are still often used for preliminary and for fine line drawings or half-tone illus- ( 1 1 1 ) trations. (17, 72) end matter, despite the obvious affecta- apron. 1. The lower cloth on a ruling ma- tion. (156) antique cover paper. A cover paper with chine that carries the ruled sheets from an antique finish. archil. A dye obtained from certain lich- the lower cords to the lay-boy orre- ens of the genera Roccella and Leca- antique edges (antique style). A further ceiving box. 2. The extra amount of embellishment of the edges of a book nora by means of fermentation. Its hue unprinted paper left to serveas the varies from moderate redtodark following gilding. It involves applying binding edge of a leaf that folds out. gold of a different hue, e.g., purplish-red, depending on whether the I EMON See also: FULL APRON. dye bath is acid or alkaline. It was used gold, over the gilded edge, with the de- aqua regia. A mixture of nitric acid in the past in the manufacture of purple sign being worked into the overlaid (HNO3) and hydrochloric acid (HC1), gold; the untouched (new) gold then marbling color. It has only moderate in a solution of one part of the former COLOR FASTNESS. (97, 152) is rubbed off. Sometimes the effect of to three parts of the latter. Aqua regia architectural motif. A form of decoration antique edges is produced without the was used in making so-called "killed consisting of a pattern of straight lines designs if the original gold is left un- spirits," largely in the 18thcentury, to burnished, or is burnished and then running almost the length of the cover impart a wine-like tint to red marbling and connected alternately at head and washed with water. The technique is color. The "killed spirits"were pro- seldom tail by heavier horizontal lines. (130) employedtoday.Seealso: duced by adding a block of tin to the architectural style. A 16th century style GAUFFFRED LOGES. (241, 343) acid solution, which resulted inthe of finishing consisting of architectural antiquegrain. A surfacepattern on formation of tin chloride (HNO3 leather motifsporticoes, moldings, columns, consistingofmarkingsor Sn = SnC1 + NO0 + H00). pediments, arches, and the like. The creases, usually irregular, in which the (152) central feature was a pair of columns hollows or valleys are given a con- aqueous.Containingwater,orwater supporting an arch under which there trasting color to produce a two-tone or based. Adhesive systems striias starch, was a panel for lettering of the title. two-color effect. The creases are pro- dextrin,natural gums, animalglue, duced either by EMBOSSING (1) This style, of which only a relatively or etc., as well as some inks, certain de- few examples have survived, generally BOARDING (1 ). (61) acidification systems, leather tannins, antique marble. A series of marble emphasized straight and curved fillets, pat- bleaching solutions, and the like that interspaced with shaped tools. The 19th terns executed by dropping red, black use water as the carrier are aqueous and yellow, or red, blue and yellow, century French bookbinder JOSEPH on systems. THOUVENIN revived the style as "a la the marbling size, and rakingonce up . A relatively old form of book and down; this is followed by cathedral." See: CATHEDRAL BINDINGS. an ap- decoration, revived by French gilders The contents of the hooks hound in the plication of green coloring and, if the andreintroducedintoEnglandin pattern is to he an antique spot, pink or architectural style seldom related to about 1829. It consists of interlaced architecture. (140, 347) green spots. Finally, there is a sprin- lines and convoluted curves arranged kling of white. Other colors Argentina, Conradus de. See: CONRADUS are also in a more or less geometricalpattern. DE ARGENTINA used. The antique marble is produced The name derives from the fact that it Armenian bole. A friable, earthy clay, ina variety of patterns,including was brought to its highest perfection by spots, straight, and curled. (369) usually of a red color due to thepres- Near Eastern artists. The term is also ence of iron oxide;it consists essen- antique tooling. See: BLIND TOOLING. used to describe a style of ornamenta- a pattern. A cloth pattern with a long, tially of hydrous silicates of aluminum tioninrelief, consisting of fanciful and (sometimes) magnesium. It is used narrow grain. Cf: J PATTERN; L PAT- human or animal figures combined TERN. as a coloring material and is also ap- with floral forms. Arabseque isalso plied to the edges of books during gild- apparent density. The weight per unit sometimes inappropriately applied to volume of a sheet of paper. It is calcu- ing. In the latter use it serves bothto the embossed designs on bookcovers. provide a base for the gold leaf andto lated by dividing the BASIS WEIGHT of (181, 241, 342) the paper by its caliper. The value impart to it a greater depth and luster. so arabesque plates. Solid plates cut, When mixed with paste anda small derived depends upon the definition of usually in intaglio, with a design and a ream, i.e., whether 480, 500, 516, amount of oil,it may be used to imprinted on a leather cover bymeans sprinkle the edges of books. (335) etc., sheets. See also: DENSITY; SPECIFIC of a blocking press, or large flyem- GRAVITY. (17) arming press. A small handBLOCKING bossing press. (152, 181) PRESS, at one time used for impressing apparent specific gravity. The weight of a arabic gum. See: GUM ARABIC. ARMORIAL BEARINGS on the covers of given volume of leather divided by the arabic numerals. The numerical symbols weight of an equal volume of water, book., but now used for blocking short 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,as disting- runs of edition bindings, as well as in making no allowance for voidsor air uished from the Roman I, X, L, etc., spaces in the volume of leather meas- miscellaneous binding work. (203, 278) so called because of their origin in the armorial bearings. Solid plates of brass, ured. See also: SPECIFIC GRAVITY. (363) Near East. They have been used in the applique work. A design on EMBROIDERED engraved in relief with family heraldic foliation of books since the late 15th insignia, and used to block insigniaon BINDINGS consisting of spirals in gold century.Arabic numeralsfirstap- the covers of books belonging to promi- and silver which, when flattened, give peared in European manuscripts in the nent and/or royal families. Armorial the appearance of a series of rings. 12th century, although they probably They were sometimes used as bearings have been seldom used in the a border. came to the Near East by way of India decoration of since the armorial bindings 12 automatic stitcher-feeder machine

middle of tit:: 19th century. (128, 262, paper to crack when folded. Cf: IMITA- field of knowledge. Atlases are some- 347) ItION ART PAPER. times difficult to bind because of nar- armorialbindings(armorialpanels). 2. A fancy figured paper used for row margins, stiff and/or heavy paper, Leather or cloth bindings embossed endpapers in edition binding. (17, 58, or foldouts. with armorialseals or plaques, fre- 182, 287) atlas . The largest of the , with quently ina panel,or embroidered art parchment. A thick, heavy, hard-sized dimensions of approximately 25 or 26 bindings in which the arms were raised paper manufactured from fiber x 17 inches. See also: ELEPHANT FOLIO. in relief and worked in thread. (69, and/or chemical wood pulps. To some atlas paper. A large size of drawing paper 342) extent it has the natural appearance of similar to map paper except that it is art binding. A term sometimes used to PARCHMENT. It is used for documents, usually coated and made in a basis describe a book that has been bound or in other applications where a heavy weight that is heavier so as to minimize by a master craftsman inthe "best paper is required; in the latter half of SHOW THROUGH. Originally, the term manner," using only the finest mater- the 19th century it was used as a cover referred to a paper suitable for printing ials available. The term is applied only paper. See also: DOCUMENT PARCH- maps and atlases; today, however, MAP to books bound by hand and covered MENT (1). (17) PAPERisthe more commonly used in leather or vellum, and usually only art vellum. A relatively thin book cloth, term. (17) to those bindings that are unique or at which, although impregnated, has only attaching boards. The process of gluing least distinctive in design. (373) moderately good wearing qualities. It the tapes and spine-lining material to art canvas. A relatively heavy book cloth, is a smooth cloth with a textured pat- the inside of single boards or between usually impregnated, which may be a tern printed on a white base fabric. Art SPLIT BOARDS, or the LACING-IN Of the cords through holes drilled or punched single or double vvAtu, and is sometimes were used extensively for the sidesofhalf- and quarter-bindings. in boards. In general, itis the binding lined with to prevent pene- process of joining the boards to the tration of adhesives. It has been used (105, 205) asbestine. A mineral compound of almost text block; A is not to be confused with for covering large, heavy books, as well cAstNo-IN. In edition and library bind- as library bindings. (264) pure fibrous magnesium silicate, which possesses physicalcharacteristicsbe- ing, the term has no meaning other artificial gold. See: IMITATION GOLD. tween those of talc and asbestos. It is than gluing the boards to the covering artificial grain. A grain pattern embossed used as a LOADING (1) agent in paper material, either by hand or by means of or rolled into a leather, usually in an manufacture, particularly for blotting a CASE-MAKING MACHINE. (236, 335) attempt to imitate a superior type of papers and board. (17) attapulgite clay. A fibrous claylike mater- leather. See also: BASIL; GRAINED UP. ash (ash content). The inorganic residue ial,essentially( (OH.,) 4 MOO" (335) remaining after a sample of paper is (OH ).,) 4H.,0), rich in magnesium, . See: IMITATION LEATHER. burned, driving off combustible and and used as a filling material in paper- art . A relatively heavy cloth of a volatile compounds. The "ash content" making, usually in coatings for repro- generally flat and uneven color, and is defined as the percentage the residue duction papers. The clay is also called usually impregnated. When art is of the original weight of the sample. -fuller's earth," from its ability to re- are produced with a design, the pat- (17, 98) move dirt and grease from , a terns are usually florid and ornate. "as is." See: BIND "AS IS." process called "fulling." (17) (204) assembly time. A term used in the adhes- aureole. A light or luminous area sur- art paper. 1. A good quality paper used ive industry to indicate the time lapse rounding the blind impressions of a by artists and conservators. It has a between the application of an adhesive ; it is caused by the leather highly finished, smooth surface pro- and the application of heat, pressure, or not being wetted all over, but only on duced by supercalendering or by coat- both. See also: CLOSED ASSEMBLY TIME; the areas being tooled. ing.Its principal characteristicisits OPEN ASSEMBLY TIME. (309) author's binding. A copy of a book to be close formation. In Great Britain, "art assiette. A compound consisting of bole, presented by an author. Such bindings paper" is considered to be a body paper bloodstone, and gelena (lead sulfide, were normally produced in a superior or board coated with a mineral sub- PbS), used to prepare the edges of manner; gilt vellum bindings were com- stance, such as barium sulfate or china books for gilding. See also: GLAIR. mon in the 16th century, and panelled clay, which gives it a smoothness that A-stage. An initial stage in the reaction of morocco in the 17th and 18th. The is suitable for the printing of fine half- some thermosetting resins wherein the term has little meaning today. (69) tones,and thelike.Inthe United resin continues to be soluble and fus- automatic clamping. A term used with States,art paperis genera- made ible.A-stage" is characterized by an reference to the clamp of a cutting ma- from chemical wood pulp,vhilein initial lowering of viscosity. Also called chine, which descends upon any height Great Britain the bestart paperis "Resol." See also: B-STAGE; C-STAGE. pile to be cut and exerts approximately made from 90 to 95% esparto and 5 to (309) the same clamping pressureforall 10% chemical wood pulp. Esparto is asterisk. The symbol (*) used to mark a heights and types of material. (145) good because it is less likely to stretch corrected page (CANCEL) supplied to automatic spacing. The BACK GAUGE of a and has a natural affinity for coating the binder to replace an incorrect leaf cutting machine that moves forward a materials, which givesita superior (CANCELLAND). pre-determined distance following each surface for halftone reproductions. atlas. A volume consisting of maps, with cut. It is most effective in cutting long- Heavily coated art papers are prone or without descriptive material, which run, large-sized sheets requiring many tc cracking, flaking, and pulling away is issued to supplement or accompany cuts. (320) of the coating. The binding of books a text, or is issued independently. An automatic stitcher-feeder machine. A produced on such papers can be diffi- "atlas" is also defined as a volume of bookbinding machine that gathers and cult because of the tendency of the plates, , etc., illustrating any inserts a number of folded sheets and aux petits fers 13 azured tool

stitches them through the folds. The continent. The bark usually has a tan- ideal tannin for the preparation of half- sheets are either fed by operators to nin content of approximately 18%, the carrier saddle at various stations, tanned skins or kips that are to be along with about 10% soluble non- shipped elsewhere for finishing.See of are fed automatically. As each folio tans. Avaram has long been used ex- is carried along the saddle, another is also: VEGETABLE TANNINS. (175) tensively by Indian tanners, and it is awl. A pointed tool used in bookbinding fed over it at each station until thesec- because of it that the extensive Madras for piercing holes in paper for fold tion or book is complete. When thesec- export trade in light-tanned or half- tion reaches the end of the machine it sewing, side sewing, or for punching tanned leathers was established. Al- holes in boards preparatory to lacing- is automatically knocked even, saddle though WATTLE (BAIUC)has largely in. Awls are available with different stitched and delivered to a receiving superseded it in the tannage of points and shapes for different uses; a trough. (179) hides, avaram is still in great demand aUX petits fers. See: PETITS FERS. straight, relatively blunt awl is used for for the tannage of goat- and sheep- punching holesin available chlorine. The amount of chlor- hoards,whilea skins, i.e., "East India kips." Avaram curved and relatively sharp one is used ine (usually about 35% ) in the bleach- is self-bating and penetrates the skin ing powder used by papermakers in in sewing. (183) rapidly,producingapalecolored, azured tool. A finishing tool with closely bleaching paper pulp, that can bere- tough, elastic leather. Used alone, the spacedparallellinescutdiagonally lied upon for bleaching purposes. (197) leather is likely to develop a reddish across its surfaceso called from the avaram (bark). A tree (Cassia auriculata) color when exposed to sunlight; how- use of heraldic illustrations of thin found in India, the bark of which is ever completion of the tannage with horizontal lines to indicate the color one of the most important sources of MYRABOLANS prevents this from hap- indigenous tannin of the Indian Sub- blue. The tool appears to have been in- pening. Avaram is considered to be an troduced in France in about 1545. (59) b.a. 14 back folds a

b.a. An obsolete designation for a pattern backed. 1. A book that has had its spine in book cloth resembling linen . shaped to create the shoulders to re- babul (bark). A tree (Acacia arabica) ceive the boards. See: BACKING. 2. A found in India and Africa, the bark of damaged leaf of a book, either text or which yields one of the most important plate, that has been "laid down on" or indigenous tanning materialsinthe iered to silk, paper, linen, plastic Northern areas of India and Pakistan. t.nu, adhesive film, etc., for reinforce- The average tannin content of the bark ment. See also: . 3.See: RE- is about 12%, along with about 8% BACKED. soluble non-tans. Babul is one of the back edge. The left-hand or gutter of a condensed class of tannins, and, when RECTO ( I ), corresponding to the right- used alone, tans very slowly and pro- a a hand edge of a VERSO (1). The op- duces a leather that is somewhat harsh posite edge is the back edge of publi- and dark in color, but firm and dur- cations that read from right to left. able.Itisusually used along with opened; otherwise, a strain would oc- backed-filled finish. A type of finish used MYRABOLANS to improve color and re- cur because of the additional thickness on cotton cloth. The filling material is duce other undesirable characteristics of the leather caused by the turn-ins. applied to the "back" side of the cloth resulting from the use of babul alone. Back cornering also facilitates setting to supply the required body and finish, In recent years the use of babul bark and shaping the headcaps. and does not appear on the "top" or hasdeclinedinfavorof WATTLE Back cornering was at first done on exposed side. (269) (BARK). See also: VEGETABLE TANNINS. the inside of the boards, allowing for backer (backing machine). A hand- or (175) "laced-in" headband cores or tabs. By power-operatedmachineusedfor baby calf. A CALFSKIN leather produced the late Middle Ages, back cornering BACKING books. The backer stems from from small, lightweight skins of was a standard procedure for books the days when a book was rounded by that have not been weaned. It has a with folded-down or stubbed cores. hand and then placed in the backer to smooth or fine-boarded grain surface The modern method of corner;ng on quickly ferm the shoulders forthe and is free of any artificial surface pat- the outside surfaces of the boards facil- boards. Today, in both edition and tern. The finish is glossy and is pro- itates the current method of headcap- librarybinding,themost common duced by ironing, glazing, or plating. ping and probably stems from the 18th method is to round and back books in Baby calf is fairly tough leather with a century. (237, 335) two consecutive operations in a ROUND- dermal network of fine, even texture. back cover. 1. See: LOWER COVER. 2. The ING AND BACKING MACHINE. Unusually See also: VEAL. (61) outside surface of the lower cover of a large books, which will not fitin a back. 1. See: SPINE. 2. To shape a ridge publication, such as a periodical issue. machine, are generally backed by hand or shoulder on the sides of the spine of The term is used here with reference to or in a hand-operated backer. See also: a text block after sewing. See: BACKING. publications that contain printed or JOB BACKER. (256, 264) 3. The main portion of a HIDE (1), illustrative matter on the outside of the back folds. The folds of the sections of a obtained by cutting off both sides of cover. book, through which they are sewn, or the belly and the head. 4. Boards com- posed of plies of different stock, the side of superior quality being called BACK CORNERING the "top" and the other side the "back." back boarding. The process of BOARDING (1) leather with the flesh side in for the sole purpose of softening it. backbone. The SPINE (2) of a book. back cornering. The process in bookbind- ing of cutting away a small triangular inside 11110" piece of the head and tail edges of the back corner boards of a book at the joints. The cut is made at two angles, one to the board edge and the other to the thickness of outside the board. The amount removed and back corner the angle of the cut are determined by the width of the leather turn-ins and their thickness where they meet the edge of the board. The purpose of back cornering is to relieve the strain on the joints of the book when the covers are

k back gauge 15 back saw

otherwise fastened to one another. In cave in (See: START); 3) helps impart used at times to line the spines of larger context, they are sometimes referred more flexibility to the book by creating books. A more common technique to- to simply as folds. See also: SECTION a slight crease in each leaf near the day isto use two linings, usually a (1). (237) spine, to the extent that backing has first lining of cloth over which is ap- back gauge. A movable device on a cut- something of a scoring effect which plied a paper lining See also: SPINE ting machine against which the pile of makes the book easier to open and LINING FABRIC. (27, 196) paper or board is placed when measur- facilitatesturningtheleaves(See: backing . A heavy iron hammer ing the line at which the material is to scoaE); and 4) makes a better joint with a short handle, heavy face, and be cut. for the cover, one which opens easier wedge-shaped head, used in rounding back gluing machine. An edition binding and is stronger, since the point of strain and backing books.Itissometimes machine used to glue up the spines of during opening is spread over a strip referred to as a "collet hammer" or books and automatically convey them of the covering material, e.g., a FRENCH "bumping hammer" See also: BACKING; along a drying section which quickly JOINT. Furthermore, the angle of con- ROUNDING AND BACKING MACHINE. sets and hardens the glue. The maxi- formation of the spine caused by back- (335) mum size book that can usually be ing probably provides for better vertical backing iron. See: BACK-MOLDING IRON. processed in such a machine is 12 by 9 standing support of the text block. backing paper. See: INLAY (1 ); SPINE inches, Pnd the minimum 3 by 2 inches, Backing may be accomplished by LINING PAPER. with a thickness up to 21/2inches. A hand with the use of a BACKING HAM- backing press. A vertically oriented press fully automatic back gluing machine MER or,in the case of edition and with steel plates brought together by can process up to 2,400 books an hour. library binding, by means of a ROUND- means of a single screw. The top edge See also: TRIPLE LINING AND HEAD- ING AND BACKING MACHINE. In some of each plate is beveled to an angle of BANDING MACHINE. (343) casese.g., very large booksbacking approximately 80°, so that when the backing. The process of shaping a ridge may be done in a BACKER as a separate plates are closed on the text block, the or shoulder on each side of the spine operation. pressservesthe same functionas of a text block prior to the application Some authorities consider the back- BACKING BOARDS. (25) of the spine lining material. The backs ing of a book to be the most important back lining. See: SPINE LINING. of the sewn sections or leaves are bent and difficult of all the processes in the back margin. The INNER MARGIN, or the over from the center to the left and craft of hand bookbinding, and poor or margin between the point where the right until shoulders are formed against inadequate backing is certainly one of sections or leaves are joined and the which the boards will fit. The dimen- the major sources of problems in the edge of the print. In books that read sion of the shoulders is determined by processes of edition and library book- from left to rightitis the left-hand the thickness of the boards to be used, binding. margin of a printed recto, correspond- which, in turn, is determined by the Although books dating from at least ing to the right-hand margin of the size and bulk of the book. In addition as early as the beginning of the second verso. Alsocalled"gutter margin." to providing for the boards, backing half of the 15th century were often (102) also:1) allows for the swell of the rounded, backing for the purpose of back mark. The disfiguringridgeor spine caused by the thread used in forming shoulders seems not to have "mark" in a sheet of paper which has sewing, or by excessive guarding; 2) been an established procedure before been dried on a pole or line. Also helps maintain the round of the book 1500, or perhaps somewhat later. It is called "pole mark," or "stick mark." by the fact that each leaf from the uncertain when bookbinders discovered back-molding iron. An implement, usu- center outward is folded over the leaf that rounding and backing was a su- ally made of iron, approximately 20 next to it so that it cannot work its way periorbookbindingtechnique.The inches long, 6 inches wide and 21/2 forward and thus cause the book to swellcausedby sewing sometimes inches thick, and used in forming the causes books to assume a slight round with no effort on the part of the book- BACKING binder, and, over a long period of time, BACK-MOLDING IRON the pressure of the boards perhaps even results in the effect of backing. (209, 236, 335, 339) backing boards. The boards used in hand binding to assist in BACKING a book. Backing boards are generally made of a very hard wood and are frequently faced with strips of metal. The upper edge of the board is beveled at an angle of approximately 80, over which the outer sections or leaves on both sides of the text block are bent. The board is also thicker at this edge than at the lower, so that when it is placed on the side of the text block near the spine millboard for the SPRING-BACK Of and secured in the LYING PRESS, the book. The :ron is made with several forceofthepressisconcentrated grooves of various widths on both sides. nearest the spine. (92, 183, 335) (264) backing flannel. A heavy cloth material back saw. A short, fine-toothed hand saw backstrip 16 bands

stiffened by means of a metal rib along made of leather. See also: GIRDLE BOOK. fromitisrelatively soft and bulky, its back edge. It is used to saw-in the (104) with a high tearing resistance but rela- kettle kerfs and the grooves for sawn-in Bagguley, Thomas. An English book- tively low burst and tensile strength. cords. Although almost any small saw binder, of Newcastle under Lyme, who, Although writing and printing papers will suffice in lieu of the back saw, it inthelate19th century, deviseda areproduced from100% bamboo has the advantages of being short, stiff method of tooling vellum and similar pulp, superior results are realized when and easy to hold. It must be very sharp materials in permanent colors. Bag- the bamboo is blended with other pulps to avoid tearing the paper. Also called guley limited his technique to vellum, that increase burst and tensile strength. "tenon saw." as he considered leather to be too lack- Bamboo is also the traditional mate- backstrip. I. A term used incorrectly with ing in purity of color to offer a satis- rial used in making molds and other reference to the SPINE of a book. See factory ground for unrestricted color devices usedinthe manufacture of also: REBACKED. 2. See: GUARD (1). 3. decoration.Because of thedelicate handmade paper. (17, 143) See: INLAY (1). nature of his work, he further restricted band board. A wooden block about 9 by back to fore edge. The distance from the his technique to vellum doublures. See 12 inches, 6 inches thick at the head spine to the fore edge of a book. The also: "SUTHERLAND'. DECORATION. (94) and 5at the foot, on which head- term is probably used mainly to indi- handers in library binderies used to lay cate that a book is of uniform thickness their zinc boards with dampened head- across its width,i.e.,that the boards BAND NIPPERS bands, prior to attaching them to the are parallel. The implicationisthat text blocks. (256). there has been proper compensation band driver. A blunt, chisel-shaped tool, for any swelling of the spine caused by usually made of wood, and used in sewing or excessive guarding. See also: hand binding to attain uniformity and BACKING; CONVEX COVERS. (335) also to correct any irregularities of the bacterial resistance. The resistance of a bands on which the book is sewn. See material to the growth of bacteria and/ also: BAND NIPPF.RS. (94, 261) or mold. This property represents one banding. See: RANDS (2). of the more significant advantages of band nippers Pincers which have broad, resinous adhesives over the conven- flatjaws, used for straightening the tional adhesives. (258) bands of a book sewn on raised cords, bacterichle. A material used in small con- and also for nipping up the leather centrations, e.g., 0.1% by weight of the during covering. The better nippers are material being treated, to kill, or inhibit nickleplated or made of to the growth of, bacteria that may occur avoid discoloring the leather, and are in liquid or solid adhesives, or may equipped with a spring to keep the jaws attack carbohydrate or proteinaceous open when in use. (161) adhesive films. (222) band pallet. A type of Pm LET (1) used to impress a complete design on the Badier, Florimond (fl 1645-1660). A Pari- spine of a book between the raised sian bookbinder, apprenticed to Jean bands. Sometimescalleda"butter- Thomas in 1630, who became a master stamp." (97) bookbinder in 1645. His name is as- band pattern. A device, generally made socialed with theartof POINTILLE of brass, with holes drilled indicating (1) and sumptuous doublures. Badier the position of the bands of books to also used a distinctive finishing stamp be sewn on raised cords. (264) cut in the shape of a man's head. Only bands. 1. The cords or thongs on which three signed bindings of his are known; the sections of books are sewn. They many bindings attributed to him may may he raised for FLEXIBLE SEWING, he the work of imitators. At one time, sawn-in for REcEssED-coRD sewing, or Badier was considered by some authori- FI EXIBLE NOT TO SHOW. Early bands ties to Fe the legendary LE GASCON; ( or thongs,as they were originally this was largely because of his pointille called) were made of leather, which style. (73, 347) ball tool. A small finishing tool cut in the was not very durahle, or tawed skin, pulp. A paper pulp obtained shape of a ball. which was very durable. Leather thongs from the crushed stalks of sugar cane bamboo. A giant grass of the tribe Bain- began to be replaced by cords during (usually considered to be Saccharwn husseae, located in the tropical areas the latter years of the 16th century. officinarum), following the extraction of the Eastern Hemisphere, and culti- Hemp and linen cords are commonly of the juices. The pulp is prepared for vated successfully in some parts of the used today. use hy mechanical disintegrationin southern United States. The fibers are Sewing on raised bands came into water, either with or without chemical not unlike those of straw in many use in England sometime betwe,..,1 Lie treatment. The pulp produced is coarse, aspects. Bamboo fibers have an average 12th and 13th centuries, although the bulky, and of low strength, and is used length of 2.4mm., which puts them technique had been introducedinto principallyinthemanufactureof between the softwood and hardwood northern Europe centuries earlier. The boards. (72) fibers.Itis used extensively in India first raised band sewing was on double bag binding. An additional protective cov- for the manufacture of all grades of bands, ranging in number from two to ering provided a book. Itisusually chemical pulp and paper. Paper made five. The hands were positioned so that bands frayed 17 barium hydroxide

there was a greater space between the length between the bands. The top and in limp vellum binding, in which case bands themselves than between the top bottom bands are each 2/19 from the the bands were sewn through the sec- and bottom hands and the head and head and tail edges of the cover, respec- tions of the book. tail of the book. Single hands began to tively. All three bands extend into the The use of hands as a technique for replace double ones and, by the mid- cover 2/5 of its width. Double bands, strengthening bindings has been prac- 16th century, had become predominant inadditiontoprovidingadditional ticed since at least the 14th century. inthemoreeconomicalstylesof strength across the spine, also provide At one time they were commonly re- binding. an additional thickness of leather along ferred to as "Russia bands" because of 2.Stripsofreinforcingmaterial the edges of the boards. These hands the use of in making (usually leather) which extend across aremorecomplicatedthansingle them. the spine, or spring-back, and onto the bands, as the hands at head and tail 3. Lines in gold or in blind impressed sides of a book, usually a stationery are equal to 5/19 of the length of the by means of a pallet across the spine binding. The hands may he placed on cover, with 2 of the 5/19 hands extend- of a book sewn on recessed cords in the hoards before covering, in which ing the full width of the cover, while the same positions as would he occu- case they are called "underhands," or the other 3/19 extend only the cus- pied by the raised bands used in flexible sewing. 4. False bands attached to a HOI LOW BACK hook or a TIGHT BACK hook sewn on recessed cords, in imita- tion of flexible sewing. 5. The strips of brass attached to the tail edges of the covers of large blankbooks, for the purpose of protecting the leather cov- ering from wear. 6. A form of decora- tion consisting of wide parallel lines withornamentsimpressedbetween them. (83, 123, 152, 236, 241, 256, 264, 343) bands frayed. The cords (hands) of a bookwhichhavebeenseparated (frayed out)into individual threads. The frayed out cords, which extend out from the text block 1to 21/2inches, are glued between split hoards, and are frayed out so as to avoid bulging of the boards. Cf: LACING-IN. (25) bandstick.I. A hard, smooth length of wood, frequently beechwood, used in pressing and smoothing the leather over the bands on the spine. The bandstick may consist of a narrow strip having a smooth sharpened edge on one side, over the covering material, where they tomary 2/5. The center band also ex- in which case it is used to work one are known as "overhands." Bands are tends 2/5 the width. With double band side of a band at a time, or it may be used to strengthen large blankbooks there is no space between the bands grooved so that the stick fits over the in the area of the joints, and to provide and the head and tail of the boards. hand. The latter type may have grad- additional leather atareas of heavy A variation of the double band is the uated grooves on both sides to accomo- surface abrasion. They also protect, to double straight. In this technique, the date hands of varying widths.2. A some extent, the lettering on the spine length of the cover is divided into five tapering length of hard, smooth wood, of the book. When overbands are used, equal segments. Each band is 1/5 the used in pressing and smoothing the they are generally decorated in some length of the cover. The head and tail leather on the spine between the raised manner, usually in the design of their bands extend thefull width of the bands. Also called "rubbing-up stick." lacing or riveting; this step is needed cover, while the middle one extends the (232, 264) because adhesive alone will not keep customary 2/5. barium carbonate. A white compound the overbands attached to the book. In Bands were also used to some extent (BaCO3), insoluble in water. The use the case of underbands, the decoration of BARIUM HYDROXIDE in the deacidifi- of the covering leather is often concen- cation of paper results in the formation trated around the area of the bands. BANDSTICKS of barium carbonate as the alkaline The size and position of the bands, reserve in the paper, due to the action both over and under, are based on of atmospheric carbon dioxide on the definite proportions of the cover of the barium hydroxide. book. Bands may be single, double, or barium hydroxide. A white, toxic alkali double straight. When single hands are (Ba(OH)2), formed by the reaction of used, the cover is divided into 19 equal barium monoxide with water, or by the parts. Each band is 3/19 the length of action of sodium hydroxide on soluble the cover, and there are 3/19 the cover barium salts.Itis one of the agents barium sulfate 18 basil

used in the non-aqueous deacidifica- and buffered, strengthened (if neces- tion of subsequent and often more ex- tion of paper. sary), and reinserted in the volume. pensive coatings. barium sulfate. A white, soluble, heavy See also: ACID MIGRATION. (173) base fabric. In general, the basic cloth compound (BaSO4),obtainedeither bar roll. A ROLL (1) cut with a series of used for covering books, regardless of from the natural mineral barytes, or parallel raised lines at right angles to the final form it may take, i.e., coated, by chemical treatment of barium with its sides. impregnated, or filled. Base cloths are sulfuric acid, and used both as a filler Barrow, William J.(1904-1967). An usually of cotton, thoroughly cleaned, and coating pigment in paper manu- American document restorer and for- free from waste, evenly woven, with facture, particularly photographic pa- mer director of the W. J. Barrow Re- the warp yarns woven in pairs. (209) pers. Itis used alone or in combina- search Laboratory, locatedinRich- basic dyes. A class of dyes, usually syn- tion with other pigments. It has good mond, Virginia, at one time considered thetic, that act as bases, and which affinity for ink, a bright color, and by many authorities to be the are actually ANILINE DYES. Their color good opacity.It does not, however, independent scientificcenter forre- base is not water soluble but can be produce a high finish. Itis also used search into paper and the deterioration made so by converting the base into to form the pigment LITHOPONE. The of paper. Barrow developed a process a salt. The basic dyes, while possessing artificial compound is also known as for laminating brittle documents be- great tinctorial strength and brightness, "blanc fixe." (72) tween tissue and cellulose acetate film, are not generally light-fast; therefore bark. 1. The outer surfaces of trees and as well as a highly effective means of their use inthe dyeing of archival other woody plants. The inner side of deacidifying paper. He demonstrated materials is largely restricted to those the bark of certain trees, e.g., birch, the actual facts of paper stability over materials notrequiringthischarac- has been used in the past as a surface the past four centuries and developed teristic. Basic dyes were at one time for writing. Bark books were rather a durable paper having a high degree usedextensivelyindyeingleather, common in Central Asia and the Far of permanence. Barrow was also in- mainly because they are capable of East until comparatively recent times. volvedinotherinvestigationscon- combiningdirectlywithvegetable- Bark isvulnerable to dampness and nected with paper and ink for a period tanned leather without the use of a curlinginclimates of highrelative of more than 30 years, and was prob- mordant. See also: DYE. (17, 62, 72) humidity and to cracking in dry areas. ably the most important single contri- basic size. The sheet size of paper, de- 2. See: VEGETABLE TANNINS. (102) butor to the knowledge of methods of termined by tradecustom,asthat barkometer. An instrument used to meas- achieving permanence and durability agreed upon for calculating the BASIS ure the weight of a vegetable tannin of archival materials. The Barrow lab- WEIGHT of the paper. Initially it was liquor per unit volume. oratory ceased operations in 1977. See the size which could be printed, folded bark skiver. A vegetable(oakbark) also: DEACIDIFICATION; LAMINATION. (7) and trimmed with the greatest eco- tanned sheepskin, light tan in color, Bartlett, Roger (c 1633-1712). An Eng- nomy. Some of the specifications for and used extensively in the 19th cen- lish bookbinder who was apprenticed basic sizes in use in the United States tury as a covering material for to Samuel Satterthwaite in 1647, and are: books. It is not considered to be either was set up inhis own business in permanent or durable. See also: LAW London in 1654. He subsequently left Type of (in inches) SHEEP. London and set up business in Oxford Bible 25 X 38 bark tanned. A general term used to some time after the great fire of 1666 Blanks 22 X 38 indicate a leather that has been vege- and beganproducingtheexcellent Blotting 19 X 24 table tanned mainly by means of tan- gold-tooledpresentationbooksfor Bond 17 X 22 nins derived from the bark of trees, which he is well known. His bindings Book 25 X 38 as distinguished from mixed tannages. include certain distinctive features, in- Cover 20 X 26 See also: VEGETABLE TANNINS. cluding rows of floralvolutes along Glassine 24 X 36 harm skin. The name given a leather cottage roofs, as well as swags hanging Gummed 25 X 38 apron sometimes worn by bookbinders. from the eves. Bartlett retired to his 251/2 X 301/2 barrier sheet. A leaf inserted in a book birthplace (Watlington in Oxfordshire) Ledger 17 X 22 to prevent the transfer of ink (and in 1711 or 1712, apparently having Manifold 17 X 22 possibly acid substances) from a plate sold his bindery. The latest important Manuscript 18 X 31 or illustration to a facing page, as well binding executed by Bartlett is dated Mimeograph 17 X 22 at times to elucidate the plate or illus- 1685,butrecordsindicatethathe 24 X 36 tration it accompanies. The sheet may continued binding thereafter. (50, 205, Offset 25 X 38 be a highly sized paper, so called acid- 253) 17 X 22 free paper, or, more often, glassine barytes. See: BARIUM SULFATE. Opaque 25 X 38 paper. It may be loose in the book, base.1. See: ALKALL 2. A metal block Poster 24 X 36 sewn in with the binding, or, in the on which a die or electro for stamping Tag 221/2 X 281/2 usual case, tipped to the leaf it pro- or embossing is mounted. 3. A pre- Or 24 X 36 tects.Barriersheetsarefrequently pared bed ina blocking press over Text 25 X 38 made of an inferior quality of paper, which cases are fed, and which pro- Tissues 24 X 36 one which will eventually develop acid- vides a solid foundation for producing Vellum bristol 221/2 X 281/2 ity that can in turn be transferred to sharp impressions. Writing 17 X 22 the facing text leaves, weakening them. base coat. The first of a multiple system All are based on a ream of 500 sheets. For this reason, they should be re- of coatings. The base coat is frequently (17, 316, 324) moved, or, if they bear letterpress and a relatively inexpensive filling material basil. A vegetable-tanned, sheep- or lamb- therefore must be retained, deacidified designed to prevent excessive penetra- skin, producing a soft, smooth leather basis weight 19 beamhouse operations

but with only moderately good wearing stiffer and stronger than cotton fibers. skin. In a properly controlled process qualities. Its smooth surface lends itself (17, 42, 198) they are given only sufficient time for well to graining in imitation of other bathbrick. Powdered brick used in dust- skins, such as goat. There are several further removal of undesirable inter- ing the GOIcusmoN before laying on fibrillaryproteins,ortomodify or types of basil, including E.I.(East the GM D I EAF for cutting. Its purpose weaken those fiber structures which, India), N. Z. (New Zealand) and Aus. is to prevent the leaf from sticking to by binding the collagen fibers tightly (Australia), all of which are generally the cushion. (130, 335) together. would cause the grain to he tanned with native or mimosa bark. batik. A cloth consisting of a dyed fabric wrinkled and the resultant leather to Crust basils are tanned loose in pits of which parts which are not intended have no stretch. and sold dry as taken from the drying to be colored are protected by wax. Today bating is accomplished by the sheds; strainedhasilsare tanned as which is later removed. Batik is used crust, but wet down, set out with a theuse of enzymes extracted from for covering books, particularly in the animaltissue,e.g.,thepancreas of slicker, stretched and allowed to dry; area of Indonesia where the technique swine or sheep, or from microorgan- tawedhasilsaresheepskins dressed originated, and also as a novelty in with alum and salt and finished in a isms such as molds and bacteria, called other areas. (332) respectively pancreatic andbacterial white or nut brown color; and organ bating. A process which is usually defined bates. (248, 275, 291, 306, 363) basils are also tawed hut with the salt as "reducing" or "removing." The basic batwing skiver. A bookbinder's removed. Diced hasils are skins which expres- purposes of DEI IMING and bating are sion for the thinnest SKIVER produced, have been dyed red, glazed, and em- to remove calcium hydroxide (or other It is made from the flesh split of sheep- bossed with a diced crossline. Be- alkali) from the skin, to lower pH, cause of their relatively poor wearing skin, and was at one time used for and, of great importance, to treW the linings andtitlelabelsfor law and characteristics,basilsarenotoften skin substance with proteolyticenzymes used today in bookbinding, although similar books. (91, 274) so as to obtain desired grain appear- Baumé (hydrometer). A hydrometer for in the first half of the 20th century ance in thefinishedleather.Bating measuring the density of liquid and they were employed fairly extensively also serves to impart softness, stretch, gum solutions, named after its inven- in binding cheaper blankbooks, and and flexibility to the leather, while at tor, Antoine Baum& The Baume scale the like. (61. 69, 343) the same time providing the basis for is either of two arbitrary hydrometer basis weight. The actual weight ofa aclean, smooth grain by loosening scales, one for liquids heavier than ream of paper (normally 500 sheets, scud consisting of hair roots, pigment water and the other for liquids lighter but at times 480 or 516), cut to its materials and grease. It also eliminates than water, that indicate specific gravity BASK' stn. The standard, or basic, size all traces of the firm, plumped, and indegrees. The calculation(in the ream varies with different grades of swollen state of the skin induced by United States) for liquids heavier than paper. Some papers and boards are the alkaline unhairing liquors hy bring- water is: produced to a specified caliper (thick- ing the skin into a soft, fallen con- 60 145 ness), rather than to a specific weight; dition.Todaybatingisemployed Specific gravity at F an example ofthisis heavy cover mainly in tanning light leathers, such 60° 145 paper. The United States Government as those used in bookbinding, where ° Baurne Printing Office uses a unit of 1,000 drape, flexibility, and softness of handle and for liquids lighter than water: sheets, which is also used in the M. M. 60° 140 are of primary importance. Specific gravity at F = SYSTEM. In most foreign countries, as The origin of batingis somwhat 60' 130 well as in certain domestic test pro- obscure but probably dates back to the ° Baurne cedures, the standard size is a square time when LIMING was not a common Slightly different conversions are used meter, with the weight being expressed practice. It may have been originated in other countries or in specific indus- in grams per square meter. The basis by a tanner who noticed that skins tries. (179, 362) weight of board is commonly expressed badly soiled with dung often produced bead. 1. An old American term for HEAD- in pounds per 1,000 square feet. Book a softer, stretchier, silkier leather. BAND. 2. A small twist formed when paper basis weights are based on the As recently as the early years of the twisting the silk or cotton in head- 25 by 38 inch sheet size, whilecover present century, the process of bating banding. 3. A fore-edge clasp made paper weights are calculated on a size consisted of immersing the delimed of 20 by 26 inches. (17, 72, 334) of cat gut and beads, used to keep skins in water ata temperature of vellumbindingstightlyclosed.See basket cloth. A fancy weave of cloth, 35-40° C., and then adding a liquid also: CI.ASPS. (83, 250, 261) usually a better grade of huckram with paste of pigeon or hen dung. The skins beamhouse operations. The processes in a pattern similar to the wicker work were runinthisliquoruntilthey leather manufacture in baskets. In the first decades of the thattakeplace acquired a particularly soft, flaccid and following curing and precedingthe 20th century it was used to some extent silky handle. The finished leatherwas actual tannage of the skin. These pro- in edition binding. (256, 264) found to have a very smooth, clean, cesses include some or all of the fol- bast fibers. Strong woody fibers obtained flat, flexible grain and was very soft lowing: from both the phloem and pericycle SOAKING( 1 ),LIMING, UN- and stretchy. Considerable variations HAIRING, SCUDDING, FLESHING, DELIM- of various plants, and used inthe intime,temperature and quantities ING, BATING (or PUERING), DRENCHING, manufactureofpaper.Bast fibers, were used for various types of leather. AND PICKLING, not necessarily always in which include those of hemp, jute, mit- The effect of hating was produced by the order given. The skin may also he sumata, and ramie, among others, are enzymes,which,underappropriate split before tanning. The principal ob- generally thinner than cotton fibers but conditions of temperature and pH, are jectives of beamhouse operationsare their tubes have thicker walls than does capableofdissolving and digesting toridthestock of substances not cotton. Bast fibers are also generally some of the protein constituents of the wanted in the finished leather, notably beater 20 Bentonite

the class of proteins known as keratin, the beating hammer virtually obsolete. is considered by a number of authori- and to put the skins into the proper (172, 236) ties to be detrimental to the perman- chemical and physical condition for beating stone. A marble or litho stone, ence of leather3) as a base for the subsequentprocessing.To produce or a flat plate of iron, set in a frame colors used in MARBLING; and 4) to satisfactory leather, beamhouse opera- filled with sand, on which the leaves provide a suitable surface for burnish- tions must be carried out in such a or sections of books are beaten. (261) ing the gilt edges of books, although manner that no damage is done to the bed. The base of a standing (or similar) it is generally considered to be inferior fibrous (collagen) part of the skin that press, on which books are placed and to ctiarmulaA WAX in this application, is converted into leather, nor toits toward which the descends. as carnauba islesslikely to streak. internal structure. Bedford, Francis (1800-1884). An Eng- (29, 291, 335) The term derives from the "beam," lish bookbinder whose work was con- beeswing. See: HIDE BUFFING. a convex wooden slab sloping upward sidered to be unsurpassed by any of Belgian hare. A long-legged breed of rab- from the floor, over which the raw his contemporaries. Bedford worked bit found in Belgium, the hind leg stock is placed for trimming, fleshing, for Charles Lewis untilthelatter's of which was the traditional implement unhairing, or scudding by hand. (248, deathin1836, and then with John used by gold beaters to apply finely 363) Clarke until 1850 when he started his powered gypsum (numE) to the gold- beater. A machine used in papermaking. own business. Bedford copied earlier beater's skins. This was done to elimi- It consists essentially of a tank, usually Venetianbindings,withtwistedor nate as much roughness as possible to provided withapartition or "mid- Saracenic ornaments, as well as later allow the gold to expand freely and feather,"that contains a heavy roll Veneto-Lyonese bindings common in evenly over the skin. (29) designed to revolve against a bedplate. England during the reign of Elizabeth belly. The extreme left or right side of a Both roll and bedplate can be fitted I. He also produced many imitations complete hide, removed by cutting the with horizontal metal bars set on edge. of the of ANTOINE MICHEL hide along a line parallel to the spine In operation, the pulp material in a PADELOUP. (347) and at such a distance from it as to water slurry circulates between the roll Bedford style. Hand-stained bindings pro- remove approximately 23% ofthe and bedplate and is rubbed, cut, macer- duced from a leather sometimes re- totalarea of the hide for the two ated,and separatedintoafibrous ferred to as "fair calf' (a bark tanned bellies. The belly includes the front and mass for further processing into paper. calfskin), washed over frequently with hind . The line of cutting is de- Sometimes fillers, loadings, dyes, etc., a weak solution of potassium carbonate termined more accurately for any in- are added to the stock in the beater. (ICE03), and exposed to light. The dividual hide by noting the change in Someauthoritiescontendthatthe staining process took as long as 6 feel from the denser structure of the beater, introduced in 1670, was parti- months. In addition to the potassium crop tothe looser structure of the ally responsible for the decline in qual- carbonate, copperas (ferrous sulfate belly. (61, 363) ity of paper, as miniscule iron particles, FeSO4), also known as "green vitroil," belly grain. The tanned, outer grain side breaking away from the sides or work- was used to produce a particular effect. split from a BELLY. ing parts of the machine, entered the The carbonate gave a warm brown- benched. An obsolete term referring to a paper and caused it to det,,Corate. See toned sprinkle, the sulfate gave a gray, book prepared for sewing or some also: REFINER. (17, 58) and the two together gave a black. other forwarding operation. It was also beater sized. A paper which has been Cf: ETRUSCAN CALF. (94,154, 236, applied to the process of flattening the sized by means of materials added to 347) backing ridge of a section. See: KNOCK- the BEATER, or if not the beater, to the beeswax. A wax obtained from the hives ING OUT THE GROOVE. (164, 256) pulp before sheet formation, as con- of bees. i.e., an animal wax. Beeswax bench knife. Two blades, the upper of trasted to paper that has been SURFACE is a complex substance secreted by the whichiscurved andfittedwitha SIZED, Or TUB SIZED. (17) worker bees for the purpose of con- handle, while the lower is drilled and beating. 1. A hand operation of flatten- structing honeycombs. The wax is ob- countersunk so thatit can be bolted ing the leaves or sections of a book tained by melting the honeycomb struc- to the bench. Bench knives are made before sewing, the purpose of which is ture, and then filtering the wax before in various sizes to cut from 16 to 42 to compress or,intheprocess of itis allowed to set. Beeswax usually inches. They are useful for cutting rebinding,toremovethebacking contains a number of mineral wax lightweight board, but an:- not as heavy shoulders.See: KNOCKING OUT THE adulterants. The wax, which is often Or efficient as the BOARD CUTTER. (66) GROOVE. Books are seldom beaten to- bleached by shreddingitintothin bench sewing. An obsolete term applied day. See: BUNDLING (1); NIPPING (1); flakes and settingitout in the sun, to sewing a book through the folds, SMASHING. 2. The process of swelling has a softening range of 62-66° C. It the significance being that the sewing and separating the fibers and fibrils of is used: 1) to lubricate the thread used was done on a SEWING FRAME, Or rags, wood pulp, etc., either batchwise in sewing books by hand; 2)with bench. or in a BEATER, or by passage through LANOLINandothersubstancesfor Bentonite. A claylike mineral consisting a REFINER. (261, 350) LEATHER DRESSINGS. In the latter use it largely of montmorillonite, and char- beating hammer. A heavy, short-handled is considered valuable by some con- acterized by its high absorptive power hammer, with a bell-shaped face, used servationists because, asitis harder and active colloidal properties.Itis in beating the leaves and sections of a than most other waxes, it supplies body usually dark, dull, and powdery, but book so as to flatten and compress to the dressing at a reasonably low waxy on freshly cut surfaces. Its color them. Such generally weigh softening temperature, and also pro- varies from yellowish-green to nearly 10 to 14 pounds, and sometimes even vides a polished or glossy finish which black. Bentonites are products of the up to 16 pounds. The of some find desirable; its use, however, change of volcanic ash, and are char- the ROLLING MACHINE (1827) made as well as that of any wax on leather, acterized by an alkaline oxide and

9 benzene 21 binder

alkaline earth content of 5 to 11%. bibelot. An unusually small book.See another price, usually lower, for mon- They are used as a filler in paper, for also: . ographs and similar materials; he may paper pulp,for decreasing . A very lightweight, highly bid on all work according to the height pitch problems in papermaking, and opaque paper, used primarily for low of the trimmed and cased work, e.g., the like. The name derives fromits bulk books, such as Bibles, dictionaries, up to and including 8 inches, over 8 discovery in Benton, Wyoming. (17) etc.Its basis weight generally ranges inches and including 10 inches, etc., benzene. A colorless, aromatic hydrocar- from 14 to 30 pounds (25 X 38 500). usually with an additional charge for bon (Ce,H,1), usually obtained by the Bible paper of a basis weight of 20 extra thickness, e.g., greater than 21/2 carbonization of coal, or from petro- pounds bulks up to 1,100 sheets per inches; he may quote a flatrate for leum fractions by means of catalytic inch. The paper is generally produced materials according to type, i.e., text- dehydrogenation. It is used to remove from bleached chemical wood pulps, books, fiction, reference books, theses, excessglairor grease from leather often with the addition of mixes of etc.;or. he may quote according to bindings. Although used extensively in linen and/or cotton fiber, along with both height and format, e.g., 8, 10, 12 the past,itis seldom used today be- rag pulps,flax,and thelike.Bible inches, etc., serials, 8, 10, 12 inches, cause of its high flammability and ex- paper is heavily loaded with etc., , and so on. A bid tremely toxic nature. Itis not to be oxide or other high grade pigments to may also include a stipulation (and confused with benzine (also used for improve opacity. Other important char- a quote) of extra charges, as for ex- the same purposes), which is a petro- acteristics, other than printability, in- ample, hand sewing, , stubbing, leum product obtained by distillation. clude strength, good folding endurance, scoring, guarding, etc. bergamot. A pear-shapedfruit(Citris andpermanence. The term"Bible In extra(hand)binding, on the hergamia),the rind of which yields paper" is sometimes used with refer- other hand, the binder will generally a pungent oil, used at one time as a ence to any book paper having a basis quote an estimated price for the indi- preservative for paste. (371 ) weight of 30 pounds or less.See also: vidual book, or for a specified group beta cellu'lose. That part of a cellulosic . (17, 58, 365) of books, with the understanding that Bible style. A style of binding at one time material whichwilldissolveinan the final price (which to a great degree alkaline solution under the conditions applied to all flexible, round-cornered, will depend on the amount of time of the Al PHA CELI ULOSE test, but which leather bookbindings.See also:YApP spent on each book) may be higher will reprecipitate if the alkaline solu- STYLE. (256) or lower. tion is acidified.See also: GAMMA CEL- bibliogenesis. Of or relating to the pro- Assuming thereis no decrease in duction of books. LUI OSE. (17) the quality of the binding provided, between bands. The spaces on the spine bibliogony. Of or relating to the produc- and that the binder adheres faithfully tion of books. Also called "bibliogene- to the specifications, the advantage of of a book between the raised bands, sis." either the ones on which the book is a bid situation is that the library may sewn or the false bands attached to bibliology. The scientific description of enjoy lower prices for its binding. The give the outward appearance of genuine books from the earliest times to the disadvantages, however, probably out- bands. For purposes of decoration, the present, including all of the materials weigh any monetary saving. Bookbind- spaces are referred to as panels. (94) and processes involved intheir pro- ing, whether by a company or an indi- duction. vidual, is essentially a service and not bevel.1.The angleof thebevelof bibliopedist. The craftsman or worker BEVELED BOARDS. 2. The angle of cut a commodity, and a successful bind- who binds books; a bookbinder. The ing program, i.e., one that is designed of the edges of a panel or of an INLAY term is most appropriately applied to (4) or ONLAY. to preserve a over the long one who binds books by hand. run, depends more on mutual coopera- beveled boards(bevelededges).The bibliopegic. Of or relating to the binding tion and recognition as to the purpose boards of a book, and especially the of books. of the library, as well as what the large,thick boards of heavy books, bibliopegistic. Of, or relating to, a book- binder can and cannot do, than on any which have been cut or sanded on the binder, especially one who binds books possible savings resulting from a low outside or inside edge along the head, by hand. bid. tail, and fore edge. The purpose of bibliopegy. The art or craft of binding bight. The length of a single stitch in a beveling is to remove the clumsy effect books. The term is more appropriately machine-sewn book. of thick boards and create a pleasing, applied to the craft of binding books bind.See: tactile quality. BIND ALL; BIND "As IS;" BIND by hand. FROM SHEETS; BIND IN; BOOKBINDING. The outside edges of boards usually bid. A written, usually legally binding, bind all. An instruction to the binder to were squareuntilthe13th century; offer of a bookbinder, generally the bind a volume, usually a serial publica- afterthattime,theywereoften owner of a bindery, but sometimes an tion, with , index, advertise- beveled, sometimes steeply, or, in the individualbookbinder,tobindthe ments, or any other material attached. case of decorated bindings, on a more books of another for a certain price, bind "rs is." An instruction to the binder gentle slope. The inside edges we;:e either by the individual book or by to bind material in the order, or in also frequently beveled during the 15th lot. A bid may be negotiated in any the condition, in which itis received century, particularly in Germany. of several manners, usually according from thelibrary,regardlessof any When the outer edges of boards are tothe wishes of the customer. The seeming imperfections, e.g., a missing beveled the edge along the spine is binder may quote a flat price for all issue of a serial, a missing title leaf, also often beveled on the inside, so materials submitted for binding,re- etc. that it follows the swelling of the spine. gardless of style or format; he may binder. 1. One who binds a book; a bib- (58, 236) quote two prices, one for serial pub- liopegist, or bookbinder. 2. A loose- bhabar.See:SABAI GRASS. lications or serial-format materials and leaf binder (or ). 3. A ma- binder's block 22 bindery tapes

terial used to cause other materials made from waste paper, wood chips, lettering format, style and size of type, to bond, or adhere, or, in papermaking, and other inexpensive materials; and and the like. (24, 259) to cause fibers to bond, coatings to 4) RAG BOARD, made from rag stock. binder's stamp.1. The stamp or label adhere, etc. 4. An adhesive substance, In terms of permanence, the various applied to a book indicating the bindery usually of liquid or molten form, used types of boards used today are prob- that bound the book, and sometimes to create adhesion between aggregates, ably of equal quality. Even old straw- the month and year in which the book globules, etc. Itis distinguished from board, which would appear to be the was bound. It is generally located on an ADHESIVE inthatit performs an least permanent ofall,showslittle the inside tail edge of the lower cover. internal adhesive function rather than deterioration with age, even after a This method of signing a bookbinding a surface adhesive function. (17, 142, hundred years. Its characteristic brittle- first became fashionable in the 20th 309) ness is a physical property of this type century. 2.See:BINDER'S BRASS. (261) binder's block.See:BINDER'S BRASS. of board and haslittleto do with binder'sticket. A smallengraved or binder's board. The wood, pasted paper, deterioration. That boards in general printed label,usually found on the single- or multiple-ply sheets, or other deteriorate very little may be due largely upper outside corner of one of the base stool:, for the covers of any hound to the fact that the boards of a book front flyleaves, giving the name (and or cased book, i.e., any book in hard are generally, though not always, com- usuallytheaddress)oftheboqk- covers. Boards, in one form or another, pletelycovered over andarethus binder. Tickets were used from the have been used to cover and thereby largelyprotectedfromatmosphere, early 18th century until about 1825, protect the leaves of codices since the light, and other potentially damaging but were not often seen in England earliest times of bookbinding. effects. It is perhaps interesting to note untilabout1780. The useof the Although PASTEBOARD (1) was used that, in terms of permanence (as the ticket gave way to thepractice by very early in the Near East, in Europe, term is generally understood), straw- binders of lettering their names in gilt, until about 1500, boards were nearly board and pasteboard, possibly due to blind, or ink, usually on the bottom always made of wood (usually oak), the absence of metallic impurities, are turn-in of either upper or lower board. hence the name. These wooden boards probably more "permanent" than the This record was sometimes referred varied greatly in thickness, even up hard and tough millboard. to as a "name pallet." A variation of to one inch, althoughitisentirely The weight (thickness) of the boards the ticket, usually printed, was used possible that very thick boards were usedin bookbinding should be ap- by some edifion binders during the designed to contain relics, as well as propriate to the size and weight of the 19th century, and was usually located to cover the book. The use of wooden volume being bound, and willgen- on the inside tail edge of the lower boards began to decline in favor of erallyrangeinthicknessbetween cover. (69) pasteboards during the first quarter of 0.060 inch and, in the case of very binder's title. The form in which the title the 16th century, and in time paper large volumes, 0.205 inch in thickness. of a book appears on the spine or "boards" virtually replaced wood en- See also:LAMINATED BOARD. (143, 162, cover, the implication being that the tirely, except in certain novelty or spe- 180, 198, 230, 236) title on the outside may differ, usually cialty uses. binder's brass. A brass block engraved in by being abbreviated, from the title as Boards made of tarred rope, sail- relief withletters or a design, and it appears on the title page. cloth, netting, and the like, came into used for blocking the covers of books, binder's waste. 1.See:WASTE SHEET (1). usein England for more expensive by means of either a hand-operated 2. Scraps of cloth, leather, board, etc., bindings sometime around the begin- press or an automatic blocking ma- too small to be classed by themselves. ning of the 18th 'century, and con- chine.Cf:moo. (307) 3. The scrap paper resulting from the tinued to be employed extensively until binder's cloth. A cloth binding of any trimming of books, and which, being World War H, or for sometime there- age, whichisnottheproduct of clean, white, and unprinted, commands after, when they became very expen- EDITION BINDING. The term was most a premium price in the waste paper sive and difficultto procure. These commonly used to indicate collections market. so-called tar, semi-tar, and rope boards, ofpamphlets,Frenchnovels,etc., bindery tapes. The tapes used to cover which aregenerallyreferredtoas which the collector did not have bound the binding edge of checkbooks, com- MILLBOARD (1), are very hard and stiff. inleather. Such bindings are almost position books, pads or tablets of writ- The binder's boards of today are always blocked from type or standard ing paper, scrapbooks, and the like. usually made of paper and are avail- dies, and, if decorated at all, usually They are also used as gussets for able in many weights and thicknesses. inan ordinary manner. Exceptions folders, and as reinforcements for the Machine-made boardsaregenerally date from the earliest years of edition punched edges of loose-leaf notebook available in four qualities: 1) machine binding in cloth, when materials and paper. Bindery tapes make use of a boards,includinga wide range of style were still in the early stages of variety of backing materials, ranging boards made from paper on a cylinder development. (69) from Holland,cambric, andgusset or Fourdrinier machine. Theseare binder's record. The record kept by a cloths,throughstronglatex-impreg- usually single-ply, solid boards made binder, for the purposes of maintain- nated materials to embossed, coated to full thickness in one operation. They ing an accurate record of the various kraft papers. The tapes are made in a generally range in thickness from 0.030 materials received from different cus- variety of colors, and most are ap- to 0.300 inch; 2) STRAWBOARD, Which tomers. Such records generally include plied automatically on stripping ma- originally was the yellowish board from instructions for binding or special at- chines. The adhesive used on these Holland (and was sometimes called tention, including the manner in which tapes must be of reasonably high qual- Holland board), but which now repre- similar materials were bound in the ity and strength, must have a moderate sents a generic board made from straw past, color of covering material, type amount of working life after wetting, orsimilarmaterial;3)CHIPBOARD, of covering material, recordedsize, andmustbecapableofbonding bindery warehouse 23 binding slip

quickly after application. Also called titles to full bibliographical informa- library binding. A sound binding pro- "gum stripping tapes." (309) tionandbindinginstructions.The gram isbased on four fundamental bindery warehouse. The unit or division, binding book has been largely super- factors: 1) a set of defined procedures usually in an edition bindery, where seded by the BINDING SLIP. (94) within the library, with assignment of thesimpler forms of binding,i.e., binding edge. The edge of the gathered authority and responsibility, preferably pamphlets, single periodical issues, as leaves or sections that is sewn, or other- to one person; 2) a binding budget well as other miscellaneous operations, wise secured. The binding edge of adequate not only for the binding of such as cutting, folding, stapling, etc., books published in the new acquisitions but for rebinding in take place, as contrasted with the main is traditionally the left edge of a recto, a systematic manner; 3) written bind- bindery,where themore elaborate corresponding to the right edge of a ing specifications designed to provide styles of binding occur, generally those verso, but it may be any edge, the for the preservation of the book col- involving sewing. Many finishing op- most common variant being the head. lection, based on the purposes and erations, e.g., blocking, are common to binding margin. See: INNER MARGIN. goals of the library; and 4) an agree- both. The term is more prevalent in binding post. A metalpost,generally ment or contract with a library binder Great Britain than in the United States. threaded, used to secure pre-punched of recognized competence. (208) (58) loose leaves between stiff or semi-flex- binding quirewise. A method of sewing a bind from sheets. Bookbinding which ible covers. Binding posts, which may book, in which the sections are placed originatesfromtheflatorfolded be adaptable to expansion, arefre- one inside another and then sewn or sheets, usually the former, as received quently considered a permanent form saddle stitched through the combined from the printer. Binding from sheets of binding.See also:POST BINDER (256, back folds. (179) iscarried out principallyinedition 274) binding (bindery) record. A record of binderies, although binding, binding priorities. The ranking or order- books sent to the binder. This may as well as blankbook binding, might ing of different types of library ma- consist of circulation cards, duplicate also be considered as such. A book to terials to be bound or rebound. Pri- binding slips, or special records kept be bound by hand will generally be in orities may be based on a variety of in a book. better binding condition if received in factors, including historical or research binding schedules. The times of pick-up sheets (or gatherings), but this occurs value, age, condition,use, monetary and delivery by the binder from and only in rare instances today. (83) value, special or local interest, format, to the library. Aside from the method bind in. An instruction to the bookbinder or combinations thereof. The establish- of transportation, which should be by to bind into the book separate supple- ment of priorities frequently,if not means of the binder's own truck, or at mentary material, as designated by the usually, implies that the library:1) least on a non-commingled basis on customer. does not have sufficient funds to bind contract, and not by common carrier, binding. 1. The style in which a book is everything it acquires; or 2) does not the binding schedule depends largely bound, e.g.,edition binding, library consider it necessary to bind or rebind on five factors: 1) when the volume binding, etc. 2. The covers of a bound everything. An example of a system can best be spared from the library; book. 3. The finished work resulting of priorities would be:1) books of 2) the most convenient time for pre- from the processes involved in binding value, or of specialinteresttothe paring books for binding; 3) when the a book. 4. The concept of securing library, that should be bound or re- binder can bind books with the least the leaves or sections of a publication bound without regard to cost; 2) books delay; 4) when the library can accu- so as to keep them in proper order of permanent interest but of no special mulate a sufficient number of volumes and to protect them. 5. The style in monetary value, that should be library to make up a shipment of reasonable which a book is decorated, e.g., fan- bound, but for which the best work size; and 5) when the library is in the fare style, cottage style, etc. would be too expensive; and 3) books best position to pay for the work done. binding agent. An intermediary between of temporary interest that need to be 131) a bookbinding establishment, usually held together and kept in readable con- binding schemes. A term at one time used a library bindery, and the customer, ditionforoccasionalreferenceor to describe an organized scheme car- althoughnotdirectlyemployed by short-term hard usage. (84, 208, 326) ried through an individual's or library's either. The binding agent is a more- binding process. The two major divisions book collection, in which, for example, or-less independent salesman who so- Of BOOKBINDING, which are FORWARD- all books on history were bound in licits business for a commission. ING and FINISHING (1). Forwarding red, technical L aks in black, fiction binding before purchase. A term gen- entails the binding operations, which in brown, poetry in buff, books relat- erally considered to mean the purchase are the work of the bookbinder; fin- ing to the sea in blue, books on travel of books by a library in sheets, to be ishing includes decoration and embel- in orange, and so on. Such schemes bound according to the library's speci- lishment of the outside (and sometimes have declined in popularity since the fications before they receive any wear, the insides of the boards) surfaces of turn of the century, and particularly and while the paper is still fresh, clean the covers (including the creation of since the development of systematic and unwrinkled. Binding before pur- the design), and is the work of the classification F.Y...helnes. See also: is rare today, except for PRE- artist. Both operations may be, and BRIGHTER BINDING. (310) LIBRARY BOUND publications, which is frequently are, especially in the United binding slip. A card, slip, sheet, or other not strictly the same thing. (25) States and Great Britain, performed form of written instructions sent to binding book. A book used by a library, by the same person. the bindery with each volume, or set in which the particulars of materials binding program. The policies and pro- of volumes, specifying the binding re- sent out for binding or rebinding are cedures of a library relating to the care quirements for that volume or set. The entered. It may vary in the informa- and preservation of its book collection, typical binding slip generally specifies tion recorded, from a simple list of insofar as such procedures relate to the author (if any), titEz. (sometimes binding specifications 24 blankbook binding

abbreviated),classificationnumber, tannin, often willow bark. In addition black step. A heavy line, 6 points thick other bibliographical information, bind- to tannin, the oil obtained from the and about 24 points long, which ap- ingstyle(unlesspreviouslyagreed bark is used to dress the leather, im- pears on the back of a folded section upon), color of covering material, as parting to RUSSIA LEATHER its charac- of a book after the printed sheet is well as any pecularities of the book teristic odor. Other species of birch folded. The collective black steps run that should be brought to the atten- have been used to a limited extent in from the head to the tail of the gath- tion of the binder, such as margins, North America and India. See also: ered sections, generally about 24 points condition of the paper, foldouts, loose VEGETABLE TANNINS. (175) below each other. When the book is material (for pockets), etc. A multiple birch broom. A "broom" made of strips gathered the black steps appear as a form provides identical copies for the of birch wood and used for stirring diagonal line running from head to binder,as well as thelibrary, and the MARBLING SIZE. A birch broom has tail across the back of the text block, servesasverificationfor the work beenthetraditionalimplementfor and any missing or misplaced section specified. this operation, but whether it was be- immediately becomes obvious because binding specifications. The description of cause of the quantities of water used, the black step is broken. Also called the materials, processes, the screening action of the birch strips, "back mark," "collating mark," and and standards of workmanship to be or some other reason,isnot clear. "quad mark." (156) employed in binding books for a li- (97, 335) blanc fixe. See: BARIUM SULFATE. brary or similar institution. Material bite. I. The ability of an adhesive to pen- blankbook. Originally, a book in which specifications include the quality and etrate or dissolve the uppermost layer th,- printing was limited to page head- weight(orsize)of thread,paper, of the adherends. 2. That quality in ings or divisions. The page was gen- cloth (or leather), adhesives, mending paper which causesitto takeink, erally blank or ruled and was intended tissues, gold, foil,inks, etc., of such pencil, or printing impressions readily. to receive writing. Today, blankbooks thingsasendpapers,guards,stubs, 3) In , the corrosion of the include a variety of items, including hinges,inlays,linings,tapes, sewing metal by acid, i.e., the action of acid account books, albums, scrapbooks, ex- thread, covering materials, and the like. dissolvingawaysuperfluousmetal. erciseandmanuscriptbooks,etc. Manufacturingspecificationsinclude (138, 139) Blankbooks intended for the account- collation, preparation for sewing, spe- bites. An informal expression sometimes ing of court records, etc., are gener- cialchecking,reinforcing, removing used to indkate pieces of paper torn ally ruled. horizontally and/or verti- back folds, scoring, construction and from the margin of a leaf, so-called cally,tofacilitatewriting. Since in attachment of endpapers,trimming, becauseoftheiroccasionalresem- most cases the information recorded gluing-up, blocking, casing-in, inspec- blance to "bites." is considered to be of permanent value, tion, etc. Workmanship specifications black book. An obsolete term applied to the paper and binding of the book include scwing, rounding and backing, any of the various books, usually of must be of superior quality. Called adhesion of materials, turn-ins, squares, a devotional nature, so-called from the "account book" in Great Britain. See corners, trimming and the like. Specifi- style of their type, the color of their also: BLANKBOOK BINDING. (227, 274) cations,itshould be noted, are not bindings, the nature of their contents, blankbook binding. A style of binding intended to instruct the binder in how or combinationsthereof. They also for books meant to be written in and to bind a book, but only to insure an frequently had BLACK EDGES. (274) which, therefore, must lie flat at any acceptable end product. (16, 25, 83) black edges. The edges of a book that place the bookisopen. Blankbook bindingvariations.Differencesinthe have been blackened by sponging them binding is one of the principal sub- bindings of books issued in the same withink,followed by ivory black, divisions of STATIONERY BINDING and edition by a publisher. The differences lampblack, or antimony mixed with differs greatly from the other major might include color or type of cloth, paste. Although used extensively in the unit of binding, LETTERPRESS BINDING. blocking,etc.Suchvariations may 19th century on devotional and fune- One of the major differences is th^t stem from a number of manufacturing real publications, they are uncommon blankbooks, or account books, as they causes, especially if all copies printed today. (152, 241) are also called, are rounded but not are not bound at the same time, or blacking the squares. The process of col- backed, having instead a SPRING-BACK, some are rebound, as in REMAINDER oring the edges and squares of the which, in conjunction with the LEVERS, BINDING. Variations may also result boards of a book, as well as the head- causesthespineofthebookto from unsatisfactory storage conditions. caps, with a black pigment, such as "spring" up when the book is opened, (69, 156) vinegar-black mixed with gum arabic, thus giving full access to the gutter birch (bark). The bark of the common so as to enhance the effect of tooling of the opposing pages. The best blank- European birch (Betula verrucosa) or in blind. The technique is uncommon book bindingisvery durable, with (B. pubescens), used in leather manu- today. (152, 241) sewing on wide bands of webbing, facture,particularlyinRussia,for black lead. Commercial powdered graph- rather than tapes, the ends of which hundreds of years. The outer bark, ite, which, when mixed with water, are secured between split boards. The which peels off easily, is not used; it glair, and (sometimes) Armenian bole, books also have heavy linings and is the inner bark from which the tan- is applied to the edges of books before strongly reiaforded endpapers, called nin, in the amount of 10 to 15%, and gilding. See also: GILT EDGES. (335, "joints" in a blankbook. In addition, 11% solublenon-tans,isextracted. 371) itis not unusual for the folios to be Older trees, those 50 to 60 years of blacks. 1. An obsolete term for a grade sewn first to heavy cloth guards before age,yieldtherichesttannin. Used of book cloth of a "common" quality, being sewn to the webbings. Additional alone, birch produces a pliable, leather dyed throughout.2. A general term strength is sometimes imparted by hubs of a yellowish-brown color; it is, how- applied to black papers used for covers, on the spine (which also protect the ever, more often mixed with some other photograph albums, and the like. (256) lettering)and bands either over or blankbook frame 25 blind impressions

under the covering material. Although oxide, with or without hypochlorite, runs off the edge of a page. 3. The formerly always coveredinleather, in multistage bleaching operations. Its process of deliberately trimming so as many blankbooks are now covered in highbrightnessisattainablewith to "bleed" a page. See also: BLEED heavy duck or canvas.Called "ac- strengthcharacteristicsnotsubstan- BORDER;BI EED ILLUSTRATION.(82, count-book binding" in Great Britain. tially lower than that of an unbleached 365) (58, 320, 339, 343) chemical pulp. (17, 72) bleed border. A heavy border on a printed blankbook frame. An obsolete term for bleached sulfite paper. A paper which has page or sheet, especially on the cover a sewing frame designed to be used been bleached in one stage by means of a pamphlet or booklet, printed in when tapes instead of cords are used of peroxide or hypochlorite, or in a such a position that part of it is cut in sewing. See also: SEWING FRAME. multistageoperationusingperoxide away in trimming. (115) and/or chlorine dioxide. The paper bleed illustration. An illustration that runs blankbook paper. See: LEDGER PAPER. has high brightness with good stability. to one or more edges of the page, leav- blank cover. A term sometimes applied (17, 72) ing no margin. If the bleeding is to be to the covers of a bound book that are bleaching. I. The process of treating pulps accomplished by means of cropping, not blocked or ornamented in any man- used in papermaking with chemicals to the illustration must be designed so that ner. alter their color so that the pulp and nothing of importance is removed by blanking.1.The process of blocking the resulting paper will have greater trimming. When an illustration occu- book cloths that are patterned,i.e., brightness. Such bleaching is usually pies an entire page, it is said to bleed grained. Before the use of hot dies and accompanied by partialremoval of on three sides, i.e., head, tail, and fore foils eliminated the need for blanking, noncellulosic materials, e.g., . 2. edge, and run flush to the gutter. See the cloth was struck with the uninked The process of chemicallytreating also: CENTER SPREAD. ( 1 3 1 ) die, which flattened out the pattern archival materials in order to remove bleeding. 1. See: BLEED. 2. The removal or grain of the cloth, leaving a smooth stains, discoloration, , etc., of color from a paper or paper pulp surface to take the ink on the subse- and/ortorestorebrightness.Both due to the action of water or another quent strike. 2. A term sometimes used oxidizingi.e., chemicals which take liquid, which dissolvesthe coloring incorrectly with reference to blinding. up electronsandreducingi.e., matter. 3. Discoloration of the surface See: BLIND TOOLING. (91, 365) chemicals which give up electrons of a paper due to the migration of blank leaves. The unprinted leaves at the chemicals are used, the former much residual oils. 4. The tendency of colored front and back of a book. They may more extensively than the latter. Chem- paperstostaincontiguousleaves, be an integral part of the book as re- icals which are, or have been, used in- usually due to the presence of water or ceived from the publisher(printer's clude CALCIUM HYPOCHLORITE, CHL011 moisture of some kind. 5. The diffusion flyleaves), or they may be added by AMINE T., CHLORINE DIOXIDE, FORMAL of uncombined materials from the in- the bookbinder(binder'sflyleaves). DEHYDE, HYDROGEN PEROXIDE, POTAS terior of leather to the grain surface They are not necessarily part of the SIUM METABISULFITE, SODIUM CHLO- where they may contaminate other ma- endpapers. (69) RATE, SODIUM CHLORITE, SODIUM HYPO. terials or mar the appearance of the blank rolling. A method of sprinkling a CHLORITE, and SODIUM PEROXIDE3. leather. This usually occurs at elevated FLESHER, in which an iron solution The process of lightening the color of temperatures and is commonly desig- is applied to the leather and rolled in. a vegetable-tanned leather by means of nated as staining. (17, 72, 325, 363) The nap is then restored by brushing. the removal of the oxidized tannins and blesbock. A SouthAfricanantelope, blank tooling. See: BLIND TOOLING. insoluble matter from 'he outer sur- Damaliscus albifrons, the skin of which bleach. I. A chemical, usually an oxidiz- faces of the skin, usually by ti zatment has been used to produce a bold- ing or reducing agent, used to whiten with a solution of sodium carbonate, grained leather, in imitation of SEAL or increase the brightness of a ma- washing,andthentreatmentwith SKIN. terial, e.g., paper or paper pulp. See diluted acid. Chrome-tanned leathers blind blocking. The process of lettering or also: BLEACHING ( 1 ) 2. A solution of are usually bleached by treating the decorating a book With BINDER'S BRASS chlorine or a similar chemical. 3. To skin with acid solutions of syntans and or ZINC() only, i.e., without gold leaf, whiten or increase the brightness of a at times by precipitating white pig- ink, or foil. (307) material, or to remove stains from ments in the grain layer of the leather I 'ind finishing. Any of the several tech- paper. See: BLEACHING (2). to impart a bleached appearance. 4. niques of decorating a binding by tool- bleached groundwood paper. A paper The destructiveeffectsof chemical ing without the use of gold, or other manufactured from groundwood pulp agents on water colors, inks, fugitive af metals, or coloring materials. Blind which has been bleached by means of colors, etc. 5. The generally undesirable shing includes:1) impressing the a suitable chemical, e.g., sodium per- and destructive effect of natural and i:face of the covering material with a oxide, zinc hydrosulfite, etc, or a com- artificiallight on archival materials, ited tool (See: BLIND TOOLING ) ; 2) bination of chemicals. Itis substan- especially cloth and leather bookbind- embossing leather from the flesh side tially brighter than unbleached ground- ings. (62, 77, 218, 320, 323) while wet, with the pattern being out- wood paper and is not significantly less bleaching powder. See: CALCIUM HYPO-. lined by an indented line; and 3) cut- brightthanpaperproduced from CHLORITE. ting the leather so as to create a design bleached sulfate or sulfite pulps. (17, bled. The printed image, plates, or illus- in relief. See: CUIR.CISELE. 72) trations of a book that have been cut blind impressions.Virtuallythe same bleached sulfate paper. A class of paper intoduringtrimming,e.g.,BLEED process as BLIND BLOCKING, except that generally used in grades of white, as BORDER, BLEED ILLUSTRATION. it generally applies to hand tooling. In well as for boards requiring strength. bleed. I. To trim the edges of a book to blind impressions, there are generally The pulp is fully bleached with chlo- the extent that part of the letterpress two impressions of the tool or letter, rine dioxide, or the dioxide plus per- is removed. 2. A printed image which the first made through the design or blind Imes 26 blocking foil

lettering on paper with a warm tool and coloring material, with the possible ex- rial. 2. Defects in paper resulting from a second done directly on the impres- ception of carbon, which is sometimes too rapid drying of the web or poor sion. This second step assures an even- used to darken the impressions. condition of the drying felts which al- ness and straightness of the impression, The effect of blindtoolingrests lows air between thefelt and web. and, because the impression through largely on the depth and uniformity of Blistersarealsodefectsincoated the paper is larger, the second makes the impressions (which makes it un- papers caused by too rapid expansion the final impression the correct size. suitable for use with hard covering of moisture in the interior of the sheet (161) materials) and the ability of the heated when subjected to the high drying tem- blind lines. 1. The impressed lines on the tool to produce a darkened color (see peratures of web presses. (5, 17) spine of a leather binding along each above)factors which make leather, block. A piece of metal, without a handle, side of the raised bands. Such lines are especially in the lighter shades, an ideal bearing an engraved or etched design usuallyimpressedwithatwo-line medium for this method of decoration. and used in decorating the covers of a PALLET (1). 2. The blind lines made The critical aspects of the technique book. It is intended to be used in a by a FILLET (1) without the use of leaf are the temperature of the tool and the press. See also: BLOCKING (1); BLOCK- metal or foil. (335) degree of dampness of the leather. In ING PRESS. (82, 234) blind-stamped panel (blind-stamped bind- general, the damper the leather the . A book printed from cut ing). A form of decoration on the cov- cooler the tool should be, and vice blocks of wood. Although itis pre- ers of a binding impressed by means of versa. In tooling leather blind, the sur- sumed that block books preceded the an engraved stamp (bearing a complete face is given a quick initial strike to invention of printing from movable design) on the dampened leather. Vir- "set" the leather in the impression. The metal type, most of the extant examples tually all early plates were cut intaglio tool is then impressed again and rocked of block books are from the period (with a three dimensional effect and not slightly, which polishes and darkens the 1460 to 1480, i.e., subsequent to print- as a two dimensional printing block), impression.When blindlinesrun ing from metal types. Each block was the resulting image on the cover being across the spine of the book, polishing cut for an entire page, and, in the in relief. Panels were still being used isaccomplished by slidingapallet earliest examples, each leaf was printed in (German) bookbinding until well along the lines; on the covers, where a only on one side, usually with a thin, into the 18th century. fillet is used for long lines, it is fixed so brownish ink. The spread of printing The art originated in the Low Coun- that instead of rol:ng, it slides along virtually eliminated the demand for this tries, and was practiced there from the the impression. type of book but they continued to be 14th century on. Characteristic designs Blind tooling has been used as a printed until at least the end of the consisted of animals in circles or loops means of decorating books since the 15th century. These later examples of foliage. The art flourished in France early days of bookbinding, and can be were printed on both sides of the leaf from about 1488 to 1528; in Germany, traced back to COPTIC BINDINGS Of the with ordinary printing ink. Block books extensiveuse was made of blind- 7th or 8th centuries, and even earlier. areessentially picture books, some- stamped panels on covers of pigskin There isreason to believe that the times with a small amount of text, also bindings, mainly after 1550. The blind- technique was brought to Europe from cut in wood. (69, 140, 156) stamped panel was in use in England the Mediterranean area about the same blocking. 1. The process or technique of from about 1480 to 1580, but it was time as other Coptic techniques being impressing a design into the covering not really popular until about 1500. used, possibly by imported craftsmen; material of a book by means of a stamp The most used motifs included the however, little is known of blind-tooled or BLOCK having an engraved or etched royal arms and heraldic devices. Rec- bindings until the 12th century and surface. The term applies to the im- tangular panels made with a single early part of the 13th. In one form or pressing of type, blocks, etc., with foil, stamp continued inuse until about another, the technique has been used leaf,etc., or without (BLIND BLOCK- 1623. continuously up to the present day, but ING). Since the area that can be blocked Because of the great pressure re- during the 16th to 18th centuries, its by hand is relatively small (about one quired to impress a complete design, a use was more or less limited to inferior square inch, or less), large areas are standing press of some kind must have calf- and sheepskin bindings. Near the blocked using a BLOCKING PRESS. The been used. end of the 18th and during the early permanency of the blocking, particu- The most commonly used leathers years of the 19th centuries blind tool- larly when gold leaf is used, depends for these bindings were calfskin and ing was often used on fine bindings in largely on the pressure applied by the pigskin. (140, 166, 236) conjunction withgold.Alsocalled craftsman, or the force of the blocking blind stamping. A term originally used "antique tooling." (94, 123, 130, 236, press, which drives the raised surfaces with reference to stamping a leather 335) of the block or die into the covering cover with small, unheated tools that blind warbles. See: WARBLES. material. Hand blocking may be done were cut intaglio so that the impres- blisters.1.Bubbles or pockets of air, on curved or flat surfaces, while block- sion was in relief. See also: BLIND TOOL- watervapor,solventvapor,etc., ing by means of a press is generally ING. (236) trapped between the board and PASTE- done on flat surfaces only. 2. The sur- blind tooling. A method of decorating a DOWN of a book, causing the board face tackiness that book cloths some- book in which impressions are made in paper to bulge, forming a blister. A times develop as they age. 3. An unde- the covering material, usually leather blister effect may also be caused by a sirable condition in which a dry ad- or tawed skin, by means of heated tools, small mass of adhesive, which stretches hesive film is reactivated by heat, pres- pallets, rolls, fillets, or combinations of the covering material, or by failure of sure, moisture, etc., and adheres to a one or more of these. As the name im- the covering material to adhere prop- material in contact with it.(94, 179, plies, Mine 'Wing does not entail the erly, causing a protuberance or "blis- 236, 276, 309) use of leaf metal, foil, or any other ter" between board and covering mate- blocking foil. A thin plastic film with a blocking powder 27 boarding

high vacuum deposit of gold or other in and on leathers tanned with vege- blueprint paper. A paper produced from metal arid backed by a pressure-sensi- table tannins of the pyrogallol class, cotton fiber pulp, bleached chemical tive adhesive. White and colored pig- probably as a result of the action of wood pulp, or combinations thereof, ments are also available. They are used enzymes native to the original source, in basis weights of 12 to 30 pounds (17 in the same way as gold leaf, the im- i.e., bark, acorns, etc. Although bloom X 22500). It has a well-formed, pression being obtained by means of a affectsthephysicalpropertiesof fairly smooth surface, good wet tensile heated die, block, type, etc. Blocking leather in that it increases weight yield, strength, and, although well-sized, uni- foils are used extensively in library and firmness, and water resistance, it is de- form absorbency. Blueprint paper must edition binding. (81, 92, 161) posited in insoluble form and is not blocking powder. A finely ground resin not contain chemicals which might chemically combined with the fibers of have an adverse effect on its sensitizing used in dusting over the impressions in the leather. Its presence at times gives materials. The paper is sensitized by silk and velvet before gold tooling. an unsightly appearance to the leather. treating the base paper with chemicals, Such resins are used in lieu of GLAIR 2. A misty surface appearance inan including potassium ferrocyanide,as because moisture would stain the silk illustration, caused by an excess of acid well as with iron salts, such as the oxa- or velvet. The powder has the ad- or too much drier in the ink. 3. The lates and tartrates. (17) vantage of requiring only a moderately dulling film that sometimes appearson blue stormont marble. A marble pattern hot tool, whereas glair requires consid- varnish and glossy paint films, particu- used for both endpapers and edges, erably more heat to make the gold larlyinindustrialatmospheres.It adhere. consisting of a red vein with indigo Blockingpowder,however, usually consists of minute crystals of fillers dotted with numerous small in- does not provide the solidity of ad- ammonium sulfate produced by the re- terstices in the form of a fine network. hesion to gold leaf that is obtainable action betwen sulfur dioxide, ammonia, with a liquid size; therefore, it This pattern was popular during the is gen- and oxygen in condensed moisture on first half of the 19th century, but was erally used only when a liquid size is the film. Bloom can appear on a freshly impractical. (154) also used in the 18th. See also: STOR- lacquered surface when rapid evapora- MONT MARBLE. (97, 236) blocking press. A presswhich heats tion of the solvents causes the tempera- board. A generic term for a stiff and thick blocks and impresses lettering, designs, ture of the surface to fall below the "paper." The distinction between board etc., into the covers of books. In edition dew point. Moisture is deposited on the and paper is somewhat vague; however, binding this is done automatically, gold film, causing a limited precipitation of in general, board is heavier in basis or pigment foils being fed through the cellulose nitrate and giving the film a weight, thicker, and stiffer than paper. machine on a thin plastic BLOCKING permanent cloudy appearance. (175, Most sheets 0.012 or more inches in FOIL. The blocking press is used for 195, 306, 363) thickness are considered to be boards, BLIND BLOCKING or ink blocking; heat blottingpaper. A completelyunsized while nearly all less than 0.006 inch is not required for the latter process. sheet of paper, generally used to take are termed paper; most of those in be- When gold leaf is used it is laid directly up excess ink from hand-written locu- tween these dimensions are also classed on the book cover. The blocking press ments, letters, etc. It is also used to as paper. , in excess of first came into use in England in the absorb moisture from freshly washed 0.012 inch, however, is still classed as period 1830-32 for gold blocking on or deacidified book and manuscript paper, and liner board, although some- book cloths. Before this time books papers, prints, maps, etc. Itisoften times less than 0.012 inchthick,is were blocked with a block that was made from high grade rag or cotton classed as board. See also: BINDER'S heated off the press and then laid on linters,and also from chemical or BOARD. (17, 19, 42) the cover and pressed. Also called "em- mechanical wood pulps, or mixtures board cutter. A lever typeof cutter bossingpress"and,intheUnited thereof. The paper is porous, bulky, mounted on a flat bed and used for States, "stamping press." (107, 203, and has a low finish and little strength. cutting hard millboard, and similar 236) Basis weights generally range from 60 materials. The bed is equipped with a block printing. The process of printing to 140 pounds (19 x 24 500). Aside movable gauge against which the stock from hand-carved blocks of wood or from its use as an absorbent paper, it is placed for accurate cutting, and a linoleum. Modern blocks, which are can be ground up, mixed with size, and foot-operated clamp which secures the made up of relatively heavy lines and used to fill in worm and other small material for cutting. The blade usually solid areas, are cut for relief printing, holes in paper. (17, 316) has one or more counterweights at the and are inked or colored only on the blue (blue ). Hides and skins that have end opposite the handle to help prevent uncut surfaces. If printing in two or been chrome tanned but not finished. the knife from falling accidently, and more colors is required, the colors can Such skins are usually called "in the also to reduce the effort required to be applied and printed in one impres- blue," or "blue sort." (325) raise the blade. See also: BENCH KNIFE; sion, printed in two or more impres- blue agate marble. A cover marble, con- ROTARY BOL.F.D CUTTER. (66) sions, or two or more blocks can be cut. sistingofblackcoloringinlarge boarded leather. A leather which has been In the early days of block printing, it (united)drops,withbluestreams softened and the grain side of which was a common practice to print the down the boards uniting with the black. has been lightly creased by the process outline of the design and then apply See also: GREEN AGATE MARBLE. (97, of BOARDING (1). the colors by hand. The relatively soft 152) boarding. 1. A method of producing a surfaces of blocks of wood or linoleum blue-and-goldedition. A formatfor design on the grain side of leather, as limit the number of impressions that volumes of poetry, essays, etc., popular well as softeningit, by means of a can be made. (234) in the United States in the 1870s. The series of creases produced on the sur- bloodstone burnisher. See: BURNISHER(S) covering cloth was blue and the edges face of the skin. Boarding is accom- (1). weregilt.The books weresmall, plished by folding the leather, grain bloom. 1. A deposit of ellagic acid formed measuring about 6 by 31/2 inches. (169) side to grain side, and working the fold board knife 28 book

across its surface. A straight or "wil- cuts away from the bolt and into one in a section, rather than onto the first low" grain results when the skinis or more leaves. or last leaf. (339) boarded on one direction, and a box or bolt knife. One of the two types of knives bone dust. An abrasive composed of "cross" grain when it is also boarded that can be used for cutting the edges crushed and groundbones,which, at right angles to the first. Boarding a of books with the PLOW. The bolt knife when mixed with powdered chalk and third time in a direction diagonal to the is fastened to the shoe of the plow, pumice, is used to clean vellum bind- first two produces a pebbled-grain pat- consequentlyitsposition cannot be ings. tern. Boarding may be done by hand, changed, as can that of the SLIDING bone glue. A GLUE processed from the using a cork-surfaced board called a KNIFE. The sliding type is less expen- collagen content of bones, mainly from GRAINING BOARD, the fold of the leather sive and easier to attach, and has al- "green" or fresh bones of bovine ani- being rolled under the board, or, as is most completely superceded the bolt mals. Bone glue prepared from solvent- the usual case today, by means of a type. extracted, degreased bonesiscalled boarding machine, in which the leather bond. 1. In adhesives, the process of join- "extracted bone glue." (184) isrolled between two cylinders, one ing two structurestogether,i.e.,to Bonet, Paul (1899-1972). An artisan and covered with cork or rubber and the create an assembly by means of ad- bibliophile who turned to the art of other withfeltor rubber.2.See: hesive linkage. 2. A form of creating designs, Bonet was probably GRAINED UP. (306, 363) agreement under which a bonding com- the most influential French designer of board knife. 1. A knife of eliptical shape pany guarantees to pay a library within bookbindings of his day. He was at attached to the arm of a hand-operated stated limits for any financial loss, or firstinfluenced by the bindings of BENCH KNIFE. 2. One of the circular for failure of the binder to perform in PIERRE LE GRAIN. While his early work knives of a ROTARY BOARD CUTTER. accordance with the terms of the con- was in purely geometrical gold fillet (66) tract,i.e., to follow specifications, to design, his later creations were related board machine. See: CYLINDER MACHINE. charge the agreed-upon price, to return more closely to the spirit and theme of materials within the time specified in the book being decorated. Bonet had board paper.See:PASTEDOWN. the contract, or to otherwise be found available to him the best bookbinders boards. 1. A generic term for the pieces indefault of the contract.3.See: and gilders in Paris, and with them of wood, metal, or metal-edged wood . (309) he concentrated on the contrasting used to assist in gripping books while bonding strength. The resistance of paper, textures of leathers, wood, and even in process of being bound. Such boards either coated or uncoated, to splitting metals, with surf aces scultptured and are used in pressing, backing, bundling, or to the picking or lifting of its surface pierced, achieving nearly mathematical gilding, trimming, and other opera- while being printed. (17) repetition of linear forms and even tions. 2. The state or condition of being bond paper. A grade of writing or print- surrealist effects produced by IN BOARDS or OUT OF BOARDS. 3.See: ing paper, now only vaguely associated and photography.SeePLATE pc. (104, BINDER'S BOARD. with bonds, legal documents, etc., i.e., 347) bock. A leather made from the skin of a where durability and permanence are bonnet board. A very hard-rolled, thin, so-called Persian sheep, whichisa required. Bond paper today is widely smooth-surfaced board similar to file sheep that has coarse hair instead of used for forms, invoices, etc., and is a indices; sometimes used for notebook wool. It was used in the latter part of strong, tough paper that can take stiff, covers. the 19th and early part of the 20th hard ink that dries by oxidation rather book. 1. A collection of written, printed, centuries as a substitute for goatskin. than by penetration. Bonds are pro- illustrated, or blank leaves of paper, When finished and grained (usually duced from cotton fiber pulp, bleached parchment (or vellum), papyrns, or embossed) in imitation of MOROCCO, it chemical wood pulps, or combinations other flexible or semi-flexible material, was referred to as "bock morocco." thereof. Although a bond is a typical strung or bound together. Today, in its (91, 256) writing paper, almost all of it is printed, most familiar form, a book is consid- body paper (board). The foundation paper e.g., letterheads; therefore it must have ered to be one or more folded and or board for finished papers, such as good printability, as well as good writ- gathered sheets of paper, fastened to- art,chromo, coated, gummed, and ing and erasing qualities. It must also gether at one edge, and trimmed on others, which are made by coating or possess cleanliness, formation, color, one or more of the remaining three treating with composition. (82) finish, and freedom from fuzz. Itis edges to form a continuous series of bolt. The folded edge at the head, tail, or usually made in basis weights ranging uniform leaves. Specifically, a book is a fore edge of a section of an unopened from 13 to 24 pounds (17 X 22 collection of single sheets or folded book. Depending on location,itis 500). (17, 287, 316) leaves, bearing printing or writing, that known as a head bolt, tail bolt, or fore- bond strength. The unit load, applied in have been folded, stitched, sewn, or edge bolt. Bolts are generally located tension,compres on,flexure,peel, secured by adhesive along the binding at the head and fore edge, but cannot cleavage, or sheer, required to break edge, generally rounded and backed, be located at all three edges in any one two adherend materials, with failure and usually secured between boards section. The folded edge opposite the occurring in or near the plane of the that have been covered in cloth, paper, fore edge is not a "bolt," but a spine bond. The bond strength of adhesives or like material, or which have been fold, or "last fold." Bolts are often used in archival work should be such bound in leather.See:CODEX. 2. A col- opened quickly and with little care, re- that stress to the point of failure will lection of tablets of wood, ivory, or sulting in ragged edges that are difficult result in failure of the adhesive, rather other rigid material, containing writing, to handle when turning leaves. A dull than either adherend. (309) drawings, etc., and sometimes covered knife used carefully will result in a bone cuffing. A colloquial term used with with blank covers of the same or dif- clean cut, while a knife thatistoo reference to the slitting operation per- ferent materials. 3. A continuous roll sharp is difficult to control and often formed when an insert must be tipped- of parchment, or similar material, or a book and job 29 bookbinder's type

strip of parchment creased between col- sections, which enables it to produce a signs for the finishing of a book, but umns and folded in the manner of a section of up to 64 leaves from one who may or may not actually execute CONCERTINA FOLD, and containing writ- sheet. Book and job folding machines the design. Although usually assumed ing, etc.See also: (1). (102, are also sometimes equipped for cut- to mean a hand bookbinder, the term is 123, 156, 161) ting, padding, and trimming.See also: frequently applied to the owner or book and job folding machine. A type of FOLDING MACHINES. (320) manager of a bookbinding establish- folding machine having four book basis. The BASIC SIZE of the sheet ment, e.g., a library bookbinder. folding levels, each at right angles to the of paper most often used in book print- bookbinder's type. Individual letters and preceding and following levels, which ing in the United States-25 by 38 number of ordinary type, without han- permit up to four right angle folds, re- inches. dles, designed to be set in a LETTERING sulting in 16 leaves (32 pages) from bookbinder. A craftsman who binds book; PALLET or BLOCKING PRESS, and used one sheet. This type of machine also a binder; a bibliopegist. The term is to letter books. The use of the pallet or has one and sometimes two parallel also applied to one who creates the de- press gives uniformity to the lettering

BOOK

raised bands single cord laced in

chamfered board bookbindery 30 bookbinding

and saves time, but it does not give the style, but by the llth century the char- men have produced bindings that have freedom and individuality that is avail- acteristic Islamic design consisted of an seldom been exceeded in beauty and able with the use of HAND LETTERS. oval center design with triangular cor- craftsmanship. The tools used in this Type, on the other hand, is extremely nerpieces, and, by the 13th century, the great era of French bookbinding were useful when lettering a number of cop- present day book format had been derived by way of pattern books for ies of the same title. (339) adopted and gold was being used in or metalwork from Oriental bookbindery. A place where books are finishing. See: GoLD TOOLING. Two hun- or arabesque models; most of the de- bound, such as a library or edition dred years later floral designs were re- signsincorporatedinterlacingstrap- bindery, etc. Also, as generally under- placing geometric patterns and some work. Elaborations of this strapwork stood, a place where various opera- pictorial bindings were being executed were seen in the FANFARE STYLE. tions connected with printing, but not by means of embossing. Vivid coloring The most characteristic early 16th always with bookbinding, are carried and delicate tooling were used century English bindings were those out, such as ruling, perforating, num- with considerable effect on the DoU- blocked in blind with panel stamps of bering, folding, gathering, padding, etc. BLURE (1), and, by the 16th century, the royal arms (which represented only See also: BLANKBOOK BINDING; BOOK- lacquered bindings of excellent quality a form of decoration and not royal BINDING; EDITION BINDING; GENERAL were being produced. By the 16th cen- ownership), while the earliest recorded JoB BINDING; GENERAL oFFICE STATION- tury, however, Islamic binding began use of gold tooling in England dates ERY BINDING; LIBRARY BINDING; MANI to deterioriate, and the decline has per- from 1519. Gold tooling did not be- FoLD BINDING; MECHANICAL BINDINC4 sisted to this day. come common in England until about PAMPHLET BINDING. In Europe, the earliest known exam- 1530. bookbinding. The hand and/or machkne ple of a decorated leather bookbinding Fine binding declined in France in processes by which leaves or sections is that of the Gospel according to St. the 17th century despite the artistry of (usually paper, but also parchment (or John, found in the tomb of St. Cuthbert. the fanfare patterns and tools having vellum), papyrus, etc.)are secured (d. 687); it is almost certainly an Eng- POINTILLg outlines. One notable binder within covers to form a codex or book, lish binding of the 7th or 8th century. of that time was FLORIMOND BADIER, as opposed to a roll. Althoughthisremarkablebinding who also worked in pointille tooling. Historically,bookbindingdidnot shows theinfluence of Coptic and In England, where variegated colors exist in the manner of today until the Islamicbinding,Europeanbinding and delicate tooling became standard, codex began to replace the scroll, or took on its own characteristics and by the golden age of English bookbinding roughly 2,000 years ago, when parch- the 10th century had progressed along was during the period of the Restora- ment came into use. Leaves totally different lines from that of the tion. Some of the tools in use at that of a quadrangular shape were found to Levant. One of the principal differences time were of the pointille style, while be more convenient than but was in the manner of sewing, which others, including small floral volutes, they had to be secured and covered for was on raised bands; embellishment, were more English in character. A protection. Although classical texts and too, developed along different lines, al- common feature of many English bind- ecclesiastical works did exist in codex most always being in the form of blind ings of this time was the broken pedi- form before the A.D., the tooling executed with individual tools. ment associatedwiththeCOTTAGE codex did not become common for Gothic bindings of the second half STYLE. other works before the 4th century. of the 15th century were mainly deco- The early 18th century witnessed a The earliest extant decorated book- rated with blind lines and individual revival of French bookbinding, includ- bindings were altar Bibles, which were tools, but the RoLL (1) which was first ing the mosaics of AUGUSTIN DU SEUIL oftenelaborately bound and orna- used in Germany, was also developed and ANTOINE MICHEL PADELOUP. High mented with jewels, gold, and ivory. during this period (in about 1470), standards were also displayed in DEN- Bookbinding in leather, however, was while the PANEL STAMP was being used TELLE bindings with their lacy gold an art believed to have been practiced in the Netherlands as early as the 13th tooled borders, some being the work of by the Copts in Egypt. Surviving ex- century. The art of CUIR-CISELg was also theDeromefamily.See:DERoME amples of Coptic bindings, in red and practiced in German speaking coun- STYLE. English binding deteriorated in brown leather, from the 8th and 9th tries. Gothic bindings continued to be the first half of the 18th century, partly centuries, represent a maturity of style produced in Germany and Eastern because English craftsmen hung on to and a variety of techniques which would Europe until after the 16th century; the cottage style after it had lost its indicate experience in bookbinding that however, by about 1470 or so, gold effectiveness, and partly because they probably developed over hundreds of tooling was introduced into northern then began working with the uninspir- years. Unlike European bindings of Italy (probably Venice), with the in- ing HARLEIAN STYLE. And yet, the 18th later times, they appear to have been fluence of the Near East being seen in century produced ROGER PAYNE, a executed by specialists in diverse forms the designs, the pattern of individual bookbinder who has been called Eng- of leather decoration and display a tools, as well as the superior delicacy land's greatest, and one of the few wide range of artistry, including tool- of the workmanship. English binders the French thought ing, piercing, and working with a stylus. Until about the middle of the 16th worthy of copying. In addition,the The earliest known Islamic bindings century the gold tooled bindings pro- 18th century produced another of Eng- were influenced by Coptic methods and duced in Italy we-- the best in Europe; land's great bookbinders, EDWARDS oF techniques. The format they used for other countries, especially France, imi- HALIFAX, who produced some remark- these early books was what we some- tated the Italian style. By 1538, how- able TRANSPARENT vELLUM BINDINGS. times refer to today as OBLONG, or ever, was being used The use of onlays and inlays in- "landscape." At first the Islamic bind- in France, replacing calfskin, and from creased during the 19th century, the ers tooled only in blind, and in a formal that time onward the Parisian crafts- bindings oftenbeing tooledinthe

d bookMnding 31 bookbinding

cathedral style. See: CATHEDRAL BIND- of Printing in 1948, has influenced, at periodical issues (library binding and INGS. From about 1840 to 1880 there least to some degree, the concepts of hand binding) are received to final in- was little in leather binding design of virtuallyall contemporary spection are as follows: in any country, the emphasis being on English and American bookbinders. NOTE: B refers to blankbook binding, delicacy and precision in tooling in the (71, 89, 94, 157, 200, 202, 225, 236, E to edition binding, H to hand bind- manner of previous times. The 19th 242, 243, 252, 270, 271) ing, and L to library binding. century witnessed three major factors Operations. There is a reasonably which have had an enormous effect on well-marked distinction between that B EH L bookbinding to this day: 1) the rise part of the bookbinding trade dealing x xEntering record of edition binding with its rapid devel- with books meant to be read, known as x x Folding (only occasionally opment of a great variety of machines letterpress (from the time when all in hand binding) designed to produce books by the mil- books were printed by letterpress), and Sorting to remove incor- lions; 2) a severe decline in the quality those intended to be written in, called rectly or poorly ruled of both paper and leather produced stationery binding. Each of these may sheets for the manufacture of books; and 3) again be divided into four groups, ac- x x x Gathering (only in hand the introduction of cloth as a book cording to the particular class of bind- binding if sheets have to covering material. See: BOOK CLOTH. ing involved: be folded; in edition In the latter part of the last century binding, gathering new vigor was infused into fine binding Letterpress binding sometimes follows the largely tbrough the efforts of MARIUS 1. Extra leather binding, i.e., hand tipping on of endpapers) MICHEL inFrance and THOMAS J. binding x xCollating COBDEN-SANDERSON in England. 2. Library binding xRemoving spine folds (for In France, following World War I, 3. Edition (or publisher's) binding oversewing or adhesive the origins of contemporary binding 4. Miscellaneous binding, e.g., binding) are to be found in the work of PIERRE pamphlet binding x xPulling (in preparation for LEGRAIN during his brief career as a Stationery binding resewing through the bookbinder in the 1920s. His influence 1. Blankbook (account-book) folds) was enormous and is still being , binding x xKnocking out the old back- and, in turn, those he influenced, in- 2. Manifold binding ing ridge (if required) cluding PAUL BONET, have had consid- 3. Exercise and notebook binding x xMending, guarding, gen- erable influence upon their successors. 4. General office and stationery eral repairs, etc. The influence of Cobden-Sanderson binding, e.g., checkbook binding. x xGuarding plates, refolding was also felt well into the 20th century. maps, making stubs, etc. The fact that he was an amateur book- The operations of bookbinding begin x x xPressing (bundling) binder and not apprenticed to the trade with the folding of the sheets into sec- xxx xMaking joints for blank- of bookbinding seemed, in part, any- tions (or signatures) and conclude, in books, or endpapers for way, to have freed him from the dele- libraryandeditionbinding,with others terious influences that held sway during casing-in; and in hand binding, with Guarding first and last a great part of the 19th century, as the pasting down of the board papers. three folios (sections) manifested in the generally poor work- The finishing of a hand-bound book, x x xMarking and preparing manship and even poorer materials while also a part of bookbinding, is for sewing plus a mania for retrospective binding. generallyconsideredtobeartistic xxx xSewing and attaching end- Cobden-Sanderson founded an amateur work. In a very general sense, the op- papers or joints school of binding, which proceeded to erations may be divided intothree Nipping or smashing flourish under DOUGLAS COCKERELL, very broad categories:the steps in- Fraying cords who was Cobden-Sanderson's appren- volved in preparation for binding, FOR- xx xx Gluing up the spine tice at the Doves Bindery. Cockerell, WARDING, and finally, FINISHING (1 ). xxxx Trimming (See alternative also, through his as well as his Preparation includes all the operations hand binding method, bindings, has had a considerable influ- up to and including folding, most of below) ence on the craft. which are actually the work of the Cutting fore edge out of English bookbinding fell on hard printer and not the bookbinder. (See: boards times between 1920 and the Second BINDERY WAREHOUSE.) Forwarding, as xx x xRounding World War, not in small part because the name connotes, carries the book up x x xBacking of book collectors' desire to have their to covering and pasting down (or Cleaning off spine and books in original mint condition (in- casing-in),as well as edge gilding, drying cluding book jacket), a desire which marbling, etc. Finishing includes let- Clothings persists to this day. The fine binder had tering and any decoration. Since edi- Making tongue but little opportunity to apply modern tion and library bindings are blocked x xLining spine concepts of design to modern books. (letteredand/ordecorated)before Cutting head and tail out Bookbinding following the war was being cased, forwarding and finishing of boards given considerable impetus by the ef- are somewhat intermingled. The se- x x Cutting and preparing forts of EDGAR MANSFIELD in design quence of operations followed by the boards and ROGER POWELL in construction. bookbinder or bindery from the time Paring and slotting tongue The teaching of Mansfield, which com- the sheets (in edition binding and occa- xCase-making menced at the (then) London School sionally hand binding) or books and/or x x Cutting leather book blocks 32 book cloth

BEHL compact entity, lies flat when closed, The breaking strength sum for em- Making spring-back (may and is loosely jointed at the spine. Good bossed cloths has been established as be done in batches in pressing (or casing-in), gluing, and es- 25% less than the figure for cloths that advance) pecially good rounding and backing, are not embossed. Attaching spring-back are essential, as also is the use of boards Pyroxylin treated fabrics, which were (and levers) of a suitable weight. Accuracy is a introduced in about 1910, represented Making plate or somewhat vague term, but is manifest a major breakthrough in book cloth. type for blocking in the ability of the book to stand ver- The term "pyroxylin treated," as ap- xBlocking case tically without leaning or falling over. plied to book cloths, means either x x Attaching boards This is accomplished by square trim- pyroxylin coated or pyroxylin impreg- Trimming ends of spring- ming, proper attachment of the boards nated cottonfabrics. The difference back (or case-making and casing-in), and between the two is the quantity of pro- x x Paring leather square cutting of the boards. (56,57, tective coating applied and the manner x x Covering 89, 92, 100, 115, 126, 135, 152,170, of application, as well as the type of x x Trimming margin of 236, 279, 280, 320,335,343,371, material treated. The pyroxylin compo- turn-ins 372) sition consists of gelatinized nitrocellu- Siding book blocks. Flat, smooth boards of vary- lose, a plasticizer to impart softness xCasing-in and/or ing lengths and thicknesses, with one and flexibility, coloring matter, and a building-in end shaped to fit the spine of a rounded solvent. The fabrics used for impreg- x x Pasting down board papers book, and used to support the cover nation are lightweight muslins, while x x Pressing while pasting down the board paper or those used for coating are heavier drills, Cutting index leather joint, and also when tooling the twills, and sheeting. Coated fabrics are Numbering (occasionally turn-ins or doublure. The block pre- sometimes embossed in imitation of follows folding) vents strain at the joint of the book. leather. The surface of impregnated x x Decorating and/or book cloth. A generic term for thewoven fabrics retain the texture of the base lettering fabrics used in covering books. They materials. Pyroxylin impregnated fab- x x Cleaning off are usually, but by no means always, rics are superior to starch-filled fabrics JaCketing woven cotton fabrics, which may be because their surfaces are more water bleached or mercerized, dyed, filled with resistant, they are more resistant to There are four basic characteristics pigment colors, gelatinized, starched, insects and fungi, and are generally of a well-bound (modern) book: flexi- coated or impregnated, calendered, and stronger. They wear well and are par- bility, durability, solidity, and accuracy. embossed (grained). They are divided ticularly suitable for use in library Flexibilityis a characteristic of the into classes according to type and qual- binding. Pyroxylin coated fabrics are spine of the book which allows the ity. Specifications for the fabrics used used extensively in edition binding be- book to open freely with minimum for book cloths are: cause of the decorative effects obtain- strain on the structure. The factors af- Book Cloths able. They, too, are water repellant and fecting flexibility include the method (starch-filled and impregnated) immune to insect attack and fungi, but of sewing (or otherwise joining the Group Weight they do not wear as well as impreg- leaves or sections), the grain direction A Light nated cloths becar3e of cracking at the of the paper, the presence of tipped-in B Medium joints and occasional peeling of the plates, the characteristics of the paper, Heavy coating. the lining of the spine, rounding and C-1 Heavy Book cloths for cheaper editions are backing, and finally, the materials and Buckrams closelywoven,lightweight,starch- techniques used in covering the book. (starch-filled and impregnated) filled cotton fabrics, sometimes lightly See: FLEXIBLE SEWING; OvERSEWING; Group Weight embossed to conceal the weave of the ADHESIVE BINDING; MACHINE DIREC- Light fabric. They are generally attractive but TION; PAPER; SPINE LINING; HOLLOW Medium have little strength or durability. They BACK; TIGHT BACK. Durabilityisa Heavy are also vulnerable to water spotting characteristic of a binding which en- The specific (minimum) requirements and soiling, and cannot be wiped clean. ables it to withstand flexing, abrasion, for these fabrics are as follows below: In addition, they are generally unsuit- impact, tearing, and staining or soiling. Itis built into a binding in certain places, but particularly in the sewing, Group Stripped-cloth Warp plus filling Breaking strength Breaking attachment of the endpapers, rounding weightnot threads per inch sum (warp plus strength and backing, the lining of the spine, less than: not less than: filling)not not less and the attachmeut of the boards (in less than: than: hand binding), or casing-in or building- Pounds Pounds in (in edition and library binding). In- Ounces/square yard Warp Filling ferior materials, and especially inferior A 1.7 92 60 38 15 adhesives, spine linings, endpapers and 2.1 104 77 50 20 3.4 104 covering materials will adversely affect 105 55 42 C-1 4.2 94 120 64 48 durability.See: ROUNDING; BACKING; 4.7 58 110 65 35 ENDPAPERS; LACING-IN; CASING-IN. 6.0 106 165 100 55 Solidity is a characteristic a book dis- 7.9 110 200 120 70 plays when it has the appearance of a

,J book conservation 33 book label

able for printing by offset lithography. soft which disinte- CHEMISE of soft leather, such as DOE The book cloth used in library bind- grated in the presence of glue unless it SKIN (1), or,in the case of blank- ing is generally of two types, pyroxylin waslinedwithpaper. ARCHIBALD books, a material such as canvas, sewn impregnatedandstarchfilled.The LEIGHTONisgenerally credited with or slipped over a leather-covered book Library Binding Institute specifications being the first to introduce a really for protection against abrasion, mois- for impregnated cloth, i.e., , durable cloth for covering books. The ture,light,etc.Softleather covers call for a base fabric of cotton, the first true book cloth was a dyed and were common intheMiddle Ages warp yarns of which are to be woven in glazed calico, prepared with a starch and early Renaissance, and canvas or pairs, and with specifications the same filler to make it resistant to the mois- cloth slip-on covers are still being used as for group F, above. In addition, the ture in glue. for blankbooks. (115) Institute requires thatthe dye used The first cloth had little character book crafts. The operations that are car- must penetrate through the fabric so and was aesthetically unpleasant.It ried out in the production of books, that both sides will be covered equally was also without natural texture and including papermaking, printing, de- prior to the application of the impreg- the threads gave it a somewhat raw and sign of books, design and production nating compound (except in the case of unfinishedappearance.Whatwas of illustrations, and bookbinding. (335) "linen" type finishes). The impregnat- needed was some sort of decoration book-drill. 1. A linen cloth used to rein- ing compound must be uniform and which would make the threads less force endpapers. This type of reinforce- homogeneous and be of either the nitro- obvious. When this came about, it took ment is sometimes required because cellulose or cellulose acetate type. The the form of embossed grains worked on opening the cover, particularly in the weight of the impregnating compound the material, either in the roll or piece. case of side sewn books which have must constitute at least 10% of the One of the earliest designs, introduced little flexibility, strains the sewing and total weight of the finished fabric and in 1831, was a water finish, which may will eventually cause the to must contain no oxidizable oils. The have been an outgrowth of the watered break away unless it is reinforced. 2. plasticizer, including oil (if any), must silk patterns that were introduced in A high-speedelectricdrillused for not exceed 20% by weight of the im- 1828; it was used only for a short producing holes of a very small di- pregnating compound, nor must the period because of its high cost and ameter through the paper of books to weight of the pigment exceed 25% of poor durability. See also: CLOTH GRAIN- be overcast but not resewn. A similar the compound. Residual solvents,if ING. drill, usually in a press, is used to drill any, are not to exceed 0.01% by weight For several years following the in- holes completely through the leaves of the finished fabric, and the pH of troduction of cloth,it was the usual of a book that is to be side sewn. the clo'h,as measured by standard practice of binders to buy the cloth in book forming and pressing machine. A methods, is not to be less than 6.5 nor its basic white color, and then have it machine used in edition binding which more than 7.5, except in the case of the dyed, filled, and otherwise prepared for applies heat and pressure by means of use of acid dyes, in which case the pH use, or to dye and finish it themselves. "creasers" to shape the spine of the must not be less than 6.0. Cloth specifi- Embossing was done at first by means text block. Such a machine is generally cations state that the finished cloth shall of ribbon embossers, but this was ex- designed to he used in conjunction be sufficiently water resistant to permit pensive, and the larger binderies did with a CASING-IN MACHINE. See also: no penetration of water within a period their own embossing by means of man- BulumNG-1N mActuNE. (320, 433) of ten minutes, as determined by the ually operated, heated rollers. By the book jacket. A wrapper originally used test. The finished cloth is to be 1840s, however, the complete manu- to protect the covering material of the sufficiently grease resistant to permit no facture of finished book cloth had be- book from soiling or other damage, penetration of oleic acid within a period come a separate business. but now also used for promotional pur- of five minutes, as determined by the Notwithstanding its obvious advan- poses. It may be plain, printed, or ring test. The finished cloth must be tages, it was not until the middle of the illustrated, and is flush with the covers capable of adhering permanently to 19th century that cloth largely replaced of the book at head and tail, but folded boards and board papers under normal paper in regular edition binding. The over the fore edge of both covers. It processing using either an animal glue rapid increase in the use of cloth was isusually detachable. Modern book or a resinous adhesive, and must resist largely due to the successful methods jackets are often very elaborately de- rub-off to the degree that loss by abra- that were developed of blocking in signed and are frequently printed in sion shall not exceed 8% by weight of gold on cloth-covered cases. It was then color. The book jacket, in one form the fabric, when subjected to abrasion possible to give cloth bindings a fin- or another, can be traced batk to the for 10 minutes by flint paper (2/0), ished appearance which enabled them 16th century. Also called "book wrap- on a disc 2 inches in diameter rotating to be compared favorably with hand- per," "dust cover," "," "dust at 1,250 rpm under 3 pounds of pres- tooled leather and, therefore, accept- wrapper,""jacket,"and"wrapper." sure. The finished cloth is to be free of able as a permanent binding. (71, 89, (12, 156, 252) marked odor, and its fastness to light 147, 187, 188, 209, 236, 264, 286, book jacketingmachine. A machine shall be such that it will not lose color 326, 341) which automatically places jacketson or fade when subjected to fadeometer book conservation. See: CONSERVATION; newly bound editionbindings. The exposure for 15 hours. RESTORATION. majority of such machines can jacket Cloth asa covering materialfor book corners. Protective caps for the cor- books up to a maximum of 10 by 8 books is said to have been introduced, ners of book covers, sometimes made by 2 inches, generally at speeds up to in England, by William Pickering, po, of leather, but also of metal or the 35 books or more per minute. (343) sibly as early as 1821-23, although same material that covers the book. book label. A simple printed or engraved books bound in burlap go back to the Also called "corners." See also: BOSSES. name ticket (usually paper but some- 1760s. Pickering's cloth was calico, a bookcovers. A protectivecoveror times leather), stuck to the inside of booklet 34 book rest

the upper cover or one of the front some book papers are made on cylin- pression "ex libris" included), or very flyleaves of a book, generally for pur- der and hand molds. elaborately designed, frequently with poses of identification or ownership. Uncoated book papers are used in heraldic emblems or insignia. A more elaborate label is known as a the printing of periodicals, books, The use of the can be BOOKPLATE. (69) pamphlets, and the like, and are con- dated back to at least as early as 1516, booklet. A small book. The term "book- verted into other products such as but in England, France, and Germany let," like PAMPHLET, has been defined tablets, ledger paper, etc. They are they did not become popular until the in a number of ways, including: 1) an generally made on a Fourdrinier ma- 18th century. There was a tremendous affectedterm fora short book or chine and may or may not be sur- revival in their use and study in the pamphlet; 2) a small book, commonly faced sized. They are made to various 1890s, and again since about 1965. bound in paper and generally used for bulk specifications and ina variety During both periods collectors have advertising purposes; 3) a small book of finishes, including antique, eggshell, formedsocieties,producedjournals containing up to but not more than machine,English,andsuper-calen- and publications, and actually com- 24 pages, which is sufficient for classi- dered, as well as in special or fancy missioned many for their ficationas larger than a pamphlet; finishes. Uncoated papers are made own sake, that is, not necessarily in- 4) a stitched pamphlet of eight or more in basis weights 30 to 150 pounds tended for use in books, but rather pages, usually with a cover, and small (25 x 38 500), the most common for exchange with other collectors. enough to be carried in one's ; weights being 30 to 70 pounds. Over the years many eminent en- 5) a publication containing more pages Coated papers are used in the print- gravers have designed bookplates, and than a pamphlet but fewer than a ing of periodicals, books, pamphlets, among the examples still extant are a book and which may have a paper, etc., where the use of fine halftone great number which were executed limp, or stiff cover; (6) any pamphlet illustrations may be required. They are with considerable skill. Because of the that is sewn or stitched but not per- well sized and possess good tearing relative scarcity of engravers in Amer- manently bound; and 7) a paper-cov- strength. The base papers are coated ica before 1800, bookplates were rare ered publication in book format rang- with white mineral pigments mixed before that time; however, since about ing in size from a few pages to a with adhesives such as casein, starch, 1840, they have been fairly common small-scale edition of a book. (139, latex,resin, orglue,either on the in this country. 142, 256, 316) papermaking machine as part of the Their use in libraries is quite com- book lice. Very small wingless insects of manufacturing process or as a sepa- mon today, but in some institutions, the order Corredentia, usually of the rate operation subsequent to thc manu- largely for reasons of economy, the family Atropidae, that will attack pa- facture of the base paper. Waxes or bookplate has been replaced by a rub- per and book materials, and appear soaps may also be added to the coat- ber stamp. (69, 200) capable of living on mold and mildew. ing mixtures to add to the finish and book pocket. A receptacle of stiff paper, Also called "deathwatch." See also: feel of the paper. The mineral pig- cloth, buckram, leather, or an ordinary BOOKWORMS. ments employed include clay,satin envelope, pasted on the inside of a .1.See: REGISTER.2. Any white, barium sulfate, calcium carbo- book usually the lower cover hold printed or woven paper or other ma- nate,calciumsulfite,andtitanium loose material, maps, charts, user cards, terial, an inch or 2 wide and usually oxide, which may be applied as such etc. Some book pockets, such as those 4 or more inches in length, used in or in mixtures, the selection of the found in many English (as well as marking a place in a closed book for combination used being determined by Continental) almanacs from the late future reference. are fre- the effect required. The adhesives and 17th to the early 18th centuries, have quently decorative, carrying advertise- the amounts used are selected accord- concertina (expansion) folds at head ments or commemorative illustrations. ing to the surface strength of the coat- and tail and open at the fore edge. book papers. A class or group of cul- ing and its resistance to moisture and Sometimes a COMPENSATION GUARD is tural papers which have in common vehicles usedintheprintinginks. required to provide for the thickness characteristics that, in general, make Coated papers may be coated on one of the material in the pocket. The them suitable for the graphic arts. The or both sides with a single or double opening of the typical pocket is at the various characteristics are designed to coating. Virtually allare supercalen- head, or less often, at the binding edge. meet the requirements of the method dered, with finishes ranging from a dull (12) of printing and the end use of the pub- matte to a high gloss. The basis weights book repairer. The so-called one man licationproduced. Book papers are for these papers range from 30 to 150 bookbinder or repairer, an itinerant produced from rag pulps, mechanical pounds (25 x 38 500), with 40 to bookbinder who offers to bind, rebind, and chemical wood pulps, esparto 80 pounds being most common. Coated restore and/or clean books in a library, pulp, cotton fiber pulps, reclaimed pa- papers usually have a brighter color, generally quickly and at low cost. Book per stock, or combinations of different greater opacity, and a higher finish repairers are not nearly so numerous pulps. Mineral fillers, sizing, coloring than uncoated book papers. (17, 36, as they were in the past; however, they matter, or other materials are added 40, 63, 78, 323, 346, 366) stillexist, and probably many thou- to the pulp in whatever combination bookplate. A label, usually printed or en- sands of books have been "restored," is needed to give the appearance, graved, frequently with a distinctive some well and some poorly, by these strength, opa,:ity, brightness, print- design,identifyingthe owner ofa itinerant bookbinders. (131) ability, permanence, etc., to fit the im- book, and usually pasted or tipped to book rest. A device designed to hold a mediate or end use of the paper. The the inside of the upper cover. Book- book in position during the tooling of bulk of this type of paper is produced plates may be simple to the point of the area where the spine curves around on a conventional FOURDRINIER MA- giving only the name of the library or onto the sides.Its advantage isthat CHINE and is machine dried; however, other owner (sometimes with the ex- it provides a better angle at which to book sander 35 book sizes

work, as well as better sighting. The etc.,unless qualified,arepractically text block by1/4 inch; however, the sloping sides of a FINISHING PRESS are meaningless.See:SIZES OFPAPER. size of the bound book. assuming 1/4 also used for the same purpose. (130) Untrimmed sizes for three commonly inch squares will make the height of book sander. A machine used in library used sheet sizes are given below. The the book the same as the sizes given. binderies to remove the spine folds of customary trim of inch at head It should be mentioned that not all a book having binding margins so and tail will reduce the height of the sheet sizes given are folded to produce narrowthatthefoldscannotbe trimmed away in a cutting machine. A Modern sanders can be adjusted to Book sizes remove aslittleas 1/32 inch. The sander is also preferred by many li- Size Name Times Leaves Pages Size of Untrimmed brary binders because it is faster than (in inches) Folded per Sheet per Sheet Page (leaf)

a cutting machine. (164) 25 by 38 folio 1 2 4 25 by 19 books in sheets. "Books" as received by 25 by 38 2 4 8 19 by 121/2 the binder inflat (unfolded) sheets, 25 by 38 3 8 16 121/2 by 91/2 which must he folded, gathered and 25 by 38 sixteenmo 4 16 32 91/2 by 61/4 collated, and which must then have 25 by 38 thirty-twomo 5 32 64 61/4 by 4 any maps, illustrations,etc.,inserted 25 by 38 sixty-fourmo 6 64 128 4 by Ws before the actual binding processes. :"..9 by 25 folio 1 2 4 20 by 121/2 20 by 25 quarto / 4 8 121/2 by 10 The sheets are sometimes identified by 20 by 25 octavo 3 8 16 10 by 61/4 a SIGNATURE (I), which may be either 20 by 25 sixteenmo 4 16 32 61/4 by 5 a letter and/or number, and in the case 20 by 25 thirty-twomo 5 32 64 21/2 by Ws of sets may include the volume num- 20 by 25 sixty-fourmo 6 64 128 31/4 by 21/2 ber, printed at the tail margin (in the 18 by 23 folio 1 2 4 18 by 111/2 direction line) of the first, and occa- 18 by 23 quarto 2 4 8 111/2 by 9 sionally on succeeding pages of each. 18 by 23 octavo 3 8 16 9 by 5 Before the rise of edition binding most 18 by 23 sixteenmo 4 16 32 53/4 by 41/2 18 by 23 thirty-twomo 5 publicationsweredeliveredtothe 32 64 41/2 by 21/4 bookseller in sheets, to be bound to 18 by 23 sixty-fourmo 6 64 128 21/4 by 21/4 the customer's order. "Books in sheets" today is almost exclusively a term re- stricted to edition binding. (83, 335) book sizes. The dimensions of books, as Size names and their equivalents measured, ininches, centimeters, or Old Name Modern Name Abbreviation Symbol millimeters, from head to tail and from spine to fore edges of the cover. The folio folio fo or f descriptions given to book sizes are quarto quarto 4to 4° based on a still currently used system sexto sixmo 6to or 6mo 6' octavo octavo 8mo or 8vo 8' that involves using the size of a leaf duodecimo twelvemo 12mo 12° as a fraction of the folded sheet on sextodecimo sixteenmo 16mo 16' which it was printed. With reference to octodecimo eighteenmo 18mo 18° the printing of books, an even num- vincestmo-quarto twenty-fourmo 24mo 24° ber of leaves always results when a vegisemo-quarto twenty-fourmo 24mo 24' sheet is folded, i.e., 2, 4, 8, 16, etc., trigesimo-decundo thirty-twomo 32mo 32' resulting in printed pages on each side quadragesimo-octavo forty-eightmo 48mo 48° of the leaf, i.e., 4, 8, 16, 32, etc. Ex- sexagesimo-quarto sixty-fourmo 64mo 64' cept for the largestsize,the FOLIO (1), the name of the size indicates the fractional part of the sheet one leaf occupies,e.g.,quarto(2folds,4 British book sizes leaves, 8 pages), 1/4of the sheet; oc- tavo (3 folds, 8 leaves, 16 pages), Vs Size Name Octavo Size Quarto Size of the sheet, etc. In this system, since pott 61/4 by 4 8 by 61/4 books are, printed from different sizes foolscap 63/4 by 41/4 81/4 by 6 of sheets (See: BOOK BASIS), the frac- 71/2 by 5 10 by 71/2 tional designation by itself cannot de- large crown 8 by 51/4 101/2 by 8 note an exact size; thereforeitisa large post 81/4 by 51/4 101/4 by 81/4 common practice to give the name of demy 83/4 by Ws 111/4 by 8 the sheet before the fractional name, post 8 by 5 10 by 8 e.g., royal octavo, which is an octavo small demy 81/2 by 51/4 111/4 by 81/2 medium 9 by 5 111/2 by 9 Ve the size of a sheet 20 X 25 inches small royal 91/4 by 61/4 121/4 by 91/4 or,excludingthe SQUARES, a book royal 10 by 61/4 121/2 by 10 10 X 61/4 inches (before trimming). super royal 101/4 by 6 131/2 by 101/4 Paper is cut to so many sizes, how- imperial 11 by 71/2 15 by 11 ever, that the terms crown, royal, post, books of permanent interest 36 bookworms

books of the very small size indicated. tion. Book supports are available in flourlike debris, so that nothing sub- All folds, following the first, are right- severalforms:1)thespringtype, stantial remains of the shelf;Ptinus angle folds. which hangs from the ribbed shelf fur,the spider beetle, first mentioned The common book-trade designation above (but which sometimes does not by Linnaeus in 1766, which can cause of sizes was originally related to a sheet reach down to the smaller books); 2) severe damage to books, papers, and of handmade paper measuring 19 x 25 the metal support, with a stamped-out leatherifleftundisturbed for long inches, which was the common size of metal tongue that slips under the first periods of time; Anobium punctatum, the papermaking mold. When folded few books; it rests on the same shelf as the common beetle, the lar- to8leaves, or 16 pages, and trimmed, the books t3 be supported, and should vae of which bore long cylindrical each was 61/2 x 91/4inches, approxi- be flanged to prevent it from "spear- holes in books and bookshelves;Cato- mately, and was the standard dimen- ing" or otherwise damaging the books; rama mexicana,the Mexicanbook sion of an8vo.When folded to make 3)the type that locks into the ribbed beetle;Dermestes lardarius,the larder 16 leaves, or32pages, it was a 16 mo. shelf on which the books rest, and beetle, which prefers cheese, ham, eta., With the present great variety of paper which can be difficult to slide if the but which will devour leather if noth- sizes, all dimensions are by necessity locking key becomes twisted; 4) the ing else is available; andRhizopertha only approximate. (52, 69, 140, 156, magnetic support, which is usable only dominica,which has caused extensive 169) onferrousmetalshelves;and5) damage in libraries. books of permanent interest. A category wooden supports, some of which are Most of these so-called bookworms establishedby DouglasCockerell very elaborate and are generally used are small and dark- or reddish-brown. shortly after the turn of the century to support more valuable books, or They enter libraries through windows, in an effortto categorize the time, booksinspecially designated areas. poorly fitting doors, etc., and seem to effort and funds to be expended in The better book supports have a felt- proliferate in libraries where dust, dirt, binding books of an "intermediate" or cork-covered base, especially for heat, darkness, and poor ventilation naturei.e., booksofpermanent use on wooden shelves, and, for valu- are prevalent. scholarly, historical, etc., interest, but able books, a felt- or cork-covered face. The measures used over the years of relatively little monetary or esthetic The typical metal support is generally for the control or elimination of book- interest, which should be solidly and available in two sizesregular, about worms are virtually legion, including well bound, but for which the most 6 inches tall, and oversize, about 9 numerous remedies to be rubbed into expensive work would beinappro- inches tall. leather, added to paste, sprinkled on priate. In Cockerell's day, this cate- book wall. The arrangement in a double- bookshelves and books, etc. Among the gory of books was bound by hand, sided case of one or more sets of books many remedies used are: alum and sewn with linen thread around cotton displaying the upper and lower covers thymol,alum andvitriol(sulfuric or linen tapes, which were secured be- of craft bookbindings where compre- acid), (oil of) anis, beeswax, behzene, tween split boards (when the books hensive designs flow across adjacent bitumen, borax, buckbean, cajeput oil, were large and heavy), and covered surfaces to create a unified image. The camphor, chili, chloropicrin, cinchona, with strong cloth or the most durable book wall is the creation of the con- cinnamon, cloves and oil of cloves, leather, or a combination of the two, temporary English bookbinder PHILIP colcynth, varnish, copper, cre- e.g.,quarterorhalfbindings.In SMITH.(311) sote, derris, (oil of) eucalyptus, for- greatlymodifiedform,theLibrary bookworms. The larva of any of some malin (formaldehyde), kerosine, Binding Institute has continued to de- 160 species of beetles. The mature fe- khuskhus, lac varnish, lavender, mar- fine this category of books.See:PER- male insect lays her eggs on the edges gosia, mercuric chloride, mirbane oil, MANENT MATERIALS.See also:BOOKS of books, or in the crevices of book- nitrobenzene, muriatic (hydrochloric) OF TEMPORARY INTEREST; BOOKS OF shelves, and the larvae, when hatched, acid, musk, myrrh, napthalene, nico- vALUE.(83) burrow into the books, or shelves, rid- tine, orrisroot oil, ozone, pennyroyal, books of temporary interest. Books that dling them with tiny tunnels. Various pepper,petroleum, phenol, porpoise must be bound and kept clean and bookworms, as they are mistakenly oil, pyrethrum powder, Russia leather usable for only occasional use. This called, have been identified, or sup- shavings, sandalwood, sassasfras, shel- category assumesthatthe handling posedly identified, among whichare: lac, snuff, thyme, thymol, turpentine, such books receive and the storage Anobium domesticum, A. eruditus, A. vermouth, and wormwood. Some of area of the library will suffice for less Paniceum, A. pertinax, A. punctatum, these remedies were totally ineffective: than a full and "permanent" binding, and A.striatum; Acarus cheyletusand some were temporarily effective; and which is often not the case.See also: A. eruditus; Dermestes lardarius; Aeco- some were as destructive as, or even BOOKS OF pERMANENT INTEREST. phora pseudospretella; Sitodrepa pani- more so than, the pests themselves. books of value. Books that are valuable ceum; A ttagenus pellio; Lepisma sac- Any preparation or process used to and/or rare, which may or may not charina; Ptinus fur; Antherenus varius; destroy the larvae or beetles must have have any special scholarly value, or Lyctus brunneus; Catorama mexicana; sufficient residual effect not only to books of special interest to a particu- andRhizoperthadomin,ca.Of the destroy existing larvae -but also larvae lar library, and which are bound in types, the most notorius and destruc- which will hatch 'subsequent to the the best manner and with the best ma- tiveare:Sitodrepapaniceum,the initial treatment. Treatment should be terials.See also:BOOKS OF PERMANENT drugstore beetle, the female of which appliedinconjunctionwith proper INTEREST. is capable of producing as many as ventilation, temperature and humidity book support. A wood or metal device 800,000descendants in a year;Lyctus control, and cleanliness, so as to dis- generally placed to the right side of a brunneus, thepowder-postbeetle, courage future infestation. row of books on a shelf to support which consumes wooden bookshelves Fumigation is frequently used to rid and maintain them in a vertical posi- and cases, packing the holes with a libraries of beetle and larvae infesta- tj book wrapper 37 Bradel binding

tion. Four general methodsare used: the cover of a book for ornamental 1) generally produced from two or three fumigation of the entire library value or to prevent the leather from shades of brown and one throwing of with hydrogen cyanide, carbon disul- being scratched or otherwise marred. black.Afterthecolorshave been fide,or methyl bromide, which,of Bossesoriginallywereattachedto dropped on, drawn with a stylus and course, necessitates closing the library books that were meant tolie on a forseveral combed in the usual manner, a rake is days; 2)fumigationof lectern and not stand on bookshelves. drawn through the colors right and left batches of books in specially designed Notallbooks were provided with across the entire surface of the size in vacuum chambers, with a combination them, and they were more common in (1:9 by weight) of ethylene oxide and such a manner that the teeth of the Germany than elsewhere. There was second row trace exactly through the carbon dioxide, which is a method well usually one boss at each corner of pattern left by the teeth of the first row. suited to the fumigation of new ac- both covers and another in the middle quisitions;3) A somewhat different pattern is pro- routine fumigation of of each cover, or ten in all, although duced by treating the colors in the same the entire collection, carried out batch- the center bosses were sometimes left wise in a chamber, using methyl bro- manner butomittingthemarbling off. Itis commonly assumed that the comb and spreading the drops of color mide; and 4) fumigation ofone or use of bosses declined with the advent only with a stylus into very narrow more books in a small air-tight box, of printing from movable metal type, using cross lines followed by raking. (151, paradichloro-henzenecrystals, the proliferation of books, and vertical 327) which is a method suitable for use by shelving in cupboards and book stacks. the box. 1. A container for maps, bundles of privatecollector.Although the Inaddition, the relativeincreasein first method is loose sheets, samples of materials, dis- potentially dangerous the use of pasteboard instead of wood- integrating books, etc.,that may be and causes considerable inconvenience, en boards also reduced the use of open at one end or completely closed itis the only one which will destroy bosses, although in Germany, where in. See also: CUT CORNER PAMPHLET beetles or larvae which are on the wooden boards were still common in FILE; pAMPHLET BOX; PRINCETON FILE; bookshelves.Seealso:BOOK LICE; the 16th century, they continued to be PULLOFF BOX; ; SOLANDER BOX. SILVERFISH. (47, 143, 247, 335) used more often than elsewhere. To- 2. A leather "marble" consisting of book wrapper. See: BOOK JACKET day, books with bosses are frequently boomer press. A now obsolete modified marbling water thrown oninsmall kept in boxes so as to prevent damage drops, followed by small spots form ofthe STANDINGPRESS. The to adjacent books on the shelves. See ofbrownandblack.Additional power of the boomer press was ob- also: ROLLER SHOES. See pLATE I. (69, tained by a combination of four levers marbling water is then thrown on in 83,236) large drops, followed by small spots of workingontogglejoints,through bottle rubber. See: GOLD RUBBER. which passed a blue sprinkled on. When allis dry, right and left hand bottom color. The base color applied to scarlet and two or three coats of orange screw. The rotation of these screws a leather and then corrected to the are sprinkled on. The leather is bent caused the pressing surfaces toap- desired shade by the application of proach or move apart with a uniform and twisted in several places during the succeeding colors during the finishing course of applying the colors and water motion, according to the direction of process. In SUEDE LEATHER, however, to form veins. 3. A surface pattern in the rotation. This press had several the bottom color is the final shade. leather, usually black calfskin, consist- advantages over the regular standing (164, 248) ing of fine, box-shaped creases formed press, including: 1) once the pressure bottom combs. See: MARBLING COMBS. by BOARDING (1) the skin in two direc- was applied it did not release slightly bottom edge. See: LOWER EDGE. tions, head to tail and belly to belly. as the ordinary press is likely to do, bottom split. The innermost laver ofa See also: WILLOW (2) 4. The trough- so that thematerial under pressure split cowhide. Because they are rela- remainedunder like receptacles on a folding machine fullpressure,and tivelythick,cowhides aregenerally into which the folded sections drop. 5. could, therefore, be pressed in some- split into at least two layers (and some- One of the magazines of a gathering what less time; and 2) the enormous times three) if they are to be used as pressure machine. (66, 152, 339, 363) it was capable of exerting. a "light" leather. If split once, the two box pocket. A stiffened three-dimensional (8, 97) layers are the grain and flesh splits; border. BOOK POCKET. 1. An ornamental design in a if split twice, the layers are the grain, box side. A cowhide cut in half down the repeat pattern in blind or gold around middle, and bottom split. When proc- the edges of the covers of a book, backbone, full chrome, semi-chrome, essed into leather the bottom split is orvegetabletanned,andusually frequently enclosing one or more cen- called a BUFFING (1). (363) ter pieces of a different design. 2. An colored black. It has a grain pattern of bouilly. See: ctnR-Boultu. finebox-shapedcreasesformed by ornamental design along one or more bound flexible. A term sometimes used to BOARDING (1) in two directions, head sides of a page of an illuminated manu- indicate a book that has been sewn on totailandbellytobelly. When script or of the body of printed mat- singleor doubleraisedcords,the ter, coloreditisusually called WILLOW or surrounding anilluminated slips of which have been laced into the SIDE. (61) miniature. boards. See also: FLEXIBLE SEWING; bradawl. An AWL with a chisel edge used boricacid. A weak,volatileacid LAC1NG-IN. (115) (}13B03), obtained for piercing holes in boards in prepa- naturally, or by bound in. An insert which has beensewn ration for LAC1NG-IN. (133) treating borax with a mineral acid. It in with the sections of a book. See Bradel binding. A type of binding having is used to thicken and preserve ad- also: BIND IN. (131) a hollow back, and not unlike a library hesives made of GUM ARABIC. (142) bouquet marble. A drawn marble pattern binding, except that it is considered to Borneo cutch. See: ACACIA. formed in the manner of small flowers be temporary. The style was originated bosses. Brass or other metal knobs, studs, sidebysideand used mainlyfor in Germany by Alexis Pierre Bradel, SHOES, or ornamentation fastened to marbled endpapers. The bouquetis also known as Bradel l'aine, and also Braille book 38 brighter binding

as Bradel-Dereime, son-in-law and suc- applied to a printing surface. Made of have finer breaks than looser ones, and cessor to Nicholas-Denis Deriime. The wood, it was round, flat at one end, a leather like calfskin will have a much style was taken to France sometime and had a handle at the other end. finer break than cowhide. between 1772 and 1809. Bradel bind- 2. A printer's hand inking roller, also Improper methods of finishing may ings generally have split boards into used in making PRINTS. cause an otherwise fine break to be- which are attached the extensions of brayer prints. Decorative endpapers and come coarse, but the kind of tannage the spine lining cloth. The edges are cover prints produced by rolling an has little effect on break. (102, 248, uncut, sometimes with the head edge inked brayer over paper under which 363) beinggilt.They generallyhavea flat objects, such as leaves, ferns, etc., breaking length. The length of a strip of leather or linen spine. In France the have been placed. Alternative methods paper, cut either in the machine or style was known as "Cartonnage a la are to ink the objects and press the cross direction, or a strip of cloth, cut Bradel," or as "engist."See also: paper on them with a clean brayer, or either in the warp or filling direction, LESNE, FRANcOIS A. D. (347) to roll the inked brayer over the paper which would break of its own weight Braille book (Braille binding). A book and then place objects underneath and when suspended vertically. It is a value printed by the Braille process, i.e., the roll with an ink of a different color. calculated from the tensile strength of dampened paperisembossed with (183) the material. Under normal circum- codes of raised dots. Braille books are Brazil wood. The heavy wood of any of stances paper will have a greater break- bound much like other books except the tropical trees, family Leguminosae, ing length inthe machine direction that they are generally liberally stubbed which yield a red, water-soluble dye, than in the cross direction, and cloth a and they are not pressed after casing-in, brazilin (C16H1405), which at one time greater breaking length inthe warp as the pressure would flatten the raised was used to produced coloring mate- direction than in the filling. (42, 98, characters. rials used both in marbling and in dye- 341) Braille printing paper. Paper used in the ing leather. Brazil wood dyes have been breakingstrength. 1. See: BURSTING Braille printing process. Itis usually largely superceded by thesynthetic STRENGTH. 2. The breaking load Or produced from a high quality chemical dyestuffs. force, expressed in pounds per inch, wood pulp in basis weights of 32 to 36 bread crumbs. The particles of ordinary required to rupture a material, such as pounds (17 X 22 - 500). Significant crustless bread, used by some restorers cloth or paper. proptrties required include a smooth to remove loose dust from maps, charts, breathing. A property of leather, charac- surface, good elongation, and high ten- etc., and for dry cleaning the leaves of terized by a resistance to water in the sile strength. (17) books. (173 ) liquid form but having the ability to branding.1. A method of marking a break. 1. The parting of adjacent sections allowthe passageof water vapor. book with hot irons that burn letters or of a book due to failure of the sewing. "Breathing" is considered important in symbols into one or more edges, gen- See also: START. 2. A crack in the gold maintainiig the suppleness and handle erally for purposes of indicating owner- or foil BLOCKING or tooling of a book. of leather, and is one reason why some ship. Branding was most often em- 3. In papermaking, a complete separa- conservationists oppose the use of hard ployed in Mexico, and was initiated in tion of the web of paper, either on or waxes in leather dressings. the early 17th century by the monks in off the machine. 4. In leather manufac- Brethren ofthe Common Life.See: charge of convent libraries. Brands of ture, the minute wrinkles formed when BROTHERS OF THE COMMON LIFE. iron or were used, usually on the grain surface of leather is bent so (Le) Bretons, Pere et Fils. Two renowned the head edge, although it was some- that its grain side is sharply concave. producers of marbled papers of 17th times done onthefore edge and If the wrinkles formed are very fine. century France. They produced finely occasionally on both head andtail and there are many of them to the veined papers, some of which, with fine edges. Unfortunately, the process often linear inch, the leather is said to have veins of gold and silver, were very damaged the covers, title pages, and a fine break, whereas if they are large equisite. The Bretons also made excel- endpapers; however,asa mark of and there arerelatively few to the lent papers stenciled with flowers on ownership, it was effective in deterring linear inch, the leather is said to have paper with a highly calendered surface. the theft of books, as the brand could a coarse break. A very important aspect (217) only be removed by trimming deep of the "break" in leather is that when brick guard. A type Of COMPENSATION into the margins. 2. The process of the leather is flexed to cause the break GUARD, but specifically one side stitched rolling a FLESHER Or SHEEPSKIN with to appear, it should disappear once the to the text block to compensate for hot rolls for the purpose of smoothing leather is again flattened. Since a fine pocket material. (339) the skin. (115, 264, 274) break is considered to be one of the brightening agents. Chemical agents at brashiness. The relative inflexibility of the moreimportantcharacteristicsof one time used extensively in leather cast film of a dry animal glue. The leather, tanners attempt to obtain as dye batches to brighten the color of the term also refers to brittleness of an fine a break as possible. In order to finished leather. One such agent was adhesive resulting from drying, plasti- achieve this, it is necessary to prevent sulfuric acid, which is not only destruc- cizer migration, and the like. (222) excessive cohesion of the fibers in the tive but virtually impossible to remove brass boarded. A leather, usually a cow- grain surface of the leather, which is from leather effectively and completely. hideBUFFING (1),thathasbeen one of the major purposes of FAT- Another was formic acid, which, being boarded by hand or grained with a LIQUORING leather. Break is influenced weaker and more volatile, was less faint parallel line effect. (256) to a great extent by the amount of oil destructive. See also: P.I.R.A. TESTED. brass boards (brass bound bounds). See: inthegrain layer and increases in (298) BACKING BOARDS; CASING-IN BOARDS. with an increase of oil. brighter binding. A movement initiated brayer. 1. An old term for a pestle with The butt area of a skin usually has a in about 1910 in Great Britain by which ink was spread before being finer break than the belly; tighter skins Alexander Philip to encourage libraries

0 brightness 39 brokers

to have their books bound in bright. damage to the hides to a considerable distinguished from an upright page or colorful cloth, so as to enliven the ap- extent over simple salting. (248, 306) "deep fold." pearance of the then drab and colorless . A lightweight board that brocade. 1. A book cloth, generally made bookstacks in the libraries of that time. can be made on either a Fourdrinier or from silk or cotton, woven in jacquard The belief was that brightbindings cylinder papermaking machine. There construction and characterized by all- meant bright cheerful libraries, where- are three types of bristols: 1) index, over formal design of slightly raised as a library filled with dark blue and 2) mill, and 3) wedding. They range floral and figure designs introduced by black bindings had the opposite effect. inthicknessfrom 0.006inchand additional threads in the filling. 2. In See also: BINDING SCHEMES. (261) greater.Theoriginalbristolboard, papermaking, a heavily embossed cover brightness. Originally, a judgement of the made in Bristol. England, was a pasted paper. 3. A marbled paper with a bro- amount of light reflected to the eye board made of rag content paper, but cadelike pattern. (183) from the surface of a material, regard- very little bristol today is of this char- brochure. A "stitched work" (from the less of hue or color saturation. Bright- acter. Bristols are sometimes filled, but French "brocher," to stitch). It is a ness is now measured by optical com- are more commonly pasted or plied, short printed work, with or without a parators.Many factorsaffectthe the thicker sheets being made by pasting paperorself-cover,and sewnor brightness of a material such as paper. sheets of the same stock together until stitched. (139 ) including the degree of bleaching of the desired thickness is attained. They broken (iroken back).1. The tendency the pulp, as well as the addition of are designated as2-ply, of a book to open readily at a place or chemicals. 3-ply,etc., Chemicallytreatedhigh- according to the number of sheets used. places wherethe binding has been grade text and book papers have a The highest grade of bristol is wedding, forced or strained, causing the book to brightness in the range of about 96 followed by index and mill. (17, 234, lose its shape. This may be caused by: (on a scale of 100), coated papers 320) 1) improper opening of a new book range from about 70 to85. while thatistightly bound; 2)improper mechanical wood machine-coated British marble. A marble pattern, withor withoutveins, which somewhatre- backing, which flattens the spine and papers are in the range of about 60 to affects its contour; 3) using paper with 75. Newsprint is generally below 60. sembles the SPANISH MARBLE.Itis usually executed entirelyin varying the grain running at right angles to the (17, 72) spine, resulting in leverage and causing brightness reversion. A paper pulp, and shades Of black, although colors are sometimes used. (241, 369) THROW OUT of one or more sections; particularlyableached paperpulp, 4) brittleness. The property or condition of sections,either with or without which has lost BRIGHTNESS because of plates.thataretoo bulky, and are natural or artificial aging. (17) a material, such as, paper, board, ad- hesives. etc, that causes failure of the forced apart during backing, leaving brime. A finely powdered burnt Gypsum. ridges; and 5) the use of animal glue, Brime is dusted on GOLDBEATERS' SKIN material when it is deformed by bend- ing. As virtually any material will fail during the gluing process before round- in order to eliminate as much friction ing and backing, that is too cold or is as possible during the MOLD (2) stage if bent or folded a sufficient number of not sufficiently times, brittleness is of practical interest flexible.In a TIGHT in the manufacture of gold leaf. (29) BACK leather binding, it may result in brining. A method generally used in the only when deformation producing fail- ridges appearing on the spine where larger abattoirs for curing hides and ure is small or the number of folds is relatively small in number. the leather has been forced away from skins for transportation to tanneries. the paper. 2. A book broken completely After flaying,the hides are washed Over the couise of many years, high acidityinpaper, through so that itis in two or more thoroughly to remove blood and soluble andparticularly pieces. This generally occurs in rela- proteir. matter and the hair is scraped acidity resulting from inorganic acids of low volatility, has been suspected of tively old books, particularly those of under a spray of water. The flesh side the 19th century, in which the paper is brushed vigorously to remove surplus being the chief cause of brittleness in paper. This acidity can be attributed to and glue have become so embrittled and flesh. The hides are then hung in pits inflexible that when the book is opened, or run in large paddles in a very strong several sources: 1) papermaking pro- it breaks apart. (83, 102) solution of sodium chloride, using 30 cedures, e.g., excessive ALUM in sizing or broken line. 1. A blocked or finished line pounds of salt to every 10 gallons of excessivechlorineinBLEACHING or rule intentionally "broken" by uni- water. This gives a very good and uni- (1). which may lead to the formation of acid; 2) ink; and 3) conditions of formly spaced openings. 2. A blocked form salt penetration for heavy hides line that isnot solid as aresult of in 12 to 14 hours. The hides are then storage, which may allow acid gasses breaks in the gold leaf. (256) drained and piled, and treated with salt such as SULFUR DIOXIDE to gain access to the paper, which, in the presence of brokers. Binding agents, who were go- in the WET-SALT1NG process. The purity betweens or self-appointed salesmen of and strength of the brine must be heat and other conditions, may lead to publishers or library binders, and who checked before it is reused, as it may the formation of acid. See also: ACID; solicited binding business and then let ACID GASES; ACIDITY: ACID SIZE; DE- become contaminated with halophilic outthe worktothelowest-priced bacteria. The use of a salt solutionas a ACIDIFICATION; DURABILITY (OF pAPER); bidder ontheirlist.Mason Locke preliminary treatment for preserving FOLDING ENDURANCE. (17, 34, 41, 348) Weems ("Parson Weems"), the creator cowhides has been standard practice in broad (broad fold). 1. A sheet of paper of the George Washington cherry tree South America for many years, and which, after being folded, has the grain myth, seems to have been one such has been in commercial use in the direction running with the shorter di- agent, working between binders and the United States since about 1935. Brin- mension of the paper. 2. A sheet of publisher,Matthew Carey.Binding ing, followed by wet-salting, is amore paper folded in such a manner that the brokers, who flourished in the United expensive method of cure than salting resulting pages are wider than they are States well into the 20th century, are alone; however, it reduces putrefactive deep, i.e., an OBLONG fold or page, as rare today. (131, 308) bronzed edges 40 buffing bronzed edges. A decorative edge pattern face of paper, board, cloth, leather, or impregnated fabrics having a heavy on a book produced by impressing other material. A brush is composed of base. The material used to fill the in- bronze leaf on the edges by means of a gathering of hair or bristles (natural terstices and/or cover the base fabric an engraved roller. The leafisfirst brushes), or some synthetic material. isusually pyroxylin, butit may be pressed into the gravure and then rolled secured in a plastic compound and held starch, china clay, clay, or other non- on the edge. This technique was gen- in a metal ferrule which is crimped fibrous material. erally executed over colored edges, around a handle. A high quality brush . A leather produced from the with albumen or gum arabic being used always has the natural tips of the hairs hides of male deer or elk. It usually to secure the leaf to the paper. Bronzed orbristles.Thevarious shapesof has a suede finish and is oil tanned or edges were employed mainly inthe brushes are achieved by cutting, trim- alum tawed. It has a soft texture, and latter part of the 19th century. ming, and fashioning the root (butt) is pliable and reasonably strong. Ex- bronze leaf. See: DUTCH GOLD. ends of the hairs. A pointed brush, for amples of its use (in England) can be bronze powder. A metallic powder made example,is shaped by inserting the traced back to the 16th century. Imita- from various bronze or brass alloys hairs, tips downward, in a brass "can- tion buckskin is sometimes made from and used principally in lacquer or var- non," in the size and shape made for sheepskin. See also: DEERSKIN. (278, nish vehicles, or with bronzing liquid, the purpose, and trimming them at the 325) as the so-called gold paint. The powder root end. Very superior brushes have a buds. A decorative ornament fillinga can be prepared to duplicate every considerable hold of hair within the small panel on a ROLL (1), usually in shade of gold from a pale or lemon ferrule, sometimes as much as is seen the conventionalized form of a spray color to a deep coppery hue. Bronze beyondtheferrule,whilecheaper bearing buds. (250) powder darkens or discolors after a brushes have but little hold. (66, 233) relatively short time, and this, plus the buffalo. A leather produced in imitation brushing. The process of developing a of RUSSIA LEATHER, but of far greater fact that the paint made from it has a mild luster on the finished surface of lackluster, grainy quality, makes it un- strength than the genuine leather. It is a leather by the action of a rotary made from the hide ofthelarge, suitable for use in bookbinding. (236) brush. The term is also used with refer- Brothers of the Common Life. Associa- shaggy-maned NorthAmericanox, ence to freeing the surface of leather Bison bison, and was used extensively tions of clerics and laymen that origi- of the fine fibrous dust created by buf- nated in the Netherlands in the 14th in covering books in the United States fingi.e., by drawing the skins between in the latter half of the 19th century. century.Thereformers,Gerhard a pair of long rotary brushes. (363) buffed leather. A leather from which the Groote and Florent Radewyns,in- brushing out. See: FIBRILLATION. spired a small group of men at Deven- top surface of the grain has been re- ter (Holland) to join together in commu- B-stage. A secondary stage in the reaction moved. See also: BUFFING (2); COR- nitylifein pursuit of holiness. The of some thermosetting resins, character- RECTED GRAIN. (61) movementspread throughoutthe ized by softening of the resin when buffing. 1. A very thin innermost split of Netherlands and Germany and was heated and swelling when in the pres- a hide, usually a cowhide, which is influential until the time of the Refor- ence of certain liquids, but without colored and grained to give the appear- mation. complete fusing or dissolving. The "b- ance of the outer surface of the hide. One of the principal occupations of stage" is also characterized by a pro- A buffing is created when a hideis the Brothers was the production of gressive increase in viscosity. The resin split into three layers. At one time it books,but,unlikethemonastery portion of an uncured thermosetting was used extensively for linings,as scribes,they establishedtheir book adhesive is usually in this stage. Also well as for covering trade books. It was trade specifically for the purpose of called "resitol." See also: A-STAGE; C- never used in fine bookbinding. 2. The supporting their organization, using the STAGE. (309) process of producing a fine nap on the profits derived from the sale of books buckle.1. The wrinkling near the head grain surface of leather by means of in their missionary work. In addition, and binding edge of a section, which carborundum paper or on the flesh instead of offering their works in Latin, may be caused by paper that is too sides of small skins by the action of an they issued them in the vernacular of thick, or by too many folds in forming emery wheel. In sandpapering the grain the area in which they were produced. the section, and which may be accentu- surface of leather, the sharp edges of At the Convent of St. Jerome at ated by the grain direction of the paper the carborundum, or other abrasive Ghent, the Brothers were noted for the beingincorrecti.e.,runningfrom material, cut the miscroscopic fibrils in excellence of the manuscripts and bind- spine to fore edge rather than head to the grain surface and produce a fine ings they produced. Two examples of tail.2. Book covers or cover boards nap on the surface. Many of the grain their work are embellished with a panel that have been warped and twisted in defects in a leather do not penetrate representing their patron, St. Jerome, severaldirections. See also: COCKLE into the leather nearly to the depth of kneeling before a crucifix. In the back- (1-3). (131) the grain layer, and can be entirely re- ground, beyond the mountains,isa buckle folding. See: FOLDING moved by buffing. When a leather is view ofthebelfryof Ghent, sur- buckram. A BOOK CLOTH made from cot- buffed to a measurable depth, as it may mounted by the dragon, and the spires ton or linen, usually the former, and have to be if the grain defect is very of three churches. closelywoven,occasionallywitha deep, it is said to be buffed; when it is Their first book was issued in 1476 double warp. It is filled or coated and buffed to a lesser depth, it is said to be fromtheNazarethMonasteryin calendered to give it a smooth finish snuffed. When a leather is buffed so Brussels. (141) which blocks well and is reasonably lightly as not to impair the grain pat- brush. An implement used for the appli- durable. Originally, the term applied tern, the leather is said to have a COR- cation of paste, glue, or other adhesive only to a starch-filled fabric; today, RECTED GRAIN. 3. The process of pol- liquid, powder, glair, etc., to the sur- however, it applies also to coated and ishing the leather covers of a book with buffingnette 41 bulk equivalents

a soft fabric wheel. (264, 278, 325, blind or gold built up from individual Caliper/ 358, 363) Pages line and solid tools. (310) 4 Sheets per Inch buffingnette. A water-resistant cloth made bulk. 1. The thickness of the gathered 19.0 420 in imitation of leather. While it is ade- leaves or sections of a book before 19.5 410 quate for the sides of books that re- sewing, or the thickness of the bound 20.0 400 ceive considerable use, asitis stain book before its covers are attached, or 20.5 390 and water resistant, it is not adequate before casing-in. 2. The thickness of a 21.0 380 for full covering, as it does not wear sheet of paper in relation to its weight. 21.5 372 well in the areas of the joints. It is also With two papers of equal weight per 22.0 364 difficult to block, and labels do not ad- ream, the one which "handles" the 22.5 356 here toit well unless the surface is thicker is said to "bulk" the better. 3. 23.0 348 abraded and coated with shellac. (105) The thickness of a specified number of 23.5 340 . A leather which has a yel- sheets of paper or board under a spec- 24.0 332 lowish, cream or white surface and is ified pressure. Bulk here is important 24.5 326 finished with a soft, velvet nap. It is in gauging the thickness of a proposed 25.0 320 produced from cowhide from which book. 4. In papermaking in its most 25.5 314 the grain layer has been removed by correct meaning, "bulk" is the ratio of 26.0 308 FRIZING.Itis an oil-tanned leather. fiber volume of a sheet to total volume, 26.5 302 (351) including air spaces which may be void 27.0 296 build in (building in). The process of plac- or filled with loading or sizing materi- 27.5 290 ing newly cased-in library books be- als. See also: BULK EQUIVALENTS. (17, 28.0 286 tween smooth or brass-bound boards 234, 261, 264) 28.5 280 and applying pressure in a standing bulked up. A deliberate attempt to make 29.0 276 press or hydraulic press, or applying a book thicker and, therefore, of a 29.5 272 dry heat and (considerable) pressure more substantial appearance. Books, 30.0 266 for a brief time (usually 8 to 15 sec- and especially novels, are sometimes 30.5 262 onds) in a hydro-press or BUILDING-IN "bulked up," i.e., printed on BULKING 31.0 258 MACHINE. Building in forms the joints, BOOK PAPER so that a higher price may 31.5 254 compresses the book, secures it firmly be charged. Such paper, however, is 32.0 250 in its case and reduces substantially any often inferiorin both strength and 32.5 246 possibility of board warpage. See also: printing quality to a more compact 33.0 242 CASING-IN. (139) paper. (256) 33.5 238 building-in machine. A machine used to bulk equivalents. The number of pages 34.0 234 BUILD IN the text block of a book into per inch of a paper of a given caliper 34.5 232 its case or covers. Building-in machines (thousandths of an inch): 35.0 228 35.5 substitute heat and great pressure for Caliper/ 224 Pages 36.0 222 the element of time required to set and 4 Sheets per Inch cure the adhesive and form the joints. 36.5 218 For intermittent or relatively small pro- 5.5 1,454 37.0 216 duction, a single-clamp machine, such 6.0 1,332 37.5 212 as the type often found in library 6.5 1,230 38.0 210 7.0 binderies,isoften adequate.It can 1,142 38.5 208 build in books up to 12 by 14 by 4 7.5 1,066 39.0 204 inches in size, and can process up to 8.0 1,000 39.5 202 five books per minute, depending upon 8.5 942 40.0 200 9.0 the skill of the operator and the CLAMP 888 40.5 198 DWELL setting of the machine. In gen- 9.5 842 41.0 194 10.0 eral, the longer the dwell time, the more 800 41.5 192 solid the binding, which is essentially 10.5 762 42.0 190 the reason why a book built in by this 11.0 726 42.5 188 type of machine is not as solid as one 11.5 696 43.0 186 left in a press for a longer period of 12.0 666 43.5 184 12.5 time.Ineditionbinding,multiple- 640 44.0 182 clamp machines are usually used, and 13.0 614 44.5 180 can process up to 36 books per minute. 13.5 592 45.0 178 In edition machines, books may be 14.0 570 45.5 176 14.5 552 46.0 174 manually inserted, or fed in automati- 15.0 cally after CASING-IN. See also: CASING- 532 46.5 172 15.5 IN MACHINE. (320 ) 516 47.0 170 16.0 500 47.5 168 built-up lettering. Multilined decorative 16.5 484 lettering, "built up" by forming the 48.0 166 17.0 470 48.5 164 letters with pallets and gouges rather 17.5 456 49.0 than by the use of hand letters. (335) 162 18.0 444 49.5 162 built-up patterns. Decorative patterns in 18.5 432 50.0 160 (52) bulking book paper 42 burst factor bulking book paper. A paper produced to and the other movable. The group of can be used to restore the proper tone give maximum bulk per unit ream sections with strings around it is placed or shade to the leaves of a book that weight. It is produced from a number between the jaws and compressed by have been washed. The burnt sugar is of paper furnishes designed to impart forcing the movable jaw towards the added to the resizing bath, and the this property, including cotton linters, stationary one. The jaws are designed paper is "toned" at the same time it is rag pulp, esparto, and chemical wood so as to allow for the tying of the sized. (154) pulps. Some grades contain a large bundles while under pressure; 2) the burnt umber. A dark brown pigment pro- percentage of mechanical wood pulp power-bundling press, which is either duced by calcining raw umber, and [nixed with other pulps. The paper vertically or horizontally oriented, and used in a mixture of red ochre, oil, and furnish is provided with little or no in which a movable bed is driven to- water, as a sprinkle for the edges of fillers. This paper is usually made to ward a stationary head by power sup- books.See also:SPRINKLED EDGES; specifications of finish, caliper, or both. plied by an electric motor through a UMBER. (371) Bulking book paper picks easily and system of gears and racks; and 3) the burst factor. The BURSTING STRENGTH of often causes difficulties in printing.See pneumatic bundling press, which may paper in grams per square centimeter also:BULKED-UP; PAPER. (17) alsobeverticallyorhorizontally divided by the BASIS WEIGHT of the bumping hammer.See:BACKING HAMMER. oriented, in which the movable jaw is bundle. 1. A seldom used term applied to driven by a piston to which power is a printed sheet that has been folded to supplied by compressed air.Inall BURNISHERS make a section. 2. A unit of board three types, when the sections of sev- measure, generally of weight of 50 eral books are to be bundled together, pounds. The actual number of boards the groups are placed between boards, in a bundle will depend on area and bundled, and the entire group, includ- caliper of the boards. 3. At one time, a ing boards,istied before being re- package of paper containing 2 perfect moved from the press. (142, 320, 339) reams, or 1,000 sheets, but in today's buried cords.See:SAWING IN. usage, a package of paper weighing burnish. 1. The glossiness or brilliance about 125 pounds and containing any produced by rubbing the gilt edges or number of sheets, depending on the leather cover of a book with a burncsh- size, caliper, and type of paper. (17, ing or polishing tool.See also:BUR- 316) NISHER(S) (2). 2. In papermaking, to bundling. 1. The process of tying up the burnish or polish the surface of a sections of a book under pressure be- paper.See also:GLAZED (1). (94) fore GATHERING (1), for the purpose of burnished edges. The colored or gilt edges keeping them clean, flat, and ready for of a book which have been polished, gathering, while at the same time com- usually by means of a bloodstone or pressing them into a compact and solid agate implement called a BURNISHER state. 2. The process of gathering to- (2).See also:BURNISHERS(S) (2). gether a number of skins of leather, burnisher(s). 1. One who burnishes the usually 12, of the same kind, weight, edges of a book. 2. The tools used to and grade. The total area of leather is burnish the edges of a book. They are indicated on the bundle. (179, 236, made of metal,agate(), or 320) bloodstone set in handles. The blood- bundling press (bundling machine). A stone type is the best and also the most type of press used to compress the expensive.Burnishersaregenerally newly folded sections of a book or available in two basic shapesflat and group of books, usually of the same toothed. They are relatively delicate title. Bundling presses are usually of toolsandchipeasilyifhandled threetypes:1)thehand-bundling roughly; they may be kept smooth and press, which consists of a floor stand in good condition by rubbing them on on which two jaws are mounted hori- the flesh side of a piece of leather zontally. One of the jaws is stationary coated with whiting, or, if too rough to be smoothed in this manner, by rub- bingthem onazinc-linedboard BUNDLING PRESS coated with a small amount of flour or emery mixed with machine oil.(66, 99, 278) burnishing brushes. A black lead or shoe brush,havingstiffbutnotharsh bristles, and used, after coating the edges of a book with black lead, to burnish the edges before glairing for edge-gilding. (66) burnt gypsum.See:BRIME. burnt sugar. One of the coloring materi- als which, when dissolved in water, bursting strength 43 stitch

paper in grams per square meter, which burst ratio. The BURSTING STRENGTH of a and strongest part of the skin. See also: gives the burst factor as a numerical material in points per pound. See also: SHELL.2.Any type of hinge or joint value. See also: BURST RATIO.(17, 72) BURST FACTOR. used for reinforcement, or for fasten- bursting strength. The combined tensile butcher cuts. Damage to hides and skins ing a bulky insert into a binding.(256, strength and stretch of a material as caused by improper and/or unskilled 261, 325) measured by the ability of the material flaying, and usually seen in the form of butterstamp. See: BAND PALLET. to resist rupture when pressure is ap- cuts or furrows on the flesh side. In ex- buttonhole stitch. An embroidery stitch plied under specified conditions to one treme cases, the cuts may go com- used in making a HEADBAND, and exe- of its sides by an instrument used for pletely through the skin, thus reducing cuted by drawing the needle and thread testing the property. Testing for the its value greatly. Butcher cuts are some- from the upper through the lower edge bursting strength of paper is a very times particularly noticeable on parch- of the core, and out over the lower common procedure, although its value ment and vellum.(363) thread of the preceding stitch. The in determining the potential perman- butt. 1. That part of a hide or skin cor- stitches are repeated, sometimes in al- ence or durability of paper is suspect. responding to the animal's back and ternate colors, e.g., blue and green, to See also: BURST FACTOR; POINTS PER sides after cutting away the shoulder form a firmline of adjacent loops POUND.(17, 72) and belly, and consisting of the thickest around the core.(83, 111) 44 calf paper

C. The Roman equivalent of 100.See Itis used as a filler pigment in the also:ROMAN NUMERALS. manufactureofpaper.Precipitated cabinet size.See:OBLONG. calcium sulfateis known as "crown cable pattern.See:ROPE PATTERN. filler,"or"pearlfiller."Seealso: cabretta leather. A leather produced from BRIME. the skins of sheep which have hair caldum sulfite. A salt (Ca503), pre- instead of wool,i.e.,straight-haired pared by reacting sulfurous acid with sheepskins. The leather is produced in calcium hydroxide, and used as a filler India, China, South America, and coating pigment in paper manufacture. Africa, the best grades coming from . Horizontal cast iron rolls with the latter two areas. In the United hardened, chilled surfaces resting one States, the term is generally considered on another in a vertical bank at the toindicatespecificallyaBrazilian dry end of the papermaking machine. sheepskin. Cabretta is generally chrome paper by suitable chemical reactions to The paper web is passed between all or tanned and has a very fine grain and a deacidify the paper, and is also used part of the calender rolls to increase strong fiber network. (61, 325) both as a filler and a coating pigment in the smoothness and gloss of its surface. cahier. A number of loose sheetsas- the manufacture of paper.(31, 67, See also:SUPERCALENDER. (17, 80) sembled for binding, or bound loosely 143) calendered. A paper or cloth that has together to form a notebook or pam- calcium hydroxide. A strong alkali (Ca been given a smooth surface by passing phlet. 2. The French expression for the (OH)n), which can be formed by the it through a CALENDER one or more signature of a bound book. reaction of calcium oxide (Ca0) with times. Paper which receives a minimum cake glue. Generally, an animal GLUE water. If the oxide is treated with only of calendering is said to have an an- supplied in large slabs up to 3 inches sufficient water to make it crumble to tique finish. With more calendering it in thickness. The slabs are broken into a fine, white, dry powder, slaked lime acquires a machine finish, then an Eng- small pieces, soaked in cold water until isproduced.By slakingthepaste lish finish, and, finally a supercalen- they absorb as much water as possible, formed from the oxide with an excess dered (highly glazed) finish.See also: and then heated to useable consistency. of water, a suspension called "milk of CALENDERED CLOTH. (143, 276) Flexible(internally plasticized)glue lime" is formed. A clear solution of cakndered cloth. A cloth that has had a does not have to be soaked. the hydroxide in water is known as filler of starch, usually soybean flour, calcium acetate. A chemical (Ca(C0113- lime water. Calcium hydroxide is used impregnated into the weave of the base 02)22H20), prepared by neutraliz- extensively in a very strong solution cloth by means of iron or steel rollers ing acetic acid with lime or calcium (pH of approximately 11.4)in the exerting a great pressure. If the rolls carbonate, and used in the preparation LIMING and UNHAIRING of hides and are heated, a high gloss isalso im- of other acetates and in the deacidifica- skins in leather manufacture, and in parted. The cloth may also be em- tion of paper. the deacidification of paper. In the lat- bossed during the calendering process. caldum bicarbonate. A salt obtained by ter use, the resulting pH is approxi- (341) replacing only one of the two hydrogen mately 11.0, and paper so treated is calf finish. Originally, the smooth, un- atoms in carbonic acid (H2CO3) by the easily oxidized unless the pH isre- grainedfinishof any animalskin metallic atom calcium, giving duced by exposure to carbon dioxide tanned for use in bookbinding, and (Ca(HCO3)2). It is employed in a 0.2% or the paper is treated subsequently later used to designate CALFSKIN fin- solution to carbonate excess calcium with a solution of calcium bicarbonate. ished in a variety of grains in imitation hydroxide used in deacidifying paper, (31, 363) of alligator, lizard, snakeskin, etc. (256) and also to precipitate calcium carbon- calcium hypochlorite. Any hypochlorite calf lined. A lining on the innerside of a ate into the fibers of the paper being of calcium, e.g., the normal anhydrous limp cover, consisting of CALFSKIN in treated. The precipitated calcium car- salt (Ca(00)2), that is generally lieu of the board paper. This type of bonate acts as a buffer to neutralize any found in commercial products con- lining was thin and glued to the leather acid that forms in the paper subsequent taining 70 to 75% available chlorine. cover only at the outer edges. This left to treatment. (31) Calcium hypochlorite is used by many the covers pliable so that the book calcium carbonate. A salt (CaCO3), oc- paper conservationists to bleach archi- could be rolled up. Calf linings have curring naturally, usually in sea deposi- val papers, and itis also used as an been used at various times, and, al- tion, and prepared commercially by oxidizing agent to reduce the effects of though they are still used to some ex- passing carbon dioxide either through FOXING. Its use is potentially harmful, tent today, their most extensive use was cold iime water, which precipitates the as the chlorine is difficult to remove. in the years immediately before and calcitecrystalline type, or hot lime Also known as "bleaching powder." after 1900. (105) water, which gives the aragonite crys- calcium sulfate. A salt (Ca504H20), calf paper. A colored and embossed talline type. The calcite is the thermo- very slightly soluble in water. In its paper somewhatresemblingleather dynamically stable form. Calcium car- natural form, it may exist as anhydrite and used occasionallyfor covering bonate is sometimes precipitated into (Ca504) or gypsum (Ca504H20). books. calfskin 45 camphor calfskin. In its broadest sense, a leather young animal, the connective tissue, during the second half of the 19th cen- made from the skin of an immature i.e., skin, develops more rapidly than tury. (371) bovine animal. In a more limited sense, some other parts of the body, such as Cambridge style. An Englishstyle of however, it is considered to be leather the muscles. The dermal network of bookbinding practiced largely on theo- made from the skin of a bovine animal calfskinistherefore reasonably well logical works and in university libraries. that has not been weaned, or at least developedandexhibitsremarkable Although used elsewhere, the style was has been fed only milk, and whose skin strength and toughness. In addition, so highly favored by binders in Cam- does not exceed a certain weight (15 there is no denying the fact that there bridge in the early years of the 18th pounds or slightly more) in the green are calfskin bookbindings that have century that it became recognized as salted state. The heavier skins of im- come down to us in their original bind- theirspeciality, which probably ac- mature milk-fed animals, i.e., those up ings; many are several hundred years counts for the name. Books bound in to 25 or 30 pounds in the green state, old. In as much as the durability of this style were sewn on raised cords, are often referred to as "veals" rather calfskin before the 18th century was covered in calfskin that was masked than calfskin. not in doubt, it may be that it was the and sprinkled in such a manner as to The best for bookbinding lowering of tanning standards that re- leaveastainedcentralrectangular purposes are prepared by tanning in sulted in less durable calfskin. Further- panel,aplainrectangularframe, oak bark or sumac tanning liquors. Its more, the bleaching methods employed which, in turn, was surrounded by a freedom from grain defects makes calf- to produce light-colored skins, as well stained outside frame. The books had skin suitable for finishing in delicate as the techniques of decorating calf Dutch marble endpapers and red edges. shades of color.It may be finished bindings with acid and other chemicals The spine was pieced with red russia rough or smooth, the latter beingmore to produce mottled-, sprinkled-, and leather labels and had double blind common, and, as it may be without any tree-calfeffectswereprobablythe lines at head and tail on each side of noticeablegrainpattern,it may be major reasons for its reputation of in- the raised bands. The covers were dec- tooled withverylittlepreliminary sufficient durability. See also: ; orated with a two-line fillet close to the blinding in. TREE CALF. (207, 291, 351, 363) edges and on each side of the panel, Books which are full bound in calf- calf split. A flesh split of a calfskin, some- and with a narrow flower roll worked skin may be described as being diced, times embossed so as to make it re- on each side of the panel close to the grained,marbled,mottled,scored, semble the grain side of the skin. The lines. There were many variations of sprinkled, stained, or tree, according to split lacks the necessary strength to be this style, including some books tooled the form of decoration used. In addi- used for anything other than linings in gold, and some with marbled covers tion, special styles are known as divin- and labels. and sprinkled panels. (69, 154) ity, antique, law, reverse, or rough calf. calico. A plain white cotton fabric that is cameo bindings. A style of Italian bind- Calfskin has been used as a covering heavier than muslin. As early as the ing of the first half of the 16th century, material for books since 1450, oreven first quarter of the 19th century calico which was imitated by French binders earlier, and, up to the end of the 18th was dyed in various colors and used for and also by ROGER PAYNE at a later century, it was a common bookbinding covering publishers' bindings; it was in date. The style consisted of designs in leather. Thereafter, various forms of fact one of the first cloths to be used relief made from dies sheepskin, and cutintaglio, latercloth,replaced for covering books. It is still used to somewhatinimitationof gems or calfskin as the most commonly used some extent for lining the spines of metals. Leather was the medium most bookbinding material. edition bindings, although for this pur- often used, although vellum was also There are two distinct views con- pose it is inferior to several other fab- used, being pressed while wet on the cerning the durability of calfskin. Some rics. See: SPINE LINING FABRIC. (71, die, and with the cavities being filled contend that because the skin is from 236) with a composition of lacquered paste an immature animal, the leather made caliper.1. The thickness of a material to preserve the shape of the figures. from it cannot be durable, even when measured under specified conditions. After being attached to the center of carefully selected and tanned, because Caliper is usually measured in thou- the leather cover, they were sometimes the fibers of the skin are not fully de- sandths of an inch (mills or points), gilt and painted. Cameo bindings were veloped.Furthermore,thereisthe or, under the metric system, in milli- a development of the antiquarian inter- argument that, since the skin is very meters.2. The instrument used to est in classical coins and gems, actual soft, it shows scratches and mars too measure the thickness of a material. examples of which at first provided the easily, and, when used, the book must See also: THICKNESS. sources of the molds. French examples then be varnished or kept in a box. cambric. 1. A fine linen thread used in executed for Henri II and Jean Grolier Others, however, argue that if the skins lieu of silk for working headbands. 2. bore a central medallion stamped with are selected carefully and tanned very A fine, closely woven white linen fab- an intaglio cut die. The design was em- slowly in oak bark or sumac, calfskin ric, used in library binding for hinges, bossed on a gilded and colored back- makes a quite durable leather capable spine linings, extensions, etc. ground. See also: CANEVAR1 BINDINGS. of withstanding considerable wear. Cambridge calf (Cambridge sheep). A (110, 141, 279, 347) Physiologically, calfskin is not nearly method of decorating a calf- or sheep- camlet. To marble. See: MARBLING. as weak as its detractors maintain. Al- skin binding by sprinkling on two tints, camphor. A crystalline terpenoid ketone though thefiber netwnrk iqindeed leaving a rectangular "pane" (panel) (C10H100), occurring naturally in the lacking the depth of cowhide, the fiber in the center of each cover. This tech- (+), () and (±) forms. Ordi- bundles are reasonably stout and con- nique was used extensively from the nary commercial camphor is the (+) tain numerous finer fibers which are 1670s and again during the early dec- type, obtained from the wood of the long, highly ramified, and of high ten- ades of the 18th century. It was re- camphortree(Cinnamomum cam- sile strength. This is because, in any vived and used to a considerable extent phora), mainly from Formosa. It can cancel 46 carbon lettering

also he manufactured, using pinene library binding. The nap side is placed caoutchouc polish. A caout-rubber base (C10H16) as the raw material.Itis next to the spine. (102) varnish, used occasionally in the 19th sometimes used in an effort to rid books canvas. A firm, closely woven fabric, usu- centuryforvarnishingtheleather and of BOOKWORMS, and as ally made of cotton, hemp, or linen, in covers of books. See also: CAOUTCHOUC a plasticizer in cellulose nitrate plastics. plain weave, and produced in various BINDING. (97) cancel(s) (cancellans).1. A replacement weights. Canvas has been used as a cape. Originally, a leather made from leaf or leaves, printed because of a covering material for books for cen- South African hair sheep. Today itis mistake in the original printing, an im- turies, and was one of the principal considered to be any leather made from perfect page, etc., that is to replace the fabrics used for embroidered bindings. a hair sheep, except East Indian native corresponding faulty section before the Its greatest use historically, however, vegetable tanned sheep. (325) bookisactuallypublished. Cancels has been for rough job bindings, cer- capping up (capping). 1. See: HEADCAP. 2. have been common since the beginning tain varieties of , The process of placing a paper cover- of printing from metal type; however, publishedbetween1770 and about ing or "cap" over the edges of a book with the development of high speed 1830 in England, and some types of following headbanding, so as to prevent printing presses,it has become more reference books. Today its use is vir- the edges from becoming soiled or economical simply to reprint an entire tually limited to the covering of very damaged during the subsequent opera- signature rather than go to the expense large hooks, , etc., and as a tions. (237, 261) of inserting a cancel by hand. CHEMISE forleather-boundcounty capstan. A decorative ornament, often The substitution of the cancel by record books and other large stationery found on English and French head-in either the printer or binder depends on bindings. See also: ART CANVAS; DUCK. medallion rolls, the principal feature when the mistake is discovered. If the (69, 82, 111, 264) of which roughly resembled a vertical binder is to make the substitution, the canvas finish paper. A heavy, durable spindle-mounted drum. (250) printer may mark the incorrect leaf cover paper, made withatextured caput mortuum. See: VENETIAN RED. with an asterisk to indicateto the finish in imitation of canvas. It is used carbolic acid. See: PHENOL. hinder that he is to cut out that leaf mainly for semi-stiff covers for bro- carbonaceous inks. A general term used and tip the replacement to the stub. If chures, pamphlets, etc. (86) in describing a group of inks produced the replacement leaf bears a signature caontchouc binding. A particular (and from finely ground carbon or a similar mark the asterisk should precede the probably first) form of ADHESIVE BIND- substance, e.g., soot or lampblack, and signature letter. ING,invented by William Hancock, which are black and very stable. A 2. In bookbinding, in a broad sense, and patented in1836, in which the glutinuous substance is used as a hinder. all leaves that are not to be hound in. single sheets were secured with a rubber Such inks are the simplest of all inks This applies specifically to the waste solution obtained from thelatex of to produce, and have been known from sheets. (69, 131, 234) certain tropical plants, especially of the the earliest times. They have no de- cancelland (cancellandnm). The incorrect, genera Hevea and Ficus. According to structive influences on paper but they inaccurate, or otherwise disposal leaf Hancock's specifications, the edges of do present difficulties to restorers be- that is to be cut out and replaced by a the assembled leaves were roughened cause they are so easily affected by CANCEL. (140) and then coated with the caoutchouc, water. The carbonaceous inks may be cancellation. The removalofaleaf, which, when dry, was followed by one subdivided into CARBON INK, CHINESE leaves, or an entire section of a publi- to five coatings of a stronger rubber INK, and the SEPIA INKS. (143) cation because of an error, or for some solution. When thelast coating was carbon disulfide. A colorless, highly re- other reason. When a leaf is removed, applied, a strip of cloth coated with the fractive liauid (CS2). It is prepared by the remaining stub is termed a disjunct caoutchouc was applied ina warm, heating sulfur and wood charcoal, or leaf. See also: CANCEL; CANCELLANDUM. stickyconditionandrubbed down by reacting methane with sulfur vapor (12, 343) firmly. over a catalyst. It is used in the manu- cancel title. A replacement title page sub- Great numbers of thesebindings facture of carbon tetrachloride, and for stituted for the original. See also: CAN- were produced both in England and the fumigating hooks. Its customary dis- CEL; CANCELLANDUM. (234) United States from about 1840, and agreeable odor results from the pres- candelilla wax. A wAx found as an exu- the process was used for many of the ence of small amounts of other sulfur date on the leaves and stems of a plant illustrated "table books" of the 1860s, compounds. Carbon disulfideis both (Euphorbia antisyphilitica), found in as well as for many large folios printed toxic and flammable. northern Mexico and the southwestern on very thick paper. The process af- carbon ink. A modified form of CHINESE United States, and obtained by boiling forded both openability and durability. INK. Carbon ink is a mixture of finely the leaves and stems with water and or so for the latter it was believed at divided carbon carried in a vehicle of sulfuric acid. It is yellowish-brown in the time. Both characteristics depended glue or a gum. It is extremely stable, color and is opaque to translucent. It to a large extent on the purity of the as evidenced by the characters on manu- is classed as hard wax and has a soften- rubber solution,and the degreeto scripts of the 7th to lOth centuries, and ing range at 64 to 68 C. It is used in which it remained flexible. That it did even Egyptian papyri, which are darker making varnish and as a substitute for notremain veryflexiblehas been and more distinct than those of the CARNAUBA WAX to impart a high gloss demonstrated by the fact most caou- 16thcentury, when IRON-GALL INK to leathers that are not glazed. (29!) tchouc bindings have fallen apart. Also came into usc. Carbon ink has no de- Canevari bindings. See: GRIMALDI, GIO- called "guttapercha binding," although structive effects on paper, but it does VANNI BATTISTA. incorrectly,becauseguttapercha, present problems to restorers because it cantonflannel. A softcottonfabric, which isalso obtained from tropical is so easily affected by water. (143) napped on one side, and sometimes trees, was tried and found to be un- carbon lettering. Carbon inpowdered used as a spine lining fabric, usually in suitable. (89, 236) form, used in lieu of gold leaf or other 47 case-making

metal or foil for lettering books, par- impart a high gloss to leathers that are in forming the tube section of shotgun ticularly when the covering material is not to be glazed, and by bookbinders shells. (17, 58, 182) canvas, or a similar fabric. The pallet to polish the edges of books after gild- case.1. The covering material, boards and type are heated as for gold block- ing and burnishing through paper. The and inlay of a book, i.e., a book cover ing, but the type is coated with carbon wax imparts a high gloss to the edges ready to be attached to the text block. and then pressed firmly into the cover- and is preferred to beeswax by some as Edition and library bindings have cases ing material. ART VELLUM is also a it is less likely to streak. Carnauba wax and are said to be case bindings. 2. A suitable material for carbon lettering. has a softening range of 83 to 84* C., box or cover made to protect a book. In very humid climates, this type of which makes it especially suitable for See: PORTFOLIO (1); PULL-OFF BOX; lettering may require several days to use in very hot climates. (195, 291) SLIPCASE; SOLANDER BOX. dry sufficiently for the books to be carragheen mom. A dark purple, branch- case binding. A generaltermfora handled. At times, carbon ink is used ing cartilaginous seaweed (Chondrus method of bookbinding, introduced in in lieu of carbon. (358) crispus), found on the coasts of North- Great Britain in the 1820s, in which carbon paper. A thin paper coated with ern Europe and North America. The the case (covers) of the book is made carbon black or some other coloring moss is used inthepreparation of separately(and,ineditionbinding, matter in a vehicle of wax or an oil- MARBLING SIZE, about 4 ounces of the usually inlarge numbers) from the soluble substance and used for making moss being sufficient to make 9 or 10 book (the text block and endpapers), duplicate copies. It is sometimes used quarts of size. Carragheen moss was and later attached to it by gluing the by bookbinders to produce a dark color firstusedin making marblingsize board papers of the text block to the on a bookbinding approximating blind sometime after the middle of the 19th inside of the boards of the case. This tooling. Carbon paper is also used for century. The extract of the moss is operation is known as CASING-IN. Case making paper pattern layouts prior to also used as a thickening agent and bindingisdistinguished fromthose lettering, and when the leather does not viscosity stabilizer in some adhesives. methods of binding in which the covers darken uniformly with water. Size must (217, 237, 335) are not made separately, as in craft first be applied, otherwise the carbon cartonnageitIa Bradel. See: BRADEL bookbinding IN BOARDS (1). Case bind- will rub off. BINDING. ing is the principal method employed carbon tetrachloride. A colorless, mobile, cartouche. 1. An elaborate style of deco- in both edition and library binding. nonflammable, liquid (CCI4), used as ration popular in Italy about the middle (203, 276, 355) a solvent and grease remover, and as a of the 16th century. The decoration case-hardening. An irregular,distorted fumigant for books. Itis both toxic consists of elaborately interlaced fillets (drawn) grain in a leather, usually ac- and volatile. It also gives off chlorine, filling the entire field of the covers, and companied by hardness and thinness of which, in the presence of glowing char- sometimes accompanied by , the leather itself. It is caused primarily coal, e.g., a lighted cigarette, becomes worked in a single line with tools cut by over-tanning.See: OVER-TANNED. phosgene, which is even more toxic. in the shapes of flowers. 2. A term (306) carboxymethylcellulose. An aqueous ad- meaning literally a scroll or paper with case hide. An expression used in Great hesive prepared by reacting chloracetic the ends rolled up, bearing the title, Britain to describe a stained or other- acid (CICH2COOH) with alkali cellu- and sometimes other information, per- wise colored leather, generally having lose, and used in the SUNDEX PROCESS. taining to a book. 3. A frame, either a smooth, more or less glossy surface (198) plain or decorative, or a scroll,in finish. It is sometimes embossed with . A board 0.006 inch or more which the title, name of the cartog- an artificial grain. Case hide is pro- in thickness. Itis stiffer than paper. rapher, and other particulars of a map duced from a full grain or buffed cow Although the generic term "board" is are placed. The cartouche usually ap- hid.: and is vegetable tanned. (61) used in lieu of the term "cardboard" pears in a corner of the map, and in casein. An acid-coagulable protein, oc- in bookbinding parlance, the covers of old maps it was frequently decorated curring as a suspension of calcium many pamphlets, brochures,etc.,as with scenes, animals, armorial designs, caseinate in skim milk. It is possible to well as the card used to line prints, etc. 4. A small rectangular ornament isolateitas an alkali-solution white posters, etc., and also used in FILLING usually found on a ROLL (1), formed powder by treating cow's milk with IN (1), are of a thickness that would by one or more lines, generally with a either mineral acid or rennet. The acid fit them into the definition of card- plain center. (94, 234, 250) casein is used in the sizing of paper, board. (17, 234, 264) . A paper similar in ap- as a simple adhesive, in the manufac- cardboard prints. Printed cover-, end-, pearance to hard antique paper. It is ture of coated papers, and as a plastic and other decorative papers, produced tough, closely formed, and is usually inleatherfinishes.Casein adhesives by gluing artistically shaped cuts of produced from chethical wood pulps, are little used in bookbinding as they cardboard to a sheet of cardboard, esparto, or a combination of the two. can only be made workable by the ad- inking with an oil-base printing ink The degree of sizing depends on the dition of rather strong alkalies, which and pressing on the paper to be deco- purpose for which it is to be used, and makes them unsuitable for use with rated. (183) its surface may be rough, semi-rough paper or vellum. (52, 198, 309) carnaubawax. A yellowish-whiteor or smooth. Cartridge paper is generally case-making. A general term usually ap- green, sticky exudation on the leaves, unbleached or only slightly bleached, plied to the production of cases for berries and stalks of the carnauba palm and is made in basis weights ranging edition bindings, generally by means (Copernicia cerif era), found in South from 60 to 80 pounds. It is used for of semi-automatic or automatic ma- America, and especially Brazil.Itis endpapers, linings, and compensation chines. The term may also be applied believed to consist largely of myricyl guards. The term "cartridge paper" is to library binding, in which case-mak- ceretate and myricyl alcohol not generally used in the United States. ing is carried out by hand. See also: (C09H7,9 CH.OH), It is used to The name derives from its original use CASE-MAKING GAUGE; CASE-MAKING case-making gauge 48 catechol

MACHINE; CASINO-IN. (102, 179, 183) hydraulic press. The BUILDING-IN MA- itself being changed. A catalyst may case-making gauge (case gauge). A gauge CHINE has metal flanges at the edges of increase the rate (positive catalyst), or used inthe production of identical the jaws which accomplish the same decrease the rate (negative catalyst). book rases in relatively small quan- result.Seealso:PRESSING BOARDS. The final state or equilibrium of the tities. The case is made by hand, the (264) reaction is not changed by the catalyst, gauge being used to indicate where the casing-in machine. A semi- or fully-auto- only the rate of approaching the final boards and INLAY ( 1) are to be placed matic machine which fits books into state is changed. Examples of catalytic on the covering material which has their pre-made cases and completes action in the field of archival preserva- been cut to size and glued. Case-mak- the binding operation. tion include the impurities in paper, ing gauges are adjustable for different Semi-automatic machines require an such as iron or copper, minute parti- sizes of cases, turn-ins, and widths of operator to hang the books in their cles of which may inadvertently be in- inlay. (259, 261) centers over a metal "wing." The ma- troduced into the paper pulp in the case-making machine. A hand- or ma- chine then automatically clamps the beater operation. According to some chine-fed machine used to assemble book, coats the board papers with ad- authorities, these can act as catalysts the covering material, boards, and in- hesive, fits the case on the text block in the formation of sulfuric or hydro- laysofcase-boundeditionbooks. and completes the operation. Three- chloric acid in paper, by assisting in Case-making machines are of two gen- wing casing-in machines are capable of the conversion of sulfur dioxide to sul- eral types: sheet fed, either by hand or processing books up to3inches in furic acid, or the chlorine frequently machine, and rollfed, by machine. thickness (including covers), and, ly- usedinbleaching paper pulp,into Roll fed machines require two addi- ing open, 14 inches high and 22 inches hydrochloric acid. Leather, also, may tional steps in their operation as com- wide, at speeds up to 25 books per containminuteparticlesofmetals pared with sheet-fed machines, minute. which may speed up the formation of namely, corner cutting and separation A fully automatic machine does not sulfuric acid. 2. A chemical substance of the individual cases. The covering require timed feeding or removal of added to thermosetting resinous ad- material, however, does not have to be books. It can process books measuring hesives to speed up the cure time of pre-cut. Sheet fed machines receive the not less than 3% inchesin height, such adhesives, to increase the cross covering material in the correct size 21/2 to 71/2 inches in width and between linkage of a synthetic polymer, or to for the individual case with the corners Vs and 1% inches thick, at speeds up accelerate adhesive drying. (221, 235, already cut. to 35 books per minute. 309) Case-makingmachinesmay be The casing-in machine came into catch. A metal plate secured to the fore modified for use of paper as the cov- existence in the latter years of the 19th edge, and at times to the head and tail eringmaterial,to make round-cor- century, and itsprincipal period of edges, of a book cover, and fixed with nered cases, to use light board instead development occurred during the early a bar, over which the clasp fits. Some- of paper for the inlays, and to make years of the 20th century. (89, 320) times a pin is used in lieu of a bar. album covers which have one narrow castor oil. A colorless to pale yellow or See also: CLASPS. (250) and one wide board, with a hinge. greenish, viscous, non-drying fatty oil catch stitch.1. Any typeof locking Moderncase-making machines can of high viscosity, extracted from beans stitch, such as KETTLE STITCH. 2. A produce up to 21 cases per minute of the castor oil plant (Ricinus corn- stitch used to gather or "catch up" the with dimensions of 51/2 by 71/2 inches munis). It consists almost entirely of sewing threads which pass around the to 91/2 by 151/2 inches, with extended the glyceryl esters of ricinoleic acid. At tapes of a book. The purpose of this capabilities using accessory equipment. low temperatures it thickens; it solidifies stitch is to prevent undue looseness of Thecase-makingmachinedates at approximately 10 to 18' C. It is the sewing thread. Also called "link back to the latter years of the 19th used in leather finishing processes, and, sewing." (83, 119) century; its greatest period of devel- in the sulfated form, as a preservative . The word appearing at the opment was 1891-95. (89, 196, 203, for leather bindings. Sulfating the oil, bottom of the page following the bot- 320) by reacting it with sulfuric acid, allows tom line of print. Itis also the first casing-in. The process of securing the it to react with water. This is benefi- word of the following page. Catch- text block and attached endpapers into cial for books stored under hot, dry words originally appeared on the last a case that was produced as a separate conditions, as it helps keep the leather page of a quire or manuscript, and operation, lettered and (especially in soft and pliable under conditions of were intended to be used by the book- edition binding) sometimes decorated. low relative humidity. (173) binder ingathering. Later, they ap- In library binding, casing-in generally catalogpaper. A lightweightpaper, peared at the foot of every verso or takes place in a BUILDING-IN MACHINE, either coated or with an English finish, even every page; however, their use in or equivalent, while in edition binding, usually made with a considerable pro- the printed books of Europe was never itisgenerally doneina CASING-IN portion of mechanical pulp, and used very consistent. In Italian books of the MACHINE. (179) for mail-order catalogs, telephone di- period 1470-1500 they first appeared casing-inboards. Wooden boards cut rectories, and the like. Uniformity of at the end of each signature (section), square at the edge and lined on one weight, opacity, finish, formation, and and later at the end of every page. In edge with a brass strip that extends sufficient strength to get through high- the 19th century, their use in conjunc- beyond one or both sides of the board speed printing presses are desired char- tion with signature marks was redun- about1/2 inch. The brass extension acteristics. Basis weights usually range dent and they were discontinued. (12, creates the joints of the book during from 19 to 28 pounds (24 X 36 156, 234, 365) the CASING-IN operation. Such boards 500). (17, 324) catechol (pyrocatechin; pyrocatechol). A are used when the book is cased by catalyst. 1. A substance that changes the colorless crystal (C,;H602), soluble in hand and pressedina standing- or rate of a chemical reaction without water,alcohol,ether,benzene,and catechol tannins 49 cellulose

alkalis. An alkaline solution gives a nishes, etc., and in very strong solu- well have translated others that were coloration with ferric chloride, which tions in leather manufacture to lime never published. turns brown on standing in air. It can and unhair hides and skins. It is thought that Caxton probably be obtained from CATECHU, a natural caustic soda. See: SODIUM HYDROXIDE. brought his bookbinding tools from dye, or prepared by fusing orthoben- Caxton, William(c1416-1491 ). The Bruges upon his return to England, be- zenedisulfonic acid with caustic soda. Englishlinguist,editor,printer, and cause two of his stamps are very sim- Catecholisthe principal constituent publisher, who was the first to print ilarto those used on books found of the condensed (catechol) tannins. books in the English language. Caxton contemporaneously in the city. Cax- See also: VEGETABLE TANNINS. (235, was born in Kent, possibly in the vil- ton's stamps were used after his death 306) lage of Tenderton, traveled to London by his successor, Wynkyn de Worde, catechol tannins. See: VEGETABLE TAN- in 1438 and became apprenticed to the and some, thereafter, by Henry Jacobi. NINS. merchant Robert Large, who was also (50, 140) catechu (black catechu; cutch). An ex- Lord Mayor of London. Three years C clamp. A C-shaped, general purpose tractobtainedfromthewoodof later Large died,leaving the young clamp thatgrips between the open Acacia cateclut, a tree grown in East- Caxton some 20 marks, a not incon- ends of the "C" by means of a long, ern India, and other areas, and used in siderable sum in those days. Possibly flat-ended screw that threads through tanning leather.Itcontains catechin as earlyas1441 Caxton moved to one end and presses the clamped ma- andcatechutannicacid.Seealso: Bruges and by not later than 1446 had terial against the other end. It is used CATECHOL: VEGETABLE TANNINS. (175) established himself in business there. mainly for holding leather or book catenati. See CHAINED BOOKS. While in Flanders (1446-76) he be- boards while using the SPOKESHAVE. It catgut. A tough cord made from the in- came a very successful merchant in the is called a "G-clamp" in Great Britain. testines of animals, such as sheep and Anglo-Flemish clothtrade, and was (183 ) other herbivores, and used at times for made governor of the English Nation cedar marble. A cover marble executed the core of the HEADBAND, especially at Bruges in 1462. by sprinkling black and brown coloring when a round band is desired, and also It was in Bruges that Caxton entered on the covers, followed by orange in for TACKETING, where additional the service of Margaret, Duchess of various places to give a cloudlike ef- strength is required for large stationery Burgundy and sister of Edward IV of fect. This is followed by red placed bindings. (172) England. It is believed that he func- near the orange. When this is dry, the cathedralbindings.Bookbindingsex- tioned as secletary, librarian, transla- covers are coated two or three times ecuted between about 1810 and ap- tor, or all three, to Margaret, and it with yellow, which is allowed to pene- proximately1840inEnglandand has also been suggested thatit may trate evenly into the leather. (97, 152) France. The name derives from the have been her keen desire to have cedar oil. A colorless to pale yellow es- motifsoftheembellishment,e.g., booksinher nativelanguagethat sential oil distilled from the wood of Gothic architecture, rose windows, and prompted Caxton to take up the trade various cedars (Juniperus virginiana, the like. The design was either blocked of translating and publishing books in J. procera, and others), and used by on the cover, as in France, or built up English. It may have been during a some restorers in a mixture of an- by rleans of separate tools, as in Eng- visit to Cologne in 1471-72 that he first hydrous lanolin, beeswax, and hexane, land. The cathedral style was a re- encountered the craft of printing, and as a leather dressing. The cedarwood vival of the 16th century ARCHITEC- it is reasonably certain that he learned oil is said to act both as a preservative TURAL STYLE by the19thcentury the craft from Johann Veldener. and as an agent which aids in forming binder JOSEPH THOUVENIN. (69, 347) Caxton returned to Bruges in 1472 a bond between the lanolin and wax in cationic (substances). Substances, such as and there published the firstprinted leather. See also: LEATHER DRESSINGS. dyes, tannins, oils, etc., which ionize book in the English language, Raoul le (130, 291) when dissolved in water, so that the Fevre's Le Recueil des Histories de cellulose. The chief constituent of the characteristiciondye,tannin,oil, Troyes, which he had translated in cell walls of all plants and of many etc.is the cation and has a positive about1473-74.Itissupposed that fibrous products, including paper and charge.Cf: ANIONIC (SUBSTANCES) Caxton financed the publication but cloth.Celluloseis by far the most (305) that it was actually printed by Veld- abundant organic substance found in cat's paw calf. An acid-stain pattern on a ener at Louvain. Caxton returned to nature. It is a complex polymeric car- calfskin binding, somewhat resembling England in 1476, where he lived for bohydrate(C8H1005).,havingthe the paw marks of a cat. See also: TREE the next 15 years, dying in London in same percentage composition as starch, CALF. 1491. i.e., 44.4% carbon, 6.2% hydrogen, cat's tooth decoration. A form of decora- Regardless of what some critics may and 49.4% oxygen, and it also yields tion consisting of a serrated line re- say of Caxton's lack of scholarship only glucose on ccmplete hydrolysis sembling a row of teeth. It is usually and education, his place in history is by acid. The portion of a cellulosic impressed with a ROLL (I ), and is gen- deserved more because of his ability as material that does not dissolve in a erally used as a border decoration. a linguist and editor, than as a printer 17.5% solution of sodium hydroxide caustic. A term used with reference to the and publisher. Even so, he printed is termed ALPHA CELLULOSE; the por- hydroxides of alkali and alkaline earth some 18,000 pages, most in folio size, tion that dissolves in an alkaline solu- metals, such as sodium, potassium, cal- and almost 80 separate books. He did tion and precipitates upon acidification cium, barium, etc., so cailed because most of the administrative work of the is known as BETA CELLULOSE; and the they possess corrosiveproperties. In press through his three main assistants, portion that dissolves in an alkaline very dilute solutions, caustics are used Wynkyn de Worde, Richard Pynson, solution but does not precipitate upon to neutralize acidity in paper, to con- and Robert Copland. Inall, Caxton acidificationis called GAMMA CELLU- trol pH in the bleaching of paper fur- translated at least 22 books; he may LOSE. See also: CELLULOSE ACETATE; cellulose acetate SO ceramic paper fibers

CELLULOSE CHAIN; CELLULOSE FIBERS; Deciduous woods 41-42 bination with corner pieces generally CELLULOSE NITRATE; COTTON LINTERS; Coniferous woods 41-44 made up of a quarter segment of the HEMICELLULOSES; LIGNIN; PAPER. (72, Cornstalks 43 center ornament. The style was com- 198) Wheat straw 42 mon on the Continent and especially cellulose acetate. An acetate salt of cellu- in England from about 1580 to 1620. lose, produced from COTTON LINTERS The cellulose fibers used in making See also:CENTERPIECE. (243, 347) and used in archival work:1)as a paper have certain inherent properties center fold. See: CENTER SPREAD. photographic film base (often called which enable them to form a web, center-fold sewing. A generic term some- "safety film" sinceitisnot readily i e.,a sheet of paper, including:1) times used with reference to the sew- combustible); and 2)in conjunction hydrophilicity, which permits them to ing of a book through the folds of the with an adhesive, such as one of the be readily dispersed in water; 2)a sections. See. FLEXIBLE SEWING; polyvinyl resins,in laminating, heat fine structure which perimts FIBRILLA- MACHINE SEWING; RECESSED-CORD sealing, etc. Cellulose acetate is manu- TION; 3) sufficient fiber length to form SEWING; TAPE SEWING. factured in a wide variety of thick- a highly entangled web of considerable centerpiece. 1. A finishing stamp, usually nesses, ranging from 0.001 to 0.005 strength; and 4) the ability to form ARABESQUE, blocked in the center of inch, and is clear, hard and glossy. It hydrogen bonds between fibers as the the cover and generally used in com- has little tear strength and has almost web dries,thus providing additional bination with center pieces or corner the same HYGROSCOPICITY as cellulose strength in the sheet of paper. (144) stamps. It was a popular form of dec- itself; however, when moist, it does not cellulose film. A transparent film pro- oration in the late 16th and early 17th stretch as much as paper. (31, 34, 81, duced from cellulose fibers by a proc- centuries. Also called "centerstamp." 303) ess that involves steeping, shreckling, 2. A piece of metal, usually embossed cellulose chain (cellulose molecule). A and converting the fibers into a viscose and engraved, and fastenedtothe term used todescribe thecellulose solution, or cellulose xanthate, which cover of a book. (236, 259) molecule, which appears to be built up is subquently extruded to convertit center spread. The two center pages of a of between 150 and 1.500 very simple into a film.It is made in a limited section or, more specifically, the two units, in the form of a long, thin struc- range of thicknesses, between 0.00085 center pagesofaperiodicalissue, ture, not unlike a chain. Each link of and 0.0016 inch, and, when rendered printed side by side on a continuous the chain consists of a slightly modified moisture resistant, may be used to seal sheet so that there is no margin be- form of the common sugar, glucose; documents, book leaves, etc., for pro- tween them. Such a publication must the strength of paper depends toa tection. Itis a fairly flexible film of be sewn through the center fold to large extent on the continuity of these considerable strength. (81) avoid obscuring part of the printed linkages. Destructive agents, which can cellulose nitrate. A film made from cot- matter Alsocalled"centerfold." weaken and open the individual links ton waste, wood, or waste cellulose (316) of the chain, cause it to break into film. It is produced by the nitration of centerstamp.See: CENTERPIECE. smaller lengths,resulting in what is cellulose, usually with a mixture of center-to-center. I. The distance from the generally considered to be BRITTLE- nitric and sulfuric acids. It has been center of one punched hole (punched NESS inthe paper. The mechanical used as a film base for photographic through the paper for side sewing or strength of any aggregate of cellulose purposes, as well as to encase docu- fold sewing) to the center of the next fibers, such as paper, decreases in re- ments, book leaves, etc.; however, its hole.2. The distance between holes sponse to the reduction in chain length, flammability, the fact thatitcauses punched through loose-leaf papers, or the process continuing ultimately to severe deterioration of the materials it the covers of a post binding, etc. (83) the point where only glucose remains. supposedly protects (because of the center tools. The ornamental stamps on (198) generation of oxides of nitrogen which the spine of a volume between the cellulose ester. An ester of cellulose, such yieldnitricacidinthe presence of raised bands. Of the customary six as CELLULOSE ACETATE of CELLULOSE water), and the fact that it cannot be spaces, the titleis normally in space NITRATE. manufacturedinthickness down to two (from the top), the author in cellulose fibers. The basic raw material 0.001 inch, has precluded its use in space four, the year of publication in used in the manufacture of paper and preservation work. (34, 81) space six, with "center tools" in spaces othercelluloseproducts.Cellulose cellulose varnish. A cellulose-base var- one, three, five and six (just above the usually exists in association with sub- nish (usually cellulose nitrate), avail- date). (94, 261, 371) stantial amounts of other substances able in an aerosol dispenser, and useful centipoise. One hundredth of a poise. It that are removed insofar as possible in as a protective sealing film over the is a unit for measuring the viscosity of the papermaking process. An excep- lettering on a book cover, if used in an adhesive. The viscosity of water at tion to this is the seed hair fibers, or moderation. It is flammable. (92) 20*C. is approximately one centipoise. COTTON LINTERS, Which exist as almost cement. 1. A term meaning to bond to- (222) pure cellulose. The approximate cellu- gether or to adhere with a liquid ad- ceramic paper fibers. Noncellulosic paper lose content of some of the materials hesive. 2. A liquid adhesive having a fibers produced from inorganic mate- used in making papers are: solvent base composed of a synthetic rials. Ceramic fibers include all refrac- resin. 3. An inorganic paste. tory fibers made of alumina, zirconia. Material % Cellulose (222, 309) thoria, magnesia, fused silica, hafnia, center and corner piece style. A common berylia,titaniumoxide,potassium Cotton 98 style of decoration, essentially Eastern titanate, and their mixtures, with or Ramie 86 in origin, featuring a center ornament, withoutsilica. By definition, mono- Hemp 65 circularor(occasionally)ovalin oxideceramics,suchas alumina Jute 58 shape, and often ARABESQUE, in COM- ceramics, are composed ofat least certification plan 51 chamois

80% oxides. More often they contain library binder isrequired to warrant learning to be hanged. and too little to 90% or more base oxides, while spe- that the binding covered by his invoice be honest." cial products may contain 99% and is Library Binding and complies with The practice of chaining books be- sometimes 100%. The main group of all requirements of the Library Bind- gan to die out by the middle of the ceramic fibers is composed of silica in ingInstituteStandardsforLibrary 17th century when it became a more admixture with special oxides, such as Binding, except as noted in the invoice. common practice to shelve books with aluminumandmagnesiumoxides, Certified library binders are also re- their spines out. See PLATE 1. (46, 236) barium, and calcium. quired to adhere to the Trade Practice chain lines (chain marks). The widely Ceramic fibers may be produced in RegulationfortheLibrary Binding spaced lines, about 25 mm numerousways,including,blowing Industry, maintain compulsory insur- apart, parallel to the shorter sides of a methods, methods, continu- ance to protect the customer's prop- sheetof laidpaper, caused by the ous-spinning methods, colloidal evap- erty in their custody, and participate "chain wires," i.e., the wires to which orationprocesses,vapordeposition, inthe industry quality control pro- the finer laid wires of the MOLD (1) single-crystalandwhiskermethods, gram. (131, 208) are attached for support. They usually oxidation,crystallization, pseudomor- cessing. A technique used to allow excess correspond to the position of the bars phicalteration.etc.Ceramic paper tan liquor to drain from hides and or ribs of the mold to which they are fiber is not used in book production skins,particularlytheformer. The oftenfastened.Occasionally,the because of the very high cost of the hides are piled up flat on a wooden shadow of the rib can be seen on either fibersas compared with wood and stillage or pallet and covered to pre- side of the chain line. Generally the other organicfibers;however, such vent overdrying the surface and edges chain lines run vertically in the leaves papers do print and fold well and are of the pile. Cessing is also used in place of a folio, horizontally in a quarto, considerably more durable. (42) of HORSING UP when it is necessary to andagainverticallyinanoctavo. certification plan. A proposal for library have aflatleather with no creases. Sometimes, in the late 17th and early binding drawn up in the 1930s by the Also called "piling." (306) 18th centuries, this rule is reversed be- Joint Committee of the American Li- chained books. Books that in the past cause of the use of a split sheet, or the brary Association and the Library Bind- wereattachedtoshelves, use of a double mold, resultingin ing Institute, to enable library binders desks, pulpits, pews, etc., by means of "turned chains." (69, 136, 225) to apply for certification by agreeing to chains. From the 15th to the early 18th chain stitch. I, See KETTLE STITCH. 2. An meet certain requirements, including: century, books were secured inthis ornamental stitchin an embroidered 1.Submitting samples of their work manner to prevent them from being binding that resembles the links of a so as to demonstrate the bindery's stolen. The chains used for this pur- chain and is used in working in silver capability of producing so called pose varied in length from nearly 3 and other coloredthreadsintothe Class "A" work (the samples being feet to almost 5 feet, while the links binding. ( 1 1 1 ) reviewed by a board appointed by ranged in size from 11/2to almost 3 chain wires. See: CHAIN LINES. the Joint Committee); inches in length, with a width of about chalk. See: CALCIUM CARBONATE. Proving responsibility and reliabil- 1/2 inch. The problem of the chains ity by means of sworn answers to breaking when twisted was partially chalking.I.The process of applying questions, and permitting the inves- overcome by the inclusion of a swivel pumice, brick dust, No earth, or a sim- tigation of replies; in the middle or at one end. ilarmaterial,tothe GOLD CUSHION 3.Providing satisfactory references: When the books were meant to be prior to laying the gold leaf on it for 4.Carrying sufficient insurance; stood on end the chains were usually cutting. Chalking helps prevent the leaf 5.Pledging to conduct the business of attached to the fore edge of the upper from stickingtothe cushion.2. A the bindery fairly, treat customers cover (and occasionally the lower) by printing defect caused by the use of an honestly, and maintain minimum means of a ring held to the board by ink that has been over-reduced, or an standards and good labor condi- a length of thin brass which was bent ink that is not suitable for the paper, tions; and around the edge ofthe cover and causing the ink vehicle to soak into the 6.Becoming a member of the Library riveted in place. Often, however, the paper leaving the pigment on the sur- Binding Institute ring was not used, the chain being at- face where it can easily be smudged or The certification of library binders is tached directly to the clip on the cover. rubbed off. 3. A condition encountered now solely under the jurisdiction of This required that the book be shelved in some papers where fine particles of the Library Binding Institute. (131) fore edge out, a method of shelving ptment break off the sheet during fin- certified library bindery. A bookbinding that endured well into the 17th cen- ishing, converting, printing, or subse- establishment in the United States or tury, even when chains were not used. quent use. Canadathatspecializesinlibrary Books meant to lie permanently on lec- chalky appearance. The surfaceofa binding and meets the minimum speci- terns, or the like, often had the chains that is lacking in gloss. fications of the Library Binding Insti- attached to the bottom or top edge of The condition is probably due more to tute, aS outlined in f',e CERTIFICATION the lower cover. the type of coating material used, as PLAN. A certified library binder is de- Chains were used, it has been said, well as to the coating process, than to finedas one who produces binding because "The thievish disposition of the degree of calendering which the which will achieve two objectives; 1) some that enter into libraries to learn paper undergoes. (17) meet the requirements of libraries for no good there, hath made it necessary chamfered edges. See: BEVELED BOARDS. an end product capable of withstand- to secure the innocent books, even the chamois. Originally, a soft, pliable leather ing the rigors of normal library circu- Sacred volumes themselves, with made from the skin of the chamois lation or use; and 2) provide maxi- chainswhich were better deserved by (Rupicapra rupicapra), a small goatlike mum readerusability.Acertified thosepersons, who have too much antelope found in the high mountain- chamoktting 52 Chicago posts

ous areas of Europe and the Caucasus. exact number of sheets is counted for early 20thcentury.Inthe United Chamois was at one time used to some one (check) pad, and, using this pile States its use has declined sharply since extent in bookbinding, but is seldom, as a "check pile,"the approximate the introduction of the Oriental chest- if ever, used today because it is hygro- number of sheets is placed ;n an adja- nut blight (Endo(hia parasitica), which scopic, and,if kept dry by artificial cent pile. Sheets are added or removed has virtually destroyed the American means, tendsto become hard and from the second pile until the heights chestnut. Today Italyisthe largest pronetocracking. Theoriginal of the piles are the same, at which time producer of chestnut wood extract for chamois was a vegetable-tanned leather. the second rile supposedly hasthe tanning. Today, the leather called "chamois" is same na.nber of sheets as the "check The bark of the chestnut is not used a suede-finished leather made from the pile." A better method is to use a PAD because it imparts a dark color to the FLESH SPLIT of a sheep- or lambskin, COUNTER (2). (74) tannin, anditshighsugarcontent or from sheep or lamb from which the cheeking. The process of reducing the would result in a higher percentage of grain has been removed by FRIZING thickness of the head areas of unhaired soluble non-tans inthe extract. The (3), and tanned by processes involving skins by means of splitting. usual tannin content of the southern the oxidation of fish or marine animal cheesecloth. A lightweight, unsized cot- European chestnut is 10 to 13%, or oils in the skin, using either only the oils, ton fabric, loosely woven and used to higher, which is considerably higher in which case it is a full-oil tannage, a limited extent in edition binding as a than that obtained from trees in north- or, in a first stage using formaldehyde spine lining fabric. (120) ern climates. The wood does not seem and then the oils, in which case it is a chemical wood pulp. A paper pulp pre- to reach its highest tannin content un- combination tannage.Inthe United pared from both coniferous and decid- til the trees are at least 30 years old. States,the term "chamois" without uous trees, in which the LIGNIN and Chestnut extract tans rapidly and qualification, is restricted to the flesh otherundesirablematerialsarere- produces a firm leather. If used alone, split of a sheepskin tanned solely with moved by cooking the wood with an however, it may impart a reddish color oils. The old term for thefulloil alkaline sodium sulfide solution, or a to the leather that isnot desirable; process was "chamoising." Also some- sodiumsulfitesolution,leavingthe therefore,itis used in combination times called "shammy." (170,306, cellulose fibers in an aqueous suspen- with quebracho, mimosa, myrabolans, 325, 363) sion of the dissolved , etc. The and valonia. , chamoletting. An old term for MARBLING. fibers are washed and are then used Chestnut is one of the pyrogallol champlevé bindines. Bindings produced "as is" to produce unbleached paper or class of tannins, and has a naturally between the 11th and 13th centuries. are bleached to produce white paper. low pH value. It also has a relatively The process involved cutting designs The fibers from coniferous trees are low salts content and a high acids con- into a thin sheet of gold or copper, ribbonlike and have thin walls. Gen- tent. See also: VEGETABLE TANNINS. which formed the cover, with cavities erally, two distinct types of fibers can (175, 306, 363) filledwithenamel.Sometimesthe be distinguished: 1) a broad fiber of a cheverell. A goatskin PARCHMENT that enamel was limited to the decoration width of about 0.05 mm and a length has been converted into a supple and of borders and corners. Champ !evecan of about 2.5 to 4 mm, and 2) a nar- strong leather with the characttristic bedistinguishedfrom CLOISONNE rower fiber about 0.02 mm wide and bold grain pattern. It proved to be an BINDINGS by the irregular widths of the 1.5 to 5 mm long. The fibers of de- exceptionally durable bookbinding metal enclosing the enameled areas. ciduous trees are shorter than those of leather. The conversion was effected (124, 280, 357) the conifers, being between 1 and 1.5 by a simultaneous tannage using alum charcoal drawing paper. A drawing paper mm long, but they are usually thicker. andoil,followed byintensivefat- produced in such a manner as to be In chemical tests to determine the liquoring and staking. Cheverell was suitable for use with charcoal or pen- presence of chemical wood pulp in used in England, France, and Italy cils. It generally has a high cotton fiber paper, an iodine-zinc chloride solution during the13thto15thcenturies. content. It is made in basis weights of gives a pale violet, pale blue, or red- (291) 60 to 75 pounds. (17) dish blue, depending upon the type of chevrette. A leather produced from the chased edges. See: GAUFFERED EDGES. chemical pulp. (93, 98, 143) skin of a young goat which is being, or check binding. A general term for the chemise. 1. A cover of sluc or CHEVRO- has recently been, weaned, or the skin style of binding in which the sheets are TAIN, used in the 15th century to pro- of an immature goat. Sometimes, any wire stabbed or stitched, and then cov- tect leather bookbindings. The chemise lightweight goatskin or is re- ered with lightweight strawboards, or was sometimes usedinthe Middle ferred to as "chevrette." (61) checkbook cover boards, which are Ages in lieu of binding. 2. A loose chevrotain. A leather produced from the lined with plain paper, marbled paper, cover for a book with pockets into skin of any of several very small deer- or cloth, and cut flush. Some have whichtheboardsareinserted.3. likemammals ofAsiaand West round corners. This style of binding is Broadly, the canvas covering used to Africa, and used in England,prin- not rounded and backed and has a protect leather-bound stationery bind- cipallyin theMiddleAges,for tight back. Books under 34 inch in ings. (140) chemises. Like the skins of does, lambs thickness are generally side stitched, chestnut. The wood of the European and other very young animals, it is soft while those over thatthickness are chestnut(Castaneasativa)andthe and supple.Itis sometimes inaccur- nailed or studded. The term derives American chestnut (C. dentata), from ately referred to as CHEVRETTE. (115) from the method of binding check- which tanninisextracted. Chestnut Chicago posts. Metal screw posts having books for banks. (256, 300) tannin extract was used extensively in two heads, one fastened to a full length check pile. A procedure for obtaining the France and other European countries, post, which is drilled and tapped with desired number of sheets in a PAD with- as well as in the United States, in the athread,theotherattachedtoa out having to count each group. The latter part of the 19th century and shorter post, which is threaded to be chicory 53 chlorine number

inserted in the main post. The purpose acidity, has no harmful effects on pa- tion was a method by which three holes of such postsisto allow additional per; however, itis easily affected by are punched in each of the sections in sheets to be added to the book. (256) water. (130, 143) such a manner that their positioning chicory. An herb (Cichorium intybus), at Chinese marble. A type of cover marble, alternates from section to section; they one time added to size solutions to ad- consisting of solid dark brown over are also punched obliquely through the just the tone of newly washed hook the entire leather cover, with whiting paper to eliminate strain due to side leaves so as to make them match the in spots or streaks, over which blue pull. Thread passes through and re- shade of the unwashed leaves. (83) and then large spots of red are thrown. turns in such a manner that every sec- chiffon silk (chiffon lining). A sheer, very The whiting not covered by color is tion is sewn to the next two sections lightweight fabric in plain weave, made washed off when the covers are dry. on each side. of hand-twisted single yarns of ailk and (95) Chivers was also famous for his DURO- used at one time to repair and rein- Chinese paper. See: CHINA PAPER ( 1 ). FLEXIBLE BINDING, as well as his VEL- force torn leaves, documents, etc. Al- Chinese wax. A white or yellowish crys- LUCENT BINDINGS. (94, 236) though its weight and sheerness permit talline WAX, formed on the branches chloramine t (sodium p-toluenesulphon- even the finest print to he legible, it is )fthe ash tree (Fraxinus chinensis) chloramide (C7H7CINNa00S3F100)). little used now because of its lack of i.orn the secretion of the coccus insect White crystals prepared from p-toluene- permanence. (81, 120) (Coccus ceriferus). It resembles SPER- sulphonamide and sodium hypochlo- China clay. A white, powdery material MACETI WAX, but is harder, more fri- rite, and used in a 2% aqueous solu- arisingfromthedecompositionof able and has a higher melting point tion to remove fox marks and stains granite feldspar. The term originally (80 to 83° C.). It is used in polishing frompaper,andalsoforgeneral appliedtothebeneficiatedKAOLIN leather, sizing paper, etc. (291) bleaching purposes.Itisapplied di- mined in Europe, but is now applied to Chinese white. A dense form of zinc rectly to the paper by means of a soft all beneficiated kaolin. S2e also: CLAY, whitezinc oxide (Zn0)sometimes brush or by soaking. It is very difficult (143) used as a bonding agent when coloring to wash out and failuretorid the China paper. A soft, very thin WATER- the edges of books. (335) paper of it may result in the formation LEAF (1) paper, produced in China, chipboard. A thin, hard-surfaced, gray- of highly destructive hydrochloric acid. and elsewhere, from bamboo fibers. It ishboard,normally produced from (102, 265) has a pale yellow color and a very stock, including waste papers. It chlorine. A commonly occurring, non- texture. The usual sheet size is 57 by has arelatively low density, andis metallic, univalent and polyvalent ele- 27 inches. Isis used for proofs of available in the thicknesses of 0.006 ment (C1), belonging to the halogens, woodcuts, for woodcuts to be mounted inch and up. It is sometimes used in and used, generallyinthe form of on a stronger paper, and, now and edition binding for covering boards; chlorinedioxide;C102),orhypo- then, for superior editions of books. in library binding and craft binding, chlorite (Ca(C10)2), as a bleach to Itisalso called "Chinese paper," or however, it is never used for anything whiten paper pulp, usually in one or "Indian proof paper." (17, 69) but lining board. (256, 277) more of the final stages in a multi- "Chinese" Chippendale bindings. A class Chippendale bindings. A style of book stage sequence. Its use as a bleaching of CHIPPENDALE BINDINGS. These bind- decoration, where the books were gen- agent in paper manufacture began in ings were generally covered inred erally covered in red morocco, and 1774 but its deleterious effects, while morocco, and were tooled in gold with were tooledingold with elaborate noticedalmostimmediately, were designs representing "Chinese" motifs rococo borders of swirls and acanthus largelymisunderstoodorignored. and symbols, following the vogue rep- leaves enclosing areas dispersed with Chlorine residues are extremely diffi- resented in the of the meshes of dotted lines. Incorporated cult and expensivetoremove, and mid-18th century. The bindings often in all this were various figured tools, many chlorine compounds break down featured rococo frames made up of including dancing angels, trumpeters, slowly forming highly destructive hy- recurving and serrated motifs forming doves, fruit,musicians,swooping drochloric acid in the process. Chlo- irregular compartments and perches phoenixes,etc.See also: "CHINESE" rine is also used as a disinfectant in for beehives with bees in flight, boats, CHIPPENDALE BINDINGS. (347) leather manufacture. (198, 235) Chinese archers and spearmen,col- chiseled leather. See: CUIR-CISELt. chlorine bath. A dilute solution of CHLO- umns andpilasters,doves,flowers, Chivers, Cedric (c 1853-1929). A Brit- RINE and water (or the commercial grapes and other fruit, horses rising ish bookbinder sometimes referred to product, Chlorox, diluted with water), from the sea, lions supporting shields, as the dean of library binders. Chivers used to remove stains from paper, as phoenixes, etc. (347) developed a method of hand oversew- well as for general bleaching purposes. Chinese ink. An INK of considerable an- ing, in which the stitches pass diag- For the disadvantages of using chlo- tiquity, made from lampblack or soot onally through the paper; itis still in rine solutions for bleaching purposes, obtained by burning vegetableoils, use today and is called the "Chivers see CHLORINE. such as sesame or wood (tung oil). method." One of the major disadvan- chlorine dioxide. A heavy, explosive gas, The quality of the oil is of major im- tages of the usual method of overcast- (C102), produced by the action of portance in this type of ink. The col- ing, or oversewing, groups of individual chlorine or sodium chlorite, and used lected soot is sifted; heated along with leaves which are subsequently to be in bleaching paper pulp from a water white, transparent oxhide, or fish glue; sewn on tapes or cords in the usual solution, usually in one or more of and pounded in a mortar untilitis manner of hand sewing,isthat the the final stages of multi-stage sequence. soft and pliable and can be molded book often has a tendency to open up See also: CHLORINE. into sticks. This type of ink, having andbecomestrainedbetweenthe chlorine number. The amount in grams a base of carbon, is very stable when groups;thisoccurs only whenthe of chlorine gas, or its equivalent in properlyprepared,and,not having paper is unusually thick. Chivers' solu- bleaching powder,that can be ab- chlorine water 54 clam shell coverer

sorbed by 100 grams of oven dry paper As in vegetable tanned leather, the usually of a devotional nature. The cir- pulp in a specified period of time and degree of control exercised in the tan- cuit edge differs from the yapp edge in under specified conditions. (17) ning process has great influence on the that the overlap of the cover is not con- chlorine water. See: CHLORINE BATH. nature of the leather produced. If, for tinuous. The covering leather is turned chloropicrin. A colorlessliquid (CC13 example, the final pH of a chrome- over at head and tail, with an independ- NO,), having a very toxic vapor. It is tanned leather is too low, the leather ent flap at the fore edge. The corners prepared by treating sodium picrate will be flat, hard, and wet, and may are square. This technique allows the with chlorine, or calcium picrate with show grease spots on the surface; if it is flaps to fold flat onto the edges. Some- bleaching power, and is used at times too high, the leather will probably be times called "divinity circuit," or "di- in fumigating books. plump, loose, dry, and may have a vinity edges." See also: YAPP sTTLE. chop cut. A method of tArning newly drawn grain or be too soft in the BLUE (66, 94, 264) printed sheets before folding, in which SORT.Itis,therefore, imperative in citricacid. A colorless,crystalline or the large sheet is trimmed on all four chrome tanning to obtain the optimum white powdery tricarboxylic acid sides but theindividualleavesare pH, i.e., 3.4 to 3.5 in the one bath (C6H807). Citric acid is used to re- trimmed in the process of separation, method, or 3.2 to 3.4 in the combina- move ink,andsimilarstains from after which no further trim is required. tion single and double bath method, paper, and isparticularlyusefulin This procedure is largely restricted to and to maintain it. removing ironstains.Itsadvantage economy printing. The normal proce- The two bath method has almost over chlorine solutions is that, being a dure is to trim all four sides of the large been completely superseded by the one weak and volatile organic acid,itis sheet, cut it apart to separate the sec- bath tannage, except in certain cases much less damaging to the paper. tions, and then trim each individual where the older two bath processis section. "Chop cut" cannot be used if thought to give a particularly uniform e1. Abbreviation for CLOTH. the individual sheet or section bleeds. tannage and a deposit of colloidal sulfur clamp. A device designed to bind, con- (329) in the leather. strict, or press two or more parts to- chromeglue. A light-colored,easily The major characteristics of chrome- gether so as to hold them firmly in their worked glue made from scraps of tanned leather are its blue-green color relative positions for some subsequent chrome-tanned leather. It is said to be and absence of filling power, i.e., an operation, to allow adhesives to set, or inferior in strength to regular hide glue. empty tannage. Chrome-tanned leather for trimming, printing, and the like. (81) tends to be softer and stretchier than They may be operated by hand, me- chromeliquor. A solutionofbasic vegetable-tanned leather, and is very chanically, by air pressure, or hydraul- chromic salt used in CHROME TANNING stableinwater.Unlikevegetable- ically. (145) leather.Itis prepared by treating a tanned or alum-tawed skins, chrome- clamp dwell. The time interval of the hold- strong solution of sodium dichromate tanned leather can withstand boiling ing action of a CLAMP. Although "dwell (Na2Cr207 2H20) with a reducing water and has a shrinkage temperature time" may be controlled manually, as agent, such as sulfur dioxide (SO2), or higher at times than 100 C.; however, with the clamp of a hand-operated a mixture of glucose and sulfuric acid. it does not resist perspiration or organic board chopper, the term relates more (305) acids well and is difficult to emboss. In accurately to the automatic release of chrome oxide (chromic oxide). A green, addition, it does not take gold tooling a clamp, such asin a BUILDING-IN insoluble powder (Cr203), which is the well and is difficult to fabricate in such MACHINE, which holds the pressure for basis for many salts of chromium used operations as turning-in, etc. It is, on a pre-set length of time. When a clamp in tanning leather by the chrome proc- the other hand, a very durable leather. doesnotreleaseimmediately upon ess. It is also used as a light- and heat- (101,164,248,306,363) completion of an operation, it is said to fast green pigment. (305) chromium sulfate (chromic sulfate). A salt havea"long"dwell. Thetypical chrome retan. A process in leather manu- of chromium (Cr2(OH)504), in the GUILLOTINE cutting machine has such facture in which the skins are tanned form of green crystals that are soluble a dwell; the clamp remains on the pile throughouttheirthicknessbythe in water and form an acid solution. It being cut until the knife has risen to a chrome process and, subsequently, are is used in CHROME TANNING. (304) safe height, which prevents the knife further treated with vegetable and/or chromo paper. A heavily coated paper from rippling the sheets on its return synthetic agents. The retanning agents suitableforcolorprinting.Surface motion and thus disturbing the pile. penetrate the skin deeply, but do not characteristics said to enhance color (145, 320) necessarily penetrate throughout the printing include smoothness, uniform- clam shell coverer. A machine used in skin. See also: SEMI-CHROME TANNAGE. ity of ink receptivity, high total reflec- edition binding to apply paper covers to (61) tance, and neutrality of shade, which side stitched books that are not rounded chrome tanning. A method of tannage means the paper is truly white rather and backed. The machine glues the stemming back to the discovery,in than tinted. The term is not generally spine, rolls or presses the cover onto 1858, that leather could be produced used in the United States. See also: it, and carries the book to the cover by treating skins with basic chromium COATED ART PAPER. (17, 156, 324) breaker where the back and both sides sulfate (Cr (OH)504). The two basic circles. Finishing toolsin the shape of along the spine are pressed by formers. methods employed today are the one 1/3,1/2, 3/4 , and full circles,in sizes Book sizes handled range from a mini- bath and two bath methods, the former generally ranging from Vs to21/2 mum of 7 by 5 inches to a maximum being most often used. The most widely inches in diameter. See also: GOUGE. of 12 by 9 inches, and up to 11/4 inches used chemical in chrome tanning is (97, 137) in thickness (with a special attachment sodium dichromate (sodium bichrom- circuit edges. The projecting flexible cov- for books up to 2 inches thick), at ate) (Na2Cr707 2H20), from which ers of limp bindings turned over to speeds up to 160 books per minute. chromium sulfate is produced. protect the leaves and edges of books, (320) clasps 55 clasps clasps. The hinged fasteners of brass, clasp has a tendency todistort the old as the codex itself. In its earliest precious metals, iron, etc., often elabor- boards, two are generally used, and are form, which was Coptic bindings, the ately chased, and intended to secure usually placed opposite the centers of clasp consisted of a attached to the covers of books, ledgers, albums, the second and fifth panels of the spine. the fore edge of the upper cover and etc. They are sometimes provided with All metal-hinged clasps have to be wound around the book over the fore a lock, and ere designed to hold the made to fit the individual book, as a edge several times, the bone attached to covers of a book closed, or when pro- perfect fit is necessary; however, where the end of the strap being tucked be- vided with a lock, to prevent opening the hinge consists of a leather strap, tween the strap and the lower cover. byunauthorized persons. Clasps are adjustmentscaneasilybemade. Another method, which may actually attached after forwarding is completed Stretching of the leather with use, thus have been used more often than the except for the board papers, because causing looseness, can be overcome by strap, consisted of the plaited thong by that time the final thickness of the making the strap of leather over vel- with loops which fit over bone pegs at book is known and any rivets on the lum, which also provides additional the edge of the lower cover. A clasp of inside of the boards will be covered by strength. this type seems to have been used in the board papers. Because a single The use of clasps appears to be as England at least as early as the 12th century. The strap was fastened to the fore edge of the upper cover, and the CLASPS end, which had a metal-rimmed hole, was taken around to the middle of the lower cover and was attached to a metal pin. English bookbinders of the 14th cen- tury began using two instead of just one, something which had been done earlier and more often on the Continent of Europe. The hole and pin type was more or less abandoned early in the 14th century and replaced by clasps and catches attached to the fore edge. Initially, each clasp consisted of a strip of leather having a metal hook on one end. Later, the metal part of the clasp was the full thickness of the book and was sometimes attached to the board by means of a metal hinge. In bindings of the 15th and 16th centuries, and probably earlier, the location of the clasp is a reasonably accurate indi- cation of the country of origin. English and French bindings usually had them attached to the upper cover with the catch on the lower, while bindings of the Netherlands and Germany had the 15th century German clasps catch on the upper cover. Italian bind- ers often attached the claspto the upper covers and often used as maqy as four clasps. The velvet-covered books of the royal collection in England in the 15th and 16th centuries often had ornamen- tal gilt clasps, which were often com- bined with elaborately ornamented gilt cornerpieces and centerpieces which helped prevent abrasion of the velvet. The use of metal clasps began to de- cline early in the 16th century, prob- ably because they could not be securely attached to the pasteboards which were replacing boards made of wood. The weight, size, and material of the books being published at that time did not requireclasps, and clasps were no longer economically feasiblefor the normal run of books. In most cases they were replaced by TIES ( 1 ). Clasps Claes "A" library binding 56 cloth

made of brass were still used in the stiff and frequently must be scored. leather. Clearing is done by drumming 16th century for some books which (52, 278) the leather in a cold solution of weak were bound with boards of wood, and clay tablets. The earliest form of the acid,e.g., a .25 or 1% solution of silverclasps and cornerpieces were "book." Clay tablets were generally oxalic (H2C204) or sulfuric (H2SO4) often used on small Bibles and other used for records and were inscribed in acid; if heavy STRIPPING (1) or clear- devotional works as late as the late cuneiform writing on wet clay, which ing is required, or if the original tan- 17th and early 18th centuries. In cer- when hardened was usually protected nage wasnotsatisfactoryforthe tain German bindings, however, e.g., by a cover (outer shell), also of clay, leather required, it is not uncommon to Bibles, clasps were used continuously which was inscribed with a copy, ab- retan the leather at this time. (306) until the end of the 18th century. 7his stract, or title of the contents. (12, cleat.See:KERF. was notably true in America, for ex- 156) cloisonné bindings. Enamelled bindings ample,wherealmostallGerman- cleaning. A general term used to describe produced duringthe1 1 thcentury, Americanbindings,e.g.,theSaur the removal of mud, dirt, dust, grease, mainly by Greek and Italian crafts- Bibles, were issued in calfskin over stains, etc., from the covers or leaves men. Cloisonné is a technique of sur- wood with two heavy claps attached to of a book, map, print, etc. Cleaning is face decoration in enamel on the lower cover. Brass clasps were re- done in a variety of manners, depend- metal, in which each color area is sur- vived during the latter part of the 19th ing on the nature of the soiling, the rounded by a thin line of metal, flush century, mainly for Bibles and prayer material soiled, and the facilities avail- with the surface of the enamel. Thin books, but also for photograph albums, able. It may range from gentle rubbing fillets of flattened wire are set on edge diaries, and the like. They were often with bread crumbs to complete wash- and soldered to the metallic base in the ittached to metal frames which pro. ing and restoration. (173, 335) desired pattern. The cloisons, or cells, tected the edges of boards. (83, 105, cleaning off. A term descriptive of a more are then filled with a colored vitreous 236) or less obsolete process of removing composition, fired, ground smooth, and Class "A" library binding. Library bind- excess adhesive from the spine of a polished.Cloisonnécanbedistin- ing that meets the standards set forth book subsequent to lacing-in. Cleaning guished from CHAMPLEvE BINDINGS by in the minimum specifications promul- off is generally done by applying paste the uniform thinness of the metallic gated by the Joint Committee of the to the spine, and, when the glue has lines. (124, 280, 347) American Library Association and the softened, scraping off both paste and closed assembly time. The time interval Library Binding Institute. The qualifi- excess glue with a CLEANING-OFF STICK between the completion of assembly cation for Class "A" binding, as ac- or plow trimmings. Once a book has of the parts to be adhered and the ap- cepted today, is set forth, defined and been rounded and backed and its shape plication of heat, pressure, or both. regulated exclusively by the Library has been set, the glue on the spine, See also:ASSEMBLY TIME; OPEN AS- Binding Institute,asdetailedinits other than that between the sections, is SEMBLY TIME. (309) Standard for Library Binding. not required, and, in fact, should be re- closed bolts (Oosed folds; closed sections). clay. A colloidal, lusterless, fine-grained, moved to permit greater openability of Any fold in a section that is not per- earthy substance which generally de- the book and also to clear the sections forated or cut during the process of velops plasticity when wetted but is of excess glue as a consideration of the folding, or before the binding process permanently hard when fired. Chem- binder of the future who may have to is completed.See also:Dour. (256) ically clays are aluminosilicates, which rebind the book. Cleaning off also helps closed joint. That type of JOINT (1) which do not form large crystals. The finely in setting the shape of the spine and is formed when the covering boards are divided aluminosilicates, which are re- makes for a cleaner, smoother spine laced on,i.e., where the boards are sponsible for the properties associated factors which are very important in the right up to the backing shoulders. Also with clays, are called "clay minerals." case of a tight back binding. called "tight joint."See also:FRENCH Clays with a preponderance of the clay The increasing use of resinous ad- JOINT; LACING-IN; SUPPORTED FRENCH mineral "kaolinite" are used both as hesives in hand binding, such as the JOINT. (12) fillers and as coating pigments in the polyvinyl group, in lieu of hot glues, close_formation. The closeness of texture manufacture of paper. Other clays are has meant that cleaning off has become and FORMATION of a sheet of paper, used in small amounts. Used in excess, more difficult, if not impossible, even i.e., a sheet in which the formation is as it is in some art papers, clay becomes though theuse oftheseadhesives uniform and free from a WILD (1) or an adulterant to the detriment of the makes shaping thespineofeven porous appearance when viewed by greater strength and durability of paper.See importance. Theplasticized transmitted light. It is frequently the also:ATTAPULGITE CLAY; BENTONITE; polyvinyls are neither softened by paste sizing or loading agents that "close" KAOLIN; PAPER CLAY. (17, 235, 343) nor are they soluble in water; further- the sheet by filling the interstices be- more, they do not seem to affect open- clay-finished paper. A paper, such as Imi- tween fibers. A well-closed sheet has ability adversely. If, however, removal more RATTLE and hardness, and gen- tation art paper, coated with finely pul- is necessary, they are alcohol soluble. verized clay to impart a smooth finish erally greater opacity. (42) (83, 236, 261) cloth. A generic term forallof the suitable for halftone illustrations. Such cleaning-off stick. A long, thin stick with papers present difficulty in binding, as fabrics employed in bookbinding and a rounded but not pointed end, used to conservation. Cloth is made by weav- they are difficult to sew (especially to clean off excess animal glue from the oversew), and there is often the ten- ing, felting, , knotting, bonding, spine of a book.See also:CLEANING or crocheting natural or synthetic fibers dency for the clay to separate from the OFF. (172) base paper, especially under humid cir- and filaments, in various textures, fin- clearing. The process of lightening the ishes, and weights.It may be plain, cumstances or if the paper becomes color and removing metallic wet. In addition, they are unusually stains filled, coated, or impregnated. Woven from the grain surface of newly tanned cloths, with the exceptions of certain cloth boards 57 coated art paper

"double warp" cloths, have a warp (the forcement of the first and last sections measured in ounces per square yard, or threads that run the length of the cloth which joins the endpapers to those sec- ounces per linear yard, depending on over and under thefilling), and a tions. 3. The board-stiffened, cloth cov- thecloth.Starch-filledbookcloths filling,also called the weft, running ered "lips" fastened into loose-leaf cov- range from1.7to 7.0 ounces per across the grain at right angles to the ers for use in conjunction with metal square yard, vinyl coated fabrics from warp. Both are generally expressed in fasteners or posts. 4. Any cloth jointing 14 to 31 ounces per linear yard (with number of yarns per inch. Since the used to bind in heavy inserts. (256) a per linear yard allowance of minus 1 number of threads in :he warp is gen- clothings. The strips of leather, cloth or ounce to plus 2 ounces), and proxylin- erallygreaterthan filling,the parchment (or vellum) which are glued coated cotton fabrics from 5.0 to 28.5 strength of a cloth .-eater in the to the spine of a stationery binding be- ounces per linear yard. The Library direction of the wail, ',Ur "grain" of tween the webbings, both to strengthen BindingInstitutespecificationsfor the cloth). the spine and help maintain its shape. pyroxylin-impregnatedbuckramcall Cloth is made from a wide variety of Also called "strappings." (82) for a cloth of not less than 7.9 ounces animal, vegetable, and synthetic fibers. clothing up. See: CLOTHINGS; FIRST LIN- per square yard. (209, 341) Animal fibers include those obtained ING; SECOND LINING; SPINE LINING (1); cloudy (cloud effect). See: WILD (1). from animal haire.g., wool and TRIPLE LINING. clubbindery. A finehandbindery those obtained from insects, such as cloth-jointed endpaper. An endpaper that founded in 1895 by Edwin Holden, silk.Vegetablefibersinclude vege- is reinforced at the fold by means of a Robert Hoe, and other wealthy Amer- table hairs,e.g.,cotton; bast fibers strip of cloth. The cloth joint is used ican bibliophiles, most of whom were from the stems of plants, such as flax, where reinforcement or extra strength members of the . The pur- hemp, jute,etc.; and fiberbundles, is required and the appearance of the pose of the Club Bindery was to pro- such as sisal, esparto, straw, etc. The cloth stripisnot objectionable. For vide American bibliophiles with book- fibers most often used in bookbinding maximum effectiveness the sewing to bindings of a quality equal to those are cotton,flax, and silk.See also: the text block should be through the available in Europe, thus avoiding the Boot( CLOTH. (52, 102, 341) cloth. The sewing may be concealed by delays and other inconveniences of cloth boards. 1. An old tel m for PRESS- inserting the cloth joint into a zig-zag; having to send books to Europe to have ING BOARDS used to create the joints of however, as this type of endpaper is them bound. William Matthews was a case binding during the casing-in utilitarian and used mainly for large given the responsibility of organizing operation. 2. An obsolete term for the account books, this is seldom done. See the shop, and he proceeded to hire the boards of a book. 3. A term sometimes also: LIBRARY STYLE ENDPAPER. (343) Clubs' first craftsmen, Frank Mansell, used to indicate a book bound in cloth. cloth-lined board. A board backed with finisher, and R. W. Smith, forwarder. 4. See: CLOTH-LINED BOARD. (256) linen or linen canvas. Such boards are Other craftsmen employed by the bind- clothbound. A book bound in full cloth used where additional strength is re- ery included Henri Hardy and Leon with stiff boards. quired but additional thickness is not and Paul Maillard, French finishers; cloth-cased book. A case binding having desirable. See also: CLOTH-CENTERED. Adolf Dehertog and Charles Micolci, a cloth as the covering material. The (58) coverer and assistant finisher, respec- term is usually restricted to an edition cloth printing. Book cloths decorated by tively; Mary Neill, sewer; Anna Berger, orlibrarybinding,particularlythe letterpress, offset, or gravure printing. mender, repairer, etc.; and others. former. (154, 339) In the latter two processes, even full The Club Bindery exerted a consid- cloth-centered. A term applied to a type color photographs and artwork can be erableinfluence on fine bindingin of duplex paper or board, one having printed on a suitable cloth. The picture- America; unfortunately, however, not a cloth core (or center), usually can- cover bindings used by library binders even the wealthiest of the stockholders vas,linen,muslin,etc.,with paper are an example of cloth printing. (234) had the resources to supply sufficient laminates on both sides.Itisused cloth stiffened cover. A style of binding work to keep the bindery going. Efforts where greatstrength,resistanceto consisting of a cloth cover secured to to transfer ownership of the club to the wear, and folding endurances are re- the spine of a book and stiffened on employees failed and the Club Bindery quired, as with large mai s. (58, 156) the sides with thick paper or board in- went out of existence in April of 1909. cloth graining. The all-over patterns im- serted between the cover and the end- (331) parted to cloth to achieve a certain papers.Seealso:PAPER-STIFFENED c m pattern. The code name for a small effect. Cloth is grained or embossed, as COVER. (343) pebbled pattern in a book cloth. it is also called, by means of heated flat cloth stubs. Linen or muslin strips bound coal Mr dyes. See: ANILINE DYES. embossing plates, when done by the into a book, usually during sewing, as coated. Paper or board which has had its piece, or by heated engraved rollers a strengthening medium for heavy in- surface modified by the application of when done by the roll. Grain patterns serts. clay or other pigment and adhesive include rib, wave, ripple, dotted line, cloth tooling. The process of tooling in materials, or other suitable material, diaper, patterned sand, morocco, sand, gold on a clothbinding. As with with the intent of improving its finish leather, glair is required, and, in addi- in terms of printability, color, smooth- pebble, crackle, frond, and numerous tion, greater pressure is required be- others. (59, 341) ness, opacity,etc. The term isalso cause the surface of cloth is harder, appliedtolacqueredorvarnished cloth hinges.1.Cloth joints extending especially the surface of a filled cloth. papers and book cloth, as well as other from the spine of the text block to the Pyroxylin impregnated cloth or imita- covering materials. insides of the boards of the book, or tation leather sometimes has tobe coated art paper. A coated paper particu- between split boards. Such hinges are washed with methylated spirits before larly suitable for printing, especially simply an extension of the spine lining being tooled. (54) halftones where definition and detail in fabric. 2. Any cloth or muslin rein- cloth weight. The weight of a given cloth, shading and highlights are an essential coated cover paper 58 cockle

consideration. It is usually a paper of own tools, and, with the exception of tying down, the use of acids on leather good quality, with a high brightness sewing and edge gilding, did all of his to create decorative effects,etc. He and a glossy, highly uniform printing ownforwarding.Cobden-Sanderson also called for sound principles in con- surface. (17) signed his bindings with the initials C S struction and the use of chemically and coated cover paper. A paper made in and the date, usually on the doublure, a mechanically sound materials. He en- heavy weights and used for the covers practice widely imitated since by craft couraged the use of native-dyed goat- of pamphlets, catalogs, etc. It is usually binders. skins for covering, and did much to coated on both sides and is available in Cobden-Sanderson's binding had a establish the use of the ZIG-ZAG END- white and colors, with a dull or high highly beneficial influence on the bind- PAPER, which until recently was used finish. Good folding strength is an es- ing of his day. To a certain extent, he extensively by craft binders. He also sential property. (17) started bookbinding on a path away was aware of the merits of alum-tawed coated one side.See: SINGLE COATED from the situation in which the vast skin, and his use of itin rebinding PAPER. majority of bookbinders seem unable manuscripts, and particularly his use of coating. The mineral substances used to orunwillingtoconsider new ap- taxl goatskin on the , cover the surface of a paper or cloth proaches, except withinthe narrow helped establish the reputation of dura- for the purposes of creating a new sur- limits of accepted methods. His influ- bility which this type of skin enjoys face having certain desirable proper- ence on his contemporaries was con- today. He also promoted the use of ties. This property in paper is usually siderable, and itis not unreasonable rough edge gilding (See: ROUGH GILT). that of printability, but may also be for to maintain that his influence is being Cockerell'spublications included purposes of decoration. In cloth itis felt to this day. Bookbinding and the care of books, usually used to increase strength and Cobden-Sanderson gave up his own Some notes on bookbinding, and Book- water resistance,butitsdecorative bindery in 1893 to establish the Doves binding as a school subject. (94, 217, effect may actually sometimes be of Bindery, originally for the purpose of 236, 347) greater importance. The coating mate- binding the publications of William Cockerel!, Sydney (1906 ). A British rial fills the interstices of the cloth or Morris' Kelmscott Press. He did no bookbinderandseniorpartnerof the minute "hills and valleys" which more binding from this time, but re- Douglas Cockerel! & Son, a firm estab- are present inthe surface of even stricted hisactivities to creating the lished by hisfather DOUGLAS COCK- highly calendered paper. (143, 323) designs and supervising the work of ERELL. coating clay. A CLAY used to coat paper. the bindery. (2, 94, 236, 281, 347) Cockerell has designed and fabri- Coating clays are of a smaller particle cochineal. A red dyestuff obtained from cated marbling equipment, and has size and higher brightness than filler the dried bodies of the female of the been largely responsible for the revival clays.Itisa refinedclay,usually insect Dactylopius coccus. The deep of the art of marbling paper. He is KAOLIN, that meets specifications. Free- red color of the dye stems from car- also the inventor of the pneumatic ram dom from grit, correct particles, good minicacid(C22H22013).Cochineal used in tooling, the ball bearing fillet, color and brightness, low viscosity, and was used extensively in the 19th cen- and the tract-guided fillet. In addition, purity of mineral type are among the tury in the production of red marbling he has contributed to the knowledge of requirements. (17 ) colors and scarlet lakes. It is also structure, e.g., the idea of using "Cobb" paper. A paper named after in the dyeing of wool and silk.(97, a free guard around the first and last Thomas Cobb, an English papermaker, 235) sections of the text block and also the who introduceditabout 1800. The Cockerel', Douglas Bennett (1870-1945). use of free guards around the folds of paper is thin, finely textured, wove, and An English bookbinder, first appren- vellum sections. generally somewhat drab in color, and tice to THOMAS J. COBDEN-SANDERSON. He assisted with the repair and bind- subject to considerable stretching when Many of Cockerell's bindings are elab- ing of the Codex Sinaiticus, and has wet. During the first half of the 19th oratelytooled with symmetricalar- repaired and bound several early manu- century it was used extensively for the rangements of conventionalized flowers scripts, including the Codex Bezae. covers of "boarded" books, and large and leaves, sometimes within compart- Cockerell is an honorary member of quantities were used for the endpapers ments formed by interlaced lines which the Society of Scribes and Illuminators, of economy leather bindings in the last often flow horn the raised hands. This a Fellow of the International Institute half of the 19th century. (94, 236, 371) style, which he apparently originated, for Conservation of Historic and Artis- Cobden-Sanderson, Thomas J. (1840 gives spine and covers unity, and shows tic Works, and a Master of the Art 1922). An English lawyer who left the that the designs were conceived essen- Workers Guild. His publications in- legal profession to take up bookbind- tially in terms of a book cover. His clude Marbling paper, the appendix to ing, working forsix months under interlacing patterns usually have no Bookbinding and the care of books, Roger de Coverley before opening his loose ends, and his plant forms appear and The repairing of books. He has own shop. Cobden-Sanderson produced to expand. Small spaces are filled in also contributed to several handbooks some 100 bindings, and his work was with gold dots, and butting lines are and encyclopedias. generally considered to be superior to strengthened by a thorn, often with a cockle (cockled). 1. A wrinkled or puck- that of his contemporaries. His for- dot at each side. ered condition in a sheet of paper or warding was excellent, and his finishing Cockerell was not only a fine book- board (or vellum) caused, in the case was skillfully designed and executed, binder but also performed a service in of paper or board, by nonuniform dry- and noted as much for its restraint as his teaching and writing, pointing out ing and shrinkage, or from heat and for its elaboration. He produced these some of the destructive methods then humidity, and, in the case of vellum, by bindings with the use of only a rela- being used by binders, such as ex- humidity. 2. A condition of the paper tively few simple tools worked in intri- cessive paring of leather and thinning in books caused by execessive humidity cate combinations. He designed his of slips, headbanding with inadequate andwetting.Cocklinginbooksis 5 9

AA.

An 1892 binding by Thomas J. Cobden-Sanderson on an 1841 copy of J. R. Lowell's A Year's Life. Reproduced from Bookbindings by T. J. Cobden-Sanderson, printed by the Spiral Press, 1969, for the Pierpont Morgan Library. (18.3 cm. by 11.5 cm. by 1.5 cm.) coconut oil 60 color

magnified significantly if the grain di- izontal, and vertical faced vertical. In triplehelixoflinearpolypeptide rection of the paper is not parallel to the case of vellum, the practice is to strands, composed of glycine, proline, the binding edge. 3. A term also ap- arrange the leaves so that flesh-side and hydroxyproline. When collagen is plied to book covers (boards) rising, facesflesh-side and grain-sidefaces boiled in water, the strands separate pulling, waving or curling, and caused grain-side, in much the same manner as and undergo partial hydrolysis, yield- by incorrect grain direction of the cov- such papers as azure are faced light ing gelatin. (291, 363) ering cloth, board paper, or the board side to light side and dark side to dark collate. To put the leaves, issues, or sec- itself, or by the use of the wrong type side. Even modern day book papers tions of a serial publication or book in of adhesive or too much adhesive. 4. A have sides, a felt side on the machine- the correct order; to make certain that warty growth in sheepskin. (98, 139, made papers and a wire side on hand- no maps, charts, illustrations, etc., are 156, 335) made papers. (94, 123, 192, 236, 365) missing; to determine if margins are coconut oil. A nearly colorless, fatty oil coffee. The common beverage obtained adequate for the desired type of sew- extracted from coconuts of the palm from the plant, genusCoffea,and used ing, as well as for trimming; to note (Cocus nucifera),or from copra, and by some restorerto tint the leaves of tears, or other damage to leaves in used to make gold leaf adhere to the books that have been washed and/or need of repair; and to determine the surface of the covering material before bleached, so as to tone them to the general condition of the publication, impressing the heated tool or die. shade of those leaves that were not including the paper on whichitis codex (pl. codices) (caudex). An ancient treated. (335) printed, the grain direction of the pa- book composed of leaves of writing cohesion. The union of the particles of per, the presence of bled illustrations, material fastened together so as to open one substance by meanes of primary and the need for pocket material, stubs, like a modern book, as distinct from and secondary valence forces. As ap- guards, etc., for the purpose of select- a SCROLL (1) or VOLUMEN, which it plied to an adhesive, cohesion exists ing the most appropriate binding style. superseded.It was introduced origi- when the particles of an adhesive (or collating mark. See: BLACK STEP. nally in the 1st century A.D. The Eng- the adherend) are held together.Cf: collation. 1. That part of the description lishwordderivesfromtheLatin ADHESION. (309) of a book, other than its contents, as a caudexorcodex, meaninga tree trunk coil binding (coiled binding).See:SPIRAL physicalobject.Collationgivesthe or stem stripped of bark. Originally, the BINDING. number of volumes, pages, columns, name was appliedto two or more cold flow.See:CREEP. leaves, illustrations, photographs, tablets of wood, metal, or ivory, hinged cold glue. Synthetic adhesives that do not maps, etc.,as well as the size and together with rings, the inner sides of require heating and which effect ad- format. 2. The process of comparing which were covered with wax which hesion simply by drying. Cold glues minutely, page by page, line by line, could be inscribed with a stylus. Later are being used more and more in or even symbol by symbol, either vis- on the term was applied to books of bookbinding,particularlyinlibrary ually, or by means of electro, electro- this format made of papyrus. vellum, or and hand binding.See also:RESINOUS mechanical, or chemical means,in parchment. Although papyrus usually ADHESIVES; FISH GLUE. order to determine whether or not two appeared in the form of a scroll, and cold gold.See:GOLDMARIC. books are (more orless)identical parchment and vellum in the form of cold pressing. A bonding operation in copies or variants. (69, 156) the codex, there was a brief intermedi- which the parts to be joined are sub- collet hammer. See: BACKING HAMMER. atestage,the papyrus codex.This jected to pressure without the applica- color.1. The multiple phenomena of came at a time when parchment was tion of heat. In hand binding, virtually light, manifest in the appearance of not yet fully accepted, partly because it all pressing comes under this definition, objects and light sources that are speci- was thought to be a somewhat vulgar whereas in edition and library binding, fied and described totally in terms of material, and partly because, when the some pressing operations require the a viewer's perceptions pertaining to codex was new, it was not realized that application of heat. (309) hue, lightness, and saturation for phys- papyrus was not really suitable to that cold-setting adhesive. An adhesive that ical objects, and hue, brightness, and format. sets at a temperature below 20C. saturation for sources of light. The Scribes and bookbinders have long (68' F.). Most of the adhesives used normal human eye issensitive to a attempted to match the sides of mate- in bookbinding fall into this category. range of wavelengths from approxi- rials forming the leaves of books. The collagen. The principal constituent of the mately 3.8/10,000 to 7.6/10,000 mm., early scribes were concerned with the fiber-network layer of hides and skins with the longest wavelength being per- arrangement of the sides of papyrus, used in producing leather. Collagen is ceived as red, followed in descending which were different because of the organized in long, wavy bundles which order by orange, yellow, green, blue, placement of the strips, and therefore vary in diameter from abbut one to indigo and violet. These are called the orientation of the fibers, during twenty microns. These bundles branch Newton'sspectral colors,i.e., they are manufacture. When the number of in a complex and random manner to seen when a beam of sunlight is split sheets of papyrus were placed one upon form a three dimensional network upon into its component parts, as it passes another with each one the same way which many of the qualities of leather through a prism. Notwithstanding this up, and were then folded down the depend, and it is this complex network separation, however, a precise limit for middle to make a section, the first half of fibers which provides leather with its any single color cannot be made be- of the section had the horizontal lines unique character. cause the spectrum undergoes a con- uppermost, while the second half had Collagen is a protein of the sclero- tinuous transition throughout the series. theverticallinesuppermost.This protein class, which is the most im- If the human eye perceives all seven method was sometimes adopted, portant constituent of the connective kinds of light in the spectrum, and in whereas in other cases the sheets were tissue of an animal. The molecules the same proportions, the "color" seen alternated so that horizontal faced hor- (14 X 2900 A) appear to comprise a is white. colored brushed top 61 colored paste-papers

The color of a particular object is the head edge of a book by means of English. The Italian colored endpapers usually contingent on the white light coloring followed by burnishing. (58) are generally very well done, often striking the surface of the object and colored edges. The edge or edges of a bearing small patterns devised on a being completely or at least partially book that have been decorated with geometrical scale. In the execution of absorbed in the surface of the material, water colors or dyes applied to the these papers, the color was used in a with the remaining light being reflected edge or edges and usually burnished. very liquid form, producing a kind of from it. Consequently, when a person The colors are generally mixed with blottedeffect.Inthe18th century sees the color "red," for example,it thin glue and edge gilding size. The these papers were also used for cov- means that all of the incoming wave- most commonly used colors are red, ering inexpensive trade bindings. (172) lengths (white light)have been ab- yellow, green, and blue; brown, black colored inks. Inks of various colors used sorbed by the surface of the object and pink have also been employed. If for both printing and writing. Numer- viewed except those wavelengths which only one edge is colored, itis usually ous dyes and pigments have been used constitute the color we have designated at the head. in the manufacture of these inks. Those as red. If the light reflected from the Coloring the edges of books appears made frompigmentandvegetable surface of the object is allowed to pass to be virtually as old as the codex it- colorswereusedforhundredsof through a further colored layer before self, the earliest known example being years, but are rarely used today. Inks reaching the eye, such as, for example, purple edges on a 4th century book. made from minium (red lead), red a transparent yellow film, more light Red, ochre, and yellow were often ochre(rubrica)or vermillion were will be absorbed, and the result will be used in the15th to17th centuries, used by the Romans, while in the mid- a mixed color, i.e., orange. This process while solid red edges sprinkled with dleagesverdigrisormetallicinks is called "substractive color mixture," yellow were popular in the first half (powdered gold or silver in a gum) or color obtained by successively elimi- of the16th century. Colored edges were often used. From about 1600 to nating light of different wavelengths have been common to the present day the time the first use was made of inks from white light. in miscellaneous binding and from the produced from alizarin or aniline dye- Pigments, as well as dyes and inks, late 19th century on edition bindings. stuffs (1861), natural indigo, logwood, are mixed with one another to create Although the coloring of edges ap- cochineal, and similar vegetable pig- new hues according to the subtractive pears to be purely for decorative effect, ments were commonly used ingredi- system. In theory, any chromatic hue its actual function has always been to ents in colored inks. may be obtained by a mixture of the protect the edges from dust, dirt, and Inks made from synthetic dyestuffs, three primary colors. In practice, how- handling. See also: ANTIQUE EDGES; while inert in solutions of the dye and ever, many hues can only be approxi- FORE-EDGE PAINTING; GILT EDGES; MAR- water, and therefore not harmful to mated by mixing primaries. BLED EDGES; RED UNDER GOLD EDGES; paper, are not nearly as permanent as See also: COOL COLORS; FAST COLORS; ROUGH GILT; SPRINKLED EDGES. (161, iron-gall or carbon inks, although they FUGITIVE COLORS; WARM COLORS. 236, 335, 343) are more permanent than the early 2. Pigment or aniline colors used colored endpapers. Generally, tinted end- synthetic dyestuffs. (143) on the edges of books or on endpapers papers made from handmade paper. colored paper. Paper colored on one or for tinting or coloring purposes. 3. The Colored or tinted endpapers appear to bothsidesduringmanufactureby suspension or slurry of the materials have been first used sometime near the means of coloring pigments. When its for use in the pigment coating of pa- end of the 16th century. Some of the useisto be for cover papers, end- per. (17, 140, 233, 234, 350) earliest examples were printed with papers, etc., the shade ii. y range from colored brushed top. The decoration of small repeated patterns that sometimes light to very dark; for printing pur- the head edge of a book by means of require up to three woodblocks for poses, however, the usual colors are coloring and brushingwithastiff their execution. Of these papers, prob- the light shades, since a dark inkis brush. (343) ably the greater number are of Dutch not very legible on too dark a paper, colored burnished top. The decoration of or German origin, although many are and printing very light inks on dark paperisnotgenerallypracticalas two impressions are usually required toobtain Primary colors are:red, yellow, and blue. Secondary colors, derived from primary adequate opacity. Duplex colors, are: papers are those with different colors on the two sides of the sheet. (204, Primary Colors Secondary Colors 234) red and yellow orange coloredpaste Tapers.Decorativeend- yellow and blue green papers produced by mixing color with paste and soap and spreading the mix- red and blue purple ture over two sheets of paper, which. whilestill wet, are pressed together. Tertiary colors, derived by combining primary and secondary colors,are: Primary Colors Secondary Colors Tertiary Colors When separated, the transfer of color red and yellow orange from the sheets produces a mottled ef- yellow and blue green citrine fect on each. Colored paste-papers are red and yellow orange sometimes used for covering books, al- red and blue purple russet though they have little water resistance yellow and blue green unless waxed. Green, red, and blue are red and blue purple olive among the most commonly used colors. See also: COLORED ENDPAPERS; PASTE PAPERS. (172, 371) colored printinp 62 compensation guard colored . The name of an inferior paper along the line of the punched rubbed with a mixture of white IA al quality of paper, containing a con- holes. (316) and lard (1.25 parts wax to 1.0 part siderablepercentageofmechanical combed edges. The edges of a book deco- lard)facilitates clean removal of a wood pulp and used for the covers of rated with black, red, blue, and yellow tool. (97) pamphletsandsimilarpublications. colors, in the ratio of 1:2:3:4 respec- commercial binding. A term understood (156) tively, in a combed, figure-eight effect. to mean the binding of both short and colored under gilt. The edse or edges of combination oil tannage. A type of tan- long runs of identical books largely a book gilded over a coloring (usually nage, or process of tannage, in which by machinery, i.e., edition binding, but red) of dye or water color. Pigment the skin is first tanned with formalde- not including blankbook binding, colors are generally unsuitable for this hyde and is subsequently treated by pamphlet binding, or padding, in dis- decoration. Colored under gilt is used the OIL TANNING process. SCHne CHAM- tinction from the binding of single extensivcI-y for Bibles and devotional OIS leathers are tanned by this method. books of dissimilar nature, suchas works. (343) (61) craft binding and library binding. (81, color fastness. That property of a pig- combination press. A particular type of 115, 320) ment or dye, or theleather,cloth, przss,either manufactured commer- common binding. An English term for a paper, ink, etc., containing the color- ciallyor homemade, frequentlythe quality of binding that includes sew- ing matter, to retain its original hue, latter, that serves more than one pur- ing on tapes by machine, cloth joints, especially without fading, running, or pose, e.g., as a LYING PRESS that can a canvas or sheepskin spinelining, changing when wetted, washed, cleaned; be turned on its side and used as a strawboards, and a covering of sheep- orstoredunder normalconditions NIPPING PRESS, or a press that serves skin oruckram. when exposed to light, heat, or other as a STANDING PRESS, BACKING PRESS, common calf (common sheep). A very influences. Color fastness in paper is or as a press for CASING-IN, having simple style of leather binding, often measured with a fadeometer, and in brass-edgedboardsbuiltintoboth not headbanded or backed, and with- cloth by a launderometer. See also: cheeks. (173, 231) out pastedowns or lettering onthe FAST COLORS; FUGITIVE COLORS. (17, combination style. An old term used in spine. They were produced for the in- 209) America for a binding in which the expensive edition or trade, par- calorimeter. An instrument for measur- forwarding was done as though for a ticularlyduring the17th and18th ing or specifying color by means of hand-bound hook,i.e.,boards to be centuries. The vast majority of the comparison withsynthesizedcolors. laced-in,followed by covering,but 17th century bindings wereinfull i.e., by reference either to other colors then having the cover (case) made leather, as were those of the first half or to complex stimuli, not in general separately. The case was then "hung of the 18th; thereafter they wete also identical with the actual color stimu- on" the text block, the cloth joints bound in half leather. (237) lus, and giving results not independent were glued down and a lining paper common carder. An individual or firm of abnormalities in the color vision of was glued to the insides of the cover that undertakes to transport books to the observer. The typical colorimeter boards. (256) or from a bindery or library on a has a built-in standard light source, combinationtanned. A generalterm commercial basis, and who is respon- three colored filters, photoelectric cells sometimes applied to a leather tanned sible for losses as prescribed by law. or phototubes, a standard reflecting by two or more tanning processes. The majority of the library binders to- surface, and, in modern instruments, Combination processes include CHROME day either own and operate their own photoelectric cells and electronic cir- TANNING followed by VEGETABLE TAN- vehicles or arrange for transportation cuits to replace the human eye as the NING, i.e., CHROME RETAN; vegetable on a NON-COMMINGLED contract basis. receptor. The results of a colorimeter tanning followed by chrome tanning, or common marble. A type of thrown mar- examination are expressed as "chroma- SEMI-CHROME TANNAGE; tanning with ble, applied to leather covers, and con- ticity coordinates." (197, 233) formaldehyde followed by treatment sistingof black and brown streaks with oil, or COMBINATION OIL TANNAGE. applied by throwing or sprinkling. The color lake. See: I.AKE. (61) blackis generally applied first.(97, color reversion. See: YELLOWING. combined tannin in leather. Tannin that 152) comb binding. A form of MECHANICAL has combined so vigorously with the common red. A red marbling color pre- BINDING consisting of a plastic strip on hide or skin protein thatitcannot pared from a mixture of Brazil wood, the spine from which curved prongs readily be removed by washing. (363) nut galls, and sal amoniac (ammonium extend. They are inserted into holes combined water-soluble matter in leather. chloride) boiled in water. (97) punched into the leaves to be held. That material presentinleatherin commons (common color). An obsolete The name derives from the resulting a state of loose chemical combina- English term for a grade of book cloth "comb" appearance of thebinding. tion with the hide protein and -vhich intermediateinquality between the This type of mechanical binding pro- can be removed from finely ground cheaperlinensand more expensive videsamore-or-lesssolidspine on leather only by prolonged washing. extra cloths and buckram. Commons which the title of the publication may (363) were dyed before receiving the final be printed. Its disadvantages, however, comb marble. See: NONPAREIL MARFL'e. coat of color. The thready appearance are -many:leaves may be removed come away. The ability of a heatc.,1 fin- noticeable on linen-finished cloth was quite easily by unauthorized persons, ishing tool to separate or "come away" less apparent on commons because of and groups of leaves often slip from cleanly during blind tooling without the dye and additional coating. (256, the grasp of the flexible prongs. In sticking to the dampened leather and 276) addition, leaves tend to tear from the thus damaging the grain surface. Rub- compensation guard. A thickness of linen binding because the large, usually rec- bing the tool over the flesh side of a or paper, usually the latter, bound into tangular,slotsleaverelativelylittle piece of scrap leather which has been a volume to compensate for the thick-

ti) compensation pad 63 conditioning time

ness of folded maps, charts or other the spine does not come into direct rection.See: ANISOTROPIC BEHAVIOR. bulky material within the text block, contact with the sections. The depth of Since most papers are dried to a mois- or pocket material, so as to incorpo- each fold does not normally exceed ture content of ahout 3% (by weight rate such material without distorting to 3116 inch. The use of the con- of the paper), they tend subsequently the shape of the book. They are some- certina guard makes pullingof the to absorb moisture until the moisture times made by binding in a full section hook easier in the event that rebind- content amounts to approximately 5 of blank leaves placed ahead of the ing is necessary, and also reduces the to 9% (depending upon the humidity bulky material, and then cutting out possibility of damage to the folds of of the atmosphere in which they are all except a narrow portion after bind- the sections. A forerunner of this tech- stored).This tendencyisincreased ing. The more common method, how- niqueconsistedoflooseindividual once the paperiscut,because cut ever,istobind in folded strips of guards around each section of vellum edges are able to absorb atmospheric guard paper when the book isto be books. This type of guard is used only moisture faster than the surface of the sewn through the folds, or strips of in the best conservation binding be- sheet itself, especially when the paper paper when the hook isto be over- cause it is difficult and time consuming is stacked in piles. When a stack of sewn or otherwise sewn through the ( therefore expensive) to sew a book paper absorbs moisture, the edges, par- sides of the leaves. (102) when using the concertina guard. ticularlythose corresponding tothe compensation pad. A pad of waste paper, condensation. L A chemical reaction in cross direction, will expand more rap- slightly thicker than the difference in which two or more molecules, e.g., of idlythan thecenter, which causes thickness from the spin': to fore edge an adhesive, combine upon the sepa- cockling. In like manner, a "spongy" ofa sewn book(thedifferencein ration of water or some other simple effect may occur, due to absorption of thickness being the result of sewing substance. If a polymer is formed, the moisture by the top surface of the swell). The pad makes the book the process is known as polycondensation. upper sheets in the pile. This expan- same thickness from spine to fore edge Seealso:POLYMERIZATION.2.The sion may take place between the print- and overcomes the problem of distor- process of changing from a vapor into ings of a multi-color printing sequence, tion when the guillotine clamp is ap- a liquid, as when steam condenses into or when the paper is dampened as in plied during trimming of Ca: head and water. the offset-litho printing process, with tail edges of the book. (276) conditioning. A term which has virtually theresultthatthe colors used will complementary color. One of a pair of the same meaning as SEASONING, but, overlap in some places and leave gaps colors usually considered to be ;ii ex- unlike that term, is generally consid- inothers.Moisture absorption,par- treme contrast to eai..n other. Red and ered to refer to the exposure of paper ticularly when the grain direction of green, yellow and violet, and blue and to an accurately controlled and speci- the paper does not run parallel to the orangearepairsof complementary fied environment for the purpose of spine of the book, can cause cockling colors. The complementary of a pri- bringing the moisture content of the along the binding edge and waviness in mary color is produced by mixing the paper into equilibrium with the sur- the leaves, resulting in a book that will other two primary colors, e.g., green rounding atmosphere. Standard atmos- not close properly. The latter problem (whichisa mixture of yellow and pheric conditionsin North America can sometimes he overcome, at least blue)isthe complementary of red. are considered to he 50% relative hu- to a degree, by pressing the book in (233) midity and 73° F. In other countries an atmosphere of low relative humid- composition leaf. See: DUTCH Ginn. the standard calls for a relative hu- ity, but the problem of cockling along compressibility. The decrease in caliper midity of 65% ( -±2% ) and a tempera- the binding edge can only be overcome of a sheet of paper, expressed as a ture of 68° F. -±3' F.). Conditioning by a method of IMPOSITION which re- percentage, resulting from an arbitrary is of considerable importance for pa- sults in the grain direction of the paper specified increase in load. The condi- pers which must lie flat in sheet form, running parallel to the binding edge. tions under which the determinations or which must give good register when (17, 42, 144, 156, 276) are made must be fully specified. Com- printed. Unequal internal strains are conditioning time. The time interval be- pressibility of pnper is of considerable set up when paper is dried on the pa- tween the removal of the adherends importance in both printing ai,d book- permaking machine, because the ten- from the conditions of heat, pressure, binding. See also: BUNDLING ( 1 ). (17) sion in the direction of the web travel, or both, used in accomplishing bond- concealed binding. A term sometimes i.e , the MACHINE DIRECTION, produCed ing, and the attainment of approxi- used to indicate a MECHANICAL BIND- hy drying,is greater in the cross di- mately maximum bond strength. (309) ING concealed within a wraparound cover. (54) concealed joint. See: INVISIBLE JOINT. CONCERTINA GUARD concertina fold. A method of folding a sheet of paper, first to the right and then to the left, so that the sheet opens and closes in the manner of a concer- tina. Also called "accordian fold," or "zig-zag fold." See also: ZIG-ZAG END- PAPER. (58, 278) concertina guard. A type of GUARD (1) usedinconservationbinding.Itis made of good quality paper (gener- ally Japanese copying paper) and is used so that the adhesive applied to conjugate leaves 64 copper number conjugate leaves. The leaves of a section again to the stage of non-tackiness. clearlysuggestiveoffoliage.(156, which form one continuous piece of This type of adhesive is used exten- 250) paper,i.e.,leaves which are said to sively in attaching plastic laminates to convex covers. Book covers that are con- belong to one another. The form in surfaces and is convenient to use in vexinshapebecausethe bookis which the sheet is imposed and folded otherapplicationswhere immediate thicker in the middle than at the spine determines which leaves are conjugate. bonding is important. Such contact ad- and fore edge. Very old books some- In a sixteen-page section, for example, hesives are usually based on synthetic times had covers that were made con- the first and sixteenth, second and fif- . vexintentionally,apparentlyinthe teenth, etc., leaves will be ^onjugate. contemporary binding. I. A bookbinding belief that they could hold and support (69) produced immediately followingthe the leaves better by conforming to the Conradus de Argentina. A 15th century printing of the book; or, before 1700, shape of the text block. The text block German bookbinder, who produced a binding in the style of the decade was curved because the early printers bindingscharacterizedbycompart- or even the quarter century. 2. A new produced books that were somewhat mentsadornedwithwell-designed binding of an old book done in such swolleninthemiddle,the swelling stamps representing roses, fleur-de-lis, a manner as to appear contemporane- being due to the sheets being damp- etc. Conrad also produced several of ous, to a greater or lesser degree, with ened before printing so as to obtain a the ERFURT BINDINGS of thattime. the originalbinding, or one of the better impression. This resulted in the (94) binding styles of the time when the fibers of the paper in the center part conservation. 1. The conscious, deliberate book waspublished.Contemporary of the sheet being stretched and sepa- and plannedsupervision,careand bindings of this type, while not crea- rated by the force of the type. The preservation of the total resources of tive or imaginative, are not unethical fibers did not return to their original a library,archives, or similarinsti- provided no attempt is made to dis- conformation followingprinting,re- tution,from theinjurious effect of guise the fact that they are new bind- sulting in a slight additional thickness age, use (or misuse), as well as ex- ings of older books. (373) of the paper in the print area. ternalorinternalinfluencesofall cool colors. Colors which are situated in types, but especially continuous guard. A type of guard to light,heat, hu- which the folios of blankbooks are the green-violet half of the color circle, midity and atmospheric influences. 2. i.e., colors in which blue is dominant. A field of knowledge concerned with frequently sewn, the purpose being to allow the book to lie very flat when Bluish grays are referred to as cool the coordination and planning for the colors. See also: WARM COLORS. (233) practical application of the techniques open. The folds of the guard, which are about IA inch deep, are double the copal. A resinous substance obtained of binding, restoration, paper chem- from the exudations of living trees in istry, and other material technology, number of the folios of the book. Un- like the CONCERTINA GUARD, the folios areas of the tropics, or from fossils, as well as other knowledge pertinent rendered soluble in alcohol or other to (sections) do not fit into the folds of thepreservation ofarchivalre- the guard, but rest against the edges organic solvents, and used in the man- sources. Cf. RESTORATION. of the folds of the guard, with the re- ufacture of printing inks and certain consistency.1. That property of a liquid varnishes. In its dry form, itis also adhesive that enables sults that the opposite edges of the itto resist de- guard become the spine of the book, used inthe manufacture of gilding formation. The property is not consid- powders. (156, 264) ered to be fundamental to adhesives; much in the manner of the REV EasED-V GUARD. The continuous guard is usually copolymer. A complex polymer, result- it is, however, manifest in the viscosity, ing from the polymerizing together of plasticity, as well as other properties made of linen. continuous trimmer. A trimming machine two or more different monomers or of the adhesive. See also: VISCOSITY monomer combinations. A copolymer COEFFICIENT. 2. The air-dry (or oven- which does not have to be stopped and started for each cut, as is the usual is a true compound and often has dry) percentage by weight of fibrous properties distinct from those expected material in a paper stock or suspen- case with the typical guillotine cutter. of a physical mixture of the separately It has a revolving cutting bed equipped sion. (17, 98, 309) polymerized component monomers. An contact bonding. An adhesive assembly with four faces, each of which has its own clamp. When one clamp is filled example of an important copolymer process which utilizes adhesives that usedinarchival workisthe with books,itclosesand vinyl are dried to the condition where they the bed chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer. display very little adhesive attraction makes a quarter revolution carrying the books under the fore-edge knife. copperas. See: FERROUS SULFATE. to each other but still possess consid- copper naphtbenate. A green cupric salt erable cohesive attraction and strength Whiletheforeedgesarebeing trimmed, the operator fills of naphthenic acid and copper, with properties. When two surfaces, for ex- the next the combined fungicidal properties of ample, are coated with an adhesive clamp, the bed makes another quarter naphthenic acid and copper. It is prac- and allowed to dry to the point where turn, and the heads and tails of the tically non-volatile and is used in a they no longer display TACK, they can books in clamp one are trimmed at 0.1%concentrationtocontrolthe 1-,e conveniently handled; when the the same time the fore edges of the growth of molds and fungi. There is two 5rsfaces are then joined, however, books in clamp two are being trimmed. some risk involved in its use because they immediatelyattract each other Another quarter turn brings the books itspresenceinpaper increasesthe and cohere, instantly forming a strong in clamp one over a conveyor where liability of the paper to damage in a bond. "e the two surfaces are allowed they are released. (339) polluted atmosphere, possibly due to to dry 1or too great a time, however, conventional foliage. A form of book- the catalytic action of the copper with the ability to cohere is destroyed, un- binding ornamentation, usually struc- regard to sulfur dioxide, resulting in less the adhesive is dampened with a tured by means of individual tools, the formation of sulfuric acid. (198) solvent and then allowed to dry once which is generally unrealistic but still copper number. A number expressing the Coptic bindings 65 corner mItering

amount of copper reduced from the duce an original work by printing, or tions,asinRECESSED-CORD SEWING, cupric to the cuprous state by a given some other means. 5. Subject matter, or rest against the sections to form the amount of cellulosicmaterial.Itis either manuscript or printed, that is to raised cords or bands used inFI EXIBLE useful as a measure of purity, particu- be put into type or plates. 6. The ma- SEWING.See also:BANDS (1); TAPES; larly in relation to the strength and terialtobereproduced byphoto- THONGS (2); WEBBING(S) (1), (198, resistance to chemical degradation of graphic or other means, as well as the 236) paper and board. The copper number result of some process of reproduction. cord sewing. See:FLEX/BLt, SEWING; RE- gives the degraded , and par- (12, 274) CESSED-CORD SEWING. ticularly those that result from bleach- cording. The process of inserting and corduroy. A durable, cut-pile fabric hav- ing. Although the copper number te,:. tying string or cord on hanging cards, ing verticalribs, made of cotton or is subject to reservations,itis gener- calendars, catalogs, and other items, plain and twill weaves, and made in ally agreed that a lower copper num- the material being either pre-punched various weights and colors. Corduroy ber enhances the chances of longevity or pierced with an awl. Cordingis was used to some extent in the early of the paper. The test does not, how- done either by hand or on semi-auto- part of the 20th century as a covering ever, apply to lignified fibers, and must matic or automatic machines. (58, 82) materialforblankbooks andother be corrected for noncellulosic constitu- cord marker. An old term applied to the large volumes. (264) ents. (72, 143) marks made acrossthe spineofa cordwain. An English term forCORDOBAN Coptic bindings. Bindings produced by gathered book toindicatetheposi- LEATHER, Of CORDOVAN LEATHER. the Copts, or Egyptian Christians. The tions of the cords, tapes or bands on corium. See:DERMIS. Coptic style of sewing isnot unlike which the book was to be sewn, and, cork back. An imitation leather having a thatof present-day machine edition in the case of sewing on recessed cords, reverse surface of ground cork, pro- sewing, in that it is also in the form of where the sawing-in was to be done. ducing the appearance of the flesh side chain stitch linkings appearing as so (256) of a leather. many braids across the spine of the Cordoban leather. Originally, a "leather" corner(s). (1). The juncture of the two book. In addition, the covers of Coptic thatwas basicallyalum-tawedhair edges of a book cover at the fore edge bindings were frequently sewn or laced sheepskin, usually of a naturally white and head and tail. Types of corners to the text block by a number of hing- color but also dyed red.It was first include theLIBRARY CORNER, ROUND ing loops. Some Coptic bindings had produced in COrdoba, Spain, by a com- CORNER,andSQUARE CORNER.2. The wooden boards (from about the 4th bination of Arab and Spanish crafts- cloth, leather, or other material on the century to the Middle Ages), but the men following the Moorish invasion of corners of half bindings. 3. ACORNER- majority had boards built up by layers the 8th century. Sometime during the PIECE(2). 4. See:BOOK CORNERS. of waste papyrus. They also had lined 14th or 15th century the method of cornered(cornering). The cornersof spines with flanges, as well as head- producing Cordoban changedfrom boards that have been rounded, or the bands. They were covered in leather tawing to vegetable tannage. Within coveringmaterialwhichhasbeen as early as the 4th century and were Spain the name for all these materials, formed around the rounded corner. tooled in blind, or by blind blocking, including CORDOVAN LEATHER, was Boards are generally round-cornered although decoration with inked and guadarneci.The terms"Cordoban," on a cornering machine, or with a painted ornaments, as well as cut-out "Cordovan,"and"Spanishleather" curved chisel. (58, 139, 259) openworkbackedwithpiecesof have been used in England for cen- cornering machine. A foot- or power- painted or gilded parchment were also turies to denote indiscriminately sev- operated machine used for cutting the used. Decoration consisting of open- eral kinds of leather, some imported round (or other shape)corners, of work with parchment backing was exe- from Spain, others from France and paper, cards, book boards, etc. The cuted before the leather (which was Holland, as well as some actually pro- machine employs a curved chisel for already cut to size) was attached, as duced in England and called "cord- this purpose. (264) was blind tooling or stamping when wain," which is probably a corruption corner knife. A type of knife used for the fragile papyrus boards were em- of the French cordouan. (351) cutting leather at the corners of a book ployed. The tooling was inalllikeli- Cordovan leather. A soft,fine-grained, in the process of covering. (115) hood done with unheatedtoolson colored leather produced mainly from corner mitering. The process or opera- moi nedleather.Copticbindings theSHELLof a horse butt, but now tion of accurately joining the edges of maklp the oldest surviving "family" also produced from goat- and pigskin. the covering material of a book that of kler bookbindings, and represent Itisa vegetable tanned and curried has been turned-in at the edges of the the 3 ,imate source of all decorated leather. The name derives from C6r- board. The purpose is to have a mini- leather bindings. (104, 158, 236, 347) doba, Spain, where the leather was first mum of overlapping of cloth, or a copy. 1. A single example of a written produced. Cordovan is well known for pared overlapping of leather or vel- or printed work. 2. One of the theo- itsnon-porosity,density,and good lum. retically identical specimens of a work wearing characteristics. At one time Corner mitering has been altered which together comprise an edition, it was used fairly extensively in book- considerably down through the history impression, or issue. Different copies binding, particularly in Spain. See also: of bookbinding. One particular meth- may also be printed on different quali- MUDEJAR STYLE.(291, 363) od, which was used well into the 16th ties of paper. When printed in a dif- cords. The cotton, hemp, linen, or silk century, involved cutting the leather ferent format, they constitute different cords or bands, of varying thicknesses, so as to leave a tongue, with the cut- editions, e.g., a paperback edition, and which extend across the backs of the tingusuallybeing doneafterthe generally follow the original issue. 3. gathered sections and are used in sew- leather had been turned-in. In other An imitation or reproduction of an ing books through the folds. They are methods,theleather wasturned-in original work. 4. To imitate or repro- either sunk into saw cuts in the sec- and then cut so that the vertical edges cornerplece 66 cotton

of the leather hutted, or nearly so. An mainly in testing the strength of ad- ous masterpieces of Italian miniature oppositetechnique wastocutthe hesive bindings. paintingoftheRenaissance. They leather before turning itin, with the corners. See: BOOK CORNERS. were executed by the greatest Floren- result that it overlapped a great deal corner tool. A bookbinding finishing tool tine miniaturists of the day. These man- more than is usual today, and left a usedto make corner designs on a uscripts,embellished withgold and small gap atthe corners. This tech- binding. It can also be used to make colors on theinside, were adorned nique appears to have been in general the center design, four impressions of with equally superb bindings, many of use from the second half of the 16th the same tool resulting in a center pat- which are in red velvet or morocco century to the end of the 18th or early tern. See also: CORNERPIECE (1). (97, leather, decorated with gold tooling, years of the 19th. Toward the end of 261) inlays of leather of a different color, this period the leather was pared thin- corrected grain. A leather from which enamel,andcameos.Somewere ner and the gap atthe corner was the surface of the grain has been par- strongly reminiscent of Oriental motifs, considerably neater. During thelast tially removed by BUFFING (2) to a while others were more Italian in char- three-quarters of the 19th century the depth governed by the condition of the acter.Many manuscripts werealso most common method of corner miter- stock, and upon which a new surface bound inbrocade withbosses and ing of full leather bindings was to pare has been built by means of various clasps of silver. them diagonally and on a bevel before finishes. See also: BUFFED I.EATHER. In 1526 the king's library, which was turning-in, so that the two edges over- (61) estimated at anywhere from 1,500 to lapped to the extent of the bevel, com- corrected white. See: DYED WHITE. 3,000 volumes, was sacked bythe ing together at an angle of 45° from correct pattern. The contour of a hide Turks. (347) the corner. (236) flayed so as to permit the tanner to Cosway bindings. Leather bookbindings cornerpiece (cornerstamp).1. A book- produce the maximum amount of good produced in the usual manner, except bindingfinishingtool,usuallyARA- leather.Itis astandardpattern that they have miniature paintings in- BESQUE, designed to be used at the adopted by packers and tanners. (363) set into their covers. They are named corners of a leather binding, usually corrugations. Wrinkles across the mid- after Richard Cosway (c 1742-1821), for the purpose of matching a center- dleof sheets of handmade paper, the English miniaturist. Cosway ac- piece or other form of decoration. 2. caused by the paper being wetted dur- tually had nothing to do with the exe- Metal corners attached to a binding to ing printing and not drying evenly cution of these bindings, as they were protect the corners of the covers from thereafter. The sheet is stretched in the not introduced until early in the 20th damage. Removable pasteboard cor- printing area by the force of the press, century. They were probably the in- nerpieces are sometimes used to pro- resulting in uneven tension between the vention of the firm of Henry Sotheran, tect the corners of books during ship- printed and unprinted areas. See also: booksellers, or their manager, J. Har- ment. (156, 310) CONVEX COVERS. (154 ) risonStonehouse. The books were corner pull test. A test similar to the Corvinus bindings. Bindings belonging to bound by Robert Riviere, in good qual- PAGE PULL TEST, except that the leaf Matthias Corvinus, King of Hungary ityLevant morocco, with morocco clamping device is limited to gripping (1458-1490) and famous as a patron joints,watered-silklinings,andthe only the upper or lower corner of the of thearts. The magnificent library miniatures painted on ivory, glazed, leaf. This test is designed to determine which he gathered together at the royal and insetted in the covers. (236) ifa leaf will tear beforeitcan be palace of Budapest contained manu- cottage style. (cottage roof). A style of pulled from the binding, and is used scripts celebrated as the most marvel- book decoration in which the top and hottom of a center rectangular panel slope away from a broken center, pro- CORNER MITERING ducing a kind of gabled effect. The spaces arefilledin,attimes, with French sprays and branches in combi- nation with lacework, and sometimes with the same small tools used in the fan ornament. Although this style of scooped area decoration may haveoriginatedin France, perhaps as early as 1630, itis pared edge most characteristic of English binding of the late 17th century (c 1660) to about 1710. The style was still being used on pocket almanacs and devo- tional books as late as, or even later than, 1822. (124, 158, 172, 281) guide line / cotton. A soft, fibrous, usually white or- ganic substance that clothes the seeds of various plants,especiallyof the genus Gossypium. The cotton fiber re- sembles a flat, twisted tube, having a thin wall and a wide central canal, known as the lumen. Because of this wide lumen, the cylindrical fiber col- lapses upon drying to the form of a cotton bating 67 covering

flat,twistedtube, somewhat inthe or laying sheets of handmade paper counterbalance today is considered to shape of a corkscrew. The fiber length from the mold to the felts for pressing. be more of a safety device than a may be as much as 30 mm. and the 2. To press the newly made sheets of functional part of the cutting operation. width between approximately 0.01 and paper on the felts. 3. To press a sheet (145) 0.03 mm., giving a ratio of length to on the wire of a cylinder papermaking counterchange. Adecorativebinding width of more than 1,000 to I. Cotton machine and transfer it onto the felt motif consisting of a cover broken into consists of more than 90% cellulose, for pressing and drying. 4. To press divisions in which there is a reversal exclusive of CoTTON LINTERS. Since it water from a sheet oil a couch roll of dark and light shading. If the cover is almost pure cellulose, cotton fibers of a FOURDRINIER MACHINE, or extra is divided in half vertically, the left are readily affected by acids and mod- water by means of a suction couch half of the background may be of a erately strong oxidizing agents. Alkali preparatory to transferring it to a felt. dark shade, and the right a light shade, compounds in moderate amounts and (140, 197) while the panelinthe center,also at normal temperatures, however, have coucher. 1. An obsolete term for a large divided vertically, would have a light little effect on them. book meant to rest on a table or stand, left and a dark right side. (94, 183) Cottonisused extensively inthe especially a cartulary, register, or anti- countermark. A smaller and subsidiary manufacture of sewing thread, spine phcnary. 2. The workman who lifts the WATERMARK found in antique papers, liningcloth,book cloth(including newly formed sheetsof handmade usually in the opposite half of the sheet buckram), as well as higher grade pa- paper from the mold in which they are to the watermark. It usually consists persandotherproductsusedin formed, and transfers them tothe of the name or initial of the paper- archival work. (143, 198) couch board on which he builds up a maker, the date, and the place of manu- cotton bating. A soft, fluffy cotton fiber, pOST (1). (140) facture, although small devices such as having a sized surfaceto holdthe couching. 1. See: CoUCH. 2. A method of a small post-horn or cabalistic signs fibers together, and used as a padding embroidering a binding consisting of have been used. The countermark was medium for album covers, gold cush- gold threads laid on the surface of the ;ntroduced in the 17th century. (69, ions, etc. (256) cloth and held down by threads of 56) cotton content. See: coTTON FIBER CoN- bright red silk coming from the back countersunk. I. A bookbinding having a TENT PAPER. of the material. Ancient methods of panel sunk or depressed below the cotton drill. See: DRILL (1). couching were numerous, with zig-zags, surface of the covering material, and cotton fiber content paper. Papers which wave patterns, andallmanners of designed to take an inlay, label, or the are made from cellulose fibers derived diapers being produced by the position like. 2.,'type of WATERMARK pro- from CoTTON LINTERS, cotton or linen and arrangement of the stitches that duced by pressing down the woven cuttings, and lint cotton. Flax is also controlled the gold thread. (115) cover or face of either a mold or dandy sometimes included in this definition. couch roll. A roll or cylinder on a paper- roll. Also called "intaglio" (2). (12,156) Also called "rag content paper" and making machine the purpose of which is cover. 1. The outer covering of a book "cotton content paper." (17, 93) to press, i.e., de-water, or COUCH (4) the placed on a text block to protectit c9tton linters. The fine, silky fibers which newly formed web of paper from the both in use and storage, and, in many remain adhered to the seeds of the wire, and to transfer the web to the wet cases, to serve as a medium of decora- cotton plant after ginning, including press for further de-watering. Couch tion. A cover may be limp, e.g., a parts of the longer textilefibers, or rolls are of two basic types: the suction LIMP BINDING, which has no boards "lint," as well as coarse, short fuzz couch roll and the pressure couch roll. and the covering (usually vellum) is fibers in most upland species of the The suction couch roll is a heavy metal turned-in on itself and covered with the plant. When purified, linters are used shell drilled with numerous small holes boardpapers;semi-limp(orsemi- in the manufacture of paper. They can through which a high vacuum exists flexible), in which the boards are thin be used to replace from 5 to 35% of for the rapid removal of water from andflexibleandare covered with the rag content of fine papers with lit- the web as it travels over the roll. The leather or cloth and drummed on. See: tle or no loss of strength. Linters im- pressure couch roll consists of two rolls DRUMMING oN. 2. A SELF COVER, as of prove uniformity and the color prop- which apply pressure to the web to a pamphlet; or a stiff cover, e.g., more erties of paper, and also provide a remove water. (17) orlessrigidboardscoveredwith cleaner, bulkier sheet. Although linters counter. 1. An automatic device for re- leather, vellum, cloth, paper, or com- do find use in papermaking, their prin- cording the output or activity of a bination thereof. Stiff covers are usu- cipal use is as a raw material in the machine or device. 2. The bed or base ally glued down all over, turned in and manufacture of cellulosederivatives. of a blocking press.3. The interior covered with board papers. In edition (17, 42, 72) white area of a type letter. and library binding, the term CASE (1) cotton parchment. A parchmentlike ma- counterbalance. A device on a board is more appropriate.3. The outside terialproducedby soakingcotton cutter, or similar device, consisting of leaf of a periodical issue. (131, 236 fibers in a solution of sulfuric acid and a bar or rod with a weight or weights 256) then rolling the fibers into sheets. See that are adjustable so that they can cover boards. An obsolete term applied also: IMITATION pARCHMENT. (197) increase or decrease the countebalanc- to two thicknesses of board glued to- cotton thread. See: SEWING THREAD. ing effect on the blade. The rod or bar gether to give greater thickness (and cotton wool. A raw cotton wadding, usu- is an extension of the knife, and, by strength) to the boards used for large ally referred to as absorbent cotton, the action of gravity, works to prevent blankbooks. See also: SpLIT BOARDs. and used as an applicator for stains, the knife from dropping and also as- covering. 1. The material, such as leather, dyes, and other bindery operations. sists in raising the knife following the vellum, cloth, paper, or combinations (237, 335) cut. Although originally intended to thereof, which cover the spine and usu- couch. 1. The operation of transferring enhance the usability of the blade, the ally the sides of a book. 2. The process covering folder 68 crease retentim,

of pasting or gluing the cloth, leather. page. The paper is usually, although one side, and used in edition binding etc.. to a hook, drawing it over the not necessarily, of a different stock and for lining the spines of books. It is not spine and boards, and turning it over color than that used for the text. See used in library and hand binding be- the edges of the boards at the fore also: sELF-covER. (140) cause itis too lightweight and flimsy. edge, head, and tail of the book. (161, cover (cloth) turned-in. The covering ma- See also: SPINE LINING FABRIC. 2. A 172) terial of a book that is turned over the cloth pattern peculiar to the buckram covering folder. A FOLDER (1) of bone, edges and onto the inside surfaces of grades of book cloth, of a coarse, ivory, or wood, shaped generally like the boards,the(uneven)edges of pebbled effect. (131, 173) an ordinary folder, except for a slight which are covered by the PASTEDOWN. crayon-resist papers. Endpapers and other arc cut from one edge, leaving a more Although the term is generally applied decorative papers produced by rubbing tapered end with a narrow rounded tip. to edition and library bindings, books thepaperwithcrayonover some (115) bound by hand are also usually turned- roughened surface, and then covering cover papers. A class of papers used for in. In library binding the customary the rubbings with a water color wash. the covers of pamphlets (other than turn-inisVsinch, while inedition The wash does not adhere to the areas self covers), catalogs, brochures, or binding it is seldom more than 1/2 inch. that are waxed. (183) any other stitched publication, to pro- and frequently less. (58, 209) crazing.1. Fine cracks in an adhesive vide protection during handling and cowhide. In a strict sense, a leather made which may extend in a network on or (sometimes)to enhance appearance. from the unsplit hide or the grain under the surface or through a layer. They are made in white and a wide split of the hide of a cow; however. Itiscaused by excessive shrinkage range of colors. The majority have the term is sometimes used to indicate characteristics of the adhesive film, too plain edges; however, they are also leather made from the hide of any rapid drying of the adhesive, or by flex- availablewithdeckleedges.Cover bovine animal. The term is not applied ing of a brittle adhesive. 2. The process papers generally have good folding to leather made from the flesh split of by which yellow or transparent parch- characteristics, and have rough finishes a cow or any other bovine animal. ments often become whiter and more or are embossed with fancy designs. Cowhide has a slight grain or corruga- opaque when folded, producing irregu- They are usually produced from chemi- tion, and is a tough and strong leather. lar and disfiguring effects at the joints cal wood pulps, sometimes in mixtures takesgoldtoolingwell,and, when of vellum bindings. (291, 309) with mechanical wood pulp, and, al- properly prepared, wears well. In ad- cream split. A leather produced from a though many are made from pulps dition, if itis of the hest auality (and split sheepskin that is heavily glazed. containing varying amounts of cotton handled frequently), itis usually very creasability. The ability of a sheet of fiber pulps, they have but little perma- durable. paper or board to be folded without nence. Various coated papers, includ- Cowhide is not often used for cov- any cracks appearing in the area where ing plain, heavy, plastic-coated, cast- eringbool,,,exceptpossiblyvery the crease occurs. Creasability differs coated, metallic, and cloth-lined papers large volutes, suchasblankbooks. from BRITTLENESS, as the latter prop- are also used. Common basis weights Even the usual grain split is far too erty involves a small degree of bending of uncoated cover papers are 50, 65, thick for the usual book, and, if pared andisgenerally a manifestation of 80, and 2/65 pounds (20 X 26 - 500), to a thickness suitable for such a book, chemical changes within the paper. (17) while weights of coated papers are 60, itlosesaconsiderablepart ofits crease.1. The impression made on a 80, and 100 pounds (20 X 26 - 500). strength. See also: AMERICAN RUSSIA; cover by the use of a heated finishing Aside from folding endurance, desired IMITATIONRUSSIA;RUSSIA LEATHER. tool, of single or double blind lines. In characteristics include dimensional sta- (102, 129, 164, 343, 363) full leather bindings, they are usually bility, uniformity of printing surface, c-pattern. The code name for a pattern in placed near the edges of the covers, and durability. (17, 86, 139, 234) a book cloth formed by covering the while on half-or three-quarter bindings covers bound in. 1. A term used to indi- surface of the cloth with small raised they are usually at the intersection of cate that the original covers of a book dots. Also called "crêpe." (256) the leather spine and corners and the are used in the rebinding of the book. cracking. 1. A defect in a coated paper cloth or paper sides. 2. To make the It may include the entire covers (in- caused by the formation of fissures in band impressions distinct on the spine cluding the spine), the boards and their the coating layer which then lifts from of a book. 3. The wrinkle, fold, or covering only, or simply the covering the base paper during printing, folding, crimp in paper caused by folding. 4. of the boards. Sometimes this is called or some other converting operation. See: SCORE, (42, 204) "rebuilding old corners." 2. The paper Crackingisa bothersome andfre- creaser. 1. See: FOLDER (1). 2. A curved covers of a periodical issue, pamphlet, quentlyencountereddefectinart finishing tool having lines cut on its booklet, etc., included in the original papers. 2. Fissures in the crease of a face, and used to impress an ornamen- binding because of their bibliographical sheet of paper when itis folded or tal blind line or lines on a leather bind- or illustrative content. In this sense, scored. (17) ing. 3. A machine used in edition and the termapplies mainly tolibrary craft bookbinding. A general term used library binding for creasing the end- binding. (12, 156, 261) since the 1890s to indicate the binding papers even with the back edge of the cover title. 1. The titleblocked on the of individual books for specific cus- text block and sealing them down by original covers of a book or pamphlet, tomers. Such work included rebinding. means of heat. For this purpose, the orapublisher's binding,asdistin- therestoration and/or rebindingof cloth joint of the endpaper is coated guished from the title blocked on the rare hooks, and (sometimes) the res- with a heat-sealing adhesive. 4. A de- spine of a book by a bookbinder. Cf: toration of works of art on paper. See vice employed in some folding ma- BINDER'S TITLE 2. In terms of collation, also: EXTRA BINDING. (140) chines for creasing coated papers. (94, a cover title is one printed on the paper crash. 1. A course, open weave, starched 264, 322) cover of a work issued without a title cotton material, sometimes napped on crease retention. The ability of a paper, creasing strength 69 cuir-bouilli

e.g., a GUARD, to remain folded after sides is omitted during reproduction, in is attached to the book. The character- being creased mechanically. The term order to focus attention on a central istic high polish is applied subsequent assumesthatno adhesiveisused. theme, to bring it into proper propor- to binding. Although a certain effect is Crease retention and CREASABILITY are tions for the space it must occupy, or attained by this process, to a great ex- not the same. (17) to bleed it deliberately. (156, 234, 365) tent it defeats the original purpose of creasing strength. That characteristic of a cross direction. The direction of a using morocco leather, i.e., its beautiful sheet of paper or board which causes it machine-made paper, which is at right grain pattern. (12) to retain its tensile strength after it is angles to the MACHINE DIRECTION, i.e., crushing machine. An early form of the folded or creased. Creasing strength is the direction across the direction in NIPPING PRESS. of particular importance in the papers which the web travels. The cross direc- crushing plates. See: POLISHING PLATES. used for endpapers. (17) tion of paper generally has less strength crusting. The processof storing dry creep. A change in the dimensions of a and folding endurance than the ma- leather for conditioning or aging, dur- material which takes place with time chinedirection,although,insome ing which time it absorbs water from when the materialis under constant papers, after aging, the opposite may the atmosphere until it reaches equilib- load, following the initial "instantane- be true. The cross direction has greater rium with the relative humidity of its ous" elastic rapid deformation. Creep tearing resistance, and paper also ex- environment. During this period some atroom temperatureissometimes pands more in the cross than in the of its constituents become more uni- called "cold flow." (42, 309) machine direction when the moisture formlydistributedthroughoutthe crepe. See: C-PATTERN. content of the paper increases. See also: thickness of the leather. In addition, cripeline. See: SILK . AGAINST THE GRAIN; ANISOTROPIC greater fixation of the tanning mate- cresting roll. A type of finishing tool, con- BEHAVIOR. rials may occur. (363) sisting of a ROLL (1) having two undu- cross laminated. A board or other lami- crust splits. A type of leather which, after lating and intersect;ng lines below and nate having one or more layers oriented tannage, has not been further processed aseriesoftuftsabove.Seealso: at right angles to other layers with re- but has simply been dried. The term HERALDIC CRESTING. (250) spect tothe grain direction of the "crust" is used in this sense mainly in crimping. The process of applying a series layers. Alternating grain directions of associationwithaleather suchas of fine creases or bender marks to the the laminate outward from the center sheepskin, while the term ROUGH hinges of leaves of loose-leaf books, layer is generally assumed. The built-up TANNED is similarly employed with ref- the purpose of which is to enable the boards used in the binding of very large erence to cowhide. (61) leaves to be turned over easily and to books are frequently cross laminated to crust stock. Tanned skins awaiting final lie flat. The lines of the creasing pre- provide additional strength and also to coloring or finishing. "Crust stock" is vent undue bulking at the area of reduce the possibility of warping. See a relatively common form in which to crimping. A sufficient series of creases also: PARALLEL LAMINATED. (17) ship tanned skins from the country of closely spaced imparts a rolling effect crown filler. See: CALCIUM SULFATE. originto another country forfinal ensuring a flexibility that is difficult to crushed.1. A leather which has been processing. (306) obtain by any other means. Cf: SCORE. heavily pressed, causing the grain to be crusty break. A BREAK (4) of leather (264, 316) flattened, or crushed, thereby leaving a characterized by coarse, sharp wrinkles crinoline. A stiffened, open weave fabric, smooth, glazed, yet grained effect. Such that are generally displeasing to the generally made of cotton, and some- leather has an unnatural appearance eye. (363) times used in edition binding as a sub- and is now seldom used in craft book- crystalline cellulose. A segment of the stitutefor CRASH (1)in lining the binding. 2. A defect in a machine-made molecular structure of CELLULOSE, in spines of books. (81, 196) paper, having the appearance of a which all of the included parts of the crocketed cresting. A binding decoration paper with a broken, mottled, or cloudy individual chain molecules are arranged consisting of rectangular stamps orna- formation. It may be caused by: 1) in a regular, three-dimensional spatial mented with crockets, which are small running the paper web under the dandy arrangement, as in a crystalline lattice, curved designs, or with (roughly) tri- roll while it is too wet; 2) running the so that a definite x-ray diffractionis angular stamps, which, when placed web through the presses while too wet; produced. (17) together pointing outwards, present a or 3) running the web through the &stage. The third and final stage in the cresting effect. (250) calender or supercalender while still reaction of some thermosetting resins, crocking. The removal of a dye or pig- containing too much moisture. Paper characterized by the relatively insoluble ment from the surface of paper, the crushed at the dandy roll or in the and infusible state of the resin. Some coloring or finishing materials from the presses results in coarse mottling, while thermosetting resins in this stage are surface of leather, or the transfer of paper crushed in either of the fully cured. Also called "resite." See coloring matter from the surface of has a finer mottling, often accompanied also: A-STAGE; B-STAGE. (309) one cloth to another by the action of by blackening. (17, 83, 94) cuir-boufili. A method of decorating a rubbing. (341) crushed levant. A term sometimes applied book utilizing the capability of a vege- crocodile leather. See: ALLIGATOR to a large-grained LEVANT leather book- table tanned leather to be molded when LEATHER. binding having a more-or-less smooth wet. After being thoroughly softened cropped. 1. A book that has had too much polished surface. See: CRUSHED in water the leather can be formed or of its margins trimmed, especially at MOROCCO. See also: CRUSHED (1). (156, molded into various shapes, which, on the head edge, although not so much 264) drying, retain those shapes with a re- that the leaves are BLED. 2 A book that crushed morocco. A MOROCCO leather markable degree of permanence. The has had its edges cut beyond the short- that has had its grain surface crushed wet-mold leather can be more perma- est, or PaooF (1) leaf. 3. A photograph to the extent that it is smooth. Crushing nently set by drying it under moderate of which part of the top, bottom or of this nature is done before the leather heat, the degree of rigidity obtained

u 70 cusped edge stamp

being determined by the drying tem- JAFFt. More recent (and excellent) ex- the adhesive reachesinthe curing perature. A faster method, and one that amples were produced in France by processi.e., the adhesive curing tem- produces extremely hard and rigid MARIUS MICHEL, c 1866. (141, 236, peraturemay differ from the tempera- shapes, is to dip the molded leather 291, 347) ture of the surrounding atmosphere into boiling water for anywhere from . A rectangular box, usually con- i.e., the assembly curing temperature. 20 to 120 seconds. This is the process structed of bronze, brass, or wood, See also: DRYING TEMPERATURE; SET- that gave rise to the name "cuir-bouilli." often plated with ornamentation of TING TEMPERATURE. (309) Such a process involves the partial silver or gold, and used for the storage curing time. The pnriod of time during melting of the fixed tannin aggregates of valuable and/or sacred works. (156) which a joint is subjected to heat, pres- in the leather. At a temperature ap- cuprammonium hydroxide. A solution of sure, or both, in curing the adhesive. proaching 100C. these aggregates be- cupric hydroxide in aqueous ammo- Further curing may take place subse- come plastic and can be made to flow nium hydroxide (Cu(NH3)4 (OH)2), quent to this time period. (309) and redistribute themselves throughout which is capable of dissolving cellulose curl. A defect in paper or board, appear- the fiber network of the leather. On if the concentration of copper and am- ing as a curvature in the sheet, caused cooling, the fibers become embedded in monia are within givenlimits. The by "two-sidedness" of the sheet, which what can best be called a tough, three- VISCOSITY (2) of a cellulosic solution results in unequal shrinkage between dimensional, polymer network or resin, in cuprammonium hydroxide is often the felt and wire sides when the paper somewhat similar to the materials made used in quality control in the manu- or board is subjected to changes in rela- by condensing formaldehyde with sub- facture of paper. (17) tive humidity. In addition, fiber orienta- stances such as phenol, urea or mela- cuprammonlum viscosity. The VISCOSITY tion has an influence on the direction mine. The leather actually sets so hard (2) of a cellulosic solution, or a paper and magnitude of curl. The result of that some books bound in this manner pulp in cuprammonium hydroxide un- curl is the tendency of the paper or required no boards. The decoration it- derspecifiedconditions,especially board to form a tube (curl) at the self was executed by cutting the leather those of temperature, cellulose concen- edges, the axis of which is parallel to lightly while damp, after which the de- tration, and solvent composition. Cu- the machine direction of the material. sign was hammered inrelief. The prammonium viscosity is used to de- (17, 42, 98) shaped leather was then immersed in termine the average molecular weight curling. A warping or other distortion of boiling water, and dried, and the de- of the dissolved cellulose. (17) an adhesive joint due to the penetra- pressions were filled with molten wax cupriethylenediamine hydroxide. A solu- tion of moisture or solvents into the so as to preserve the designs. tion of cupric hydroxide in aqueous adherend surface, causing an unequal The molding of leather was known ethylenediamine (Cu(OH)2 xNH2 contraction and expansion of the ad- in Saxon times in England, and was CH2CHONH2 ---> aNH2CH2CH2NH212 herends.Seealso: WARPING; WAVY widely practiced during the middle ages Cu (OH)2). The solution will dissolve EDGES. (222) in both England and on the Continent. cellulose when the concentration of curl marble. A marble pattern consisting The motifs used were generally mytho- copper and ethylenediamine are within of red, blue, green, and yellow (or logical animals and interlaced foliage. certain limits. The VISCOSITY (2) of a orange), laid down on the marbling In the late 19th century interest in the cellulosic solution in cupriethylenedia- size in that order, or, alternately, brown molding of leather was revived and mine is used in quality control in the or red only for one-color curls, and used extensively for many objects, in- manufacture of paper. (17) curled by means of a frame which con- cluding bookbindings. (94, 236, 291) cupriethylenediamine viscosity. The VIS- tains as many pegs as the required cuir-ciselé. A method of decorating a COSITY (2) of a cellulosic solution or number of curls, turned two or three bookbinding in which the design is cut a paper pulp in cupriethylenediamine times in a circular direction. The curl into dampened leather instead of being hydroxide under specified conditions, pattern was in common use from about tooled or blocked. The design is first especially those of temperature, cellu- 1660 to 1870, especially in France, outlined with a pointed tool and then lose concentration, and solvent compo- where it was much used for endpapers, dampened. It is then brought into relief sition. It is used to determine the aver- but rarely on the edges of books. (217, by depressing the background, usually age molecular weight of the dissolved 369) by stamping a succession of dots into cellulose. (17) curried leather. A leather which has been the leather very close together by means curing. 1. The process of changing the subjected to the process of CURRYING. of a pointed tool. Certain parts of the physical properties of a resin or ad- COIL OVAN LEATHER is an example of design are sometimes embossed from hesive by chemical reaction, which may curried leather. the flesh side of the leather, and in such be in the form of condensation, poly- currying. A process used in tanning heavy cases the decorating must be done be- merization, or vulcanization, and which leathers, in which oils and greases are fore covering. is usually accomplished by the action incorporated into the tanned hide in This technique of embellishment, of heat and catalytic action, alone or in order to increase tensile strength, pli- which may well have been the highest combination, with or without pressure. ability, and water repellency. Currying manifestation of the medieval book- 2.Methods such as BRINING, DRY- also affects the finish and grain of the binder's art, was widely practiced only SALTING,PASTE DRYING,and WET- leather. The process is usually carried during the 15th century and only in SALTING, used to prevent putrefactive out in a drum (drum stuffing) using certain areas, principally southeastern or other damage to hides or skins be- mechanical action. The oils used in- Germany and in Spain. No English and fore tanning. See also: DRYING ( 1 ). clude mixtures of raw cod oil, paraffin, Flemish and practically no Italian ex- curing temperature. The temperature to and beef (or mutton) tallow. See also: amples are known. which an adhesive, or the adhesive and FATLIQUORING. (291, 363) The finest cuir-ciselé bindings have adherends, is subjected to effect curing cusped edge stamp. A finishing tool used been identified as the work of MAIR of the adhesive. The temperature which to produce an indented outline having custom-bound 71 cut through Index

the appearance of an oak leaf. The leaf yellow color. Althoughithas been cut out of boards. See: OUT OF BOARDS. effectis generally reinforced by im- used as a tanning material to some ex- cut-out shapes (cut outs).1. Decorative pressing curved lines from the center tent, particularly in England and Italy, patterns,generallyofageometric outwards. Also called "headed outline the term "cutch" is better known as a shape, made of cloth, leather, paper, tool." (141) tanninprepared fromthe barkof etc., and pasted to the covers of a custom-bound. An obsolete term for a mANGRovE trees. See also: vEGETABLE book. See also: INLAY (4); ONLAY. 2. book which is bound according to spe- TANNNS. (29, 175) Special shapes of irregular pieces of cific instructions, rather than in accord- cut corner pamphlet file. A free-standing paper or board cut out from printed ance with general specifications. It was type of box, the upper rear corners of matter by means of steel dies. (139, a term used principally in the library the sides of which are cut away to half 183 ) binding. See also: CRAFT BOOKBNDING; its height, leaving the upper half of the cuts for index. Thumb cutapertui es FXTRA BINDING. (12) back and the top open. It is generally made by hand or by a thumb cutter on customer work. An obsolete term for used to house pamphlets and other the fore edge of a book. See: THUMB work produced by the bookbinder for such materials in the book stack. See INDEX. (256) individuals, in distinction from work also: PRNCETON FILE. (156) cut size. A sheet of paper cut in the guil- done for libraries. The term referred cut down. 1. A term applied to a book lotine or rotary trimmer to dimen- principally to library binding. See also: trimmed to a size less than given in sions of 16 by 21 inches or less. Size CRAFT BOOKBINDING; EXTRA BINDING. specifications. See also: cRoPPED (1, (241) 81/2 by 11 inches is the most common 2). 2. The slipping or dipping of the "cut size." (17) cut (cutting).1. To trim the edges of plow knife when cutting the edges of a books. See: BLED; CROPPED; CUT AT book, resulting in an irregular edge. 3. cut solid. 1. The edges of a book which THE HEAD; CUT DOWN (1); CUT FLUSH; The bands, cords, or tapes on which a have been cut smooth and even, par- CUT SOLID (1); OPENED; OUT OF book is sewn "cut down" to the correct ticularly at the head and fore edge. BOARDS; PROOF (1); TRIMMNG (1). length for lacing-in or insertion be- Library and edition bindings are almost 2. A term sometimes applied to a book tween split boards. (256, 261) always cut solid, usually by means of which has had its edges cut. 3. To cut cut flush (cut flush binding). A book that a guillotine cutter or three-knife trim- the cloth, leather, vellum, or paper cov- has no SQUARES, meaning thatthe mer. When edition bindings do have ering for a book. 4. Cutting so as to leaves and covers are cut even, or rough () edges, it is usually an enable other operations to bz carried "flush." In most cut flush work, trim- affectation. Books bound by hand also out, e.g., a sheet imposed work and ming is done after the covers (which generally have edges cut solid, but this turn has to be cut in half before it can are usually, but by no means always, was by no means true in the past. Edges be folded. See: IMPOSITION. 5. The in- paper, limp, or the self covers of a cut solid make it easier to turn the cision made in opening bolts of sections pamphlet) have been attached. The leaves and also reduce the incursion of to facilitate tipping-in inserts.6. The trimming is generally done in a guillo- dust. 2. The faces of finishing tools that cut made in separating lifts (piles) of tine cutter. As a (very) general rule, no are solid metal, sometimes with line sheets for binding. (82, 154, 196, 256) book with any degree of pretension is veinings, in distinction from tools CUT cut at the head. A book which has had its cut flush. (335, 339, 343)' OPEN. (343) head edge trimmed, the usual interpre- cut flush, turned in. A book having the cut stock. Materials, such as board, cloth, tation being that the fore edge and tail covering material on the spine cut flush inlays, etc., which have been pre-cut to have not been trimmed. (335) at the head and tail edges but the cloth the proper size for a run of books. The cut away. Any part of a section that is or paper covering on the sides turned termappliesspecificallytoedition removed and not replaced by a CANCEL. over the edges of the boards. This tech- bindings. (269) See also: CANCELLANDum. (343) niquenecessitatesthebookbeing cutter-out. An obsolete term for the bind- cutch. 1. A packet of leaves in which trimmed before covering. (343) ery worker who cut the leather covers thinly rolled and cut gold is first beaten cut in boards. See: IN BOARDS. for books. The job called for an ex- in the manufacture of gold leaf. After cut-in index. See: . perienced workman, one with a good the gold isrolled to a thickness of cut on the quarter. A technique of cutting knowledge of leather, and the ability to 0.001 inch and 11/4 inches wide, it is the wooden boards used in bookbind- detect flaws and shades of color in the then cut into 11/4inch squares. Two ing. They are cut on the line of the skins. (372) hundred ninety of these sheets are in- medullary rays, thus reducing the dan- cutter-perforating machine. A multi-pur- terleaved with 41/2inch squares of ger of warping. (236) pose machine that can be used for vellum or paper, forming the "cutch," cut open. A finishing tool having the de- slitting, both large- and pin-hole per- which is secured with leavy bands of sign on its face defined by lines. (115) forating, punching, tab cutting, index parchment. The name derives from the cut out. A term sometimes used in edition cutting,cuttingandcreasing,label Latin calcare to tread. See also: GOLD and library binding meaning: 1) to cut punching, round corner and thumb- LEAF; MOLD (2); SHoDER. 2. A vege- the bolts of sections and remove blank hole cutting, trimming, strip cutting, table tannin obtained from the heart- leaves; 2) to die cut folded maps and scoring,slitting,embossing, nipping, wood of Acacia catechu, a tree dis- inserts to allow for folding free of the and blocking, by means of standard at- tributed widely throughout the Indian binding edge; 3) to die cut board pat- tachments and interchangeable tools. Subcontinentandadjoiningareas. ternsto be used inprotecting em- Such machines are generally hydrauli- Cutch consists principally of catechu- bossed covers when pressing; 4) to die cally powered. (343) tannic acid (25-35% ),catechin(2- cut panels to size for inserting; 5) to cut through index. An INDEX used in sta- 10% ),quercetin, and catechured. trim the turn-ins of covers; and 6) to tionery binding, e.g., a blankbook, that When used alone, it produces a harsh cut out compensation material leaving has all of the leaves of the book al- leather, which often has an undesirable stubs (compensation guards). (256) lotted to the letters of the alphabet in cutting board 72 cylinder machine

proportion to the frequency of their as quickly; however, they must be re- suspension. The pulp fibers cling to the use. (276) placed more often. (133) wire and are formed into sheets on the cutting board. 1. A wedge-shaped board cutting stick. A length of wood, plastic, cylinders as the water drains through of beech or other hard, fine-grained or soft metal, inserted in the table of and passes out at the ends of the cylin- wood, similar to a backing board but a GUILLOTINE, against which the knife ders. The wet sheet is couched off the with a square top edge. Cutting boards edge strikes. It is usually square, but in cylinder onto a felt held against the are available in various lengths, the some machines it is round and can be cylinder by a couch roll. Cylinder ma- most common being 8,12, and 15 rotated by hand or power so as to pre- chines consist of one of more cylinders, inches. The top edge is generally about sent a fresh surface after a certain each of which forms a sheet composed 5/H inch thick and the bottom edge number of cuts. A worn stickwill of the same or different stocks. The about 1/4inch. They are used in the cause the knife to chew the paper multi-cylindermachineformswebs LYING PRESS when trimming edges with rather than cut it cleanly. (145, 338) which are successively couched one the PLOW, and also for edge gilding. 2. cuttlebone (cuttlefish bone). A piece of upon the other before they enter the A specially constructed block about 3 shell or bone from a cuttlefish, used to press section. This allows for consider- feet square, composed of small blocks smooth and polish the mended edges of able variation in thickness and weight of hard wood set on end and glued to- a torn leaf by removing the excess of the finished sheet, as well as for the gether. The top is treated with oil to fibers of the paper used for the repair. formation of bristols. The press section help keep the surface smooth. It is used (83) and the dry end of the cylinder ma- as a block for cutting leather. (161, cut to register. A watermarked paper cut chine are essentially the same as those 183) in such a manner that the WATERMARK ofthe FOURDRINIER MACHINE. The cutting machine. See: GUILLOTINE; THREE- appears in the same positioa in each cylinder machine was invented in 1805 KNIFE TRIMMER. sheet. (17) by the Englishman Joseph Bramah, cutting plates. NH !board, zinc, or glass cylinder machine. A papermaking ma- and was improved considerably in 1808 surfaces on which endpapers, guards, chine which utilizesa wire curved by John Dickinson. In England itis and similar materials are cut.Mill- around one or more cylinders or molds called a "board machine," or "vat ma- boards are superior for such cutting as that are partially immersed and ro- chine." (17, 60, 180, 320) they do not dull the edge of the knife tated in vats containing a dilute stock 73 dates, of a

D. The Roman equivalent of 500, al- CL or cl 150 though the symbol probably was not CC or cc 200 used by the Romans themselves. The CCC or ccc 300 Roman symbol for 1,000 was CID, and CD or cd, early printers designated 500 as ID, also CCCC 400 which later became D. See also: ROMAN D or d, NUMERALS. also I D 500 damask. 1. A decorative design of varie- DC or dc, gated patterns or crocheted compart- also I C 600 ments on a book cover.2. A firm, CM or cm 900 lustrous fabric made with flat,con- a M or m ventional patterns in satin weave on a also CI D 1,000 plain-woven ground on one side and a plain-woven pattern on a satin ground with the development of higher speed papermaking machines, it became the on the reverse side. It is usually made Hebrew dates found in imprints may be of cotton, silk, , or combinations practice to drive the dandy roll sep- converted to the Christian date by con- aratelyinorderto thereof.It has been used as a book eliminate drag sulting the Jewish encyclopedia under cloth. which would result in distortion of the watermark. Plain dandy rolls are now Calendar, Table I. Islamic dates may dammar (gum). Any of several semifossil be converted by consulting the tables or recent resins, principally of East used extensively to level the surface of found in John J. Bond's Handy Book Indian origin, but especiallyasoft, the web and improve or assist in sheet of rules and tables for verifying dates clear to yellow recent resin obtained formation. See also: LAID MOLD. (17, with the Christian era, 4th ed. Lon- mainly in Malaysia and Indonesia from 98, 189, 365) don, 1889, pp. 228-250. The French trees of the family Dipterocarpacae dates, translation of. The conversion of Revolution calendar is given below: (especiallyofthegeneraShorea. dates, usually from the Roman into Balanocarpus and Hopea) and used in Arabic. Other than Arabic, the most the manufacture of PRINTING INICS. common imprint date (or date of pub- Year damping stretch. The alterationin the lication) to be found in books, at least 1 Sept. 22 1792 those publication of the Western world, dimensions of a sheet of paper when it -1 becomes wet. Since paper fibersin- are the Roman numeral dates. They are translated: 2Sept. 22 1793 crease more in diameter than in length -2 when moistened, the dimensions of the Roman Ar abic 3 Sept. 22 1794 sheet will increase more in the cross -3 direction than in the machine direction. I, i or j 1 4Sept. 23 1795 This is one reason why itis essential II or ii 2 -4 that the "grain" or machine direction III or iii 3 5 Sept. 22 1796 of book papers be parallel to the bind- IV or iv 4 -5 ingedgeofthebook. Handmade V or v 5 6 Sept. 22 1797 papers, when moistened, generally ex- VI or vi 6 -6 pand more or less equally in all direc- VII or vii 7 7Sept. 22 1798 tions, as these papers have no definite VIII or viii 8 grain direction. (17) IX or ix 9 -7 d & f. In RULING, the abbreviation for X or x 10 8 Sept. 23 1799 -8 downs and feints. See also: f. XI or xi 11 dandy roll. A light skeleton roll or cylin- XII or xii 12 9Sept. 23 1800 der, covered with wire gauze, which etc. -9 exerts light pressure on the wet web of XX or xx 20 10Sept. 23 1801 paper at a point near the first suction XXX or xxx 30 -10 box. Its purpose is to mark the sheet XL or xl 11 Sept. 23 1802 (web) with a design carried on the sur- also XXXX 40 -11 face of the roll, either to produce a L or 1 50 12Sept. 24 1803 wove or laid effect in the web, or, when LX or lx 60 -12 letters,figures, or other devices are LXX or lxx 70 13 Sept. 23 1804 worked in wires on the surface of the LXXX or lxxx, -13 roll, a WATERMARK. In the latter case, also XXC 80 14Sept. 23 1805 the roll is known as a watermarking XC or xc -14 dandy. Originally, the dandy roll was also LXXXX 90 Dec. 31 1805 driven by the Fourdrinier wire, but C or c 100 end daylight 74 degreasing

Months (12 of 30 dayseach, with five deakins. Very small calfskins. decorated in some manner. See: BRAYER additional days) deckle.1. The removable, rectangular, PRINTS; CARDBOARD PRINTS; CRAYON- wooden frame forming the raised edge RESIST PAPERS; CUT-OUT SHAPES; FOLD Vendemaiaire (vintage) Brumaire of the wire cloth of the mold used in AND DYE PAPERS; INK AND FOLD PAPERS; (fog) making paper by hand; it confines the Frimaire (sleet) PARAFFIN PRINTS; PASTE PAPERS; PAT- Niveise (snow) paper stock suspension on the wire TERNED PAPERS; PRINTED PAPERS; Pluvôise (rain) cloth. 2. On the Fourdrinier papermak- STENCIL PRINTS; STRING PRINTS. ing machine, the arrangements along decorative roll. Any patterned FILLET (1) Venleme (wind) the side of the wire on which the paper- Germinal (seed) that deviates from a plain straight line. Floreal making stock flows, which prevent the deerskin. A leather with a loose, open (blossom) stock from flowing over the edge of the Prairial (pasture) structure, made from the skin of deer, wire. This type of deckle may be mov- or other animals of the family Cervi- Thermidor or Fervidor (heat) ing or stationary. (17) Fructidor (fruit) dae. It was used for bookbinding pur- deckle edge. The feather edge or edges of poses as long ago as the 8th century. a sheet of paper formed where the In the Middle Ages it was largely su- daylight. The maximum distance between stock flows against the deckle, or, in perseded by calfskin, sheepskin, and the platen and the bed of a press when handmade papers, by the stock flowing goatskin. (140, 291) it is opened fully. Daylight is also de- between the frame and the deckle of defective binding. Any imperfections in fined as, or is an indication of, the the mold. A simulated deckle edge may the paper, sections,plates,printing, maximum number of books, or books also be formed by means of a jet of cloth, leather,etc.,that make up a and pressing boards, that can be placed water or air. Handmade paper usually bookbinding. (256) in the press at any one time. has four deckle edges and machine- defective sheets. Sheets of printed paper deacidification. A term generally con- made paper, two; however, a machine- discarded in the process of binding be- sidered to mean the removal of acid made paper can be manufactured with cause of paper or printing defects and/ from, or the reduction of the acidity four simulated deckle edges. An "imi- or binding spoilage. (256) in, a material, such as paper. The usual tation" deckle edge is one produced on defoamers. Agents which inhibit the build process of deacidification is to treat the a dry sheet of paper by such means as up of foam, or which reduce foam or paper with a mild alkali which initially tearing, cutting with a special type of entrapped air by causing the bubbles to neutralizes any acid present and is then knife that gives a deckle edge effect, burst, thus releasing the air. Most com- converted into a compound that re- sand blasting, sawing, etc. mercial defoamers are mixtures of sur- mains in the fibers of the paper to act Earlyprinterslookeduponthe face-active agents, hydro-carbons, alco- as a buffer to neutralize any further deckle edge as a defect, and almost in- hols, polymers, etc., to increase their acidity that may develop (usually as a variably trimmed most of it off before effectiveness in multiple applications. result of exposure of the paper to at- binding; however, collectors wanted to Defoamers are used in papermaking mospheric SULFUR DIOXIDE). High con- see traces of the "deckle" as proof that operations.Alsocalled"anti-foam centrations of strong alkalies are to be the book had not been trimmed ex- agents." (17) avoided because if the pH of the paper cessively, or CROPPED (1, 2), as deep degrain1. To remove the grain from a is allowed to rise to a very high level, trimming was a notorious practice par- leather, generally by pressing or rolling i.e., 10.0 or above, and to remain there ticularly in the 17th century (and even the hide or skin under pressure. See: for any length of time, there is risk of to this day). Ir the latter part of the CRUSHED (1). 2. SUEDE LEATHER fin- oxidization of the cellulose under such 19th century, it became the to ished on the flesh side, the grain layer alkaline conditions. In the usual case, admire the deckle edge for its own having been entirely or partially re- however, even if the pH, immediately sake, and to leave books printed on moved, following tannage, by splitting subsequent to acidification, is as high handmade paper untrimmed. This left or abrasion. (61) as 10.0, reaction with atmospheric car- the book with ragged edges that col- degreasing. The removal of excess na- bon dioxide usually reduces it below lected dust, were unsightly (to some), tural grease from skins, mainly sheep- that point. and difficult to turn. In modern books, skins, but also other skins which may The weakness of most deacidification deckle edges are largely an affectation, happen to be particularly greasy. De- methods is that slightly alkaline papers and entirely so if the book is printed greasing may be necessary because ex- are immune to acid attack only for as on machine-made paper. (17, 82, 94, cessive amounts of grease in a skin may long as the free alkali remains, and 102) interfere with uniform penetration of when this is neutralized the paper is decorated covers. 1. See: FINISHING (1). tannins or dyes, cause difficulties in again vulnerable. In order to prevent 2. In library binding, an illustration, finishing processes, and/or show as this, the amount of residual alkali re- design, or special lettering on the upper dark, greasy patches in the finished maining in the paper following treat- cover of a book. A decorated cover leather. ment should be equivalent to at least would alsoinclude books, such as A typical method of degreasing is 3% calcium carbonate by weight of the with illustrated covers when with the use of paraffin. The well- paper. See also: ALKALINE RESERVE; the original cover is attached to the drained, but still damp, pickled skins DOUBLE DECOMPOSITION; NON-AQUEOUS cloth cover, with or without coating. 3. are drummed vigorously with about DEACIDIFICATION; vApOR-PHASE DEACID- In edition binding, a design, illustra- half their weight of paraffin oil (or IFICATION. (31, 33, 39, 198, 265) tion, or special lettering blocked or kerosine,water,andJai°,which dead spots. The low-finished areas in an printed by offset on the book cloth. loosens the grease. To aid penetration otherwise highly finished paper. (131, 183) of the paraffin into the wet skin, a dead white. A neutral white, such as that decorated papers. Papers used for covers, small amount of a wetting agent. e.g., of a paper having no perceptible tint. endpapers, linings, portfolios, etc., and 5% of a non-ionic wetting agent, may degree of tannage 75 designer bookbinders

be added. The loosening of the grease hand in leather, the implication being Nicolas Derome. See also: DEROME is hastened by heating the paraffin be- that superior materials and methods STYLE. (156) forehand.At. the of the were used throughout. The term is also dermis. That part of a hide or skin below paraffin drumming, the now greasy used by edition binders (or publishers) the epidermal-dermal junction, consist- paraffin is drained off. A considerable to indicate a book covered in a superior ing of a condensation of fibrous con- amount of greasy paraffin may still be grade of cloth (or imitation leather), nectivetissue which supports blood held in the skins and can be removed or a book supplied with a box or case. and lymph vessels, sebaceous and sud- by squeezing processes, such as SET- See also: PXTRA BINDING.(12, 264, oriferous glands, hair follicles and their TING OUT, or by centrifuging. However, 365) associated muscles, etc. In the grain as these processes are difficult and ex- deluxe edition. An edition of a work pro- layer of the dermis these fibers become pensive to carry out, it is more usual to duced on a grade of paper superior to very thin and tightly woven, and are wash the skins in a 5(70 salt solution. that of the standard edition, more-or- so interlaced that there are no loose Salt must be used as water alone would lessexpensivelybound,sometimes ends on the sin face beneath the epi- result in acid swelling. (306, 363) printed with special type, and often dermis. Consequently, when the epi- degree of tannage. The number of pounds limited in number. At times, however, dermis is carefully removed, a smooth of tannin that are combined with 100 the term is used merely as a selling layer is revealed, sometimes known as pounds of hide protein. (363) term with little or no justification. (12, the hyaline layer, which gives the char- delamination. 1. The splitting apart of one 140) acteristicgrainsurfaceofleather. or more of the layers of a laminate due dendritic growths. Minute to relatively Toward the center of the dermis (or to failure of the adhesive, or cohesive large discolorations in a sheet of paper corium)thefibersarecoarser and failure of the laminate. 2. The removal due to oxidLation of minute particles stronger, and the predominant angle of the laminating material from a docu- of metal present in the paper. The at which they are woven can indicate ment. De lamination of cellulose acetate presence of the metal is generally be- the properties the resultant leather will film may be accomplished by soaking lieved to be due to the use of metal display. If the fibers are more upright the sandwiched document in a solution beaters. etc., in the manufacture of the and tightly woven, a firm, hard leather of acetone, assuming proper tests have paper. With the passage of time, irregu- withlittlestretch can be expected, indicated that the ink on the document lar fern-shaped designs radiate from the while if they are more horizontal and willnot be affected by the solvent. particles. See also: FOXING. (140) loosely woven, a soft, stretchier leather De lamination is difficult to accomplish denier. A unit of fineness of silk, rayon, can be anticipated. The interior of the and generally more than one treatment or nylon yarn, equal to the fineness of dermis is generally the strongest part of is required to remove all traces of the a yarn weighing 1 gram for each 9,000 the skin. (291, 306, 363) laminate. See also: LAMINATION; SUN- meters.Denierincreaseswiththe Derome style. A style of book decoration DEX PROCESS. (218, 309) square of the fiber diameter. (42) practiced by the Derome family of ddignification. The process by which LIG- denim. A firm, durable, twilledfabric, France in the 18th century. The most NIN is removed from cellulosic mater- usually cotton, woven withcolored famous ofthefamily was Nicolas ials by means of chemical treatment. warp and whitefillingthreads and Denis Derome (active 1761-c 1789) The residue that remains consists of sometimes usedin bookbinding for Derome le juenewho was also known cellulose, hemicelluloses, and other car- covering large books, e.g., blankbooks, the the "great cropper" because of his bohydrate materials. (17) where additional strength and durabil- tendency to trim excessively. Nicolas . The process of neutralizing the ity are required. (183, 196) Derome also used sawn-in cords in alkali, e.g., calcium hydroxide, used in density. In general, the ratio of the weight order toobtain the HOLLOW BACK, liming and unhairing hides and skins. of a material to its volume, or the mass which prevents the spine of the book De liming, which usually takes place in of the material per unit volume. Den- from flexing and thus possibly crack- conjunction with BATING,isaccom- sityshouldnotbeconfusedwith ing the gold. He also achieved great plished by running the hides or skins POROSITY. See also: APPARENT DENSITY. fame by hisuse of the DENTELLE in a drum or paddle to which has been dentelle (dentelle border). An 18th cen- border, taking the dentelles of Padeloup added water and a proprietary com- tury style of book decoration, usually as models. His also are made up of pound consisting of a mixture of an in gold, consisting of a combination of dentelle tools in combination, rather ammonium salt (preferably ammonium elliptical scrolls of slightly shaded leafy than in repetition, and are represented sulfate) and proteolytic enzymes at a character joined to clusters and borders by symmetrical corner tooling of a very water temperature of 80 to 90 F. For of great richness, resembling , and richly engraved floriated scroll work. more efficient control, and to produce pointing toward the center of the cover. An essential feature in Nicolas Dc- a particularly fine grain in the leather, ANTOINE MICHEL PADEI.OUP has often rome's finest dantelles is a small bird the ammonium sulfate (or boric acid), been credited with the introduction of with outstretched wings. See also: DEN- in the amount necessary to neutralize the dentelle style, which actually took TELLE A L'OISSEAU, (i54, 342, 363, the lime, is added before the addition its inspiration from embroidery and the 373) of the bating enzymes. (291, 363) decorative arts rather than lace. Of the designation mark. The letters which cor- delivered flat. Printed sheets delivered to many binders who used this technique, respond to the initial letters of a title the binder unfolded, as they come from the most notable were the Deromes of a book, and any volume number, the press. The term relates largely to and PIERRE-PAUL DUBUISSON. (69, 172, sometimes printed along side the SIG- edition binding, but is also applicable 279, 363) NATURE MARK IO assist the binder in in many cases to pamphlet and sta- dentelle a l'oisseau. DENTELLE decoration gathering. (156) tionery binding. which includes birds in the design of designer bookbinders. A British society of deluxe binding. A somewhat abused term borders. The principalbindings bookbinders founded in 1951 as "The originally indicating a book bound by featuringthismotif were done by Hampstead Guild of Scribes and Book- developed dyes 76 digester

binders."Inspirititsucceeded the leather of a light color and firm texture. Or paper. See also: HAND LETTERS; Hampstead bindery, which, about 1900, Dhawa is also the source of GHATTI STAMP (1) (139) operated with the "Guild of Women GUM. See also: VEGETABLE TANNINS. die cutting.1. The process of cutting Binders." While originally centered in (175) specialshapes(cutouts)inleather, Hampstead, London, the present so- diacriticalmarks. Marks over,under, cloth or paper. The cutouts are used ciety reached the point where no mem- after, or through various letters in the for labels, inhys, onlays, etc. 2. The ber lived there, and, as the calligraphic alphabets of several languages, designed process of lowering the background elementsalsodeclined,thename to indicate the nature or stress of the leather, leaving the cut out area, or "Guild of Contemporary Bookbinders" sounds they represent. While lower- counter, undisturbed and raised above was adopted. In 963 the present name case letters having accent marks are the impression. (189, 316, 320) was assumed. One of the goals of the cast as units, in display printing itis Diehl, Edith (1876-1953). One of the society is "to exert a progressive influ- sometimesnecessarytocastaccent foremostAmericanwomenbook- ence on the design and technique of marks separately,i.e.,theso-called binders.Diehl studiedthecraftin bookbinding," (2(b) of the Constitu- floating accents. In library binding, dia- France, Belgium, and Englandin the tion). Full membership is open by elec- critical marks are generally added by last named country under T. J. Cobden- tion to any amateur or professional hand after the case has been blocked. Sanderson at the Doves binderyand bookbinder who has attained the re- Commonly used marks includ alsowithSangorskiandSutcliffe's quiredstandard.Candidates submit bindery. She opened her own shop in samples of their work on which a vote acute 1906, in New York City, and achieved is taken by the Executive Committee. cedilla 9 her principal fame through her teach- Many outstanding bookbinders, includ- circumflex A ing. Diehl was at one time associated ing Edgar Mansfield (the firstpresi- Umlaut (or diseresis) grave with the bindery of William E. Rudge. dent),Ivor Robinson, and Bernard She is also the author of Bookbinding; Middleton, have served as president of tilde its background and technique (1946). the society. diaper pattern. 1. A gold- or blind-tooled (347) developed dyes. Dyes whose colors are decorativepattern,consistingofa die sunk. A depression produced by the developed after application by treat- motif constantly repeated in geometric application of a die or block, either ment with sodiumnitrite(Nallo0). form. The pattern may consist of fig- heated or cold. See also: BLIND TOOL- Developed dyes areused on suede ures such as , lozenges, or ING; BLOCKING (1). leathers so as to prevent CROCKING. flowers, separated only by background, diethylene glycol. A colorless and almost devil. A stick fitted with short quills set at or by constantly repeating compart- odorless chemical (C4H1003) , miscible a downward angle. The devilis the ments, each filled with designs. 2. A with water, alcohol, and chloroform, traditional implement used for frothing publisher's cloth with a cross-hatched but insoluble in benzene and carbon GLAIR. (261) effect of minute lozenges or squares. tetrachloride. It is a solvent for cellu- dew point. The temperature at which a Diaper cloths were popular in the late lose nitrate, but not for the acetate. It vapor, especiallyinthe atmosphere, 1830s and 1840s, and have remained is used as a softening agent for textile begins to condense. See also: RELATIVE standard patterns on fabricsin one fibers, as a moistening agent for glues HUMIDITY. form or another ever since. 3. The uni- and paper, as a solvent for certain dextrin. An intermediate product formed formly patterned background for pic- eyes, and asaplasticizerin some duringthehydrolysisof starchto torial scenes in illuminated manuscripts. leather finishes. sugars. There are three classes of dex- Its extensive use dates from the latter diethyl zinc. An organometallic compound trin:1) amylodextrin, which gives a part of the 13th century. (83, 94, 156, (Zn(C0H)2), that is readily volatile blue color with iodine and is soluble in 347) (B.P. 123* C. at one atmosphere). It 25% alcohol; 2) erythrodextrin, which diatomaceous silica (diatomite; diatoma- has been proposed as a vapor-phase gives a red color with iodine and is ceous earth). The siliceous remains of deacidifying agent, and gives promise soluble in 55% alcohol; and 3) achro- microscopic diatoms, which are aquatic of being effective; it leaves an alkaline dextrin, which gives no color with plants. Diatomaceous silica is used as a reserve of zinc oxide inthe paper, iodine and is soluble in 70% alcohol. dulling or flattening agent in coating which not only protects against acid but All are soluble in water but are precipi- and as a filler in paper. Also known as is an effective fungicide as well. Treat- tated by strong alcohol. They are used "infusorialearth"and"kieselguhr." ment must be carried out in the ab- as adhesivesinthe manufacture of (17) sence of air or moisture, as diethyl zinc gummed tapes and paper. (17,198, dicedpattern(dkedbinding;diced ignites on contact with air and explodes 235) leather).1. The decorated cover of a on contact with moisture. This requires dhawa (country sumac; Indian sumac). A t'ook tooled with cubes or diamonds. that the books be absolutely dry before tree (Anogeissus latifolia) common to RUSSIA LEATHER IS often "diced" and treatment;thereforetheymustbe many parts of India, the leaves of diced calf has been used frequently treated with the gas in a vacuum cham- which yield a tannin used in that coun- since the first quarter of the 19th cen- ber and the excess diethyl zinc must be try. The k a .nin content of the leaves tury. 2. A pattern ruled or embossed removed orneutralizedbeforethe varies considerably, ranging from less inleatherinthe form of diamond chamber isopened. Treatment with than 30% to more than 50%, depend- squares.3. A pattern inpublishers' diethyl zinc leaves the paper with a ing on the age of the trees when the book cloth, in the form of a bold dia- pH of approximately 7.5 and does not leaves are gathered. The proportion of mond, popular between 1835 and 1845. appear to have any adverse effect on soluble non-tans is 10 to 13%. Dhawa (140, 159, 261) leather or other book materials. is considered to be well suited for the die. An engraved stamp used in embossing digester. A vesselin which , tanning of light leathers, giving a soft a design or letter in leather, or on cloth straw, esparto, rags, or other cellulosic diluent 77 directional ventilating power

consistencyofitsdimensions. The property is associated with changes oc- curring in a material due to changes in moisture content,theapplication of load, or simply with the passage of time. Dimensional stability of paper is importantinprinting,especiallyin multi-color processes, since papers with poor dimensional stability may give misregister. This is because, when they are run through the press, the dimen- sions change from one color run to the next. See also: CREEP; HYGROEXPANSIV- ITY. (17, 139) dip. A term sometimes applied to a batch of books, which have been trimmed, jogged and clamped, and are then ready to he "dipped" for marbling the edges. (256) diptycb. An ancient hinged writing tablet consisting of two tablets of wood, ivory or metal, having wax in the hollowed inner surfaces, on which writing could be done with a stylus. The hinges were generallymetalrings orthongs threaded through the holes. Near the outer edge on the inside of me tahlet as a small trench designed to hold the stylus, which was a small bone or metal instrument pointedatone endfor writing and flat at the other end for removing, writing in the wax. In the middle of each inner side a small knob protruded to keep the wax surfaces apart. Ordinary diptychs were generally made of beech, fir, or citron wood, but those made for ceremonial use, or for important recipients, were often made of ivory, sometimes beautifully carved, and fitted with gold or jewels. The most lavishlyembellished specimens belong to the Byzantine period, 530 to Front Leaf Back Leaf 560. Because they were small enough to hold in one hand, in Latin they were sometimes called "pugillaria." The dip- The consular diptych of Philoxenus in ivory. Constantinople(?), A.D. 525. tych is interesting because it is both a From the Dumbarton Oaks Collection, manuscript and a binding. (12, 109, (33.3 cm. by 12.8 cm.) 373) direct dyes. A class of ANII INE DYES, so materials aretreated with chemicals rate from the charging end to the dis- called because they have such great and heat to produce the pulp used in charging end. (17) affinity for cellulose fibers,i.e., paper the manufacture of paper. A digester diluent. A substance added to another, and some cloths. While both these and isusually constructedtowithstand e.g., an adhesive, to reduce its concen- ACID DYES are sodium salts of dye acids, elevated pressures and is made of ma- tration, or to an ink, to reduce its direct dyes do not require the use of a terials designed to resist the chemicals viscosity, and so on. Water is the prin- moiwArrr. Their shades are duller than usedinpulp preparation.Digesters cipal diluent usedinarchival work. those of either acid or BASIC DYES and may be cylindrical, spherical, horizon- See also: EXTENDER ( 1 ) ;THINNER. they tend to have less tinctorial value tal, vertical, stationary, rotating or de- (309) than the basic dyes; however, they have signed to tumble. Most are stationary. dimensional changes in leather. The in- the very important advantages of being A digester may be designed for batch crease or decrease in the thickness and much more lightfastthanthe basic operation, in which itdischargesits area of a leather due to increasing or dyes, and in certain instances, more so pulp at the conclusion of a fixed cycle, decreasing relative humidity of the sur- than even the acid dyes. 071 or it may he designed for continuous rounding atmosphere. (363) directional ventilating power. The venti- operation, in which case it mmes the dimensional stability. That property of a lating power of leather, which is greater raw material and chemicals at a fixed paper, hoard, etc., which relates to the in one direction than in the other, in direction line 78 dongola

thatit allows water to migrate more paper to be treated must be also sized. duced from selected linen and cotton freely from the flesh side to the grain (198) fibers, and is almost always surfaced- side than vice versa. (363) dividers.I. The draftsman's instrument sized with high quality animal glue or direction line. The line of printed char- used in hookhinding for a variety of withspecialtubsizings.Document acters in a riblication when the ab- purposes, including measuring the dis- parchment is produced in basis weights breviatedtitleof.the hook,i.e.,the tance between bands or webbings and of 48, 56, 72, and 88 pounds (17 x 22 - DESIGNATION MARK,follows the signa- cuttingstock,patterns,etc.2. The 1,000). The paper should be manufac- ture mark, or letter, printed at the foot heavy sheets of cardboard or paper, tured in such a manner as to insure of the first page of each sheet. It is in- frequently of cover-paper weight or maximum permanency and durability. tended to serve as a guide to the binder heavier, used to divide the sections of 2. A vegetable used when gathering. Until the end of the a book when two or more sections. for diplomas and documents. (17) 18th century the direction line, printed parts, or issues are bound together. doeskin.I. A soft, supple leather made helow the text of the page, and often (264, 274) from the skin of an adult female deer between thetext and the footnotes, dividing into sections. A term applied to and used in England as early as the contained theCATCHWORD,signature, the process of dividing the leaves of a 16th century for covering books. 2. A press figures, and occasionally the vol- book to he oversewn into "sections" soft, supple leather, uo.ually white or ume number or part numher. See also: following the removal of the hack folds. cream colored but sometimes dyed, SIGNATURE AND CATCHWORD LINE.(140, The normal thickness of each section having afine suede finish, produced 156) is 0.055 inch; however, books printed from lambskin or sheepskin split and direction word.Sec: CATCHWORD. on paper thatisunusually thick or and tanned by a combination tannage, directory paper. A lightweight printing hulky are sometimes divided into sec- e.g., formaldehyde and oil, or formalde- paper made with a substantial propor- tions 0.065 inch in thickness. (209) hyde and alum. See also:BUCKSKIN. tion of mechanical wood pulp. The divi-divi.Thetannin-richpodsofa (172, 278) halance ofthepulpisusually un- largegenusoftreesandwoody dog ear. I. An oversize, unfolded corner bleached sulfite or semi-bleached sulfate climbers(Caesalpinia)native to the in a publication caused when a sheet in pulp, although the paper is also made tropics and sub-tropics The mos1 a pile of paper having a corner turned from deinked paper stock plus chemi- portantisCaesalpinia coriaria. under is trimmed in the guillotine. After cal wood pulp. Its essential character- divi pods contain a high percentage trimming, the corner of the defective istics are uniformity of basis weight, of tannin (40-45% )whichiseasily sheet extends beyond the trim size of opacity, strength, and a finish suitable leached out. It is one of the pyrogallol the sheet when the folded corner is for high speed printing. Permanence class of tannins and produces a light- then unfolded. The dog ear is often isnot considered to be an essential colored leather. It is usually used along useful in early books in determining property. Usual basis weights are 18 to with other tannins, because when used the size of the leaf and the sheet be- 28 pounds (24 x 36 500). It is used alone it produces a leather that is soft causeitreveals the size of the un- mainly for printing telephonedirec-. and spongy in a damp atmosphere and trimmedleaf.2.The turned-down tories,city directories, and thelike. which lacks pliability in dry weather. corner of a leaf. See:DOG EARED. ( 17 ) Inaddition,the amount of sugary dog eared. A book or other publication disc refiner. A type ofREFINERconsisting matter present in the pods results in too having one or more corners of the of one or more matched pairs of discs rapid fermentation of the tan liquor. leavesturneddown,generallyhy lined with a pattern of ribs. One disc This may produce reddish stains in the readers. rotates, while the other is stationary or leather, which can, however, be con- domestic goat.GOATSKIN,and, in general, rotates in the opposite direction. The trolled to some extent hy the use of virtually any skin imported in the cured paper stock flows from the center out- appropriate antiseptics. Divi-divi is also state, i.e., dry-salted or wet-salted, and ward, or vice versa, and is macerated, used in leather manufacture as a dye. then converted into leather in the im- ruhbed, and cut (refined). The degree See also: VEGETABLETANNINS. (175) porting country. (363) and extent of the refining depends upon divinitybindings.See:ECcLESIASTICAL dominotiers.The name given to the earliest several factors. including the pressure BINDINGS. known "marblers" of historical impor- between the discs, the type of ribhing divinity calf.I. A plain, drab, khaki- tancethe dominotiers of France. The on the faces of the discs, and the con- colored calfskin hinding, popular in the name derives from the Italian domino, sistency of the pulp suspension. (17) mid-19th century for theological and a word which refers to the little cloak discruling machine. See:RULING MA- devotional books. The style was particu- or hood, which was part of the working CHINES. larly popular in the rebinding of books apparel of theearly marNers. The of an earlier time. The hindings were dominotiersapparentlywerehighly disodiumpyrophosphate. Achemical (Na2P.,07) used as a mold inhibitor in tooled in blind with single lines termi- successful, as they were shortly granted paper. It is used in an aqueous solution nating in OxmanCORNERS.The style royal perrnksion to form, a gMld, along of 11/2 ounces of disodium pyrophos- sometimes also featured beveled boards with the wood engravers. Those special- and red edges. Sometimes called "Ox- izing in the making of marbled papers phate, tounce of potassium ferrocya- ford style." 2. A leather used princi- were called inarbreurs. Unfortunately, nide, and 1/2 ounce of soda crystals in pally for the inside cover linings of because of its highly perishable nature, 1 gallon of water. The purpose of the limp leather prayer books and small very little of this early marbling has soda crystals isto prevent the paper Bihles. (69. 156, 371) come down to us. ('217) from turning a greenish hue after treat- document parchment.I. A paper made dongola. A term sometimes applied to ment. The inhibitor solution may be to replace the more expensive genuine leathers such as goatskin, sheepskin, or made up with an addition of gelatin or PARCHMENT,and used for legislative calfskin tanned and finishedtore- glue, or other sizing material,if the acts, treaties, and the like.Itis pro- sembleKIDSKIN.

) dope 79 double-stitched binder

dope. A solution of a cellulose ester, such example, when a soluble calcium or lotine.First, thereisthe downward as cellulose acetate or nitrate, or a cel- magnesium saltis dissolved in water motion through the pile being cut; sec- lulose ether, such as ethyl cellulose or and the paper is immersed in it. After ond, the single-shear motion across the henzyl cellulose, in a volatile solvent, the paper has been dried it is then im- face of the pile; and third, the double- such as acetone, amyl acetate, etc., and pregnated with a solublecarbonate, shear motion where the cutting edge used as a coating for paper. See also: such as that of ammonium or sodium. of the knife starts to cut higher at one LACQUER. (17) Sodium carbonate and calcium chlor- side of the pile and by a rocking motion dos a dos binding. A form of bookbind- ide, for example, react to form insolu- becomes approximately parallel when ing in which two hooks, usually small blecalciumcarbonateandsoluble it reaches the bottom of the cut at the and frequently of a complementary sodium chloride:CaCl2 Na0CO3 table.The double-shear strokethus nature, e.g., a Psalter and New Testa- CaCO3,1 + 2NaC1; cuts more like a scissors, with the knife ment, are bound hack to hack so that or, using calcium chloride and ammo- edge entering each sheet in the pile at they open in opposite directions, one nium carbonate: Caa, (N1-11)2CO3 its side and gradually cutting across it. of the three hoards being the common -) CaC031 2NH4CI. The advantages of the double-shear lower board of both volumes. The Thesoluhlesodiumor ammonium stroke are: 1) less power required to spines and fore edges are opposed. chlorideis removed by washing the cut; 2) less strain on the machine and Their upper boards are usually either paper with water, and itis important the knife; 3) a more perfectly cut edge; embroideredor coveredwithgold- that the chloride be removed as com- and 4) a smoother face to the pile. tooled leather. However the dos a dos pletely as possible, as its presence in Cf: SINGLE-SHEAR STROKE. (145) binding is picked up, it opens at the the paper is potentially harmful. The double-sixteen folder. A particular folding beginning of one of the two hooks. advantage of the double decomposition machine capable of folding two 16- (69, 156, 347) method is its simplicity, plus the fact page sections or one 32-page section. dotted line style. See: PINHEAD sTYLE; that a much greater alkaline reserve This folder can also be equipped to POINTILLE ( I ). can be deposited in the paper than is produce two 32-page sections, though double coated paper. 1. A paper or board generallypossiblewithmostother of a smaller page size. Double 16s which has received two coatings on the methods. have three folding levels and four sets same side with either the same or dif- double gold. 1. GOLD LEAF that is twice of folding rollers. The sheet is slit in ferent coating materials. A paper or the customary thickness, or approxi- half at the first folding level and each board coated on bothsidesis not mately 1/100,000 to 1/125,000 inch in halfisfoldedindividuallyatright double coated hut is coated two sides. thickness. 2. Regular gold leaf that is angles at the second level. It is folded 2. A paper or board heavily coated, doubled upon itself before laying down. once again at the third level, which has but not necessarily with two coatings. Double gold leaf, of this form, or as only one set of folding rollers; in this (17, 52) described above,iseasier to handle level,if the sections are to be out- double cord sewing. A hook sewn on and gives a brighter and more solid serts, each of the two folded sheets double raised cords, i.e., two cords set appearance. It is used mainly in edge is folded in succession, whereas if the adjacentandalmosttouching,the gilding. (130, 335) sections areinserts, both sheets are sewing thread leaving and re-entering double headbands. Headbands for very combined and folded together. A fourth the section through one hole. Double large volumes worked on two lengths folding level may be added to make the cord sewingissubstantially stronger of thong, or other core. This type of machine capable of producing two 32- than sewing on single cords and the HEADBAND usually appears in the form pagesections.Seealso: FOLDING sections are better supported against of a thicker band with a thinner band MACHINES. (320) the pull of the thread where required in front or above. (83, 152) double skin. See: PIPING. (1) most, i.e., at the point where the thread double kettle stitch. A KETTLE sTITCH double slipcase.1. A suPcAsE in two leaves and re-enters the section. See tied twice so as to provide additional parts, one of which fits into the other. also: Ei EXIBLE SEWING. strength. (335) 2. A single slipcase fitted inside with double covers. A term used in pamphlet double mounting. The process of attach- a divider which enables it to accom- binding toindicate two covers, the ing one label over a larger one of a modate two books while keeping their inner one of which is of the same type different color. It gives the effect of a covers from touching. and color paper as the outer, hut of a coloredborderaroundthesmaller doublespread(doublepagespread; lighter basis weight. label. (86) double truck). 1. Two facing pages on doubled. An impression in leather, such double plate. I. See: DOUBLE SPREAD (1). which printed matter is spread across as in blind tooling, which is said to he 2. A single unit of illustration extending as if they were one page. When an doubled when the tool has been twisted acrOss two contiguouspages,often illustylijonisprintedthis way two inthe impression, or when a repeat printed on a folio so imposed that it blocks are used unless the spread is impression does not fall exactly over becomes a CENTER SPREAD. in the center of the section, in which the first. double register. Two registers in one book. case it is a CENTER SPREAD. Also called double decomposition. A chemical reac- See: REGISTER. (1) "two page spread." See also: CON- tion that takes place between two com- double scored. Paper that has been scored JUGATE LEAVES. 2. The application of pounds, in which the first and second along two distinct, closely spaced lines. an adhesive to both adherends of an parts of one compound unite with the Double scoring allows for a partial assembly. (139, 309) second and first parts, respectively, of rolling effect of the leaf and thereby double-stritched binder. A commercial the other compound. One of the com- improves turning. Cf: CRIMPING. See type of "binder" sometimes used for pounds is usually insoluble. The prin- also: scORE. in-house repair of hooks.Itconsists ciple of double decomposition has been double-shear stroke. The multiple move- of two lengths of heavy cloth sewn usedindeacidifying paper,as,for ment of the descending knife of a guil- together along two parallel lines, the double thick cover paper 80 drawn marble

distance between them being approxi- ing unit being slightly out of register leaves), rather than being sewn to the mately the thickness of the book to be with the original print. (17) tapes or to a guard which is attached recased. Each layer is gummed on the doublure. 1. An ornamental inside lining to the sections or leaves. outside surface. The spine of the book of a book cover, which takes the place draw.1. The displacement of the cut is attached to one layer of cloth along of the regular pastedown and leaf. sheets by the thickness of the guillo- with the new endpapers, whilethe Itis usually of leather or (watered) tine cutting knife. Draw is a common other side is attached to the inlay and silk, generally with a leather hinge and cause of imperfectly cut paper. 2. The boards. The standard widths (between isoften very elaborately decorated. dragging action of the knife of a cut- rows of sewing)ranges between1/4 The typical doublure consists of a silk ting machine, which tends to draw a inch and 3 inches. (138) fly leaf and a leather board covering, book or pile of sheets out from under double thick cover paper. Two thick- but sometimes both board covering and the clamp when cutting papers are nesses of cover paper laminated to- fly leaf are of silk; rarely, both are of heavily coated with clay. 3. The ten- gether with adhesive to produce a very leather. In a strict sense, however, the sion applied to paper between the sec- stiff cover paper. The more common term refers only to leather linings. tions of a papermaking machine, such basis weights are100 pounds (two The doublure was known in Turkey as the press or drier sections. (17, 145) 50-pound sheets) and 130 pounds (two at least as early as the 14th century, drawer-handle tool. A finishing tool often 65-pound sheets). buttheearliestknownEuropean used in England and the Netherlands double-tone ink. A printing ink consist- doublures are a binding of about 1550, during the second half of the 17th cen- ing of a mixture of an oil-soluble dye, in the . Their use was tury. It was generally used in groups or a stable body pigment of a different revivedin the reign of Louis XIV sequences, and is so named because of color, and a medium. Such inks are (1643-1715), but they were not used its similarity to the handle of a drawer. used for the printing of halftones when very extensively until about 1750, after (156, 347) a gravure effect is desired. The half- whichtheybecameverypopular. drawing color. The darkening of the im- toneisactually printed in the usual Doublures have been used continuously pressions made in leather during blind manner; however, sometime later over- since that timemore so in France, tooling. This is done by means of a hot tones appear on the print, due to the where they have always been more tool, a smoked tool (soot or lampblack dye of the ink spreading as a halo popular than elsewhere. The word it- [carbon] or carbon paper), or by wet- around the printed dots forming the selfis French, meaning "lining" or ting the leather with water or vinegar. image. Paper finish and tone also affect "doubling of material." Also called (115) the result. (140) "ornamental inside lining." drawing on (drawing around; drawing double two sheets on. A method of sew- 2. In a very general sense, an orna- over). A term sometimes applied to the ing a book on tapes thatis reputed mental endpaper. See PLATE X. (172, process of drawing the leather cover- to give still greater strength than the 236, 335, 343) ing over the spine of a book, prepara- ALL ALONG method. Each sectionis doublure margin. In a strict sense, the tory to turning and setting the head. sewn "two sheets on" with the preced- space on the inside of a book cover drawn flanks. The flank area of hides and ing section, resulting in each section between the DOUBLURE (1) and the skins that have shrunk and display being sewn to the sections both above edges of the board, which, when there furrowed lines on the grain surface and below it. This gives greater hold- is no doublure, are simply the TURN- over the underlying blood vessels. ing power because two threads pass INS (1). (173) drawn grain. A grain in a leather which through each section; consequently, if do up. An old term of English origin for shows an irregular pattern of creases one thread breaks the other still holds the processes of folding, stitching and or narrow grooves, produced by tan- the section. Unless the first and last wrapping, or binding books in cloth. ning the skin in such a manner that the sections are sewn all along, however, eown at the head. 1. Sections which have main thickness has contracted relative the weakness of this method isthat not been fed properly to the head to the grain layer, which is then fixed these sections, which receive the ft-Pa:- gauge of the cutting machine, causing in a puckered or "drawn together con- est strain when the book is be;nt -eti an "up and down" appearance in the dition." (61) particularly thefirsts heads of the sections of a book. 2. drawn-in (drawing in). See: LACING-IN. not held very securely. In adottic Plates or maps that have not been drawn marble. A general term applied to not all of the sections are held by the placed up to the top edge of the leaf. a type of edge marble consisting of kettle stitches. (196) (256) multi-colored scales. The colors used doubling. The unintentional printing of a downtime. The time during which a ma- are 'Mark, blue, or green, yellow and repeat image from a single form that chine, department, or entire bindery is red, put on the size in that order. The isout of register. Doubling isparti- inactive during normal working hours, black is dropped on in such a manner cularly troublesome in halftone work because of repairs, setting-up, lack of that the first drop comes into contact because it adversely affects both tone material, etc. Downtime becomes ex- with the edge of the second, the second and color values. It may be caused by tremely costly in certain plants, such as with that of the third, and so on, so severalthings,including rippling of paper mills, edition binderies, or bind- that a color ribbon is formed. The blue the paper or premature contact with eries specializing in adhesive binding, (or green) is placed on the size in un- the form or offset blanket. It may also because of the very high cost of the connected drops on both sides of the occur if sheets slip in the gripper or equipment used, as well as the cost of black. The yellow is dropped on both if the paper stretches during printing. idle labor. (316) sides of the black so that each drop of Play in the press cylinders resulting in drag. The pulling effect on the first and blue has a yellow center and the red is printback of ink picked up from the last sections (or leaves) of a book, placed so that each drop of yellow has paper by the blanket can also cause caused by endpapers that have been a red center. The colors are then drawn doubling, as can the succeeding print- attached directly to the sections(or by a stylus in wavy lines through each drawn-on covers 81 drying

other past the black, producing white throughthepapermakingmachine. where the cost of salt is too high to be lines between the colors. The comb is Dried-in strain diminishes with time economical. thendrawnacrossproducingthe and can be reduced rapidlyinthe As bacteria must haveacertain scales. Variations of drawn marbles, in presence of high humidity or if the amount of moisture or free water if addition to comb edges, include the paper is wetted.See also:ANISOTROPIC they are to attack a hide or skin, putre- "American,""bouquet,""peacock," BF.HAVIOR. (17) faction can be effectively stopped or and "snail." (264) drill. 1. A strong, heavy, durable cotton prevented by removal of the water to drawn-on covers (drawn-on solid). A term fabric in twill weave, used as a base the point where the skin contains only applied to the binding of square-backed for certain grades of imitation leather, 10 to 14% moisture. At this point the periodical issues, pamphlets, and paper- and sometimes finished for use as a activity ofthe bacteria ceases, and backs, in which the cover is attached covering material for very large books, some types are killed, while the others by gluing it to the spine. When the end- e.g., blankbooks. 2. To make a round dry up into spore form, in which they papers are pasted down, it is said to be hole in paper for the purpose of over- can remain for long periods or until "drawn-on solid." (156, 307) castingorsidesewing,usually by there is enough water for them to again drenching. An old method of deliming means of a high-speed drill. The term become active. and acidifying unhaired skins, in lieu also applies to making holes in paper Curing by drying requires consider- of BATING Or PICKLING, by means of for loose-leaf, spiral, or similar type of able care, especially with thick hides, immersion in a water infusion of fer- binding. 3. A hand- or power-drill for because: 1) if drying is too slow, as mented barley, sour dough, flour, or making holes in book paper, binder's may be the case in relatively wet, cold the husks of cereals. The organic acids board, etc. (183, 256). climates, putrefaction may occur be- (lactic and acetic) in the solution neu- drive punch. A hollow steel punch used fore the moisture content is low enough tralized any remaining lime in the stock for making holes in leather, paper, etc., to inhibit bacteria; and 2) if drying is and the particles of barley, etc., exerted for eyelets and snap fasteners. too rapid and the temperature is too a cleansing action of the skins, absorb- dropping colors. The placement of MAR- high, part of the wet skin will begin to ing dirt and greases, etc. The cleansing BLING colors on the size in the marbling gelatinize, which will show as holes in action was very effective because the trough. Also called "throwing colors." the hide when it is subsequently brought enzymes produced by the bacterial cells (327) back to its normal moisture content. not only broke down the carbohydrates Too rapid drying also makes the hide in the plant materials to produce acids drum. A revolving cylindrical container used in leather manufacture for such hard and brittle and prevents drying of but also digested the mucopolysaccha- the inner layers. rides of the ground substance. operations as washing, tanning, dyeing, fatliquoring, etc. It is usually equipped Drying as a means of curing is usu- Drenching was often difficult to con- ally practiced in countries with hot, dry trol, as the enzymes did not restrict with pegs inside for lifting and agitat- ing the stock. The operation of tum- climates. The skins may be: 1) ground their attack to the carbohydrates either bling the stock is known as "drum- driedby simply spreading them out in the solution or the skins, but often on the ground, sometimes on a bed of degraded the fibers of the dermal net- ming." drumming on. The process employed in twigs or stones. This is potentially dan- work as well. In addition, too much gerous because of poor ventilation on acid swelling was produced with re- attachingsilkdoublures. A special technique is required because adhesives the ground side and too high a tempera- sulting impairment of the skin struc- ture on the exposed side, plus contami- ture and, therefore, of the quality of cannot be applied directly to silk as they would penetrate the material. A nation withdirt;2)sun driedin the leather produced. which the skins are hung or laid over When drenching is used today, as in piece of silk larger than the space en- closed by the turn-ins and leather joint poles or wires in the sun. This method certain vegetaL.e tannages calling for affords better ventilation and quicker specific acid conditioning during the is laid on a piece of paper the exact size of the enclosure. The edges of the silk drying, but may result in heat damage early stages of tanning, weak solutions or pole or wire marks, showing as hard of organic acids, such as lactic, acetic are turned over the paper and glued to the back. The paper is then glued to creases down the skin; 3) frame dried and formic, are used in lieu of fer- in whichtheskinsareloosely mented cereal solutions. the board. The silk is secured only at the edges and is otherwise free (like a stretched out on frames, which are ar- Because of the gas bubbles of carbon ranged so that they do not receive the dioxideproducedbyfermentation, drum), being drawn taut but not glued down. If the DOUBLURE extends to the direct rays of the mid-day sun. This which caused the skins to rise to the results in less danger of heat damage surface of the paddle, the process was very edge of the board, the enclosure is filled in with thin board to bri .g the and a superior, flatter shape; however, also called "raising." (291, 363) a skin shrinks on drying, and if itis dressing. A general term applied to the board surface up to the levelo.: the turn-ins and joint. stretched too tightly on the frame, over- series of processes involved in con- straining may cause thinness and weak- vertingrough tanned hides and/ or dry. To change the physical state of an ness; and 4) shade driedwhere the crust leather into finished leather.See adhesive applied to an adherend by the loss of schn:..it constituents by evapora- skins are dried in an open-sided, cov- also:CURRYING; LEATHER DRESSINGS; ered shed, designed to avoid the direct PURE DRESSED. (61) tion, absorption, or both. heat of the sun but to allow good ven- drying. 1. A method of preparing hides dried-in strain (dried-in stress). That part tilation.See also:DRY-SALTING. of potential strain or stress remaining and skins for storage and/or transpor- 2. The process of allowing books to in machine-made paper subsequent to tation so as to prevent PUTREFACTIVF be "set" after each operation, involving manufacture. The property is caused DAMAGE. Drying is employed princi- the use of adhesives and/or seasoning by tension or restriction of shrinkage pally in situations where insufficient a book in a press after casing-in or duringdryingastheweb moves salt is available for WET-SALTING, or covering. (256, 291, 306, 363) drying cracks 82 dummy

drying cracks. Fissures in the surface of a PUTREFACTIVE DAMAGE, by curing them dry strength. The resistance to failure of paper coating caused by an unduly in a very strong solution of brinei.e., an adhesive joint measured immedi- rapid evaporation of the moisture in about 30 pounds of salt for every 10 ately after drying under specified con- the coating. gallons of cold water, followed by dry- ditions.See also:WET STRENGTH. (309) drying memory. A characteristic of cer- ing, or by WET-SALTING, followed by dry tack. That characteristic of some ad- tain hot-melt adhesives which causes drying. In both methods, the hides are hesives, and especially nonvulcanizing them to attempt to return to the shape subject to a thorough and uniform salt rubber adhesives, to adhere to them- or configuration they had when they penetration and are then hung up to selves during the period in which vola- set. When a hot-melt adhesive is ap- dry. Dry-salting substantially reduces tile constituents are evaporating, even plied to the flat spine of a book, and the the weight of the hides and therefore though they may appear to be dry. bookissubsequently rounded and the cost of transportation that isin- Also called "aggressive tack." (309) backed, the "memory" of the adhesive curred in wet-salting; it also reduces or dubbin. A paste prepared from cod oil tends to cause it to revert to the orig- eliminates many of the dangers in- and tallow, the proportions of v'Lich inal flat configuration it had when it set, volved in simple DRYING (1). Large vary according to the time of yearin thus also flattening the spine of the numbers of hides, however, require winter generally two parts oil to one of book. This loss of round will eventually great quantities of salt. In dry-salting, tallow, and the reverse in the summer. cause the binding to fail, i.e., the book care must be taken that: 1) drying is There are two types of tallow in gen- will become loose in its case because carried out gradually and evenly; other- eral use, one of which is mutton (melt- of the strain of the backing shoulders wise the hides may become too hot and ing point 40-45° C.), and the other caused by the loss of round. partially gelatinize, which not only pre- beef (melting point 35-40C.). Dub- drying temperature. The temperature to vents drying of the inner layer and bin is used to incorporate oil into some which an adhesive, the adherends, or causes the hides to become hard and tanned leathers in the STUFFING (2) or both, is subjected in order to dry the brittle, but also results in the gelatinized CURRYING processes. (306) adhesive. The temperature of the adhe- parts leaving holes when the stock is Dubuisson, Pierre-Paul(ft1746-1762). sive in process of drying may differ later returned to its normal wet condi- An 18th century French bookbinder, from the temperature of the surround- tion; and 2) when the hides are to be who succeeded ANTOINE MICHEL PADE- ing atmosphere.See also:CURING TEM- tanned, they must be soaked in water LOUP as royal binder. Dubuisson ex- PERATURE; SETTING TEMPERATURE. until they have taken up as much water celled in the creation of dentelles simi- (309) as they had before curing; dry-salted lar to those of the Deromes, and was drying time. The length of time during hides require more time and more care- an accomplished heraldic designer as which an adhesive, the adherends, or ful soaking than does wet-salted stock. well as bookbinder and gilder. He, and both, is allowed to dry, during which Sodium chloride (NaCI) is the most hisfather, Rene, specializedin the time ao heat, pressure, or both is ap- commonly used salt for this process, bindingofalmanacs,devisingthe plied.See also:CURING TIME; SETTING but a salt "earth" known as KHARI, is shortcut of decorating Lheir covers with TIME. (309) actually to be preferred because it con- well-designedengravedplaquesde- drying tunnel. A tunnel in which damp tains about 60% sodium sulfate (Na2 signed to be used in a press, instead of leather is placed for drying in a cur- SO4), 20% magnesium sulfate (Mg working with individual tools. (94, 347) rent of air, often under carefully con- SO4) and 5% sodium chloride, and is duck. A plain, closely woven, durable trolled conditions of temperature and less hygroscopic than common salt. It fabric, now usually made from cotton. humidity. is more suitable for the hot, humid It is woven in various weights and used dry open. A method used on combination areas during the rainy seasons, from for covering large, heavy books, espe- case bindings that involves hanging the which most dry-salted hides are pre- cially blankbooks, and other large sta- book in its case, gluing down the cloth pared. (248, 291, 363) tionery bindings. (264) joints with the cover boards held open, dry size. A powdered size used in gold- dull-coated. A paper having a coated sur- and allowing the book to dry in that tooling suede leathers, velvet, silk, and face that is low in gloss. It is usually a position before completing the binding also cameo papers.See also:ALBUMEN; free sheet base stock coated two sides process. (256) BLOCKING POWDER. with calcium carbonate or blanc fixe, dry pressing. An obsolete term applied to dry stamping. A technique used in the and finished with a flat or smooth sur- the operation of pressing out the in- production of multi-colored paste pat- face offering minimum gloss or glare. It dentations made in paper by the type terns for end- and other decorative is made to standard book sizes and during printing, so asto make the papers. Colored paste is first brushed weight, and is suitable for printing fine printed sheet smooth. Pressing of this over the surface of the paper, the paste halftones. (17, 156 ) nature was done in a standing- or hy- brush then being drawn from top to dull gilt. The edges of a book that have draulic press, the printed sheets being bottom of the sheet in regular strokes, been gilt and then burnished through placed between sheets of hard-rolled leaving a uniform layer of color on thin paper, producing asolid,uni- boards. (' 38) which parallel brush marks are faintly formly dull metallic surface.See also: dry-rub resistance. The resistancc: offered discernible. While the surface isstill GILT EDGES. (154, 335) by the coated or uncoated surface of a wet, a dry printing implement is pressed dumb. A more-or-less obsolete term used material to wear resulting from me- on the wet color. When it is removed, in lieu of "blind" with reference to chanical action on the surface of the some of the color adheres to it, leaving blind printing, blind tooling, blind per- material.Seealso:WET-RUB RESIS- a faint unit on the paper of a lighter forating, etc. (256) TANCE. (17) color than the remaining background. dummy. 1. A made-up text block, gener- dry-salting. A method of preserving hides An engraved brayerisalso used at ally of blank leaves, sewn and trimmed and skins for storage and/or transpor- times to create a continuous design. but not cased or covered and meant to tation before tanning, so as to prevent (86) represent the bulk of a forthcoming

8 9 duodedmo 83 Dutch gilt papers

publication. 2. The layout of a forth- strength, e.g., a paper carefully pro- tains a relatively high percentage of coming book, including the actual ar- duced from cotton fibers, rags, or a impurities, e.g., lignin, and which also rangement of the printed matter, spe- high grade chemical wood pulp, as has very short fibers, should be avoided cifications for type, illustrations, etc. opposed to one produced from a com- in archival and heavy use papers; and 3. A piece of leather or cloth mounted bination of chemical and mechanical 8) that the paper be manufactured in on a board to show the exact size and wood pulps, for example, which has such a manner that it retains its coat- lettering of a publication, usually a relatively little initial strength. ings over a long period in storage. periodical.See also:RUB (1). (129, Some 80 years subsequent to the Books, documents, and other archi- 139, 156, 234) developmentofthe(Fourdrinier) val materials should be housed in air- duodecimo.See:TWELVEMO. papermaking machine, there was the conditioned quarters having controlled duodo bindings. Bindings executed by beginning of a widespread concern temperatureandrelativehumidity. ParisiangildersforPietro Duodo, over the relatively rapid deterioration Taking into consideration that people Venetian ambassador to Henri IV of of paper, and in the years between probably will be working in the stor- France,1594-1597. Thedistinctive 1885 and 1930, various governmental age (bookstack)areaa reasonable feature of his bindings (and apparently and other groups, such as the United temperature might be 60 to 65 F, with most of his library consisted of small States Department of Agriculture, the a relative humidity of 50 to 60%. The books similarly bound) was rows of German government, the Royal Society area should also be as dark as prac- laurel wreaths enclosing various small of Arts (Great Britain), and the Li- tical, wit:. time switches that turn off flowers, the central wreath enclosing brary Association of Great Britain, in- lights automatically. The area should his arms. This style was imitated by vestigated the problem. The earliest of be completely free from dirt, and in- English binders of the early 18th cen- these investigations focused attention sects and their larvae. If flourescent tury and by French binders in the late on themethodof paper manufacture; lighting is used, which gives off less 19th century. (140, 347) only much later did it become apparent heatthanincandescantlighting,it duplex. 1. A term used with reference to that thematerialsused in making pa- should be filtered, as the ultraviolet the texture, finish, or color of a paper. per, thecare takenin stock prepara- light radiated from flourescent lights Aduplex texturerefers to a paper that tion,and thesizing andbleaching over a long period of time could cause may be smooth on one side and rough agents utilized also had to be consid- deterioration of book papers. (32, 36, on the other, while aduplex finish ered. 40, 143, 157, 198) refers to a paper that may have a linen Research into the qualities (both dur- duro-flexible binding (duro-flexile). A finish on one side and a burlap finish ability and permanence) of paper has style of library binding devised and on the other, and so on. Aduplex color been fairly extensive in recent decades. patented by Cedric Chivers in the lat- refers to a paper that is stained on one The overall collective results of this ter part of the 19th century. The duro- side only, or that is colored with differ- research would seem to indicate that flexible binding was designed to give ent colors on either side. A duplex the retardation of paper deterioration additional strength where most needed, color may also be obtained by laminat- requires: 1) careful control of stock i.e., in the hinges and first and last sec- ing together two papers of different preparation at every stage of manu- tions. This was done by lining the end- colors. 2. A general term applied to a facture, and avoidance of excessive papers with jaconet and using a three- paper or board with two or more plies. beating of the fibers, which shortens jointed endpaper. The books were sewn (17) and therefore weakens the fibers and all along on linen tapes. The spines duplex book trimmer. A type of cutting also sometimes prevents proper felting were lined with a pliable leather, and machine having two trimming knives during sheet formation. In addition, both tapes and lining were secured be- parallel to each other on opposite sides impurities, inherent in the stock and/or tween split boards. They were covered above a central cutting table. The table incorporatedfrom equipment,e.g., with a thin, vegetable-tanned pigskin, consists of a cutting block equipped to copper or iron, must be avoided or re- with linen on the sides. (94, 236) clamp the pile firmly. Two piles of moved insofar as possible; 2) great dust cover.I .See: BOOK JACKET. 2. A books, each 5 to 6 inches high, are care taken to remove the chemicals blank leaf inserted at the end of a placedspinetospineagainstthe used in pulping, e.g., sulfates and sul- pamphlet or booklet having a self- gauges. This brings the fore edges of fites, so as to avoid subsequent hydroly- cover. each pile on opposite sides at the table sis of the paper; 3) the removal of un- dusting. The process of spreading ground, and under the knives. After cutting the bleached cellulose fibers so as to pre- raw vegetable tanning materials over fore edges, the other edges of the book vent possible deterioration; 4) avoid- and between hides being tannedin are brought into position by giving the ance of excessive mineral loadings, as layer vats to add to the tanning strength table a quarter turn. This also changes too much loading inhibits felting of the of the tan liquor. Dusting was a com- the position of the knives on the knife- fibers and also weakens the paper; 5) mon practice before the days of con- bars above, drawing them closer for tub-sizing (preferably with gelatin), of centrated tanning extracts. (363) trimming the heads and tails of both archival and/or papers to be handled dust jacket (dust wrapper).See:Boox piles simultaneously.See also:THREE- frequently, as this type of sizing not JACKET. KNIFE TRIMMER. (142) only adds a protectivefilmtothe Dutch antique marble. A modification of duplex paper. See: DUPLEX. (1) paper but also strengthens the paper the NONPARIEL MARBLE. durability (of paper). The degree to which considerably; 6) that bleaching agents, Dutch binding. An obsolete term for a a paper retainsits original strength e.g., chlorine compounds, be removed style of binding that includes a vellum properties while at the same time being as completely as possible in order to or parchment spine, usually of a green relatively heavily used, as a manuscript avoid the possibility of the formation color. (152) or book. Realistically, the expression of hydrochloric acid in the paper; 7) Dutch corner. See: LIBRARY CORNER. implies a paper which has a high initial that mechanical wood pulp, which con- Dutch gilt papers (Dutch flowered papers). Dutch gold 84 dyeing

A type of highly decorative papers that various brass foils, however; flat foil Natural dyes, such as indigo, mad- were not marbled but were printed by for some reason discolors less rapidly der, fustic, butternut, orchil, logwood, means of blocks of wood or metal, or than the rolled Dutch gold. This may catechu, tumeric, etc., are seldom used by engraved rollers. They were used be due to the high melting-point waxes today. The discovery in the mid-19th from about 1700, and, although known used on the flat foil but not on the century that dyes could be produced as "Dutch gilt" or "Dutch flowered," rolled, which coat the metallic particles artificially from a constituent of coal they were actually produced in Ger- after they are deposited on the mate- tar was the first step in the decline of many and Italy, the Dutch connection rial in the blocking process. This coat- the use of natural dyestuffs. In large possibly arising from the fact that the ing apparently acts as a (partial) seal part this was because the quality and papers were imported into Holland for against the deteriorative effect of the effectiveness of natural dyestuffs de- reexport to France and England, al- atmosphere. Because of the chemical pended on a variety of factors, over though notallof them arrivedin action of the plasticizers in pyroxylin which the user might or might not have France and England by that route. fabrics, the deterioration of the foil is control. These included; 1) the prob- A great variety of designs was em- more rapid on these fabrics than on lem of storage; 2) the time involved in ployed in these papers, many being in starch-filled fabrics.(233, 236, 264, extracting color from the raw mate- imitation of the brocades and demasks 356) rials; 3) dependence upon a growing of the period. Some have figures of Dutch marble. A marble pattern executed season; and 4) impurities. On the other huntsmen, animals and birds, saints, by dropping a series of colors, usually hand, dyes made in the laboratory: 1) mythological beasts, and Renaissance yellow, and blue (in that order), which do not depend on growing seasons; 2) snap and scroll patterns; many arc are then drawn together and inter- do not have to be ground or chipped to embossed, and some are printed on mingled by means of a comb, so that be made usable; 3) are, in many cases colored paper. instead of shells and veins being pro- indigo), chemically the same as The probable method of their execu- duced, the pattern consists of a series the natural dyes; and 4) since they are tion consisted of transferring gold size of small, sharp scallops. manufactured in pure form, are un- to the paper by means of wooden plates The Dutch marble is a pattern that affected by the impurities that reduce or engraved rollers, the former first has been used frequently in blankbook the quality or effectiveness of their na- being pressed onto a pad saturated with binding from the early 19th century to turalcounterparts. However, unlike thesize,the latter having thesize the present day. synthetic dyestuffs, natural dyes pro- painted on. When the size on the paper Dutch metal. See: DUTCH GOLD. duce what can be described as unique had dried to the correct state, the gold Dutch paper. Originally, a handmade pa- colors. They can never be duplicated was dusted on, and, when the size was per produced in Holland, but today any exactly, and this undoubtedly adds to dry, the superfluous gold was brushed deckle-edge hand- or machine-made their appeal. No two lots off. If it was desired to have the gold paper ma rmfactured in Holland. It is a are identical for the simple reason that raised the size was thickened with yel- superior grade of paper used for high eachis going to containimpurities low ochre or red lead. The method of quality books, and, if given an antique peculiar to the plant material from coloring is unknown, but it may have finish, as artists' paper. Use of the ex- which the dye is produced; therefore, been done by dabbing or stencilling. pression "Dutch" may stem from the the very characteristics of natural dyes (217, 236) factthatin Holland handmade or which made them obsolete also make Dutch gold (Dutch leaf; Dutch metal). imitation handmade paper is still called them appealing to many craftsmen of The generic name for a blocking foil "Hollandsch papier," which does not today. that has found considerable use as a necessarily mean paper made by hand An enormous range of dyestuffs can substitute for gold leaf since the latter in Holland. (17) be obtained from the manufacturers of years of the 19th century. It was intro- Dutch sewing. An obsolete (traditional) chemical dyestuffs. They are still often duced in Germany and its use, in sheet method of sewing a book, using strips referred to as "coal tar dyes" or, per- form, expanded r pidly, followed by a of parchment or vellum in lieu of the haps more commonly, "aniline dyes," similar foil in roll form. Although often customary bands or cords. (152) because the early materials were pre- referred to as "bronze leaf," bronze dwell (dwell time). 1. See: CLAMP DWELL. pared from aniline and many of the in- being an of copper and tin, it is 2. The period of time during which the termediates required in their manufac- actually composed of brass, which is heated finishing tool is in contact with ture are obtained by the distillation of an alloy of copper and zinc. As the the leather or gold leaf. coal tar. See also: ACID DYES; BASIC amount of copper isincreased, the dye. A natural or synthetic coloring mate- DYES; DIRECT DYES; LAKE; PIGMENT. (4, color of the leaf deepens. Unlike gold rial,whethersolubleorinsoluble, 72, 235) leaf, Dutch gold discolors, tarnishing which imparts its color to a material by dyed white. The neutralized or "cor- more rapidly in polluted environments. staining or being imbibed by it, and rected" white paper produced by the When blocked on leather, the leaf or which is employed from a solution of addition of blue or red coloring to the foil turns green very quickly; and even fine dispersion, sometimes with the aid bleached pulp. when blocked on cloth or paper, it will of a MORDANT. Dyes differ from pig- dyeing. The art or process of coloring, or eventually discolor.Discolorationis ments, which are insoluble materials altering the color of a material by the due to the action of gases in the atmos- that impart color by being spread over addition of another different colored phere, such as hydrogen sulfide (H2S), a surface, or by being mixed in the material, in such a manner that the plus heat and light. Great differences form of an ingredient, as in the color- change may be considered permanent. exist in the rate of tarnishing among the ing of some papers and leathers. earth colors 85 edition

earth colors. Pigments manufactured by bination of colors can be used. The refining naturally colored clays, rocks, machine may also be used forcity and earth, and also the pure iron oxide directories, etc., where advertising mat- reds, such as Indian red, light red, etc. ter is printed on the edges. (264) The ironoxides,althoughartificial edge roll. An engraved finishing tool used counterparts,are classified with the to impress a design on the edges of the native red earths. Earth colors are also boards of a book, usually one covered classified as mineral pigments, along in leather. (274) with the manufactured inorganic pig- edge rolled. A method of decorating the ments. They are characterized by good edges of the boards of a book, usually light and heat fastness. (233, 306) one covered in leather, in which the ecclesiastical bindings. A German style of edges are tooled in gold or blind by bookbinding in the medieval fashion means of an engraved EDGE ROLL. (94, which became very popular in England THE SQUARE; MARBLED EDGES; RED 261) following the marriage of Queen Vic- EDGES; RED UNDER GOLD EDGES; ROUGH edges. The three outer extremities of the toria and Prince Albert in 1840. It was GILT; SPRINKLED EDGES; TOP EDGE GILT; foldedsectionsofbook,usually usedespeciallyfordevotionaland WHITE EDGES. trimmed and sometimes decorated in theological works. Its principal features edge gilding. See: GILT EDGES. some manner. See: EDGE DECORATION. included thick, heavy, bevelled boards edge gilding machine. A machine, used edging. 1. The beveling of an edge, usu- (occasionally papier-mache was sub- mainly in edition binding, for gilding the ally of a leather covering, but also stituted for wood), which were some- edges of books. The books are placed paper, vellum, etc., by means of an times bevelled only in the middle of in the machine and the edges are pre- EDGING KNIFE. The purpose of "edg- each edge, leaving the corners in full pared for gilding in the usual manner. ing" a leather cover is to prevent the thickness. The books were covered in A sheet of gold foil is placed over the leatherturn-infrombulging,espe- either calfskin of a khaki or brown edges, and heat and pressure are ap- cially at the head and tail of the spine. color or brown morocco and were plied by two heated silicone rubber When applied to paper, the term gen- heavily tooled in blind or black, often rollers. The first roller, which is used erally refers to the process of cutting or with the medieval thin-thick-thin triple in conjunction with a sheet of fiberglass, beveling two pieces of paper so that fillet. The bindings had OXFORD COR- smooths the foil over the edges and there is no high or low spot where they NERS, bright red edges (or gilt over insulates the foil from heat until it is are joined. In craft bookbinding today, red, and sometimes dullgiltedges under pressure. The second roller then edging of paper is more or less obso- which were then GAUFFERED), heavily presses directly onto the foil and seals lete, having been superceded by the use rounded spines and marbled endpapers it to the edges. Large numbers of books of long-fibered Japanese copying paper. in the Dutch pattern. The books were are edge gilded in this manner, particu- 2. See: EDGE ROLLED. sometimes fitted with clasps. While the larly in the Bible publishing business. edging knife. A knife made of hardened bindings were generally well executed, (229, 264) steel and used to pare the edges of the unusually heavy boards frequently edge index. A form of the INDEX con- leather on the flesh side, vellum, paper, caused the cords to break, resulting in sisting of marks on the edges of the etc. See also: PARING KNIFE. (133 ) the text block falling out of the hollow- pages of a book produced by means of edition.1. All of the copies of a work backed "case." Also called "antique," printed rules that run to the edge of the printed from the same type or plates, "monastic,"or"divinity"bindings. sheet (bled) and can thus be seen on either isscd at one time or at inter- (236) the fore edge of the closed book. Edge vals. In the latter case, the edition may &rase leather. A leather which has been indexing has the advantage of being consist of a number of impressions. A crushedorflattenedby mechanical part of the printing process, and also statement of the edition of a book is means so as to giveit a particular allows the use of virtually unlimited often printed on the title page or its grained appearance. See also: GLAcfi. headings, as well as adding nothing to verso, along with the particulars of any (156) the overall cost of binding. Its principal previous editions on the verso. 2. A edge decoration. A general term used disadvantage is that the user does not number of copies of a work printed with reference to the application of know what the mark on the edge refers at any one time, either when the text gold leaf, color, ink, or other medium, to while the book is closed. (234) has undergone changes or the typc nas oi the tooling, painting, or other form edge marbling machine. A machine used been partially or entirely reset, or the of decoration, of one or more edges of for decorating the edges of book in imi- format of the book has been altered. a book. See: ANTIQUE EDGES; CIRCUIT tation of MARBLING. The principle of The term is also applied to the copies EDGES; COLOREL BRUSHED TOP; COLORED operation is somewhat similar to that which made up the original issue, i.e., BURNISHED TOP; COLORED EDGES; of the platen press. The edge of the the "first edition," as well as any sub- COLORED UNDER GILT; FORE-EDGE book is pressed against the printing sequent editions, e.g., 2nd, revised, etc. PAINTING; GAUFFERED EDGES; GILT surface which has been inked by the 3. The embodiment of a work in a EDGES; GILTIN THE ROUND; GILT IN form rollers. Any design, color, or com- particulartypographicalform,with edition binding 86 Edwards of Halifax

different editions embodying an iden- Sewing machines andbooksellers,of whom William tical text, or varying texts. 4. One of Three-knife trimmers Halifax(1723-1808)andhisson the various editions of a . See Tipping machines James (1756-1816) were the most also: EXTRA-ILLUSTRATED; FINE PAPER Triple liner and headbanding machines famous. William Halifax was known COPY; FIRST EDITION; IMPRESSION (5); Wrapping machines (book jacketing for his revival of the FORE-EDGE PAINT- LARGE PAPER COPY; LIBRARy EDITION; machines). ING and ETRUSCAN CALF bindings, the LIMITED EDITION. (12, 69, 156, 234) The progression of modern edition latter, which, if not evolved by William, edition binding. The business of binding binding from purely handwork to a were successfully adopted by him. He identical books in quantity, usually for high degree of mechanization followed also used vellum for covering books, a publisher or distributor, as opposed a course which may be divided into and decorated them with painting of to binding done for an individual and four fairly distinct phases: 1) all proc- portraits or scenes. In order to protect LIBRARY BINDING. Edition binding usu- esses performed by hand or hand- the paintings Halifax developedhis ally involves the production of a type manipulatedtoolsabout1780to own process of rendering the vellum of binding known as case binding, gen- 1830; 2) a simplifying and speeding transparent (although he was by no erally in hard covers. Paperback books up of the processes while the work is means the first to make TRANSPARENT and other books with flexible and semi- still performed largely with hand tools, VELLUM or parchment) by first soak- flexible covers are produced by adhe- a change which was due largely to the ing it in a solution of ash (potas- sive binderies, although adhesive bind- pressuresexertedbytheincreased sium carbonate (1C00O3) )and then ing is by no means unknown in edition speedof printing presses-1830 to subjectingittohighpressure. The binding. 1870; 3) progressive introduction of paintings were executed on the under- The designation "case binding" or machines to handle certain manipula- side of the vellum, which was then "casebound" indicates that the cover tions, e.g., folding, gathering, sewing, lined with white paper before being has two distinct characteristics:itis etc., with the balance of the processes placed on the book. The patent which made separately from the book, and it still being done largely by hand-1870 James Halifax was issued for this proc- consists of rigid or flexible boards cov- to 1910; and 4) the present state in ess (1785) refers to both the painting ered with cloth,paper, leather sub- which the great majority of the proc- of the material, as well as the method stitutes, and, upon occasion, leather or esses are performed by machines, a of making the vellum transparent; how- other materials, in such a manner that phase which marks the complete break- ever, it is not entirely clear whether the the covered material surrounds the out- ing away of the modern industry from patent was granted for rendering the side as well as the edges of the boards. the parent craft of hand bookbinding vellum transparent, for the paintings The major distinguishing character- about 1950 to the present. (58, 89, themselves, or both. Although it was istic of edition binding is the exten- 299, 314, 320, 339) probably for the vellum process, other sive use of semi-automatic and auto- edition deluxe. I. A "special" edition of techniques for rendering vellum (parch- maticequipment,someofwhich work containing items not found in ment) transparent were known more operatesatvery highspeeds.This ordinary editions of the same work, than 200 years before his time. His equipmentiscapable of processing such as additional plates (See: EXTRA technique was obviously successful, as thousands of books in a relatively short ILLUSTRATED), a larger sheet size (See: the colors remain fresh to this day. time, primarily because all of the books LARGE PAPER cony), etc. 2. A so-called Having the painting on the underside of processed in one run are of identical superior edition of a work, character- the vellum also allows the covers to be size and format. Because a large, mod- ized by a better grade of paper (some- cleaned when soiled. ern edition bindery uses as much auto- times handmade), superior , It is known that these bindings were matic (and expensive) equipment as a greater or lesser degree of embellish- being produced atleastas early as possible,editionrunssmallerthan ment, sometimes a better quality of 1781 even though the patent was not about 1,500 copies are not ordinarily binding, and perhaps a limited number issued until 1785. There is considerable handled by edition binderies but by job of copies (which arc sometimes signed evidence to indicate that James Halifax binders and sometimes evenlibrary and numbered ). The "edition deluxe" was a businessman rather than a crafts- binders. is as old as printing itself. In the 15th man, and, since the books were pro- The equipment commonly found in century a certain number of copies of duced in Halifax at a time when James a large edition bindery includes: any high quality book would usually was elsewhere, it is presumed that Wil- Blocking presses be printed on vellum, or colored paper, liam invented the process. Board cutters such as the blue paper copies of Aldus All three specialities seem to have Book jacketing machines Manitius, and "fine paper" copies, at been carried on both in the Edwards' Bundling presses an elevated price, were common in the home town of Halifax, where Thomas Case-making machines 17th and 18th centuries, while large (1762-1834 ), another son. was in busi- Casing-in machines paper copies have been ksued for the ness until 1826, and in London. where Cloth slitting machines past three centuries. Althmigh not nec- James and John (1785-c 1791) opened Cutter-perforating machines essarilyconsidered"editiondeluxe." a book storein1784, and Richard Endpaper-signature stripping machines many thousands of books have been (1768 1827 ) another in 1792. Regard- Endpaper tipping machines specially ( and often elaboratdy ) bound ley, of it..; place of origin, however. any Folding machines for private collectors. 3. A cheap edi- binding ot the period v.hich approxi- Gathering machines tion called -deluxe- or -deluxe mate: any ot the threepeeialities in Glueing-ofT machines tion.- by a publisher tor prornoti,n;d v,c11 the vellum hinding Nipping presses reasons.( 94 ,156 hltie1etturini2picces and key- Rounding and backing machines Edwards of Halifax. A distintiishcd III 17- pattn !tol,itoolinv. in the prevailing Saddle-stitching machines hsh (Yorkshirefamily ot , r; apt to he attrih-

93 egg albumen 87 embossing

uted to Edwards of Halifax. (69, 113, ellagic acid. A crystalline phenolic dilac- of Etienne Delaune. To produce the 140, 236) tone (C14H60s), obtained from oak email en resolle the design is cut into egg albumen. The dried whites of eggs galls and bark and probably formed the surface of the ground and then obtained usually as a yellowish powder, by the hydrolysis of tannin. See also: filled with strips of gold leaf. The de- and used inthefinishingof some VEGETABLE TANNINS. tails of the design are then modeled leathers, as well as for making GLAIR. Elliott, Thomas (active1712-1763). A by very delicate chasing on the sur- (259) London bookbinder,Elliott was ap- face of the leaf. Translucent colored Egyptian marble. A cover marble exe- prenticed to Robert Steele in 1703 and enamels are then floated over specified cuted by coloring the leather covering finished his service in 1712. He became areas of the gold. (347) (before it is attached to the book) with bookbindertoRobertHarley,and emblematical bindings. Appropriate orna- blue, which when dry, is followed by a worked in the HARLEIAN STYLE, which ments or symbolical motifs tooled on coating of glair,then potash water was forced on both him and Chris- a leather binding. Some outstanding (alum). Black is then sprinkled over topher Chapman by either Harley, or examplesofemblematicalbindings the leather, and when the blackis Harley's librarian, Humfrey Wanley. werl produced, especially in France of nearly dry, the leather is washed with The books the two produced were the 16th century. (69) water. (95) solidly bound in a red morocco said embossed. 1. A leaf or leaves of a book E. I. An abbreviation of East India, a to be of an inferior quality. (94, 246) which have had lettersor a design descriptive term applied to crust, vege- Elmendorf test. A standard test for deter- raised in relief for the purpose of indi- table tanned cowhide (kip), butTalo the internal TEARING RESISTANCE catingownership. Theleavesmost hide, or skins such as goat, calf or of paper, named afteritsinventor, commonly treated in this manner are sheep, originating in the Indian Sub- Armin Elmendorf. The Elmendorf test the title page and page 99, or descend- continent and tanned in India, mainly determines the average force in grams ing multiples of I I, i.e., page 88, 77, in the south, and especially around required to tear a single sheet of paper 66,etc. Embossing is more or less Madras. (61) after the tear has been started. In con- obsolete today, as most libraries have eighteen-mo. One-eighteenth of a sheet. ducting the test, one or more sheets come to realize thatitis not only The eighteen-mo is an unusual method are torn through a fixed distance by expensive but largely ineffective as a of imposition resulting in a section of means of a pendulum. The effort ex- means of deterringtheft.2.Paper, 18 leaves, or 36 pages. One method pended in tearing is measured by the leather, cloth, etc., on which a raised of producing it is to fold a sheet con- loss of potential energy of the pen- or depressed designis imparted for certina-wise, followed by an envelope dulum. The scale of the device is cali- decorativeeffects.Seealso: CUIR- fold, followed by a right angle fold. brated to indicate the average force BOUILLI. 3. A design in the covering Although used in hook production be- exerted.If multiple sheets are used, material of a book, usually one covered tween about 1770 and1840,itis which is necessary if the reading for in leather, but sometimes cloth or pa- seldom,ifever,usedin bookwork one sheet would fall below the scale, per, which is in relief. 4. Lettering, or today. It is, however, sometimes used resistance of one sheet is determined a design, which israised above the in advertising work, etc., where the by the formula: surface of the paper of a book. See: folded sheet is to be untrimmed and grams of force X 16 EMBOSSING. 5. See: EMBOSSED LEATHER. remain folded in compact form until = grams required number of sheets (12, 58) unfoldedforreading.Alsowritten to tear one embossed leather. A leather which has 18mo. Also called "octodecimo." sheet, been embossed or printed with a raised elasticity. The capability of a material where 16 is the conversion factor, un- design, either in imitation of the grain to recover from deformation resulting less an augmenting weight is added to pattern of some animal, or even un- from stress. The property is determined the pendulum, in which case the con- related to any natural grain pattern. more by theability of the material version factor becomes 32. Cowhide is frequently embossed to give toreturntoitsinitialshapethan The Elmendorf testerconsistses- the appearance of another leather, in- byitscapacityto be deformed or sentially of a stationary clamp, a mov- cluding MOROCCO. (61) extended.Seealso: EXTENSIBILITY; able clamp carried on a pendulum embosser. 1. The device (usually hand- STRETCH. ( 17) formed by a sector of a circle free to operated but sometimes operated by elasiin. The yellow connective tissue of swing onaballbearing,aknife air pressure) used for raising letters the skin which furnishes structural sup- mounted on a stationary post for start- or a design on the surface of paper, port for the blood vessels, sebaceous ing the tear, means for leveling the usually for purposes of establishing and sudoriferous glands, and the like. instrument,meansforholdingthe ownership. See: EMBOSSED (1 ). 2 The It is woven in the collagen fibers and pendulum in a raised position and for operator of such a device. makes up approximately 0.3% of the releasing it instantaneously, and means embossing.I. The process of raising a structural protein of the hide composi- for registering the maximum arc surface pattern on leather by means tion. (305, 363) through which the pendulum swings of engraved cylinders or plates, gen- electric pen (electric stylus). An electri- when released. (72) erally employing both heat and pres- cally heated instrument used over a email en resolle. A design consisting of sure. The patterns produced are often stripofmetallicfoiltoletterthe enamel and goldinlaidinglassor simulations of the grain patterns of classification number and/or other bi- rock crystal, and which has been used some animal skins but may also be bliographical information on the covers to a very limited extent as a means of unrelated to any natural pattern. One of hooks. (156) decorating the covers of books. The roller or plate,in which the design elephant folio. A large For to (1), ap- technique apparently was used by only isengraved,is made of steel, while proximately 23 by 14 inches in size. one person, a French , who the other, having a softer surface, is See also: BOOK SIZES. (140) based his patterns on the engravings made of cotton or papier-mâché. The embossing plate 88 emulsion

leather is embossed by passing it over make-ready of the press and forcing (rarely)velvet. The floral and ara- a heated, steel cylinder, thermostati- itinto the intaglio areas of the die. besque designs were usually done on cally controlled at a pre-set tempera- 3. To impress the marks of owner- small books bound in satin, but were ture, or in a press, of which there are ship into a page of a book by means doneoccasionallyoncanvasand two basic types: one in which the pres- of a device employing a sunken die velvet. sure is applied by a roller mounted on and a raised counterpart which raises Gold, silver, and silk threads were a moving carriage, and anotherin the design above the paper.See also: used for the best work, and were often which pressure is applied to the platen PERFORATING. (2) protected from wear by bordering or- by mechanical or hydraulic means, 4. To block thetitle,author, or namentation in higher relief formed by but without any lateral movement. In other bibliographical information, on threads of silk wound around closely or both cases the leather is pressed against the cover of a book.See also:BLOCK- loosely with fine flat strips of silver-gilt a heated plate which is either smooth ING (1) . metal. These and other materials were and polished so thattheleatheris 5. See:BLIND BLOCKING. (94, 189, worked singly or twisted together in a ironed, or engraved to impart an arti- 233, 234, 264) variety of manners and worked in a ficialgrain pattern. While the latter embossing plate. A metal plate cut or great number of stitches. At times, par- type of pressis designed to employ etched below its surface and used to ticularly in the later periods, flat metal heavierpressures,thefirsttypeis produce a design in relief on a ma- shapes were stitched on to save time. A superior in that the movement of the terial such as leather or paper. more attractive APPLIQUE WORK tech- roller causes a small amount of slip, embossing press.See:BLOCKING PRESS; nique was to make a spiral of metal which imparts a more lively character EMBOSSING(1,2); FLY EMBOSSING which, when flattened, looked like a to the leather. On the other hand, the PRESS. series of rings, and was sometimes used advantage of the mechanical or hy- embrittlement. 1. The drying and solidifi- as a border. draulic pressisthatitcan dwell at cation of an adhesiveto thepoint Because canvasisgenerallycon- fullpressure, which isdesirable for whereitexhibits fissures and stress sidered to be a relatively uninteresting producing deep effectsin some em- cracks under conditions of low impact. cloth, it was generally worked all over, bossing processes. Embrittlement may also be a condition while when velvet covers were used, It is important that the design em- resulting from the migration of the large areas were not covered, not so bossed in the leather be as permanent adhesive plasticizer into the adherend, much because of the beauty of the as possible. In this regard both the or the solidification and stratification velvet, but because of the difficulties structure of the skin and the type of of a cast adhesive coating due to ex- involved in sewing piled material. Ap- tannage are important. A very full and posure to atmospheric conditions.2. plique decoration overcame this prob- tightstructureisrequired.Calfskin A loss of flexibility, primarily in paper. lem, but when the designs were actually gives the ideal structure for the finer See:BRITTLENESS. (222) worked directly on the velvet they were leathers and cowhide for the coarser. embroidered bindings. Books thatare almost always in heavy gimp or gold Vegetable tannage isfar superior to covered by material embellished with cord. chrome because it builds up the fibers , following a design made The edges of large numbers of em- to a much greater extent and makes specifically for the purpose of dee( rat- broidered bindings were gilt and gauf- the structure correspondingly tighter. ing aparticular book. Embroidered fered (sometimes with the use of color) Embossing of leather is sometimes bindings were and still are produced in keeping with the ornate character (and perhaps frequently) a means of throughout most of the West, but the of the binding. Other forwarding tech- simulatingthegrainpatternofa art reached its highest achievement in niques appear to have been the same superior leather on an inferior and/or England, wherethequality ofthe as for leather bindings, although the less expensive skin. An example of bindings was unsurpassed. The earliest rounding of the spines was less pro- this would be a.alfskin embossed in known English example is of a 13th nounced. The secdons were sewn on imitation of MOROCCO. century manuscript Psalter owned by strips of vellum or thongs, and, while 2. The process of imparting a raised Anne de Felbrigge; however, the art the latter were sometimes left raised, or depressed design in paper:1) by reached its pinnacle of development in frequently they were filled in between passing the paper between an engraved the first half of the 17th century. so as to produce a smooth spine. Later steel roll or plate and another roll or Thedesignsemployedforem- examples were sometimes sewn on plate of a soft or compressible ma- broidered bindings may be conveni- cords, which were raised, sawn-in, filled terial, such as paper or cotton; 2) by ently divided into four classes: heral- in, or flattened to avoid uneveness. pressingthepaper betweenstrong, dic, figure, floral, and arabesque. The Embroidered bindings more or less coarse fabrics; or 3) by passing the heraldic designs were always used to went out of fashion after the17th paper between etched male and female indicateownership, and were most century.SeePLATE Hr. (28, 111, 236, iron or steelrolls. The operation is often found on royal books bound in 280, 342, 357) used to create decorative effects and velvet, rarely on silk or satin, and al- emery. A common, dark, granular corun- is generally applied to book, blotting, most never on canvas. Figure designs dum containing varying amounts of or cover papers. Plate or spot em- may be subdivided into three classes: magnetite or hematite and used in the bossing isa method by which indi- scriptural, such as Solomon, David, form of powder,grains,orlarger vidual designs, as distinguished from etc.;symbolical, suchasfigures of masses,forgrindingandpolishing all-over patterns, are embossed. This faith, hope, and the like; and portraits, purposes. techniqueisaccomplished by means suchas dukes,duchesses,etc. The emulsion. A disperse system in which of verticalpresses,the paper being scriptural designs were generally done both phases are liquids, one of which embossed by placingit between the on canvas, while the symbolical and is generally water or an aqueous solu- embossingdieand thecounter or portraits were mainly on satin, and tion, and the other an oil or other enamel 89 endpapers

water immiscible liquid. The droplets enamel1. An opaque or semi-opaque folded once only to the first and last of the dispersed liquid are known as vitreous composition applied by fusion sections of a book. the inner phase of the emulsion be- to the surface of ametal or other endpapers. The units of two or more cause it appears to be inside the liquid substance for purposes of ornamen- leaves placed in the front and back medium. The surrounding liquid (the tationand/orprotection.Seealso: of a book between its covers and text continuous phase), on the other hand, CHAMP, Oa: BINDINGS; CLOLsONNE. BIND- block. In rare instances the endpaper is called the external phase. The dis- INGS. 2. A term applied to a coated may consist of a single leaf. The end- persion may occur naturally or it may paper or to the coating material on a paper at the front of the hook is called be prepared by mechanical methods paper. the front endpaper, while the one at (dripping or slowly pouring one of the enamelled. Originally, a supercalendered the back is called the off endpaper, or ingredients into the other while stirring printing paper coated on both sides back endpaper. The leaf nearest the vigorously), or developed as a result with a pigment such as satin white or cover (after the WASTE sHEET (1), if of any of several polymerization proc- blanc fixe; today, enamelledis con- any, is removed) is called the PASTE- esses. The liquidinthe continuous sidered to be any coated paper.(17) DOWN, or boardpaper,and,along phase is usually water when the emul- enamelledbindings.See:CHAMPLEvt with the recto of the leaf facing it, sion is designed for pigment coating, BINDINGS; CLO15ONNi: BINDINGs. may be colored, marbled, ornamented; as of paper, for example, or for oil enamelled hide. A vegetable tanned cow- printed with maps, illustrations, scenes penetration, as in the FAILIQUORING hide with a flexible, water repellent, from the book, the motif of the library, of leather. For certain other types of multi-layered coating on the grain side, etc.; or left blank. The leaf or leaves application, the medium may be an built up in a manner somewhat similar that are not pasted to the board are organic liquid. To form a stable emul- to that used for , and sometimes referred toasfly leaves, sion, a third ingredient must be pres- given a grain pattern by means of em- flysheets,freeflyleaves,or waste ent; it is called an emulsifier, or emul- bossing. At one time enamelled hide sheets. sifying agent, and forms absorbed films was a cowhide tanned with bark and In hand binding the basic purpose around the tiny globules of the dis- finished with a mixture of Prussian of the endpapersisto take up the persedfluidtoprevent them from blue (ferric ferrocyanide (KEe(Fe(Isle,))) strain of opening the covers of the coalescing. A common emulsifieris and linseed oil, dried in an oven and book, which would otherwise be on the soap. grained. (61,351) first and last sections or leaves. This A familiar, naturally occurring emul- enamelled seal. Originally, a is of particular importance in the case sion is whole milk, the inner phase of sealskin, tanned with bark or sumac, of the upper cover and first section which consists of globules of butter- and treated with a mixture of Prussian or leaf. The endpapers (specifically the fat;the external phaseisa watery blue (ferric ferrocyanide (KEe(Fe(Nr,))) pastedowns) conr the raw edges of solution of casein, sugar, and other and linseed oil, and dried in an oven the covering material where it is turned substances. Another natural emulsion at high temperature. Today the term over the boards, as well as the inside is egg yolk, which consists ofegg oil refers to an imitation sealskin. See: surfaces of the boards themselves. The inanaqueoussolutioncontaining, ENAMELLED HIDE. (61) freefly leaves protect thefirst and among other substances, albumen and enclosures. Materials left or placed in a lastprinted leaves of the book. In lecithin; the latter is a lipoid (fatlike) book, either accidently or deliberately, addition,theboard papers and fly substance that is one of nature's most and which, unless removed, may cause leaves next to them have long pro- efficient emulsifying agents. Albumen, damage to the paper, binding, or equip- vided a medium for decoration. See: also, is a good emulsifier. ment used in binding, or which may be DOUBLURE (1). Milk and egg yolk are oil in water bound into the volume. Such items in- In library and edition binding, parti- emulsions. A second type of emulsion clude paper clips, bookmarks, catalog- cularly the latter, the endpapers per- is that of water in oil, in which the ing and/or binding instructions, rubber form the crucial function of holding phases are reversed. An example of bands,newspaperclippings,leaves, the text block in its covers, or case. this type of emulsion is butter, which flowers, letters, and the like.(173) In many instances, only the endpapers has aqueous constituents dispersed in end board. See: I OWER COvER. hold the book and case together. In tiny globules throughout the butterfat. end leaf. See: FLY I EAF. library binding, on the other hand, Mostmanufacturedemulsionsare end-leaf paper. A paper manufacturer's where the spine-lining material is con- made by combining the oily ingredient term for the white or colored sheets siderably more substantial than that with a colloidal solution, such as casein of cotton fiber and/or chemical wood used in edition binding, the lining as- or albumen; these are not only good pulp paper in basis weights of 50 to sists considerably in this function. emulsifiers, but also confer desirable 80 pounds (25 X. 38 500),used for The paper used for endpapers is of properties when the emulsion is used the ENDPAPERS of books.Itshould considerable importancenot only the as an adhesive. have sufficient strength to withstand quality of the paper but also the man- Emulsions are generally opaqueor tearing, especiallyat the joint, high ner in which it is used. Its pH should milky because of the refraction and folding strength, resistance to penetra- not be less than that of the paper dispersion of light by the minute drop- tion by adhesives, and a pH between making up the book, and preferably lets, but when dry they become trans- 6.5 and8.5. The sheetsareoften higher, but it should not, in any case, parent, or nearly so. printed with ornamental patterns and be less than 6.5 or more than 8.5. The In addition to their use inpaper specialorsignificantdesigns,e.g., TAMS WEIGHT of the paper should and leather manufacture, emulsions are library motifs.(17) be sufficientsothat when thead- used in edge gilding, gold tooling, and end lining. See: PAsTEDOWN. hesive is applied, the moisture will not other bookbinding operations. (233, endpapering machine. An edition binding cause the paper to cockle, as cockling 235) machine thatglues sheets of paper causes problems when the book is later endpapers 90 end2apers

cased-in. Furthermore, thin paper will it.If the hookiscased and then doubly so when the front and off swell excessively when moist, and then pressed, these buckled areas will cause papers aredifferent, which requires when it dries will shrink and warp the unsightly wrinkles on the board papers. that both he retained.) covers. There is also the danger that When colored endpapers are used, the adhesive will strike through and Marbled endpapers were at one time they should he made with fast colors used extcnsively, hut today theiruse cause the board papers and adjacent so that the moisture of the adhesive is confined almost entirely to a limited leaves to stick together. will not cause the colors to offset onto The grain or machine direction of number of books bound by hand. If the leaves of the book. When end- marbled paper is used, the samepre- the endpapers should be parallel to the papers are lithographed or printed with cautions as to grain direction and color binding margin of the book; otherwise maps or illustrations, they, too, should fastness should be observed. difficulty will be experienced in casing- he printed with an ink that will not The most commonly used style of in. When the grain of the paper is at offset.(It should be noted that when right angles to the binding margin, the endpaper construction, at least in edi- a book with map, or otherwise per- tion binding, consists of nothingmore expansion, of the paper is lengthwise, tinent endpapers, must be rebound, the than folded sheets tipped to the front and, becaUse one edge is secured to endpapers must be carefully removed and hack of the text block. This struc- the text block (either sewn or tipped and rebound with the book, as they ture is not altogether unsatisfactory if to it), that edge cannot expand;con- generally cannot be reusedas end- the hook is to receive careful and little sequently the paper will buckle along papers;thisstepisexpensive,and use, but it is entirely unsatisfactory for

ENDPAPERS linen paste down _ single-section fly leaf endpaper sewing signature fly leaf paste down

paste down /linen waste sheet linen-jointed sewing fly leaf endpaper fly leaf sewing signature Japanese paper

Anen waste sheet paste down flexible sewing _szt flexible fly leaf endpaper ;Alf sewing fly leaf '' Japanese paper signature

book cloth linen waste sheet or buckram nmde paste down blankbook sewing made fly leaf endpaper sewing fly leaf signature

filler card to doublure tape thickness of leather 4. waste sheet leather tifirr) zig-zag with zig-zag flexible fly leaf flexible endpaper sewing ---(e fly leaf sewing I fly leaf fly leaf signature 9 7 endpapers 91 endpapers

a book thatisto be consulted fre- ble, however, this technique will cause papers was done well before the com- quently. Since the endpaper is attached the end sections to open as units rather ing of machine-made paper. This prac- to the text block only by a thin line than as individual leaves. tice however, became more important of adhesive, it pulls loose easily leav- The Library Binding Institute has when machine-madepaperbecame ing only a flimsy spine lining fabric promulgated standardspertainingto prevalent, mainly because early ma- made of crash or gauze holding the the construction of endpapers to be chine-made paper tended to be rela- case to the book. There is no reinforce- used in library binding. The endpaper tively thin, and therefore weak. All of ment of the joint; consequently, the consists of three fundamental parts: these techniques died o It in the 1830s, board paper splits because of the con- apasted-downoroutwardendleaf after which time the more convenient stant bending as the book is opened which becomes the pastedown, at least procedure of making up the endpapers and closed. These lifficulties cLn be two free flyleaves, and a reinforcing separatelyfromthebook became overcome to a certain extent by the fabric. For monographs and ordinary prevalent. Concurrently, it became the use of a cloth joint. Occasionally the periodicals, the paper used in the con- usual practice to simply tip the end- tipped-on endpapers are also sewn to structionof endpaper must have a papers to the sections instead of sewing the text block, as though they were basis weight of 60 pounds (24 X 26 them, not only in regular commercial additional sections. This however, ji st 500) and must meet the following re- binding butalso eveninthe best weakens them even further, because quirements: leather work. the sewing thread passes through only one layer of paper, resulting, in addi- tion to the notmal strain, in a cutting Pc!ding Endurance Tensile Strength Tearing Strength effect of the thread. (M.I.T.)* (Testing Machines, Inc.) (Elmendorf) Cloth-jointed endpapers may ha,,e Number of folds Pounds per I inch strip Pounds per I inch strip eitherconcealedorexposedjoints. With the grain** 200 40 140 Across the grain 275 25 144 With the concealed joint, the fold of * Massachusetts Institute of Technology the endpaper is reinforced by a strip ** In the direction in which the majority of the fibers of a machine-made paperare of cloth which is attached on the side oriented. of the paper next to the text block and the board so that it extends about an inch onto the board paper, thus During the first several centuries of A widely used method of endpaper masking the cloth. The additional stiff- the codex, endpapers consisted of little construction in the 19th century con- ness inthe joint helps to retainits more than two or four leaves of vellum sisted of pasting a folded white to a shape, but it also creates a pull on the folded and sewn along with the sec- folded colored sheet, which was then first few leaves of the first section be- tions of the book. When paper be- folded around the free colored sheet cause it makes the cover more difficult came the common material for book to make a waste sheet. A white fly- to open. production, it then became necessary leaf was then tipped on followed by Separate leaves of paper are used to reinforce the folds of the endpapers. the made endpaper. Another 19th cen- for the board paper and fly leaf in A common type of endpaper, used in tury technique consisted of tipping a constructing the endpaper having an the first part of the 16th century, con- folded white sheet to the text block exposed joint. They are connected by sisted of a fold of white paper em- and inserting the white and colored means of a cloth strip which is visible ploying a strip of vellum for reinforce- made-up leaves inside up to the fold. in the joint. In edition binding, these ment. The use of printer's waste for This provided a waste sheet, a colored endpapers are made on astripping the fly leaves of endpapers was not board paper,a "made" leaf which machine, and the reinforcing cloth is uncommon during the 16th century. opened all the way back to the fold, generallyathin,smoothlyfinished Thepracticeof reinforcing end- and eliminated the drag of the previous muslin. In library binding, on the other papers began to decline at the end of endpaper, and the two flyleaves. A hand, where the visible cloth joint is the 16th ecntury, particularly in com- variation of this technique used today used frequently in adhesive binding, mercial binding, partly because there consistsof pasting the colored and the cloth joint usually consists of a were more small books (where it was white sheets together, tipping a folded strong, durable (cambric) linen. Cloth- thought that reinforcement was not of white sheettothe remaining white jointed endpapers are attached to the great importance), and also because it sheet, and then swinging one of the text block in several ways. The sim- became more and mcre difficult to ob- white sheets around the assembly to plestisto tip them on, which isa tain waste vellum in sufficient quan- serve as a waste sheet. weak method. When the papers have tities, due to the increase production Cloth-joined endpapers were used as a concealed joint, the folded sheet is of books. early as the 1840s but were generally tipped to the section and therein- When bindings were to have plain not sewn in until this century. When forcement is folded around the end- white endpapers,itwas a common they were sewn, the usual method was paper and section. The cloth joint is practice to sew on four leaves at each to overcast them to the first and last sewn to the text block along with the end of the text block. The two outer sections before sewing the book. Inner section. Another method consists of leaves of each endpaper were often joints of leather were used occasionally sewing the cloth joint to the section. pasted together to create a stronger in Europe as long ago as the 17th The clothisthen folded back and paste-down, while the two inner leaves century, especially in France, butit glued over the sewing. The endpaper were sometimespastedtogetherto was not until the second half of the is tipped on, and the cloth is carried create the "made" flyleaf, commonly 18th century that they became rela- over the endpaper and glued down. associated with marbledor colored tively common in thebest English Unless the book paper is quite flexi- endpapers. The doubling of the board morocco and Russia leather bindings.

98 end sheet 92 epoxy resins

The joints of this period, few of which process on paper or other material. all the enzyme into tl'e complex. (72, were sewn in, were frequently used 2. An engraved plate, or the impres- 195, 306, 363) with much wider turn-ins than would sion made from such a plate. 3. An epidermis. A protective,hard-wearing be considered appropriate today, and engraved inscription.4. The process layer of keratinouscells, which, al- were usually heavily decorated with of taking an impression from an en- though of varying thickness over the fillets and tolls, as well as small tools. graved plate. body of the animal, is very thin com- Watered silk endpapers were used entrelacs. A method of decorating bor- pared with the underlying DERMIS. It frequently in fine leather binding dur- ders by means of curving garlands and consists of a continuous mass of cells ing the second half of the 19th century leaves. Their sourceis Muslim ara- usually differentiated into the follow- and up to World War II,but are besques, with early printed specimens ing regions: Stratum corneum, or the seldom used today. Watered silk has adorningtheHistoriaRomanaof uppermost layer, containing dry, dead always been used in conjunction with Appianus, printed by Erhard Ratdolt cells,flattenedto formarelatively leather joints See: DRUMMING ON. See of Augsburg in 1477. In their use in continuous thin outer membrane skin also: I1BRARY STYLE ENDPAPER; MADE book decoration, entrelacs have been that is highly cornified or keratinized; ENDPAPER; ZIG-ZAG ENDPAPER. (13, 69, used by most French gilders since the Stratum lucidutn, which is the region 209, 217, 236, 335, 343) 16th century. See also: COTTAGE STYLE; where dyingcellsarelocated,and end sheet. See: PASTEDOWN. FANFARE STYLE. (140) which contain an oily substance that engine sized. See: BEATER SIZED. environment. The surrounding conditions rendersthemtranslucent;Stratum en gist. See: BRADEL BINDING. orforcesthatinfluenceor change granulosum, in which the cells contain English fibreboard. An English equivalent books or other archival materials, and largegranules;Stratumspinosum, for that called PASTEBOARD (1) in the which include: 1) the entire climatic where the cells show marked spines or United States. It is suitable for small and biotic factors that act upon ma- bfidges between each other; Stratum or medium-sized books; however,it terials and ultimately determine their hasale, where the cells contain living has a tendency to warp if too thin a permanence, or lack of it; or 2) the basalcellscalledkeratinocytes and sheet is used for the covers of a large aggregate of use, misuse, or nonuse melanocytes; and the lowestregion, book. (204) that influence the permanence of ma- the epidermal-dermal junction (often English linen. A highly polished linen terials. See also: DURABILITY; PERMA- called the basement membrane), which cloth of considerable strength and dur- NENT MATERIALS. (148) consists of a thin zone of ground sub- ability;itis reasonably permanent if enzyme. A class of complex organic sub- stance, containing no fibers, lying be- not handled excessively. Also called stances that are capable of acting out- tween the basal cells and the dermal "legal buckram." See also: LAW BUCK- side of living organisms and can ac- surface. RAM. celerate or catalyze specific chemical The epidermal-dermal layer has little English opacity paper. A paper used transformations, such as the formation resistancetobacteria and enzymes, where a lightweight paper of good of bloom on leather, the tanning of and is easily attacked by them, as in opacity is required. It is made from leather (see: BATING), and the modi- enzyme UNHAIRING. Itisalso easily chemical wood pulp and fillersthat ficationof native starchesinsizing disintegrated by alkalis, such as caus- afford maximum opacity, and usually processes. tic soda, sodium sulfide, etc., which is contains mechanical wood pulp.It The ,rate of an enzymatic reaction the basis of common commercial un- hasasmooth machine or English depentts upon thetemperature, pH, hairing processes. finish, and is produced in basis weights substrate concentration, and the pres- The term derives from the Greek ranging from 25 to 45 pounds (25 x ence of activators,co-enzymes, and "epi" (upon) and "dermis," which had 38 500). (17) enzyme inhibitors. The reactionsof itsorigins in the Greek "derin" (to engraved (silver) bindings. Book covers enzymes usually accelerate with an in- flay). See also: LIMING (248, 291, 306, decoratedwithengravedprecious crease of temperature; however, since 363) metals, usually portraying some Bib- enzymes are proteins and are dena- epithelial tissue. The cellular tissue that lical or other religious scene and fre- tured at elevated temperatures, reac- coversallfree surfaces within and quently further adorned with flowers, tion rates increase only to the point without an animal's body, and, in the etc. The medieval custom of enclosing where denaturation overcomes the ac- case of skin, is called epidermal tissue. important liturgical works to be used celerating effect of increasing tempera- The epithelialtissue affords covering atthealterincoversofprecious ture. and general protectionagainst light, metals died outin Western Europe Enzymes exerttheirinfluence by water and other fluids, bacteria, etc. dui Ing the Renaissance, in favor of combining with the substrate to form (363) richly embroidered velvet and (later) an enzyme-substrate complex, which epoxy resins. A class of resins produced gold-tooledleather bindings. The then decomposes to give the products by thepolymerization of epichloro- fashion for silver or filigree, or even and release the enzyme for further ac- hydrin with diphenylolpropane, and enamelled gold covers, however, con- tion. Because of this, the rate at which manufactured from phenol and ace- tinued with devotional books for 1.er- enzyme products are formed depends tone. A range of resins of widely dif- sonal use through the 18th century, both on the concentration of the en- fering molecular weights, e.g., 400 to especially in German-speaking coun- zyme-substrate complex and the rate 6,000, can be produced by varying the tries, Italy, and Spain. (347) of its decomposition. The formation of proportions of reactants, as well as re- engraving. 1. The art or process of pro- the complex depends on mass action action conditions. Epoxy resins possess ducing lettersor designs on wood, between the enzyme and the substrate; exceptionalchem;-alresistanceand metal, or other substances, by means therefore, taking a given quantity of adhesion. They ai t.. usually supplied in of cutting or , for the purpose an enzyme, the complex increases with two parts, which must be mixed be- of printing or blocking by an intaglio the quantity sufficient to convert nearly fore use. Such resins have limited use equivalent weight 93 esters

in conservation work., however, they Parallellinesalsooutlineacenter employed in the United Stmes, mainly are useful where exceptional strength panel. All of the lines, both horizontal because of the cost of transporting the is required, such as in corner rebuild- and vertical, cross near the extreme grass or pulp made from it.In Eng- ing and box making. (235, 309) ends forming squares at the corners land, itis employed principally in the equivalent weight.1. The weight of a of the covers. The central panelis production of better grades of book particular paper of any size expressed usually decorated with a pattern made paper. in teems of some other size. Equiva- up of small, almost touching, tools. and The presence of esparto in paper is lent weights are in direct proportion both borders are similarly decorated determined by the iodine-zinc chloride to the areas of single sheets.If the with a succession of tools; those of test, which stains deep violet, or by weight of a given sizeof paperis the broad inner one often are inter- boiling the specimen in a 1% solution known, the equivalent weight of the rupted with a scroll bearing the name of aniline sulfate. which turns the pa- paper of a different size can be calcu- of the bookbinder. Many bookbinders per pink in the presence of the grass. lated by multiplying the known weight of the latter half of the 15th century Also called "alfa grass," "halfa grass." of the paper by the area of the paper produced these so-called Erfurt bind- and "Spanish grass." See also: ESPARTO required and dividing by the known ings, including CONRADUS 10, ARGEN- PAPER. (17, 143, 198) area of the paper: TINA and JOHANNES FOGEL. (141) esparto paper. A paper produced from ESPARTO (GRASS)pulp, usually ina Weight of paper of which Area of paper of which mixture with a relatively small amount size and weight are known weight is required of chemical wood pulp. Esparto is gen- Equivalent weight erally used in the manufacture of bet- Area of paper of known weight ter grades of printing papers (those containing 90 to 95% esparto, the bal- Thus, the weight of a ream of paper errata (sing. ). Errors or omis- ance being chemical wood). Esparto 25 x 40 inches in the substance of 30 to sions in writing or printing, generally helps provide better formation and a 40 inches, 60 pounds per 500 sheets is: restricted to typographical errors, but good bulk for a given basis weight. The 60 x (25 X 40) sometimes including imperfections in paper takes ink readily, presents mini- (30 x 40) either presswork or binding. They are mum problems with regard to shrink- usually printed on a separate slip or age and stretch. has excellent folding 50 pounds/500 sheets, 25 x 40 inches. leaf and placed among theprelimi- properties, and does not tend to dust 2. In chemistry, equivalent weight naries, or added to an existing page of or fluff during printing. Its major short- is one of the comparative weights of type at the beginning or end of the coming isits low strength. which is different compounds, elements, or radi- book. Errata sheets must frequently due to its relatively short fiber length. cals wh;ch possess the same chemical be tipped in by the library or the (17. 143) value for reaction when compared by binder. (69) esparto wax. A yellowish-white wAx ob- reference to the same standard (usu- esparto (grass). A coarse grass. native to tained from waste liquors in the prep- ally oxygen, i.e.,8). In an acid, the Southern Spain and Northern Africa. aration of ESPARTO (GRASS) pulp. equivalent weight is the quantity which obtained from two species, Lygeum essential oil. A naturally occurring vola- would yield one gram ionic weight of spartum and Stipa tenacissima, and tile hquid, formed in various parts of hydrogen ion (1.008 g.), while in a usedinthe manufacture ofpaper. plantlife,principallyintheleaves, base.itisthe quantity which would Esparto fibers have thick walls and flowers. or fruit. The main constituents yield one gram ionic weight of hy- are short, normally less than 3 mm in aretheterpines,i.e.,hydrocarbons droxylion(17.008g.).Thusan length,withanaveragelengthof which generally havetheempirical equivalentweightofsulfuricacid 1.5 mm. The fiber diameter varies formula C11,H16. and their derivatives. (FL0SO4)isone-halfthemolecular from about 0.135 to 0.015 mm, with They also contain alcohols, aldehydes, weight. and an equivalent of aluminum an average of about 0.012 mm, giving esters, ketones, as well as compounds hydroxide (Al(OH)3) would be one- a length to diameter ratio of 125:1. containing nitrogen and sulfur. Essen- third the molecular weight. (17, 58, The fibers also tend to be curved. One tialoilsarevolatilein steam, have 139, 195) of the principal characteristics of es- characteristic odors, and leave no oily erasibility. That property of a material parto isitshairs, which are located marks on paper. They are virtually in- relating to the ease with which writing on the inner surface of the leaf. Look- solublein water but are solublein or printing can be removed by means ing something like commas, they are alcohol and ether. Many are suscep- of mechanical abrasion, the smooth- commonlyreferredtoas "comma tible to oxidation in the presence of ness and cleanliness of the erased sur- hairs." They are also called tooth cells air or oxygen. They are obtained by face, and the reusability of the erased sincetheyalso somewhat resemble steam uistillation or by extraction. surface. (17) teeth. In addition to the hairs, small esters. Organic compounds formed by Erfurt bindings. A university town in cellswith serrated edges,appearing the union of an acid and an alcohol Central Germany, the name of which something like miniature concertinas, (or a phenol) with the elimination of are present. Both hairs and cells have water. and which during HYDROLysis was applied to 18th century bindings a length of less than about 0.06 mm. featuring a schcrne of decoration in break down to these component parts. The best grade of esparto grassis An ester may also be regarded simply which the entire cover is divided by a known as Spanish, while the cheaper as an organic acid. Esters may be spe- double border which encloses a long. grade (from Africa) is called Tripoli. cifiedeitherbyconstituents(e.g.. narrow panel. The outer border is nar- Introduced in England in 1850 by ethyl silicate may be considered to be row, with a broad inner border sepa- T. Rout ledge, espartois used exten- the silicone ester or ethyl alcohol), or rated from it by several parallel lines sively in Great Britain, but is seldom by the ethyl ester or silicic acid. Esters

uu ether 94 extra account-book binding

are sometimes used to remove fat and species,including many withbark excitation purity. A colorimetric quan- grease stains from paper, and, less fre- rich in tannin. It is believed that only tity used in designating depth of color. quently, to inhibit bookworms. (233, in Australia (to which the trees are expandable cloth. A type of cloth woven 235) indigenous)hasthe bark beenex- with a crinkled cross-thread and used ether. A colorlessliquid((C2H5)20), p7oited on a large scale, and then en- for lining the spines of books, usually with apleasant,characteristic odor. tirely from trees growing in the wild. in edition binding. The cloth expands Itishighiy volatileanditsvapor, One particular bark, called Mallet with the spine during rounding and which isstrongly narcotic, forms an (maletto) bark, obtained from Euca- backing. See also: STEAMSET. (140) explosive mixture with air. It is soluble lyptus astringens, is actually one of the expanding medium. See: MARBI ING SIZE. in water to 7%, soluble in strong sul- world's richest tannin-containing barks, expansion. A change in the dimensions furic and hydrochloric acids, and mis- having a tannin content that is often of a sheet or strip of paper or board ciblewithmanyorganicsolvents. well over 40%, and even as high as resulting from atmospheric changes. Ether is manufactured by passing alco- 52 to 55%. Another tree, mugga, or See also: HYGROEXPANSIVITY. hol vapor intoamixture of 92% red ironbark (E. sideroxylon), which extended. 1. An addition to the inner or alcoholand 67%sulfuricacidat isalso grown commercially in Mo- binding margin of a leaf of a book. 128° C. It may also be produced as a rocco, has bark containing 30 toas This procedure is more often required byproduct in the manufacture of alco- much as 45% tannin. for title leaves, plates, the last leaves hol and ethylene. It is used as a solvent. While the tanning properties of euca- of a book,etc.,than elsewhere,as ethyl acetate. A colorless, volatile, highly lyptus are good, the tannin tends to these are most likely to become de- flammableliquidester(CH3CO2C2 produce leather that is too darkish red tached, frayed, or otherwise damaged. H5), prepared from ethyl alcohol and in color. In addition, Mallet bark is Occasionally, however, if a 'look has acetic acid. It is used as a solvent and low insolublenon-tans(8c,fland to be made up from a narrower copy, isnot dangerously toxicif handled therefore must be mixed with other the narrow leaves may be extended so properly. (54, 235) tannins or acids to induce swelling or that their outer edges are even with ethylene dichloride. A colorless,toxic good plumping; mugga tanninfixes the other leaves. 2. See: EXTRA-ILLUS- liquid (C2H4C10), with an odor much slowly giving a leather that is too soft TRATED. (69) like that of chloroform. It is prepared and also dark red in color. See also: extended cover (extension cover). A term by the vapor- or liquid-phase reaction VEGETABLE TANNINS. ( 175) used in pamphlet binding to indicate of ethylene and chlorine in the pres- Eve style (Eve bindings). A style of dec- coverswhichextendbeyondthe ence of asuitablecatalyst.Itfinds oration executed by the French book- trimmed edges of the leaves, as dis- some use as a solvent and is employed binders, Nicholas Eve (fl 1578-1582), tinguished from CLTT Fl USH. See also: in the manufacture of vinyl chloride and hisson or nephew, Clovis(fl SQUARES; YAPP STYLE. and in the fumigation of books. 1584-1635). They weretheCourt extender.I. In the adhesive industry, a Etruscan calf (Etruscan style). A method binders and booksellers to Henri III, substance,usually one of some ad- of decoratini, calfskin bindings by acid Henri IV, and Louis XIII during the hesive capability, which is mixed into staining, so called because of the con- period in which they flourished. Typi- an adhesive in order to increase the trastingcolors or shades of leather cal designs of their bindings included amount of the adhesive, and also at (light brown or terra cotta) in conjunc- a field powdered with fieur-de-lis, and, times to reduce CRAZING(1 ).2. A tion with dark brown or black tooling. occasionally,acenterpieceof the transparent or semi-transparent chemi- The terra cotta shades and decoration Crucifixion on the Royal Arms, and, cal added in powder form to a print- represent Greek and Etruscan vases. while many bindings in the FANFARE ing ink, either to alter the strength of Etruscan bindings usually have a rec- STYLE have been attributed to them, its color or to improve working prop- tangular panel on each cover, or, oc- for only a few extant fanfares can this erties. (140, 309) casionally, a plain oval with a classical be said with certainty. The Eves were extensibility. The extent to which a ma- urn in the center. They are tooled in among the first bookbinders to con- terial, e.g.. rubber, leather, etc., can be black, surrounded by a border of Greek ceive the pattern on the covers and stretched without breaking. See also: palmate leaves, which are also in black. spine as an integrated unit. Only three STRETCH. (17 ) and withouter borders of classical extant bindings are known to be their extensiontabs. The leather,clothor design (Grecian key or Doric entabla- work. All threeare powdered with paper tabs made to extend from the ture) tooled in gold. The spines are fleurs-de-lis. (132, 140, 154, 169) fore edgcs of the leaves of books, usu- alsodecoratedwithclassicaloraa- exceptional volume. A term used by the ally for indexing purposes. See also: ments. Library Binding Instituteto indicate INDEX TAB. (264) Many 19th century authoritiesat- types of bookssuch as music scores, extra account-book binding. An English tributed this style to John Whitaker: certain art books, periodicals with nar- expressionforaparticularstyleof however, it seems more likely that it row binding margins or stiff paper BLANKBOOK BINDING distinguished by an was the creation of William EDWARDS which require good openability. The overall superior binding structure, in- OE HALIFAX. There appears to be no Institutespecifiesthat such volumes cluding 'he taping of six sections at very conclusive evidenceastothe should be sewn through thefolds: front and back, sewing by hand on origin of the style, but itis known when such sewing is used, any weak webbings, made endpapers with leather that Edwards employed it at an early folds are to be reinforced with bond joints, marbled edges.acalfskin or date, circa 1785. It was popular dur- paper (whichistoo heavy forthis cowhide lining,a drawl-on SPRING- ing the period 1785-1820. (69, 94, 97, type of guarding); loose leaves are to BACK (1) of millboard, split boards, 158, 280) be hinged, and the sewing done on and a calfskin or cowhide covering, Eucalyptus. A tree of the genus Euca- tapes or (sawn-in) cords. The term with Russia bands. See also: BANDING; lyptus, which has some 600 or more applies only to library bind'ng. (209) STATIONERY BINDING. (343)

1 01 extra binder 95 eyeletting extra binder. A somewhat archaic term weave of the fabric and giving a solid inch or fraction thereof in excess of for a craftsman who uses the best ma- color effect. See also: BUCKRAM. (140) the prescribed "normal" thickness. terialsavailableand employsonly extracted bone glue. See: BONE Gum. extra time. An hourly charge imposed ny techniques of forwarding known to be extra gilt. A term sometimes applied to a binder or bindery, in the latter ex- sound. An extra binder often deco- elaborate goldtooling on thespine ample, usually a library binder, for rates his bindings with a design created and covers of a leather binding. excessive repairs, mending, guarding, specificallyfortheparticular book. extra high bulk book paper. A book scoring, etc., beyond the extent con- (156) paper which, in a basis weight of 45 sidered "normal" for the average book. extra binding. A term originally applied pounds (25 )< 38 500), bulks 344 "Extra time" would normally apply to to the binding of books in fun leather, pages or fewer to the inch under a operations involved in sewing a book usually morocco, in which the best ma- pressure of 35 pounds per square inch. through the folds instead of oversew- terialsand workmanship were used (17) ing.It may also apply to ;he repair throughout. The term also implied ex- extra-illustrated. A book illustrated by and/or cleaning of water- or smoke- tra care in finishing and extensive use meansofengravings,varianttitle damaged books, or other unusual and/ of goldtooling. Today the termis pages, and the like, which were not in- or time consuming work. "Extra time" used more loosely and is applied to a cluded in the book by the publisher, is not meant to be applied in cases of book or small lot of books bound with but added later. This additional matter regular work involved in library bind- some special care, with attention not may consist of original drawings, man- ing, e.g., collating. only to utility but to beauty of design uscripts, etc., but it may also consist eyelet. A fastener, made of plastic or and workmanship. (69, 94, 320, 343) of leaves taken from other books. The metal, and used on looseleaf papers, extra calf. An obsolete term applied to added material may be mounted, in- stiff covers, etc.to protect apertures a book covered in a better grade of laid, or trimmed to conform to the size from tearing out where cords, thongs, calfskin in lieu of morocco. of the other leaves of the book. Also or fasteners are inserted. extra check binding. An obsolete term called "Grangerized" (a term derived eyelet crusher. A hand-operated, - applied to a style of binding in which from the vogue begun by the publica- like device used for fastening a rein- the leaves were wire-stitched or stabbed tion of James Granger's Biographical forcing grommet in an eyelet. and bound in full canvas or cloth, or history of England, in 1769, in which eyelet punch. A punch and die used to quarter-boundinleather withcloth Granger had blank leaves included so make eyelets in cloth, leather or paper, sides. (264) that the owner couldinsertdesired generally for hanging purposes. extra cloth. An obsolete term for a su- illustrations). (69) eyeletting. The processofreinforcing perior grade of book cloth, made of extra thick. A term used by library bind- punched holes with plastic or metal a base of cotton, starch-filled on the ersto indicate a book greater than grommets. This work is generally done reverse side and color-filled rather than astatedspecifiedthickness,usually by firms specializing in calendar work, dyed. It was made in bQth a plain fin- 21/2inches. The significance of the and the like. ish and in a variety of patterns, the term is that library binders generally heavycolorcoatingconcealingthe impose an additional charge for each

102 f. 96 fanfare style

f. Abbreviation for feint, which, when drops produced by sprinkling potash applied to ruling, signifies feint ruling, on the marbling size. (153) i.e., the fine, pale horizontal lines ruled fair calf. See: LAW CALF. on a sheet of blankbook paper by fall in. The condition of a book in which means of a ruling machine; vertical the spine has collapsed inward after feint lines would be indicated by d. & some use, usually because of inade- f. (q.v.), or downs and feints. (274) quate or improper rounding, backing, fabric. See: BOOK CLOTH; CLOTH. lining of the spine, or combinations fabric bindings. A general term occasion- thereof. (335) ally applied to a binding having acov- JIL. false back. A somewhat misleading term ering materialconsisting mainlyof applied to a HOLLOW BACK. (115) cloth. Specifically, the term refers to false bands. The imitation raised cords EMBROIDERED BINDINGS. (bands) found on some books. They fabric book cloth. A term sometimesap- previous times. See also: CONTEMPO- consist of narrow strips of leather (or plied to a BOOK CLOTH that has had its RARY BINDING. (2) other material, e.g., vellum) attached reverse side surfaced with a soy-bean facsimile leaf. A leaf (or leaves)pre- directly to the hollow of the cover, or starch, and which is not calendered. pared so as to closely imitate and re- in the case of a tight back binding, di- The starch prevents adhesive penetra- place that missing from a book, usu- rectly to the spine of the book. The tion, while at the same time preserv- ally an older and generally valuable false bands stand out in imitation of ing the natural texture of the fabric. book. a book sewn on raised cords. In Eng- fabrikoid. The trade name for a type of facsimilist. One who restores a book or land, they were introduced as early as pyroxylin-coatedsoot( CLOTH, al- binding in such a manner that it retains the 17th century. C f: HUBS. See also: though itis also at times used in a its contemporary appearance. See also: FLEXIBLE SEWING. (140, 172, 335) general sense. In the early period of CONTEMPORARY BINDING. fancy Dutch marble. A modification of its use, it was often referred to as IMI- fadeometer. An accelerated aging testing the WAVE MARBLE, consisting of red, TATION LEATHER. (196, 264) device which exposes samples of col- black, and any one of a variety of face. 1. That part of a cowhide, between ored materials or coatings to a carbon shades of blue. The red is dropped on the ears and eyes to the nose, exclud- arc to determine their resistance to first, followed by the black in the same ing the cheeks. It is of no use in book- fading. The arc emits an intense actinic proportion but somewhat thicker, and binding, and is actually generallyre- light which in a matter of hours ap- with more ox gall so that it spreads moved before tanning. It is used in the proximates the destructive effect of a and produces larger spots. The blue is manufacture of glue. 2. That part of much longer period of ordinary day- made stillthicker so that withstill a type character that appears in relief iight.Althoughitdoes not exactly more gallit spreads even more than on the printing end of the type and duplicate the effect of prolonged ex- the black. The surface is finished with whichproduces - theimorpssionin posure to natural light,itisstill an more gall and water, which must be printing, blocking, etc. 3. The printing effectiveindicator of the degree of spread more than any of the colors. surface of a plate. 4. A particular de- light stability that can be expected of The surface of the size is then raked sign or style of a of type. See also: a material, and of the comparative re- as for the "wave," and the design is TYPE FACE. (139, 156, 363) sistance to fading of a number of finished with a double comb. (159) faced. A method of folding used for samples. See also: ACCELERATED AGING fancy hand tools. See: UNIT TOOLS. books made up of DUPLEX (I ) paper, TEST. (72, 233) fancy marble. An edge marble produced in which the sheets are folded in such fading. The gradual loss of color ofa by spreading a finely ground vegetable a manner that the same shades face pigment or dye that is chemically un- coloring matter mixed with spirits of each other throughout the volume. It is stable. Unstable dyes or pigments be- wine (a solution of 90% ethyl alcohol a term used mainly with reference to come colorless (or at least less highly in water). The alcohol causes the col- the binding of blankbooks, which are colored) compounds when they under- oring matter to spread in a diversity frequently made up of duplex papers. go chemical reactions upon exposure of forms, which are then transferred (159) to the ultraviolet radiations of natural to the edges of the book. (241) light, and to the oxygen, moisture, and faced cloth. A cloththatisfinished fanfare style. An elaborate style of deco- (coated and glazed) on one side only. other elements of the atmosphere. Dyes ration consisting generally of geomet- As only one side of the cloth used in and pigments subject to these reactions rically formed compartments of v,ary- are generally referred to as FUGITIVE ing sizes, each bounded by a ribbon covering books is visible when on the COLORS. There is no known way of book, most book cloths are "faced," in consisting of a single fille" on one side preventing the fading of unstable col- and a double fillet on the other, each distinction to those in which the cloths ors. (143, 233) are finished on both sides. (261) of which, with the exception of the fair agate. A marble pattern consisting center compartment (which is larger facsimile binding. A bookbinding which principally of black in small widely orotherwisedistinguished),being closely resembles a binding style of spaced spots, supplemented by large filled with leafy spirals, branches of

1 03 fanning out 97 fatliquoring

laurel, and other sprays, floral tools, rare in the last fifty years or so. See practical for the type of leather, or and the like. also: PARTS OF A BOOK. about 45* C.for vegetabletanned Fanfare was a rich and luxurious fast back. See: TIGHT BACK. leather and 60 to 65* C. forfull style and called for the greatest skill fast colors. Those colors which are re- chrome tanned leather. The skins are on the part of the bookbinder. It was sistant to the action of external influ- run in a drum for 30 to 40 minutes. imitated, with varying degrees of fi- ences, such as light, acids, alkalies, etc. After drumming, the leathers are usu- delity, throughout Europe from about In textile dyeing and oti:er industrial ally struck out on the flesh side, care- 1570 until well into the 17th century, processes, fast colors are those which fullysetoutto smooth thegrain, althoughitselementswerelargely will satisfactorily resist fading for the nailed or toggled out flat to dry, or imitative of previous styles of embel- useful life of the product in which they paste dried. lishment. Originally, the style was at- are used. In book cloths, the term re- To allow a small amount of oil to tributed exclusively to Nicholas and fers to nonfading over long exposure be spread uniformly over the very Clovis Eve, but itis more likely that to artificiallight, but not to natural large surface area of the leather fibers, a number of Parisian finishers exe- light. Also called "lightfast," and, in- itis necessary first to dilute the oil. cuted many of these binding. The name appropriately,"sun f ast."Seealso: Although this could be done by means "fanfare," which originated long after FADING; FUGITIVE COLORS. (17, 143, of a solvent, e.g., benzine, itis more thestyle was firstexecuted, derives 233) economical, safer, and more conven- from a binding of the 19th century fatigue failure. The failure of a material, ient to emulsify the oil. In an EMUL- binder, JOSEPH THOUVENIN, who re- such as an adhesive or paper, resulting SION with water, the oil is dispersed in vived the style on a volume he bound from a number of repetitions of load microscopically smalldroplets.Itis in1829,Les FanfaresetCorvées (or strain), e.g., folding or flexing, in important that the drops of oil in ihe abhadesques. See PLATE vi. (69, 158, distinction from CREEP, which is a de- water remain as an emulsion until they 253) formation caused by the continuous penetrate the leather, and not sepa- fanning out (fanout; fan over). The application of load over an extended rate out as large drops or as a layer process of working out the ends of a period of time. (17) of oil, which could not penetrate the pile of sheets for pasting, preparatory fatliquoring. The process of introducing leather fiber and resultin merely a to tipping, or for counting, folding, oil into a skin following tannage but greasy surface layer. etc. Also called "run out," or "running before the leather is dried. In fatliquor- Thepropertiesofthefinished out." (274) ing, which is usually applied to light leather can be varied by controlling fan style. A style of decorating a book leathers, the oil is introduced into the the degree to which the emulsion pene- characteristicofItalianbindingsof leather in such a manner that the in- trates beforeit"breaks," depositing the17th century, and also Scottish dividualfibers of the skinare uni- the oil on the fibers. Relatively shal- bindings of the 18th century (usually formly coated. The actual percentage lowpenetration,whichleavesthe referred to as Scottish "wheel" bind- of oil on the weight of the leather is inner layers of the leather with com- ings). In this style a design in the like- relatively small, being about 3 to 10%. paratively little oil, gives a leather that ness of a fan is tooled on the covers The principal function of fatliquor- has a tight break and is soft and resili- of the book making a full circle in the ing is to influence the degree of fiber ent. On the other hand, if the oil is center of the cover, and often quarter cohesion which takes place before dry- allowed to penetrate uniformly through circles in the corners. It represents a ing. If there were no cohesion what- the leather, the result will be a leather development of center and cornerpiece soever, the skin would separate into that is soft and stretchy, with any nat- bindings. See also: SCOTTISH STYLE. its constituentfibrils,leavingno ural grain looseness accentuated. (156, 334) leather structure. On the other hand, The liquors incorporated into the ifallthe fibrils and fibers cohered, fascicle. Sections of a work which, for leather are called fatliquors, of which the skin would then take the form of there are several types. One of the variousreasons,including theeco- a hard and horny material having no nomics of publishing and the conven- earliest was the soap fatliquor, consist- value as leather. Somewhere between ing of neatsfoot oil and common soap. ience of printing, are issued in install- these two extremes there ments. They are frequently incomplete is an ideal 'When a vegetable-tannedleatheris degree of cohesion for any given pur- drummed insuchafatliquor,the in themselves and do not necessarily pose for which the leather coincide with the formal divisions of isto be slight acidity of the tannage neutral- used. ized the soap, causing fine drops of the publication. They usually consist The fatliquoring process probably of sections, or groups of plates, pro- oil to be deposited on the fibers. The acts to contrul the differential shrink- greater the acidity of the leather, the tected bytemporary (sometimes age of grain versus corium (dermis) printed) wrappers, and may or may more rapidly this occurs, so that the of the leather during drying, thus play- oil may be deposited beforeithas not be numbered or designated as part, ing an important roleincontrolling penetratedsufficiently. fascicle, Consequently, etc.They presentbinding the degree of tightness of BREAK of soap fatliquors are described as having problems, particularly in that they do the leather. In addition, it also influ- poor emulsion stability, and are gen- not necessarily coincide with the di- encesthehandle,drape,flexibility, erally used where a fairly heavy sur- visions of the work, and they must durability, stretch, and water resistance face fatliquoring is required. It is pos- either be bound as odd units or held of leather, and also adds greatly to sible, however, to modify many types until publication or printing has been its strength. These are factors of pri- of oils chemically so that they become completed. Publicatizminparts,or mary importance in leather used for miscible with water without the use fascicles, berr.5P in England in the early covering books. of emulsifying agents. 17th century, become common in the Fatliquoring is usually carried out Sulfated oils are used frequently be- 18th century, and has become relatively in a drum at the highest temperature cause they give good, fine-oil disper-

1 04 fats 98 feeder

sions and are less sensitive to acid than referreto as saponification. Fats are featherweight, while the same grade of soap fatliquors. This results in deeper used iihe tannage of some leathers. paper under the standard bulk is called penetration of the oils into the leather in the . ATLIQUORING Of light leathers, NNTIQUE BOOK PAPER.2. A general before they are deposited. Sulfated oils in leather dressings, etc. See also: FAT term indicating lightweight book paper, are prepared by treating fish, animal, TANNING; WAX. thin opaque writing paper, etc. (17) or vegetable oils with sulfuric acid at fattanning. A processofconverting featherweight book paper. Paper used a temperature of 10 to 20C. The hides and skins into a stable, imputre- mainlyforfiction,especially where resultantproductiswashed witha cible material by means of treatments bulkiness is desired for a given number strong brine solution to remove excess involving the incorporation of soft ani- of leaves. The standard basis weights acid. The saltis necessary to prevent malfatswhichundergochemical range from 50 to 80 pounds (25 X 38 the sulfated oil from emulsifying with changes while in contact with the fibers 500). In England, such papers are the water. Soda ash is then added to of the skin, leading to the fixation of made largely from ESPARTO (GRASS). form the sodium salt of the sulfated fatty matter. See also: OIL TANNING. Featherweight book papers are porous oil and to neutralize the last traces of (61) and difficult to handle. (17, 140) the acid. The more the oil is sulfated. fatty acids. Monobasic acids which con- feather work. A style of decoration, origi- which is to say, the more sulfuric acid tain only carbon, hydrogen, and oxy- nally used on Irish bindings of the 18th that has been fixed, the greater will be gen. They consist of an alkyl radical century, emphasizing curved lines prob- its stability to acid and the more thor- attached to the carboxyl group, and ably made with a gouge, which radiate ough its penetration into the leather. when saturated have the general for- outward from a central point producing Conversely, the more acid the leather, mula (CH002). Formic and acetic adelicate and very richfeatherlike the less the penetration. However, in- acids are the two lowest members of pattern. (156) creasing the amount of sulfation or this saturated series. Unsaturated fatty feeder. An apparatus for feeding paper water miscibility, decreases the "oili- acids follow several series, including: into a , ruling machine or ness" of the oil and therefore its lubri- 1) the oleic acid series (CH211 n0o); folding machine, gathered sections into cating powers. 2) the linoleic acid series (CH2 100): a sewing machine, sewn books into a Sulfonated oils are prepared by a and3)thelinolenicacidseries casing-in machine, etc. It may also be similarprocess, usuallyata higher 1300).Therearealsoother the device on automatically fed ma- temperature; the fatliquor contains the naturally occurring fattyacidsthat chines performing the same function. sulfonic group which gives greater sta- are found in nature mainly asgly- The first feeders moved the sheet for- bility and emulsions which penetrate cerides, which constitute the most im- ward and adjusted it, while the sheets deeper into the leather under acid con- portant part of the fats and oils, and in the pile were still separated by hand. ditions. as estersof other alcohols and the From this early"semi-automatic" Stillanother method of obtaining waxes. feeder, which still exists in numerous emulsifyingpropertiesistosulfite faulty margin. An unequal margin, one machines, particularly in library bind- the oil. In this process, the oil is mixed generallyresultingfromimperfect ing, the modern completely automatic well with a strong solution of sodium REGISTER (3). Such a margin may re- feeders were developed. bisulfite (NaHS03), while the mixture sult in part of the printed matter being Three classes of automatic feeders is thoroughly aerated by means of com- obscured by oversewing, or cropped are in general use: 1) the pile feeder, pressed air. Sulfited oils behave in a unintentionally during trimming. (156) which operates by means of a jet of air manner similar to sulfatedoils, but feather edge. The finely pared edge of a which raises the sheet and bringsit are usually said to be more acid stable piece of leather, or a thin, rough edge, into contact witha sunction wheel and to afford deeper lubrication. such as deckle edge. See also: EDGING which moves it forward into the feed In addition to the emulsifying ele- (1). (256) table. As the sheets feed off the top ment of the fatliquor, a raw oil, such feathering.I.See: EDGING (1).2. A of thepile,the entire pileisraised as mineral, castor, neatsfoot, cod or printing fault seen as the spreading or to keep the top sheet always at the coconut oilis frequently included in feathering of the ink outside the print- same level. Some pile feeders separate the formulation. See also: CURRYING; ing area and generally along the di- the sheets by means of push fingers STUFFING (2). (248, 275, 291, 306, rection in which the fibers lie. It may that buckle up the corners of the paper 361, 363) be a result of excess solvent in the ink, and move it forward one sheet at a fats. The esters of fatty acids with gly- an unsuitable paper, or both. (156) time; 2) the continuous feeder, which cerol. They are generally insoluble in feather ornament. An engraved finishing uses hands of webbing to carry the water and are not very soluble in cold tool resembling a feather. It is found sheets which are previously fanned out alcohol. They are soluble in hot alco- mainly on clasps and catches, but also and placed on the feeder. The bands hol, as well as ether, acetone, carbon at times, in the form of a tool used carry the sheets around a roller and up disulfide,chloroform,carbontetra- in decorating leather bindings. (250) to the feed wheels where a combing chloride, benzene,as wellasother feather stitch. An embroidery stitch con- wheel advances the top sheet to a guide. organic solvents. Fats may be hydro- sisting of a line of diagonal blanket At the correct moment, the guide drops lized to glycerol and fatty acids by stitches worked alternately to the left and another wheel drops on the edge boiling them with acids and alkalies, and right. (111) of the paper and carriesitforward. by superheated steam, and by the ac- featherweight.I.Papers which are ex- Some continuous feeders use an air jet tion of certain enzymes, notably the tremely lightin proportion totheir and suction wheel to advance the sheets; lipases. When alkaliesare used for bulk.Pureespartopapersarethe 3) the friction feeder, which operates hydrolysis,thefattyacidscombine bulkiest, but are difficult to handle, as in a manner similar to the continuous, with the alkali to form soap; there- they are soft and spongy. Paper of expect that the sheets are not carried fore, alkaline hydrolysis is sometimes standardbulkoraboveistermed around a roller; in this case each new

1 05 feel 99 fiber

lift of paper must be slipped under the keted under a number of trade names. useresultedinseveredeterioration edge of the previous lift.(278, 320, ( 81 ) of the leather in most cases. It was also 339) felling. The process of intermingling the used in the execution of the JAPAN feel. The qualities or properties of tex- fibers during the manufacture of paper, MARBLE. II is Sometimes used today in ture,finish,hulk, grain, smoothness, either on the wire of the machine, or dyeing or finishing with dyewoods to suppleness, stretchiness, soitness, etc., on the mold when making paper by impart a blue-black shade to leather, of leather, paper, cloth, etc., as judged hand. in the manufacture of writing inks, and by the sense of touch. Although purely felt side. The side of a sheet of paper inengraving andlithography.Also subjective in nature, "feel" is nonthe- that has not been in contact with the called "copperas," or "green vitriol." less one of the properties by which Fourdrinier wire, and which therefore (237) leather and paper are judged.(139, is the smooth side of the sheet rather festoon drying. A method of air drying 248) than the WIRE SIDE. The felt side is paper. The paperis hung in loops felt. I. The blanket of absorbent material, considered to be the "top" of the sheet. (festoons)overrodswhich move e.g., wool, placed between sheets of (42. 365) slowly through a drying chamber in handmade paper that have just been re- fence.I. The movable guide attachment which the temperature and humidity moved from the mold. The purpose of of a card or board cutter that controls are controlled. This type of drying is the felt is to absorb water from the wet the location and extent of the cut.See used for paper that has been tub sized sheets.See also:COUCH ( I, 2). 2. A also: BACK GAUGE.2. The thin cards or coated. (5, 17) continuousbeltonapapermaking placed betweentheboards andfly fiber.1. A small, slender tube which is machine, generally made of wool, but leaves of a book to prevent marking the unit cell of vegetable growth and also as a combination of wool, cotton, by the turn-ins or tongue of the split the basic unit of paper pulps. Fibers asbestos, and synthetic fibers. Felts per- hoards when pressing, andalso,in are sometimes considered to be of two form the function of mechanical con- hooks having excessive swell after sew- classes, i.e., hast and wood, but they veyors or transmission belts, provide a ing,tofacilitatesmashingwithout are more appropriately designated by cushion between the pressrolls, and "throwing out" the sections at the spine. reference tothetissue or region in serve as a medium for the removal of See also: PRESSING TINS (2). 3.An which they occur. e.g., cortical fibers, water from the wet web. 3. The blanket endpaper of a blankbook. (145, 256, per;cyclic fibers, phloem fibers, wood of a printing press used to soften the 276) fibers, leaf fibers, etc. Other types of impression. 4. The inside lining found fenders.See:FENCE (2);PRESSING TINS fiber, such as mineral, animal and syn- in some book boxes. 5. A cloth pro- (2). thetic, are also used to a certain extent duced from matted fibers of wool, or Ferrar, Nicholas (1592-1637). One of the in paper manufacture. wool and fur or hair, and made into a more interesting figures in the history The longest natural fibers normally compact material by compression, usu- of English bookbinding. Ferrar and his encountered in papers are about one ally while wet (17, 274) relative, John Collet (as well as Collet's fourth of an inch in length and the felted.1. A term sometimes applied to wife and 14 children), and Ferrar's shortest about one-sixteenth of an inch. the characteristic of firmness or solidity mother,establishedasemi-religious Fibers are generally about 100 times of a hook that has been heavily pressed community called the English Protes- longer than they are wide, although several times during the course of bind- tant Nunnery, atLittle Gidding, in some fibers, such as cotton, have a ing, thus compacting the leaves. 2.See: Huntingdonshire, in about 1625. Ferrar length to diameter ratio of more than FELTING. (343) employed a bookbinder, who taught 1,000 to 1. The walls of all fibers are feltedfibers. A material usedinthe the family the craft, as well as gilding composedofsmallstrandscalled manufacture of book-cloth substitutes, and the so-called pasting-printing by FIBRILS. Chemically the fibrils are com- as a basis for imitation leathers, and in means of a rolling press. The members posed of a number of cellulose chains. lieu of spine lining fabric in edition of the community produced there- Other chemical components in fibers binding. It consists of synthetic fibers markable "Harmonies" of the Scrip- other than cellulose include hemicellu- felted together into sheets and lami- tures, one of which was produced by loses and lignin. nated to impart strength. One of these Mary Collet for King Charles I. Some The physical properties of length, fiber-bonded fabrics is made from re- of their bindings were in gold-tooled diameter, wallthickness, and FINES genrated cellulose, the finished product leather, some were in velvet which had content are the most significant in de- being reasonably strong and durable. a considerable amount of gold tooling, termining the characteristics of paper Itisimpregnatedwithappropriate and one was in red parchment with the made from natural fibers. The approxi- fillers for use as a substitute for book center and corners of each cover orna- mate relationships between fiber char- cloth and leather. Untreated, the mate- mented with pieces of white parchment, acteristics and paper properties are: rial is much cheaper than spine lining pierced and gilded, Some of the em- fabric and stronger than paper. Some broidered bindings of this period have edition binders use theparallel laid also been attributed to the so-called bonded fiber fabric to form the joint nuns of Little Gidding. (50, 205) between the case and text block. As a ferroussulfate. An astringentsalt book-covering material, this substitute (FeSO4), usually obtained in the form is said to be easy to work and block, of the pale green efflorescent, crystal- but most are aesthetically unappealing, line heptahydrate (FeSo4 7H20) as lacking the texture and appearance of a byproduct, and used extensively in substance of cloth and buckram. They the 19th century in the production of aredecidedly inferiortoleatherin SPRINKLED CALF, MOTTLED CALF, and virtually every respect. They are mar- TREE CALF bindings. Unfortunately, its

lUG fiber boards 100 filler

make up the structure of fibers of cer- Property of the Paper: Increased by: Decreased hy: tainnatural and synthetic materials tensile strength long fiber large diameter and which are considered to be made stretch long fiber thick cell wall up ultimately of long-chain molecules tearing resistance long fiber, thick oriented in a bundle in one direction. cell wall In vegetable fibers they are the thread- folding endurance long fiber thick cell wall like elements of the wall of the native opacity thick cell wall, long fiber high fines content cellulose fiber, consisting of still finer bulk long fiber, thick microscopicmicrofibrils.Inanimal cell wall fibers they are the long proteinaceous porosity long fiber, thick large diameter filaments consisting of bundles of sub- cell wall microscopic micelles, which in turn are formation thick cell wall, long fiber made up of very long molecules of high fines, large collagen twisted together. Fibrils are diameter the smallest physical unit encountered infibers;atthis point the physical area ends and the chemical area begins. The chemicalcharacteristicsalso teinaceous fibers make up the principal (17, 291, 363) have a significant effect on the proper- constituent of COLLAGEN. (18, 72, 323, fibroblasts. Cellular structures which are ties of the paper. The length of the 363) thought to participate in the formation CELLULOSE CHAIN, for example, which fiber boards. I. Pressing boards made up of the fibers of connective tissue in ani- is the basic unit in a fiber, contributes of laminated sheets of heavily pressed mals, i.e., FIBRILS, and which may also greatly to the strength of the fiber. If fiber. 2. Pressing boards made of hard be responsible for the formation of these chains are naturallyshort, or wood that have flanges of hard pressed ground substance. (26, 248, 291, 363) have been shortened either by chemical fiber instead of brass or other metal. fiddle stitching (fiddling). A term applied or mechanical treatment or influences, fiber composition. The various types of somewhat inaccurately to a method of the strength of the fibers will be nat- fibers making up a sheet of paper or lacing, rather than stitching, executed urally lower or else reduced: therefore board, generally expressed in percen- by winding thread or cordinand the paper will be weaker. In addition, tages. Fiber physiology and various around v-shaped cleats of slots sawn at the paper loses strengthif the cellu- staining methods are generally used to regular intervals in the spine of the lose chains are shortened due to chemi- determine fiber composition. (17) gathered sections. See also: SMYTH- cal action subsequent to manufacture fiberize. A process used to reduce wood CLEAT SEWING. (12, 81) of the paper. chips, reclaimed paper stock, dry broke, filigree doublures. A DOUBLURE (1) con- Paper pulpsthat containahigh and other papermaking fibrous mate- sisting of ornamental openwork of an degree of hemicelluloses are easy tc rials to individual fibers. The equip- intricate design, frequently of hairlike refine, have good bonding strength and ment used for this includes disc mills, arabesques,intricate backgrounds of lowtearingresistance,andgood conicalrefiners,etc.Sometimes the flowering vines with delicate spiraling RATTLE. Excessive bleaching ofthe materials are first softened with water stems, cut from leather and laid over fibrousstock,especially when done or steam, or by chemical treatment a contrasting background. See also: with strong caustic extractions, results before the mechanical action. (17, 98) ONLAY. (347) inremovalofhemicelluloses. The fiber orientation. The direction in which fill(fill in; filling).1. The heavy paper fibers then have greater flexibility but the greater proportion of the fibers of pasted to the insides of the boards do not bond together effectively,re- a paper have their larger dimension, within the edges of the turn-ins. See sultingina paper thatissoft and which is their length. Handmade papers also: FILLING IN (1). 2. The paper used absorbent. have theleast degree of lengthwise to fill out albums bound with stubs so Unbleached paper pulps tend to con- orientation due to the multiple shaking as to make the book of equal thickness tain more ligninthanisfoundin of the mold when it is lifted from the from fore edge to spine for purposes bleached pulps. The presence of lignin vat, which causes the fibers to settle of trimming, casing-in, etc. 3. The ma- results in stiffer, tougher fibers Which in various directions. Machine-made terial used to fill a fabric. See: BOOK do not collapse against each other very papers have the greater proportion of CLOTH; BUCKRAM 4. See: FENCE (2). well, resulting in fewer interfiber bonds their fibers oriented in the longer or 5. See: SPINE LINING (I). 6. See: LOAD- beingformedduringmanufacture. MACHINE DIRECTION of the paper; how- ING (2). 7 . See: WEFT. (274), 341) Bleached fibers, on the other hand, ever, some Fourdrinier papermaking filled. A Boot( CLOTH treated witha conform better and afford greater con- machines are equipped with shaking chemical compound which fills the in- tactbetwenfibers,resultingina wires that cause more fibers to shift terstices and/or covers the fibers of the stronger paper. While bleached fibers away from the direction of movement fabric to give it body, color or other conform better than unbleached, im- of the wire. (157, 320) desirable physical or chemical charac- proper bleaching may result in the loss fibrilae. See: FIBRILS. teristics. (102) of hemicelluloses and damage to the fibrillation. The process of loosening the filler.1. A material, such asacryllic, cellulose chains. threadlike elements known as FIBRILS starch or pyroxylin, used tofillthe 2. The complex proteinaceous struc- from the wall of the fiber, thus pro- interstices of a base fabric. The prin- ture, composed of ropelike bundles of viding greater surface area for the for- cipalcharacteristicsdesiredinclude fibrils organized in long, wavy bundles mation of fiber-to-fiberbonds. Also cheapness, flexibility, water resistance, that vary in diameter from approxi- called "brushing out" (17, 98) durability, printability, mold and fungi mately 1 to 20 microns. These pro- fibrils. The fine, threadlike elements that resistance, and resistance to insects and filler clay 101 finish

other vermin. See also: BOOK CLOTH; on the circumference. See also: FILL ET balance of the edition, which is printed BUCKRAM. 2.Usually, a non-fibrous (1). (264) on ordinary paper. material added to the fiber furnish of filling.See:WEFT; PADDING (1). fine red. A marbling color used before paper. The major characteristics de- fillingin.1. The operation of pasting the introduction of synthetic dyestuffs, sired include cheapness, opacity. print- heavy paper to the insides of the boards and prepared by boiling Brazil dust, ability,color, and flatness. See also: of a book within the turn-ins of the nutgalls, alum, sal ammoniac (ammo- I OADING (2). 3. The inner ply or plies covering material. The purpose of fill- nium chloride )and hydrochloric acid of a board made up of multiple layers. ing inis to prevent the thickness of in water, or by dissolving Brazil wood 4. An ornamented outline or border in theturn-insfrombeingnoticeable in hydrochloric acid. (97) gold or color. 5. A relatively nonad- under the board papers. Filling in is fines. The N e ry short fibers or fiber frag- hesive substance, such as clay, diato- done only in craft bookbinding. 2. A ments and ray cells. Both types are maceous earth, walnut shell flour, etc.. faultinblocking,printing,etc.,in very short, consequently they reduce used to extend an adhesive or to pro- which the spaces in types, or the spaces the strength of the paper. The fines vide increased bulk, and/or to improve between the dots of a halftone block, from broken fibers have thicker cell its working properties. strength. per- fill with gold. coloring, or ink. In block- walls and larger diameters than those manence, or other characteristics. See ing it may he caused by worn or dam- from ray cells, which leads to differ- also: BINDER (4); EXTENDER (1). 6. aged type, or by a type holder that is ences in the final sheet depending upon See:PADDING (1). (17. 42. 222, 309, too hot; in printing, it may he caused which types are present. Sometimes also 350) by too much ink, or an ink that is un- called "flour" or "wood flour." (42) filler clay. A type of ci AY incorporated suitable for the job, by the form being finish. 1. The degree of brilliance, pliabil- into the papermaking furnish before too high, the rolletS. being set incor- ityand working qualitiesofcloth, sheet formation. Its purpose isto fill rectly, or by the use of an unsuitable leather, or paper. 2. To letter and/or the voids between the paper fibers so paper, especially one which fluffs. (92, decorate a book. See: FINISHING.3. astoimproveprintability,opacity, 156, 161, 335) the surface properties of a sheet of brightness.etc.Filler clays, such as film forming. That property of an adhe- paper as determined byitssurface KAOLIN. may be of a larger particle sive which enables it to cast a continu- contour, gloss, and general appearance. size than those clays used as COATING ous dimensionallystablefilm.Film It is a property which is usually deter- CI AY. (17) formingalsoreferstotherelative mined visually.In uncoated printing fillet.1. A wheel-shaped finishing tool strength of the cast adhesive film. Ad- papers, there arefive major finishes having one or more raised bands on hesives with good film forming charac- recognized under the general terminol- its circumference. It is used to impress teristics are those which tend to deposit ogy of machine-finish papers; in order a line or parallel lines on the covering more uniform films of high structural of decreasing degree of smoothness, material of a hook, usually one hound strength. (222) they are:, English, machine, vellum, in leather. The lines may he continu- fine paper copy. A book printed on paper eggshell, and antique. For papers of ous or the fillets may have a wedge- of a superior quality (wbich often hut higherfinish,see: SUPERCALENDER shaped gap inthe circumference to not always is larger in size) than the finish. Writing papers, including bonds, facilitate starting and stopping lines and also to enable lines to be joined evenly at corners. FILLET It is not known when the fillet first came into use. Bindings of the 12th century, and even earlier, have im- pressedlinesthatcould have been made with a fillet, hut they may also have been impressed with a pallet, or similar tool, dragged across the leather rather than rolled. It is argued that it probably did not precede the roll, which was introduced in about 1470. by any great length of time, because once a wheel-typetoolwasintroduced,it would soon be patterned. Itis some- times called a "roulette" in the United States. 2. The plain line or lines impressed on a book cover. The so-called French fillet is a triple fillet (always in gold) having unevenly spaced lines. (69, 161. 172, 236, 335) fillet pad. A mechanical device which un- winds ribbon gold (leaf) when gilding by means of a fillet or roll. (264) fillet rolls. Finishing tools consisting of double single brass rolls approximately 31/2to 41/2 inches in diameter, with 1, 2, or 3 lines

1 08 finish break 102 first edition

ledges,and manilas,generally have smooth flat surface for the metal. In type came into use in the 1880s. This finishes called cockle, glazed, machine, addition to making it possible to exe- new pressconsistedof twosmall supercalendered,andvellum. 'The cute extremely difficult patterns with- cheeks,somewhatlikerounded-off finishes used for cover paper include out making errors on the leather itself, backing boards, which moved on joints. antique,machine,plate,supercalen- the use of a paper pattern eliminates (161 ) Jered,andvellum.Theprincipal the necessity of making basic guide finishing stand. 1. A revolving stand con- finishes for bristols are antique, egg- lines in blind upon which the design sisting of a flat, circular hoard, covered shell, plate, and vellum. (17, 72) is then built, and which almost invari- with a soft, smooth material, mounted finish break. A CRUSTY BREAK of a leather ably show beyond the tooling.Itis on another hoard. The lower board is one which can he attributed to im- uncertain when paper patterns were stationary and rests on rubber knobs proper finishing. introduced, but they probably were not which are attached to its lower surface finisher. 1. The bookbinder or gilder who used much before 1830. to raiseit and prevent slipping. Ball performs the processes of polishing the Notallleatherscanbetooled bearings between the two boards allow leather,lettering,andembellishing, successfully. Aside from the great diffi- the top one to revolve easily,thus which are carried out on a hand-hound culty encountered in tooling chrome- making it possible to shift the position hook subsequenttoforwarding.In tanned leathers, only those vegetable- of the book with minimum effort. 2. A France, itis not unusual for the two tanned(ortawed) leatherswith stand with a sliding shelf and an arm operationsi.e., forwarding and finish- surfaces firm enough to hold a line. clamp which can he attached to the ingto he performed by different per- such as goatskin, calfskin, pigskin, etc.. bench to hold a hook while finishing. sons; in England and the United States, aresuitable. With the exception of See also: FINISHING PRESS. (264) on the other hand, the two are usually sheepskin, leathers that are loose and finishing stove. A small stove used for done by the same craftsman. except in stretchy do not retain impressions very heating finishing and lettering tools. commercial hand binding. 2, A ma- well. Such stoves generally have a circular chine used to apply varnish, lacquer, Library bindings are seldom "fin- plate in the center which is heated. or other fluid to covering materials by ished"toany greater degreethan and an outer notched ring to support means of a spray or roller, or a print- lettering of the spine, although gold the handles of the tools. Modern finish- ing or blocking plate. 3. A term some- lines and/or symbols are sometimes ing stoves are heated by gas or elec- timesappliedtoflatorcylindrical blocked on the spine. Edition bindings tricity, and some are controlled by a polishing tools, e.g., a EURNISHER (2). vary widely in the degree of their or- thermostat. (158, 173) namentation. Whatever ornamentation While little is known of the form of finishing. 1. The art or process of polish- they may haveisusually done by early finishing stoves, many different ing,lettering,andembellishingthe means of blocking or printing. Which- types were probably used, because they spine, covers, insides of the covers, and ever the case, they are "finished" only were frequently fabricated according to sometimes the edges of a book, as well in the very broadest sense of the term. the bookbinder's own specifications. A as inlaying, onlaying, varnishing, and See also: BLOCKING (1); GOLD BLOCK- great variety were in use during the otherwise decorating and/or protecting ING; INLAY (4); ONLAY; POLISHING. early years of the 19th century, all of the finished hookhinding. 2. The various operations in paper which burned charcoal or coke, as they The purpose of finishing is to iden- manufacture performed after it leaves must have done for centuries. The gas- tify (letter) and beautify the book, but, the papermaking machine. Finishing heated stove was probably introduced at least in the latter case, in such a operationsincludesupercalendering, in the 1830s, while the electric stove manner as not to interfere with the plating,slitting,rewinding,sheeting, has been in use since the early part of strength of the binding. The degree of trimming, sorting, counting, and pack- the 20th century. (130, 161, 236, 335) finishing depends upon the nature of the aging. Ruling, punching, pasting, fold- finishingtools.See: BAND PALLET; book, the craftsmarship of the binder ing and embossing are also at times CIRCLES; CREASER (2); FILLET (1); or finisher (gilder, as he is traditionally considered to be paper finishing opera- GOUGE; HAND LETTERS; PALLET (1); called), whether another craftsman did tions. POLISHER; ROLL (1); STAMP (1); UNIT theforwarding,and,attimes,the 3. The processes in leather manufac- TOOLS. wishes of the customer. ture following tannage, including shav- firmness of leather. That property of a Finishing has assumed a very impor- ing or splitting. dyeing, fatliquoring, leather reflected in the force required tant role in the craft of bookbinding setting out, drying, staking, finishing to bend a standardstripof heavy since the earliest times. Almost all early or seasoning, glazing (or plating or leather through an arc of given radius finishing,at least in Europe, was in embossing), and measuring. (118, 130, of curvature, so that the grain surface blind until the latter half of the 15th 161,172,194, 236, 320, 335, 343, of the leather forms an arc of a circle century,when GOLD TOOLINGwas 363) of given radius. (363) introduced into Italy. See also: BLIND finishing press. A small press consisting first binding. The original binding of a TOOLING. essentially of two wooden cheeks, con- library book. The term is not generall:, In modern finishing,allhutthe nected by a screw at each end, with used with reference to the binding of simplest designs are measured out and handles for turning. A press pin is not serial publications, but to the binding drawn or tooled on thin paper. This is required for this type of press. The of pamphlets in self covers, paperback then positioned on the cover and heated finishing press is similar to the cutting- hooks, sewn books in temporary covers, tools are pressed through. The paper or lying-press, but is smaller and gen- or hooks in gatherings. (129) is then removed, and the blind impres- erally has no runners. It came into use first edition. The entire number of copies sions are again blinded-in.This as long ago as the early 19th century, of a book or other publication printed sharpens and deepens the impressions, and no basic changes were made in this from the same setting of type. The and, if gold is to be used, provides a basic press until a completely different hooks may be printed at any time. A first impression 103 fleshing

new edition does not come into being of colored paper, placed so as to pro- of years. The bast fiber is about 25 mm untiltherehavebeensubstantial trude from between the leaves of a long and approximately 0.02 mm thick, changes in the type, i.e., a corrected book. Its purpose is either to show the giving it a length to diameter ratio of edition, additions to the text (which is position of the book on the shelf, or to about 1,250:1. Itis thinner than the a revised edition), or until the type indicate that the leaf marked (or the cotton fiber and its tube has thicker has been reset, which would be a new entire book) requires special attention. walls. It is also stiffer and stronger than edition, 2nd edition, etc. (69, 156) 2. A slip placed in the center of each cotton, has a rounded section and is first impression. 1. The initial application section to facilitate sewing of the head- knotted at intervals along its length. of a finishing tool or hand letter to the band. (139, 173) Linen rags, cuttings, thread, etc., have covering material of a book. 2. All of flaking. The separating of the coating ma- long been used in the manufacture of the copies of a book printed during the terial from a coated sheet of paper or paper.See also:BOOK CLOTH; SEWING first printing operation and before any cloth, appearing in the form of flakes. THREAD. (17, 143) alterations or additions are made. Sub- Art paper and the cheaper grades of flaying. The process of removing the hide sequent printings following thefirst, coated cloth are particularly subject to or skin from an animal carcass. Flay- producing reprints, are called "second this problem. (17) ing is normally the job of the butcher, impression,""thirdimpression,"etc. flange. The projection on either side of and, in general, the methods used in (140) the spine of a text block that has been flaying give first priority to producing first Hning. The initial strip of material rounded and backed. It is commonly, a good quality carcass, not hide, as the attached to the spine of a book subse- and more accurately, referred to as the animal is generally slaughtered for its quent to rounding and backing. In edi- SHOULDER (1). (12, 256) meat. tion and library binding, it is generally flat back binding. 1. A hand-bound book The animal should be in a clean, the only lining.See also:SECOND LIN- which has not been rouneed and backed healthy condition and the slaughter ING; SPINE LINING (1). (154, 343) before the boards are attached. The rapid and efficient. Bruising should be firsts.1. Hides and skins that are, or at term isalso sometimes applied to a carefully avoided. The animal is bled least are designated as,perfect,i.e., book which has lost its round; however after slaughter to remove blood from freefromholes,tears,putrefactive FLAT SPINE is a more appropriate term the carcass and also from the small damage, etc.See also:GOOD SECONDS. for this condition. The spine of a flat veins and arteries in the skin. If this is 2. A term applied at times to the FIRST back binding has a tendency to become not done rapidly, the blood will clot EDITION of a book. (335) concave. Also called "square back." and putrefy,resultinginblue-black fish glue. An adhesive obtained by boiling See also:FLAT BACK CASE BINDING. 2. markings in the skin. The skin should the skins of certain fish, particularly A leather binding which does not have also be removed immediately, while the cod fish, and used cold mainly in bands appearing on the spine.(140, the carcass isstill warm, as removal the liquid form. It works easily and is 236, 335, 343) thenis much easier. Subsequent to used in bookbinding for tipping-in and flat back case binffing. A simple type of flaying,theskincools down more casemaking.See also:ISINGLASS (191, (library) binding which has a flat spine quickly, giving less chance of putre- 309) and is cased or has a one-piece cover- faction. Some form of curing generally fish grained split. A sheepskin split, dyed ing. This type of binding is suitable for follows flaying.See also:BRINING; DRY- and finished by embossing with a small typescript, some pamphlets, and adhe- SALTING; PUTREFACTIVE DAMAGE; WET- "gunpowder" grain. (97) sive-bound paperbacks. (258) SALTING. (248, 291, 306, 363) fish scales. A particular grain pattern in a flat cut index.See:CUT THROUGH INDEX. flea seed. A small, brown, hard seed, so leather resembling the scales of a fish. flatfinish. A paper saving a smooth, called because of its resemblance to a Leather with this type of grain was at glare-free finish. flea.Itisboiled inwater to make one time used by bookbinders who flats. An old term applied to papers of MARBLING SIZE. It was usually used in wanted a leather giving the effect of various types which have a well closed, combination with GUM TRAGACANTH in being blind tooled. (97) even formation and a high finish, and the execution of the shell and Spanish fixation value. The relative speed with which are particularly suitable for wriL- marble patterns. It was not (and ap- which different vegetable tannins com- ing purposes. The term derives from parently could not) be used for the bine with hide substance as measured the practice of counting into quires and drawn or combed marbles, as it dragged by the relative amounts which combine then folding the pack. When it became the colors and did not allow the comb under specified conditions. (248) the practice to deliver writing papers to pass through smoothly. As it has no fixative. A clear solution, such as a syn- unfolded, they were called "flats." To- advantage over CARRAGHEEN MOSS Or thetic resin in xylene (C8H10), sprayed day the term is usually restricted to gum tragacanth, its use was never ex- or coated on a work of art, a reproduc- papers such as tablet paper, as well as tensive and it is seldom if ever used at tion copy, etc., that "fixes" or stabilizes to paper with a smooth, flat finish as all today. (217, 236, 369) the image, thus making it more resist- distinguished from bond finish. (191) flesher. The inside split (flesh split) of a ant to wear, smudging, etc. Fixatives flat spine. The shape given to books in lamb- or sheepskin, embossed and fin- protect and preserve, but they also at the 1820s. They were not the same as ished ir imitation of grained leather, times change the refractive index and the FLAT BACK BINDING because they and used at times for lining the spines may also impart an unnatural sheen were backed but not rounded, or had of cheaper blankbooks.See also:BUFF- to the colors, possibly one not intended very little rounding. The flat spine and ING (1). (61, 264) by the artist. (233) HOLLOW BACK came into use at about fleshing. One of the beamhouse opera- fixed back.See:TIGHT BACK. the same time. (236) tions in leather manufacture. Fleshing fixes- tannin.See:COMBINED TANNIN IN flax. The bast fiber from the inner bark consists of the removal of areolar tissue LEATHER. of the flax plant(Linun usitatissimum), from the flesh side of a hide or skin. It flag. 1. A marker, such as a small strip and the source of linen for thousands usually precedes liming, and is gen-

u flesh side 104 fluffing

erally done by means of a fleshing ma- inhibitor is generally included in the ing on single cords had become fairly chine, or, in hand work, by working plasticizer. well established, although largely for the skin over the beam with a sharp, The origin of "flexible" animal glues smaller books and economical bindings. two-handed knife. In European tan- is unknown, but they were certainly in The use of flexible sewing has been neries, fleshing generally takes place use since early in the 20th century. dominant infine binding untilthe following liming and unhairing. Their use in bookbinding, however, has present day; howf,er, its use declined Fleshing promotes the entry of water declined sharply inrecent yearsin sharply from the end of the 18th cen- from the flesh side, which is important favor of INTERNALLY PLASTICIZED syn- tury until the end of the 19th century, as water is absorbed more readily from thetic adhesives, such as the RESINOUS when it was revived to some extent due the flesh side than from the epidermal ADHESIVES. (198, 236) to the efforts of T. J. Cobden-Sander- or grain side. Fleshing also flattens and flexible not to show. A method of sewing son and Douglas Cockerell. stretches the skin, has a pronounced the sections of a book in which the Flexible sewing is not suitable for cleaning action, and, in the case of spine of the gathered sections is sawn books printed on very heavy paper, greasy skin, such as domestic sheep ok lightly so that the saw cuts do not pene- nor in cases where the book is made up pig, removes a quantity of surplus fat. trate completely through the folds of of very thick sections. It is also unsuit- Good, clean fleshing is important for the sections. The sewing is then done able for use with coated papers.If the success of all subsequent processes, on thin cords, encircling them as in used on small volumes, the sewing as bits of flesh or fat on the skin can FLEXIBLE SEWING. If the cords project thread and, therefore, the cords, must retard the penetration of tannins, fat- above the spine after sewing they are be proportionally thinner; otherwise liquors, and the like. See also: GREEN hammered intothegrooves during there will be a reduction in flexibility. FLESHING. (291, 363) backing. Books sewn in this manner (161, 172, 236, 335, 343) flesh side. The side of a hide or skin next may have hollow or tight backs; in the flexural strength. A measure of the ability to the animal, or the side opposite the case of the hollow back, the purpose of of an adhesive film to withstand re- grain side. See also: BUFFING (1 ); RE- sewing not to show apparently is to peated flexing, bending, twisting, etc. VERSE CALF; SPLIT. prevent creasing of the leather of the Flexural strength is of paramount im- flesh split. 1. The inner layer of a hide or spine by the cords, while attempting to portance in the adhesives used in archi- skin separated from the main part of retain the strength of genuine flexible val work in general, and bookbinding the skin by means of a splitting ma- sewing. In the case of the tight back, in particular, especially in adhesives chine. 2. The leather made from such the purpose is to have a smooth spine used for gluing up the spine and ad- a split. See also: FLESHER. (61) and a book with sewing that is stronger hesive binding. (222) fleur-de-lis-lozenge. A lozenge shsped fin- than ispossible with RECESSED-CORD flint hides. Hides dried without curing. ishing tool made up of a fluer-de-lis, or SEWING; however, in this case, most of flock paper. A speciality cover paper pro- a variation thereof, the three pedals the desired benefits are negated because duced by coating the sheet with size, and stalks of which extend to fill the of the need to make the cords extremely either all over or in patterns or de- four corners. (250) thin. (236, 371) signs, and then applying specially dyed fleuror. A finishing tool cut in a nonde- flexible sewing. A method of sewing the flock powder. Flock paper originally script form, partly floral or foliage in sections of a book to cords or bands was intended to simulate and nature, generally of a lozenge shape which are above the backs of the sec- Italian velvet brocade. (17, 197) tions and rest against them, instead of flock powder. Very short or pulverized and generally used to fill the lozenge being recessed into the paper. See: di- fiber, such as wool, cotton, or rayon, compartments of a panel that is RECESSED-CORD SEWING. The sewing vided by diagonal fillets. (250) used in flock printing and to form thread is looped completely around the velvety patterns on cloth and paper. flexible adhesives. See: ADHESIVES; FLEX- cords, instead of passing in front IBLE GLUE; INTERNALLY PLASTICIZED; florlated. A border, initial letter, or book them. This type of sewing may be done decorated with small flower or leaf RESINOUS ADHESIVES. on single or double cords and is one of flexible endpaper. An endpaper designed the strongest forms of hand sewing ornaments. (140) floss. Cotton or silk thread used in bind- to provide a flyleaf that is heavier than known. The method was in usein a single sheet of paper, but is still flex- Europe as early as the 8th century, and ing single section pamphlets, usually ible enough to not interfere with the represents the foundation upon which by side sewing tied in a bowknot. (256) opening of the book. Developed at the hand bookbinding was built and devel- flour. See: FINES. workshop ofBritishbinders Roger oped for a thousand years. flourish style. See: FANFARE STYLE. Powell and Peter Waters between 1960 The number of bands, which were flower-headed rivet. A finishing tool cut and 1965, this endpaper is calstructed always double (i.e., two cords or thongs with an ornamental head in a design by tipping two folios together in two adjacent to each other and almost resembling a daisy. (250) places: along the spine and along the touching), on which 12th and 13th cen- fluffing.1. The process of reducing the fore edge. tury books were sewn varied from two substance and smoothing the flesh side flexible glue. Generally, an ordinary ani- to five (in the latter case the cords being of a skin or hide during leather manu- mal glue containing GLYCEROL or SOR- spaced so there was a greater space be- facture. See also: BUFFING (2); SNUFF- BITOL, the softening effect of the latter tween the cords than between the end ING. 2. The removal of the free or supposedly lasting longer than the for- bands and the head and tail of the book), loosely bonded fibers, loading material mer. These softening agents, or "hu- although examples of books sewn on as or dust from the surface of paper dur- mectants," are hygroscopic and may, many as fourteen cords are known. The ing impression. Fluff is a particular de- under certainconditions,absorb so use of double cords gradually dimin- fect encountered in lithographic print- much moistureasto promote the ished, however, and by the middle of ing, and results in the printed matter growth of mold; consequently a mold the 16th century the technique of sew- showing white or gray images in paper flush 105 folding machines

fibers, or other material, removed from Paulus Lehener. It is possible, although slit or perforated if they are to be the surface of the paper. (93, 306) probably unlikely, that he discarded folded at right angles more than twice, flush (flush binding; flush cut). See:CUT some tools and acquired others. (141) so as to reduce wrinkling and buckling. FLUSH. foil. See: BLOCKING FOIL. The principal folds are the parallel flush board binding. A style of binding fold and dye papers. Decorative end- and (or buckle) and right angle, with the having the boards glued to the board cover-papers which have been folded latter being the most commonly used papers and a paper cover glued to the (in parallel folds several times or into fold in bookwork. The parallel fold is boards. The book is then cUT FLUSH. accordian pleats)and painted with generally used for very narrow books, fly embossing press. An early version of color along the edges and corners, or or for those that are printed TWO UP. the BLOCKING pRESS, which was capable dipped into a dye or paint mixture. The third most commonly used fold, of exerting the enormous pressurere- Japanese papers are usually used in this though used far less than either of the quired to block covers with engraved technique. (183) preceding, is the concertina fold, which plates often nf the same sizeas the fold binder. One of the simplest forms of is used for mans and folders, as well as cover, even and folios. This "binding," consisting of a sheetof for some book sections. type of press was probably introduced cover stock with a series of scores run- Almost all folding today is done by sometime in the late 1820s by JOSEPH ning vertically and extending outward machine; however, in the early days of THOUVENIN and was used extensively from the center fold to allow for ex- the folding machine, the work was so until the later part of the 19th century. pansion. The grain of the cover stock inaccurate that good folding could be The description "fly" may stem from should run from head to tail so as to done only by hand. the instantaneous release of pressure facilitate folding and scoring. (146) Folding is done "to the paper" or (the platen "flying" up). (203, 236) folded (folding) book. A form of book "to the print," i.e.,register. See also: flying out. A convex shape to the fore consisting of a long strip of paper FOLD TO PAPER; FOLD TO PRINT; FOLD- edge of a book, resulting from lack of, folded "concertina-wise" and attached ING MACHINES; IMPOSITION; REGISTER or improper, rounding, backing, lining at one or both ends to stiff covers. The (4). (82, 182, 229, 234, 335, 339, 343) of the spine, or a combination thereof. "folded book" is common in the Orient folding book. See: FOLDED (FOLDING) fly leaf. A leaf or leaves at the beginning but much less so in other parts of the BOOK. and end of a hook, being the leafor world, except in books of an unusual folding endurancc. The number of folds leaves not pasted to the boards, orcov- nature, such as books of a pictorial na- which a specimen (usually paper) will ers, of the book. See also: ENDPAPERS. ture with views of places and/or pano- withstand before failure, under con- (69, 335) ramas. (156) trolled conditions in a specified instru- folder. I. A thin length of wood, bone, flyswing. A very thin SKWER used exten- ment. In the usual test, a specimen is sively for ivory, or other material, from 6 to 12 subjected repeatedly to double folds titlelabels on cloth- and inches long, and 1 to 11/2 inches wide. leather-bound books, and generally let- through a wide angle while under ten- tered in gold. In library binding, the The typical folder is approximately vis sion. inch thick. It is tapered to the edges, Folding endurance is a very impor- "flyswing" has been replaced by labels has rounded edges and ends, and is of paper and(occasionally)cloth. tant indication of thedurabilityof (140) used in folding sheets by hand and cut- archival papers. The test is usually con- ting bolts, and also in numerous bind- ducted in an environmental room. A Fogel, Johannes (II 1455-?1460). One of ing operations. 2. See: FOLDING MA- declineinfolding enduranceisthe the most celebrated of German book- CHINES. 3. A publication consisting of most sensitive indicator of aging and binders, Fogel bound at least one and one sheet of paper folded to make two deterioration of paper. (17, 62) perhaps as many as four copies of the or more leaves but not stitched or cut. folding in gangs. A method of folding , one of which bears 4. A large sheet of stiff paper, usually printed sheets by means of a folding his signature. Fogel's tools included a manila, folded once. It has a projection machine that folds a large sheet into rope and a lute player stamp, as or tag for heading at the top of the several sections in one operation. As well as triple fillets accompanied by rear portion. (204) the sheet passes through the machine, rosettes. He also worked finely made folding. The process of folding flat printed it is folded, cut into sections, the heads headbands in red, white, and blue silk. sheets into sections. The number of are slit and the sections are then de- All of his bindings are decorated in a leaves in a single folded sheet is always livered singly or inset. (140) manner characteristic of ERFURT BIND- a multiple of two: 4, 8, 16, 32, and 64 folding machines. Machines that fold flat INGS, having the long, narrow center leaves, giving 8,16, 32, 64, and 128 printed sheets into sections. The two panel enclosed in a broad border, with pages respectively. Sections with 6, 12, main features of modern folding ma- all lines crossing at the ends to form 18. etc., leaves may be obtained by the chines are: 1) the knife which dips be- squares in the corners. use of other than standard types of tween two rotating rollers that form Little is known of Fogel after 1460. folding, or by the use of more than one a "nip;" and 2) the plate that forms an All of his extant signed bindings are sheet, e.g., an envelope fold followed envelope into which the sheet is pro- thought to have been bound at Erfurt by a right angle fold will give 6 leaves pelled, bending or buckling it along a before 1460, and by 1461 some of his (12 pages), or a full sheet folded three desired line as it makes its exit from the stamps were being used in conjunction times, plus a half sheet folded twice plate. with others and without his signature and insetted within the full sheet will on the bindings, but it Three main types of folding ma- is not known give a section of 12 leaves (24 pages). chines arein use today:the knife whether he retired from binding or just Although a single sheet of paper can be folder, buckle (or plate)folder, and stopped signing his bindings. In 1462 folded nine times, in bookwork itis combination folders, which are ma- his lute player and rope knot finishing unusual to find a sheet folded more chines that employ both knife and tools appear on a binding signed by than four times, and most sheets are buckle folding in different stages in the

112 folding needle 106 foliaged staff

same machine. All three types are de- anism clear for the next sheet. The even up to 50 by 74 inches. (52, 101, signed to take standard sizes of paper sheet continues to be propelled by roll- 179, 320, 339) and are suitable for different types and ers and the folded edge may be de- folding needle. A needle, usually of steel classes of work. flected into a second and then third imbedded in a wooden handle, and In the knife folder, a blunt-edged plate, producing additional folds paral- used by some bookbinders intight knife is set parallel with and above the lel to the first. Buckle folders frequently places for such work as mitering covers slot formed by the two rollers. The incorporate knifefoldingunits,the and turning-in on . It is also rollersrevolve continuously sothat knives being used to make folds at used at times for scoring. when a sheet is placed over them and right angles to the parallel buckle fold. foldings. A generaltermappliedto the knife descends, the paper is caught As with knife folding machines, per- printed sheets which have been folded between the rollers and carried away, forators and slitters are incorporated in various ways to form sections. Fold- a fold being made where the knife for use at various stages of folding. ings from 4 to 128 are given in the made contact. In practice the sheets Buckle folders are generally run at table provided below. are fed one at a time to stops, either by higher speeds than knife folders, but folding stick. A long, thin polished piece hand or by mechanical feeders, and are knife folders are used in book work of wood, bone, plastic, or other mate- carried by moving tapes beneath the because they are better adapted for rial, used when folding paper by hand knife where they are precisely posi- handling a greater diversity of papers. to crease the sheet without soiling or tioned mechanically for folding. The The largest knife folders will fold a otherwisc damaging it. See also: FOLDER knife having descended, the sheet, now flat sheet of 128 pages, producing four (1). (173) folded once, is carried by rollers and 32-page sections, each with four folds. folding strength. See: FOLDING ENDUR- tapes to a second unit of knife and Buckle folders, in their most complex ANCE. rollers where a second fold is made, form, can produce almost any series of foldouts. Inserts that are larger than the then a third fold, etc., the folded sheets folds, but,in general, they are used trim size of the book or other publica- (now sections) being delivered to a more for the folding of advertising tion and which must be folded before stacker. If any knife is at right angles matter than for book work. insertion. When they are the same to the previous unit a fold at right The first folding machine is believed height as the book but wider they may angles to the previous fold is made; to have been introduced in about 1850 be tipped in, but when they are both however, if the machine is constructed by a man named Blake. In 1856, Cyrus higher and wider, or just higher, they with the folding units parallel to pre- Chambers, Jr.,patented and sold a must be LIPPED. See also: FULL APRON; ceding folds then parallel folds are folding machine to the Lippincott Pub- THROW OUT. (316, 339) made. If it is desired to slit the sheet lishing Company. Although the accu- fold sewing. A general term applied to into individual sections during folding, racy of early folders was poor, with sewing a book through the folds of the sheet willtravel through rotary hand folding stillpredominating for the sections. See: FLEXIBLE SEWING; slitters when passing from one folding better grade work, development of the FRENCH SEWING; MACHINE SEWING; unit to the next, and the individual sec- folding machine after 1862 was rapid, RECESSED-CORD SEWING; TAPE SEWING tions of the sheet will be conveyed to and in 1873 a machine was patented (1). individual folding units. In this man- that would fold a 16-page section and fold to paper. An instruction to the binder ner, a sheet printed with 64 pages can one of 8 pages, inset the latter, and to fold the printed sheets of a book so be slit into four parts producing four paste it in place. That same year de- that the edges of the leaves and bolts individual 16-page sections. Machines vices to cut and slit paper as it went are even. C f: roc") To PRINT. (156) are normally provided with perforators through the machine were introduced. fold to print (fold to register). An instruc- which perforate the bolts, thus pre- Automatic feeders were also developed, tion to the binder to fold the printed venting wrinking and buckling. one being patented in 1855. sheets of a book to register, i.e., the Buckle folders work on a different Modern folding machines are avail- edges of the printed areas are to be principle. The sheet is fed end first be- able in many sizes, capable of folding placed exactly over one another. Cf: tween a pair of continuously revolving sheets measuring 4 by 4 inches up to FOLD TO PAPER. (156) rollers and the leading edge is guided 26 by 60 inches and, in special cases, foliaged staff. A finishing stamp cut in the between two closely spaced plates, the plane of the plates being at an angle of 45° to the plane of feeding. The plates Foldings are fitted with internal adjustable stops, and when the leading edge of the sheet Section Size Symbol Customary Leaves Pages hits these stops further forward motion Number of Folds is prevented. The latter half of ne Folio fo 1 2 4 sheet, however, is still being propelled Quarto 4to 2 4 8 Sixrno 6to varies 6 12 forward by the rollers and, being al- Octavo 8vo 3 8 16 ready bent at an angle of 45, the Twelvemo 12mo varies 12 24 sheet at the point of entry to Sixteenmo 16mo 4 16 32 the plates. The buckle is gripped be- Eighteenmo 18mo varies 18 36 tween the lower roller and a third roll- Twenty-fourmo 24mo varies 24 48 er in contact with it and the buckle Thirty-twomo 32mo 5 32 64 passes between these rollers, thus form- Thirty-sixmo 36mo varies 36 72 ing a fold. The portion of the sheet Forty-eightmo 48mo varies 48 96 between the plates is immediately with- Sixty-fourmo 64mo varies 64 128 drawn by this action, leaving the mech-

11 3 foliate 107 ford !

form of a branch entwined with foliage, century by William Beckford (1759- edge is not gilded or marbled. sometimes intertwined with berries. A 1844 ) . (241 ) The painting of fore edges is very foliaged staff is usually used to form a foot. 1. The margin at the bottom of a old, going back perhaps as early as the frame. (250) page of type. 2. The under-surface of 10th century. These earliest fore-edge foliate. To number the leaves of a book type. The plane parallel to the face on paintings consisted of symbolical de- instead of the pages. This results in the which the body of type rests. (12, 196) signs. The art reached England in the rectos and versos having the same num- footage. 1. The charge made by the manu- 14th century, and among the early ber, as 1, 1-2, 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, etc. It is a facturer or supplier of leather. The fore-edge paintings, such as those exe- method of numbering commonly found method of measurement used in calcu- cuted by Thomas Berthelet for King in blankbooks. (274) lating the number of square feet of any Henry VIII, consisted of treating the foliation. 1. The total number of leaves, particular skin or hideissomew'lat fore edge as a solid panel for a heraldic whether numbered or unnumbered, complicated, and in practice it is usu- or othcr motif in gold and colors. The contained in a book or manuscript. 2. ally found that a skin marketi, for ex- binder who originated the technique of The numbering of the leaves of a book ample, as four feet, will not give nearly painting a design on the fanned out or manuscript. Foliation was relatively that much area in cut pieces for books; leavesis unknown, although Samuel rare until the last quarter of the 15th particularly in the case of skins with Mearne is thought to have employed century. It consisted originally of the very ragged edges, e.g., goatskin. The one or more artists and binders who word Folio, or an abbreviation, fol- footage charged is usually marked on did this kind of painting. The first lowed by a Roman numeral. Arabic the flesh side of the skin, and is calcu- knowndisappearingpaintingdates figures were used in Italy between 1475 lated to the tenth of a foot inthe from 1649; the art of fore-edge paint- and 1500, and outside Italy after 1500. United States, and to a quarter of a ing under gold reached its pinnacle in Eventually the Arabic came to be used foot in England, e.g., 4 = 4 feet, 4/1 = England in the latter half of the 17th alone. The numbering of pages (pagi- 41/4foot, etc. The measuring is done century. nation), as opposed to leaves, began to either by metal pins which record the The art of painting landscapes on replace foliation near the end of the presence (or absence) of leather by fore edges, rather than floral scrolls and 16th century but was not finally estab- touch, or by a beam of light, which in- armorial bearings, was pioneered by lished until the 18th century. Reference dicates the absence of leather by means William EDWARDS OF HAI.IFAX, some- to a page in a foliated book is generally of a receptor element. 2. The length or time around 1750. He first used mono- done by using r and v for recto and area of a reel of paper expressed in chrome (brown or gray) and later a verso, e.g., Ir or lv, or by the use of a linear or square measure. (335, 363) fullrange of colors.Portraits were and b, e.g., la or lb, the latter being fore edge. The edge of a book opposite also included, often flanking a land- preferred because manuscript v is often thespine.Sometimescalled"front scape.Subjectsportrayedincluded mistaken forr.Abbreviatedff.See edge." countrysides,buildings,sports,and also: . (140, 156 ) fore-edge binding. A style of binding scenes based on the content of the book folio.1. The resulting from representing a degree between quarter being decorated. The types of books folding a sheet one time, giving leaves and half-binding, in which a narrow commonly treated in this manner were half the size of the sheet. In modern strip of leather or cloth, usually of the Bibles and prayer books, the classics, practice double-size paper folded twice, same color as that covering the spine, travel books, and poetry. or quad-size paper folded three times is attached to the outer extremity of Although the art of fore-edge paint- would be used, thus producing the each board. The width of the strip gen- ing is old, there is clear evidence indi- requisite folio size but in sections con- erally varies according to the color and cating that the majority of such paint- venient for binding. Abbreviated Fo. decoration, if any, of the material used ings are the work of the late 19th and or fo. 2. A leaf of parchment or paper to cover the sides. (86) 20th centuries, mainly on books dating numbered only on the recto side.3. fore-edge margin. The space between the from the early 19th century. The great Loosely, the number of a page. 4. An text and the outer extremity of the leaf number of these paintings was in re- individual leaf of a book. (234, 252, of a book. Also called "outside mar- sponse to the demand of collectors and, 316) gin." See also: BLED; MARGIN (1 ). because there was an insufficient num- folio form. Printed sheets that have been fore-edge painting. A scene painted on the ber of authentic examples, appropriate folded and gathered, but not bound. fore edge of a book, either with the books of an earlier time were painted See also: GATHERING (1). (322) edge solid so that the resultant paint- to satisfy this demand. (50, 69, 140, font (fount). The complete assortment of ing is visible with the book closed, or, 236) all letters and characters in one face in the more accepted use of the term, fore-edge tab. See: INDEX TAB. and size of type. A type family includes with the edge fanned out so that the fore-edge title. The title of a book written of roman, italic, semi-bold and painting is not visible with the book on its fore edge to identify it. This was condensed. See also: TYPE FACE. (12) closed. When the painting is done with a common practice in the 16th century foothill style. A particular style of bind- the leaves fanned out, the edge is gen- when it was customary to shelve books ing in which the books were sewn on erally also gilded or marbled in the with their fore edges outward. (156) raised cords, and were top edge gilt, usual manner, so that the closed book ford. A grade of PARCHMENT made from had marbled paper sides and end- shows no trace whatsoever of the paint- a split sheepskin and dressed in imita- papers, and were covered in half olive- ing. A double fore-edge painting is one tion of VELLUM. It is not a strong skin brown morocco. Finishing consisted of with twopaintings,whichcanbe and tends to be greasy, which causes lettering and the date at the tail of the viewed independently by fanning the difficulties in trying to make it adhere spine. The name derives from Fonthill leaves first one way and then the other. to the boards of a book. Also called Abbey in Wiltshire, England, which A triple fore-edge painting has a visible "forrel" and (rarely)"forril." (172, was built toward the end of the 18th scene in addition, in which case the 343)

114 form 108 Fourdrinier machine

form. 1. A curved block placed between ity in several respects, including, finish, times given a ROUNDING AND BACKING the endpapers of a book and its covers subsequent coatings,inkreceptivity, MACHINE. while the leather is being polished, so and compressibility under printing im- forwarding press. See: FINISHING PRESS. as to counteract any warpage which pression. fossil resins. See: RESIN. may have occurred due to the dampen- The selection of paper pulps and Fourdriniermachine. A papermaking ing of the leather while finishing. 2. their subsequent refining influence for- machine invented by the Frenchman, Pages of and illustrations, mation to a great extent. Short fibers Nicolas Louis Robert in 1798, devel- arrangedinproperorderforthe will form better than long ones, while oped in Eneland by Brian Donkin for printedsheet and locked in a metal long fibers, which give strength in terms Henry and Sealy Fourdrinier, but not frame calleda "chase," readyfor of folding endurance and tear resist- placed into opera0on until 1804. printing or for making an electrotype ance, when used in preponderance, The Fourdrinier machine and the or . (12, 115) tend to give a cloudy or bunchy look CYLINDER MACHINE comprise the formaldehyde. A very reactive aldehyde to the formation of the sheet. Loading machines normally employed in the (HCHO), that is a colorless, pungent, or fillefs improve formation, permitting manufacture of all grades of paper and irritating, combustible gas when pure, closer packing and greater density in board. The Fourdrinier machine may butisconveniently handled inthe the sheet, thus improving both level- be considered in four sections:wet form of aqueous solutions or solid ness and LOOK-THROUGH. There are end, press section, drier section, and polymers. It is usually prepared by the limits, however, to the amount of load- calender section. (The supercalender is oxidation of methanol or gaseous hy- ing than can be used, as it weakens the not a part of the papermaking machine, drocarbons It has been used to kill, or paper because itis dead weight and and, in fact, not all Fourdriniers have inhibit, bookworms, and is used in the contributes no strength on its own. (17, a calender section.) In the wet end, the manufacture of some leathers, in the 72, 143) pulp or stock, at a consistency or con- treatment of certain dyestuffs to render formic acid. A colorless, volatile, weak centration of 0.2 to 1.0%, depending them fast to washing, and for bleach- organicacid(H2CO2).Itoccurs upon the grade and weight of the paper ing archival papers. Its tanning prop- naturally, e.g., in ants, the fruit of the being manufactured,flowsfroma erties stem from its ability to render soaptree, etc., and is also formed as a headbox through a slice onto a moving gelatin insoluble inwater. See also: byproduct in the atmospheric oxida- endless belt of wire cloth, the FOUR- ALDEHYDE TANNING; COMBINATION OIL tion of turpentine. The principal com- DRINIER WIRE. The wire runs Over a TANNAGE; FORMALIN. mercialsourceissodiumformate, breast roll. which is under or adjacent formaldehyde tanning. A process of con- which is prepared by the reaction of to the headbox, over a series of tubes verting hides and skins into leather by carbon monoxide and sodium hydro- or table rolls (or, more recently, drain- treatment with FORMALDEHYDE.See: xide under pressure and heat. Formic age blades) which maintain the work- ALDEHYDE TANNING.See also:COM- acid is used in leather manufacture to ing surface of the wire in a plane and BINATIONOIL TANNAGE; FORMALIN. control pH, as well as in the acid dye- aid in water removal. The tubes or rolls (248) ing of some leathers; in the latter case, create a vacuum on the downstream formalin. A solution of FORMALDEHYDE causing the dye to fix on the leather. side of the NIP. Similarly, the drainage gas in water. A solution of 40% for- (306) blades create a vacuum on the down- malin in water, which may also con- forming iron. See: BACK-MOLDING IRON. stream side where the wire leaves the tain traces of formic acid, methyl alco- forril. See: FOREL. blade surface, but also perform the hol, or a white deposit of paraldehyde, fortifiedsize. A rosin acid chemically function of a doctor blade on the up- is used in tanning some leathers.See modified for use in lieu of, or together stream side. The wire then passes over also:ALDEYHYE TANNING. (306) with, rosin size in improving the water a series of suction boxes, over the bot- format. 1. The number of times a printed resistance of paper. Most fortified sizes tom couch roll (or suction couch roll), sheet has been folded to form the are reaction products of rosin with which drives the wire, and then down leaves of a section, e.g., folio (folded maleic anhydride. and back over various guide rolls and a once to make two leaves or four pages); forty-eightmo. A section consisting of 48 stretch roll to the breast roll. quarto(folded twice to make four leaves (96 pages). In bookwork, using The press section usually consists of leaves or eight pages), etc. In a broader right angle folds, it is formed by fold- two or more presses, whose function is sense, format is the general proportions ing a full sheet five times to form 32 to remove still more water from the and approximate size of a book or leaves, and a half sheet four times to web mechanically and to equalize the other publication which would result form 16 leaves, and insetting the latter. surface characteristics of the felt and from such folding.See alsoFOLDINGS. Its symbol is 48mo, or 48°. Also called wire sides. The wet web of paper is 2. In a very loose sensethe general "quadrigesimo-octavo."See also:BOOK transferred from the wire to the felt at appearance and make-up of a book, SIZES. the couch roll, and is carried through including proportions, size, quality, and forwarding. The processes or steps in- the presses on the felts, the texture and style of paper and binding, typography, volved in binding a book. It has been cha,acter of which vary according to illustrations,andsoon. Seealso: variously definedas: 1)all of the bind- the grade of paper being made. DUMMY (1). (12, 156, 234) ing processes following gathering, in- The drier section consists of two or formation. The distribution of the solid cluding covering; 2) the processes fol- more tiers of driers, which are steam- components of a sheet of paper, with lowing sewing and up to covering; and heated cylinders. The web is held firmly special reference to the fibers.Itis 3) the processes following sewing and against them by means of fabric drier usually judged by the visual appear- including covering. In edition binding, felts. As the web passes from one drier ance of the sheet when viewed by trans- the term SHEETWORIC is usually used in to another, first the felt side and then mitted light. Formation affects not only lieu of forwarding. (83, 123) the wire side are pressed against the look-through appearance but uniform- forwarding machine. The name some- heated surface of the drier. The web

1 1 5 Fourdrinier wire 109 French corner

enters the drier having a water been initiated before the examination tion of an oxidizing agent such as cal- content of approximately 65%, the of the paper, and partly, but less con- cium hypochlorite (Ca(Cl0).,); how- bulk of which is evaporated in this sec- vincingly, to the so-called, action at a ever, this chemical is very difficult to tion. Moisture removal may be further distance, which enables an agent to wash out after treatment. Unaffected assisted by hot air blowing onto the exert its effect at some distance from papers may be successfully protected sheets and in between the driers to ef- the object acted upon. from foxing by maintaining the R. H. fect removal of water vapor. Within Two significant differences between of the storage area below 50%. See the drier section and at a point at least foxed and clean areas of a paper are also: DENDRITIC GROWTHS. (43,102, half way along the drying curve, there the higher proportion of acid and iron 143, 218) is sometimes a breaker stack for use in in the former, although there does not frame.1. Ornamentation of a binding imparting finish, as well as to facilitate seem to be any clear and definitive re- consisting of a simple hollow rectangle drying. The stack generally consists of lationship between iron and foxing. placzd some distance from the edges of a pair of chilled iron and 'or rubber- Insofar as the acid is involved, it is not the cover of a book. Itis to be dis- surfaced rolls. There may also be a size clear whether this is produced chem- tinguished from a BORDER (1). 2. Com- press located within the drier section, ically or as a byproduct of thelife plete borders which are not, however, at a point where the moisture content function of the organisms present. Iron compartments, and which comprise en- of the paper has been reduced to ap- isattributed to impurities present in closures made up of separate cuts or proximately 5%. the paper, and this conclusion seems to ornaments which show no evidence of The calendar section consists of from be based largely on the fact that itis having been carved or engraved for use one to three calender stacks with a reel seldom found in paprs produced be- together as a border, and also those device for winding the paper onto a fore the introduction of papermaking made up of separate cast-type orna- reel as it leaves the machine. The cal- equipment made ofiron,e.g.,the ments, commonly used in book decora- ender finishes the paper, i.e., smooths beater,and improvementsintech- tion. (12, 69) it and imparts the desired finish, thick- niques, including bleaching and other franklin guard. See: PHILADELPHIA ness, or gloss. Water, starch, wax emul- forms of chemical treatment. But what PATENT-BACK GUARD. sions, etc., may also be used to obtain role iron has in accelerating foxing, or free endpaper. See: FLY LEAF. See also: additional finishes. The reel winds the causing a change from the invisible to ENDPAPERS. finished paper, which may or may not visiLe state, has yetto be demon- free water-soluble matter(inleather). undergo further processing. strated. Soluble matter that can be removed The wire, press section, drier section The other factor which controls fox- from finely ground leather with very or sections, the calender stacks, and the ing is relative humidity (R. H.), since little washing. The free water solubles reel are so driven that proper tension thesefungiwillnot developifthe includegallic acid,quinol, catechol, is maintained in the web of paper de- R. H. falls below 75%. The fact that etc. See also: COMBINED TANNIN IN spite its elongation or shrinkage during foxing generally starts from the edge LEATHER; COMBINED WATER-SOLUBLE passagethroughthemachine.The of the leaf and spreads inward would MATTER (IN LEATHER). (363) overall speed of Fourdrinier machines seem to indicate that something in the freezing point. The temperature at which is determined by the grade and weight atmosphereisrelevant, although air the liquid and solid states of a sub- of the paper being manufactured. (17, borne organisms may be adequate as stance arein equilibriumatatmos- 60, 62, 72, 80, 98, 140) an explanation for this effect. In addi- pheric pressure. All adhesives used in Fourdrinierwire. An endlessbeltof tion, it must still be explain, d how the archival work are affected by the freez- woven wire used on the wet end of the center of the leaf is affected most in ing point, i.e., of water (32° F. or 0° FOURDRINIER MACHINE, and on which occasional instances. Perhaps the most C.). See also: GLASS TRANSITION TEM- the web of paper is initially formed. logical explanation is that infection by PERATURE. The warp wire is generally of phos- air borne organisms (or by organisms French cape levant. A type of MOROCCO phor bronzeand theshute(weft) that are natural to the paper) may oc- prepared from the skin of a large Cape wire of brass. In recent years, other cur if the conditions, and especially the (South African) goat. It has a LEVANT metals and nonmetallic materials have R. H., are favorable, and that growth, grain, which is larger than the small been used. The number of warp wires resultinginthegenerationoffox pin-head grain of the usual morocco. per inch and the number of shute wires marks, then occurs. The acid subse- (140) determine the mesh of the wire, the quently renders any iron in the paper French chalk. Soft, finely powdered mag- warp count varing from 8 to 225, the soluble and therefore visible, with its nesium silicate (Mg3H2(SiO3)4), most common being 55, 60, 70, and color being intensified by the presence which is dusted between the leaves of 75. (17, 62, 67) of organic matter. a I-ook prior to gilding the edges so as foxing (foxmarks). Stains, specks, spots The effects of foxing may be reduced to prevent the leaves from sticking and blotches in paper. The cause or to a reasonable extent by use of a re- during the gilding process, and also to causes of foxing, which usually occurs ducing agent, such as sodium boro- removegreasestainsfrompaper. in machine-made paper of the late 18th hydride (NaBH4) in a 0.5% solution (154) and the 19th centuries, are not com- by weight of the paper. This chemical French color. The third (or body) color pletely understood, but in all liklihood, has the advantage of not having to be dropped on the marbling size following it is fungoid in nature. Fungi, however, washed out of the paper (and even de- the droppingofthe VEIN COLORS. are not necessarily visible on foxed positing a small alkaline reservesod- (217) areas, nor does prolific growth neces- ium tetraborate (Na2B407)in the French corner. A method of reinforcing sarilyimply excessivediscoloration, paper). Foxing may be counteracted to the cornersofa book cover with and vice versa. This has been attributed an even greater extent by the use of a leather or cloth, which is subsequently partly to the fact that action may have 0.1% (by weight of the paper) solu- covered on the outside of the board but

1 6 French curl marble 110 frizzing

can just be seen at the corner on the was later applied to the same kind of of marbling deteriorated, the shell pat- inside of the board. (81) leather produced elsewhere. (325) tern was executed on very thin paper French curl marble. A marble pattern French morocco (Frenchlevant ma of poor quality and used for cheap that has been used for endpapers, par- rocco). A leather similar in appearance trade bindings. The pattern was also ticularly in France, since about 1660. to MOROCCO but produced from sheep- popularformarblingtheedgesof The patternis made on a marbling skin. The term is both inaccurate and books. (217, 236) sizeOf GUM TRAG ACANTH, andthe misleading. (264) French standing press. A variation of the colors are dropped on in the same man- French paring knife. See: PARING KNIFE. regular STANDING PRESS, the major dif- ner as with the NONPAREIL MARBLE. French sewing. A method of sewing a ference being that the platen is lowered The curls are made with the use of a book adapted by French bookbinders by turning a weighted wheel, which, wooden frame constructed in the form in the 16th century, which is essentially when spun, exerts additional pressure of a small harrow, each parallel bar the same as the sewing employed in by a kind of hammering action against beingsetwithasmanytapering COPTIC BINDINGS. Unlike the traditional two lugs. Except for the wheel and wooden pegs aa there are curls required Western method of sewing on raisea mechanism, itis made of wood, and, on the sheet to he marbled. The diffi- cords (See: FLEXIBLE SEWING), each while it does not tighten to the same culty in executing this patternisto section was sewn through the fold and degree as the iron standing precs, itis "catch" the curls before they lose their attached to the next section by a loop considerably lighter and does not re- shape. similar to a KETTLE STITCH. Cords were quire the substantial floor required by Many fine armorial bindings have not employed. The first and last sec- the heavier iron press. (83, 236) the large red and blue pattern as lin- tions were then laced tightlyto the French varnish. A pale-colored mixture ings. Padeloup and Derome both used boards. In modern usage, French sew- of shellac and oil. See: VARNISH. thispattern for endpapersilibooks ing is the same technique as done by fret. A continuous border pattern made they bound for the French nobility. a sewing machine, without the attach- up of interlaced bands and produced The Frenchcurlpatternremained ment of the boards. Modern French by a fillet. Such patterns can he used popular, and continued to be used in sewingistheprincipal method em- for the decoration of either the leaves Europe and England until about 1870. ployed ineditionbinding. See also: or covers of a book, or both. (335) Whileit was highly valued for end- MACHINE SEWING. (69, 89, 154) fringed foliage ornament. A bookbinding papers, it was rarely, if ever, used for French shell marble. A marble pattern finishing tool in more-or-less the shape cover papers on 17th and 18th century developed in the latter part of the 18th of a lozenge, and cut with a typical books. (97, 217) century, and particularly identified with foliage design, the principal character- French fillet. A FII I ET (1) having three France. The pattern is formed by add- isticof whichisanarrowfringe unevenly spaced bands on its circum- ing oilto the color, which then in- around the edge. (250) ference. stead of spreading evenly, forms in frizzing. I. The process of removing the French finish. Books sewn on raised bands drops with an outer circle or "shell" fat cell layer prevalent in the corium and completely undecorated except for of a lighter shade. Brown and orange of sheepskin, subsequent to splitting the giltlettering. See also: FRENCH KID. as the vein colors and a French (hody) skin and fleshing. When sheepskins are (274) color of blue seem to have been the to be oil tanned, it is essential that the French fold. A sheet of paper printed on mostfrequentlyusedcolors.Shell skins have clean, open surfaces, free one side only and folded over from papers are commonly found as end- from excess fat or grease. This allows left and right to form a "section" with papers of calf- and half-bindings of the thetanningoiltopenetratemore uncut bolts. The inside of the fold is early 19th century. Later, when the art freely. 2. Skins limed for a prolonged blank. (140, 355) French gold. An alloyed GOLD LEAF, on the light or lemon-colored side. (126) FRENCH JOINT French guard. A term sometimes applied to the inner margin of an insert, turned over and folded around a section. (25) French joint. A free-swinging joint pro- duced by setting the board aslight distance (approximately 1/2 to 1/4 inch, depending on the size of the book) away from the backing shoulder. This type of joint allows thicker covering material to be used, while still allowing the covers to open easily. The French joint is one of the more notable char- acteristicsoflibrarybinding.Also called "open joint." See also: CLOSED JOINT (94, 335) French kid (French finish). A kidskin pro- duced by either tawing or a vegetable tannage. As the name implies, it was produced originally in France and, be- cause of its distinctive finish, the term

1 i 7 front 111 fungicide

period during which the entire support- full chrome (tanned). Any leather tanned to vaporize thesubstances usedin ing structure ofELASTINin the grain by theCHROME TANNINGprocess. The fumigation; however, in cases of severe layer is destroyed. 3. The process in adjective "full" is added to emphasize or stubborn molds, heat in the range of leather manufacture of removing the the fact that the leather has not been 40 to 50° C. will increase the con- grain layer of a skin by scraping, either tanned by the semi-chrome or com- centration of the vapor and increase with a knife or by machine. (61. 291, bination chrome process. (306) itseffectiveness.Wherenospecial 306) full cloth.1. A book bound in a one- equipment, e.g., air-tight chambers, is front. A term applied to horsehides prin- piece cloth cover. The termisnot available and the infestationis on a cipally to distinguish the forepart of applied to library or edition bindings, relatively small scale, fumigation may the hide from the butt or hind portion i.e., case bindings. 2. A term some- be carried out by means of carbon which contains the SHELL from which times applied to a book bound in cloth, disulfide(CS.2)in an air-tightbox. CORD:A AN LEA1 HERisproduced. A as opposed to a binding with a cloth These methods, while more orless whole "front" represents about two- spine and paper sides. effective, do not confer lasting protec- thirds of the area of the hide. (97) fuller's earth. See:ATTAPULGITE CLAY. tion;thereforeitmay be necessary front COVer. See: UPPER COVER. full gilt. 1. A book having all three edges (assuming itis possible)to fumigate front edge. See:FORE EDGE. gilt, described as a.e.g., for all edges the areas in which the archival ma- frosted. A whitish condition or appear- gilt. See also: GILT EDGES. 2. A book, terialsare stored. Seealso: FUNGI. ance of lettering or ornamentation in usually leather hound, which is heavily (143, 198, 233) gold which can be caused by the leaf tooled in gold on the spine, and with fungi. A division or other major group being pressed into the covering ma- center and corner tools on the covers. of the lower plants which is often in- terial with a tool that is too hot. (335) full grain. A leather having the original cludedin Thallophyta coordinate to frother.See: DEVIL. grain surface exposed by removal of Algae, that includes a varied frothing. The process of foaming glair so the epidermis. and with none of the ofsaprophyticandparasiticplants as to mix itthoroughly. The glair is grain surface removed by BUFFING (1), whichlackchlorophyll,and which not used in a frothed condition, but SNUFFING, Or SPLITTING (1).Seealso: comprise the classes Phycomycetes, As- is allowed to subside, after which the CORRECTED GRAIN.(325) comycetes, Basidiomycetes, and Fungi clear glair is poured off. full law binding (full law sheep). An ob- Imperfecti, and usually, in addition, f. t. p. Abbreviation of folded, trimmed, solete style of binding, applied mainly the Myxomycetes and Schozomycetes. and packed, a term applied to books, to law books, and distinguished from A large number of the spores of pamphlets, etc.,to indicatethat the other types of law binding in that the fungi is always present in the atmos- printed sheets have been folded, trim- books were covered entirely in sheep- phere, and while paper is not a partic- med and packed for shipment. usually skin, with lace-in boards and raised ularly suitable medium to support the to a bookbinder. (274) bands, and the traditional labels on the growth of molds and fungi,under fugitive colors. Pigments and dyes that spine. See also: LAW CALF. (274) favorable conditions, such as relatively fade, especially those that lose color full leather. A book covered entirely in hightemperatureandhighrelative relativelyquickly when exposedto leather, whether one piece or several humidity.paperwillsupportthe natural light. Although still commonly pieces, as with inlays, onlays, etc. See growth of these micro-organisms, some used, the term is misleading because also: FULL BINDING; HkLFLEATHER; of which havea similar action on itimplies that FADING represents the QUARTER LEATHER; THREE-QUARTER paper to that of dry rot fungus on flight of color, rather than a chemical LEATHER. wood. Conditions ofstorage which change. (233. 316) full oil tanning. Any leather tanned by permit the prevalence of fungi may full. A term sometimes applied to leather one of the oil processes. The adjective requiretheuse of a FUNGICIDEto made from the unsplit, or full thick- "full" is added to emphasize the fact inhibit and/or destroy Olem. (198) ness, of a hide or skin, e.g., full calf. that the leather has not been tanned fungicide. A substancepossessingthe full apron. A leaf the size of the leaves by aCOMBINATION OIL TANNAGE. (61) power ofkillingorpreventingthe of a book to which a foldout, which full sheep. A sheepskin of full natural growth of FUNGI. No single fungicide must display the entire image beyond substance.Itmay becolored, em- possesses all the desired properties of the closed book, is attached. (339) bossed, or left in the natural tanned protection, as some of them are mut- full binding. A book which is covered state, as is the case with BASIL. (274) ually exclusive, but it is possible to find entirely with any one material. In a full weight (full thickness). A term some- one that possesses a range of properties strict sense, the term is applied -only times applied to an unsplit skin, of suitable for use in virtually any specific to leather bindings. Cf:1-1F BINDING; naturalthickness,but shaved down case. Unfortunately, many fungicides QUARTER BINDING; THREE-QUARTER when necessary on the flesh side to a are highly chlorinated substances and BINDING (1). (12) uniform thickness. therefore cannot be washed out if last- full-bound ends and bands (full-bound fumigation. The process of exposing ar- ing protection is to be conferred. Con- ends and hubs). A form of the blank- chivalmaterials tothe vapor of a siderable care must be exercised, there- book, generally full bound in sheep- volatile substance, or with poisonous fore, when they are used in or near skin and flesher, with overbands. In chemicals,suchasthymol,methyl paper. thisstyle, the leather covering does bromide (CH3Br), chloropicrin (CC13 While stable enough for most nor- not extend beyond the head and tail of NO2), carbontetrachloride(CC14), mal uses, the typical fungicide may not the boards but is turned in on the fore ethylene dichloride (C2H4C12), or hy- be sufficiently stable when itis to re- edges. Seealso: BANDING.(339) drogencyanide(HCN),withina mari in paper for decades, even cen- full calf t.e. g. A term sometimes ap- closed(andairtight)container,in turies, as paper almost always contains plied to a full calfskin binding with order to destroy mold and/or insects. impurities, e.g.,iron, which may ac- only the TOPEDGE GILT. Room temperature is usually sufficient celerate the normal slow breakdown of

11 8 funish 112 fustic

a fungicide. In the usual case, the prod- the weight of the paper.See also:COP- i.e., rosin, alum-rosin sizes, etc., vari- uct of this breakdown is hydrochloric PER NAPTHENATE; FOXING; MERCAPTO- ous additives, e.g., wet strength agents, acid (HCI), minute amounts of which BENZTHIAZOLE (M. B. T.); MERCURIC fillers of various types, e.g., rentention are capable of destroying any normal CHLORIDE; PENTA-CHLORPHENOL (P. C. aids, or loading materials, and dyes. paper;therefore,beforeusingany p.); SALICYLANILIDE. (198) (17, 58, 72) chlorinated organic fungicide, it must funish. The various combinations of ma- fustic. A natural yellow dye extracted be determined whether or notitis terials in the stock suspension used in from the yellow Brazil wood(Morus (reasonably) stable in the presence of the manufacture of paper and board. tinctoria),and at one time used in the traces of iron, copper, manganese, etc., Theyincludethefibrousmaterials manufacture of yellow marbling color, and, at the same time sufficiently effec- (pulp), i.e.,the rag, chemical wood, and also for dyeing leather. tive to be of practical value when used mechanical wood, esparto, cotton fiber, in low concentrations, e.g., 0.1% of linen, or other pulps, sizing materials,

11 J pin 113 gathering

IMMENO

gain. See: YIELD. ."111 (Le) Gascon. The name associated with a gallic acid. A white,crystallineacid luxurious style of finishing introduced (C7H,;05), that occurs widely in plants in France in the early 17th century. both in the free form, as in GALLS and The "Le Gascon"style, known as combined in tannins, from which it PoINTILLE, is made up of interlaced may he obtained by theactionof hands, enclosing geometrical compart- molds or an alkali. It is used principally ments which are filled with innumer- in the manufacture of pyrogallol tan- able gold dots, frequently elaborated nins, dyes, and writing inks. See also: into lines and curves of remarkable VEGETABLE TANNINS.(235) luster and elegance. gallotannin (gallotannk acid). See: TAN- Over the years many stories have NICACID. arisen concerning "Le Gascon." One galls. The dried excrescences from certain is that he worked as a bookbinder, trees and shrubs, especially Oak galls both heavy and light leathers. In Eng- or, more likely, as a gilder in the Eve's (Quercus infectoria), from the Near land, it has been used mainly for the bindery, from which he took the style East ard Eastern Europe; Chinese galls tannage of calf and kip skins. Also later to he calledFANFARE STYLE (With (Rhus semialata), from the Far East; known as "catechu," "pale catechu," its complicated geometrical framework) Tamarisk galls, from several species of and "terra japonica." See also: VEGE- as the basis of his designs, hut worked Tamarix, located from Morocco to TABLETANNINS. (175) out all of the scrolls in fine dots in- India; and Pistacia galls, from several gamma-cellulose. That portion of a cellu- stead of solidlines. While finishing European and Indian species of Pis- losic material that remains in solution tools had begun to become more finely tacia. All are relatively rich in tannin subsequenttoneutralizationofthe cut with the Eves, they reached the (36 to 60% ) and are said to contain alkaline solution obtained in the ALPHA pinnacle of delicacy and perfection free gallic acid in addition io tannin, CELLULOSE test. See also: BETA CELLU- with the work of this gilder or group as well as an easily soluble form of LOSE. (17, 72) of gilders. It has also been suggested ellagic acid. In general, the tannin is . A shruh, Wikstroemia canescens, that "Le Gascon" was the pseudonym not homogeneous and is believed to be indiginous to the mountain forests of of a famous hinder, and it has been huilt up as a polygallol-ellagic acid. central and southern Japan, the bast argued that the possibility exists that The galls result from the plants re- fibers of the inner bark of which are "Le Gascon" was employed by Gaston, action to irritation caused by the larvae used in papermaking. (17) Duke of Orleans. of various insects which lay eggs in gang stitching. An automatic or hand fed Despite the speculation, there are no the cambium area of the plants. production line method of fastening records to indicate just who "the man" Although galls were used extensively leaves together with wire staples. See may have been. There are documents over a period of centuries in the manu- also: SIDE STITCHING. indicating that someone going by the facture of certain inks, and in the tan- gape (gaping). A condition in which the pseudonym "Le Gascon" was, as early ning of leather, they are little used to- covers of a book are not parallel but as 1622, producing the most splendid day for tanning outside of the areas are further apart at the fore edge than bindings of thattime.Itisperhaps where they are collected, largely be- at the spine,i.e.,the book does not only natural that attempts should be cause of the expense involved in their close properly. Gaping, or yawning, as made to link this name with the finest collection. See also:IRON-GALL INK; itisalso called, may be caused by of the early pointille bindings, hut to VEGETABLE TANNINS. (175, 235, 363) improper insertion of folded material date no binding can be said to be the gambier. A tannin obtained from the withoutadequatestubbing;by im- work of anyone by that name. Three leaves and stems of Uncaria gambir, proper covering or casing-in technique, very intricate pointille bindings, signed a shrubby climber found in Indonesia in which the case is in effect too small byFLORIMONDBADIER, do exist, but and surroundingareas.Itcontains forthetext hlock orthe covering since Badier did not even hegin his catechu-tannic acid (22 to 50(70) and material is drawn on too tightly; or, apprenticeship until1630, he cannot catechin (7 to 33% ), as well as vary- in the case of vellum books or bind- have been "Le Gascon." (124, 132, ing amounts of vegetable acids and ings, by the absorption of moisture, 154, 347, 373) their salts, sugar, starch, cellulose, wax, which causesthevellumcoversto gatefold. An illustration, map, or other oil, and mineral matter. The catechin warp. (99, 236) leaf larger in one dimension than the is not identical with that ofCUTCH. gas black. A black pigment used in the other leaves of the publication and It is one of the condensed tannins and manufacture of printing ink, and pro- which consequently must he folded, has arelatively high pH value and duced by burning gas with insufficient usually at the fore edge or head, to total salts content. Used alone, gamhier oxygen for complete combustion to make itthe same size as the other produces a rather spongy leather; how- take place. Thick soot is deposited on leaves. (156, 329) ever, when used in combination with metalcylindersin much the same gathering. 1. The process of collecting, other tannins, such as wattle extract manner as LAMPBLACK from oil. Gas and arranginginproper orderfor or myrabolans, itiswell suited for black is practically pure carbon. (140) binding, the printed sheets or sections

12 0 gathering machine 114 general job binding

of a publication, which, in the case calipers, stop the machine and indicate produce delicate effects and are more of sections, takes place after folding. the pocket where the mistake occurred. easily impressed on a hard paper sur- 2. The group of leaves formed by fold- The calipers are also capable of detec- face than are solidtools. The term ing and combining the one or more mg an incomplete section. comes from the French word for sheets or half sheets which make up The first gathering machine was intro- honeycomb, and alsoapplies tothe a section (signature). The sheet is the duced by Endicott D. Averell of the practice of crimping or fluting cloth printer's unit, while the gatheringis United States in1875. This machine with heated gauffering irons.SeePLATE the binder's unit. In the case of the had feed problems which were event- vt. (236, 335, 343) octavo, the gathering normally com- uallyovercomebyamachine de- g clamp.See:C CLAMP. prises one sheet folded three times; veloped by F. Wood in1886. The g.e. Abbreviation for GILT EDGES. however, in larger or smaller volumes, periodofgreatestdevelopmentof gel. 1. A semisolid mass, resembling jelly, it may consist of two or more sheets, gathering machines was 1890 to 1903. capable of deformation by heat or orsheetsandhalfsheets.3.See: (89, 182, 320) pressure. 2. A system of solid aggre- CATCH-UP STITCH. (320, 335) gathering table. 1. A long, narrow table, gates dispersed through a liquid carrier gatheringmachine. A machineused usually in the shape of a horseshoe, or medium. 3. A non-flowing adhesive mainly in edition binding tocollect oval, on which flat sheets or sections mass exhibiting strong cohesive forces and arrange in proper order the folded are laid in piles in proper order for having low shearstrength.4.See: sheets,i.e.,sections, of a book, pre- gathering. 2. A rotating circular table GELATIN. ( 198, 306) paratory to binding. The sections are around which gatherers sit and assem- gelatin. A complex protein of the sclero- placed in sequence in the pockets or ble sections as the table rotates, pre- proteinclass,havingamolecular hoppers of the machine and are re- senting consecutive sections. The vari- weight varying from about 40,000 to leasedindividuallytoa conveying ablespeedtableisrotatedby an 100,000. It occurs in bones and fibrous mechanism. Once the machine isin electric motor operated by a foot pedal. tissue in the form ofitsanhydride, full operation it produces a complete The rotating gathering table is usually collagen, which is converted into gela- group of sections at every move, i.e., used for short runs of edition bind- tin on boiling with dilute acids. Gelatin if the book consists of twelve sections, ings. (274, 320) swells in cold water, but is insoluble on the twelth and every move there- init.It dissolvesin hot water and after the machine produces a complete gauliered (gauffred, gaufre, or goffered) edges. The edges of a book, usually produces a very viscous solution, e.g., gathering. Every time the conveying a gilded, solution containing 1% or more mechanism advances, a section is de- which havebeendecorated solidifies to a jelly upon cooling. Gela- posited on the conveying mechanism further by means of heated finishing tin is patricularly rich in glycene and at every feeding station, the complete tools or rolls which indent small re- lysine. Itis manufactured from hides gathering being assembled at the last peating patterns.Gauffering is most successful on a book printed on hard and bones, principally those of bovine station. The total number of stations animals, and differs from GI LIE in its depends on the number of sections paper and gilt solid. It may be done purity and in the care observed in its needed for the book being gathered. directly on the gold, or by laying a manufacture. Itis used in the manu- All gathering machines designed for different over the first, facture of glue and photographic film, uninterrupted operation have continu- and tooling over the top gold, leaving the pattern in the new gold impressed and in the tub-sizing of paper. (143, ous feed and remove individual sec- 189 ) tions from the bottom of the respective on the original metal. The effect of gauffering is sometimes enhanced by gelation. The partialcoagulation ofa piles, thereby making the top of the lyophilic sol which results in the for- pile always accessible for the addition scraping away parts of the gold and mation of a GEL (1). of sections. then staining the white paper showing gelation time. The interval of time be- Three different systems are used in through. While this technique was used by a number of European bookbinders, tween the introduction of a catalyst gatheringmachines: theswinging into a liquid adhesive and gel forma- gathering arm system, the rotary drum it was especially associated with Ger- man bookbinding of the 16th century. tion. The term is used with reference system, and the planetary system. to synthetic thermosetting resins. (233) The swinging gathering arm system The use of color on the edges of books gel strength. The strength of a gel or jelly operates by pulling the section by suc- bound in England was less frequent (such as gelatin or glue), often ex- tion along the fold edge from the pile, and more restrained. Plain gauffering pressed as the weight in grams required grippingitin jaws and droppingit was done well into the 17th century, to force a plunger into a test sample onto the conveyer system. In the rotary usually on embroidered bindings, but under specifiedconditions. The gel- drum system, the sections are removed appears to have declined sharply after strength test is based on the fact that by grippers built into the surface of 1650 or so. It was then revived and a solution containing 1% or more of the rotating drum. In the planatery exploited from the end of the 18th gelatin, when allowed to stand ata system, the bottom of the pocket is a century onwards, and was especially temperature of approximately 50* F., drum equipped with rotary vacuum popular in the latter half of the 19th will form a firm jelly. If different glue suckers which roll the sections away century, when it was found on elabor- solutions of identical concentration are from the bottom of the pile and trans- atelybounddevotionalandother permitted to chill or set, the quality fers them to the grippers on a transfer books. of the glue will, in general, correspond cylinder, which, in turn deposits them Almost all gauffering was done with to the consistency of the jelly formed. on the conveyer system. pointille tools, or, as in many examples, (185) If a sectionisomitted, or if two the designs were built up with repeated general job binding. A general type of sections from the pocket are deposited impressions of a large dot. Pointille binding in which odd jobs, eitner for on one pile, mechanical devices, called tools, as well as those cut in outline, the customer or the trade, are per- general office stationery binding 115 gilt marbled edges

formed. Joh binding of this type gen- thickness of hairs is used. (233, 335) The edges are scraped and sanded to erally includes some library style bind- gilder's tub. See: RUBBING-OFF CHEST. give as smooth a surface as possible, ing and small runs of edition binding, gilding. The art or process of adhering and the edges are again primed with i.e., runs under 1,500 copies. (131) thin metal leaf to a surface, e.g., the bole and polished with a burnishing general office stationery binding. A class leather cover or edges of a book, so as brush. A dilute solution of albumen of binding involving the production of to approximate the effect of solid or or gelatin is applied and the gold leaf speciality items, including pads, blot- inlaid metal. Although the term is ap- is laid on. The edges are then glazed ters,files, and the like. This type of plied to the decoration of both covers withaburnisher,initiallythrough binding often takes place as a sideline and edges, itis more accurately used paper and then directly on the edges. in a binder specializing in STATIONERY with reference to edges, and the term Differentqualitiesof paper require BINDING. See also: PADDING. (343) GOI D TOOLING for covers. slight variations of treatment. In gen- Gentile, Antonio (1519-1609). A Roman Although the term "gilding"ulti- eral, the effect of gilt edges is superior goldsmith who produced perhaps the mately derives from a word for gold, if the gildingis done before the book most remarkable silver binding that italso designates the application of is sewn. See: ROUGH GILT. Following has come down from the Renaissance. other leaf metal to a surface. Gold, gilding, the edges are sometimes tooled. The cover, which protects an equally silver, and leaf are the most See: GAUFFERED EDGES. distinguished Renaissance manuscript, commonly used metals; however, gold The gilding of the edges of books the Book of Hours. written by the is by far predominant. DUTCH GOLD and probably originated in Italy, at about scribe Francesco Monterchi, and illu- ALUMINUM LEAF are imitations of pre- the same time that gold tooling was minated by Giulio Clovio, for Cardinal cious metals which give inferior effects introduced in that country, or about Alessandro Farnese, consists of wooden and are not sufficiently permanent for 1470. The technique appears to have boards covered with parcel gilt silver archival work. On the other hand, they been in use in England by the 1530s. that is very delicately worked in low are superior in both effect and perma- Aside from appearance, gilding the relief and openwork. Each cover has ence to the so-called gold paint made edges, or at least the head edge, serves a frame of foliage in relief against a with bronze power, to the silver paints the practical function of protecting the pierced ground which is interrupted at made of aluminum powder, and to the intervals by masks, with fleurs-de-lis hook from the incursion of dust. See various imitation gold foils made of also: EDGE GILDING MACHINE.(140, in the corners. The panelisdivided various combinations of baser metals. 236, 335) into four sections filled with male and See also: GILT EDGES; GILT EXTRA; GILT female figures whose bodies terminate IN THE ROUND; GILT IN THE SQUARE; giltextra. A binding which has more incurving foliage.In the center a GILT MARBLED EDGES; GILT ON LAND- gold tooling than is considered normal. large oval depicts the annunciate angel SCAPES; ROUGH GILT.(83,152, 161, Cf: oVERCHARGED. on the upper cover and the Virgin 233, 236, 335, 343) gilt in the round. The fore edge of a book Mary on the lower, both in relief. The gilding a la anfique.See: GAUFFERED gildedafterthe bookissewn and spine of the binding is covered with EDGES. rounded, giving the fore edge the ap- a plate of silver decorated with foliate gilding bench. See: FINISHING PRESS. pearance of a solidgilt surface. Cf: designsinlowreliefbetween four gilding boards. Finishing boards made of GILT IN THE SQUARE. See also: RoUGH double raised bands. The doublures of hardwood,andsimilartoBACKING GILT. (156) silver are engraved with Farnese arms BOARDS, except that the top edge is gilt in the square. The fore edge of a and the names of Cardinals Allesandro flat instead of beveled. They are used book gilded after sewing but before and Odoardo Farnese. (347) to secure the book firmly while the rounding. This results in a white edge German paring knife. See: PARING KNIFE. edges are being gilt. (335) showing at the first and last sections ghatti gum. A gum obtained from the gilding powder. See: BLOCKING POWDER. after the book is subsequently rounded Indian sumac(Countrysumac,or gilding press (gilder's press). A type of and backed. Cf: GILT IN THE RoUND. "dhawi,"asitiscalledinIndia), press consisting of two wooden blocks See also: ROUGH GILT. (156) Anogeissus latifolia, and used as a sub- about 61/2inches square and 4 or 5 stitute for GUM ARABIC. (175) gilt marbled edges. The edges of a book feet long, fitted with two compression thathave been marbled, gift binding. In the usual application, a screws operating through brass chucks burnished, leather binding produced for presenta- in each block, and operated by means sized, gilded, and then burnished again. tion, such as a retirement signature of a bar inserted in the screw heads. VVhen itis properly done, the marble book. The term is also applied to that The available DAYLIGHT of the press is can be seen through the gold. In the part of an edition run which is bound generally sufficient to allow the press- usual case, however, the marbling is atthe publisher's order for thegift ing and gilding of the edges of several barely perceptible when the book is market. (156) hooks at a time. (256, 264) closed, but appears faintly when the gilder's tip. A camel-hair brush about 3 giltafter rounding. See: GILT IN THE leaves are fanned. This is because the to 4 inches in width, and used to pick ROUND. marbling colors penetrate slightly into up strips of gold leaf flat on the tips gilt all around. A term sometimes applied the paper giving the effect very much of the hairs. A tip of long hairsis to a book gilded on all threc edges. like the "hidden" FoRE-EDGE PAINTING, used to pick up whole leaves, while gilt edges. The edges of book which although the two techniques are com- one with short hairsis used for cut have been trimmed, sized, primed with pletely different. pieces of leaf. A tipisnot usually Armenian bole, covered with gold leaf, Gilt marbled edges is a French in- needed for metal leaf that is heavier and burnished.Inthisprocess,the vention of the17th century, and is and easier to handle than gold, but one leaves of the book are fanned and usually attributed to (LE) GASCON. It may he necessary for silver leaf, in dusted with French chalk and the book is sometimes found on English bindings which case a special tip with double is then clamped in the gilding press. from about the middle of the18th

122 gilt on landscapes 116 glacé

century, but it was never used exten- sively. (236, 241) gilt on 'andscapes. A fore-edge decora- tion consisting of a scene painted on the fore edge, whichisthen gilded and burni.shed. Only the gilt edge is seen until the leaves are fanned, where- upon the painting may he seen be- neath thegold. The name probably derives from the factthat most of these fore-edge paintings are of land- scape scenes. The practice of gilding on landscapes dates from the second half of the18th century. See also: EDWARDS OF HALIFAX; GILT MARBLED EDGES; FORE-EDGE PAINTING. (97, 241, 280) gilt on red. See: RED UNDER GOLD EDGES. gilt on the rough. See: ROUGH GILT. gilt solid. See: GILT IN THE ROUND. gilt top. See: TOP EDGE GILT. girdle book. A book which has an extra protectivecoveringofsoftleather made in such a manner that the hook can he hung from the girdle or habit cord of a cleric and swung upward for reading whilestillattachedtothe girdle or cord. Doeskin and deerskin were frequently employed for this type of binding, which was used in the mid- dle ages and early Renaissance, espe- cially in Germany. Devotional books or didactic works, or professional ref- erence hooks,e.g., law books, were most often hound in this manner, and the bindings were almost quite unpre- tentious. Very elegant bindings, how- ever, were producedinvelvetand brocade, to protect illuminated prayer hooks. Few intact girdle books have survived,asthe overlapping leather was usually cut off for reuse when the need for protection had passed. Also called "utilitarian protective bindings." (156, 183, 347) girdle calendar. A small medieval fold- ing calendar, so made that it could be suspended from thegirdleor habit cord of acleric,or from thebelt. Many hadcoversofstiffvellum sheathed in N elvet, sometimes overcast at the edges with silk thread, and orna- mented with balls and tassles. Such calendars generally showed the saints' days and other religious observances for each month, as wellas various astrological tables. They were generally written on fold-out leaves of vellum. (347) glace (glace (glazed) goat; glace (glazed) Girdle book. Breviarium, manuscript on paper, written in Southern Germany, kid). A vegetable or chrome tanned probably in the monastery of Kastl, near Nürnberg, in the year 1454. leather having a bright, smooth, glossy Spencer Collection Ms. 39, New York Public Library. or glass-like grain finish obtained, ac- (10.4 cm. by 7.5 cm.) cordingtothetypeofleather, by

1 23 glacial acetic acid 117 glucose-glycol paste

glazing, plating, ironing, or polishing. different from those of allcellulose face finished with a high gloss, such On the Continent of Europe, glace is papers; however, they do not bond to- as cloth, leather, or paper.See also: a leather prepared by tawing the skin gether as do cellulose fibers, and must, GLACE; GLAZED BOARD; GLAZING. (17) with a mixture of alum, salt, flour, and therefore, be used in mixtures with glazed board. A MILLBOARD, or other egg yolk. Glace leathers are .A:)metimes cellulose fibers, or bonded with syn- type of board, that has been given a used in bookbinding for ti..le labels on thetic resins. The two basic types of very smooth finish on the calenders. a contrasting leather. (306, 363) glass fibers are the drawn glass fila- It was used in library binding when glacialaceticacid. A pureformof ments and the blown glass fibers. (47) standingorhydraulicpresseswere ACETIC ACID. II is a crystalline, corro- glassine paper. A supercalendered paper used for the final pressing of books, sive substancethatismiscible with manufactured principally from chemi- its smoothness preventing it from im- water and alcohol. In solution itis a cal wood pulps which have been beaten parting any markings to the covers of pungent, hygroscopic liquid and a good to secure a high degree of stock hydra- the hooks being pressed. (274) solvent. tion. Glassine paper is grease resistant, glazed leather.See:GLACE. glair (glaire). The preparation used to has a high resistance to the passage of glazedmorocco. A MOROCCO leather secure leaf metal to the covering ma- air, and is almost impervious to the which has had its grain flattened by a terial or edges of a hook. It consists passage of water vapor.Itisalso calendering process, such as GLAZING, basically of egg white and vinegar, or, smooth and transparent, or semi-trans- as distinguished from CRUSHED MO- for the edges of a book, egg white and parent. It is made in white and various ROCCO. water. It may also he purchased in dry colors, and may also be made opaque glazing. The processof producinga form (dry ALBUMEN) and then mixed by the addition of fillers. Basis weights bright, glossy, or glasslike finish on with vinegar or water. Glair must have range from 12 to 90 pounds (24 X leather, paper, board, marbled or dec- the property (and be of the quality) 36 500), with the ordinary range orated papers, etc. Paper glazing may of melting immediately upon the ap- being from 15 to 40 pounds. Glassine he done by means of calendering, or plicationofheatandthensetting tape, which is the paper hacked, with hy applying wax over the surface of quickly upon the removal of heat, so a water-soluble adhesive, is sometimes the paper and then passing heated iron that the impression of the heated let- used to repair torn book leaves,al- over it. Leather is glazed, on the grain ter or finishing tool will melt the glair though it will eventually turn yellow side, by subjecting it to the action of to permit it to hold the leaf solidly to and may damage the paper. It is also a non-rotating solid glass (or agate or the surface when the tool is removed. used in lieu of cellulose acetate in the other suitable material) cylinder drawn Two methods of applying glair are suNDEX PROCESS of lamination.(17, across the grain under very high pres- generally employed. If the slight gloss 198, 324) sure. (17, 335) produced by the glair is not objection- glass paper. 1. A strong paper faced with gloss(glossiness). The surface charac- able, the glair may be sponged over powdered glass on one side and used teristic of a material which enables it the entire surface to he tooled, and in abrading or smoothing surfaces such to reflect light specularly and which would in any case be applied over the as wood or leather, or to remove sur- causes it to appear shiny or lustrous. entire edge of the book; however, if face marks from paper. It is sometimes Gloss is measured at various angles of the gloss is objectionable, the design called sandpaper, although sandpaper illumination, and, although itis sub- and/or lettering aretooled in blind is actually faced with sand or natural jectiveinnature,itisclearlyasso- and the glairis then applied to the flint and not glass. 2. A paper pro- ciated with the light reflecting proper- blind impressions with a GILDER'S TIP. duced from GLASS FIBERS. (237) ties of a surface. (17) See also:BLOCKING POWDER; SHELLAC glass transition temperature. That tem- gloster marble. A marble pattern very size. (335, 339) perature at which an adhesive loses its similar to the ANTIQUE MARBLE, except glair brush. An artists "ground" brush, flexibility and becomes hard, inflexible, that instead of the spot being a flat 3/4 inch wide, and with soft bristles and "glasslike." An adhesive which color, i.e., a color mixed with gall and set in rubber and used in applying glair reaches the "glass transition tempera- water alone, itcalls for a blue stor- to the edges of a book to be gilded. ture"is subject to failureif flexed. mont with no white beaten on after- (66) Glass transition temperatures for ad- ward. (369) glairingin. The processofapplying hesives vary greatly, from 105 C. glucose. A crystalline carbohydrate GLAIR over the lettering or design that (polymethyl methocrylate) to well be- (C6H1006), soluble in water, used as has been blinded in. (115) low 0° C. If flexibility is required of a substitute for the more expensive glair pencil. A small brush, e.g., camel's the adhesive, the glass transition tem- glycerine (glycerol) as a plasticizer for hair brush, used to pencil glair directly perature can be lowered, either by glue, and in making GLUCOSE-GLYCOL into the blinded in impressions before means of plasticizers, or a polymer with PASTE.See also:SORBITOL. (339) laying on the gold leaf. a naturally low glass transition tem- glucose-glycol paste. A paste containing glass fibers. One of the more unusual perature. glucose,in the form of corn syrup, man-made fibers being used commer- glassy layer. The dense fibrous structure and diethylene glycol (C6H1403), in cially in the manufacture of special found in the butt or SHELL area of the proportions of 35% original water, papers, although not at this time being horsehide. 10%diethyleneglycol,0.1%beta used to make printing papers. Glass glazed.1. A paper having a high gloss naphthol, 0.3% alum, 20% glucose, fibers are inert, or insensitive, to most or polish. The gloss is applied to the 19.6%flour, and 15% water from external influences, and, inaddition, paper either during manufacture or condensation of steam. The advantages are vermin proof, do not absorb mois- afterwards, by such means as calen- of this paste are stated to be that it is ture, or burn. Because of the physical dering,frictionglazing,plating, etc. suitable for use on pyroxylin impreg- nature of these fibers, the properties Glazed papers are used for book and nated book cloth and effectivelyre- of glass fiber papers are unique and cover papers, and the like. 2. Any sur- duces warpage of book covers. (339)

1 2.1 glue 118 gluing up glue. An adhesive consisting of organic proper conditions. One of the more Egyptians used glue more than 4,000 colloids of a complex protein structure interesting properties of animal glue years ago. The practical manufacture obtained from animal materials such solutions is their ability to pass from of glue can be traced back directly to as bones and hides in meat packing a liquid to a jelled state upon cooling, 1690 in the Netherlands. Shortly there- and tanning industries. Glue contains and then revert to the liquid state upon after, or about 1700, the English be- twogroupsofproteins:chor, re-heating. gan making glue and establishedits whichaccountsfor its adhe..ive The importantproperties of glue manufacture as a permanent industry. strength, and glutin, which contributes include its jelly strength or consistenk y Elijah Upjohn is considered by some jelling strength. (gell strength), viscosity, melting authorities to have been the firstto Animal glueisa protein derived point,adhesivestrength,tensile manufacture glue in the United States, from the simple hydrolysis of collagen, strength or elasticity, optical rotation, in 1808. which is the principal protein constitu- swelling capacity, rate of setting, foam- In addition to its use as an adhesive ent of animal hide, connective tissue ing characteristics, reactions to grease in bookbinding, glue is also used for and bones. Collagen, animal glue, and (whether acid or alkaline), as well as gumming, for tub-sizing paper, and as gelatin are very closely related as to appearance, odor, color and keeping a general adhesive in papermaking. proteinandchemicalcomposition. characteristics. Of these, gell strength The term "glue" is sometimes used Gelatin is considered to be hydrolized and viscosity are most often used for loosely in a general sense as synony- collagen: C102H14903sN31 + H20 determining the grade of a particular mous with "adhesive." (6, 102, 184, C10H151039N31, which gives an ap- glue. 185, 191, 196, 222, 233, 309, 335) proximate chemical compositionfor Regardless of the source of the pro- glue brush. A large, circular-shaped brush glue of 51.29% carbon, 6.39% hydro- tein, the glue manufacturing process with long, heavy bristles set in rubber gen, 24.13%oxygen,and18.19% consistsessentiallyofwashingthe or a composition, and held by a ferrule; nitrogen. There may be minor varia- stock, crushing or shredding the bones it is used for spreading glue over rela- tions in the composition of collagens or hides, soaking in a lime solution to tivelylargesurfaces.Glue brushes from different sources, as well as in eliminate hair and flesh, boiling to ex- range in diameter from about 13/4to the composition of animal glues im- tract the gelatinous material, gelling, 21/2 inches. (66, 264 parted by variations in processing tech- and, finally, drying. The resulting hard, glue line. The "line" at which the paper niques; however, the composition of brittle sheets of glue are then broken and adhesive meet in an adhesive bind- glues and gelatins having widely vary- into pieces or flakes, or ground into ing. The fibers of the paper flexat ing case histories are still very similar. powder. the "glue line," and may work their As a protein, animal glue is essen- Glue as such is much too brittle for way loose at this point, regardless of tially composed of polyamides of cer- use in bookbinding; therefore a plasti- the characteristics of the adhesive that tain alpha-amino acids. Itis believed cizer, such as glycerin, or a less ex- is used. (198) that these acids are not present in glue pensive substitute such as SORBITOL, glue pot. A container, frequently made of in the free state, but rather as residues often combined with glycols and tacki- copper and usually of a double boiler which are joined together by the elimi- fiers, are added to improve elasticity construction, in which glue is melted nation of water to form long polypep- and resilience. These so-called flexible and kept at the proper temperature, tide chains. glues are usually prepared from high which is in the range of 120 to 150 F. quality grades of hide glue, with the It is heated by gas,r, more often to- Glue is a polydisperse system con- ratio of plasticizer(s) to dry glue con- day, by electricity, either through a taining mixtures of similar molecules trolling the degree of flexibility that is water jacket, or directly through in- of widely differing molecular weights. imparted. In addition, glue, being an sulated walls.Itis usually controlled Because so wide a range of molecular organicmaterial,issusceptibleto by a thermostatifheated by elec- weights is present, the molecular weight mold; consequently preservatives, such tricity. Control of temperature is im- of glue is always an average, ranging as beta naphthol, or the safer phenols, portant, as overheating of animal glue from 20,000 to 250,000. e.g.,p-phenyl phenol, are added to results in a loss of gell strength. (183, Hide and bone glues make up the two prevent mold and bacterialgrowth. 335) major types of animal glue. Hide glue, Deodorants, such as terpinol, are also glue size. A size made of glue and soap which is by far the superior of the two, employed in commercial glues. mixed in water, in the proportions of yields a fairly neutral pH in solution, The wide acceptance of glue as an 1 part glue, 1 part soap, and 30 parts usually in the range of 6.5 to 7.4, al- adhesive stems from its unique ability water. Itis used for resizing papers, though wider variations are possible. to deposit a tacky viscous film from and also in sizing endpapers and other Bone glue is generally acidic, having a warm water solution, which, upon sheets following marbling or coloring. pH values of 5.8 to 6.3. A glue having cooling a few degrees, passes into a (335) a high acidity absorbs less water and firm jelly state producing an imme- gluing up (glue up; glue off; gluing off). tends to set more slowly than a glue diate, moderately strong initial bond. 1. The process of applying glue, or having low acidity. A glue having a Subsequent drying provides a perma- other adhesive, to the spine of a book pH greater than 7.0 tends to foam, and nent, strong, and resilient bond. following sewing. In edition binding, has a shorter shelf life than a glue that The use of glue as an adhesive dates gluing up is a machine operation, but is slightly acidic. from earliest recorded times. Whoever in library and hand binding it is gen- Animal glues are soluble only in discovered that a strong adhesive could erally done by hand. Usually, one of water, and are insoluble in oils, waxes, be produced by cooking pieces of ani- the polyvinyl adhesives, e.g., polyvinyl organic solvents, and absolute alcohol; mal hide, or perhaps bone, in water acetate, or a hot, flexible animal glue, however, they may be emulsified in has never been ascertained, but arche- or even a hot-melt adhesive is used. water-oil or oil-water systems under logicaldiscoveriesindicatethatthe The major purpose of gluing up is to glycerol 119 gold blocking

put the spine of the book in the proper the surface. Straight-grained goatskin cattle), which is the blind pouch orsac flexible condition for the molding op- is produced by rolling damp skins until in which the large intestine begins. The erations of rounding and backing. As all the furrows in the grain run in the gut is soaked in a dilute solution of these two processes were notintro- same direction, while crushed goatskins potassium hydroxide, washed, stretched, duced into bookbinding until the early have had the ridges flattened by iron- beaten flat and thin, and treated chem- part of the 16th century, gluing up was ing, rolling or plating. not done before that time. ically to prevent putrefaction. It is then Although MOROCCO, the best known stretchedtightlyand cementedto- There are advantages in using a rela- goatskin, was first produced by the gether, back to back, leaving the clear, tively slow drying adhesive in gluing Moors, possibly as early as the1 1 th smooth, veinless inside of the caecum up, as such an adhesive will remain century or before, the use of goatskin exposed. The sHonEa and MOLD stages tacky while the spine is shaped and the in Europe did not become common of GOLDBEATING are built up with these shoulders are set. until the first half of the 16th century, double skins of the ox. A mold of 1,000 2. The operation of gluing the cloth inItaly,and was not common in pieces of goldbeater's skin requires the or paper used for making covers or France until the second half of the gut of about 400 oxen, and is only 1 cases. (102, 236, 256, 335) 16th century. It was rarely used in Eng- inch thick when assembled. The pack glycerol (glycerin). A sweet,colorless, land before 1600. Since its rise to as- isbuilt up by interleaving the skins syrupy, hygroscopic trihydroxy alcohol cendancy, however, it has been the tra- with leaves of gold. Goldbeater's skin (C3H5(OH) 3 ), that occurs combined ditional skin used in fine bookbinding. is also used in the repair of holes and as glycerides, and is used as a hygro- See also: LEATHER; LEvANT; NIGER. (83, tears of vellum. (29) scopic agent in glue (mainly animal 102, 164, 207, 236, 291, 335, 363) goldbeater's tissue. An unbleached tissue glues) to enable it to remain relatively goat skiver. The grain split of a goatskin. paper, having a lint-free, hard surface, soft and flexible. Because itis hygro- See: SKIvER. See also: BUFFING (1); suitable for use as an interleaving tis- scopic, glycerol can actually absorb so FLESHER. sue between leaves of the gold book. much moisture that mold growths can goat vellum. A "vellum" made from goat- (17) develop unless an antiseptic is added goldbeating. The art or process of reduc- along with the softening agent. The skin. Although VELLUM can be, and has been, produced from virtually every ing gold into extremely thin leaves. high cost of glycerol has led to the sub- Goldbeating, which today is done al- stitution of other softening agents, such type of (relatively small) skin, it is tra- ditionally made from the skin of a calf. most entirely by mechanical devices, as SORBITOL and ðylene glycol. (339) some of which are designed to dupli- goatskin. Leather manufactured from a (154) goffered edges. See: GAUFFERED EDGES. cate the movement of the human arm, number of varieties of goats, especially involves melting the gold into a bar, of the genus Capra. There is little or no go home. A term sometimes applied to the proper and adequate adhesion of rolling itto a thickness of approxi- supply of domestic goatskin in either mately 1/1,000 inch, and then beating England or the United States; what the PASTEDOWN in the joint of a cased book. (97) itin three stages:the CUTCH (1), production there still is, mostly in Eng- SHODER, and MOLD (2), followed by land, is of skins imported from India, gold. A very malleable, ductile, yellow cutting and booking. When done by Pakistan, East and West Africa, South trivalent and univalent metal (Au) that mechanical devices, goldbeating is sim- Africa, and some from Southern Eu- occurs chiefly in the free state, is unaf- ply a manufacturing process, but when rope and Central and South America. fected by most chemicals but isat- done by hand it is an art. Supplies are also available from the tacked by chlorine and aqua regia, is The origin of gold beating is un- Far East. The green skins are dry- hardened or changed in color for use known; however, it is known that the salted, wet-salted, or simply dried, and in bookbinding and other art work by tombs of prominent Egyptians con- then baled for shipment to tanneries. alloying with copper, silver, or other tained artifacts bearing gold leaf, al- African skins frequently suffer from metals, and which has been used for though not of the quality and thinness damage due to disease and improper centuries to illuminate manuscripts, as produced today. See also: GOLD LEAF. drying and are usually not suitable for well as to letter and decorate leather (29) use as bookbinding leather; however, and other bookbindings. See also: GILT gold blocking. The decorative effect Nigerian pro- goatskinsarefrequently EDGES; GOLD BLOCKING; GOLD LEAF; duced by blocking the covers of books among the finest available. Some goat- GOLD ROLL; GOLD TOOLING. (29, 102, in gold. The practice began in the early skins are tanned, but generally not fin- 131, 161) 16th centuiy, probably first with the ished, in the country of origin, prin- gold and silver bindings. Bookbindings use of wooden blocks, although metal cipallyin India(East India(E.I.) having boards overlaid with thin panels blocks were also in use during the 16th tanned), but also small quantities in of gold or silver, often in hammered century. Nearly all gold blocking of Africa. Most goatskin for use in book- relief, and sometimes inlaid with ivory, that time is very deeply impressed, pos- binding is vegetable tanned, butsome enamel, or jewels. Most of these bind- sibly because cf the use of soft paste- skins are alum tawed. Some skins are ings date from the 6th to the 13th cen- boards under the leather, and possibly even tanned by a combination vege- turies and were frequently executed for because thc blocking pressure was dif- table and chrome process. wealthy monasteries or churches to en- ficult to estimate accurately because the Goatskin is tougher and more tightly close their more valuable manuscripts. blocking had to be done in a screw fibered than sheepskin, has' a hard- Very few have survived intact. (347) press; if, under these circumstances, the wearing grain,and, when properly gold and silver headband. A double HEAD- block began to get too cool, very great tanned, can last for centuries. It colors BAND made up of gold- and silver- pressure would have been required. As beautifully and has a distinctive texture colored threads. (152) the impressions made were often very identified by ridges and furrows in the goldbeater's skin. The prepared outer uneven in depth, such refinements as grain, and hair pits in groups all over coat of the caecum of the ox (or other "make-ready" must have been un-

126 gold book 120 gold tooling

known to bookbinders of that time. types of leaf are also available, includ- cule gold dots and (sometimes) gold Blind lines, forming a cross, were ing lemon gold (181/2 karat) and pale leaf rubbed into the leather. (347) frequently marked on the covers as gold (16 karat). Since these are alloyed gold roll. GOLD LEAF carried on a trans- recently as the early 19th century to with the less malleable silver, they are parent plastic tape. It is produced by assist in positioning the block precisely. somewhat thickerand consequently plating the ribbonelectricallyina The area was coated with glair, the easier to handle than the more nearly vacuum chamber, and then applying an gold leaf was laid on, the heated block pure gold. Gold leafisavailable in adhesive to the gold to make it adhere was then centered on the intersection books of 25 leaves, interleaved with to the surface to which itis applied. of the lines (which can usually be seen sheets of tissue dusted with chalk to Gold in roll form is used extensively extending beyond the gilt impression), prevent them from sticking together. in lettering library bindings and in the and the platen of the press was lowered It is also available in ribbon form (See: production of superior edition bind- onto the cover. It is quite likely that the GOLD ROLL). Some gold leaf is made in ings. (276, 339) covers were sometimes first blinded in double thickness, and is believed to be gold rubber. Pure rubber soaked in tur- before being blocked in gold. See also: the equivalent of pre-19th century leaf, pentine, or treated with paraffinto BLOCKING PRESS. (236) as old writings and handling instruc- make it absorbent, and used to lemove gold book. A paper book, usually 33/4 tions indicate a less fragile and more superfluous gold leaf after tooling. Also inches square, containing 25 sheets of easily manipulated metal than the mod- called "bottle rubber." See also: G!LD- gold leaf interspersed between leaves ern day product. Double thick leaf is ER'STIP; RUBBING-OFF CHEST.(92, of goldbeaters tissues which have been especiallyusefulwhengildingthe 264, 335) dusted with chalk. edges of books, asitgives a more gold size. See: BLOCKING POWDER; GLAIR; gold cleaner. A pointed instrument of "solid" effect thanisobtainable by SHELLAC SIZE. metal or wood used to clean out sur- using gold leaf of the usual thickness. gold sprinkle. A 19th century technique plus gold after tooling. Gold leaf is the traditional metal used of decorating the edges of a book in gold cushion. A pad on which a sheet of on books for lettering, edge gilding, which pulverized gold leaf is sprinkled gold leafisplaced forcuttingthe and embellishment. In terms of beauty on the edges after they have been col- pieces required for tooling. It usually anddurabilityithasneverbeen ored. See also: SPRINKLED EDGES. (97, consists of a piece of wood padded equalled by any of the less expensive 152, 241) with blotting paper, cotton wool, or the substitutes that have been available for gold tip. See: GILDER'S TIP. like, and covered with calfskin, flesh more than a century. See also: DUTCH gold tooling. The art or process of letter- side out, and powdered with brick dust. GOLD; GILT EDGES; GOLDBEATING; GOLD ing and/or decorating the spine and A stiff piece of paper is sometimes at- BLOCKING; GOLD TOOLING; SHELL GOLD. covers of a book with GOLD LEAF (Or, tached to the rear edge, and run around (29, 140, 236) at times, other metals, e.g., ) the sides to enclose about one-third of gold lifter. A shaped piece of wood, the impressed into the covering material, the cushion, as a sort of windshield to flat under surface of which is covered usually leather, by means of a heated protect the fragile leaves from air cur- with felt.Itis used to pick up gold letter, lettering pallet, or finishing tool. rents. (233, 335, 343) leaf. See also: GOLD NET FRAME. (115) In the traditional method of gold gold edges. A term at one time applied to gold marble. A type of cover marble pro- tooling, the lettering or design is first a book when the edges had been gilded. duced by breaking gold leaf into frag- blindedin,generallyfirstthrough See: GILT EDGES. (274) ments on a piece of cloth, and rubbing paper, and then again directly on the gold foil. See: BLOCKING FOIL. the gold through the cloth onto the leather. The second working of the tool gold ink. An ink of the color of gold, pre- glaired covers of the book. (152, 241) polishes the base of the impression and pared by mixing gold-colored bronze goldmark. Gold leaf prepared in a form assists in creating a particular brilliance powder in a size. (261) which permits writing or decorating in in the tooling. An adhesive (glair)is gold knife. A flat-bladed knife, the blade gold without the use of heat. Goldmark applied to the leather (either 11 over of which is about 6 inches long and is laid on leather, plastic, paper, etc., or directly into the blind impressions); inch wide. It has a smooth moderately and inscribed with a stylus which pro- strips of gold leaf are laid over the im- sharp cutting edge on one or both sides. duces a gold facsimile. Also called pressions and held in place temporarily It is used to manipulate GOLD LEAF and "cold gold." See also: BLOCKING FOIL. with a thin film of vaseline or grease; to cutitto the required sizes and (234) and the gold is then pressed perma- shapes.Theknifemust besharp gold net frame. A thin piece of cloth, nently into place with the heated tool. enough to cut the leaf with a single usually nearly transparent, stretched on When done properly, the affinity of the back-and-forth stroke but not so sharp a frame that can be adjusted for tension gold for leather is such that it will prac- asto cut theleather of the GOLD on the cloth, and used to pick up gold tically never come off;nor willit CUSHION. See also: GILDER'S TIP. (237) leaf. See also: GOLD LIFTER. (29, 83) tarnish. gold leaf. A sheet of gold 31Ainches gold powder. Pulverized gold leaf dis- Gold tooling must be ranked as one squareofaneventhicknessof persed in an aqueous binder and used of the most important in 1/200,000 to 1/250,000 inch, and used intheilluminationofmanuscripts. the history of bookbinding. Its origins in lettering and decorating bookbind- Gold powder is both difficult to obtain are somewhat obscure, but it was prob- ings, and in other artistic work. The and more expensive than gold leaf. See ably introduced into Europe by way of gold leaf used in bookbinding is gen- also: SHELL GOLD. (233) Italy, and spread throughout the rest erally 23 to 231/4 karat, the remaining gold-powdered bindings. Leather book- of Europe and England, eventually ar- 1 to 3/4 karat being silver and copper. bindings produced during the period of riving in America. There is some evi- The alloy depends on the finished color about 1560 to 1570, and usually tooled dence that the technique may have desired, ranging from a delicate red with a simple design and then given a been practiced in Morocco in the 13th through yellow to pale green. Other "powdered" effect by means of minis- century, but this is not conclusive. It good seconds 121 grained up

has also been proposed that gold tool- the northeastern part of Spain. The fer-file boxes. (17) ing was introduced into Italy by way of style has affinities with a class of early grainedleather. See: BOARDING (1); Persia (now Iran) where bookbinding Italian bindings in which the plan of GRAINED UP. and gildingflourishedintheearly decoration is Gothic, but the execution grained skiver. A SKIVER produced from decades of the 15th century. is carried out with small tools similar the flesh split of a sheepskin, dyed and Very early gold tooling is difficult to to those used on mudéjar bindings. The embossed with a grain pattern. evaluate because it is uncertain whether bindingsareusuallyofCORDOVAN grained up. The process or effect of rais- the gold was actually impressed into LEATHER andmosthavewooden ing the grain of a leather, usually by the leather with a (hot) tool, or was boards. (330) wetting and rubbing the grain side with paintedintoblindimpressions. The gouffered edges.See:GAUFFERED EDGES. the hand or a piece of cork, causing the evidence offered by some bindings, i.e., gouge. A single-line finishing tool, used grain to rise. Graining up is usually the absence of impressions deep enough either for blind or gold tooling on the done after the leather has been pared; to indicate tooling, as well as what ap- covers but not the spine of a book. It its purpose is to correct the flattened pear to be brush marks in the gold, has a curved edge which forms a seg- would seem to indicate painting. Be- ment of a concentric circle. Gouges are cause of the elapsed time, however, generally made in sets of ten, and, if a GOUGE which has led to the inevitable de- series of concentric circles are drawn terioration of the materials, it is diffi- aboutI i()inch apart,thelinesim- cult to differentiate between the two pressed by each succeeding gouge will techniques. In any event, books were be longer and flatter.So-calledflat actually being tooled in gold in Venice curved gouges are those derived from no later than 1470, and possibly sev- an even larger circle, and are therefore eral years earlier. Gold-tooled leather less curved than regular gouges. When bindings were not common in England tooling, the gougeis always sighted before about 1530, and not inthe from the concave side. (161, 335) United States until about 1669. The universal adoption of gold tool- gouge index.See:THUMB INDEX. ing was by no means immediate, and, governmental style. An obsolete term for in fact, blind tooling was still the pre- full leather bindings in law calf, sheep, dominant form of decorationuntil or skiver. (256) about 1580, or even 1600.See also: grade. Materials listed in an order (or dis- FINISHING (1). (141, 158, 225, 236, tinguishedfromother,comparable 347) materials) on the basis of use, appear- good seconds. A grade of leather skins ance,quality,manufacturing,raw which are superior to SECONDS but not materials, performance, or a combina- as good as FIRSTS (1 ). "Good seconds" tion of these factors. Some "grades," are somewhat less expensive than firsts, such as of cloth, leather, and paper (or the flaws are less numerous than in board), have been officially identified seconds, and what flaws there are can and described, while others are com- often be avoided by careful cutting. monly recognized but are not officially (335) defined. (17) Gosden, Thomas (1780-1840). An Eng- grain.1.In machine-made paper and lish bookbinder, book collector, book- board, the direction in wi,ich the ma- seller, and publisher, known asthe jority of the fibers are oriented.See: "sporting binder," because most of his MACHINE DIRECTION. 2. In leather, the bindings were of books devoted to term is used primarily to indicate the sports. The pecularity of his style and top or outer, i.e., hair side, layer of a the reason he is remembered is that he hide or skin that has been split into tw, used tools cut in the forms of fish, or more layers. A "grain layer," is jus' reels,rods,baskets, and sportsmen. that portion of a skin that extends from (50, 339) the surface exposed by removal of hair Gothic tabs. Identifying cloth tabs used or wool and epidermis, down to abou with the cut-in or THUMB INDEX. The the level of the hair or wool roots. I, cloth tabs, each with identifying letter can also mean the follicle pattern vis- or letters, are glued to the first full leaf ible on the outer surface of a skin after of each section devoted to that part of the hair or wool and epidermis have the alphabet. The name derives from been removed.See also:GRAIN PAT- the type style used by the firms supply- TERN. 3. In cloth, the "grain" is the ing the tabs. Gothic (cloth) tabs are direction of the WARP threads. (143, seldom used today. (264) 234, 291, 320, 363) geotico-mutiejar style. A variation of the grain direction.See:MACHINE DIRECTION. MUDCJAR STYLE, i.e., mudéjar bindings grained jute board. A jute-lined board influenced by Gothic techniques. printed with a grained effect. Rigid and Such bindings were executed from the resistant to scuffing, it is used mainly 13th to the 15th centuries largely in for inexpensive book covers or trans-

1 2s graining 122 Greek style

condition of the grain caused by the which contains the hair follicles, sudo- granite marble. A marble pattern pro- pressureofparing."Grainedup" riferous and sebaceous glands, etc., i.e., duced by sprinkling black (lampblack) usually refers to the process employed the thermostat layer. (363) coloring in very fine drops over the by the bookbinder and is not to be con- grain long. A term sometimes used in entire surface of the sheet several times, fused with BOARDING (1), which is c paper manufacture to indicate that the followed by brown coloring. The paper process employed by the leather manu- grain or MACHINE DIRECTION Of the isthen embossed andglaired. The facturer. (97) paper is parallel to the larger dimen- effect is supposed to resemble granite. graining. 1. The process of applying an sion of the sheet. Cf: GRAIN SHORT. (152) all-over pattern to cloth, either during (125) grass. See. ESPARTO (GRASS). manufacture or by rolling the cloth be- grain pattern. The design on the outersur- grass cloth. A lustrous, plain, usually tween embossing plates. 2. The process face of leather produced by the arrange- looselywovenfabricmanufactured or result of printing various designs on ment of the hair follicles and pores, chieflyintheOrient from various paper or board to simulate various characteristic of the species and age of grasses and other vegetable fibers, espe- wood grains, marble, etc., generally for the animals from which the leather is cially RAMIE, and used for lining the use as cover papers. 3. See: BOARDING produced. In general, the younger the spines of books, particularlyinthe (1). 4. See: EMBOSSING (1). (94, 164) animal the finer the grain structure. area of manufacture. (142) graining board. An instrument used for The skin of the female of the species is gray cloth (gray goods). A fabric which creasing hides and skins, or BOARDING usually of a finer grain than the male. has not been bleached, dyed or other- (1), so as to produce certain grain ef- The less hair or wool there is on the wise finished. It is the base fabric used fectsin the leather. The implement animal the tougher and stronger the in the manufacture of Boox CLOTH. consists of a curved board faced with leather, especially the grain surface. greaseproof. A descriptive term applied a thick sheet of cork, and having a Because of their durability, uniformity, to a book cloth treated in such a man- handle on the upper side. Effective use beauty, and form, grain patterns repre- ner that it will permit no penetration of the graining board calls for consid- sent one of the most appealing and by oleic acid within a period of 5 min- erable pressure, as the greater the pres- highly prized characteristics of leather, utes, as determined by the RING TEST. sure exerted, the sharper the creases and it is for this reason that imitation (341) produced and the closer their spacing, grains are often embossed on inferior Great Omar. A binding of Vedder's il- both of which are considered desirable. quality leathLrs and even printedor lustrated edition of the Rubaiyat of Graining boards have beenlargely embossed on other materials, such as Omar Khayyam, measuring 16 by 13 superseded by the boarding machine. cloth and plastic. (291, 363) inches, and decorated according to the (306) grain short. A term sometimes used in designsoftheEnglishbookbinder grainingbrush. A decorator'sbrush, paper manufacture to indicate that the Francis Sangorski. The Great Omar about 4 inches in width, used to obtain grain or MACHINE DIRECTION Of the was covered in green levant morocco, brush-grained effects on paste-grained paper is parallel to the shorter dimen- and had the same green leather doub- endpapers. (335) sion of the sheet. Cf: GRAIN LONG. lures, while brown leather was used for graining combs. Combs made of wood, (125) the flyleaves. All were decorated in a metal, hard rubber, or plastic, or dec- grain side. The outer, or hair side of a most lavish manner, each to a different orator's metal combs, used to produce hide or skin. See: GRAIN (2); GRAIN design, making a total of six designs. grained effects on paste-grained end- PATTERN. In addition to the extremely elaborate papers. (231,335) grain split. The outer, or hair layer of a goldtooling,therewere numerous graining plates. Plates used to impart a hide or skin that has been split into sunken panels, thousands of colored diced pattern to the leather covering of two or more layers. inlays, as well as some 1,050 jewels, a book. They were invented by John grainy. 1. An exaggerated, delicate mo- includinggarnets,olivines,, Bohn, a German immigrant in England saic pattern of extremely minute de- topazes, and . The decora- in about 1796. Early plates were made pressions in a hide or skin extending tion of the lower cover had as its cen- of brass or wood and were able to im- inward from the bellies, and consisting tral feature a model of a Persian man- part a deeper impression than that ob- actually of the pattern of the blood dolin made of mahogany, inlaid with tained by calendering.Laterplates vessels of the skin projected onto the silver, satinwood, and ebony. were made of metal. As the lines were grain surface.2. Slight variations in The magnificent binding, which took placed diagonally in one direction only, thesurface appearance of a paper nearly 2 years to complete, was prob- two impressions were required to pro- caused by severalfactors,including al* the most lavishly decorated book- duce the diced effect. They were also the impressions of wires and felts of bindingeverproduced. The Great superior to calendering in that the dic- the papermaking machine,irregular Omar was the last of a series of Omars ing could be done following covering. distribution of color, uneven shrinkage executed by the firm of Sangorski and The simple graining plates for dicing during drying, etc. (17, 363) Sutcliffe,of London. Unfortunately, soon evolved into more elaborate plates grainy edges. A rough surface of a paper only reproductions of the binding, also for impressing fish scales, squares, etc. which sometimes extends for varying produced by Sangorski and Sutcliffe, One reason they were popular was their distances in from the edge of a sheet now exist, the original having been lost capability for covering blemishes in the as formed and dried on the papermak- in the sinking of the Titanic, and a later leather. (236) ing machine. (17) copy being destroyed in the Second grain layer. That portion of a hide or skin grangerized. See: EXTRA-ILLUSTRATED. World War. (236, 319) extending from the surface exposed by granite board. Any board with anem- Greek style. A 15th and 16th century. the removal of the hair or wool and bossed pattern or design resembling style of blind tooled binding in which epide Es down to about the level of granite and used for decorative book the books had spines rising at head and the hair or wool roots. It is the layer covers. tail to protect the thick double head- green 123 grooves

bands, which were striped in bright ported from the Indian Subcontinent in his early years (including many of red and blue. The thick wooden boards in the "greer. salted state." See also: his Aldine volumes) possess the dis- had grooved edges, and clasp straps of BRINING; WET-SALTING. (248) tinguishingcharacteristicsofItalian triple braided thongs fastened to pins green salting. See: WET-SALTING. binding of the time he lived in Italy. set in the grooves. Greek texts, or even green vitroil. See: FERROUS SULFATE. The Grolier bindings, the designs of translationsfromtheGreek,were grid. A decorative ornament often used which have been imitated more than bound in this manner in France and on heads-in-medallions rolls. It consists those of any other style, with the pos- Italy, probably by Greek craftsmen. essentially of two horizontal lines with sible exception of the pointillé bind- (156, 347) a few short vertical bars in between, ings,are usually classified into two green.1. An uncured hide or skin,usu- with foliage on the sides. (250) distinct groups:I ) those executed ex- ally one just removed from the animal. Grimaldi, Giovanni Battista. The biblio- pressly for him; and 2) those bound 2. An incompletely driedsheet of phile whose collection was long con- before he acquired them either through paper or board. sidered to have been brought together purchase or gift. green agate marble. A cover marble con- by Demetrio Canevari, physician to Although the bindings executed for sistingof black sprinkledinlarge Pope Urban VIII. The bindings were Grolier are distinctly similar in style, drops; these unite and are followed at produced byVenetian bookbinders, they vary considerably in their orna- regular intervals by green, whichis probably between 1535 and 1560, and mentation. Thedesignsgenerally spread on the cover to unite with the were subsequently inherited by Cane- consist of a geometrical pattern, occa- black. (97, 152) vari. The bindings feature fine-figured sionally colored, combined with ara- green earth. A natural earth similar in borders of gold-tooled decoration, with besque work, which issolid, azured, composition to the mineral glauconite. painted oval cameos of Apol:o driving or only outlined. On some of his bind- Itis used mainly as a base for the his chariot drawn by two horses to- ings, however, the geometrical pattern precipitation of malachite green dye- ward Pegasus. There are two varieties has no arabesques, while in others the stuff to form the pigment known as of this elliptical cameo stamp, with the arabesque work is found without the lime green. greater diameter of the larger being geometrical design. Nearly all of the green fleshing. A method of applying perpendicular and that of the smaller books of the first class, as well as many mechanical action to hides or skins horizontal. On some of the bindings of those of the second, include the after they have been soaked to a soft- the title appears on both covers in a altruisticinscription,lo.Grolierii et ened condition. Itis done by scraping cartouche above the stamp. See also: Atnicorvrn (of Jean Grolier and his the flesh side with a curved blade on CAMEO BINDINGS. (168, 347) friends), usually at the tail edge of the the beam, or, in the usual manner to- Grolieresque. A term generally applied upper cover, which he apparently bor- day, in a fleshing machine. In the tan- to the style of binding associated with rowed from his contemporary, Mahieu. ning of heavy leather, FLESHING fre- the name Grolier. See: JEAN GROLIER. Both covers of most of Grolier's bind- quently takes place following liming In many respects it is an ial style for ingsfeaturea central compartment, and unhairing; however, green fleshing, tooling in gold, depending tor its effect usually containing the title of the book which takes place before liming, has on graceful geometrical strapwork. See on ine upper cover, and the expres- several advantages:1)itprovides a also: MAIOLI STYLE. (156, 286) sion Portia Mea, Dotnine, Sit in Terra more uniform grain surface for un- Grolier,Jean(1479-1565). The16th Vivetivtn (Let my portion, 0 Lord. hairing and helps prevent grain dam- century bibliophile, Jean Grolier Ce be in the land of the living), on the age during machine unhairing; 2) the Servin,vicomted'aquisy.Although lower cover. Other legends alio at times physical compression by both the fe,:.d Jean Grolier is regarded correctly as a appear on his bindings. rolls and fleshing cylinder materially French bibliophile, the bindings exe- Grolier's signature, or hismotto, preventexcessive plumpingofthe cuted for him were essentially Italian with several slight variations,isfre- softened hide fibers during subsequent in their principles of design. Grolier quently found in his own hand inside liming;3) acomparativelythick possessed one of the finest private li- the books he collected before about flesh, particularly one of a fatty nature, braries of his time (and possibly any 1536. This was usually written at the reduces soaking, bactericidal, and lim- other time), consisting of some 3,000 back. ing effects; and 4) the formation of volumes contained within bindings of There are two distinct features to calcium soaps during liming and oily superlative richness and beauty. Grolier's bindings which were not con- matter during tanningisheldtoa Grolier lived in Italy, with only a sistently practiced by other contempo- minimum, particularly when poor or few interruptions, between 1510 and rary collectors: 1) the pastedowns are insufficient curing has resulted in the about 1525, and, while there, became vellum,followed by two conjugate presence of free fatty acids in the fatty the friend of the celebrated printer, white paper flyleaves, which are fol- tissue.Also called "soakfleshing." Aldus Manutius. It is said that in ap- lowe,i by a vellum leaf conjugate with (306) preciation of Grolier's friendship and the pastedown, which is followed by green porphyry marble. A cover marble financial assistance, Aldus printed sev- a final conjugate pair of paper leaves; executed by sprinkling green in very eral copies on vellum or large paper and 2) the edges are gilt but not gauf- fine drops, allowing the color to spread forGrolier,several of which were fered or otherwise further embellished. and dry between sprinklings. To form dedicated to him. See PLATE IV. (59, 132, 141, 245, 273, a more elegant vein, the cover is first Grolier is believed to have patron- 279, 285, 347) sprinkled with weak black followed by ized several binders over the years he grooves.I . The V-shaped or rectangular the greerr and, when this is dry, by a collected, including Claude de Picques, incisions made on the outside of the fine red. (152) andtheso-calledfleur-de-lisand boards connecting the holes made for green salted. A hide or skin that has been cupid's bow binders. LACING-IN with the edges of the board. cured with salt. Many skins are ex- The books which Grolier acquired The use of grooves in craft bookbind-

1 3 u 124 guarded endpaper

ing was not common until the end of pulp. "Groundwood free" is actually thesewing thread fromtearing the 18th century, which is somewhat interpreted to mean that the paper or through. This type of repair is some- surprising because itis an important board contains less than 5% mechani- times required after a book has been technique, in that, while the weakening cal wood pulp. (17) pulledforrebinding,either because effect on the board is only slight,it groundwood printing papers. Papers of the folds of the section were torn be- permitsthickcordstobelaced-in the same general type as BOOK PAPERS. cause the sewing thread pulled through without unattractive lumps being seen As the name suggests, they contain a the paper, or the outer fold was dam- under the covering leather. In the 19th proportion of mechanical wood pulp, aged during the removal of the old century, however, the insistence upon but it is a pulp carefully prepared, and glue on the spine. A guard may also neatness and ultra-fine finish led many therefore clean and bright. The use of be required for leaves or plates that bookbinders to reduce the thickness of mechanical pulp for this type of print- have become frayed or detached at the slips greatly before lacing-in, even ing paper improves important charac- the inner edge. The material used for though grooves were stillcut. Since teristics of the paper, such as retention the guard must be strong yet thin so lacing-in of the cords is one of the of loadings, high bulk, greater opacity as not to cause undue swelling in the major differences between a cased and for the basis weight, improved softness, spine of the book. When paper is used a bound book, the reduction of cord and a smoother finish. They are, how- for the guard, RS MACHINE DIRECTION thickness reduces the strength consid- ever, inferior to the chemical wood should run from head to tail of the erably. pulp papers in both permanency and section. 2. A strip of cloth or paper on Douglass Cockerell was the fil or brightness. They are made in a number which an illustration, map, etc., may one of the first, craftsmen to show of furnishes ranging from approxi- be attached and sewn through with that the slight projection of the cords mately 75% mechanical pulp to about the section, thus allowing free flexing. was acceptable not only becauseit 20 to 25% mechanical, the balance Four-page (two folios) plate units are showed that the book was solidly con- being chemical pulp. They are sized, also strengthened in this manner be- structed, but because the lumps ac- finished, colored, loaded, and coated in fore sewing. A leaf to be positioned at tually provided a starting point for the various ways to make them suitable for the beginning or end of a section is decoration of the book. virtually any printing process. Their life guarded on the inside, while an in- Grooves in the shape of an inverted expectancy, however, even under good terior leaf is guarded on the outside. V, ending with a hole to take the cord storage conditions,is probably under In both cases the sewing thread passes to the inside of the board is the usual 25 years. (17. 72, 324) through the center of the guard.See method of cutting; however, the tend- also:COMPENSATION GUARD; CONTINU- groundwoodpulp.See: MECHANICAL ency today is to cut a groove ending WOOD PULP. OUS GUARD; GUARDED IN; PLATE in a rectangular slot at right angles to ATTACHMENT; REVERSED V-GUARD; growing flower. A form of ornamentation the groove. THROW OUT. 3. See: STUB (1). (83, 2. The depression along the binding of a ROLL ( 1 ), consisting of a flattened 107, 161, 335) edge of the upper and lower covers of elliptical base with a stem and leaves ending in two flowers, the tops of which guard book. A book containing compen- a book.See:JOINT (1). 3. The space curve outwards. (250) sation guards equal to the anticipated between the board and spine of a book thickness of the additional matter to having an open joint.See:FRENCH grubby hides. Hides that have been dam- be added at a later time. The guards JOINT.See also:CLOSED JOINT. 4 Cuts aged by grubs of the warble fly.See are sewn with the book and are in- made in the spine of a text block in also:PEPPER BOXES; WARBLES. tended to prevent gaping of the boards the shape of an inverted V, into which g.t. (g.t.e.). Abbreviation for gilt top, or or damage to the spine when the book cords are recessed when sewing single gilt top edge.See:TOP EDGE GILT. isfilled with photographs, clippings, leaves.See also:KERF. (83, 196. 236) guard. 1. A strip of cloth or paper pasted etc. Also called "stub book." (82, 343) grosgrain. A firm,plain-weavefabric, around or into a section of a book so guarded endpaper. A section which has generally with a silk or rayon warp as to reinforce the paper and prevent hadalinen GUARD (1)wrapped and a heavy cotton filling that forms pronounced cross ribs. It is sometimes used as a covering material for books. GUARD BOOK (25) ground substance. An amorphous back- ground material in which the cells and fibers of collagen are embedded. It is a colloidal substance in the form of a gel, and has the capacity of binding varying amounts of water. The bound water serves as a medium for the dif- fusion of gases and metabolic sub- stances from the blood vessels to the cells of the tissues, and vice versa, of the living animal. A certain amount of ground substance is removed during the leathermanufacturingprocess.(26, 291) groundwood free paper. A paper or board thatcontains nomechanical wood guarded in 125 gum arabic

around hoth it and the endpaper so as with the trimming line at the head of some moderncuttersisautomatic to effectively make one unit of the the text block, and the second tipped spacing, which causes the back gauge two. Its purpose isto provide addi- to the hack endpaper with the edge to move a pre-determined distance fol- tionalstrengthatthepoint where even with the trimming line at the tail. lowing each cut. greatest flexing occurs, which isbe- Guide boards are used to control the Modern electronic guillotines have tween the endpaper and the first leaf squareness of the book in the lying movements which are actuated by a of the section. The guard isusually press and to prevent crushing of the series of relays and contactors brought attached so that not more than 3/16 shoulders of the text block when the into operation through the medium of inch of the linen appears on the ex- press is closed on it. (196) a number of thyratrons, tubes, and posed leaf of the section, while gen- guide of fair value. A statement drawn up photoelectric eye units. All operations erally 11/4 inches in on the unexposed in 1948 by the Joint Committee ui the are mechanical, and are set into motion side of the endpaper. In a case binding American Library Association and the by push or by tripping micro the guard is tipped to both the section Library Binding Institute, establishing switches which control the electronic and the endpaper,butina hand- "fair" prices for library binding, res- circuit and, therefore, the cutter. hound book, because both section and toration of valuable books, and the Modern guillotines also have safety endpaper are sewn (through the linen), transportation of library materials. The devices which reduce the element of the guard is tipped only to the section. statement is now obsolete. (131) risk, assuming that the proper precau- In case binding the guard also elimi- guide word.See: CATCHWORD. tions are taken and the mechanism is nates the necessity of tipping the end- guild of contemporary bookbinders.See: not altered. Controls are designed to paper to the first leaf of the section DESIGNER BOOKBINDERS. require that both hands be used to and thus eliminates drag on the leaf. guilloche. A design used in finishing a activate the final clamp pressure and In a hand-bound book (where the end- book, consisting of two or more bands cutting operations, and the machines paper is not tipped to the section) one intertwining and forming a continuous are designed to stop the knife at the top guard strengthens the folds of both the series, leaving circular openings filled of the stroke without possibility of a endpaper and section; were two guards with round devices. (94, 261) repeat cut. to be used instead of the one, the guard guillotine. A machine used for cutting Guillotines came into use in the late would appear on the first printed page large numbers of sheets of paper and 1830s, when, in 1837, Thirault built a of the book. board, and also in library binding for model with a fixed blade. In 1844 and guarded in.Plates which areinserted trimming the edges of books. The typi- 1852 Guillaume Massiquot patented into a book without being tipped to cal guillotine, which is designed to cut machines similar to those in use today. one of the leaves of the book. The comparatively large edge lengths, is a Since the middle of the 19th century paper area of the plate is wider than single-knife cutter, in which a heavy considerable improvements have been the leaves of the book, the projecting blade descends between vertical run- made by Fomm and Krause of Ger- part being wrapped around the fold ners. many, Furnival in England, and Os- of the section. A narrow strip of paper The principal parts of the guillotine wego and Seybold in the United States. appears elsewhere in the book as a are a table on which the material to be (89, 145, 236, 320) consequence. cutispiled; a movable back gauge guinea edge. Ornamentation of the edges guarding. The operation of attaching a (called the "back fence" in Europe), of the covers of a book produced by GUARD (2) for the purpose of provid- perpendiculartothetable,against means of a fillet which has an engraved ing a hinge for a map, illustration, etc., which the back edge of the pile rests; pattern resembling the edge of an old to strengthen the fold between two a clamp (or press beam) which com- gold guinea. (94) conjugate leaves, or to assist in reliev- presses and secures the front edge of gum. Any of a number of colloidal poly- ing the strain of the endpaper caused the pile, i.e., the edge to be cut; and a saccharides of high molecular weight, bythe opening of the book.See: knife (or cutter)fixedina cutting which can be dispersed in either cold GUARDED ENDPAPER; GUARDED IN; beam which descends immediately in or hot water to produce various mix- GUARDING IN PAIRS; PLATE ATTACH- front of the clamp, cutting through the tures or solutions, and which display MENT. (335, 343) pile, and stopping at a cutting stick set good flow and tack characteristics.See guarding in pairs. A method of securing into the table. Pressure can be applied also: GHATT1 GUM; GUM ARABIC; GUM two plates to one GUARD (1). While by hand with a screw spindle, but elec- SANDARACH; GUM TRAGACANTH; KARAYA the positioning of the guard y.ithin the tric power is usual on both large and GUM. (175,309) section may or may not allow for small machines. gum arabic. A water-soluble gum obtained All guillotines built for the printing from several species of the acacia tree, either or both sides to be located near and binding trades permit the squaring the accompanying text material, guard- especiallyAcacia senegalandA. ara- ing in this manner may help alleviate of a sheet, or section, provided that bica,and used in the manufacture of some of the swelling caused by the none of the dimensions exceeds the adhesives and ink, and as a binding thickness of the material used for the cutting length of the machine. Gen- medium for marbling colors. Histori- guards. (307, 335) erally, on standard models, the size of cally, gum arabic was used to increase the material to be placed on the table the viscosity of ink, or to make it flow guard sheet.See: BARRIER SHEET. must not exceed its cutting length in well, to prevent it from feathering, and guide boards. A technique employed by either direction; however, some of the to suspend the coloring matter. It was some bookbinders when trimming with larger cutters are provided with longer particularly important in the days of the plow, in which two binder's boards, backtablesasoptionalequipment. the reed or quill pen. Solutions of gum each about1.4 inch larger than the Some cutters allow for trimming the arabic have long been used as adhe- leaves of the book, are tipped on, one shorter dimensions or splitting sheets. sives for paper, but they are little used to the front endpaper with its top even One of the most important features on today.

1 32 gum dragon 126 gypsum

Gum arabic adhesives produce clear, seals, etc. The paper is made in white, the preparation of marbling size, and easy brushing solitions which have no colored,ormetallicfinishes.Usual isstill used by some marblers. Also marked initial set but which will pass basis weight is from 38 to 45 pounds called "gum dragon" and "gum eleci." through a tacky stage on drying. The (24 )< 36 500). Different adhesives (235, 236, 335) properties for which they are valued are used for gummed paper depending gut. The cured and finished strips of the include ready solution in water follow- upon the surface to which the paper is intestines of sheep, calves, or oxen. The ing drying, readiness for immediate use, to adhere. They should be flat and non- gut of the sheep or calf is used as the cleanliness and easeof application. curling. (17, 139) core of the HEADBAND,.while that of the Gum arabic adhesives, however, are gum sandarac. A brittle resin obtained ox is used in the manufacture of GOLD- generally too moisture sensitive for use from the African sandarac tree, Tetra- BEATER'S SKIN. (335) in archival work. Also called "acacia clinis articulata,in the form of yel- gutta-percha binding. See: CAOUTCHOUC gum." (198) lowish, faintly aromatic, opaque tears BINDING. gum dragon (gum elect). See: GUM TRAGA- and broken cylindricalpieces.Itis gutter. The adjoining inner margins of CANTH. soluble in alcohol. Itis used in the two facing printed pages, i.e., the mar- gum hog (gum hogg). See: KARAYA GUM. manufacture of spirit varnishes, and, gin at the sewn fold of a section. gum juniper. See: GUM SANDARACH. when dissolved in oil, to make cooked guttering. The ridges that sometimes oc- gummed cloth tapes. Gummed cloth or varnishes. It is also used in powdered cur (as a result of use) along the spine transparent adhesive paper used for form to clean vellum and to prepare of a tight-back binding. mending torn book leaves, reinforcing it for writing purposes. Its most out- gutter margin. See: INNER MARGIN. joints, tipping in, guarding, and the standing property is its hardness. Also gypsum. Thenaturallyoccurringhy- like, usually in in-house repair proce- called "gum juniper." See also: POUNCE drous form of calcium sulfate dures. Such tapes can be difficult to (1); PUMICE. (233) (Ca2SO4 2H00), which is used as a remove and frequently cause extensive gum stripping tapes. See: BINDERY TAPES. filler for printing papers, and serves to damage to the paper when they are gum tragacanth. A gum obtained as a fill the spaces between the paper fibers, removed. dried exudate from various Asiatic and thereby increasing opacity and smooth- gummed paper (gummed flat paper). A Eastern European plants of the genus ness. It is also used in the manufacture strong,hard-sized,machine-finished, Astragalus, especially A. gummifer. It of GOLD LEAF. Also called "puritan Englishfinish,supercalendered,or consists of bassorin and tragacanthin, filler" and "terra alba." See also: BRIME. coated paper, which is gummed on one and swells in water to form a gel. Gum (17, 29, 343) side and used for book labels, embossed tragacanth has been used extensively in

1 33 hair 127 half leather

hair. The coalesced horny cells, which from the late 1820s to the early 1840s, contain the protein keratin along with for three-volume novels into the early 0.75 to 2.0% mineral salts. Although 1850s, and occasionallyforgeneral hairis an epidermal structure,itis works since about 1890. The style was seated deep in the papillary layer of the correctly(though not often)called dermis. It consists of two continuous "quarter cloth" by job binders. Also regions, the root and a long projection. called at times "half linen." (69, 335) which is the shaft. The lower part of half extra. 1. In craft bookbinding, "half the shaft is enclosed in a follicle which extra" letterpress binding is defined as is a sheath of epidermal cells continu- any half-leather binding forwai ,ed in ous with those in other parts of the boards, regardless of any decoration or epidermis. a a lack of it. A half extra binding is one Most animal hairs are of two types: usually, but not necessarily, sewn on primary and secondary. Primary hairs the hair. Hair-on leather has been used raised cords. If it is not sewn on raised are the more numerous and vary in occasionally as a covering material for cords, false bands are usually used. 2. structure depending on the age and books. (248) In stationery binding, "half extra" is species of the animal. Secondary hairs, hair sheep. Leather made from the skin defined as a blankbook made up of which are similar in structure to the of a sheep that grows hair instead of machine-made paper that has been tub- primary, are only about one-third their wool. The hair sheep is found in the sized. Four sections are taped at front diameter. mountainous regions of India, China, and back, and the book is sewn on The positions which the primary and South America, and Africa. The leather webbings. It has a SPR1NG-BACK (1), secondary hairs occupy relative to each produced form these skins has a finer made endpapers, cloth joints sewn on, other as they enter the surface of the and tougher grain than that made from leather linings between the webbings, skin, together with their different thick- wool-bearing sheep. See also: CABRETTA and is covered on the spine and corners nesses,determinethecharacteristic LEATHER. (61, 164) with calfskin or roan and on the sides grain pattern of the dermal surface hair side. The outer surface of a hide or with paper. (152, 236) after the hair and other epidermis have skin, more commonly referred to in half French fold. A modification of the been removed. Due to the general com- finished leather as the GRAIN SIDE. FRENCH FOLD, consisting of a sheet plexity of the papillary region, includ- hair slips. Hides and skins that have suf- printed on one side only and given two ing hairs of various diameters at dif- fered sufficient PUTREFACTIVE DAMAGE folds, the first of which is half way ferent stages of growth and located at so that the hair is loosened. down the short side of the sheet and different depths in the papillary layer, half bands. Horizontal ridges on the spines the second at right angles to the first their removal by mechanical means is of some tight-back bindings. They are across the long side.Itis used for difficult. See aLo: HAIR-ON LEATHER; generally located at the head and tail of brochures, leaflets, etc., but seldom in HAIR SHEEP; SHORT HAIR; UNHAIRING. the volume, where they indicate the book work, except for folding maps. (248, 291, 363) position of the kettle stitches, and are (150) hair marble. A marble pattern consisting sometimesalsobetweentheraised half gilt. An obsolete term used in de- of but one or two colors, and usually bands. They are smaller than the raised scribing a book sewn on raised cords; used on the edges of books. The colors bands. Half bands are often found on the bands appearing on the spine are are diluted to about one-third of their Italian and French bindings of the tooled in gold, usually by means of a normal volume with water, and, when 16th century. (156) broad pallet or roll. The tool was also two colors are employed, enough gall half binding. A style of binding in which sometimes worked in the center of each is added to the first color to make it the spine and part of the side of the panel between the bands. (97) spread on the size to form a ribbon 5 book, as well as the four corners, are half leather. A book having a leather to 6 inches wide, while the second color covered with one kind of material, e.g., spine, extending over approximately is applied evenly in fine drops, fol- leather, cloth, etc., and the sides with one-fourththe widthofthesides, lowed by a sprinkle of water which another material, e.g., cloth or paper. leather corners, and the remainder of forms the hair veins. Carragheen moss In this style of binding the spine cover- the sides covered in cloth or paper. isthe usual sizing for this marble. ing usually extends onto the boards Half leather bindings covered in calf- Single-color hair marbles include the about one-fourth of their width, with skin of a tan or other shade of brown, black, red or blue, while two-color hairs the corners in harmonious proportion. with narrow spines and small corners, are usually red and black or bluish- See also: QUARTER BINDING; THREE- marbled paper sides, smooth cut edges brown. (151) QUARTER BINDING. (133, 264) which were sometimes stainedpale hair-on leather. A leather which has been half cloth. A book bound with a cloth yellow or sprinkled red, and plain end- firoduced without first removing the spine, but not cloth corners. The sides papers, were common in England in hair. sumac skins are preferred for this are generally paper, which is also used the latter half of the 18th century. The type of leather, although skins of older for the spine title label. The style was corners of these volumes were occa- animals can be used after trimming of fairly common on publisher's bindings sionallyvelluminsteadofleather.

134 half linen 128 Harleian style

Stationers also issued cheap half leather all four sides. The paper is made by down over it; and the two are pressed bindings, often sheepskin, which were dipping the MOLD (1 ), of the size re- to form the book. (259) not trimmed and had no headbands, no quired,intothe vat containing the hard bound (hard binding). A book bound squares. and were not lettered. Half stock, and then liftingit out with a in cloth- or paper-covered stiff boards, vellum bindings, which were compara- particular motion, thuscausing the as opposed to a book or pamphlet in a tively rare, were produced throughout fibersto bond togetherforminga SELF-COVER, or a LIMP BINDING. The the 19th century.See also:QUARTER sheet. Because of the methods em- term is not generally applied to hand- LEATHER; THREE-QUARTERLEATHER. ployed in lifting and shaking the mold, bound books covered in leather. (261) handmade paper often has very little hardener. 1. A substance or mixture of half linen.See:HALF CLOTH. discernible grain or MACHINE DIREC- substances added to an adhesive to half-stamp. A finishing tool consisting of TION, which means that it has more or promote or control the curing reaction a stamp identical with or very similar less the same strength propertiesin by taking part in it. The term is also to a half fleuron, pineapple, etc. It is both (all) directions. It is therefore un- used to designate a substance used to generally used fortooling compart- like machine-made paper, whichis increase the degree of hardness of the ments at the edges of the frame in much stronger in tile machine direction cured adhesive.See also:PLASTICIZER lozenge compartment decoration. It is than in the cross direction. Handmade (1). 2. A substance added to paints or also sometimes used back-to-back to paper is also generally superior to ma- varnishes to provide a harder finish. form the lozenges in the center of the chine-made paper in that it is usually (309) cover. The use of the half-stamp was sized with gelatin, glue, or similar ma- hard glue. A GLUE used in the past in common in Northern Europe and in terial, without the use of rosin or alum. machine case-making where quick set- England during the late 15th and early 'it is relatively very expensive because, ting was the principal requirement of 16th centuries. (250) from the pulp stage, all of the opera- the glue and minimum flexibility was half tanned.See:CRUST STOCK. tions are performed by hand and in not a serious disadvantage. Such glues half vellum binding. A half binding cov- single sheets; in contrast to the paper- are hard in the sense that they contain ered on the spine and approximately making machine in which paperis no plasticizer. They were not used for one-fourth of the sides, as well as the felted, couched, pressed, dried, sized, gluing-up the spine, lining-up, or for corners, with vellum, with the remain- calendered, and reeled in one contin- flexible cover making, and are now ing part of the sides being covered with uous operation. For general informa- seldom used in book production for paper.See also:HALF LEATHER. tionconcerning paper,see:PAPER; any purpose. (256) hammedng-down bands.See:KNOCKING PAPERMAKING.See also:COUCH (1, 2); hard-grained goat (morocco). A vegetable- DOWN. DECKLE; FELT (1); WATERMARK. (79, tanned goatskin with the characteristic hand-drawn end- 1,:ndcover-papers. A 287,320) soft and small pinhead grain pattern term descriptive of custom end- and hand mold.See:MOLD (1 ); HANDMADE produced by BOARDING (1) in a wet cover-papers. The design of the papers PAPER. condition in a minimum of four direc- can be an integral part of the binding hand oversewing.See:OvERSEWING. tions. The grain is much tighter than in every sense, and can be executed in hand sewing. The process of sewing a that of LEVANT and the leather itself is many kinds of , including lino- book by hand. Although it is generally firmer and harder than NIGER. (61) and wood-cut endpapers and covers, assumed to mean sewing through the hard rolled. A term descriptive of the which are executed by means of small folds of the sections, it may also refer toughneF and durability of the board printing units of repeating designs, or to the sewing of sections, or, more used in bookbinding, e.g., "hard rolled blocks used to print the entire cover or often,leaves through theside,i.e., millboard." The term has no meaning endpaper in one impression. (335) OvERSEWING, SIDE SEWING, the strength- other than that the board has been handle. 1. A somewhat vague term ap- ening of the first and last sections or rolled under pressure and is very firm. plied to the impression of touch and leaves of a sewn book by means of (365) sound when handling a sheet of paper. OVERCASTING, or the re-attachment or hard sized. A paper which has received a It includes such properties as feel, rat- replacement of endpapers by the same maximum of sizing, resulting in a paper tle,etc.2. One or more strips of means.See:FLEXIBLE SEWING; RE- having a high degree of water resist- leather, cloth, or other material,at- CESSED-CORD SEWING; SADDLE SEWING; ance. The term applies only to the siz- tached loosely across the spine of a TAPE SEWING (1 ). ing characteristics of the paper.CI: book from cover to cover and used to hand sizing. A method of sizing or resiz- SLACK SIZED. (82, 98) facilitate removal of the book from the ing paper by dipping the sheets or Harleian style. An English style of book shelf. Handles are seldom used today, leaves into a tub of size. Hand sizing decoration which came into vogue in except for large blankbooks. 3.See: was theoriginalmethod ofsizing about 1720. The name derives from FEEL. (17) paper, i.e., handmade paper, and is still the books oftheHarleianlibrary hand letters. Individual letters, numerals, used for that class of paper, and also founded by Robert Harley(1661- etc.,cutinbrass and attachedto by restorers when resizing documents 1724), and expanded considerably by wooden or asbestos handles, and used or the leaves of a book. Old papers, hisson, Edward (1689-1741).Al- to letter a book by hand. The alterna- which often contain decomposed size, though the name Chapman was once tive to hand letters is brass type as- can be made stronger and safer to associated with these bindings, along sembled in a PALLET (2) and used to handle if resized by hand. (77, 197) with that of Elliott, it has been estab- letter a complete line of type at one hanging-in. A technique used in edition lished that at least the more important time. (161, 236) binding in which the TEXT BLocx and bindings were probably executed by handmade paper. A type or class of paper its endpapers are joined to the case. Thomas Elliott. The general character- made in hand molds in single sheets, The text blockispositioned in the istics of the bindings are the predomi- and having a rough or DECKLE EDGE on casing-in machine; thecover drops nantly bright red color (and inferior Harrison method 129 headband

quality) of the morocco leather used, seems to be preferred by some book- the spine was frequently cut so that it and a three-line fillet running around binders. just covered the headbands. The cover the edges of the covers. Within the The originalheadbands werein- was then sewn through from front to fillet is a broad-tooled border made up trinsically a part of the sewing of the back, or vice versa, underneath and of two or three sprigs of various pat- book, and were used in lieu of kettle along the length of the hidden head- terns, and a large central ornament, stitches in linking the sections together. band, resulting in a series of stitches on usually in the shape of an elongated They were a part of the construction the spine of the book, as well as a lozenge, built up from a number of of the book, which possibly explains series where normally one expected to small units. (69, 241, 280) why they were (and are) at both the see the beading. The binder usually Harrison method.See:REVERSED V-GUARD. head and tail, rather than just at the used uncolored thread for both this and head. 1. The margin at the top of a head.Thistypeof headband was the headband, which was usually single printed page. 2. The top of a book or eventually discarded, however, because and sewn independently of the sewing leaf. 3. The top of the spine of a book it did not permit cutting the edges sub- of the book. The plaited headband, where theHEADBANDislocated. 4. The sequent to sewing, despite the fact that which was made with strips of leather top edge of a bound book.See also: ithad the great advantage of also (usually tawed and stained pink), was TAIL(1 ). 5. That portion of a hide or banding the top and bottom of the sec- still another variation. This type was skin from the head of the animal. tions together tightly. rare in England but often used in Ger- headband. A functional and/or ornamen- Techniques of headbanding contin- many in the late 15th and early 16th tal band at the head and tail of a book ued to change, and by the 12th cen- centuries. This type of headband, which between the sections and thespine tury, or even earlier,it became the is the strongest ever devised, consisted covering, which projects slightly be- common practice to sew the bands in- of two thongs plaited around a core of yond the head and tail. Originally, the dependently of the sections. Further- rolled vellum, which had already been headband consisted of a thong core, more, until the end of the 15th century, sewn to the book. The thongs also similar to the bands on which the book they were always tied down in the fold passed through holes madeinthe was sewn, around which the ends of the of each section, when the increased leather at the top of the spine where it threads were twisted and then laced production of books subsequent to was cut off instead of being turned in. into the boards of the book. Today, Gutenberg made it necessary to reduce When using this type of headband, the however, the headband is much simpler thecost of binding a single book. leather cover was sewn by means of and is usually made of colored silk Thereafter, they were tied down at plaited thongs to the primary headband sewn to the book or simply attached greater intervals. which had already been sewn to the after the volume has been forwarded. Because the boards of early bindings book, thereby making a solid connec- In edition binding they are almost al- were cut flush, it was the usual practice tion at an important point. ways manufactured separately and then to cut away the corners of the leaves at The conventional headband, which attached, while in library binding they head and tail so as to make room for was sewn with colored silk or other have been replaced for the most part by the bands and also to keep them from type of thread, and which had the a length of cord around which the protruding too far and possibly being beading showing at the bottom com- covering material is rolled at both head damaged. plete withHEADCAP,was introduced and tail. Headbands of the 12th and early very early in the 16th century and Headbands at one time were dis- 13th centuries were combined with a quickly became popular. The prevalent tinguished as the "headband" and "tail- leather tab which extended beyond the colors were blue and white, but pink band," but both are now called "head- spine, whereas from the middle of the and blue, pink and brown, as well as bands" or simply "heads," although the 13th century to the end of the 15th other combinations were also used. term"endband,"toindicateboth, century, the leather cover at the end of Double headbands arenotoften seen in 16th century English bookbind- ing, but they were used to some extent HEADBAND on the Continent. They acquired popu- single headband with core of vellum larity in England in the 17th century, or leather utilizing more interesting colors and double headband superior materials than on the Conti- with core of vellum nent. Until the beginning of the 20th or leather century the double headband usually consisted of two rolls, one smaller than /second core of catgut the other, with the smaller placed above tie down the larger; however, early in the 20th centurybindersbeganplacingthe smaller band both in front of and be- low the larger. It also became the com- mon practice to use a flat strip of ma- terial rather than a larger roll. Only a relatively few bookbinders since the 15th century have taken the trouble to tie down headbands at every section, or even tried to put the needle through the fold of the section where the tie-down was being made; instead

1 3 G headbanding 130 height

it went between the leaves at intervals air pressure is used. 2. A flow-regulat- quickly, thus allowing for higher speed of V. to 1/2 inch. ing device on a cylinder papermaking printing. The materials used in manu- When the headband is an integral machine which controls the voldme of facture vary but usually include a con- part of the book, it serves the practical stock flowing to the screens and mixing centratedpigment,syntheticresins, purpose of taking up much of the strain boxes before the vats. (17, 72, 80) and one of the volatile oils. Following from the spine covering when the book headcap. The leather covering at the head printing, the printed web of paper is is pulled from the shelf in the usual and tail of the spine of a book, formed heated to a temperature of approxi- manner. The worked headband rein- by turning the leather on the spine over mately 350 F. (177° C.) which vola- forces that part of the spine covering the head and tail and shaping it. tilizes the oil, after which the web is extending beyond the text block be- Knockingthedampenedleather rapidly cooled by passing it through cause of the squares. The headband over the headbands so as to form pro- chilled rollers which hardens the resi- that is only glued on, on the other tective caps was a technique introduced due. (140, 276) hand, is merely decorative and often early in the 16th century. Although heat-set tissue. A lens tissue especially falls short even in that respect, as it turning over the leather actually began prepared for use in mending tears in usually looks cheap and also as though to be done around 1500, it was not paper, strengthening margins, and for it were an afterthought. Although it is squared and sharply angled, nor was it laminating weak or badly torn leaves, generally believed that glued-on head- initially tied around the joints. BACK by means of dry applicationrather bands were unknown before the early CORNERING and tying around the joints than by the traditional aqueous appli- 19th century, i.e., the beginning of the so as to make indentation at the ends, cation. The tissue is made of pure cel- rise of edition binding as we know it lulose consisting of more or less 100% today, they were being used, at least in HEADCAP rag content, no coating or additives, Germany, as early as the last decade and a pH of 7.0. The tissueis not of the 16th century. They were prob- structurally uniform in texture, conse- ably not used in English bookbinding quently there are small random open until sometime in the first half of the 17th century. Although it must be as- spaces and some bunching of fibers. sumed that glued on bands were used Although its thickness is presumed to in that time as an economy measure, be approximately 0.0015 inch, this can they probably required as much time vary from one batch to another, al- to make as worked headbands. They though it does not normally exceed were made by sewing two threads of 0.002 inch. The tissue is coated on one the same or different colors in the usual side with an acrylic resin. It is applied manner with a cross-over beading onto to both sides of tears, but to onl; one a strip of vellum, which sometimes had side of a weakened leaf, provided that its upper edge bent over to provide no adhesive is exposed on the other greater bulk. In many cases about 3/4 side. The tissue is tipped on the leaf inch on each side of the core was not with,a warm iron (approximately 100° sewn but was attached to the boards, F.),andthenpressedonfirmly usually on the outside. In other cases through terylene or a textured paper. the bulk of the headband was cut to The iron is not pressed directly on the the thickness of the book and only the which improved the setting of the heat-set tissue because this might re- part under the sewing extended across headcaps, was introduced during the sult in blocking and may also impart a the joints or was laced through the latter part of the 18th century. The sheen to the tissue, thus making it more joints on some vellum bindings. (141, technique of setting the headcaps has noticeable. 172,236,241,335) been customary in fine binding since headbanding. The process of working or its introduction. (161, 236, 237) heavy filling. A WEFT yarn that is greater gluing headbands to the text block of a headed outline tool. See: CUSPED EDGE in diameter than those normally used in book. See also: HEADBAND. STAMP. the fabric. (341) head bolt. The top or "head" folds of a head trim. The measurement required to heavy warp. A WARP yarn that is greater section. See also: BOLT. determine the position of printed mat- in diameter than those normally used head box. 1. A iarge flow box on a Four- ter before the final trimming of a sewn in the fabric. (341) drinierpapermakingmachine.The book. (139) heel-ball. A shoemaker's composition of furnish of dilute stock is pumped into heat. A somewhat vague term specifically wax and lampblack, sometimes used to the head box and from there flows onto associated with the motion of atoms or take rubbings of book spines. (25) the wire where itis formed into the molecules, but also applied in a general web of paper. The head box is equipped senseto the condition of excessive height. The overall dimension of a bound with baffles and other flow-evening de- warmth or high temperature. Excessive volume from head to tail, including the vices; it also agitates the stock so as to heat results in the lowering of flexibil- squares.Librarybindersfrequently prevent flocculation of the fibers. The ity, strength, and resistance to natural base their prices for binding on the head box is designed to spread the flow decay through loss of moisture from height of the volume up to a specified of furnish evenly and uniformly the leather, paper, adhesives, etc., as well thickness, e.g., 21/2 inches. The volumes entire width of the wire between the as acceleration of decomposition reac- are priced on the basis of each addi- deckles. The box may be open, in which tions. tional 1 or 2 inches, beginning with a case the height of the stock provides heat-set ink. A printing ink manufactured minimum height, usually 8 inches, as the pressure, or closed, in which case in such a manner as to enable it to dry for example:

1 :3 7 hemicellutoses 131 hinged

Library Books Cost leather produced in America inthe isomer being (CH3 (CH2)4 CH3). Up to and 19thcentury.Seealso: VEGETABLE Hexaneisusedasasolventand including 8 inches Basic price TANNINS. (175) thinner for the wax usedin some Over 8 inches and hemp. A tall Asiatic herb, Cannabis sa- leather dressings, and also a solvent including 9 inches Higher price tiva, which yields a tough bast fiber for the adhesive pressure-sensitive when retted. Hemp fibers are difficult tapes. (130, 173) Over 9 inches and to distinguish from linen by ordinary including 10 inches Higher price hidden painting. See: FORE-EDGE PAINTING. examination, but their presence may be Over 10 inches and hide. 1. The raw or tanned pelt removed suspected in a fibrillated paper. Hemp from the adult of one of the larger including 11 inches Higher price is used mainly for thin, opaque papers Over 11 inches animals, e.g., cowhide, as distinguished Higher price of great strength; however, it is almost from the skin of one of the smaller never used alone. The term "hemp" Magazines Cost animals, e.g., goatskin, or an immature has also come to be used in a generic larger animal, e.g., calfskin. Up to and sense as fiber and is then preceded by including 10 inches Basic price The finest part of a hide is located an adjective, e.g., Manila hemp (See: in the butt area. The shoulder provides Over 10 inches and ABACA), Seisal hemp (See: SISAL), etc. good quality although its natural sub- including 12 inches Higher price Hemp is also fairly widely employed stance is somewhat uneven and falls Over 12 inches and for the cords used in sewing books. away toward the cheeks, which are including 14 inches Higher price (17, 62, 143, 198) often trimmed. Shoulders also tend to heraldic cresting. A form of cresting used Over 14 inches and show growth marks which can be con- in decorating bookbindings, the projec- including 16 inches Higher price spicuous. The bellies give thinner and tions of which terminate in heraldic sometimes weaker leather. Over 16 inches Higher price emblems. See also: CRESTING ROLL. (250) 2. Leather made from hides which hemicelluloses. Any of several cell wall have not been split, or from the grain heningbone pattern. A pattern on cloth split of a hide. When used in polysaccharides present in almost all consisting of adjacent rows of parallel this vegetable fibers. Although impervious lines where any two adjacent rows manner, the name of the animal or the to water and almost all natural organic type of leather may be specified, e.g., slope slightly in reverse directions. cowhide. (363) solvents, they may be removed grad- Hertzberg stain. A chemical testfre- ually by means of aqueous alkalis. quently used to detect the presence of hide buffing. A very thin film of the grain They are hydrolized to simple sugars, specific fibers in a paper. The Hertz- layer of a cowhide, sometimes used for uronicacids andaceticacid when berg stain not only has a greater de- labels. Also known as "beeswing." heated with dilute acids. Their molecu- gree of color selectivity than any other hide glue. GLUE made from the collagen larweights areusually lower than stain, it also brings out the details of content of hides and skins, particularly those of various celluloses. The pres- the structure very effectively in the case of bovineanimals,asdistinguished ence of hemicelluloses in paper im- of those fibers which it does not stain from glue made from bones. Hide glue proves its bonding and folding char- with a selective color. It is prepared does not include glue made from the acteristics. (17, 72, 235) from: 1) a saturated solution of zinc skins of fish. (184) hemlock (bark). A vegetable tanning ma- chloride in distilled water; 2) a solution high bulk book paper. A book paper terial derived from either the Eastern containing 0.25 gram of iodine and which, in a basis weight of 45 poundi (Canadian) hemlock, Tsuga canaden- 5.25 grams of potassium iodide dis- 25 x 38 500) bulks 440 to 344 sis, or the Western hemlock. T. hetero- solved in 12.5 ml. of distilled water; pages to the inch, under 35 pounds phylla, the former being the best known and 3) the entire solution of number 2 pressure. (17) and most used. The bark of the eastern added to 25 ml. of number 1. The high finish. A smooth, hard, glossy finish hemlock has an average tannin content colors produced are: applied to the surface of cloth, paper, of 15 to 16%, while that of the western etc., during the manufacturing process. variety average 10 to 11%. One char- Color indicating the presence of: (139 ) acteristic of the bark is the lack of any Red hinge.1. The strip of fabric (usually appreciable quantity of sugars, with the Sulfite or sulfate chemical wood pulp, esparto, straw, linen or cambric), or raper placed result that it does not produce acids by between the two parts of a library-style fermentation. Because of this, it is cus- bamboo, and most other chemically treated fibers. cloth-jointed endpaper, for the purpose tomary to add a small amount of or- of providing additional strength at the ganic acid to hemlock tan liquor. An- vAlow- Chemical wood pulp which point of flexing. 2. Any Japanese copy- other characteristic is the reddish color brown has been incompletely cooked ing paper or linen stub that allows for it imparts to the leather, which can be (so as to preserve strength), the free flexing of an insert, leaf, etc. modified considerably by the addition with the result that some 3. An obsolete term for the tongue of other tanning materials, such as oak lignins are still present. made by gluing and folding over the bark or quebracho. Bright Materials containing lignin, waste leaves on which the bands or Hemlock bark was for many years yellow e.g., groundwood pulp, jute cords were pasted and then inserted the most important tanning material and unbleached manila hemp. between split boards. (161, 208, 264) used in the United States and Canada, (72, 143) hinged. A map, plate, or other separate and was, along with oak bark, the sheet which has been folded along the principalmaterialusedintanning hexane. Any of the five isometric volatile binding edge in order to reduce the leather on a commercial scale. It was liquid paraffin hydrocarbons, of the possibility of the sheet tearing away responsible for the characteristic "red" formula (C(;H14), the most important from the one to which itis attached,

1 3 hinged and jointed plate 132 hollow

and also to allow it to lie flat and turn does not adhere properly. See also: is too embrittled, or otherwise weak- easily during use. DRUMMING ON. (140) ened, to allow oversewing; however, it hhiged and jointed plate. Two contiguous holing out (holing). The process of drill- is seldom very successful, as the paper plates each of which has had a strip ing,or more commonly, punching usually fails at the juncture of paper cut away at the binding edge, and are holes in the boards of a book to receive and holland. (339) then joined together by means of a the cords prepared for LACING-IN. (156) Hollis, Thomas (1720-1774). An eccentric common stripof Japanese copying holing-out block. A block of lead or other English philanthropist and propagan- paper or linen, forming a hinge. See soft metal on which the board of a dist of the idea of liberty. Hollis dis- also: GUARD (2). bock is placed for drilling or punching tributed books in support of liberty, hinged boards. A type of binding having the holes for the cords or slips in prepa- particularly to libraries abroad, such as boards attached to a stab-sewn or post ration for LACING-IN. See also: HOLING those at Berne, Zurich, and Harvard binding, by means of a cloth hinge our. (115) College. The bindings were commis- which joins the main board to a narrow holland. A cotton or linen fabric, usually sionedfrom John Matthewman or board at the spine of the book. The in plain weave and heavily sized or Richard Montagu, and decorated with narrow board is secured by the posts or glazed, and, when used in bookbinding, emblematic tools designed by G. B. stab sewing. Hinged boards are char- gummed. The holland is used in a tech- Cipriani,theoriginaldrawingsfor acteristic of some types of Nankbooks. nique of library rebinding in which a which are now at Harvard. When the (119, 204) sewing machine automaticallyfeeds first set of tools was destroyed in a fire hinged ledger paper. 1. A LEDGER PAPER two narrow strips of gummed cloth in Matthewman's shop in 1764 a sec- that has a flexible (due to the fact that in such a manner thatthe sewing ond set was engraved by Thomas Pingo. it is thinner) strip running from top to passes through the holland and the ThesesubjectsincludeBritannica, bottom of the sheet about five-eights paper. The book to be sewn is prepared Liberty, the caduceus of Mercury, the of an inch in from the edge (binding as for oversewing, i.e., the leaves are wand ofAesculapius,theowlof edge) of the sheet. The strip is a result divided into thin "sections," which are Minerva, a cock, a liberty cap, and the of the removal of some paper fibers, run through the sewing machine one at short Roman sword, or pugio. The usually by means of suction, during a time, with a strip of gummed holland simpler bindings were by Matthewman, manufacture. Tile strip is about 11/4 being sewn simultaneously to each side while Montagu executedthe more inch wide. The paper, being thinner at of the "section." After all of the "sec- elaborate presentation bindings.(94, the area of the hinge, is easier to turn tions" have been sewn, the strips of 244, 297) and will lie flatter; however, it is also holland are moistened, and the book hollow. The lining attached to both the weaker at that point, which may ad- is jogged and then pressed until the gum spine of the text block and the inside verselyaffectwriting.2. A ledger has dried. The strips of holland hold of the spine of the covering material. paper having a strip of linen (or cam- the "sections" together along the bind- It is usually constructed of , bric) attached to the binding edge of ing edge. This technique is sometimes and consists of a folded sheet, one sec- the leaf. Its purpose is to allow the leaf employed when the paper of the book tion of which is glued to the spine of to turn more easily and lie flat. (17) hinged on a mount. A separate leaf, illus- tration, etc., attached to a GUARD (2) HOLLOW and bound into the book. (169) hinge guarding. See: REVERSED V-GUARD. hog's back. 1. An exaggerated curve of the spine of a book, caused by im- proper rounding, the use of a sewing thread that is too thick, or a combina- 1 on and 2 off hollow tion of the two. 2. An uneven trim of the fore edge of a book that is cut with the plow, caused by the plow knife rid- ing up as it traverses the length of the book. (65, 159) hogskin. A soft leather produced from the skin of the peccary, genus Tayassu, and having a distinctive grain pattern formed by the hair follicles which are arranged in detached groups of three. Cf: PIGSKIN. holdout. The degree to which a material, such as cloth or paper, impedes the penetration of an aqueous or non- aqueous liquid. If the liquid is water, or water vapor, holdout is des:ribed as SIZING (1). Non-aqueous liquids in- clude some printing inks, lacquers, etc. (17) holiday. Any area of an adhesive-covered surface, such as a PASTEDOWN, which hollow back 133 hubs

the text block and the other to the hollow tooling. A bookbinding design fluid state. Subsequent to the removal covering material. There are many vari- which is executed in outline, generally of heat, it sets by simple cooling. ations of the hollow, however; for ex- in gold. (81) When a hot-melt adhesive comes in- ample, see. ONE ON AND TWO OFF, Of hooked (hooked on own guard). See: to close contact with the surface to be TWO ON AND ONE OFF. The purpose of GUARDED IN. See also: PLATE ATTACH- bonded, a molecular layer of film at the the hollow is to assist in the opening of MENT. surface of this substrate immediately the book much in the same manner horn bindings. Bindingsconsistingof attains a temperature approaching that as the SPRING-BACK of a blankbook, hard, white, smooth, polished vellum. of the hot melt. In addition a high thoughwith much lessforce.The They were sparsely decorated and had degree of wetting, almost coalescence, thickness of the paper used for the hol- the title written in Chinese ink at the of the hot melt and the material occurs. low depends on the size and thickness top of the spine. Immediately thereafter,theadhesive of the book and the thickness of the horn book. A form of child's primer used loses heat to the film over the entire paper and sections of the book. (81, in England from the 15th century, and area and temperaturequilibrium is at- 261) in the United States at a later time. tained. Since the adhesive is in contact hollow back (hollow back binding). A The earliest examples were made from with a mass much larger than itself, binding having a space between the "wainscot" (thin panels of oak) and the temperature of the entire system spine of the text block and the spine of had a label containing the alphabet, drops to the point at which the hot the cover, resulting from the covering simplespelling,numbers,andthe melt sets to a solid state with sufficient material being attached at the joints Lord's prayer pasted on the wood and cohesive strength to bond the films to- (or a one-piece cover in the style of a covered with a thin, transparent veneer gether. Thus the uniqueness of hot- case binding) and not glued to the of cattle horn. A wooden handle was melt adhesives stems from the speed spine of the text block. Sometimes a attached to the frame. In latter ex- with which they produce a bond, which HOLLOW is glued to the text block and amples the back of thepanel was is almost instantaneously. covering material; in library binding, covered with morocco or roan leather Although the use of hot-melt adhe- however, generally only an INLAY ( I ) blocked with an ornamental device. sives eliminates the cost of solvents is glued to the covering material, while Other, but rare, examples were made required by some other adhesives, the in edition binding there is usually no entirely ot cowhide with a window cut principal cost reduction results from support of any kind. in the upper portion. See PLATE II. the time saved in their application. In The hollow back binding is believed (104, 156, 183) addition, a lesser quantity of the hot to have originated in France in about horse. I . A trestlelike structure of suitable melt can usually be utilized to produce 1770, but it was little used in England height, traditionally made of wood, but an equivalent bond. before about 1800. It was still compara- also of alight,non-corrosive, non- Hot-melt adhesives are used exten- tively rare in craft binding until about staining material such as plastic, on sively in binding books made of loose 1820, when thesemi-elliptical spine which hides and skins are piled for sheets,epeciallythosethatarenot with its pronounced shoulders began to draining, transportation from one de- rounded and backed, e.g., paperback be replaced by the structurally inferior partment to another in the tannery, and books, telephone and other directories, flatspine,whichhadalmostno sometimes for storage purposes. 2. A etc. For books that are to be rounded shoulders and therefore provided little T-shaped stand, about 3 feet high, on and backed, however,theso-called support.Thecombinationofthis which spoiied sheets from the POST DRYING MEMORY of the hot-melt adhe- weaker spine and the use of the hollow ()ina handmade paper millare sives causes problems. In addition, hot- back on books which then did not nor- placed. Being practically of no value melt adhesives alone do not lend them- mally need them has resulted in many as paper, these sheets are subsequently selves well to the binding of heavily of the bindings of that time falling placed at the top and bottom of the loaded or coated paper, from which all apart, while those bound withtight salable packs to protect them. (197, particulate matter must he removed backs years earlier arestillin good 363) before application of the adhesive. See condition, except for broken joints. horsing up. The process of piling hides also: ADHESIVE BINDING; ONE-SHOT The advantages of the hollow back, and skins on the HORSE ( I ) for drain- METHOD (1); TWO-SHOT METHOD. (81, whichisused almost universallyin ing, etc. Because the use of the horse 89,179,219,309) library and edition binding, are: 1) the may result in the fibers of the leather hot-melt coating. A method of applying tooling or lett,-ring on the spine will setting in a creased configuration, when molten plastic materials to a base stock, not flex and crack; 2) in hand binding, a flat leather is required hides and skins such as paper or a book cloth without covering is less exacting; 3) in edition are placed on a flat surface for drain- the use of a solvent or other carrier. and library binding, the cover (case) ing, transportation, etc. (363) Rolls,knives,casting,orextrusion can be made separately; 4) in hand hot-melt adhesive. A resinous adhesive techniques are used in this method of binding, sewing is faster because itis which achieves a solid state and result- coating. on tapes rather than cords; and 5) ant strength by cooling, as contrasted hot-setting adhesive. An adhesive which overall, it is a much more economical with other adhesives which achieve the requires a temperature of 100* C. or method than tight-back binding. See same results through evaporation or greater to causeitto set. See also: also: OXFORD HOLLOW. (156, 236, 343) removal of the solvents. Before heating, COLD-SETTING ADHESIVE; ROOM-TEM- hollow-punch pliers. Pliers with a tubular a hot-melt adhesive is a themoplastic, PERATURE SETTING ADHESIVE, (309) sharp-edge cutter, used for punching 100% solid material, and is all adhe- h pattern. A criss-cross pattern embossed holes in leather. Such pliers have inter- sive. Upon the application of heat, the on a book cloth,resulting in small changeablecutters,includingeyelet usual operating temperature being in diamond-shaped spaces on the cloth, closers. Their principal shortcoming is the range of 175 to 205* C. (350 to hubs. The several thicknesses of board their limited reach. 400° F.), the material changes to a glued together and then to the SPRING-

1 4 u hue 134 hydrogen-ion concentration

BACK (1) of a book, usually a large treatment of paper fibers, other than its true structure is probably (H,4H20), stationery binding. The hubs, which cooking or bleaching, which takes place existing in an aqueous solution. It is a appear as relatively large, raised bands before sheet formation on the paper- measure of the active acidity or basic- or ridges under the covering material making machine. It relates especially ity and is expressed metrically as the (usually leather) on the spine of the to altered sheet characteristics, includ- number ofmoles orgram-formula book, strengthen the spine and protect ing density, formation, opacity, and weights (1.0078 g.) of hydrogen ions the leather from wear and other dam- strength. 2. The paper pulp character- (H+) per liter of solution. The hy- age. The hubs may also serve as an istics resulting from the above treat- drogen-ion concentration of a solution integral part of the decoration of the ment. (17, 42, 276) may also be expressed in terms of its spine of the book.Cf:FALSE BANDS. hydraulic press. A STANDING PRESS oper- pH, which is defined as the negative (264, 339) ated by hydraulic power instead of by logarithm to the base ten of the hy- hue. That particular attribute of colors hand. Such presses came into use in the drogen-ion concentration. In aqueous which allows them to be classed as first half of the 19th century, and were solutions,neutralityisthe condition bluish, greenish, reddish, yellowish, etc. the principal means of pressing edition that exists when the concentration of See also:COLOR (1). and library bindings until the introduc- hydrogen ions and hydroxyl ions are humectant. A substance that absorbs and tion of the casing-in and building-in equal. At 25* C., neutrality occurs at promotes theretentionof moisture machines.See also:BUILDING-IN MA- a pH of 7.0, which is the pH value of from the air. The softening (plasticiz- CHINE; CASING-IN MACHINE; REMOV- pure (distilled) water when condensed ing)agentsinadhesives owe their ABLE PRESS. hot and shielded from contact with effectiveness to their capacity to absorb hydrochloric acid. A strong, corrosive, atmospheric carbon dioxide. and retain moisture.Cf:HYGROSCOPIC- inorganic acid (HCI), manufactured Measurement of hydrogen-ion con- ITY.See also:FLEXIBLE GLUE; INTER- by absorbinghydrogenchloridein centration, or pH, may be made colori- NALLY PLASTICIZED; GLUE. (184, 198) water. It is one of the most corrosive metrically, by means of the proper use humidified. A paper that has been brought of acids, and is particularly destructive of suitable neutralization indicators, or, to equilibrium with the moisture in the tocellulose,breakingthecellulose moreaccurately,bypotentiometric air at a definite relative humidity. chain into even smaller units, resulting methods employing any ofvarious humidity. The actual amount of water ultimately inits complete hydrolysis. electrodes, which exhibit the proper vapor present in the air.See:ABSOLUTE The problems with hydrochloric acid specificity for hydrogen ions. HUMIDITY. A more relevant term in began withthe use of chlorinein Hydrogen-ion concentrationisim- book work is RELATIVE HUMIDITY. bleaching paper fibers. For many years portant in archival work because it has hung-in. A book that has been glued-in to thereafter, the chlorine substances were been adequately demonstrated that the itscover at the spine only,e.g.,a insufficiently removed by washing, giv- presence of acid(s)inink,leather, pamphlet glued intoits SELF-COVER. ing rise to the formation of the acid in paper, etc., has or can have, a deleteri- (256) paper. Although washing techniques ous effect on such materials, the extent hung on guards. Inserts, such as maps, have improved, excess residual hydro- of the effect depending not so much on plates, etc., which have been glued to chloric acid can exist in paper because thevolumeof acid present, as on the strips of paper or linen, which are then of the practice of using chlorine com- typeof acid and itsconcentration,i.e., tipped or stubbed into the book (256) pounds to wash and bleach paper sub- a large volume of a relatively weak hyaline layer. A term sometimes used to sequent to its manufacture. organic acid, such as formic acid, is indicate the smooth surface which is hydrogel. A gel in which the liquidis less harmful than a smaller amount of assumed to exist between the epidermis water. a powerful, inorganicacid, such as and grain surface of a hide or skin, hydrogencyanide(hydrocyanicacid; sulfuric acid. As a decrease of pH and which gives the characteristic grain prussicacid). An extremelytoxic, means a logarithmic increase in acid pattern of the leather.See also:DERMIS. colorless liquid (HCN), prepared by concentration, levels of concentration (363) reacting methane, air, and ammonia below pH 5.0, or under certain circum- hydration. 1. A term applied to the con- over a platinum catalyst at 1,000 C. It stances, even 6.0, become important. dition of materials containing water of is used to fumigate books. Conversely, although not as serious a absorption, crystallization, or imbibi- hydrogen-ion concentration. The concen- problem, a high concentration of hy- tion. In papermaking, hydration refers tration of hydrogen ions (more prop- droxyl ions, corresponding to a pH of to the chemical or mechanical (or both) erly hydronium ionsH30+, although 10.0 or above, can lead to serious oxy- dization of cellulosic materials. The increase in hydrogen-ion con- centration as pH declines is given be- HUBS low: PH moles/liter 7.0 0.0000001 6.0 .000001 5.0 .00001 4.0 .0001 3.0 .001 2.0 .01 1.0 .1 0.0 1.0 See also: ACID;ALKALI. (17, 195, 235) PLATES

112 PLATI. I. A contemporary 15th century binding of brown calf over wooden boards, with two center and four corner bosses. Otto Vollbehr Collection, Library of Congress. (43 cm. by 29 cm. by 8 cm.)

113 PLATE 11. An 18th century horn book with a counting device. John Davis Batchelder Collection, Library of Congress. (28.5 cm. by 18 cm. by 2.7 cm.) PLATE in. An embroidered binding in purple satin with seed and bullion on a copy of The Wlzole Book of Psalms, London, 1641. Lessing J. Rosenwald Collection, Library of Congress. (8.2 cm. by 5 cm. by 2.5 cm.)

1.15 PLATE iv. This Aldine edition of Au lus Genius's Noctes A tticae was executed for Jean Grolier. It is in light brown morocco with tooling on the upper and lower covers. Venice, 1515. Rare Book and Special Collections Division, Library of Congress. (17 cm. by 1) cm. by 5 cm.)

'I b S..

PLATE V. A tree calf cover from a set ofSystema naturaeby Linnaeus. , 1788-1793. (20.5 cm. by 13 cm. by 4 cm.)

1 PLATE VI. A "fanfare style" binding in the manner of the Eve brothers on a copy of florae heatissimae Virginis Mariae.Note the gauffered edge. Printed by Christopher Plantin, Antwerp, 1570. Lessing J. Rosenwald Collection, Library of Congress. (21.2 cm. by 13.2 cm. by 4.5 cm.) PLAT1 vii. A Trautz-Bauzonnet inlaid binding on a copy of Les simulachres historiees faces de la Mort, Lyon, 1538. Lessing J. Rosenwald Collection, Library of Congress. (19 cm. by 13.2 cm. by 1 cm.) PLATE VIII. An example of pointillé tooling and strapwork on a 16th century brown calf binding forHistoriarium adversus paganos libri septernby Paulus Orosius. Printed by Pierre Le Rouge for Antoine Verard, Paris, 1491. Lessing J. Rosenwald Collection, Library of Congress. (37.5 cm. by 26.5 cm. by 7.4 cm.) Its - - -.1: ta. 0°

PLATE X. A 1950 binding designed by Paul Bonet on a copy of Le Poet(' Rustique by Francis Jammes. Lessing J. Rosenwald Collection, Library of Congress. (29 cm. by 24 cm. by 4.3 cm.)

1 5 j PLATE X. A Marius Michel doublure on Louis Morin's Les Dimanches Parisiens, Paris, 1898. Lessing J. Rosenwald Collection, library of Congress. (26.7 cm. by 19 cm. by 5.2 cm.)

152 PLATE XI A. French shell marble pattern,

1 5 3

PLATE XI C. Bouquet marble pattern

155 hydrogen peroxide 135 hysteresis hydrogen peroxide. An oxidizing chemi- In the opposite case, that of a strong paper is critical, such as in multi-color cal (F1002), which can be prepared acid and weak base, the salt will have offset printing.See also:ANISOTROPIC from barium peroxide and dilute sul- an acidic reaction in an aqueous solu- BEHAVIOR; DRIED-IN STRAIN. (17, 72) furic acid. It is used in bleaching paper tion. An example of the latter is paper- hygrometer. An instrumentusedfor pulp, sometimes alone, but more often maker'salum(aluminumsulfate), measuring therelativehumidity,or in combination with other pulp bleach- which is hydrolyzed in aqueous solu- percentage of moisture saturation of ing agents. tiontoform aluminumhydroxide the air, such as the dew-point hygrom- hydrolysis. In its broadest sense, hydrol- (Al(OH)3), whichisinsoluble and eter,psychrometer, hair hygrometer, ysis indicates a reaction between any therefore forms few ions, and sulfuric etc. substance and water; however, the use acid (H0SO4), which is almost com- hygroscopicity. That property of a sub- of the term is commonly restricted to pletely ionized in a dilute water solu- stance which enables it to absorb water those reactions due directly to the hy- tion. The acid character of alum is well vapor from the surrounding atmos- drogen and hydroxyl ions of the water. known by its extremely sour, astringent phere. Relative to most materials, vel- Due to hydrolysis, for example, nearly taste, and by its detrimental effect on lum and paper, particularly the former, every salt yields a slightly acid or alka- the permanence of paper. are strongly hygroscopic. line solution. Thus, ethyl acetate in hydrophilic. A substance that is readily hygroscopic moisture. The amount of water, for example, forms acetic acid wetted by water. VELLUM is a typical moisture retained by a material in the and ethanol: CH3CO2E0di:-, H00 hydrophilic substance. AIR DRY condition. CH3COOH C2H5OH. hydrophobic. A substance thatis water style. A style of binding used for Hydrolysis is the basis for the manu- repellent, or not easily wetted by water. church , or similar publications facture of soap (saponification), where- Nylon isa typical hydrophobic sub- which utilizes a narrow leather spine, by fats (glycerol esters of fatty acids) stance. cloth sides, round or square corners, aresplitwith aqueous solutions of hygroexpansivity. A change in the dimen- and colored edges. (261) sodium hydroxide to form the sodium sions of a material, such aspaper, hysteresis. The differentialvalue of a salt of the fatty acid (soap) and the because of a change in the ambient property, contingent upon approaching alcohol(glycerolmorecommonly relative humidity of the atmosphere a known value of arelatedcondition known as glycerine). In reactions in- surroundingthematerial. The phe- from a higher or lower level. A ma- volving salts, the neutralization reaction nomenon is usually expressed as a per- terial such as paper, for example, that that led to the formation of the salt is centage, and is generally several times is to be conditioned at 50% relative partially reversed, forming some free greater in the cross direction of a paper humidity, will contain more moisture acid and f:ee alkali. If the acid is weak, than in the MACHINE DIRECTION, be- when this levelisapproached from i.e., poorly ionized, and the alkaliis cause paper fibers expand much more above 50% than when approached strong, i.e., highly ionized, the aqueous in diameter than in length when wetted. from below. Hysteresis has a consider- solution of the salt will have an alkaline Hygroexpansivityisofconsiderable able influence in governing the dimen- reaction as a result of the hydrolysis. importance where the dimension of sional stability of paper.

1 5 6. 136 Imperfections

I. The Roman equivalent of 1. See: RO- It lacks the richness and depth of genu- MAN NUMERALS. ine gold and eventually tarnishes due to ichthyocoll. See: 1511 ASS. oxidation. Also called "artificial gold." illuminated. A manuscript or book em- (147, 164) bellishedwithornamentalletters, imitation leather. A coated fabric, rubber scrolls, miniature and/or other designs, or plastic composition, or absorbent usually in gold and red, but also in sil- paper, manufactured so as to resemble ver and other colors. (169) genuine leather. Of the many efforts to illuminated binding. A binding which has findasatisfactorysubstitutefor extra colors in its scheme of decora- leather, both proposed and actually tion, and especially a binding in which manufactured, only a few have any ex- a design was first blocked in blind and tensive use in bookbinding today, and, afterwards colored. Originally a French as they usually contain cellulose nitrate innovation, this style was used in Eng- for the application of ink and water or polychlorides, their permanence is land from about 1830 to 1860. Burnt color. Itis made by pasting drawing suspect. Also called "artificial leather." sienna,carmine,gamboge,indigo, paper to one or both sides of a board, (198, 264) sap green and ultramarine were the one that is usually filled, pulp-lined, or imitation parchment. A type of relatively colors most often used mainly because pasted. The usual properties of the strong paper first produced by W. E. they were more lightfast. The color was drawing paper, such as finish and siz- Gaine in 1857. It is made entirely of mixed with a suitable gum and applied ing, are essential, but hard sizing and chemical wood pulp and is called imi- to the cover; when it was dry, gold leaf good erasing quality are of greatest im- tation parchment in order to distinguish was laid on the areas to be gilded, and portance. The finished board should be it from parchment paper made in imi- the entire design was then impressed as free as possible from warping. The tation of true(animal)parchment. with the heated block, which fixed both basis weight is 150 pounds (17 X 22 Imitation parchment now bears little gold and colors, sharpening the edge of 500), and the thickness is 0.0325 inch. resemblance to that paper, nor does it the latter. (152, 156, 236, 365) (17)* possess any of its qualities. The paper illumination. The decoration of a manu- imbrication. A form of embellishment of may be rendered partially transparent, script or book with painted pictures, a book featuring a pattern consisting of greaseproof, and somewhat waterproof ornamented letters, designs, or a com- overlapping leaves or scales. The term by prolonged beating (hydration) of bination thereof, in colors and (usu- is also applied to any decorative pattern the pulp or by treating the paper with ally) burnished gold or silver. composedofoverlappingelements. sulfuric acid. The usual basis weight is The design was first drawn and then (156, 233) 30 pounds (24 x 35 500). (17, 156) sized with a mixture of clay, gypsum imitation art paper. A printing paper con- imitation Russia. A vegetable-tanned split orlime,followed by anadhesive taining a high percentage of china clay, cowhide finished with oil of birch to (glair). The gold or silver leaf was kaolin, etc., in the paper furnish. It has impart the odor characteristic of true laid on and burnished, and the colors a very high water finish, which pro- RUSSIA LEATHER. were then applied. vides the required surface opacity, and imitation vellum. A paper made so as to Although illumination is considered absorbency suitable for the printing of simulate true VELLUM, and produced to be a medieval art, its origins can be some halftones.Imitationartpaper in much the same manner as IMITATION traced backtoillustrated Egyptian differs from ART PAPER ( 1 ) in that the PARCHMENT, except that it is thicker. papyrus rolls and especially to Greco- clay is mixed with the fibers, and is imperfect. 1. A book having leaves or Roman hook illustration. Classical art- thus an entirely on-machine operation. sections omitted, duplicated, misplaced ists illustrated the text of codices with Coated art paper, which is the superior or bound in upside down, damaged, continuous chronological sequences of product, may be determined by the etc. 2. An Obsolete term for reams of scenes, which often filled the entire black mark which results from rubbing paper that have not been made up of page. itwith a silvercoin. Imitation art the full number of a printer's ream. The word "miniature," which comes paper is not usually suitable for half- (83, 156) from the Latin minimum (red lead, tone printing where the screen is finer imperfection note. The bookbinder's list which the Romans used for initial let- than 133 lines. (17, 58) of shortages encountered as he pro- ters), is frequently used with reference imitation cloth. A material other than a ceeds through to the end of an edition to the individual pictures in an illumi- woven fabric, e.g., paper or plastic, run. Certain sections or plates may be nated work; however, a "miniature which has been embossed to give it the missing because of spoilage or short painting" is not synonymous with "il- surface appearance of a fabric. (102) printing, and it is customary to print lustration," because illuminations are imitation gold. A metallic composition therequisiteextracopies ofthese usually executed in gold or silver while used as a substitute for gold leaf or foil when, and if,the book is reprinted. miniatures generallyarenot.(140, inthelettering and decorating of (307) 156, 365) books, particularly in edition binding. imperfections. 1. Printed sheets rejected illustration board. A board used primarily It is usually made of powdered bronze. by the binder because of some kind of

1 5 7 imperial morocco cloth 137 incunabula

imperfection, and which must be re- toone-sideprinting,e.g.,printing or original plates constituting a new placed before the work can be com- blank rule and tabular forms, with "impression" of the work. If, however, pleted.2.Additionalsections,i.e., cross rules in one section and vertical the pages are reimposed to produce a those printed and folded in excess of rules in the other. In this method, two different format, the resultant impres- the number required to complete the separate sections, or divisions, of an sion is a different edition. 6. A single run. (1;39) individual form are imposed and locked copy of a print or map. 7. A print imperial morocco cloth. A linen cloth up together in such a manner that they taken by means of a special engraving finished with a grain pattern resembling may be printed side by side on a press, from an enlarged plate. (12, 17, leather,usually a straight-grained double-sized sheet in one impression. 83) morocco. After completion of the run, the al- in boards (in-board binding; in-board for- imposition. The plan of arrangement of ready printed paperisrepositioned warding). 1. A book which has had its the pages of type in a chase so that face up for the second printing from edges cut after the boards have been they will read consecutively when the the same image carrier.Work-and- laced-in. In-board forwarding, although printed sheetisfolded.Itisa term twist imposition is actually rarely used, infrequently used today, was the prin- which means literally "in position," and as it requires nearly perfectly square cipal method of craft bookbinding for originated in . stock for execution. (234, 287, 289, centuries and in many respects is still There are four standard methods of 316, 320, 339) the finest technique of forwarding, as it imposition: 1) sheetwise; 2) work-and- impregnated fabrks. Fabrics in which the treats bookbinding purely as a craft. turn;3) work-and-tumble;and 4) interstices between the yarns are com- Italsoenablesthebookbinderto work-and-twist. The purpose of having pletelyfilledwiththeimpregnating achieve more accurate SQUARES. IIis different schemes is to obtain maximum compound throughout the thickness of an abbreviation of "cut in boards." Cf: economy in printing. thematerial,asdistinguished from OUT OF BOARDS. 2. A term occasionally Sheetwise imposition, also known as sized or coated fabrics, where the inter- applied to an economical style of bind- "work-and-back," "front-and-back," or stices are not completely filled. Some- ing common in 18th and early 19th "print-and-back," requires two image times the reverse side of impregnated centuries,consistingof pasteboards carriers per color, one each for the fabrics are sized to insure the adhesive covered with paper, usually blue sides front and back of thesheet.This sticking to the cloth. When a grain or and a white spine. (343) method is used for printing jobs where pattern is applied to impregnated fab- in-boards extra. An in-board binding with the number of pages to be printed on rics, it is worked directly into the cloth, solid gilt edges. each side of the sheet is large enough rather than on a surface coating as is incised leather. See: CUIR-BOUILLI; CUIR to utilize the full capacity of the press. the case of coated fabrics. See also: CISELg. Work-and-turn imposition, also room( CLOTH. (208, 260, 341) incunabula(sing.incunabulum;angli- known as**print-and-turn,"isused impregnated paper. A paper in which a cized: ). Books and all print- where it is practical to print both sides material such as latex or plastic is made ing from movable metal type which can of the sheet from a single image car- to permeate the paper rather than be dated before the year 1501. The rier per color. It is frequently used, and merely coat it, thus adding to the wet date limitation probably derives from requires relatively large presses because strength, tearing resistance, and oil or the earliest known catalog of incuna- the sheet will carry two complete units, grease resistance of the paper. The un- bula, an appendix to Johann Saubert's each occupying one-half of the sheet. treated paper used in its manufacture Historia bibliothecae Noribergensis... The sheet is either slit during backup is known as saturating paper.(102, catalogus librorum proximis ab inven- or is cut apart after printing. Work- 139) tione annis usque ad a. Ch. 1500 edi- and-turn imposition cuts the number impressed watermark. See: WATERMARK. torum, 1643. "Incunabula" derives its of sheets to be printed by 50%, but it impression. 1. The pressure required to name from the Latin "cunae" (cradle) generally requires larger and more ex- transfer ink from one surface to an- and refers to books produced in the in- pensive presses than sheetwise imposi- other, as, for example, plate to paper, fancy of printing. The term may also tion. or plate to blanket, etc.Itis usually be used to designate works created dur- Work-and-tumbleimposition,also expressed in terms of thousandths of ing the earliest stages in the develop- known as "print-and-tumble," "work- an inch beyond that needed to produce ment of an art form or technique or at and-roll," or "work-and-flop," is used first contact between two printing cyl- the beginning of any new period of less frequently than either of the two inders. 2. A printed copy or the result artistic productivity. previous methods. It is selected when of impressing ink upon a receiving sur- In a general sense, the term "incuna- a work-and-turn form cannot be used, face. 3. The indentations remaining in bula" can be used to lefer to printed or when two sheetwise forms would paper as a result of the pressure used works of a time so early in the history have to be run on a sheet of difficult in letterpress printing plus the damp- of printing in a given locality that such dimensions. This method needs only ness of the paper. These impressions printing may be said to be in its in- one image carrier for printing both were often quite pronounced in early fancy; thus it is possible to speak of sides of the sheet, and in this respect it letterpress printing. See also: CONVEX American incunabula, Arizona incuna- is similar to work-and-turn. COVERS. 4. The effect produced by bula, etc. With regard specifically to Work-and-twist imposition, also stamping, blocking, printing, or tooling printing, however, and unless stated knownas"work-and-twirl,"differs a design or lettering on the covers of a otherwise, the term is used to refer to fundamentally from all three previous book. 5. All copies of a work printed the products of the European press of schemes. Whilethefirstthreeare at one time from one setting of type. the 15th century. methods designed to produce sheets There may be several impressions (pre- Incunabulawereusuallysimply printed on both sides, work-and-twist sumably unaltered)of one edition, bound in leather-covered boards with imposition solves problems pertaining each new printing from standing type decoration inblind. However, their

5 5 independents 138 ink

collectors later often had them rebound index may be made with any number manufactured fromanthranilicacid inmore sumptuouscovers;conse- of divisions and leaves to each division, (C7F17110o), and used, along with wood quently original bindings are now rela- or may be cut through the entire book. ashes, mainly in northern Nigeria, in tively !are. (69, 140, 255) (264, 343) the removal of hair from goatskin. In independents. Books or pamphlets pub- index rolls. Alphabetical brass rolls used the 19th century the natural product lished separately and later bound to- for lettering indices. (264) was used, in conjunction with sulfuric gether into one physical volume. index shears. A curved or ordinary pair acid, to make a blue coloring matter index. In bookbinding, the words, letters, of shears with an adjustable gauge, for use in the production of leather numbers,etc.,printed,stamped or used for cutting step indices. (264) cover marbles. (130) pasted in alphabethical, numerical, or index tab. A small piece of leather, pa- industrial binding. A term sometimes ap- other order: 1) in spaces cut or gouged per, card, or fabric attached to, and plied to early machine produced (edi- in the fore edge of the book; 2) tabs projecting from the fore edge of a book tion) bindings of the 19th century. attached to the leaves at the fore edge; and bearing in progressive order, usu- infusorialearth.See: DIATOMACEOUS or 3) printed on the leaves of the book, ally from head to tail, letters, words, SILICA. or on separate sheets to be inserted in symbols, or other indexing informa- ingrain. A descriptive term applied to a their proper position in the book. The tion. See also: THUMB INDEX. (274) mottled, rough, or granite appearance purpose of the indexisto facilitate India Bible paper. See: BIBLE PAPER. in a type of paper used for pamphlet quick reference to the contents. See India ink. See: CHINESE INK. covers. also: CUT THROUGH INDEX; ONE-LETTER Indian tragacanth. See: KARAYA GUM. inhibitor. 1. A substance used to reduce INDEX;TAB INDEX; THUMB INDEX; Indian yellow. A yellow coloring matter the rate of a chemical reaction. Inhibi- TWO-LETTER INDEX. prepared from the evaporated urine of tors are sometimes used in certain types index board. A type of single- or twin- cows that have been fed on mango of adhesives to prolong storage- or wire pulp board, in white and colors, leaves. It is less fugitive than most other working-life. 2. Substances that retard used for index cards and other record yellow lakes. In 1938, however, its pro- or prevent the accumulation of acid in keeping. The board has a good, even, duction wasprohibited on humane paper or leather, or the growth of mold well finished surface suitable for writ- grounds, as mango leaves are harmful or fungi on leathers, paper, cloth, ad- ing, and is smooth, hard-sized, and of to the cattle. The term is also applied hesives, etc. (198, 309) an even LOOK-THROUGH. The usual toabrilliantyellow pigment made in hubs. A term applied to a blankbook basis weights are 180, 220, 280, 340, from naphthol yellow and used in coat- when the HUBS have been glued to the and and 440 pounds (25.5 X 30.5 ing paper. (233) SPRING-BACK (1), the book then being 1000). (17) India Oxford paper. See: BIBLE PAPER. ready for covering. (264) indexing. The process of attaching index India paper. From about 1768 to 1875, a ink. A general descriptive term for a fluid tabs to the leaves of a book, or the soft absorbent paper imported from or viscous material of various colors, cutting, stamping, gouging or printing China for use in making proofs of en- but most often black or blue-black, that of indices in the fore edges of books. gravings. Since 1875 it has been made is composed essentially of a pigment or When tabs are used for the index, the from chemically processed hemp and dye in a suitable vehicle and used for top one is cut larger than the others rags. Todayitisgenerallyathin, printing or writing. when thestepsaresmall, because, opaque sheet made in a basis weight of The earliestinks were essentially being at the top of the leaf, a small 20pounds,bulkingapproximately suspensions of soot (carbon) in a gum. step may break away during use unless 1,000 pages to the inch. (82, 182) They were very suitable for use with it is large enough to be secured firmly India proof paper. See: CHINA PAPER. (1) papyrus, which was porous enough to to the leaf. In blankbook tab index- India red (Indian red). See: VENETIAN RED. absorb the vehicle and entrap the pig- ing, under average conditions, eel tain India rubber. A substance obtained from ment between the fibers. Under these letters of the alphabet will have more the latex of many tropical plants, espe- conditions the writing would be perma- accounts listed under them than will cially of the genera Hevae and Ficus, nent,indelible, and harmless to the other letters. Analysis of this had led and characterized by its elasticity, al- papyrus. This type of ink was in com- to the development of tables that give though this property varies widely de- mon use until the1 1 th century when the proper number of pages to meet the pending upon its source and prepara- IRON-GALL INK began to Coaleinto requirements of each letter. Thus, more tion. It was at one time used in the prominence. pages are required for the initial letter production of adhesive bindings. See The introduction of PARCHMENT as S. followed by B (or vice versa in some also: CAOUTCHOUC BINDING. (25) a writing material was probably the cases), then H, and so on down to X, India tint. A term commonly applied to reason why an ink other than a carbon- which requires the fewest. printing papers to indicate a light buff gum solution became necessary. Car- Indicies for reference books are usu- color. bon ink would not adhere to the greasy ally of the thumb type, while blank- indicator. A ribbon, usually of steel, on a surface of a material such as parch- books generally have cut through or GUILLOTINE cutter, ruled to sixteenths ment, and, in any case, it was too easily tab indicies. of an inch. Itis used to read the dis- removed by sponging. See: PALIMPSEST. In indexing format, a ONE-I.F.TTER tance from the front face of the back Examination of parchment manuscripts INDEX usually consists of 24 letters or gauge to the cutting edge of the knife. from the 9th to 15th centuries indicate divisions, while a TWO-LETTER INDEX (145) that all were written with iron-gall inks has 13 divisions. Some indices have indigo. A blue vat dyestuff, with the for- in which no trace of carbon could be supplementaryindicesforthefive mula (C1H10N00.,), formerly derived found. Carboninks,however,con- vowels cut into the leaves of each letter by fermentation of the leaves of the tinued to be used for documents, prob- of the main index. herbaceousshrubsIsatistinctoria, ably until the advent of the "blue- Although these terms are used, an Polygonum tinctoria,etc.,but now black" ink period. From these some-

1 5 I) ink absorption 139 inserted after binding

what indefinite beginnings, simple iron- in printing and blocking. The capability used to indicate a continuous manu- gall inks were the predominant inks un- of the ink to wet the printing surface facturing process combining many dif- til about 1860, when the introduction isessential and in many cases the ferent operations. An example of inline of aniline dyes brought about radical ability of the paper to absorb the ink machine work in bookbinding would chpnges in ink manufacture, stemming vehicleisalso important. See also: be in the backer, triple liner and head- largely from the fact that in the case ABSORBENCY; PRINTABILITY; RECEPTIV- banding machine, casing-in machine, of an ANILINE INK, the need for partial ITY. (17, 98) book forming and pressing machine, oxidation of t;,, ink no lo4:r existed. inlaid. A leaf or plate that has been placed and jacketing machine, all aligned as Since then th ,ufacture of ink has within a larger and usually thicker leaf, to speed, controls, etc., and connected become ex. 'complicated. for the purpose oi enlarging its mar- to each other by a specially constructed Most modem inks are manufactured gins and thus its overall size. This is linking conveyor. An "inline" binding to overcome one or more of the dis- sometimes done to make it as large as machine, thereforeisa single com- advantages inherent in blue-black inks, the other leaves in a composite volume, pletely integrated machine used for the including their acidity, muddiness, and in which case it is usually described as mass production of books. It operates less than adequate permanence. When "inlaid to size." The term is also ap- intermittently,the conveying mecha- considering permanence it is important plied to the laying down, or re-margin- nism moving a uniform and predeter- todistinguish between printing inks ing of all four edges, of a damaged leaf. mined distance, then stopping for a and writing inks, because, as prepared The overlapping edges are sometimes short interval during which the books today, the former are more permanent shaved thin to prevent bulkiness at the are subjected to the action of all proc- than the latter. Writing inks, having a laps (69) essing stations at the same time. As high degree of permanence, can be inlaid binding. See: INLAY. (4) each book moves on, it passes through made to meet special requirements, but inlaid ornaments. See: INLAY. (2) the production steps selected for a spe- such inks are harmful to the fountain inlay. 1. A strip of kraft or other rela- cific job. (302) pens. In gcneral, the introduction of tively stiff paper, used to stiffen the !,nner lining. 1. See: SPINE LINING (1 ). 2. writing inks colored with an aniline dye spine area of the case of a library bind- See: INLAY (1). has made the typical modern writing ing. The paper used should be between inner margin. That margin of a page ad- ink less permanent than its predecessor 0.012 and 0.025 inch in thickness, de- jacent to the binding edge of a book. of a century earlier. The stability of pending on the size of the book. Edi- It is the left hand margin of the recto good quality printing ink, on the other tion bindings generally do not have and the right hand margin of the verso hand, is such that it usually outlasts inlays. See also: Hou.m. 2. An illus- of a book that reads from left to right. the paper, and this is as permanent as tration, photograph, picture, or other See also: GUTTER. (131) itneed be. See also: CARBONACEOUS decoration inlaidinthe cover of a inorganic aids. Acids, such as hydro- INKS; CARBON INK; CHINESE INK; book. 3. A manuscript, letter, leaf, etc., chloric, sulfuric, nitric, etc.,that are COLORED INKS; PRINTING INKS; SEPIA mounted in a cut-out frame to protect usually very corrosive and are often INKS. (20, 21, 143, 198) itand/or permit bothsidestobe relatively nonvolatile. Also known as ink absorption. A measure of the extent viewed. The edges of the plate, etc., "mineral acids." Cf: ORGANIC ACIDS. to which an ink will penetrate into a are beveled and pasted to the beveled in quires. See: IN SHEETS. sheet of paper before it dries. edges of the sheet cut out to its size. insect wax. A WAX such as that obtained ink and fold papers. Decorative end- and 4. A piece of leather, of the same thick- from China, where insects such as cover papers produced by laying a sheet ness as the leather covering of a book, Coccus ceriferus deposit the wax on of plain on a lined glass sur- butusually of a contrastingcolor, trees. The wax isscrapedoff and face to aid in the placement of the de- grain, or both, cut to a desired shape washed on the surface of hot water sign. The glass can be wetted before the for placing into the leather covering, before being cast into molds and set in paper is laid on, or the paper itself can from which a piece of the exact same blocks.It has a softening range of be thoroughly wetted. The designis size and shape has been removed. If 80 to 84C., and is very firm, like laid on with colored inks and a brush, the scheme of decoration calls for tool- beeswax, and consequently is useful in and the paper is then folded twice ing over the area of the inlay, the providing body for leather dressings to along its long dimension and then over, leather for the inlay is cut on a bevel so be used in very hot climates. (291) formingasquare.Thesquareis that the grain surface is slightly larger insert. 1. A piece of blank paper or card squeezed tightlyto make the color than the flesh side, while the leather laid between the leaves of a book and blend, and the paper is then unfolded covering is cut in the opposite manner. not secured. Inserting is sometimes re- and allowed to dry. Dots with circles If, however, the area of the inlay is quired to compensate for the swelling and stripes are commonly used designs not to be tooled, the inlay and leather of the spine caused by the added bulk for this paper. (183) covering are cut vertically. Inlaid bind- of the sewing thread. 2. An additional ink blocking. The process of blocking ings were produced in great numbers printed leaf or leaves, circular,etc., titles, or other information, on book in the 17th and 18th centuries, epe- placed between the leaves of a book, covers in black or colored inks. An un- cially in France. Onlaid bindings are pamphlet,newspaper,etc.3.See: heated press and quick-drying printer's often mistakenly described as inlaid. INSET (1). (82, 164, 316) ink are used. Drying can be a problem Cf: ONLAY. 5. The setting of a leaf or inserted. A term describing folded sec- in climates experiencing high relative plate into a larger leaf by cutting out a tions on which pasting or inserting has humidity. (140) portion of the latter,beveling, and been accomplished, the sections then ink holdout. See: HOLDOUT; INK RECEP- pasting the leaf or plate over the gap. being ready for gathering. TIVITY. (161, 183, 335, 343) inserted after binding. Bulky maps, plans, ink receptivity. That property of a paper, inline binding machine. A term borrowed etc., which require many folds and cloth, etc., that allows it to accept ink from the packaging field where itis which are to be tipped into the book inset 140 international paper sizes

subsequent to binding, as they might integral cover. See: SELF-COVER. further forward than would be possible otherwise interfere with trimming. In integrated bookbinding. A craft book- if both clamp and back gauge were order to compensate for the bulk of binding which displays surface imagery solid. Its purpose is to allow for cut- this material, and thus prevent gaping that is intended to interpret and project ting narrow strips. In normal cutting, of the covers of the finished book, a the essence of the communication of a flat solid plate fits over the clamp to COMPENSATION GUARD isusuallyin- the author of the book. This imagery is prevent it from indenting the stock. cluded in the binding of the book. See also inseparable from the style of any (145) also: LIPPED; THROW OUT. illustrative matter contained in the text, intermediate colors. The six colors located inset. 1. A section placed within another and sympathetic to the typographical between the primary and, secondary section so that the subsequent sewing format. The design elements work con- colors of the spectrum, and which are passes through the folds of both. The sistently throughout the book and its green-blue, blue-violet, red-violet, red- inset may be four pages only or multiples binding.Integrated bookbindingex- orange,orange-yellow,andyellow- of four pages and may be placed in the cludes unrelated surface decoration. green. (233) center of the outer section, or on the (311) internal bond strength. The strength of outside, where isis wrapped around interleaved (interleaved plate; interleav- the adhesion between body stock and the main section. In rare cases itis ing).1. An extra leaf, usually blank, coating of a paper. Low internal bond sometimes located in some intermediate inserted between the printed leaves of strength will sometimes result in pick- position. Insettingis of considerable a book, generally for the writing of ing of the clay coating from paper importance as a method of incorporat- notes, or, if thin tissues, to prevent text when it is printed with a tacky ink. ing plates into a section without resort- and illustration from rubbing together, internally plasticized. An adhesive which ing to tipping-in. Where the plates are in which case it is more appropriately has had the plasticizing agent intro- on the outside of the section they are called a BARRIER SHEET.2. A plate duced as part of the adhesive molecule sometimes referred to as "outserts" or which has a thin leaf bearing a descrip- during the manufacturing process, as "wrap arounds." If the section to be tive caption pasted to the inner margin. contrasted with an adhesive to which insettedisrequired to complete the A leaf of cellophane is a modern ver- the plasticizer is added by the user. succession of pages,itiscalled an sion of this. (82, 234) The adhesiveiscopolymerized with "offcut." 2. A small map, illustration, interleaving blotting paper. A thin blot- the plasticizer to form the internally etc., set within the border of a larger ting paper used between freshly printed plasticized adhesive. one. (58, 82, 287) sheets to prevent ink from being OFF- internal stress. Stress created within an in sheets. Unbound printed sheets, espe- SET (2) to other sheets, or to absorb adhesive film because of different rates cially when unfolded. The term is also (dry) fresh writing in ink. It is pro- of movement of the joint, or by the used loosely to indicate sheets that have duced in a basis weight of 20 pounds contraction or expansion of the ad- been processed up to the point of fold- (19 x 24 500). (17) hesive itself. ing and gather:ng. "In sheets" is grad- interleaving paper (interleLvingtissue). international paper sizes. Standard sizes uallysuperseding"inquires,"with See: BARRIER SHEET. of paper that are recognized interna- which it is synonymous. See also: QUIRE interlocking clamp and back gauge. Re- tionally. The international "A" series (2); SHEET STOCK. cesses in the clamp and back gauge of of paper sizes, which are now widely inside borders (inside margin). See: TURN- a GlmmtarINE cutter which permit the recognized throughout the world are: INS (1). back gauge to push the pile to be cut inside dentelle. See: DENTELLE. inside rolling block. A block of wood the thickness of a book so that its opened Designation Trimmed Size cover will lie perfectly flat on its top. Millimeters Inches It has a concave edge into which the 4A 1,682 by 2,378 66.22 by 93.62 rounded spine of the book fits, thus 2A 1,189 by 1,682 46.81 by 66.22 providing support for the entire cover AO 841 by 1,189 33.11 by 46.81 up to the joint. It is used when finish- Al 594 by 841 23.39 by 33.11 A2 420 by 594 16.54 by 23.39 ing the inside of the cover, and tooling A3 297 by 420 11.69 by 16.54 the turn-ins. Several sizes of block are A4 210 by 297 8.27 by 11.69 required for books of different thick- A5 148 by 210 5.83 by 8.27 nesses. ( 115 ) A6 105 by 148 4.13 by 5.83 inside tins. See: PRESSING TINS (2). A7 74 by 105 2.91 by 4.13 in signatures. The gathered but unsewn A8 52 by 74 2.05 by 2.91 sections of a book. See also: QUIRE (2). A9 37 by 52 1.46 by 2.05 in straps. The condition of a blankbook A 10 26 by 37 1.05 by 1.46 when the leather or cloth, usually the (156) former, has been glued underneath the SPRING-BACK (1) between the tapes or webbings. See also: CLOTHINGS. (264) intaglio. 1. The impression formed by a ROLL (1) cut in relief in which the sunken part of the leather forms the design. 2. A type of watermarking with a DANDY ROLL. Also called "shadow watermark." See: WATERMARK.

1 Es in the crust 141 ivory

In the crust. Hides or skins that have been riveted onto the boards. The style was had largely replaced carbon inks as a preserved (cured)in the dry, salted also employed in England in the 19th writing medium. (143) state. See: DRY-SALTING. century. (152) ironing. The process of smoothing the In the pickle. Hides or skins that have grain surface of finished leather. Iron- beenpreserved(cured) iron-gall ink. An INK produced by the re- thoroughly action of tannic acid with an iron salt, ing customarily follows BOARDING (1 ), soaked in a brine solution. See: BRIN- and, although the grain is again made ING. such as ferrous sulfate (Fe504). The reaction produces no immediate change smooth by the ironing, the pattern pro- in the round. See: GILT IN THE ROUND; in the color of the solution, but, when duced by the boarding remains. The SEWING IN THE ROUND; TRIMMED IN the ink is applied to paper and is thus ironing makestheboardedleather THE ROUND. exposed to air, it darkens by oxidation, softer and more flexible.It may be in the square. See: GILT IN THE SQUARE; forming ferric tannate. The difficulty of done by hand (much in the same man- TRIMMED IN THE SQUARE. writing with a colorless fluid was par- ner as clothes are ironed), or, more invading the print. See: CROPPED ( 1 ). tially overcome by the addition of gum commonly today,inrotaryironing inverted pages. The arrangement of a arabic to the solution, as well as some machines,inwhichtheleatheris book or periodical issue containing two pre-exposure to air, so as to form of passed over a polished, heated steel separate works issued together, and the ferric tannate before use. The gum cylinder, which is thermostatically con- bound or imposed in such a manner arabic servedto prevent theferric trolled at a pre-set temperature. The that one is inverted with respect to the tannate from settling out of solution. fine effect of ironing seemingly cannot other, each beginning at one end of the There were disadvantages to this pro- be obtained by other processes, such as volume or issue and concluding in the cedure, such as the tendency of the smooth-plating. (363) interior. Each may have its own title ferric tannate to settle out despite the isinglass (ichthyocoll). A semi-transparent page and perhaps blank leaves between gum arabic, and the tendency of the whitish substance consisting of a very the two works. See also: DOS DOS ink to remain on the surface of the pure form of gelatin, produced from BINDING. writing material instead of impregnating the sounds (swimming bladders) of the invisible joint. The joint of an endpaper the fibers. This was due to the fact that sturgeon (Acipenser huso, and other consisting of a reinforcing fabric, usu- the ink had formed before meeting the species of Acipenser), found inthe ally linen or cambric, so constructed paper, and the result was that it could Caspian and Black Seas. After removal, that it cannot be seen in the finished be removed rather easily by washing the bladders are cut open, soaked in book. Sometimes called a "concealed once the water had loosened the gum. water, spread out and the outer silvery joint." (102) In an effort to overcome these prob- membrane iemoved by rubbing. The invoice. An itemized statement, in greater lems, various coloring matters were isinglass contains about 80% collagen. or lesser detail, furnished by the binder added to the original solution, includ- It is used as a clarifying agent, in the tothe library,specifying the work ing extracts of logwood, and, at a later manufacture of fish glue, and as a size done, the pricesfor the work, and date, indigo. Other than being colored for handmade paper. Its use in recent (sometimes) the terms of payment. at the outset, iron-gall inks treated in years has greatly diminished, due to the Irish moss. The dried and bleached plants this manner had several advantages: rise in use of synthetic materials and of two red algae, Chrondrus crispus the oxidation and consequent deposi- gelatin. (102, 195, 335) and Gigartina mamillosa, used to some tion of solid matter was restrained and isometrk colors. Colors that appear to be extent in the production of MARBLING the ink therefore penetrated the fibers identical but actually have different SIZE. See also: CARRAGHEEN MOSS. (217) more readily; the penetration was as- chemical and/or physical properties. iron. 1, A heavy, malleable, ductile metal sisted by the absence of gum arabic Burnt umber and a mixture of burnt (Fe),of which some papermaking because the ink could then flow more sienna, black, and a small part of beaters are constructed. Minute specks freely; oxidation occurred only on the green, for example, create an exact of iron, whichischemicallyactive, paper, and the ink then changed from imitation of the mass tone of burnt sometimes break off, enter the paper- blue to black; and the addition of the umber. (233) making slurry, and become part of the indigo also increased the resistance of the ink to fading and bleaching. Italian style. See: ALDINE (ITALIAN) STYLE. paper. Iron may act as a catalyst in the ivory. The hard, creamy-white, opaque, conversion of sulfur dioxide into sul- Iron-gall ink does have one serious furic acid, which is highly destructive disadvantage. Free acid is often pres- fine-grained, elastic, modified dentine, to paper. 2. An old measure of the ent, which not only corrodes steel pens that makes up the tusks of elephants badly, but, far worse, attacks the paper, and other (large) land and marine ani- thickness of a leather, one iron being mals. Ivory has been used as a writing equal to 148 inch. See also: LEATHER as well as certain of the dyes used to color them. and decorating medium because of the SUBSTANCE TABLE. fineness of its grain, its warm tone, the iron acetates.Ferricacetate(Fe(CH3 There is also the so-called Japan ink, ease with which it can be given a high CO.,)3, and ferrous acetate FE(CH3 which consists of almost completely polish, its adaptability for writing and CO2)2, deep red and pale green respec- oxidized iron tannate with large pro- carving, and, when properly cared for, tively and used, largely in the 19th cen- portions of gum, which gives a black its remarkable durability. tury,totreatleatherbindingsfor glossy effect immediately; and an ink Ivory was used for the covers of "sprinkled" and "tree" effects. See also: made from logwood and iron, without books in the Middle Ages, but not by TREE CALF. the addition of tannic acid, which has a English bookbinders until the mania iron bindings. Bookbindings, usually of greenish shade which eventually for novelty and commercial advantage German origin, which have covers of changes to black. led to its use in about 1860. It has also iron, castinthe form of grillwork Iron-gall inks came into use in the been used in the manufacture of supe- composed of bars and scrollsand 9th century and by the 11th century rior diptychs, as clasps for books, and

1 62 h,ory black 142 ivory bristol

for the folders used in bookbinding. and, until recently, in the production coated board with a high finish and a (102, 236, 280) of an ink used in copperplate printing. clear formation, and is somewhat trans- ivory black. A fine, velvety, carbonaceous, (152) lucent. The board is produced from black pigment, prepared by calcining ivory bristol. A bristol board used for a cotton fibers and chemical wood pulps ivory scraps; at one time, used in the variety of purposes, including light- in basis weights of 70 to 90 pounds production of black marbling color, weight binders' board.Itis an un- (221/2 X 281/2 500). (17, 82)

1 53 jacket 143 Japan marble TarP

jacket. 1. See: BOOK JACKET. 2. A detach- side. An alternative method is to begin able outer cover for a bound book, de- at either end, in which case the number &gned toprotectthe binding from of holes may he even or odd. Thread, wear and soiling. It is frequently made cord, string, yarn, tape, or rope fibers of a clear plastic and is more or less can be used. Japanese sewing may be easy to remove. 3. See: JOB TICKET. considered as a form of SIDE SEWING (256, 329) (or stabbing)and, althoughitdoes jaconet (jaconette). A lightweight cotton not allow much flexibility,especially cloth with a semi-glaze finish which with small books,itis an extremely enables it to resist briefly the penetra- strong method of sewing, possibly one tion of adhesives. Itis often used as of the strongest ever devised. (183) a reinforcing material in bookbinding a Japanese silk. A type of SILK that is more becauseitprovides strength without closely woven and of finerthreads excessive bulk. (237) fibers pull apart rather than tear. Also than the usual silk. It is also a double Jaffé, Mair (fl 1468-1480). An itinerant called "Iong-fibered ." warp fabric, i.e., the warp and filling Jewish bookbinder of Ulm who worked (17, 237) threadsare of the same thickness. at Nurnberg and was a master of the Japanese sewing. A method of sewing Japanese silk is less likely to fray along art of cum-ctsui, as applied to the leaves or sections which, despite the cut edges than ordinary silk, which embellishment of books. Jaffe bound a name, was actually developed in China. makes ituseful for SILK FLYLEAVES. Hebrew Pentatuch manuscript which The method involvesgathering and (236) was decoratedwithbeautifullyde- jogging the leaves, and then drilling a Japanese vellum. A thick paper produced signed animalfigures,and he also hole through the entire thickness of in Japan from native fibers that are of bound books for wealthy Nurnberg the pile in the center anywhere from relativdy great length. The paper has patricians. Itis notable that none of IAto 3/4inch from the edge of the a very cloudy formation and is tough Jaffe's bindings include any Christian spine, or more depending on the size anddurable. The colorisusually symbols, hut instead were decorated of the book, the nature of the paper, cream or natural, and the paper is with heraldic and ornamental designs and the extent of the binding margin. finished with a smooth surface. Jap- composed of unicorns, flowers, hounds, Additional holes are then drilled on anese vellum is suitable for engravings, and motifs of a similar nature. (141) either side of the center hole at uni- etc., or where a very durable paper is Jansen, Cornelius. See: JANSENIST STYLE. form distances, the total number, in- required. An imitation, made by treat- Jansenist style. Originally, a French style cluding the one in the center, being an ing ordinary paper with sulfuric acid, of book decoration of the late 17th odd number. The sewing proceeds is sometimes called "Japon." (156) and early 18th centuries, named after from the center hole to the head of Japan ink. See: IKON-GALL INK. thefollowersofCorneliusJansen the book, over the head and then down Japan marble. A cover marble ofa (1585-1638), the Bishop of Ypres, over the spine past the center hole to shaded red, produced by coating the who advocated personal holiness and the tail and then back to the center. leatherwithpotashwater(potash austerity. The books were embellished When the sewingiscompleted, the alum), brazilin and glair, followed by only by a centerpiece (often armorial) ends are tied in a flat knot on the out- copperas water (ferrous sulfate) and and corner fleurons, or by elaborate doublures tooled with dentelle borders but with no decoration atall on the JAPANESE SEWING spine and covers. (69, 172) Japanese copying paper. A very thin, strong paper made in Japan from long- fibered stock, such as mitsumata and the paper mulberry. It is a very versatile paper, and depending on the thickness, may he used for mending torn book leaves, for the overall lining of paper as reinforcement, for reinforcing the foldsofsections,orformending hinges. Japanese copying paper is for the most part handmade, the fibers be- ing pulped by hand and the sheets made on molds of bamboo or hair. The length of the fibers gives the paper exceptional strength and wearing char- acteristics, and when itistorn, the

1 6 .1 Japanned ox hide 144 jute board

the red coloring in large drops, which the leather. The device used in this marbled paper. The plain shet is glued were made to run down the covers. procedureisknown asthe"jigger to the first (and last) leaf of the book After the .colors had dried, the covers bands," and usually consists of one and the waste leaves to the boards. were then washed several times with or two lengths of cord stretched be- 3. Any location at which two adherends more ofthebrazilin,which added tween two wooden handles. (97, 335) are joined by a layer of adhesive. (83, gloss. ( 95 ) job backer. An iron screw press with 209, 335) Japanned ox hide. Virtually the same opposing steel jaws and a screw that joint rod. A strip of wood or plastic, flat leather as ENAMELED HIDE but finished operates horizontally.Itisusedin on one side and curved on the other, with a plain, flat surface. backing books by hand, usually those and placed between the board and Japan wax. A soft, yellowish w.,x having too large to fit into the ROUNDING AND SPRING-BACK (1) of a blankbook to adhesive properties. It is obtained from BACKING MACHINES. (164) formagroove when thebookis theDecriesoftheJapanese sumac job binding. A general term applied to pressed. To prevent the rod or board (Rhus verniciflua and other species of small binding jobs of a miscellaneous from pressing on the spring-back, the Rhus), and used in some leather dress- nature. Job binding does not utilize board is set a distance from the edge ings. It is not a true wax but a gly- fully automatic equipment, as is found of the rod, usually 1/2 inch. (264, 339) ceride, and contains palmitin with free in large edition binderies, but relies in- jordan. A type of REFINER consisting of palmitic acid. It has a softening range stead on handwork, either alone or in a conical plug which fits into a match- of 50* to 56* C., but upon being solidi-. conjunction with some machine opera- ing conical shell. The outside of the fied,islikely to have an erratically tions. The job binder produces smaller and the inner surface of the shell lower softening point for some time lots of edition bindings and also bind- arefitted with knives or bars. The thereafter. (173, 291) ing that cannot be accommodated by plug is pushed into the shell to the japon. An imitation JAPANESE vELLUM. automatic equipment, such as Bibles point where the knives or bars of each javelle water. A dilute bleaching solution and prayer books bound YAPP STYLE. arealmosttouching. When fibrous prepared either from sodium hypo- By accepteddefinition,job binding stockinsolutionenterstheshell, chlorite (Na0C1) or potassium hypo- doesnotinclude LIBRARY BINDING, usually at its smaller end, the knives chlorite (KOC1), the former being the although the two are similar in many or bars of the rotating plug and sta- stronger of the two. It was at one time respects. (320, 339) tionary shell mascerate the fibrous ma- widely used for bleaching purposes, job ticket. A printed form, often in the terial and help reduce it further. (17) but its use in the bleaching of archival form of an envelope, on which instruc- journeyman bookbinder. A bookbinder papers has been superseded by the use tions pertaining to a printing or bind- who has learned the aspects of the of milder agents, such as calcium hypo- ingjobarerecorded.Alsocalled trade of bookbinding. The term "jour- chlorite (Ca0C1). (197) "jacket." See also: BINING SLIP. (139) neyman" refers to the previous practice jeweled bindings. Bookbindings having jog (jogging). The operation of producing of workmen journeying from place to gilt metal plates covered with enamel a smooth-sided pile of sheets or sec- place to work indifferent shops in work and plaques in metal or ivory, tions by knocking or vibrating the ma- order to acquire a thorough and com- and embellished with jewels. Jeweled terial against a smooth, flatsurface, prehensive knowledge of the craft. The bindings were produced in many areas either by hand or by means of a term no longer has much significance of the Continent of Europe, notably in mechanical device known as a JOGGER. inthe United States, althoughitis France and Germany, from about the See also: KNOCKING UP. (190) used in some trades in describing a 6th to the 14th centuries, and in Eng- jogger. A vibrating device used to pro- person who has completed a training land during the Middle Ages. Very ducea smooth-sidedpileof paper program. few, however, have survivedintact. stock before trimming, folding, bind- j pattern. A pebbled pattern in a book These jeweled covers actually repre- ing, etc., or to align and position any clothsimilarinappearancetoa sented the work of the jeweler, gold- material for any purpose during a pro- morocco grain in goatskin. (256) smith, and , more than the duction run. The jogger may be a unit jump (jump out).1. A term applied to bookbinder. Jewels were also at times or a part of a printing press delivery the problem of books slipping from used on leather bindings in the 19th system. Joggers are employed at the under the guillotine clamp during trim- century, but it was not until shortly press or cutter in small printing shops ming. 2. A section or sections of a after the turn of the century that the and binderies, in label factories, and book which slip out of position during jeweledbindingbecameanestab- inthe gathering machines of news- the backing operation. See also: START. lished style, culminating in Sangorski's paper printing plants. (320) (256) GREAT OMAR. (236) joint. 1. The exterior juncture of the spine jute. An Indian bast fiber obtained from jiggering. 1. The procedure employed in and covers of a (usually) case-bound white jute, Corchorus capsularis, the BLIND TOOLING,inwhich,afteran book. Although the term "joint"is Tossa jute, C. olitorius, and other spe- initial quick application of the heated often usedtoindicatetheinternal cies of Corchorus. It is used in making finishing tool to "set" the leather in juncture of the board paper and fly burlap, gunny sacking, etc., which in the impression, the tool is impressed leaf of a book, the more appropriate turn have been used to provide I''ars a second time and :ocked slightly, im- term here is HINGE (1). See also: CLOSED used in papermaking. Jute fibers are parting a polished and darkened sur- JOINT; FRENCH JOINT; LACING-IN; SUP- weaker and less durable than flax or face to the base of the impression. PORTED FRENCH JOINT. 2. The sections hemp, and relatively easily rotted by 2. The process employed in imparting at the front and back of a blankbook, water. An average clean sample of jute dark lines on the spine of a book, consisting of one plain and one waste contains approximately 69.35% cellu- usually on either side of the raised sheet, connected by a strip of linen, lose and 18.82% lingnin. (17, 72, 143) bands, by means of a string or strings buckram, orotherrelatively heavy jute board. A board used occasionally as drawn back and forth rapidly across material, and lined with a plain or a binder's board, produced from jute Juvenile picture-book binding 145 juvenile picture-book binding

stock, along with chemical wood pulp. juvenile picture-book binding. A style of in the case and the book itself is given The board is said to be strong and binding in which the illustration of the a sturdy binding suitable for use by lightweight. BOOK JACK' T is usually incorporated children. See also: SCENIC BINDING. Kairouan bindings 146 kissing the bookbinder's daughter TE_ral?

Kairouan bindings. See: COPTIC BINDINGS. khaki. A strong, durable light olive-brown kangaroo skin. The skin of the herbivor- to light yellowish-brown cloth, usually ous marsupials (family Macropodidae) made from cotton and similar in tex- of Australia, New Guinea, etc., which ture to canvas. It makes a reasonably when properly tanned, makes a supple satisfactory covering material for books and durable bookbinding leather. To- subject to hard usage, such as blank- day, it is generally chrome tanned with books; however,itis not as durable a glazed finish, thus making it unsuit- as canvas or impregnated buckram. able for use as a bookbinding leather. (196) Itis said to be stronger, weight for khari. A salt which occurs as an efflores- weight, than any other leather. (325) CI cence on the ground in certain areas kaolin. A fine clay mass, usually white of India.Itcontainsapproximately in color, and made up principally of kerf. A shallow cut, approximately 1A2 60% sodium sulfate, 20% magnesium clay mineral kaolinite. The kaolin clays inch deep, made between 1/4and I/2 sulfate, and 5% sodium chloride.It have the approximate formula (A1002- inch from the head and tail on the is used in DRY-SALTING hides and skins 2SiO2 2H00); however, they also con- backs of the gathered sections of a largely in the area where it is found. tain small amounts of other minerals, kid seal. A SEALSKIN, dressed with alum as well as impurities. Kaolin is used text block. The loops of thekettle It makes a soft, stitchesfitintothekerfs and con- and salt and oiled. extensively as a coating and filling clay sequently do not show as lumps under tough, hard-wearing leather. in the manufacture of paper. See also: the leather of a TIGHT BACK binding. kidskin. The skin of a young goat. It has PAPER CLAY. (17, 60) a fine grain pattern, and makes a strong The termisalsoapplied,although karaya gum. A gum derived from the somewhat inaccurately, to the saw cuts and flexible leather. dried exudation of theIndiantree made for the cords used in IIECESSED- kkselghur. See: DIATOMACEOUS SILICA. Inthedeacetylated Sterculiaurens. CORD SEWING. (335) kinky filling. A place in a fabric where a form, it is used as a fiber deflocculating kettle stitch. The stitch made near the short length of WEFT has spontane- agent for the long-fibered paper pulps. head and tail of a book sewn on tapes ously doubled back on itself. Karaya gum is also used as an eco- or cords, and which holds the sections kip (kip calf; kipskln). 1. A small cattle nomicalsubstitutefor GUM TRAGA- (other than the first and last) together. hide,i.e.,the hides of fully mature CANTH, as the size for marbling water. The term may be a corruptionof cattle, other than the buffalo, native Itisalso known as"Indian traga- "catch-up stitch,"or "Kettelstitch" to the Indian Subcontinent and some canth," and colloquially as "gum hog." (the stitch that forms a little chain). parts of Africa, which are smaller than (17, 233, 339) Sometimes called "ketch stitch." (106, those of Europe and America. 2. The keratin. The fibrous protein material of 156, 236) skins obtained from immature Euro- the hair and epidermis of a hide or key. A bookbinder's tool, consisting of a pean and American bovine animals skin, which represents approximately device that somewhat resembles the that have been grass fed and which 2.0% of the protein composition of prongs of a blunt fork with a circular are larger than calves but smaller than the skin. (305) hole at the top. Itis used to secure fully grown cattle. Among cattle hides, keratose. The degradationproductof the sewing cords to the base of the a kip is one weighing between 15 and KERATIN. During the action of the lime sewing frame. (335) 25 pounds in the green salted state. liquors on the epithelial cells of the Generally, a kip is considered to be epidermis and sebaceous glands, degra- intermediate between a hide and a skin. dation products are formed which re- KETTLE STITCH Leather made from kips generally has main in the hides and skins after un- a fine, tight fiber. 3. As an abbrevia- hairing, scudding, and washing. They tion of the full term "East India tanned are present,in the form of viscous kip," or "E. I. kip crust," a vegetable solutionsorjelliesadheringtothe tannedleather made from cowhide structures of the thermostat layer, in originating in the Indian Subcontinent the region just under the grain surface. and tanned inIndia, mainly inthe They are not readily visible under the south, and especially around Madras. , butareprecipitatedas (61, 248, 264, 363) flocculent masses upon contact with kissing the bookbinder's daughter. A trick acid solutions. They are removed by played on a young bookbinder just the action of enzymes during BATING, finishing his apprenticeship, in which, 'nd, if not properly removed, will re- as part of the ceremony, he must kiss sult in a grainy surface that is thick, the daughter of the owner of the book- spongy, and irregular, suggesting the bindingestablishment. Theprettiest presence of keratoseprecipitatedin girl in the shop is actually chosen for the grain layer. (306, 363) the part, and as the new journeyman

1 6 7 kiss marks 147 krieg block

steps forward to perform his part of may be caused by the additionof finished or machine-glazed surface. It the ceremony, which he isrequired thread in the folds of the sections. can be watermarked, striped, or calen- to do with his eyes closed, a well-filled and also, at times, by the thickness of dered, and has an acceptable surface paste brush is substituted for the girl the paper used to guard damaged sec- forprinting.Itsnatural unbleached and the young binder gets a mouthful tions. Reducing the swellis a some- color is brown, but it can be produced of paste.See also:RINGING OUT. what delicate operation, as itis neces- in lighter shades of brown, cream tints, kiss marks. Light or white patches on sary to have additional thickness in and white, by the use of semi-bleached vegetable tanned leathers, caused by the spine in order to be able to round or fully bleached sulfate pulps. Kraft hides and skins touching each other and back the book properly; too much paperisgenerallymadeinbasis in the tanning pits, thus preventing the swell, however, produces undesirable weights from 25 to 60 pounds (24 X tan from penetrating the areas of con- results,including a wedge shape,a 36 500) but it is also made in weights tact. Kiss marks are prevented by rock- greater tendency for the spine of the ranging from 18 to 200 pounds. (17, ing the frames which hold the skins book to fallin, and a book thatis 81, 323) while in the pits. (306) lacking in firmness and solidity. Exces- .See:SULFATE PROCESS. knifefoldingmachine.See: FOLDING sive swell may be reduced by clamping Krause, Jacob(1526/7-1585).A German MACHINES. the text block in a lying press, placing bookbinder who learned the craft in knockers. A name given bindery workers the knocking-down iron against it, and the workshop of the famous Augsburg around the turn of the century who tapping the side at the spine with a merchant bankers. Krause was sum- jogged (knocked) and stacked sections backing hammer, or, as in the case of moned to Dresden in 1566 and ap- as they came from the folding ma- library and edition binding, by smash- pointed "BindertotheElectorof chines. Knocking up sections, in which ing or nipping. (339) Saxony." In the electoral decree ap- some 15,000 workers were employed knocking up. The process of evening up pointing him to this position it is spe- in the United States at the turn of the one or two edges of a pile of sheets cificallystatedthat he should bind century, was one of thelast hand so that they can be cut squarely, or books in the "German, French, and operations in the large edition bindery. forsomeotherpurposerequiring Italian fashion." Among his numerous (89) squared-up sheets.See also:JOG. (140) bindings there are a great number of knocking down (knock down). The proc- Koberger, Anton(1440-1513).A Nürn- blind-stamped pigskin bindings deco- ess of flattening any lumps or other berg printer and publisher and one of rated with panels and rolls, as well as high places on the covers of a book the most productive of all Nürnberg a group of richly gold tooled morocco caused by the cords laced into the craftsmenofhistime.Koberger's and calfskin bindings which he bound boards. (256, 335) books are often in fine bindings, char- for the Elector. Krause's bindings are knocking-down iron. A heavy, T-shaped acterized by afloraldiaperinthe noted for the technical excellence of piece of iron, which, when clamped in center panel of the upper cover, flanked their gold tooling, no gilder outside of a press, forms a solid base for hammer- by stems of ornamental foliage wound France producing "a petits fers" gild- ing down the cords used to lace the around a ragged staff. On the lower ing of such accuracy and perfection. boards to the book, or for a similar cover, there is usually no diaper; in- In artistic merit, however, while a few type of binding operation. (237) stead there are lozenge compartments of his bindings are considered to be knocking out the groove. The process em- formed by diagonalfilletsoften en- excellent, most are thought to be very ployed when rebinding a book that was closing a characteristic toola griffin much overloaded with gold tooling and backed in the original binding, ia which with scaly extended wings. Koberger's are too rich and "restless" to be con- the bend in each section caused by books frequently have the title lettered sidered completely successful. Krause's the backingisremoved. Inlibrary in large Gothic letters in gilt on the work, as well as that of his pupil and binding this is frequently accomplished upper cover. The panels on the spine successor, Caspar Meuser, is also re- by nipping the book before the sections often contain large rosettes scattered markable for theelaboratelytooled are separated. In hand binding, one in an irregular manner. While it has and printed edges, on which there is method is to hammer (three) sections been suggested that the books pub- often the arms of Saxony and his together on the knocking-down iron, lishedbytheKobergerfirmwere signatureI. K. F.in small letters. but a more gentle (and safer) method bound there, the correspondence of the (104, 141) isto bend each section individually firm from1493to1525 mentions krieg block. A composite wooden block, ver the edge of a board thus reversing neither bookbinding nor anything re- about 30 inches square, composed of *he backing fold. In the latter method lating to the binding process. (141, 347) small uniform pieces of clear white thereis no danger of disturbing the kozo.See:PAPER MULBERRY. pine,cutapproximately2inches conformation of the paper fibers, as kraft paper. A paper produced by a modi- square and 3 inches long, all set on can happen when the section is ham- fiedsulfateprocess, and employing end, glued together and enclosed by a mered. (161, 355) only wood pulp. It is a relatively coarse band of metal. Such a block is used knocking out the swell. The process of paper and is known especially for its bysomebookbindersforcutting reducing the "swell" in the spine of strength. Kraft paper is usually manu- leather. (256) a book sewn through the folds by hand factured on a Fourdrinier machine and or on a sewing machine. The swell is generally given a regular machine- 148 lacing-in Tat?

L. 1. The Roman equivalent of 50.See: loose-leaf bindings and also for attach- ROMAN NUMERALS. 2. A lower case ing leaves loosely in temporary covers. letter I is the abbreviation for LEAF. (1) The tags, if used, may be straight or label. A square or rectangular piece of crossed. leather, cloth, or paper, usually of a lacework. A border decoration on a book differentcolor fromthatusedfor cover, executed by tooling in gilt in covering, and attached to the spine, resemblance of lace.See:LACE BIND- or (occasionally) the upper cover of ING.See also:DENTELLE. a book. Labels display, usually in gilt lacing. A form of book decoration usually tooling or blocking, the title of the used on blankbooks, and consisting of book, the volume number (if any), a a narrow strips of vellum laced to the theauthor's name (sporadically be- outside of the covers. The vellum fore the late 18th century, bat regu- pass through the boards and are ham- larly since), and, since about 1800, on the bodies of the insectsCoccus mered flat inside so as not to appear the date of publication. lacca,which attach themselves to the as lumps under the board papers.See Labels came into use in England in twigs. The crude resin (stick lac) con- also:BANDS (2). (343) about 1680 and by 1700 had generally sists of twigs encrusted with the ex- lacing-in. The process in craft bookbind- replaced direct lettering on the spine cretion of the insects' remains, and is ing of attaching the boards to the text of books. Two labels, one for the title processed in several steps to produce block by passing the bands or cords and the second for the volume number SHELLAC. on which the book is sewn through came into use in England (probably The blood-red dye obtained from lac holes punched or cut into the boards. from France) in about 1730. The title was at one time the most valuable The bands arefirst frayed out and label was usually red and the volume product of the refining process. It has moistened with paste and then passed label blue, and later green. Red and been used a a dyestuff since very early through the holes or slots. black labels have also been used. The times and was the dye used in Indian For more than a thousand years so-called open-sidedlabel,i.e.,one lake pigment. lacing-inhasbeenthecustomary without vertical side fillets was uncom- The word "lac" and the term LAKE method of attaching the boards in craft mon before 1795 and was probably are derived from the Sanskritlaksa, bookbinding. The Stonyhurst Gospel, introduced by ROGER PAYNE. meaning "ahundred thousand." One of a Coptic style binding of the 7th or Originally, labels were almost always the host trees referred to in Sanskrit 8thcentury, has the sewing thread of leather, generally a thinly pared writingsis"Lakshatarn,"thetree laced through its boards, while in bind- skin, and later SKIVER. Paper labels, which nourishes a hundred thousand ings of the1 1 th century or earlier, printed from type, or occasionally en- insects. (195, 233) which were sewn on raised thongs, the graved, began to be used in the second lace binding. A style of embellishment of thongs run along tunnels and through half of the 18th century on the paper leather bindings introduced in France holes, and are held in place by pegs. spines of boarded books (the earliest in the 18th century. The border in use By the 13th century, or even earlier, known examples dating from 1765). in the 17th century was enlarged until thongs were run over the upper sides They continued to be the usual method it became the predominant element of of the boards, sometimes in grooves of titling boarded books even after this the design, so much so that often only cut to receive them. This technique style of binding was for the most part space for an armorial shield was left. persisted up to the 15th century. superseded by publishers' cloth,i.e., Edges,whichformerlyhadbeen Wooden boards usually had two or the first quarter of the 19th century. straight, were now tooled in a wavy three holes in a straight line out from They were also used on early cloth pattern, thus giving a "lacy" effect at the location of the thong on the spine; bindings,withdecreasing frequency times described as "a la dentelle," but later on, however, the holes were cut after 1832, when the technique of ap- actually looking more like the wrought straight, sometimes at a diagonal, or plying gold directly onto the cloth be- of fancy balconies and gates. at right angles to the thong. Diagonal came feasible.See also:FLYSWING. (69, The style was very popular and was holing hnd lacing-in became the fa- 156, 205, 236, 320) used by many bookbinders and gilders. vored technique, and was the superior label paper. A machine finish or English includingtheDeromefamilyand method becauseitstrengthenedthe finish paper used for a variety of types Pierre-Paul Dubisson, who used metal binding, particularly since boards made of labels. Some such papers are super- plates instead of tools, so as to be of paper had largely replaced wooden calendered while others are coated on ableto block the design and thus boards. The right angle method has the one side. They are specially sized for increase production. (158) disadvantage of weakening the board. gumming and printing. (17) laced on.See:LACING-IN. Although the cords in fine binding lac. A resinous substance of insect origin, laces. The single-twistknittingcotton were frayed out so they would not be collected from twigs of several trees about Ma inch in diameter, or double- noticeable under the leather, fraying of theAcaciafamily. The substance is twist cotton about %2 inch in diameter, out was not done in other styles of secreted as a form of protective scale with or without tags;itis used for binding, and the technique of cutting lacquer 149 lake

grooves to receive the cords was not ether, such as methyl or benzyl cellu- lacquer. The technique was probably introduced until the end of the 18th lose,etc.,togetherwithmodifying a Persian (Near Eastern) invention of century. Grooving is a superior tech- agents,suchasplasticizers,resins. the second quarter of the 16th century, nique hecause it does not weaken the waxes, and pigments. Lacquers are and while they are still being produced board to any extent and yet allows usedincoatingcloth,leather,and today, the technique reached its pin- thicker cords to be used in sewing. paper to decrease water vapor trans- nacle in the 16th century. Lacquered The practice of lacing-in began to mission rates and provide heat-sealing bindings are actually more the work decline in the 19th century in favor properties, water and grease resistance, of the miniature painter than the book- of split boards and the French joint. and gloss, as well as decorative effects. binder. The designs were painted in See also:HOLING OUT.(236) Their use in archival work is question- watercolors on leather, and later paste- lacquer. A surface coating of an organic able, however, as the solvents used in board, that had been dusted with chalk material that dries solely by the evapo- them emit toxic fumes, and the films and given a thin coat of clear lacquer. ration of the solvent and without any themselves begin to deteriorate after a Afterpainting had been completed chemical change taking place in the relativelyshorttime,particularlyif several more coatings of lacquer were film. The most important lacquers are exposed to ultraviolet light. applied. (347) based on cellulose derivatives, e.g., a lacquered bindings. A method of deco- lacticacid.A hygroscopic,usually cellulose ester, such as cellulose ace- ratingbookbindingsbymeansof syrupy, alpha-hydroxy acid (C311(;03), tate or cellulose nitrate, or a cellulose scenes painted and then covered with usually manufacttired by the bacterial fermentation of milk, cane or grape sugars, corn, starch, etc., by means of LACING-IN Lacticbacilli,andusedinleather slots are parallel to square grooves manufacture to control pH, in mor- danting dyes, and in the potassium salt POTASSIUM LACTATE. lacuna (pl. lacunae; anglicized: lacunas). An area of a manuscript, painting, or other material, that is completely miss- ing as a result of any type of damage. The word derives from the Latin ex- pres;in for "gap." laid lines. The closely spaced watermark lines inLAID PAPER,produced by the laid wires of theMOLD(1) in hand- made paper, or by the DANDYROLLof the papermaking machine. Laid lines usually run parallel to the long side of a sheet of handmade paper and across thegrainof machine-madepaper; however,SPIRAL LAIDpaper has lines parallelwith thegrain. Also called "wire lines" or "wire marks," as op- posed toCHAIN LINES(1). (52, 225) laid mold. AMOLD(1) having the sieve made up of wires laid parallel to each other, as compared with a woven mold formed of wire cloth.Itis used in making handmadeLAID PAPER. . A paper which shows thick and thin lines at right angles to each other, and produced by the weave of theDANDY ROLLinmachine-made paper, or, in the manufacture of hand- made paper, by theMOLD ()having thin wires placed very close together and fastened to thicker wires running at right angles atintervals of about Iinch. The thin wires are theLAID LINES,or "wire lines," "wire marks," while the thicker wires are theCHAIN LINES, or "chain marks," "wide lines." Laid paper, whether hand- or machine- made, has no advantage overWOVE PAPER exceptperhapsappearance. (58. 156, 182) holes are diagonally placed lake. A term used with reference to any lambskin 150 lanolin

of a large group of organic pigments type of board built up in layers by proximately 0.001 inch thick. Layers that are generally bright in color and pasting or gluing two or more plies of Japanese tissue or lens tissue are are more or less translucent when in of board together either with the grain then placed over the film. The "sand- the form of an oil paint. Lakes are (machine)directionoftheboards wich" is then fed through heated rollers obtained by precipitating dyestuffs and running in the same direction (parallel under pressure, emerging as a sheet other coloring matters, e.g., cochineal, laminated) or at right angles to each slightly thicker and heavier than the madder, logwood extract, etc., onto a other (cross laminated), or by apply- original document and considerably substrate in the presence of tannic acid, ing paper, plastic film, or other sheet stiffer and stronger. casein, sodium phosphate, etc., or with material, to one or both sides of a Lamination is an excellent method a metallic hydroxide. Aluminum hy- board. Laminated boards are often used of improving the mechanical strength droxide, for example, reacts with many in the binding and rebinding of large of documents which are to receive con- soluble organic coloring matters, pre- books, such as art folios, large periodi- siderable handling, but it also has both cipitating them as so-called lakes in cals, and the like. real and potential disadvantages. Un- cloth printing and dyeing, with the laminating film.The film used to en- less the document is properly and ade- hydroxide acting as the mordant; the capsulate a leaf, map, etc., undergoing quately deacidified before itis lami- same dye, however, can produce dif- LAMINATION.The "ideal" laminating nated,it will continue to deteriorate ferent colored lakes depending on the film should: 1) be flexible, i.e., capable despite the illusion of protection af- mordant employed. Because many salts of withstandingalltheflexing and forded bythelaminatingfilm.In ofcalcium,chromium, magnesium, folding that is required of the paper addition, there is the slight but definite tin, zinc, etc., are used in producing being protected throughout the useful loss of clarity and sharpness of the lakes, a great number of pigments can life of the document; 2) be (consid- printed matter, especially in the case be obtained. Substrates used include erably)stronger thanthepaperit of colored illustrations. It is also diffi- alumina, which gives a pigment that protects. (Since the majority of papers cult to remove the document from the is rich and transparent in color, such found in archival collections exhibit laminates.See:DEL AMINATION (2). as those used in printing inks; china an elongation of about 2% upon rup- Finally, there is potential damage from clay, where a light, soft material with ture, the film should offer satisfactory the cellulose acetate itself, which may bulk and good suspension properties strength at an elongation of less than be more vulnerable to the action of the is required; barytes, which are used in 2% toprotectthedocument, and atmospheric gases such as sulfur di- the manufacture of paint; blanc fixe, should also have sufficient strength to oxide, particularly if the acetate con- which is usually a more finely divided make reinforcement withtissue un- tainsmetallicimpurities.Seealso: baryte than the natural crystalline ones; necessary); 3) have considerable BARROW, WILLIAM J.; LAMINATING and green earth and precipitated hy- elongation beyond the yield point of a FILM; SUNDEx PROCESS. (33, 35,72, droxide of iron, which are used ac- stress -strain curve. (Because high edge 173, 198, 218, 303, 364) cording to color requirements. tearingresistance is usuallyasso- lampblack.A finely divided, bulky, black Manyexcellentpigmentshaving ciated with high elongation, a narrow soot, at one time the most important good light fastness are now made from margin of film around the edges of a black pigment used in the manufacture artificialdyestuffs; therefore, because document would protect it in case of of printing inks. It is produced by the they are expensive and/or insufficiently strain at the edges); 4) have properties imperfect combustion of pitch resin or light fast, many lakes formerly pro- enablingitto resist degradation; 5) tung oil, or fatty substances, such as duced from natural dyestuffs are no be capable of being joined to the docu- naphthalene, in a vessel within a tent longer in demand. ment with minimum effort, preferably made of paper or sheepskin. The smoke The term "lake" may derive from without application of heat and pres- is deposited on the inside of the tent the Italian "lacca," used by medieval sure; 6) permit separation of the film which is then beaten to cause the soot Italian craftsmen to indicate the scum from the paper with minimum effort to falloff. The soot is then heated they removed from their dye vats and and without damage to the document; several times to a very high tempera- sold to painters. The Italian word, in 7) be resistant to abrasion; 8) be trans- turein a metal container having a turn, is related to "lac," which derives parent to light, at least throughout the smallopeninginthetop,through from the Sanskrit.See: LAC.(17, 195) visible spectrum; and 9) contain no which the impurities escape.See also: lambskin.The tanned skin of a young elements or other substances which CARBONACEOUS INKS; CHINESE INK. sheep. Vegetable tanned lambskin was might in any way damage the docu- (156, 235) highly prized in the latter part of the ment it protects. (303, 364) landscape. See: OBLONG. 19th century as a bookbinding leather lamination. Amethod of protecting and landscape binding.A style of decoration because of its delicate colors, and also preserving embrittled or otherwise weak featuring landscape scenes, executed for limp bindings because of its soft- papers, maps, etc., by placing them eitherbyfreehand drawingwith ness and freedom from scratches and between sheets of thin, transparent Chinese ink or acid, printing, or by other blemishes. Lambskin is similar thermoplasticmaterial, which, when some form of painting. The earliest in appearance to calfskin but isless subjected to heat and pressure, with recordedis1777, while othersare durable.See also: SHEEPSKIN.(261) or without an adhesive, seals the paper mentioned in the 1820s. (156, 236) laminate.1. To unite (superimpose layers in and protects it by making it more landscape gilding. See: GILT ON LAND- of material) by the use of an adhesive, or less impervious to atmospheric con- SCAPES. or by other means, such as heat, pres- ditions. It also increases its effective lanolin.A widely occurring crude prer a- sure, or both. 2. A product made by strength. ration of cholesterol anditsesters. bonding together two or more layers of The paperisfirstdeacidfied and Some lanolins are derived by solvent material or materials. (309) dried. It is then placed between two extraction from the sebaceous glands laminated board.A binder's, or other layers ofcelluloseacetate filmap- of wooled sheepskins. The molten wax lapis-lazuli 151 leaf

is washed with alkaline(carbonate) (from which naturalrubberisob- ing bands or cords are attached. See solutionsfollowedby wateralone. tained) is the most important, the term also: KEY. (304, 335) When pure, lanolin is white and odor- is now applied to many synthetic rub- lay down. An obsolete term applied to less, has excellent emulsifying proper- bers,paints,coatings,etc.Latexis the process of embroidering a binding. ties and does not readily turn rancid. used in paper manufacture as an ad- laying-away. Theprocessoftanning It has a softening range of 58 to 62° C. hesive and barrier coating, and also hides and skins in layer vats over a Lanolin is employed as one of the con- for impregnating book cloth. (17) long period of time in order to assure stituents of leather dressings, and is lattice stamp. A finishing tool, the dis- a full tannage. The hides or skins are valuable because of its powers of pene- tinguishing feature of which is a cen- dusted with finely ground raw vege- tration,its favorable softening range, tral diamond formed of lattice and tabletanningmaterialstoprovide and its ability to supply body to the crisscross work. Itis generally found additionaltanningmaterial.Laying- dressing. Also called "wool wax." (218, on blind stamped bindings of the late away, which was practiced insitua- 235) 15th and early 16th centuries. (250) tions where only weak tanliquors lapis-lazuli.I. A deep blue, semi-pre- law binding. 1. A term applied from the were available, has beenlittleused cious stone, which, when ground into 1830s until recently to a full leather since the introduction of concentrated a powder, was used as ultramarine, a binding (usually a vegetable tanned, tan liquors. (363) pigment now produced synthetically. It lightweight, cream-colored sheepskin), laying-bye. The process of covering a is a metamorphic rock, and its color having laced-in boards and two or hide pack with salt during the curing stems from the blue feldspathoid lazu- more gold-blocked titlelabels on the process, and then allowing the hides rite, whichisnormally (NaAlSiO4 spine (usually red above black); or a to stand in order to permit the strong Na2S); however, the properties may binding withcreased bands on the brine to thus penetrate the entire pack. vary significantly in both the natural spine and blind lines around the edges (363) and synthetic products. It is used from of the boards. 2. A modern version of laying-on. The operation of placing gold time to time in the ornamentation of the above, i.e., a case binding consist- leaf on a surface prior to the applica- bookbindingsandthecoloringof ing of a light tan buckram made to tion of a heated tool. The gold leaf is paper. 2. A clear blue marble veined resemble sheepskin, with red and black transferred from the GOLD CUSHION by with gold. The blue is in the form of paper labels blocked in gold. See also: means of a wad of cotton-wool, or a largeirregular spots, of a cloudlike LAW BUCKRAM. (12) piece of felt. When the gold is in roll appearance, becoming an increasingly law buckram. An obsolete term for a form,itistransferred directly from darker shades of blue as the color is calf- or fawn-colored buckram made the roll to the surface to be gilded. In applied several times. The gold veins to resemble sheepskin, but without any edge gilding,theleafistransferred are produced by gilding. (152, 235) graining. (256) fromthecushionby meansofa large paper copy (large paper edition). A law calf. 1. A general term applied to an GILDER'S TIP. (140, 256) copy of a book printed on larger and uncolored calfskin. 2. A cream-colored lay on (laying-on boards). An obsolete (frequently)abetterqualitypaper vegetable-tanned calfskin with a smooth term for the process of cutting and than that used for the usual trade edi- grain surface, at one time used in cover- fitting the boards to the text block in tion, thus giving it more extensive mar- ing the better grades of law books, but preparation for LACING-IN. (256) gins. Large paper copies are printed now largely superseded by buckram. layout. 1. The process of arranging piles from the same type as the rest of the Also called "fair calf," and, incorrectly, of sections in proper sequence in an edition, but often margins have been "law sheep." See also: LAW BINDING (1); "aisle"or "alley"forgathering by reset to provide a wider margin at the LAW BUCKRAM. (154, 156, 264) hand. 2. The plan of an entire book. gutter as well as the other edges. Large law sheep. A natural-colored, vegetable- 3. A plan, prepared by or for a printer, paper copies are recorded in England tanned sheepskin, at one time used for giving the arrangement of the matter, dating from the 1590s, becoming in- type faces,size of type, position of covering law books, but now largely illustration and captions, etc. for a job creasingly popular until well into the superseded by buckram. See also: LANA/ 19th century. See also: FINE PAPER of printing. (12, 156) BINDING (1); LAW BUCKRAM; LAW COPY; LIMITED EDITION; SMALL PAPER CALF (2). (12) leaching.Inleathermanufacture,the COPY. (12, 156) process of extracting the tannin from last fold. A term sometimes applied to law skiver. A very thin SKIVER, tanned finely ground raw, vegetable-tanning the final or back fold which completes and finishedtoarusset or natural materials by means of steam and/or the section, bringing it to the proper color, and at one time used for title water. page sequence for gathering. (256) labels of law and medical books, but leaf.1. One of the units resulting from lateral porosity. The POROSITY of paper now largely superseded by paper labels. folding a sheet of paper, vellum, etc., in a direction parallel to the plane of (274) into a section (signature). A leaf con- the sheet. It is usually very much less law super. A SPINE LINING FABRIC rein- sists of two pages, one on each side, than the porosity through the plane of forced at intervals with heavier threads either or both of which may be blank, thepaper. Sometimes called"trans- running across the width of the cloth, or may bear printing, writing, or illus- verse porosity." and consequently across the spine of trative matter. Blank leaves generally latex. A colloidal water dispersion of high the book. It was used in the past for are not numbered. 2. A newly formed polymersderivedfromsourcesre- lining the spines of large, heavy books. sheet of handmade paper before itis lated to natural rubber or of synthetic (339) dried and finished. Itis more appro- high polymers resembling natural rub- lay bands.1. See: LAY CORDS. 2. See: priately called a WATERLEAF (3). 3. ber. Although originally applied to the CORDS; FI.EXIBLE SEWING. See: ALUMINUM LEAF; DUTCH GOLD; milky sap found in the cells of certain lay cords. The loops on the top bar of GOLD LEAF; PALLADIUM LEAF; PLATI- plants,of which Heveabrasilienes the SEWING FRAME 10 Which the sew- NUM LEAF; SILVER LEAF. (156, 234) lealcasting 152 leather lealcasting. A system by which archival margins and may also be used to pro- ural raw materialshides and skins. papers can be repaired by mechanical vide linings. In contrast to hand re- This rawmaterialisprincipallya means rather than manually. The prin- pairs, these procedures have the addi- fibrous protein called collagen and is cipal of the method is similar to that tional advantage of requiring little or composed of one continuous network of papermaking itself: paper pulp in a no use of adhesives. of fibers. water suspensionispulledthrough leaflet. In a restricted sense, a publica- In the raw skin, at least four dis- areas of loss in a document so as to tion consisting of two to four pages tinct structures can be distinguished: fill the lacunae with freshly cast paper. printed on a small sheet folded once, 1)the thin outermost layer termed Varying combinations offibersare but not stitched or bound. In a broader the EPIDERMIS; 2) the grain layer or mixed in amounts proportionate to the sense, a small thin pamphlet. (156, dermal surface; 3)the juncture be- missing areas in the leaf to be repaired, 256) tween the grain layer and the dermis and gravity or vacuum pressure pulls leather. The outer covering from an ani- or corium; and 4) the major portion the paper slurry through the leaf to be mal (usually a mammal) tanned, or of the skin (the DERMIS or corium), repaired as it lies on a mesh support otherwise dressed and prepared in such whichisthepartconvertedinto in the leafcaster. The new fibers settle a Lanner as to render it usable and leather. In addition, there is the flesh only in the areas of loss. resistant to putrefaction, even when layer,or hypodermis, whichisthe For certain kinds of materials, par- wet. Leather is a unique and flexible structure adjacent to the body tissues. ticularly those of large format, e.g., sheet material that is somewhat analo- Beforetannage,theapproxirnate newspapers and maps, is a gous to textiles, and may in fact be composition of a freshly flayed hide is: much more efficient and economical considered to be thefirst and only method of repair than the traditional natural fabric. Water 64 % manual methods.Itsuse can also The unique characteristics of leather Protein 33 % strengthen the entire leaf, as leafcast- are due largely to its structure, which Fats 2 % ing not only fills in the holes but also isaninterwoven,three-dimensional Mineral salts 0.5% fillscracks, joins fragments, repairs network of fibers inherent in the nat- Other substances (pigments, etc.) 0.5% The 33% which is protein consists of: LEATHER 1) Structural proteins, or Elastin (yellow fiber woven in the collagen fiber) 0.3% Collagen (which tans to sebaceous gland give leather) 29% epidermis Keratin (protein of the hair and epidermis) 2% 2) Non-structural proteins, or Albumens or globulins (soluble, non-fibrous erector pili muscle hair shaft proteins) 1% grain Mucins or mucoids (mucous artery materials associated with sweat glands fibers) hair root .7% While all mammalian skin is made up of these constituents, the figure for vein - junction of grain and corium keratin will vary widely, depending on the amount of hair present; the figure for fat will also vary. The division be- tween albumen and mucins is debat- able. Beginning with the outer surface of a skin, there are:1)the hairs, em- bedded in the skin, each in a sheath corium of epidermis known as the hair follicle and each with a hair root at its end, fed by a tiny blood vessel. Chemi- cally the hairs consist of the protein keratin, and penetrate deeply into the papillary layer of the dermis. See: HAIR. Most animals have hair of two types, primary and secondary. The positions which thesehairs occupy flesh relative to each other as they enter the fat surface of the skin, together with their differentthicknesses,determinethe characteristic marking or grain of the leather 153 leather

dermal surface,i e., the grain pattern latter fibers have been called "inter- amounting to 25% of the weight of of the leather, which is exposed upon fihrillary" proteins, also known as non- the skin. Such excessive growth of fat removal of the hair and other epider- structuralproteins,orpro-collagens. cells disrupts and weakens the dermal malstructures;2)theepidermis, These are essential for the growth of fiber structure to such an extent that whichisaprotective,hard-wearing theskin and alsorender thefiber some sheepskins can be split into two layer of keratinouscells. Those on structure nonporous. When the skin is layers along the line where the fat is the outside are dead and, upon drying dried (as in some forms of curing), located. and shrinking, fall off the skin. On the they dry to a hard, gluelike substance, In general, the younger the animal underside, adjacent to the skin proper, which cements all of the corium fibers at time of slaughter the thinner and they consistofsoft,jellylikeliving together and makes the skin hard and smaller theskin,the smoother and cells, which have little resistance and horny. In producing a leather which finer the grain structure, and the less are readily attacked and degraded by is to be soft or supple, itis essential liklinood of damage due to disease, bacterial action or enzymes, as occurs thattheseinter-fibrillary proteins ne scratches,insects,etc. See: LEATHER with stale skins or in enzyme unhair- removed. DEFECTS. The more natural the ani- ing. They are usually disintegrated by The corium fibers are composed of mal's feeding and living ..:onditions, the alkalis,especially sodiumsulfideor ropelikebundlesofsmallerfibrils, betterthequalityoftheresultant hydrosulfide. See: LIMING; UNHAIRING; which in turn consist of bundles of leather; overfeeding, for example, pro- 3)the sudoriferous (sweat)glands, sub-microscopicmicelles.Thesein ducesgreasier,weaker skins,while which are also lined with epidermal turn are made up of very long, thread- starvation results in thin, weak, mis- tissue and discharge sweat from the like molecules of collagen twisted to- shapen skins showing skeleton mark- skin through the pores in the grain sur- gether. All together, this gives a very ings. The skin of the female is usually face, and the sebaceous glands, which tough,strong,flexible,three-dimen- finer grained than that of the male, are located at the side of the hair fol- sional structure, forming a network on and has a looser fiber structure, espe- licles and discharge into them an oily, which many of the qualities of leather cially in the flanks, giving a somewhat waxy substance, which protectsthe depend. It is this structure which makes softer, stretchier leather. The less hair hair. (The gland is operated by a mus- leather unique for, as of today, it has or wool there is on the animal the cle, called the erector pili, which also not been possible to produce itarti- tougherandstrongertheresultant causes the hair to stand upright); 4) ficially.Itis also unquestionably the leather, especially in the grain layer. the skin proper or dermis (corium), basis for the remarkably high tensile Heavily wooled Merino sheep, for ex- consisting of a network of collagen strength of leather. ample, are inferior in this respect to fibers,veryintimatelywovenand The skin also contains small arteries goats and pigs. joinedtogether.Inthegrain layer and veins which convey blood to the Leather occupies a unique position these fibers become thin and tightly livingtissues,as well asthe nerve among the covering materials used by woven and are so interlaced that there structures necessary for the sense of bookbinders. Its structure givesita are no loose ends on the surface be- touch. very desirable softness and strength, neath the epidermis. Thus, when the Whileallmammalianskinsare while its chemical nature gives it the epidermis is removed, a smooth layer structured along this basic pattern, they property of adhering well to paper, is revealed (sometimes known as the vary tremendously in size, e.g., from board, linen, etc. Its outstanding char- HYALINE LAYER), which gives the char- the hide of an elephant or ox to the acteristics include its durability (when acteristic grain surface of the leather. skin of a rabbit or mouse, and they properly prepared and cared for), sup- Toward the center of the dermis the also vary considerably in shape and pleness, porosity, beauty, temper and fibers are coarser and stronger, and thickness. In addition, some animals feel,in addition toits strength and the predominant angle at which they have butlittlehair or wool and a softness.Intermsofpermanence, are woven indicates the properties of thick epidermal layere.g., the pig when properlytanned,stored,and the resultant leather. If the fibers are while others, such as the sheep, have maintained (See: LEATHER DRESSINGS), more upright and tightly woven, the a heavy fleece with curly wool and it is probably the most permanent cov- leather will be firm and hard, with curly hair follicles but a relatively thin ering material known at this time. littlestretch, while if they are more epidermis. The state of development The manufacture ofleatherpre- horizontaland,J looselywoven,the of the animal is also important. A calf, dates recorded history. There is evi- leather will be softer and stretchier. for example, has finer structured hair dence that some leather samples found The dermis is also the strongest part than a full grown cow, consequently, in Northern Germany may have been of the skin; and 5) the flesh of the leather made from the skin of a calf produced perhaps 12.000 years ago. dermis, i.e., that layer next to the body isrelatively smooth and 'Tryfine- Leather artifacts believed to date from wall of the animal, where the fibers grained, while that of a cow is rougher the Neolithic and European Bronze have a more horizontal angle of weave, and has a very pronounced grain pat- Ages have been discovered, and itis and fatty (adipose)tissue may also tern. an established fact that the Egyptians be present. The skins of certain animals(at knew the art of vegetable tanning, as Inthelivingskin,thecollagen certain times of their lives) also con- well as alum tawing, as long ago as fibers and cellsare embedded ina tain considerable quantities of fatin 2000 B.C., and that tanning practices watery jelly of proteinlike substance, globular cells, which lie approximately there were well established by 1600 calledthe GROUND SUBSTANCE. The in the center of the dermis. Notable B.C. living collagen fibers are formed from examples are the pig and sheep. Sheep- Leather has been used for covering this substance, which ranges in con- skin may actually contain fat of this books since at least as early as the 3rd stitution from the blood sugars to sub- type, that is, in the interior of the skin century A.D. (See: COPTIC BINDINGS), stances which are almost collagen. The and not merely on thefleshlayer, and its use in craft bookbinding con-

1 leatherboard 154 leather dressings

tinues to this day. Although virtually and the hair to fall out. The grain sur- bindings to prevent or retard deteriora- every conceivable type of skinhas face becomes roughened, and the ani- tion, preserve, and, to limited extent, heen used, calf, deer, goat, pig, and mal generally compounds the damage restore flexibility to leather. Over the sheepskin, as well as horsehide (RUS- by rubbing to relieve the itching. In past one hundred years or so a great SIA LEATHER) have been used most demodectic, or follicular, mange, the number of different leather dressings of often,atleastinEurope and the mites penetrate into the dermis itself, varying degrees of effectiveness have United States. Pigskin, as well as goat- where a wall of fibersis formed to been used to impart new life to dete- skin and deerskin, were often alum- surround and "encyst" them. The cysts rioratingleather.Thesetreatments tawed;however,vegetahletannage generally are seen on the grain of un- have ranged from simple paste-washing was and is the predominant method of haired skins as small swollen nodules. and/or coating with varnish to more- preparation. Goatskin has been used to Tanning and dryiag processes shrink or-less carefully formulated and tested cover books in Europe for more than a the contents of the cysts, causing the preparations. Most of the latter con- thousand years and has been used exten- grain surface to sink over the cavity so tain an oil which may be of animal, sively in Europe since the 16th century. that the defects are seen as shallow vegetable, or mineral origin, in order See: VEGETABLE TANNING; vEGETABLE depressions, though the grain surface of probable decreasing relative value as TANNINs. See also: ALLIGATOR LEATHER; itselfisnot generally damaged. See preservatives.Whilesuchdressings AMERICAN RUSSIA; BABY CALF; BUCK- also: WARBLES); 3) infections. (If ring- may preserve, and to some extent re- SKIN; BUFFALO; CABRETTA LEATHER; worm, which is a fungus, heals it leaves store, the flexibility of the leather, they CALFSKIN; CHAMOIS; CHEVRETTE; no scars, but if the animal is slaught- cannot prevent chemical decay, nor can CHEvFOTAIN;CORDOBAN LEATHER: ered while still infected, the grain ap- they restore leather that has become CoRDOvAN LEATHER; COWHIDE; DEER- pears coarse at thcsite of the infec- decayed becauseofchemicalinflu- SKIN; DOE SKIN; GOATSKIN; HAIR SHEEP; tion); and 4) cockle. which occurs in ences. HOGSKIN; KANGAROO SKIN; LAMBSKIN; wooledsheepimmediatelybefore The majority of leather dressings MOROCCO; PARCHMENT; PIGSKIN; SEAL- shearing. (This defect appears as boil- contain lanolin as their principal fatty SKIN;SHEEPSKIN; VELLUM; WALRUS like hard spots, of varying size, which component. Lanolin has sufficient capa- HIDE. (26, 83, 207, 236 248, 282, 291, occur in rows at right angles to the bility to exchange water with the sur- 292, 306, 343, 351, 352, 353, 362, 363) spine from the shoulder to the butt, rounding atmosphere and to maintain leatherboard. An imitation leather typ- and, while the defect disappears rapidly relatively long-term flexibility and soft- ically produced by pulping and com- after shearing, it cannot be eliminated ness of HANDLE in the leather. Most pressing scrap leather and wood pulp. during manufacture of the leather.) dressings also contain one or more of (310) Damages caused after death include: the following substances: beeswax (or leather bound. A general term applied 1) flaycuts and gouges, which cut into some other harder or softer wax, such to a book bound in full or part leather. thefibersof the dermis.(Inthin ascandellila,spermaceti,carnauba, leather cloth. A polyvinyl chloride- or leathers they show through and thereby etc.), cedarwood oil, n-hexane (or ben- cellulose nitrate-surfaced fabric, usu- spoil the grain. Some flaycuts go com- zene),potassiumcarbonate,potash ally made of cotton, or a plastic ma- pletely through the hide or skin, ruining alum, isopropanol (or ethanol), thymol terial with a similar surface. It is used it completely. These kinds of cuts are (or p-nitrophenol or o-phenylphenol), principallyincoveringblankbooks. usually the result of careless or im- and neat's-foot oil. Beeswax is said to (81, 353) proper flaying); 2) putrefaction, which give body to the surface of the leather leather defects. Imperfections in the grain is the result of bacterial growth which which can then be polished to impart a surface or structure of a hide or skin starts almost immediately once the ani- glossy finish.(See further comments resulting in unsightly appearance and/ mal is dead, unless the skin is properly below concerning the use of wax.) or weakness of the resultant leather. cured, especially on the exposed flesh Cedarwoodoilprovidesprotection Such defects may have arisen during side. See: PUTREFACTIVE DAMAGE; 3) against mold growth and insect attack. the life of the animal, or may have de- veininess, in which branching lines of The n-hexane or benzene acts as a veloped in the flaying and/or prepara- blood vessels can be seen on the flesh solvent toget thelanolinintothe tion of the stock. side. (If, because of poor curing or old leather, but according to some author- Damages caused during life include: age, for example, the structure around ities, usually evaporates so rapidly that 1)scars, resulting from scratches or them becomes loose, the skin is said to it actually is of little benefit. Further- cuts. (When the cutishealing, the be veiny, and the branching pattern more, such hydrocarbons are flamma- fibers grow densely packed together, of the veins usually shows through on ble as well as toxic, and benzene is and the healed skinisoftenhard, the grain side. Veininess can actually extremelytoxic.Thealcohols,iso- raised, and lacking hair follicles. Scar at times be attractive in some skins, propanol and ethanol, are sometimes damage is also caused by branding the such as vELLUM, for example); and added to a dressing to promote the animal for ownership purposes, usually 4) damage from heat, which may oc- penetration of the lanolin, and also to in the butt area, which is the best part cur on hides and skins in tropical areas. permit the use of a wider range of of the hide); 2) infestations, such as (Itis a common fault with ground- organicsubstancese.g.,fungicides, ticks, warble flies, and mange. (Ticks dried skins.)See: SUN DAMAGE. See such as thymolto be included. The pierce the skin to suck blood, leaving also: BLEEDING (5); BLOOM (1); metallic salts, such as potassium car- holes that look either like pin pricks or CRUSTY BREAK; DRAWN FLANKS; KISS bonate or potash alum, are said to help minor scars in the grain of the leather. MARKS; PIPEY LEATHER; PIPING (1); in binding the fats to the leather fibers. This defect occurs mainly in the belly SLACK TANNED; SPEW. (248, 291, 306, Neats'-foot oil is another fat used to areas of theskin.Sarcoptic mange 363) lubricate the fibers of the leather. mites enter the epidermis and tunnel leather dressings. Substances, or mixtures The use of hard waxes in leather around, causing the cells to multiply of substances, applied to leather book- dressingsis very controversial. Some leatherette 155 Leighton, Archibald

argue that their use reduces the danger simple folded endpapers in either of most effective materials used to assist of penetration of harmful atmospheric two ways-by sewing them in with the in the formation and stabilization of gases into the leather, e.g., sulfur di- endpapers whilethe bookisbeing emulsions. oxide, which can be converted into de- sewn, or by pasting them down on lederschnitt bindings. See: CUIR-CISELE. structive sulfuric acid. Others, how- top of the endpapers after covering. ledger binding. See: BLANKBOOK BINDING; ever, contend that wax decreases the Leather hinges (or joints) have been STATIONERY BINDING. capability of the lanolin to exchange used since the 17th century in Europe, ledger paper. Originally, a writing paper water with the surrounding atmosphere and between 1750 and 1800 they were used for pen and ink records, as in and that the lanolin itself will reduce a fairly common feature of the best the ingress of harmful gases. It is also ledger or blankbooks, but now also English morocco and Russiz. bindings. usedforprintingpurposes.Ledger argued that the wax causes treated vol- They were usually heavily embellished papers are generally made from cotton umes to stick together on the bookshelf, with fillets, rolls, and small tools. (83, and even worse, that repeated applica- fiber, bleached chemical wood pulps, 236, 335) or mixtures thereof. High quality ledger tions may result in building up a heavy leatlur marble. A method of coloring papers are animal sized, and the usual wax surface which eventually cracks leather so as to obtain something of ledger paper is made in basis weights and flakes, taking pieces of leather a marbled effect. The skins are damp- with it. ranging from 24 to 36 pounds (17 x 22 ened and rolled into a ball, each skin 500). As it is subjected to consider- A simple, economical, and certainly being carefully arranged so that no able usage, it requires a high degree of widely used, dressing consists of a mix- large area of any one is hidden in the durability and permanence. Significant ture of 60% neat's-foot oil (20°C, cold folds. The ball of skins is then im- test) and 40% anhydrous lanolin, or properties include strength, especially mersed in the dye, which colors the tearingresistance,erasibility,water 60% lanolin and 40% neat's-foot oil, skins at the edges only, resulting in a depending upon the temperature and and ink resistance, uniformity of sur- kind of marbling effect. (164) face and color, smoothness, and a good relative humidity in the area of use. leatheroid. An obsolete name foran surface far ruling. (17, 58, 339) This dressing offers some important IMITATION LEATHER consistingof legal buckram. See: ENGLISH LINEN. advantages over many other prepara- chemicallytreatedpapercombined Legrain, tions. Itis (relatively) less expensive, Pierre (1889-1929). An out- with rubber and sandarac. See also: standing French bookbinding designer easy to prepare and apply, non-toxic, LEATHERETTE. (256) of the 20th century. Legrain's early non-flammable, and contains nothing, leather substance table. The measure- career was that of illustrator and the- insofar as is known at this time, that ment of the thickness of a finished ater painter, and it was not until 1917 could possibly damage the leather. See leather,inmillimeters(1mm. = that he became associated with the also:P.1. R. A. TESTED; POTASSIUM 0.03937 inch), irons (1 iron = 1/48 bibliophile Jacques Doucet and became LACTATE. (148, 265, 291) inch), or ounces (1 ounce = 1/64 interested inbookbinding. Under leatherette. A covering fabric produced inch): from a strong, machine-glazed base Doucet's encouragement Legrain liter- paper, which is coated and embossed, Inch Ounces Irons Millimeters ally established the profession of artist- tot 1 .75 0.4 designer of bookbindings in France. or printed and embossed, in imitation 2 of grained leather. (139) 132 1.5 .8 Although he never himself bound a 31;4 3 2.25 1.2 book he abandoned the restrictions of leather fillers. Substances, such as starch 4 3.0 1.6 tradition in book decoration, and es- paste, isinglass, 5 etc., used tofillthe 3.75 2.0 tablished, by means of his adaption of pores of leather before gilding, so as 1:12 6 4.5 2.4 artistic traits of contemporary art, the .764 7 5.25 2.8 to cause the gold leaf to adhere better. courseofcreative The filler helps keep the glair on the 6.0 3.2 bookbindingin surface of the leather. (194) 944 9 6.75 3.6 France for decades to come. I.etter leather flyleaf. A free flyleaf made of a:12 10 7.5 4.0 forms (titles, etc.) were an important 11 8.25 4.4 part of his designs, and in his most ma- leather, generally of the same type of 12 9.0 4.8 ture style, he used color and texture skinas usedincovering,although "61 13 9.75 5.2 leather, as well as conventional tools thinner and possibly of adifferent 7'32 14 10.5 5.6 17,14 and onlays of traditional binding, in color. The leather flyleaf is generally I 5 11.25 6.0 new and imaginative designs related to used in conjunction with the leather 4 16 12.0 6.4 abstract art. (89, 347) DOUBLURE (1). (343) 17,4 17 12.75 6.8 18 13.5 7.2 Leighton,Archibald(1784-184 ).An leather gauge. An instrument used to English bookbinder who is measure the thickness of leather, either (306) generally in credited with the introduction of the ounces or millimeters.See also: leaves. 1. Finishing tools cut in the shape first practical cloth for covering books. IRON (2); LEATHER sUBSTANCE TABLE; of leaves that are symmetrical in shape Although William Pickering may have OUNCE. and generally curving in different di- introduced cloth earlier, and thou h leather glove. A heavy leather "glove" rections. 2. See: LEAF. (161) woven flax canvas had been used for which fits over the thumb only, and lecithin. A lipoid, or fatty acid, substance covering school books in England as is used to steady the finisher's hand in foundinallanimal and vegetable early as 1770, it was not until about starting the heated lettering or finish- cells. Commercial lecithin is a mixture 1823 that a cloth more-or-less impervi- ing tool. (130) of phosphatides andglyceridesob- ous to glue was used as a covering leather hinges (leather joints). Endpaper tained in the manufacture of soybean material. Leighton's first cloth was a hinges made of leather and designed oil.Itis soluble in mineral oils and dyed and glazed calico, witha starch to add strength at the point where the fatty acids and is dispersible in animal filler. He dyed, stiffened, and patterned endpaper flexes. T1 ley are used with and vegetable oils.Itis one of the small rolls of calico in his own shop, lemon 156 letterpress printing

and, by 1832, was embossing cloth with ing consisted of calf-covered boards ammonia and one-fourth part ethyl die-stamped patterns, and even blocking sewn to a strip of linen; the sections acetate. Cloths that are to be blocked cloth with gold leaf. (89, 236, 286) themselves, however, were not sewn. with gold or pigment foils do not have lemon. 181'2 karat gold leaf. Because of Itisnot clear how the sections or to be sized in this manner, as the foil the alloys used to reduce the gold from leaves were secured to the linen, unless. contains its own size. (259) 24 to 181/2 karat, it is lighter in color as in a later American binding which letter piece (lettering piece). See: FLY- and somewhat thicker than the 23 or infringed on Lesnes method, the boards SWING; LABEL; SKIVER. 231/2 karat leaf more commonly used were sewn to the linen at both spine letterpress. 1. See: LETTERPRESS BINDING. in book decoration, although not so and fore edge, thus creating a form of 2. The text of a book as distinguished much as PALE leaf. See also: GOLD LEAF. wrapper binding. In order not to de- from its illustrations. 3. Matter printed ( 130) ceive the buyer, Lesné stated that books directly from a raised surface. See: lemon oil. A fragrant yellow essential oil so"bound" would beartheblind LETTERPRESS PRINTING. obtained from the skins of lemons. It stampedinscription"Expositionde letterpress binding. One of the two major is one of the several oils used to secure 1834. Cartonnagesconservateurs de composite styles of bookbinding, the gold leaf temporarily to the covering Lesne." (It was at this exposition that other being STATIONERY BINDING. Let- material of a book before blocking or he received a bronze medal for his terpress binding refers to the binding tooling. (264) invention.) (89) of books intended to be read, as distinct length of the book. A term used by some less-usedmaterialsspecifications.See: from books used for written records, bookbinders to indicate the distance LUMSPECS. i.e., books meant to be written in. The between the "X" points of the gathered lettering. The process of marking a bind- name derives from the time when all sections marked up for sewing by hand. ing with author, title, or other distin- printing was done by letterpress. The The "X" points indicate where the head guishingbibliographicalinformation, major forms of letterpress binding in- and tailare to he trimmed, i.e., the and, in a loose sense, with accompany- clude: EDITION BINDING, LIBRARY BIND- "length of the book" being the distance ing ornamentation, e.g., lines, library ING, and PAMPHLET BINDING, as well as between the "X" points. It is actually imprints, etc. The lettering of hand- the binding of books by hand. See also: the height of the text block but not that bound booksisusually done either BOOKBINDING. (343) of the finished hook, unless it is a cut with individual letters (as in the best letterpressprinting. Any printing pro- flush binding. (335) work), or with type set in a pallet. It duced from a raised, or relief, surface, lengthwise lettering. Lettering which runs is also done at times with straight lines as distinct from planographic or in- vertically rather than horizontally on Or gouges. See: BU1LT-UP LETTERING. taglioprinting.Itemploys typeor the spine of a bound book. The letter- Edition and library bindings are usually plates, or any letter or image cast or ing generally runs from head to tail so blocked (stamped), either in an auto- engraved in relief on a suitable surface. thatit may he readifthe book is matic or hand-blocking machine. The ink is applied to the printing sur- shelved horizontally withthe upper Type sizes for lettering books gen- face whichisaboveallnonprinting cover uppermost. Lengthwise lettering erally range from 6 point (very small) areas or spaces (the exact opposite of is used for books meant to be shelved to 36 point (relatively large), depend- gravure or intaglio printing). Impres- flat,e.g..newspapers,and also on ing on several factors, including the sions are then made by pres3ing the books which are too thin for across the size of the book and the relative degree paper against a flat area of type or spine lettering without undue hyphena- of legibility desired. Design of the type plate, e.g., on a platen press, by the tion or abbreviation. In the latter case face and proper arrangement of the pressure of a cylinder rolling across a itis common for library binders to lettering, however, are as important for flat area of type, as on a flat-bed cylin- make anadditionalchargeforthe legibility as is the size of the type. As der press. or by having the flat printing lettering. a general rule, the factors governing area stereotyped (molded into a curved lens tissue. A thin paper made from long- lettering are:1) only one type face form with cast metal) against which fiberedtock which contains no un- should be used on an individual book another (impression) cylinder revolves bleached or mechanical wood pulps. or set of books; (2) spacing between carrying the paper web, as in newspaper The paper is usually soft and is free lines should be logical and pleasing to (rotary web) printing. Flat sheets may from abrasiveness, lint, or dusting. It theeye; 3)spacing between letters also be printed by the rotary method is not calendered and is generally made should he the same on all lines; and by having the printed areas electro- in basis weights of 51/2. 81/2. and 16 4) the type size should be appropriate typed, i.e., duplicated in a copper or pounds (24 X 36 500). Some lens for the size of the volume. (83, 161, other metal plate, and then curving tissues contain silicone, while others 259, 307, 343) the plate to fit a cylinder. receive some form of wet strength treat- lettering pallet. A hand type-holder used Letterpressprintingincludes both ment. The tissue is used in lamination to letter books by hand. The pallet has hand-setand machinecomposition. and paper repair. (17) two viselike jaws which screw in from Foundry type, cast in individual pieces, Lesni, Francois A. D. A 19th-century each end of the pallet and clamp the is used in hand composition, whereas French bookbinder who referredto type securely in place. 2. An eugraved in machine composition the type may himself as the "Poet-binder" because device used to inscribe the same let- be castin slugs of equal length or of his poems eulogizing bookbinding. tering, e.g.. a library imprint, on the measures by linecasting machines, such Lesne is better known, however, for his spines of books. (74, 130) as the linotype or intertype, or cast in development of a temporary soft-cover lettering size. A preparation used for siz- a single piece of type, as in the mono- binding of plain calfskin which was ing coated or impregnated book fabrics type machine. The advantages of single- said (by Lesne) to be an improvement before blocking with gold leaf. It con- type composition are quick correction Over the BRADEL BINDING. developed sists of equal parts of orange shellac of individual letters, flexibility in spac- earlier in the 19th century. Lesnes bind- and alcohol, one-fourth part ordinary ing between letters, and the relative levant 157 kvers

ease by which any portion of a line practicallyall newspaper printing, as runs. It is considered the standard with may be increased or decreased to obtain well as the printing of many periodicals which other printing methods are com- a justified right-hand margin. and books. It is capable of producing pared. (17, 316) Letterpressprintingisthe oldest, both very fine and very cheap results, in levant.Ingeneral, a descriptive term and stillthe more commonly used, either very short (e.g., 750-copy) or applied to a leather having a character- method of printing; it is employed for very long(e.g.,250,000-or-so-copy) isticdrawn-grainpattern,originally produced by an astringent tannage, but now produced by ham! or machine LETTERING PALLET BOARDING (1) of vegetable or semi- chrome tanned goatskins and sheep- skins, or vegetable tanned sealskin. The traditional "levant" used in bookbinding is a vegetable tanned goatskin. When the pattern is produced by embossing, as it frequently is,itis called "levant grain." The original levant, which dur- I illI II1111.14.1,YI 1; MtI:fl ing the past one hundred years or so was considered to be the finest of the morocco family, was always goatskin .A1 obtained from the Near East. In recent years, however, the best levant has been tanned in the northern and northwest- ern areas of Africa and usually finished in France. Today the great bulk of genuine "levant" goatskin comes from SouthAfricaandiscalled"cape levant." See also: GOATSKIN; MOROCCO. (61, 69) levant marble. A type of cover marble 1d1111.0 produced by applying brown coloring in broad streaks, followed by washing ruts= mum with aqua regia. (152) Pam t Imo MI* --77/75/7Rwm,/, levers. Strips of millboard or pasteboard, each about lie inch thick, 2 inches wide, and slightly longer from head to tail than the end webbings, and used in conjunction with SPRING-BACK (1) to give added resistance to the opening of a blankbook and thus cause the spine of the book to spring up and lie flat,thusfacilitating writinginthe book. In attaching the levers, the outside of the leaf adjacent to the board papers is glued out and the levers are placed approximately 1/4 inch from the spine of the book. The webbings are then glued to the levers and the endpapers are folded over and glued down on themselves, the levers, and the web- bings. The clothings are then glued across the spine and onto the folded endpapers. The entire assemblies are then slitat the points of the kettle stitches, the end sections being glued to theinsides oftheboards andthe middlesectionsbetweenthesplit boards. The spring-back clamps over the edges of both levers near the spine, and, when the boards of the book are opened, the pull of the levers causes the spring-back to throw the spine of the book up so thatthe conjugate leaves present a flat surface for writing. To impart added stiffness to the levers, library binding 158 light fast

they are cut so that the grain (machine standard corner used by library binders used to indicate ownership on the title direction) of thz board runs at right in the United States. Also called "Dutch page or other pages of a book. In some angles to the spine, which is one of the corner." Cf: SQUARE CORNER. See also: cases it is used to identify the publica- veryfewinstancesinbookbinding CORNER MITERING; ROUND CORNER. tion upon receipt by the library, i.e., where it is desirable to have the grain in (68, 150, 156) before the book is processed, and is tnis direction. Also called "stiffeners." library edition. 1. A more or less obsolete sometimes used in lieu of a BOOKPLATE. library binding. The business of providing term for an edition, series or set of library style book. A book that is sewn specialized binding services to public, books, produced in a uniform format through the folds, usually on (four) private, in.t:tutional, and other libra- to differentiate it from another edition. tapes but sometimes on the same num- ries. Library binding, like job binding, 2. A book supposedlyoractually ber of cords, and has split boards, a reliesheavily on handwork, supple- printed on a better quality of paper, leather spine with vellum tips, cloth or mented by the use of specialized equip- bound in a stronger manner than the paper sides, and French joints. The ment, such as sewing machines, round- customaryeditionbinding,andin- term is now obsolete. (204, 276) ingandbackingmachines,board tended for use in a library. See also: library style endpaper. An endpaper with cutters, blocking presses, smashing and PRE-L1BRARY BOUND. (156) a visible cloth joint, consisting of two nipping machines,etc. The services library sewing. A method of sewing the folded white sheets attached by the offered by library binders include pre- sectionsofa book tapesthat cloth strip, and with decorative mar- binding, rebinding, serial (periodical or stemmed originally fron: the relaxation bled or colored sheets glued to the op- magazin0 binding, pamphlet and ad- of the (high) standards set for craft posing white sheets. The waste sheet is hesive binding, box and poolio con- bookbinding,in which a book was not cut completely away, a stub or struction, general repair work, and, in always sewn on raised bands (See: tongue being left for insertion between some binderies, rebinding and/or res- FLEXIBLE SEWING), and had a TIGHT split boards. This style of endpaper is torating rare or valuable books, Bibles, BACK. The need for both economy and associated with library binding of the etc. the HOLLOW BACK, which caused the 19th century. (335) Library binding must provide a book open book to lie flatter, led to the intro- lift.1. A quantity of sheets of paper or which will open fairly easily and retain duction of sewing on (four)tapes, board which can readily be lifted from its shape after repeated openings. It which was the basic sewing for library one operation to another. 2. The maxi- must also possess sufficient durability books for many years. Today, however, mum number of sheets of paper placed to last as long as the paper on which and especially inthe United States, at one time under the knife of a cutting the hook is printed, and be priced in OVERSEWING is more nearly synony- machine. 3. Tie thickness of a "sec- accordance with thequality of the mous with library sewing. See also: tion" sewn in an oversewing machine. work. See also: BOOKBINDING; LIBRARY TAPE SEWING. (12, 343) (139, 316) SEWING; OVERSEWING. (58, 81,121, library stamp. A rubber stamp cut with lifting. See: PICKING. 209, 293) the name of the library in relief, and light fast. See: FAST COLORS. Library Binding Institute. A trade associ- ationofcommerciallibrarybook- bindersoftheUnitedStatesand LIBRARY CORNER Canada, suppliers to the bookbinding industry and institutional bookbinders. One of the Institute's principal objec- tives is to inspect and certify library 2 binderies as to the quality of materials and level of workmanship in the books they bind. No library bindery whose binding failsto meet the Institute's standards promulgated on January 1, 1958, can warrant its binding to be Library Binding and, therefore, to be in compliance with all the requirements of the Library Binding Institute stand- ard for library binding. (208) library buckram.I. A heavy, weight cotton fabric possessing tha qualities called for in the minimum specifications for Class "A" library binding. See also: BOOK CLOTH; BUCKRAM. 2. A trade Iwo., sometimes incorrectly applied to all book cloths of a similar nature, e.g., allcoatedcloths,allimpregnated cloths, etc. library corners. A book corner in which the covering material, instead of being cut and abutted, has the excess taken up in two diagonal folds, one under each turn-in. The library corner is the

1 I'L) light Italian marble 159 limited edition light Italian marble. A marble pattern be thin and hard, with low tan fixation. per 100 parts water. Even this limited characterized by a network of fine veins Itis used chiefly at the end of some solubility, however, is sufficient to pro- or lines. The usual marble of this pat- vegetable tannages to improve the full- duce a solution with a pH in the range tern consists of four colors, each suc- ness and firmness of the leather, espe- of 12.4 or 12.5, and, under such very cessive color requiring more gall and cially in those cases where the leather alkaline conditions, some of the young water than the preceding, so th..3t each is to be sold by weight. (17, 72, 198, keratin protein decomposes to produce will spread into large spots in such a 268, 306) sulfur compounds in the lime liquor. manner as to drive the other colors into lime blast. A defect in leather, character- These compounds, in conjunction with veins. When the different colors and ized by a rough grain surface and/or the lime, accentuate the further break- gall water have been properly adjusted hard or dark colored patches, or patchy down of keratin. The lime therefore to each other and dropped on the sur- dyeing. Itis caused by excessive ex- promotes unhairing, and the more kera- face of the size, clear gall water, of an posure to air of a limed skin, resulting tin breakdown impurities it contains, even stronger concentration than any in some of the lime being converted by the more rapidly it unhairs. Liming, contained in the colors,is sprinkled atmospheric carbon dioxide into insol- however, must be carried out with ex- evenly over the entire surface;this uble calcium carbonate. Prolonged ex- treme care, as the alkali also modifies drives the colors into the fine hair veins posure may also cause some drying of and will eventually degradate the col- for which this marble is noted. Light the skin, resulting in hard, brownish, lagen fibers of the skin. Skins limed Italianis closely identified with the translucentpatchesinthefinished for an overly prolonged time produce country from which it derives its name, leather. (306) thin, loose, and weak leather. being found often as endpapers in Ital- limed . A translucent or opaque Liming also causes the hide or skin ian books of the late 18th and 19th material produced from cattlehide to swell. In order to promote gradual centuries, and occasionally as cover after the limed hide has been dried, and uniform swelling, so as to avoid papers. The size for this marble is usu- subsequent to unhairing and fleshing. distortion or buckling of the stock, the ally a mixture of gun tragacanth and No tanning process is employed. (61) skins are left in the lime solution for 1 flea seed. (217) lime fleshing. The process of FLESHING to 2 days, following which a sharpener lignin. A highly polymetric material oc- hides and skins subsequent to the lim- is usually added to promote the proc- curring with cellulose in plant material, ing operation. See also: GREEN FLESH- ess. The addition of sedium hydrosul- and which is considered to be largely ING. fide (NaSH), sodium cyanide (NaCN), responsibleforthestrengthof the lime liquor. A saturated limewater con- sodium hydroxide (Na0H), sodium wood. Lignin is usually determined as taining slaked lime (calcium hydrox- carbonate (Nao(C0)3), dimethylamines, the residue left on hydrolysis of the ide)greatlyin excess of saturation etc., quickens the process in two ways: plant material with strong acids after and used, usually along with sodium 1)by attacking thekeratin,result- resins, waxes, tannins, and other ex- sulfide,for loosening and degrading ing infaster loosening of thehair; tractiveshave beenremoved.Soft- the hair and other epidermal structures and 2) by increasing the alkalinity, woods give from 26 to 34% lignin with of hides and skins. See also: LIMING. and, therefore, the rate of swelling. If a methoxyl content of about 15%, (363) too much sharpenerisaddedtoo while hardwoods give 16 to 24% lignin lime slaking. The process of treating caus- quickly, however, rapid unhairing re- with a methoxyl content of about 21%. ticlime or calcium hydroxide with sults, accompanied by excessive swell- The nature of lignin is not fully un- water to produce slaked lime for use in ing of the surfaces of the skin, while derstood, but it is considered to be a LIMING. See also: LIME LIQUOR. (363) the interior remains unswollen. This complex cross-linked, highly aromatic liming. One of the beamhouse operations results in buckling, which makes sub- structure of high molecular weight, i.e., employed in leather manufacture. Its sequent unhairing, fleshing (if not done about 10,000. It cannot be hydrolyzed purposeistodegrade, and thereby before liming), or splitting difficult. It by acids, but is readily oxidizable. It is loosen, the epidermal structure of hide may also result in permanent distor- soluble in hot alkali and bisulfate, and or skin, including the hair, epidermis, tion and weakness of the grain, and, condenses readily with phenol and thio sweat glands, etc., so that they may be inaddition, any naturally occurring compounds. Lignin is not a compound removed. Methods of liming vary both wrinkles or "growth marks" may be- but a system, and its composition varies in the chemicals used and in proced- come accentuated. After liming, the both with the method of isolation used ures. Unhairing and liming can be car- skins are then ready for UNHAIRING. and with the species, age, growing con- ried out simultaneously by immersing (248, 298, 363) ditions, etc., of the tree or lignified ma- the skins in the lime and water mixture, limited edition. An edition of a book that terial.Itis more or less completely often with the addition of other chemi- is frequently printed on superior paper removed during chemical pulping oper- cals known as sharpeners, e.g., sodium and bound more luxuriously than other ations in paper manufacture but none sulfide. editions. It is, by definition, printed in is removed by mechanical pulping. It Lime, which is calcium oxide (Ca0), relativelylimitednumbers(seldom isf Irther removed or modified by reacts violently with water to form more than 1,500, usually about 150 to bleaching sequences to give pulps of hydratedlime(calciumhydroxide 500, and at times as few as 10) and greater brightness. (Ca(OH)2)), which can be used with sold at a premium price. The copies So-called sulfite cellulose (which is safety in liming and unhairing because often contain a printed notice, which more appropriately called "sulfite lignin it will not damage the collagen fibers usually faces the title page, indicating extract"), when adjusted to a pH of of the skin, assuming itisproperly the number of copies issued and a between 3.0 and 5.0, has a tanning used. This is because calcium hydrox- space in which to write the copy num- action resembling that of the vegetable ide is not very soluble in water, and, ber of an individual copy. The copies tannins. When used alone, however, it in fact, a saturated lime solution con- may be signed by the author. A copy produces a brown leather that tends to tains only approximately part lime of a limited edition may or may not be

l u limp binding 160 lizard slen

more valuable than a copy of another curve convexly to the text block. This THROW OUT thatis longer than the edition. (12, 69) curvature will be straightened by the trimmed height of the book. A portion limp binding (limp cloth; limp covers; shrinkage of the leather which covers of a leaf to be folded adjacent to the limp leather; limp vellum). A book the outside of the board. In order to gutter margin is cut away, i.e., lipped, which does not have stiff boards but prevent warping of the cover at a later so that the remaining portion may be instead has flexible cloth, leather, vel- time, the grain direction of the lining folded without buckling and creasing lum, or paper sides, which may or may paper should be parallel to the spine the binding margin. not be lined. The term, however, is of the book. 2. The outer layers of any list of signatures. See: REGISTER (2). seldom applied to paper sides.(See: kind of which variesin lithograph paper. A paper made for use SELF covEa.) Limp vellum bindings color or quality from the middle or in lithography.Itis produced from for hlankhooks were being produced other parts of the board. (139, 335) bleached chemical wood pulps, or a at least as early as the 14th century liner and headbanding machine. An edi- combination of chemical and mechani- and probably earlier. This type of bind- tion binding machine which lines the cal pulps. In England itis produced ing was not a craft binding, however; spines of books with cloth or paper and mainly from ESPARTO (GRASS). The it was more convenient to bind the attaches the headbands. It has a capac- principalcharacteristicsrequiredof thin hlankbooks of that time in limp ity of 4 to 111/2 inches, head to tail, this paper relate to the printing process covers.Other limp vellum bindings 21/2 to 81/2 inches in width, and 1/4 to to be used, and include, water resist- were produced in relatively great num- 2 inches in thickness. See also: TRIPLE ance, pick strength, curl resisLnce, and bers in the 16th and 17th centuries, but LINER AND HEADBANDING MACHINE. thelike. Both coated and uncoated the limp vellum binding declined there- (343) lithographpaperareproduced,in afteruntilrevived by theprivate line tool. See: FILLET (1); GOUGE; PALLET basis weights of 45 to 70 pounds (un- presses near the end of the 19th cen- (1). coated) and 50 to 100 pounds (coated) tury. In the last quarter of the 18th lining. See: SPINE LINING. (25 X 38 500). Because any stretch century and the first quarter of the lining paper. See: PASTEDOWN. of the sheet to be printed must be along 19th, limp leather was commonly used lining skiver. A leather split somewhat thenarrowdimension, lithograph for books to be carried in the pocket, thinner than the usual SICF..' and used papers are usually positioned the nar- but for the past century or so limp for lining the inside of the limp leather row way across the printing press. (17, bindings have been largely restricted to covers of Bibles and other limp bind- 58) devotional books, diaries, and senti- ings. lithophone. A white pigment consisting of mental verse, sometimes in the YAPP link sewing. See: CATCH STITCH. a mixture of iinc sulfide (ZnS), barium STYLE. (69, 236, 264) linotype. A typesetting machine that casts sulfate (BaSO4) and some zinc oxide limp suede (limp ooze). An obsolete term an entire line of type in one . The (ZnO), and prepared by the cross pre- applied to an OOZE LEATHER finished in machine holds a number of single mat- cipitation of zinc sulfate (ZnSO4) and gray, and sometimes used as a book rices in a magazine, which are released barium sulfide (BaS), plus the additicra covering material. (274) as the keyboard is operated, and are of heat. It is used in the manufacture of limp vellum. See: LIMP BINDING. assembled in proper sequence with ap- ink, paint, etc., and as a pigment filler linen. A cloth (and sewing thread) made propriate spaces separating the words. in paper. See also: ZINC SULFIDE. from straw of the flax plant, genus The spaces justify the completed line Little Gidding bindings. Early 17th cen- Linum, and especially L. usitatissimum. as it is brought to the orifice of a mold, tury bookbindings produced by the The stems are steeped in water to re- where itis cast as a single type-high members of the Anglican community move resinous matter and allow fer- slug. Linotype is one of the typecasting founded by NICHOLAS FERRAR and his mentation to take place. After fermen- machines used by library binders. The nieces,in Huntingdonshire, England, tation is completed, the fibrous material was invented by Ott- in 1625. The bindings they produced is separated from the woody matter mar Mergenthaler and has been in use included albums(concordances)of and spun into thread. The cellulose since 1890. See also: MONOTYPE. (156, Biblical texts taken from printed texts, content of linen fibers ranges between 316) to which the Ferrars added illustra- 70 and 80%. The fibers, which appear linseed oil. A pale yellow drying oil ex- tions. The bindings themselves were of flatlike those of cotton, are thicker tracted from ground flax seed genus gold tooled velvet, vellum or morocco. than cottonfibers,have knots and Linum, and especially L. usitatissimum, Ferrar died in 1636, but the community joints, as well as transverse markings and used occasionally in the 19th cen- continued on for another 20 years. and creasings, and are very tough, can tury as a marbling size. It was never Little Gidding was an abused term be bleached white, and take dyes more used as extensively as GUM TRAGACANTH among dealers and historians of book- readily than cotton. The chlorine test or FLEA SEED. Linseed oil is also used binding, just as with Mearne and Eve, stains linen fibers a claret red.(93, in the manufacture of some printing and at one time virtually any English 143 ) inks and in some finishing processes in embroidered binding of the early 17th linen buckram. A BUCKRAM made with a leather manufacture. century was called Little Gidding. (132, base of linen rather than cotton. linson. The trade name of a particularly 165) linen paper. A paper made from LINEN strong type of paper used in the manu- lizarding. A technique employed in em- rags with or without the addition of facture of edition bindings. It is some- broidering bindings which involves the other pulps. times embossed in imitation of linen cutting of stripsofflatmetal into liner. 1. A sheet of paper of an appro- cloth, and is manufactured in many shapes which are held in place by small priate thickness attached to the inner colors and finishes. It is used as a sub- stitches at regular intervals. (111) surface of the board of a book, usually stitute for woven cloths. (161, 258) lizard skin. A leather made from the skins one thatisto be fully covered in linters. See: COTTON LINTERS. of various lizards, usually those found leather. The liner causes the board to lipped: A method of accommodating a in India and Indonesia. The skins are

SI load 161 lump

tanned by various processes, including specimen is treated with a drop of the tach looped cord to hangers, calendars, vegetable (sumac), alum and salt (taw- mixture and then with a 0.1% solution etc. The machine punches the hole, ing), and chrome tannages. The re- of hydrochloric acid, followed by the inserts the cord, draws it to the desired sultant leather has a pleasant color and application of distilled water. A blue or length, ties the loop, cuts it off, and a grain pattern produced by tiny scales. blue-green stain indicates the presence delivers the finished productall in While usually fawn or gray, they are of unbleached sulfate fiber, while purple onecontinuousoperation.Looping sometimes dyed. Lizard skin has been or lavender indicates unbleached sul- machines are used by the job binder. used from time to time in decorating fite. (143) (247) book covers. ( 351 ) logwood. An aqueous extract obtained loose back. See: HOLLOW BACK. load. 1. The total physical force applied from the heartwood of the logwood loose-leaf binding. The business of bind- toa specimen of a material when tree, Haematoxylon campechisnum, of ing individual sheets of paper in an measuring a certain property, such as Central America and the West Indies. exchangeable form, for leaves to be the compression resistance of paper, Logwood contains approximately 50% added, removed, or relocated in the tensile strength of leather, etc. 2. the haematoxylin (C16H1406 3H20), a book. Loose4eaf bindingsareused A maximum handling unit, e.g., a full colorless crystalline material when pure, wherever records of repeatedly chang- platform of sheets, sections of books. but which turns blood red when ex- ing information must be kept. Instruc- etc. (17, 256) posed to air. It is only slightly soluble tion manuals, catalogs, and accounting loading. 1. The operation of incorporating in water, but dissolves in aqueous solu- formsareoftenloose-leafbound. finelydivided,relativelyinsoluble, tion of alkalis to give a range of colors Loose-leaf binding includes the con- white powdersintoapapermaking from violet to black. It was taken to struction of the covers (although not stock, either directly or by chemical Europe soon after the discovery of the manufacture of the binding me- processes, so as to improve the printing America, and was one of the most im- chanism, whichis,ingeneral,pur- surface and ink absorption, to give a portant of the natural coloring matters chased from companies specializing in higher finish and greater opacity, to until the 19th century, when it was its manufacture), the punching or drill- improve formation and flatness, and to superseded by synthetic dyestuffs of ing of the paper, as well as the assembly improve dimensional stability. Loading greater brilliance. Logwood dye was of the various parts. Loose-leaf binding, is usually done prior to sheet forma- used in producing black ink, marbling which is classed as miscellaneous bind- tion. Loading was first used in the 19th colors, including purple and violet, and ing, is a part of STATIONERY BINDING. century, apparently surreptitiously, to is still used in dyeing leather and tex- (320, 343) save pulp and reduce the cost to the tiles black. (233) loose section. One or more sections of a papermaker; however, it was then dis- Longepierre, Hilaire Bernard de Reque- covered that book which have become loosened in restrictedquantities of leyne, Baron de (1679-1721). A book the binding, usually because of break- loading improved the paper. 2. Mineral collector who had his books elaborately matter, such as clay, barium sulfate, age of the sewing thread. See also: bound and embellished with the Golden START. calcium carbonate, china clay, calcium Fleece, in commemoration, it is said, sulfite,magnesiumsilicate,titanium of the success of one of his dramas. lop-sided. Any section or part of a book oxide, etc., used as filler materials in that is folded or backed with one side This device, which formed the sole out of true with the other. (256) paper. (17, 58, 143, 365) decoration of his bindings, was usually localized watermark. A WATERMARK so located in the center and at the corner lower cover (lower board). The back or arranged that it is impressed at definite of the covers, as well as in the panels under cover of a book, or the cover intervals on a sheet of paper. See also: on the spine. The books were bound in nearest to the last leaf of the book. CUT TO REGISTER. morocco, the edges were marbled under Also called"back cover,""reverse locks. Locking devices placed on books gilt, and some of the volumes had finely cover," or "end board." whose contents are considered to be tooled doublures decorated with the lower edge. The TAIL of a book. Also confidential or private, such as personal same motif as the covers. The superior called "bottom edge" or "tail edge." accounts,confidentialcreditratings, craftsmanship of these bindings has lozenge. A diamond-shaped stamp, or a diaries, etc. Book locks are made in prompted some authoz;ties to conjec- square stamp turned 45on its axis, several sizes and are adjustable over ture that they were bound by Luc and used in decorating bookbindings. the distances between sizes. They are Antoinne Boyet. (94, 347) (156) riveted to the covers after binding. long-fibered Japanese tissue. See: JAPA- I pattern. A LEVANT pattern embossed on (339) NESE COPYING PAPER. a book cloth. lock stitch. 1. Any method of sewing with long fold. A sheet of paper, which, if Ludlow. A machine designed by the Lud- thread whereby the stitching at each folded lengthwise, will be folded with low Typograph Co., and used for cast- operation is "locked" and cannot un- the machine (grain) direction of the ing entire lines of type in a range of ravel if cut on either side of the com- paper. See also: BROAD (1). sizes from 4 to 90 point, and, for spe- pleted stitch. 2. See: KE TTLE STITCH. long way. See: PORTRAIT. cial purposes, even up to 240 point. (164) look-through. A term describing what a Lud!ow composition isactually hand Lofton-Merritt stain. A test used to deter- paper looks like when viewed by means composition, except that the composi- mine the presence of unbleached sul- of transmitted light. This type of exami- tor sets matrices (molds) instead of fate or sulfite fiber in paper. The stain nation gives an indication of the for- actual type and casts the line from consists of two grams of malachite mation and texture of the paper, its these matrices. Ludlow machines are green in 100 ml. of water, plus one watermark, whether paper islaid or used in library binderies for casting the gram of basic fuchsin in 100 ml. of wove, and whether itis marred by type used for lettering books. (156, water, 50 ml. of the former being impurities, shives, and the like. (17) 234) mixed with 100 ml. of the latter. The looping maching. A machine used to at- lump. 1. A defect in a paper caused by an

1 S 2 Lumspecs 162 Lyonnaise style

agglomeration of fiber or other mate- American Library Association's book- clamped. The lower face of the block rials. 2. A small, hard, pill-like sub- binding commitee and were approved on the bookbinder's left has a groove stanceinpaste or glue, caused by that same year by the Library Binding in which the plow runs. It is not known imperfect mixing, lack of proper dis- Institute. (11, 211) when the lying press was introduced solution, or screening. (256) lw pattern. The code name for a "linen into bookbinding, but since it was un- Lumspecs (Lesser Used Materials SPECS). weave" applied to a book cloth em- usual for the edges of books to be cut Specifications for the binding of library bossed to give the coarse appearance and spines backed before the last part materials that are expected to receive of linen cloth. of the 15th century, it was probably little use and need not, therefore, be lying flat. That characteristic of a oinding invented sometime after 1500. (161, bound according to Class "A" specifi- that enables the leaves of the book to 236) cations, but which are expected to be lie more or less perfectly flat when the Lyonnaise (Lyonese) style. A 16th cen- used to the extent that they require book is opened inits center. Itis a U.% y style of book decoration featuring greater protection than that afforded particularly necessary characteristic for broadinterlacedgeometricalstrap- by a pamphlet box. Essentially, Lum- music scores, books which are to be work, usually gold tooled and then spec binding differs from Class "A" in photocopied, and books which are to painted,lacquered, or enamelledin three respects: I ) the Lumspec book is be written in. See: SPRING-BACK (1). different colors. Lyonnaise was also a side sewn instead of oversewn or sewn Lying flat is generally associated with style in which the binding was deco- through the folds; 2) only the spine the HOLLOW BACK, Which permits a rated by blocking the cover with large and a small part of the sides are cov- greater degree of throw-up in the spine. corner ornaments and a predominant ered in buckram, with the remainder lying press. A small, portable press. usu- center design, roughly lozenge shaped. of the boards not being covered at all; ally made of wood, with two steel or the all-over background being filled in and 3) the volumes are not lettered. woodenscrewsoperatingthrough with dots. The name is misleading, as The bindings so produced are called bronze chucks, in which books to be neither style had any connection with Lumbindings. Lumspecs were devised backed by hand, trimmed with the Lyons. (69, 156, 347) in1957 by a subcommittee of the plow, lettered or decorated, etc., are

S 163 made endpaper

M. 1. A thousand sheets of paper or method the. needle changes its position hoard.2. The Roman equivalent of for cacti section, so that the thread 1,000. See: ROMAN NUMERALS. forms- a zig-zag pattern across the tapes machine binding. A term sometimes ap- which are thus more solidly secured to plied to the type of bookbinding in the sections. which equipment is employed exten- InordinaryFrenchsewing,the sively, as contrasted with the type in books are sewn to each other until the whichrelativelylittlemachineryis machine is filled, whereupon the books employed. Machine binding would in- forming a span are taken out and sep- cludemainly editionand pamphlet arated by cutting, a process carried out bindings, and possiblylibrary bind- automatically on some models and by ings. (339) a second operator on others. In sewing machine direction. The direction in which on linings or tapes, the width of the the greater number of the fibers of a mechanical grippers which are elec- cloth for each book must be greater sheet of paper tend to be oriented as a tronically programmed to reject imper- than the thickness of the book. This is result of the forward motion of the fect sections. The feeding arm forms a accomplished by inserting a split after wire of the papermaking machine. The saddle with a pronounced ridge over each book, i.e., a wooden strip of a paper so produced is stronger in the which the half-open section is so placed suitable width, usually with a metal machine direction, and also experiences that the fold is immediately above the gutter to facilitate cutting. In order to less dimensional variation in the ma- edge of the saddle. The saddle has a allow the sewn book to move forward chine direction due to changes in hu- row of holes through which punches with the necessary thread correspond- midity. The direction at right angles to rise and puncture the section. Immed- ing to the width of the split, a free the machine direction is known as the iately thereafter, threaded needles de- stroke is made after each book, or the CROSS DIRECTION. Also called "grain" scend from above and pass through the spare tape or lining is dropped in a fold or "grain direction." (82) holescreated by the punches. The between the books. See also: DAVID machine ruling. The process of applying threadis then gripped by the side MCCONNELL SMYTH. (89, 203, 259, faint blue, red, or blue and red lines to needles of the feeding beam and drawn 315, 320) paper that is to be used for blankbooks, double for a set space along the back machine stitching. A variation of SIDE notebooks,checkbooks,etc.,by foldto the hook-needles descending SEWING, in which holes are drilled or means of RULING MACHINES, as distin- from above. The hook-needle grips the punched through the gathered leaves guished from that produced by print- loop of thread, and draws it up through and the book is then sewn twice, up ing (58, 343) the paper and also through the cor- and down through the thickness of the machine sewing. The operation of sewing responding loop of the preceeding sec- book.Seealso:JAPANESESEWING. a book by mechanical means rather tion. The feeding arm then swings out (259) than by ha-d. Although in its broadest to pick up the next sectiun, repeating madder lake (turkey red). Any of several sense machine sewing includes OVER- this process until the sewing is com- herbs of the genus Rubia, and especially SEWING and SINGER SEWING, as well as pleted. an Eurasian herb, R. tinctorium. It con- some forms of SIDE SEWING, it iS COM- Sewing with thread alone is some- tains the glycoside ruberythric acid, monly accepted that the term refers times referred to as "ordinary French which gives xylose, glucose, and the specifically to the various methods of sewing." Most machine sewing can be dye alizarin upon hydrolysis. Madder sewing through the folds of the sections done on spine lining material or tapes lakeis used for dyeing and inthe by means of sewing machines. Machine fed from reels across the spine of the manufacture of marbling colors. sewing is a product of edition binding, book. The sewing is accomplished in made boards. Book boards consisting of andreachesitsgreatestefficiency the same manner, but the thread passes twoboardsofunequalthickness (economy) in the sewing of relatively through the lining material or tapes. pastedtogether,thethinnerboard long runs of books of identical size. Some machines are so designed that being on the inside next to the book. The basic principal of machine sew- the thread passes around the tape. In Made boards are useful when binding ing is that one needle does not go "all addition, some machines work with an a large book, one requiring boards that along" the length of the section, taking off-and-on stitch, which is suitable for are thicker than normal. The advan- itthread with it, as in hand sewing; books rnade up of thin paper andior tages of using two boards rather than instead, a series of needles operate, sections, and corresponds to the two-on one very thick board are that the thin- each with its own kettle stitches. method used in sewing by hand. While ner board will tend to cause the boards In the usual type of sewing machine, ordinary sewingisdone with two to curve towards the text block rather one section after another is placed on needles for each stitch, the off-and-on than away from it, and the use of two a feeding arm which brings each to the method requires three needles working boards provides greater stability for part of the book already sewn. Fully in combination, the thread being drawn them. (172, 335) automatic machines feed sections by alternately to one or the other of the made endpaper. A type of endpaper con- meansof vacuumsuckersand/or outer needles. In the "staggered stitch" sisting of two decorative leaves, e.g., made flyleaves 164 mangrove

marbled, colored, etc., and two or three per. The magneshup methoxide reacts substance (C4H302), soldble in ace- plain leaves. The decorative endis with moisture in Ihe paper to form tone and chloroform. It is manufact- pasted to one of the plain leaves, and, magnesium hydroxide, which slowly ured by the oxidation of benzene by on larger books, a linen guard, through carbonates to form magnesium carbon- air at 400 to 450' C. over a vanadium which the sewing passes,is wrapped ate. A common method of application catalyst. Maleic anhydride is used in around both. One decorative leaf be- is by aerosol spraying. the manufacture of paper. See: FORTI- comes the board paper, the other, as magnesium silicate. An insoluble white FIED SIZE. well as the plain leaves, being the free powder (Mg3H2 (SiO3)4), used in gild- malleable. A term applied to a metal cap- flyleaves. If a waste sheet is desired, ing. See: FRENCH CHALK. able of being beaten or rolled in all another plain folded sheet is tipped to magnesium sulfate. A colorless, crystalline directions without breaking or crack- the innermost plain leaf and one leaf salt (MgSO4), soluble in water, which ing. Since the molecules of the metal is swung around on top of the board occurs naturallyas white,granular, must remain locked to each other dur- paper. This method also gives an addi- fibrous, or earthy masses, and is read- ing the beating or rolling. A malleable tional free flyleaf. (81, 335, 343) ily obtained in solution. It is used in metal must exhibit a high degree of made flyleaves. Flyleaves made from col- leather manufacture to improve the structural plasticity. The most malle- ored, marbled, or otherwise decorated color and feel of leather. See: SOUR DIP. able of all metals is gold, which can paper, lined with uncolored paper that Mahieu, Thomas (active 1549-65). The be beaten intoa sheet(leaf)only is sometimes similar to that of the text. 16th century bibliophile, who, along 1/300,000 inch thick. Other malleable (237) with Grolier, was the most celebrated metals usedin-- bookbinding include made-up copy. A book having IMPERFEC- collector of his day. Mahieu's collec- silver, aluminum, "platinum, and pal- TIONS (1) which have been replaced tion, which belongs to the period 1550 ladium. (233) by parts from other copies of the same to 1565, included bindings, some of malpighian layer. The layer of epithelial edition. (69, 156) which were done by Claude de Picques, cells in the epidermis of a hide or skin magazine binder (magazine case). A form with punched and gilded backgrounds next to the grain surface of the derma, of case, generally having a transparent for designs, or curved strapwork and whose protoplasm has not yet changed plastic upper cover, and used as a tem- arabesques, with ornaments in outline into horny material. porary binding of pamphlets or current or azured. Some bindings are lavishly mangrove (bark). Trees of the family magazines. It can be removed for use ornamented with colored onlays on a Rhizophoraceae, especially those of the with the succeeding numbers. (156) gilt background. Many are inscribed genera Rhizophora, Bruguiera, Avicen- . A paper suitablefor "Tho.Maio lietAmicorvm,"(the nia and Ceriops, the barks of which are printing of periodicals. It is manufac- Latinized form ofhis name being rich in tannin. The tannin content of tured in a wide range of grades and Maiolus). About 90 bindings survive, mangrove barks varies widely, how- finishes, two or more of which are ranging in quality from adequate to pver, from less than 10% to more than frequently used in a single issue. Both very superior. 40%, depending upon a number of coated and uncoated grades are used, Mahieu, who may have been a native factors, including the species, as well depending mainly on the requirements of Italy, was secretary to Catherine de as the age, exposure to sun and air, for illustrations and halftones. (17) Medicis from 1549 to 1560 and later a location on the tree where the bark is magnesium bicarbonate. A bicarbonate treasurer of France, as was Grolier, removed, etc. (Mg(HCO3)2) used indeacidifying whom Mahieu probably knew. (168, As a tanning material mangrove bark papers. The bicarbonate is produced 347, 373) has both advantages and disadvantages. by passing carbon dioxide through a mahogany marble. A "tree marble" pro- Its principal disadvantage is the reddish solution of magnesium carbonate. The duced by sprinkling black and brown color it imparts to leather (See also: document to be deacidified is immersed coloring, mainly the former, on the HEMLOCK), although this can readily in a bath or sprayed with a solution of covers of a book, and when dry, coat- be overcome by mixing mangrove with about 10 grams o magnesium carbon- ing the entire cover several times with other tanning materials which modify ate per liter of water that has been red coloring. See also: TREE CALF. (97, or reduce the intensity of the color. treated with C00. The advantage of 152) The leather produced by the use of this method is thatitis simple and Maio li, Thomas. See: MAHIEU, THOMAS. mangrove alone also tends to be harsh effective. make up.1.The sections and other and thick-grained. When used with magnesiumcarbonate.Acarbonate gatherings needed to make up one com- other tannins, however, as it usually is, (MgCO3) produced in paper by the plete book. 2. A list of the contents of mangrove provides a very satisfactory action of atmospheric carbon dioxide a book supplied by a publisher to the tannage. The rate of penetration of the on magnesium hydroxide. See: NON- printer and bookbinder to serve as in- tannin is slower than with such tannins AQUEOUS LEACIDIFICATION. structionsastothepositioningof as wattle or quebracho, but can be in- magnesium hydroxide. A white precipitate plates, plans, map endpapers, etc. See creased by sulfiting. k Ag(OH)2) produced in paper by the also: DUMMY (1). 3. A general term Mangrove is considered to be the action of moisture in the paper on applied to the process of taking type most economical and abundant veget- magnesiummethoxide. See: NON- from galleys, arrangingitinto page able tannin available today. It is one of AQEUOUS DEACIDIFICATION. form, inserting illustrative cuts, divid- the condensed class of tannins, has a magnesium methoxide. An organic salt ing the matter into page lengths, add- fairly high pH and a relatively low (Mg(OCH3)2), insoluble in water, and ing running heads, titles of subdivisions, acids content. Itis very soluble and produced by dissolving magnesium in footnotes, etc., and securing with cord. develops a minimum of insoluble mat- dry methanol. When dissolved in alco- The pages of type are then ready to be ter. It also produces very little sludge hol and freon,it can be used in the locked in the chase. (264, 365) in the tanning liquor. NON-AQUEOUS DEACIDIFICATION Of pa- maleic anhydride. A colorless crystalline Mangrove is inaccurately (but per-

1 manifold binding 165 marbled cloth

sistently) referred to as "cutch" or to the German Guild (M. D. E. Paulus(born 1511) came ofage. "kutch."See also:VEGETABLE TANNINS. 1949) and the first president of the Aldus' grandson, Aldus the Younger, (175, 306, 363) British Guild, 1955-1968. He was also took over the press upon the death of manifold binding. The business of binding the first president of DESIGNER BOOK- Paulus (1574) and subsequently closed multiple business forms, such as sales BINDERS. His bindings are to be found itin 1590 when he was appointed records, billheads, purchase orders, etc. in numerous libraries,including the director of the Vatican Press.See also: It may also include the punching of British Museum Library, Victoria & ALIMNE (ITALIAN) STYLE. (104, 154, custom-made forms that are used in Albert Museum, Klingspor Museum, 252, 313, 334) one of ny proprietary loose-leaf, Royal Library of Stockholm, New York map endpapers. Endpapers on which record keeping systems. Manifold bind- Public Library Spencer Collection, and maps areprinted. While frequently ings are usually padded or wire stitched, the Victoria State Library, as well as adding to the attractiveness of a book, and are seldom sewn. They are also many public and private collections. it is somewhat difficult for the reader frequently of a temporary nature, e.g., Mansfield's designs, while difficult to to refer to such maps, a throw-out map a common style consists of marbled evaluate, are enormously pleasing to being much superior for practical use. boards with a paper spine (although it view. His bindings are subtle but force- In addition, map endpapers make re- may be cloth). Since this style of bind- ful, and convey almost a feeling of binding of the book more expensive, ing frequently includes sheets of carbon tranquility that brings about a common as the old endpapers must be saved, copy, perforation is usually necessary. understandingbetween artist and theugh generally not again for use as Other manifold bindings sometimes re- viewer. Considering the trends of to- endpapers. The term is also generally quire . Manifold bind- day, he has done with relatively sober appliedtoendpapers ing printedwith usuallyemployspower-driven, means, that which many have failed to charts, graphs, etc. hand-operated equipment. (320, 343) convey with the most elaborate of de- map paper. A paper used for the produc- manifold paper. A thin, translucent paper vices. tion of maps of all types, including used for typewriter carbon copies, or Mansfield is also the author of sev- atlases. It is a superior grade of paper as tissue overlay for correction or pro- eral articles dealing with teaching of produced fromlinen,cottonfiber, tection of other work. It is produced bookbinding design, contemporary ap- chemical wood pulps, or combinations from chemical and/or rag pulp, the proach to bookbinding design, as well thereof, in basis weights ranging from rag pulp contentgenerally ranging as new directions in bookbinding de- 16 to 28 pounds (17 X 22 500). from 25 to 100%. The finish may be sign. (50) Required characteristics include finish, dull or glazed, and basis weightr are manuscript binding. A method used oc- printability,dimensionalstabilityto 7 to 9 and sometimes 10 pounds casionally when a manuscript (or type- assure goodregister, (17 X 22 goodfolding 500). Manifold paper is script) made up of single leaves is to properties, and, in some cases,e.g., also used for map overlays and, in a be bound in sections. The leaves are road maps, high opacity. Map papers slightly waxed form, for interleaving pasted in pairs in such a manner that arealsosoneltimes producedin a tissue. (17, 58) if there are 16 leaves, for example, the manner that affords high wet strength, manila. A color and finish of a paper re- binding edge of leaf 1 (rectoside water repellency, mildewresistance, sembling that at one time obtained in down) would be pasted to the binding luminescence, abrasion resistance, and paper manufacture from manila fibers, edge of leaf 16 (recto side up), leaf 2 other properties pertinent to a parti- but which contains no manila,i.e., to 15, and so on, the 8 double leaves cular use. (17, 324) hemp stock. is sometimes then being folded to make a section. marble. To impart a veined or mottled used for the covers of brochures and At best it is an awkward method and appearance to the edges of a book or like publications, and for lining the is probably not as effective as a GUARD the surface of a paper, cloth, leather, boards of leather bookbindings. (17, (2). (355) in order to simulate an appearance of 339) manuscript cover paper. A lightweight marble. manila board. A thin, strong board, gen- cover paper used on legal documents, marble board. A pasteboard stained on erally made from chemical wood pulp and similar publications. It is produced one side with veined or mottled colors ranging inthickness from 0.016to from chemical woodpulps,which in 'mitation of marble, and used in 0.035 inch. It is used for cover stiffen- sometimes contain cotton fiber, in basis bookbinding for checkbooks and mar- ers, fences for blankbooks, and covers weight of 40 pounds (18 x 31 500). bleboard bindings. (339) for notebooks. (17) (17) marbled. The edges of a bookor the manila hemp.See:ABACA. Manutius, Aldus (c 1450-1515). The lead- surface of paper, cloth,etc., which Mansfield, Edgar (1907- ). An English ing publisher and printer of the Vene- have been given a veined or mottled bookbinder and sculptor, who was born tian High Renaissance, Aldus set up a appearance in imitation of marble. in London, settled in Hastings (1911) definite scheme of , pro- marble calf. A calfskin leather treated and Napier (1965), New Zealand, and duced the first italic type, introduced with acid so as to produce an effect of is presently living in that country. He small and handy pocket editions of the marble.Cf:MOTTLED CALF.See also: studied binding under William Mat- classics and applied several innovations TREE CALF. (264) thews and design ander Elsa Taterka in binding technique and design for marbled cloth. A book cloth patterned and taught art and crafts at the Feild- use on a broad scheme. He established with variegated colors in imitation of ing High School from 1929 to 1933, hispressinabout1490, andhis marble. The cloth is colored by throw- proceeding to London for further study printer's device of anchor and dolphin ing on the colors in a manner similar to in 1934. There he taught design and has been copied by numerous printers the "marbling" of leather, or by laying color at the London College of Print- since. Between 1515 and 1533 the the cloth on the surface of the marbling ing from 1948 to 1964. Mansfield was press was managed by his father-in- size as in the marbling of paper. Mar. the first foreign member to be elected law, Andrea Asolano, until Aldus' son, bled cloth was first introduced in about

1 S marbled edges 166 marbling combs

1851 but went out of fashion before transfer of ordinary marbled paper of the 18th century the Old Dutch pat- the turn of the century. (236, 369) involves coating the edge of the hook tern was gradually superseded by the marbled edges. Veined or mottled color- with an egg size somewhat thicker than French Shell, Stormont, Antique, Spot, ing on the edges of a book in imitation the size used for gilding, placing the and others,allof which were un- of marble, and produced by touching surface of the marbled paper against combed. These then declined in popu- the edge of the book under compres- the edge, and then applying dilute hy- larity by about 1840, and were replaced sion on the surface of a size on which drochloricacidto the back of the by the Nonpareil and Spanish patterns. marbling colors have been floated and paper. When the design appears clearly Both of these were revivals of the 17th patterned, or by transferring the pat- through the paper, the marble is trans- century patterns which did not have the tern to the edge. ferred by rubbing or beating the paper. "set" look and high glazing of their Marbling of book edges was intro- Marbled paper made especiallyfor 19th century counterparts. The Spanish duced near the end of the 17th cen- transfer is treated with rectified ethyl marble is believed to have been used in tury, mainly on trade books bound in alcohol (spirit of wine), pressed on the England towards the end of the 18th calfskin and sheepskin. Fine bindings edge and daubbed with hot water. century. Both revivals were used exten- were not so marbled until the closing Transfer marbling is still done to some sively throughout the 19th century, and years of the 18th century. These latter extent on blankbooks, dictionaries, etc. then, later, mainly for the endpapers bindings were usually half or full bind- (236) and sides of inexpensive half-calfskin ingsof Russialeather,usuallyof marbling. The art or process of producing bindings, and for the sides of cheaper quarto or foliosize.Allclasses of certain patterns of a veined or mottled stationery bindings. Other patterns, used books bound in morocco continued to appearance in imitation of marble by mainly during the second half of the be gilded until well into the 19th cen- means of colors so prepared as to float 19th century and generally for cheap tury,i.e.,the1830s, when cheaper on a mucilaginous liquid which pos- or medium cost bindings, included the morocco bindings began being marbled. sessesantagonisticpropertiestothe Gloster, Italian, Spot, Antique, West Marbled edges were common until the colors prepared for the purpose. The End, and Gold, the last being intro- First World War, when the practice colors are floated and formed into pat- duced in about 1880. During this same began to decline, except for stationery terns and are taken off by laying a period, German marbles, which tended bindings. See also: MARBLE ROLLERS; sheet of paper (or touching the edge of to be drab and heavily spotted with MARBLE TRANSFER; MARBLING (236, the book) on the surface of the size. black on a colored background, were 241, 327) The size is usually prepared from car- also used extensively, but seldom for marbled grain. A mosaic pattern, corre- ragheen moss or gum tragacanth, boiled the suprior grades of work. The most sponding to the pattern of the network in water, but it may also be made from frequently used pattern was a modern of tiny underlying blood vessels, which flea seed, linseed,etc., although flea variation of the Dutch pattern. See the sometimes occurs on the grain surface seed and linseed are not as effective as following marble patterns: AMERICAN; of a leather. It has a rough, wild, or the two gums and cannot be used in ANTIQUE; BLUE STORMONT; BOUQUET; grainy appearance. (363) the production of certain marbles, e.g., BRITISH; CURL; DRAWN; DUTCH; FANCY; marbled leather. The leather covers of a the combed marbles. FANCY DUTCH; FRENCH CURL; FRENCH book which have been decorated with Water colors are generally used in SHELL; GLOSTER; HAIR; LAPIS-LAZULI veined or mottled colors in an effort to marbling, although oil colors can also (2); LIGHT ITALIAN; NONPAREIL; OLD imitate marble. Unlike the technique be used; however, they do not permit DUTCH; PEACOCK; REVERSED NON- usedinedge andpaper marbling, as fine control or produce the clean, PAREIL; SNAIL; SPANISH; SpOT; STOR- leathermarblesareproducedby sharp lines of water colors. Mineral MONT; TURKEY; WAVE; WEST END; and sprinkling or throwing the marbling colors are seldom used because of their ZEBRA. See also: MARBLED CLOTH; MAR- water andcolorsdirectly onto the tendency to sink to the bottom of the BLED EDGES; MARBLING BRUSHES; MAR- paste-washed and glaired leather. See trough due to their weight. BLING COMBS; MARBLING MACHINE; thefolloi ingexamples: COMMON Littleis known of theorigin of MARBLING SIZE; MARBLING TROUGH. See MARBLE; GREEN AGATE MARBLE; GREEN marbling, but there seems to be little PLATE XL (151, 152, 161, 217, 236, PORPHYRY MARBLE; LEVANT MARBLE; doubt that it was introduced into West- 327,333,369) PORPHYRY VEIN MARBLE; PURPLE ern Europe from the East. Examples of marbling base. See: MARBLING SIZE. MARBLE; RED MARBLE; RED PORPHYRY Japanese marbling produced as early marbling brushes. Fine bristle brushes, set MARBLE; ROCK MARBLE; STONE MAR- as 800 A.D. exist under the name of in hard rubber and secured in metal BLE. See also: TREE CALF. Sumingagashi. The Persians are con- ferrules. They are generally from 3/4 to marbled top. A book which has had only sidered to have been the first to use 1/2 inch in diameter. The larger brushes the head (top) edge marbled. marbled papers in books, and examples are used for the ground color in drawn marble rollers. A mechanical device con- of their work are found on the borders marbles, while the smaller ones are sisting of two layers of rollers, one of some of their 16th century manu- used for the subsequent colors. The above the other. The toproller or scripts. Marbled paper was in use in bristles of marbling brushes should be rollersholdthecolors,listributing Holland by 1598, but its earliest use in formed into a curved shape so as to them to the lower roller or rollers England dates from about 1655; in give a freer motion when dropping the which, in turn, apply the colors to the America it was in use by 1679. By the colors. edges of the book. (264) 1670s it was in common use in Eng- marbling combs. Instruments, generally marble transfer. A marble pattern that land, although not in trade bindings. with wireteeth,usedfor combing has been transferred from ordinary The mos commonly used pattern was marbling colors while on the surface marbled paper, or a marbled paper what we call OLD DUTCH MARBLE, most of the size. They are usually of two made expressly for transfer purposes, of it actually coming from Holland. basic types: those with relatively short usually to the edges of a book. The Beginning in about the last quarter teeth, used for combing on he surface marbling gum 167 Mearne, Samuel

of the size (and sometimes called "top which acts as a spillway to receive the to make a varnish used to impart a combs" because the teeth are allowed coloring matter left after the sheet or high gloss to leather bookbindings. (97) to touch the floating colors); and those Look edge has been marbled. (335) matching sets. A term indicatingthat with relatively long teeth, which touch marbling under gilt. See: GILT MARBLED each succeeding year of a periodical the bottom of the trough while the EDGES. is bound asnearly aspossible .like comb is being drawn (and sometimes marbling water: See: MARBLING SIZE. the preceeding years, with regard to called "bottom combs"). In the produc- margin. I. The area of a page between trimmed height(called trimmingto tion of comb patterns, four combs with theprinted,written,orillustrative recorded size), binding title, lettering variously spaced teeth are used: the matter and the edges of the leaf. The format, color and type of covering most common are: four teeth to the four margins are usually calledthe material, etc. See also: RUB (1). inch, twototheinch, and double "head"(ortop);"foreedge"(or mature. Paper or board which has been combs, in which the spacing of the outer, outside, side); "tail" (or bottom, seasoned for a period of time before teethis alternately wide and narrow. foot); and "inner" (or back, inside, being used. Maturing is important in (335, 369) gutter,binding).Theproportional preventing excessive warping of such marbling gum. See: MARBLING SIZE. width of the margins is an important materials as binder's board, as well as marbling machine. A machine used to element in a properly balanced book to have the moisture content of paper drop marbling colors on size.It con- page. A good (and standard) ratio is: and hoard attain equilibrium with the sists of a four-compartment reservoir head 2 units, fore edge 3 units, tail 4 surrounding atmosphere. See also: SEA- and a system of tubes connected to it, units, and inner 11/2 units (the oppos- SONING. which serve as outlets and distribute ing inner margins making a total of 3 mbt. See: MERCAPTO-BENZTHIAZOLE. drops of coloratregularintervals. units). In order for these ratios to exist In.!. Abbreviation for MARBLED EDGES. Three and five outlets, respectively, are followingtrimming,thehead,fore mean tensile strength. The average value provided for the two main colors, and edge, and tail margins must be greater of the results obtained by testing the two outlets eachfor the secondary by the extent of the trimming, which is tensile strength of a material. Where colors. (264, 317) usually 1/8 inch for each. 2. The area the material has a warp or machine marbling rods. A pair of rods sloping of a map, drawing, or print, between direction, the testing is conducted in toward the marbler, and used when the line enclosing the information and both the machine, or warp, direction marbling the covers of a book. The the edge of the paper. (156, 234) and the cross, or weft, direction. (197) book is placed on the rods so that the maril. An acronym for marbled inlaid Mearne, Samuel (1624-1683). An Eng- extended boards rest on them, with the /eather.Itisa method of utilizing lishpublisher, bookseller, and book- leaves hanginz between. The tail of the waste leather consolidated in stages by binder,about whom littledefinitive book is lower than the head so that the mixingscrapsofdifferentcolored knowledgeexists.WhileMearne's colors will flow from head to tail. (97) leathers with an appropriate adhesive, name is associated with the splendid marbling size. The gelatinous liquid upon e.g.,polyvinyl acetate,pressing, and COTTAGE STYLE, some authorities have which the marbling colors are dropped thenveneering.Marilisacollage expresseddoubtsthatheactually and formed into patterns. GUM TRAGA- method devised by the English book- bound any books himself, but rather CANTH over the years has been the most binder PHILIP SMITH, and is used in thatthefamousMearnebindings frequently and successfully used mar- expressive bookbinding imagery. (311) were executed by the Dutch book- bling size gum, but other gums and marking. 1. The process of stamping or binder Suckerman, and that Mearne substances have also been used with writingidentificationmarks, binding was apublisher,not a bookbinder. varying degrees of success, including instructions, or other information, on It has been established, however. that CARRAGHEEN MOSS, IRISH MOSS, the side of the board paper which is Mearne's secondapprenticeship was FLEA SEED, and even LINSEED OIL. The eventually glued to the inside of the with Jeremy Arnold,abookbinder, last, however, was very seldom used board. Marking is done to avoid errors and it is therefore argued that he must bet-ause, although it is easier and more in binding, or to identify the particular have learned thecraft,the question economical to prepare, it deteriorates library owning the book. 2. The indi- being how many books heactually quickly. Flea seed is stronger and lasts vidual marks or a colored thread used bound. It is probably unlikely that he longer but it is of little use in the non- by hand- or machine-sewers, collators, would have taken the time to hind pareil and other combed patterns be- or inspectors, to establish their respon- books following the Restoration, be- cause the colors are dragged off by the sibility for the work done. (256) cause he quickly became an important comb. Carragheen moss, which was marking up (marking out). I. The process figure in the book trade. Mearne ac- first used sometime after the middle of of marking the position of cords or quired the posts of Stationer and Book- the 19th century, is still popular: how- tapes on the spine of the gathered sec- seller to the King, and thereafter be- ever,itquickly decomposes unless a tions before sewing. 2. The preliminary came Master of the Stationers' Com- preservative suchas sodium sulfate, marking before the binding in of the pany. It is probably reasonable to as- glycerinand water,orformalinis design to be followed in decorating or sume, however, that, considering his added. (217, 264) letteringabookbinding.(156,256. knowledge of bookbinding, he would marbling trough. A metal or wooden 335) have continued to take an interest in trough about 3 inches deep and about mastic. An aromatic, resinous exudation the work of his bindery. I inch larger all around than the largest obtained usually in the form of yellow- Regardless of its origin, the cottage sheet t3 he marbled, and designed to ishto greenish lustrous, transparent. style came to be regarded as distinc- contain the MARBLING SIZE and colors. brittle tears from incisions in the bark tively English, and attained a popu- It is usually rectangular in shape, and of the mastic tree. Pistacie lentiscus, larity whith endured with minor vari- tas an additional compartment about and used, along with sandarach and ations untilthefirstquarter of the 4 inches wide partitioned off at one end rectified ethyl alcohol (spirit of wine). 19th century. thus la-5:-'ng for a longer

1Sj mechanical adhesion 168 metalwork

period than any other style of book mechanical fasteners. A general term ap- completely apart. (173, 335) decoration. plied to books with paper covers held mercapto-benzthiazole (m. b. t.). A crys- Mearne's second son, Charles, was together (either permanenfly or tem- talline heterocyclic compound (C7H4NS hispartner from1678,and when porarily) with metal or plasticfast- (SH)), which is prepared by the treat- Charles Mearne died in 1686 the shop eners, such as staples, nails, coils, posts, ment of thiocarbanilide with sulfur, or seems to have gone to Robert Steele, and plastic or metal strips. (259) by heating aniline, carbon disulfide, one of Samuel Mearne's apprentices, mechanical marblers. See: MARBLE ROLL- and nitrobenzene. M. B. T. is useful who is last recorded in 1710. Steele's ERS. under certain conditions as a paper daughter, Jane, then took over the mechanical wood pulp. A papermaking fungicide, generally in a concentration business, and was in turn followed (in pulp produced by mechanical means of 0.1% by weight of the paper. It about 1718) by THOMAS ELLIOTT. The only. The resultant fibers, which are contains no chlorine and can be ap- same set of tools can be traced from produced by abrading the de-barked plied either as an aqueous or non- Samuel Mearne to Elliott, by way of logsagainstagrinding wheel,are aqueous solution. (198) Charles Mearne, Robert Steele, and short, the average length being about mercuric chloride. A colorless, odorless, Jane Steele. 3 to 4 mm, with an average diameter and non-volatile compound (Hga,), At one time the most elaborate of of about 0.03 ram. Paper made from which is the oldest and perhaps best the Restoration bindings were attrib- 100% mechanical wood pulp has rela- known of the paper fungicides. It can utedto Samuel Mearne. Seealso: tively lowstrength,discolorsfairly be appliedin an aqueous or non- RECTANGULAR STYLE. (109, 253, 347) rapidly upon exposure to air and light aqueous solution and is usually used in mechanical adhesion. The adhesion that (possibly because no lignin is removed concentrationsas low as 0.1% by exists between surfaces in which the from the fibers), and has very little weight of the paper.Itisliableto adhesivesecurestheadherendsby permanence. It does, however, possess liberate hydrochloric acid under cer- means of interlocking forces. See also: good bulk,opacity,and compressi- tain conditions; however, since it con- SPECIFIC ADHESION. (309) bility, which are desirable character- tains only a small percentage of chlo- mechanical binding. The business of bind- istics in some boards, book papers, and rine, and is usually effective in very ing single leaves in a non-exchangeable printing or writing papers. The wood low concentrations, it is not very likely form. In such a binding, leaves cannot used is almost always one of the soft- to be dangerous inthis respect.Its be added, removed, or relocated in the woods, although in certain instances major disadvantage is its violently toxic book, asispossible in the case of hardwoods are also used. The most nature, which has led to its use being LOOSE-LEAF BINDING. Mechanical bind- important physical properties of me- legally restricted in the United States. ing may be done on many levels of chanical wood pulp are freeness, rela- (198, 235) technology, and is usually part of the tive length of fiber, uniformity of fiber merrythought. A finishingtoolinthe services of the job bindery. The forms length, strength, color, and cleanliness. form of a wishbone, or "merrythought," which mechanical binding can take This type of pulp is generally used usually embellished with cusps or foli- include spiral, coil, ring, cercla (a bind- with a proportion of chemical wood age. It was used on late 15th century ingconsistingofconnectedplastic pulp,thepercentageranging from and 16th century blind stamped bind- rings), and comb. Mechanical bind- about 15 to 50. Chemical testsfor ings. (250) ings have several advantages, includ- determining the presence of mechanical metal back binders. Binders of the ex- include ing: 1) the leaves open flat; 2) pages wood pulp theiodine-zinc panding-post type,generally witha may be arranged in any order, and chloridetest,which gives a yellow steelor aluminum spine. Each side may be of varying weights and sizes; result,asdoesanilinesulfate,and post has fouralternatelysolid and 3) thereis no need to impose and phloroglucinol, which gives a bright tubular telescopic posts attached. The print in even forms, as 8, 16, 32, etc., red. (17, 143) posts alternate so that a thin solid post pages; and 4) the bindings are simpler meeting guard. See: REVERSED V-GUARD. isadjacent to a thick hollow post, and less expensive than sewn and/or mellowing. A term sometimes applied to which prevents looseness in any part adhesive bindings. They also have dis- theprocess of allowing theleather of the binder. A key at one end of the advantages, however, some of which used for covering a book to absorb spine plate operates a transmission rod are: 1) they are more expensive than the first application of paste so as to to widen thedistancebetweenthe simple wire stitched bindings; 2) when saturate the pores of the leather before clampir g bars, thus allowing leaves to the book is open, the left hand page the second application of paste im- be inserted or removed. Because of the is usually (higher) or lower than the mediately before covering. (115) telescopic posts,this type of binder right, by half the distance between the mending. A somewhat contradictory term has a fixed minimum capacity, while holes; 3) they do not provide the sup- which, in its most elementary sense, the maximum is always twice the mini- port and protection often desired in refers to the minor restoration of a mum. See also: LOOSE-LEAF BINDING; permanent bindings; and 4) pages are book with no replacement of any ma- MECHANICAL BINDING. (276) more easily lost, torn out, or stolen. terial or the separation of thetext metallic inks. Printing inks used to pro- Mechanicalbindingsarefrequently block from its case or covers. In this used for calendars, diaries, price books, sense mending is not so complete a duce coloredeffects,suchasgold, notebooks, catalogs, instruction books, rehabilitationas RESTORATION. Ina silver, copper, or bronze. Unless used etc. (320) more complex sense, however, "mend- on coated paper, and initial printing mechanicril deckle-edge paper. An imita- ing" can be a long, involved process. of a sizing material is done, the results tion DECKLE EDGE produced in a paper The mending of torn leaves, for ex- will be unsatisfactory. (140) by applying mechanical abrasion, or ample, in which the tears occur in metallic thread. See: WIRE THREAD. See other treatment, to the edges of the thefolds,involves a process which also: PURL. sheet. (17) necessarily includes taking the book metalwork. A decorative ornament found

1 Sj methylated spirit 169 migration

on numerous rolls; it consists of fancy book should be continued in the de- by means of, a microscope. A micro- workinimitationof wrought and sign and color of the binding. He may, scope consists of an optical device con- curved ironwork filling a small panel. in fact, be called the founder of the taining one or more lenses and is used (250) 20th century French school of binding. to view minute objects, generally those methylated spirit. Ethyl alcohol (ethanol, The designs of the two binders were larger than .005 mm. A one-lens in- or grain alcohol) denatured with meth- often based on natural forms and the strument is known as a simple micro- onol, or other denaturant, e.g., ben- ornament is often expressed in color, scope, while one with two or more zene, and used to dilute spirit stains. outlined in blind, and very often with- lensesiscalled a compound micro- methylbromide. A colorlessvolatile out the use of gold. See PLATE X. (140, scope. Instruments which interpose oil liquid (CH3Br), prepared by the ac- 347) of the same refractive index as glus tion of bromine in methyl alcohol in microcrystalline wax. A vvAx obtained between the object and the objective the presence of phosphorus, followed from the heavy lubricating oil fraction are used for high power work. The by distillation.Itis used as a fumi- derived from crude oil, subsequent to limit of resolving poyer is equal ap- gant for books and other materials. the removal Of PARAFFIN (WAX). Its proximately to the wavelength of the methyl cellulose. Cellulose methyl ether, characteristics resemble those of the light source used, i.e., points separated produced by treating cellulose from naturalwaxesclosely,includingits by 4 X 10-5 cm. Objects smaller than wood or cotton with an alkali, such as high melting point, high viscosity, flexi- this can be detected as bright points sodium hydroxide, followed by methyl bilityat low temperatures, and high intheultramicroscope,whiletheir chloride. The resulting product isa cohesion and adhesion. Itis used as actual shape and dimensions can be white granular solid, soluble in cold a substitute for other waxes in laminat- examined in the electron microscope, water but insoluble in hot water. It is ing paper and foils,as well as for in which a beam of electrons is used used as a thickening agent for aqueous polishes, etc. inlieuof light andisfocused by preparations and as a substitute for microencapsulated adhesive. An adhesive electrostatic or magnetic fields. Resolu- natural gums, and particularly asa employing microencapsulation (a pro- tion down to 5 X 10-8 cm is theoreti- stabilizer in emulsions. It has also been cedure for containing liquids, e.g., the cally possible with such an instrument, used to and as an dye in , in micro- which is, however, difficult to use be- additive in adhesives to increase film scopic pods which are crushed to re- cause of the necessity of mounting the strength, flexibility and adhesion. (198) lease their contents)so as to cause specimen in a vacuum. The microscope methyl magnesium carbonate. An or- itto act instantly,i.e.,the adhesive is a valuable instrument for the study ganic compound, (CH30Mg0CO2CH3- setstheinstantthecapsulesare of paper and leather fibers, etc. (195) xCO2), with x being variable depend- crushed. The "adhesive," for example, Middkton, Bernard C. (1924- ). One ing on the solvent used. It is prepared could be applied to the boards or board of the outstanding modern day book- by treating a solution of magnesium papers of a book at any time during binders and conservationists, Middle- methoxide with carbon dioxide until binding. Pressing the book would crush ton won a Trade Scholarship to the saturationisattained. The resulting the capsules creating the adhesive. The Central School of Arts and Crafts, solution is clear, colorless, and has a process would have particular use in Southhampton Row in 1938, and was pH of approximately 7.0. It has been edition binding, as it would solve the apprenticedtotheBritish Museum recommended asa non-aqueous de- problem of timing inherent in most Bindery in 1940. He was a City and acidifying agent for paper, preferably modern machines, where the glue (at Guilds Silver Medalist in 1943. Middle- inlow concentrations,e.g.,0.7to the correct temperature and viscosity) ton was later bookbinder at the Royal 1.0%. Its advantages are said to be: must reach its application area (in cor- College of Art and, for a short time, 1)a mild pH, due tothe neutral rect film thickness) an instant after managed the Zaehnsdorf bindery. He character of the solution and direct the work is properly positioned but be- started his own business as a book conversionto magnesium carbonate fore machine pressure is applied, which restorer in 1953. upon hydrolysis; and 2) convenience is a set of circumstances very difficult Middleton's forwarding is considered of use due to the decreased sensitivity to keep in proper adjustment. The use to be superlative, while his designs and of the solution to water, which assists of microencapsulated adhesives would tooling, though restrained, are always in preventing premature precipitation. alsobeofconsiderablebenefitto in good taste and are superbly ex- mica paste. An adhesive produced from library binders. As of this time, such ecuted. He isalso considered to be ISINGLASS dissolved in a suitable sol- adhesives are only in the experimental one of the most skillful book restorers vent. It is used in guarding. stage. (89) at work today. Michel, Marius. The name employed by microfilm. Generally, a 35 mm film bear- Aside from being a gifted book- Jean Michel (1821-1890) and his son, ing a photographic record in reduced binder, Middleton is recognized as an Henri Frarkois (1846-1925), who were form of print or other graphic ma- outstanding scholar in the field of book- distinguished Parisian bookbinders. The terial, such as books, newspapers, docu- binding history, and is the author of a work of the elder Michel, while tech- ments,etc.Althoughoriginallyin- comprehensive work entitled A II:story nicallyexcellent,was largelytradi- tended to save both space and the of English Craft Bookbinding Tech- tional. Henri Francois, on the other handling of the originals, microfilm is nique, as well as The Restoration of hand, was more enterprising, and used currently being used extensively as a Leather Bindings. He is unique among curved stamps instead of small dies method of "preserving"theliterary historians of bookbindings because he and fillets to work exotic flower and content of deteriorating materials. writes with such a vast knowledge of leaf forms, and also attempted to relate micrometer. An instrumentusedfor technique, largely overlooked by others. the decoration of the book cover to measuring thickness of materials such migration. A condition or process of ex- its contents. He was thefirst book- as paper, cloth, leather, and board. traction, in which an aqueous or or- binder to suggest that the mood of the microscopy. The use of, or investigation ganic solvent selectively dissolves part

19u mil 170 m. m. system

of an adhesive film, and carries it to haps the first and possibly the second tooled frame and, outside ot that, a adifferentlocationasthesolvent decade of the 18th century, and even lighter area thatisalso surrounded, evaporates. The term also refers to the then only in the superior grades of but by a blind rather than a gold penetration of an adhesive plasticizer binding. The cheaper machine-made tooled line. The spine is usually heavily into the adherends due to the attrac- boards were in use as early as the 19th gilt.So-called mirror bindings were tion of the adherend for the plasticizer. century. Millboard was used continu- popular in Denmark in the 18th cen- See also: ACID MIGRATION. ously until the Second World War in tury. (104) mil. A unitoflinearmeasurement, the better grades of binding, (82, 161, misbound. One or more leaves or sections equivalent to 0.001 inch. 198, 236, 335) of a book which have been incorrectly mildew. A growth caused by micro-organ- millboard machine. See: ROTARY BOARD folded, bound in the wrong place, or isms, whose spores, in a moist, warm CUTTER. bound in upside down. Text blocks environment, become molds. They de- mimeograph paper. A type of paper used bound in upside down are a common rive their food from the substance on for producing copies on a mimeograph occurrence in edition binding which they form, e.g.,the materials machine. The paper is produced from miscellaneousbinding. 1 Primarilya of a book. During their growth they numerousfurnishes,includingthose British term applied to a style of hand producecitric,gluconic,oxalic,or containing cotton fibers and bleached binding that is not of as high a quality other organic acids, that can damage chemical wood pulps, mechanical wood as extra binding, but considerably su- paper, leather, cloth, etc. They also at pulp, and combinations thereof. Ab- perior to edition binding. Under this times produce color bodies, leading to sorbency, absence of fuzz, finish, and category may be included work done staining which isdifficult to remove. opacity are desired characteristics. The for a book collector who desires some- In counteracting mildew, every part usual basis weight is 20 pounds (17 X thing better than the regular publisher's of the affected hook must be treated 22 500) but basis weight may range (edition) binding. 2, See: JOB BINDING. with the inhibitor most suited for it. from 16 to 24 pounds. (17) (343) The best preventatives, however, are mimosa. See: WATTLE (BARK). missing leaves. Any leaves not included thorough cleanliness, sunlight, dry cir- mineral acids. See: INORGANIC ACIDS. in, or removed from, a section, gather- culating air, and relatively low tem- mineral tanning. A method of converting ing, or bound book. perature. See also: FUNGI: MOLD (4). hides and skins into leather by the use missing picks. The contiguous pick (fill- (144, 363) of metals, e.g., chromium, aluminum ing) threads missing from a portion of millboard. A high grade of hard, tough and potassium (alum), iron, and zirco- the width of a fabric. binder's board, dark brown to black nium. The first mineral tannage, called mistletoe tool. A finishingtool which, in color. It has a smooth finish pro- "tawing," involved the use of alum and despiteits name, impresses a design duced by rolling or milling under high salt. See: TAWING. See also: CHROME more like a feather than a mistletoe pressure. Originally, millboard was pro- TANNING; ZIRCONIUM TANNING. leaf. Apparently it was first used on duced from old tarred rope, sacking, miniature book. A small to very small Irish bindings about 1766, and was and similar materials and was called book, generally up to 3, or perhaps even afterwards used on the spine panels of "black board" or "rope board"; how- 4 inches in height, in which the principal, Irish bindings of about 1780. (96, 156) ever, genuine rope millboardis now if not only, interest lies in its small size. mitered. 1. A binding ornamentation on virtually impossible to obtain, except It is designed on a small scale (although the spine or covers of a book, either in from covers discarded from old bind- some consider books reduced in size by gold or blind,consisting of straight ings. It is now made from waste paper, photographic means to qualify as mini- lines that meet but do not pass beyond various wood pulps, screenings, with atures), printed with small type, bound the vertical panel or "run-up" lines on the better grades containing some hemp and decorated on a small scale, and, if either side. A fillet or pallet may be and flax fibers. The sheet is produced illustrated, provided with reproductions used to make the lines; however, the on a wet machine and is calendered appropriate to the size of the book. fillet is not generally used on the spine by passing it through a hoard calender The idea of a miniature is artificial, of a book except when executing the several times. The finalthickness of although they are very popular. Many RUN-UP GILT BACK. 2. The juncture at the board generally ranges from 0.036 Bibles,devotionalworks,almanacs, the corners of the turn-ins edged to an to 0.144 inch. classics, etc., have been issued in mini- angle of 45°. See: CORNER MITERING; Old millboard contains sufficient iron ature form from an early date.(69, NICKED CORNER. 3. The connection at impurities to promote the formation 156) the angles of an outer frame to an inner of sulfuric acid due to the presence of minium. A red lead (ground cinnabar) of frame or panel by the diagonal use of sulfur dioxide in the atmosphere, much Iberian origin, mixed with water and a fillet or roll. (161, 183, 236, 335) in the same manner as in paper, al- egg white, and used in the rubrication mitsumata. A shrub, Edgeworthia papy- though at a much slower rate. Mill- of Egyptian papyri and in the produc- rifera, found in temperate Asia and hoard, furthermore, often suffers from tion of miniatures. (140) cultivated in Japan forits bark, the an additional defect from the point of mint. A book which is in the same new fibers of which are used in papermak- view of the bookbinder, namely, ex- and unblemished condition as when it ing. cessive lamination stemming from the was first published. A "mint" condi- m. m. system. A method of computing pressure used in calendering. This ex- tion of a book usually implies that it the basis weights of all grades of paper cessivelaminationcancausethe stillhas its book jacket,if provided on a sheet size of 25 by 40 inches corners of the boards to be subject originally, which is also new and un- (1,000 square inches) and a 1,000- to splitting and mashing. blemished. (69) sheet count, i.e., the 1,000, 1,000 or Ropefibermillhoardswerefirst mirror binding. A style of decoration m. m. system. The traditional writing produced in the late 17th century, but featuring a dark marbled central panel paper basis weight of 20 pounds (17 X they were not in general use until per- (the mirror), surrounded by a gold 22 500) becomes 107 pounds on mocha 171 mold-made paper

an m. m. basis (25 x 40 1000), modifier. Any chemically inert ingredient effects applied to the calico used for while regular 60-pound book paper which when addedtoan adhesive publishers' bindings. (339) (25 X 38 500) becomes 126 changes itsproperties. See also: EX- moire effect. The opticalillusionob- pounds, and so on. The m. m. system, TENDER (1); FILLER (5); PLASTICIZER served when curved parallel lines are which originated in the 1920s, is not (1). superimposed, forming an illusionary in general use but printers, paper buy- modulus of elasticity. The ratio of stress ers,as well pattern. WATERED SILK is an example as others,often findit to strain within the elastic range of a of the moire effect. (233) advantageous to use. In applying the materal. In an adhesve, itis an em- moisture content. The amount of actual m. m. system, a conversion chartis pirical measurement of the elastic de- moisture in a material. The moisture used which listi various grades with formation of which an adhesive film is content varies according to prevailing their traditional basis weights and cor- capable. (222) responding m. m. factors. natural or controlled atmospheric con- (17, 320, Mohs' scale. A scale used to determine ditions. See also: HUMIDITY; RELATIVE 329) the hardness of solids, especially min- mocha (mocha suede). A leather pro- HUMIDITY. erals.It is named after the German moisture proofness. The ability of ama- duced from the Arabian blackhaired mineralogist Friedrich Mohs. The scale terial to resist the passage of water, sheep(commonlycalledblackhair reads as given below: mochas). It is a chrome-tanned leather, either in the liquid or vapor form. In with the grain removed by mechanical Hardness Material book materials, generally, it indicates a material with unusually low WATER- abrading rather than by hand frizing. 1 Talc---easily scratched by Itis suede-finished on the flesh side. the fingernail VAPOR PERMEABILITY. See also: WATER- This leather retains most of the fibers Gypsumjust scratched PROoF; WATER RESISTANCE. of the skin, and its particular fineness by the fingernail moisture vapor transmission. A measure of the ability of an adhesive o^ plastic is due to the closeness of the fibers of 3 Calcitescratches andis the skin. (351) scratched by a copper film or coating to resist the penetration mock flexible. A more or less obsolete coin of moisture through the film or coat- term which has been interpreted to 4 Fluoritenot scratched by ing intothe substrata. Itisusually mean either a binding with a tight back a copper coin and does measured in grams per square meter not scratch glass over a period of 24 hours. Abbreviated and false bands, being "mock" be- M. V. T. (233) cause it is flexible but has false bands, 5 Apatitejustscratches or a binding with a hollow back and glass andiseasily mold. 1. The rectangular wooden frame false bands, being "mock" for both scratched by a knife over which the brass wires or a wire reasons (371) 6 Orthoclase easily cloth is stretched and through which water drains away from the pulp fibers modeled-leather covers. A method of scratchesglassandis decorating a book in which the leather just scratched by a file in the formation of a sheet of hand- cover is molded, cut, or hammered to 7 Quartznot scratched by made paper. See also: DECKLE (2). 2. raise a design in relief, or in which the a file A packet of leaves of gold interleaved leather is laid over a decorative foun- 8 into 1,000 goldbeater's skins, each 5 inches square. The mold stage of gold- dation attachedtothe boards. The 9 Corundum style is found on the Stonyhurst Gospel 10 Diamond beating is the final and most exacting (7th or 8th century) and on some of the three stages of beating. See: Coptic bindings of 100 or 200 years The scale has been extended as follows: GOLD LEAF. 3. In printing, a device in later, but is not seen again, at least in Hardness Material two parts used for casting . 4. A multi-cellular, microscopic British craft bookbinding, until the end 1 Liquid of the I9th century. (236) 2-6 As indicated above on the vegetable plant which forms cobweb- modern monastic. A style of bookbinding chart like masses of branching threads from which characteristically employed very 7 Vitreous pure silica the surface of which tiny fertile threads thick boards, red, brown, or gilt edges, 8 Quartz project into the air bearing the part of and unusually high raised bands. The 9 Topaz the plant from which spores develop. usual leather used was divinity calf, as 10 Mold may be of brilliant colorsor well as brown or red morocco. The 11 Fuzed zirconia black and white, depending on the design was blocked in blind, or tooled 12 Fuzed alumina type. Molds can develop on leather, cloth,paper, in blind with rolls, fillets and stamps. 13 Silicon carbide etc.,especiallyinthe It consisted of a center pattern featur- 14 Boron carbide presence of relatively high heat and ing heavy lines and solid figures within 15 Diamond relativehumidity.Seealso: FUNGI; a rectangle, which, in turn, was within (195) MILDEW. (29, 198) molding iron. See: BACK-MOLDING IRON. an elaborately embossed rectangle sur- moire book cloth. A book cloth having rounded by a mitered border. Modern mold-made paper. A deckle-edged paper an irregular, wavy finish produced by resembling handmade paper but actu- monastic was very popular in the mid- embossing in such a manner as to dle of the 19th century. (241) re- ally produced on a cylinder machine semble watered silk. Prayer books and or a cylindrical mold revolving in a modified starches. Starches that haveun- Bibles sometimes have endpaperscon- vat of paper pulp. The sizes of the dergone certainbiological, chemical, sisting of a folded sheet of black moi-c or physical treatment which changes sheets are determined by dividing the cloth mounted onapaperflyleaf. surface of the cylinder with rubber their viscosity and/or chemical charac- Moire book cloth was at one time used teristics and which are used bands which also create the deckle inthe fairly frequently for doublures. Itwas edges. The deckle edge may also be manufacture of paper. (17) also one oftheearliestdecorative simulated by cutting the web witha

1 ,9 2 mold resistant paper 172 Morrig,

jet of water. Mold-madepaper is used in limited editions where hydroxyl or carboxyl groups in their Straight-grained morocco was popu- a handmade molecules they are capable of forming larin the late 18th and early 19th or simulated handmade paper is de- lakeswith sired. (58, 307) metaPicinordants. The centuries. Bright red and green were methods by which the mordant colors the most popular colors, with dark mold resistant paper (and board).A paper can be attached to a fiber depend on or board which has been rendered blue, black, citron, and even purple the nature of both the dyestuff and the skins also being used. mold resistant by treatment withmold- fiber. (235) inhibiting chemicals, suchas the chlor- Throughout the 19th century, mo- ophciates. (17) morocco. A vegetable tanned leather hav- rocco, in its various grain patterns, was ing a characteristic pinhead grainpat- moleskin. A heavy, durablecotton book used in the finest bookbinding, and it tern developed either naturallyor by isstill used for much of the better cloth made in satinweave, usually with means of graining or boarding, but a smooth twilled surface onone side, binding, although it is very expensive and a short, thick, velvety never by embossing. The most com- and is also becoming more andmore nap on the mon and characteristic grain pattern is difficult to obtain. other. At one timeit was used for known as "hard grain." covering blankbooks. (264, Today, torefertoaleatheras 276) By long usage, the term "morocco" "morocco" gives no indication as to monastic bindings. See:ECCLESIASTICAL is taken to denote a goatskin, tanned BINDINGS. the subspecies "Levant," "Niger," etc., by any vegetable tannage, and boarded since most of the morocco now used Le Monnier family. Agroup of some in the wet condition; in a more strict inbookbinding comesfromother twenty French bookbinders, ofwhom interpretation, however, morocco is de- Louis Francois and hisson, Jean, were parts of the world. The only common fined as a goatskin tanned exclusively denominator amongthe the best known. The familywas in- with SUMAC, and boarded in the numerous volved in bookbinding from wet varieties of leather which now go un- the first condition. Leather made fromvege- half of the 17th centuryto about the der the name morocco is that theyare table tanned goatskin havinga grain all goatskins. (236, 291, 343, 351) middle of the 18th century.They used pattern resemblingthatofgenuine morocco cloth. See: IMPERIAL MOROCCO floral decorations and designssugges- morocco, but produced other than by tive of Chinese lace, and theirbindings CLOTH. hand boarding, is more properly termed morpholine. A colorless organic liquid were beautifullytooled,often with "morocco grained goat" or "assisted fantastic designs, but not (Na (CH2)0 0 (CIV), which boils always in the morocco." at 128 best taste. They also madeextensive C., and has a characteristic When properly produced, morocco ammonialike and slightly fishy odor. It use of mosaics. See: MOSAICBINDING. goatskins (342) are very durable,flexible, has been proposed as a vapor-phase beautifullygrained,andrelatively deacidifying agent, mainly because it is monotype. A machine used forcasting strong, making them eminently suitable individual pieces of type. Itwas in- inexpensive, easily used, and deacidifies for use as a bookbinding leather. The rapidly in suitable chambers. Its main vented by Tolbert Lanston(1844-1913) skins are (or, at least, have been) ob- in about 1889 andwas put into com- disadvantage, other than its highly dis- tained from several areas, including: agreeable odor, is the tendency of the mercial operation in about1897. The wild goats,principally from Africa, monotype isa distinct improvement treated paper to revert to an acidcon- which generally produce heavy skins dition in the presence of high relative over the LINOTYPE in that the indivi- with a -,rery bold grain, dual types produced facilitate e.g., LEVANT; humidity. replace- domestic goats, which producea leather ment in case of error. Themonotype Morris, William (1834-1896). An English with the more familiar hard grainor poet, composing machine is the mostsuccess- painter,architect and printer, PINHEAD MOROCCO; and true PERSIAN who led the movement in search of ful thus far developed, its productbe- MOROCCO, which isproduced from ing almost equal to that ofhand com- higherstandardsofworkmanship position. (313). Indian or East Indian goatskins. The among craft bookbinders in the latter term, however, is also applied (incor- years of the19th century.It was Montagu style. A style of book decora- rectly) to East Indian sheepskin tanned tion deriving its name from Montagu Morris' wife who recommended that with condensed tannins and dressed in Cobden-Sanderson take up bookbind- of the firm Montagu and Johnson, imitation of goatskin; so-called Cape London bookbinders, who flourished ing. Later Cobden-Sanderson founded morocco(produced from goatskins the Doves Bindery to bind books in the later half of the 18thcentury. from the Cape of Good Hope), which, pro- The principal features of the styleare duced by the Kelmscott Press. Morris when obtainable, were of high quality and his group also sought to improve corners and centers filled with stops, and had the most pronounced grain etc., similar to illustrations. The tools the quality of the materials used in pattern and the richestfinish;and bookbinding, and, under his influence, used are mainly of an open leafyde- NIGER goatskins, which are soft and scription, flowing froma stem of scroll great emphasis was placed on both can be obtained in a wide range of utility and beauty. While Morris'name or curl. (241) colors. mordant. A compound, suchas a salt or is best remembered for his revival of Alum-tawed "morocco" stained pink, fine printing, some outstanding bindings hydroxide of chromium, iron, alumi- wasfirstproduced by the Moors, num, or tin, used to fix a dye in oron were executed on editions of beauti- possibly before the llth century. Vege- fully printed books producedat his a substance, such as a fabric, leather, table-tanned morocco was in use in or paper, by combining with the dye Kelmscott Press, which he founded in some part of Europe in the 16th cen- 1891. These vellum bindings to form an insoluble compound. See tury, particularly in Italy where the were not also: LAKE. (130, 195) ornamented except for the title in gold mordant dyes. Dyes of varied goat was more common than :n the on the spine, and had projecting cov- constitu- north of Europe, where calfskinwas tion, all of which possessan acid char- ers which were bent over the fore edge. more abundant. Morocco leather was Ribbon ties held the covers closed. acter.Becauseofthepresenceof rarely used in England before 1600. They had flat spines, andwere sewn mosaic bindings 173 mutual solvent

on tapes, which were extended to the caused by localized variations in either LEATHER. The name derives from the fore edge to form the ties. (339, 347) ink receptivity or penetration; in the Mudéjares, or Moors, who remained in mosaicbindings.Bookbindingsdeco- formeritmay be predominantly a Spain during and after the Christian rated by inlaying or onlaying small difference in hue, while in the latter it reconquest of that country. See also: pieces of leather of various colors to will generally be a result of a differ- GoTICO-MUDLIAR STYLE. (245, 330) form patterns. The technique ispar- ence in gloss. 3. The uneven dyeing of mull An English term for the coarse, ticularly associated with the work of paper pulp fibersresulting from the loosely woven cotton fabric used prin- the 19th century French bookbinders, coloring of a small number of fibers be- cipally toline the spines of edition Antoine Michel Padeloup, Louis Fran- fore complete dispersion of the dye. bindings. Also called CRASH or "super." cois, and Jean Le Monier. This form This is due to the manner of addition See also: SPINE LINING FABRIC. of decoration has been u.,ed for a con- of a hot concentrated solution of dye- mullen. A term used with reference to siderable length of time; examples of stuff to the beater, or of dyeing a com- the bursting strength of paper. It is so mosaics of inlaidleather, while ex- bination furnish containing fibers which called from the the name of the instru- tremely rare, date back tothe 16th take up the dye more readily than ment used in conducting the test, in- century.Paintedmosaics consistof others. 4. An uneven dyeing of a paper vented by John W. Mullen, in 1887. geometrical interlacings filled with a due to the application of drops of dye multiple spindle drill. A paper drill which coloredandvarnishedincrustation, on the web while itis on the Four- can be fitted with a number of adjust- with borders of gold lines. Very bril- drinier wire or on the finished sheet able heads. It is used for drilling several liant when first executed, the composi- after it has left the papermaking ma- holes in a lift of paper or along the tion in time cracks and peels off, thus chine. (17, 93, 159, 1/2/ binding edge of a pile of sheets to be damaging the line work of gold en- mounted and tipped. A platethatis side sewn. circling it. See PLATE VII. (90, 150, 329, smaller than the leaf to which it is to murex. A purple dye obtained from ma- 334) be attached, and which is positioned rine gastropods (Family Muricidae), mossing. The process of finishing the above the caption and secured by tip- and used in the Middle Ages for em- flesh side of leather with a mixture of ping along the top or side edge, or at bellishing manuscripts. (Irish)carragheen moss and French the corners. The entire plateisnot muriatic acid. The old name for IIYDRO- chalk, which leaves the surface smooth usually pasted down because of the CHLORIC ACID. and white. (338) greater danger of cockling, particularly music manuscript (music paper). A paper mottled. A variegated effect produced on if the grain directions of the two papers printed with staff lines and used for the the surface of a material, such as pa- are in opposition. (276) writing of musical scores.Itis pro- per; by the addition of heavily dyed mounted on guards. See: GUARDS (2). duced from rag and/or bleached chemi- fibers,called mottling fibers,tothe mounts. See: BOSSES. cal wood pulps.Itisstiff enough to papermakingstock.Mottledpapers mucilage. An aqueous adhesive consist:ag stand in a music rack and has a surface are used for endpapers, pattern papers, of GUM ARABIC or fish glue, plasticized that will take pencil or pen and ink. cover papers, and other kinds of deco- with glycerin, glycol, or sorbitol, with Basis weights generally from 60 to 80 rative papers. (17) a small amount of a preservative and pounds (25 X 38 500) or 24 to 30 mottled calf. A calfskin binding which odorant added. In a more general sense, pounds (17 X 22 500). Erasability has been decorated with an irregular mucilage is a liquid adhesive having a is an important characteristic. Music pattern produced by staining the covers low order of bonding strength. The printingsareusedforreproducing of the book with dabs or flecks of terms mucilage and mucilaginous are music, and are produced mainly from ferrous sulfate. See also: TREE CALF. also commonly used as generic terms bleached chemical wood pulp. The (69, 264) describing gummy orglueywater- paper is well formed and is sized and mottled edges. A form of edge deco..ation miscible substances. (235, 309) processed to insure good pick strength produced by daubing color lightly over mucilaginousliquid.See: ouM; MAR- and minimum curl. The basis weights the edges of a book,generally by BLING; MUCILAGE. range from 60 to 90 pounds (25 X 38 means of a sponge which leavesits mudejar style. A style of Spanish book- 500). (17) natural markings on the edges. The binding of the13th and early 14th muslin. A plain woven cottonfabric, edges may be colored over first, or the centuries. In the most typical of such made in various qualities ranging from mottling may be applied directly to the bindings the main decorative feature coarse to sheer. For use in bookbind- white edges. Red and black are fre- consists of a blind geometrical pattern ing,itisusually sized, starched, or quently used combinations.Mottled with double outline interlacings (strap- blued to reduce stretching or shrinking. edges are found mainly on large blank- work), with either all or part of the (237) books but seldom on letterpress bind- background being filled in with dots, mustard plasters. See: YELLOWBACK. ings. (256) small tools, and the like. Various types mutton thumper. An old term for an in- mottled sheep. A sheepskin treated with of small oblong or square stamps were competent bookbinder. colors in an irregular pattern. also used, not all mudejar in character. mutton thumping. An old term applied mottling. 1. The process of decorating the In typical Muslim tradition, however, in England to the binding of school covers of a book by applying color or tools representing living creatures were books in sheepskin. acid to the leather. See, for example, avoided.Althoughthecharacteristic mutual solvent. A volatilesolventso MOTTLED CALF. See also: TREE CALF. mudéjarbindingwas decoratedin called because it is miscible with more 2. In printing, a defect appearing: 1) blind, later bindings were decorated in than one class of liquids. Acetone, for on a solid print as a variation in color bothblindandgold.Most of the example, is miscible with water, alco- intensity across the sheet or as a varia- mudéjar bindings have wooden boards hol, and ether,as well as withoil, tion in gloss; or 2) as a blotchiness due (and the remainder pasteboards) and alcohol, or ethereal fluids. Such a ma- tofrothmarking.Mottling may be the majority are covered in CORDOVAN terial is also known as a coupling agent M. V. T. 174 myrabolans

becauseitcan cause two ordinarily extent replaced sumac and plant galls lansisusuallyblended withother immiscibleliquidsto combine with in European tanneries,isitsacid- more astringent tannins, e.g.,wattle, each other, forming a clear solution. forming properties. It contains3to 5% quebracho, or mangrove, which pene- (233) sugars, which is much more than most trate faster. M. V. T. See: MOISTURE VAPOR TRANS- other tannins contain; consequently fer- Myrabolans is a pyrogallol class of MISSION. mentation takes place readily in the tannin, with low viscosity, a medium myrabolans (myrobalans). A vegetable tan liquor and satisfactory plumping of pH (3.2)and salts content, and very tanning material obtained from the the hides and skins is obtained in the high acids content. The tannin also dried astringent fruits of certain species earlystagesof tanning. Myrabolan contains chebulinic acid and a fairly of Terminalia, and used extensively in tannin also contains a large proportion high proportion of ellagitantlin. the tanning of leather. The dried fruit of ellagitannic acid, and thus readily In addition to its used in the tanning is rich in tannin, averaging30to32c'e, deposits bloom. The disadvantages of industry, myrabolan tannin is also used but the percentage varies greatly with the tannin are its slow penetration, and as a black dye and in the manufacture dicerent grades and sources. itstendencytoproduceaspongy of some inks. See also: VEGETABLE One of the principal advantages of leather of poor wearing quality. Be- TANNINS.(175, 298, 306) myrabolan extract, which has to a large cause of these characteristics, myrabo- nailing 175 newsprint ralararP

nailing. A method of securing the leaves straight, curved, spiral and/or hollow or sections of a book (usually a news- needles used in machines which sew paper or a book in sheets that has an through the folds of sections, through ample binding margin) in which ordi- the side of a pile of leaves, or in lacing nary flat-heated nails, or specially de- sheets together. Most of these needles signednailsorstaples,aredriven have the eyelet at the pointed end or through the paper near the binding carry the thread through the hollow. edge from both sides. The nails are (183, 256) slightly shorter than the thickness of needlework binding. See: EMBROIDERED the pile of leaves, so that they do not BINDINGS. emerge from the paper on the reverse network. A term sometimes applied to a side of the pile. This style of binding is a finishing design consisting of intersect- cutflush and isnot rounded and ing lines forming squares. (94, 156) backed. Unless the book is very large, either darken or undergo a change in neutral color. A color that is not domi- and is made up of suitable paper, a hue. nated by blue or red and which, there- nailed binding usually has poor to very Some of the natural dyestuffs are: fore, is neither warm nor cold. Medium poor OPENABILITY. (146, 259) bluesindigo,woad,chemic,and grays and browns are usually classed naphthylene. A crystalline aromatic hy- Prussianblue; redsmadder, cochi- as neutral colors. (233) drocarbon(C1014), obtainedfrom neal, brazilwood, alkanet, annatto, and neutral size. See: ROSIN SIZE. coaltar,thatis sometimes used to safflower; yellowsfustic, quercitron, neutral . A paper pulping destroy or inhibit the spread of book- dock,goldenrod,sassafras,andtu- processthat dates back toatleast worms, and is also spread among dried meric;brownsbutternut,catechu, 1880, when a method was developed goatskins to lessen the danger of attacks alder, and hemlock; purplesorchil and for using an alkaline solution of sulfite by insects during shipment and storage. cudbear; blackslogwood, and neutral in iron digesters. The process employs (83, 363) colors--barks of various trees, includ- sodiumsulfitewithsufficientalkali nappa leather. A soft, full grain leather ing birches and oaks, galls and sumac. added, to neutralize the acids devel- made from an unsplit sheepskin, lamb- (4) oped during the cooking process. The skin, or kidskin, usually tanned with ntat's-foot oil. A pale yellow, fatty oil alkali may be caustic soda, soda ash, alum and chromium salts and dyed produced by boiling the feet and shin or sodium bicarbonate. (17, 324) throughout. bones of cattle, horses, sheep, and pigs, neutralsyntans. SYNTANS which have nap side. The soft, fibrous surface of a and skimming the oil from the surface b-en adjusted to a pH of 6.0 by the leather or cloth, as opposed to the of the water. Like allnaturalfats, addition of an alkali. They are often smoother reverse side, i.e., the grain neat's-foot oilis a mixture of sub- miscalled synthetic mordants, whereas side of a leather. The term is usually stances, many of which deposit on cool- they should be referred to as "syn- applied to velvet cloth and ooze or ing. "Cold-tested" neat's-foot oilis a thetic leveling agents." (306) suede leathers to indicate the face of material that has been heldatthe neutral tint. A color which approximates the material. Normally, the side oppo- freezing point for a period of time and gray. Specifically, it is a nearly neutral, site the grain side of a leather is termed then filtered. Neat's-foot oil is used in slightly purplish black that is slightly the "flesh side." (102, 256) the preparaton of some leather dress- bluer and lighter than slate or sooty natural dyestuffs. A class of dyes ex- ings, and in the fatliquoring of leather. black. (233) tracted and processed from plant or (143) newsprint. A generic term applied to the animal sources, as distinguished from necking. The process of shaving the flesh type of paper generally used in print- dyestuffs manufactured from deriva- side of a finished leather to equalize the ing newspapers. The paper is machine tives of coal-tar. The use of natural thickness of the different parts of the finished and slack sized and has little dyes predates recorded history. Other skin, and to remove loose adhering or no mineral loading. It is made in dyestuffs were later developed in an- flesh. (298) basis weights of 30 to 35 pounds (24 X cient Greece, Rome, and the Orient, needle point lace stitch. See: BUTTONHOLE 36 500). Thirty-two-pound basis while still others were used in medieval STITCH. weight, which has proven to be the needles. 1. The long, slender, round steel and Renaissance times. Although still most satisfactory in that it represents instruments pointed at one end and a practical compromise between cost used to a limited extent for specialized with an eyelet at the other and through work or for reasons of economy, their and printability, is the most commonly which the thread passes. They are used produced weight. use in archival work is now virtually to carry the thread through paper or obsolete. Newsprint is produced at very high cloth in sewing a book through the machine speeds, which causes the fibers Few, if any, of the natural dyestuffs folds. The eyelet should be designed so of the sheet to be very directional; areresistanttoexternalinfluences, as not to cut the thread and yet allow it however, the fact that the majority of such as light; they do, however, fade at to pass freely through the holes made the fibers are oriented in one direction differentrates.Uponfading,they inpaper orcloth.2.The special is actually an. advantage from the point nibbed 176 non-aqueous deacidification

of view of printing, because ithelps slight variations in grain surface and nipping press. A small press consisting the paper take the strain of the high- color which give Niger its character- essentially of a fixed, horizontal iron speed press run, and, from the point istic appearance, are seldom success- baseplate,and an upper, movable of view of production, "runability" is fully imitated in other skins, such as platen thatis raised and lowered by the most important characteristic in that of the sheep, which is being in- means of arelativelylong,vertical newsprint. Other important character- creasingly offered as genuine Niger. screw. The nipping pressis used to istics include: smoothness, which is the See also: conisKIN; MOROCCO.(61, apply quick and uniform pressure in controlling factor for halftone fineness 69) a variety of bookbinding operations. inalldirect-printing methods;soft- nip. The point of contact between two While the nipping press does not have ness, which is especially important in rolls, as in a folding machine, rolling the available DAYLIGHT or the pressing newsprint because the image carrier press, calender stack, etc. power of the STANDING PRESS,itis forces the ink into the pores of the nipped-in. A term sometimes applied to relatively easy to open and close which paper during impression; opacity, which hand sewing that has been drawn too makes it very useful for a quick press- ;s important in all lightweight paper tightly, resulting in the sections being ing operations. The true nipping press and particularly so in newspaper relief unduly compressed at the points of does not release its pressure until re- printing where the ink does not re- the kettle stitches. When the book is leased by the turning of the screw; main on the surface but is forced deep subsequently rounded and backed, the however, substitute "nipping presses," intothepaper;andbrightness,or hammeringmaycausethekettle whicharereally"letter-presses"or whiteness, which is important because stitches to break. (335) "copying presses," once used in busi- it contributes to good contrast between nipper (nipping machine). I. A machine ness offices for "copying" letters, are ink and paper in black-and-white print- used in edition binding to compress limited in their ability to apply pres- ing and is of great importance in full- the spine of a newly sewn book and sure because they have a tendency to color printing. in library binding to remove the origi- ease the pressure when the handle is The usual furnish for newsprint is 75 nal backing shoulders of a book that released. (203, 335) to 85% mechanical pulp, and 15 to is to be rebound (and usually when it nipping up. A covering technique which 25% unbleachedorsemibleached is to be resewn through the folds). involves pressing the leather around chemical pulp. The mechanical pulp The nipping machine in a library bind- theraised bandsafterithas been adds thedesired properties of high ery is usually a hand-operated, power- drawn over the spine of the book. opacity, smooth surface, and high oil drivendevice,whileintheedition BAND NIPPERS or a BANDSTICK (1 ) are (ink) absorption, while the chemical binderyitisusually a cominuously usually used for this operation. pulp adds the necessary strength re- running, power-operated machine. In nitric acid. A corrosive, non-volatile, in- quired to run the paper through fast itstypical design and operation, the organic acid (HNO3). It is a strong rotary presses without breaking. book is secured by a spring-operated acid, with most of its important re- The high percentage of mechanical clamp toprevent the sections from actionsbeing duetoitsoxidizing pulp in newsprint which makes it very slipping. The front jaw of the nipper action. Nitric acid reacts violently with satisfactoryfornewspaperprinting, is split lengthwise, the top half being cellulosic mates 'als, and can be formed makes it unsatisfactory from the point held open by heavy springs. It projects in them by the conversion of nitric of view of permanence. (17, 72, 287, beyond the lower half and can be oxide (an air pollutant) into nitrogen 320) slipped back flush with it. When the dioxide,and thenintonitricacid: nibbed. See: LIPPED. bookisinserted and the jawsare 2N0 02 4 2NO2; 3NO2 -I- H20 4 nicked corner. The corner of the cover closed, the upper half catches it and 2HNO3 + NO. As the amount of nitric of a book which has the turn-in on the secures it while the lower half applies oxide in the atmosphere is very small, fore edge overlapping the turn-inat pressure to the sewing swell or should- relative to sulfur dioxide, the formation head and tail. This type of corner is ers at thc spine. of nitric acid in archival materials is made by cutting the covering material The first nipper, a hand-operated and relatively slow; however, it also func- at a 45. angle at a distance of about power machine, wasintroducedin tions as a catalyst in the conversion of three times the thickness of the board 1882. sulfur dioxide into sulfuric acid. from the corner. The head and tail 2. The flanges of a BUILDING-IN MA- nitrocellulose. See: CELLULOSE NITRATE. are turned over first, followed by the CHINE which form the joints of the non-aqueous deacidification. A method of fore edge. A small tuck forms a smooth book. deacidifying paper which utilizesal- edge at the corner. (150) 3. See: BAND NIPPERS. (320, 339) cohol, or some other non-aqueous sol- Niger. A soft vegetable tanned goatskin nipping. 1. The process of reducing the vent,for the deacidifying chemical. that has a natural grain pattern result- swell caused by the sewing of a book. Aqueous methods cannot be used to ing from the nature of the skin, the or the removal of the backing shoul- treatarchival materialsincasesin tanning processes employed, and, espe- ders of a book to be rebound, by ap- which the inkissusceptible to the cially, boarding in the wet condition. plying pressure to the bookatthe action of water;therefore,insuch Niger, which is now difficult to obtain, spine only, usually between the jaws cases a non-aqueous method is essen- istanned and finished from native of a NIPPER (1 ). See also: KNOCKING tial. One such method involves treat- skins in Nigeria and surrounding dis- OUT THE GROOVE; KNOCKING OUT THE ing the document with a solution pre- tricts by primitive methods,usually SWELL. 2. The process of applying pared by dissolving 19 gm of crystal- employing babul bark as the principal heavy pressure of short duration to a linebariumhydroxideoctahydrate tanning material. The most common case-bound book for the purpose of (Ba(OH)2 8 H20) in one liter of colors, which are seldom uniform, in- setting the joints before the adhesive methyl alcohol (which corresponds to clude crimson, orange tobrick-red, used in casing-in sets. See also: BUILD- a 1% solution of barium hydroxide as green, as well as the natural buff. The ING-IN MACHINE. (179, 339) a free base). The normal procedure is non-commingled 177 nylon

to immerse the document in the solu- fered from a sort of mechanical ap- lar in the manufacture of paperbacks tion, but it may be brushed or sprayed pearance. (217, 236, 369) and children's coloring books.Itis on if the document is too fragile for non-sewn binding.See:ADHESIVE BINDING. produced from 75 to 85% mechanical immersion. While drying, any excess non-tannin. That portion of the water- wood pulp plus 15 to 25% chemical barium hydroxideisconverted into soluble matter in a vegetable tanning wood pulp, and in such a manner to barium carbonate (BaCO3) by the ac- material, other than the tannin, that provide a rough surface and maximum tion of atmospheric carbon dioxide, isnon-volatile. Non-tannins, or non- bulk. The usual basis weightis32 giving a final pH of approximately 8.0. tans, as they are usually called, may pounds (24 X 36 500). Thickness Another method is to treat the docu- include hydrolysis products of the tan- ranges from a minimum of 0.004 inch ment with a 1.0 to 1.5% solution of nins,starches,gums,hemicelluloses, to as high as 0.0055 inch. (17) magnesium methoxide in methylal- polysaccharides, hexoses, pentoses, n pattern. The code designation of a cohol. In this process the magnesium uronic acids, organic acids, including book cloth finished so as to resemble methoxide is converted by the moisture lactic and acetic, together with their the grain pattern of sealskin leather. in the paper into magnesium hydroxide salts,inorganicsalts,proteinsand numbering. The process of printing or (Mg(0H2), which is the effective de- zymoproteins (enzymes), if the ts..m- stampingfiguresinconsecutiveor acidifyingagent.Excess magnesium peratureisnot too high, as well as other order, on sheets, leaves of a book, hydroxide is converted into magnesium coloring matters such as brasilin, fisetin, or the spines of bound volumes. Num- carbonate (MgCO3) by the action of and quercetin. (248, 291, 306, 363) bering in this context is one of the carbon dioxide in the atmosphere. The non-woody fibrous ma(erial. Vegetable processes of stationery binding, prin- final pH is approximately 8.5 to 9.0. and synthetic materials used inthe cipally that of blankbooks and manifold See also:ALKALINE RESERVE; DEACIDI- manufacture of paper and board. Of books, including check books. Blank- FICATION; DOUBLE DECOMPOSITION; the many such materials, both organic books areusually numbered subse- VAPOR-PHASE DEACIDIFICATION. (198, and inorganic, the most important to- quent to sewing and trimming. Where 366) dayarecotton,esparto,linenand every page contains a separate record, non-commingled. A term used with refer- straw. For a number of reasons the the pages are numbered consecutively ence to the transportation of unbound types of fiber which have proved com- throughout the book and the book is or bound books by a library or binder merciallyworthwhilearesomewhat said to be "paged." Where facing pages on an unmixed, orseparatebasis. limited, and have become even more are used for the record, the two pages Binderies which do not operate their so as the size and productive capacity are numbered as one and the book is own trucks, but rely instead on a com- of papermaking mills have increased. said to be "folioed." mon carrier, may be instructed by the Among the qualifications which satis- Numbering bound booksis more library to ship the library's books on factory materials must possess are: 1) difficultthan numbering sheets, and a separate basis, that is, not together sufficient fiber length to provide the may be done by machine only where with other materials not destined for desired strength in the paper; 2) ready the figures are to be located at the top or owned by the library. reducibilitytothefiberform,and corner of the leaves. If the numbers non-curling gum. An adhesive used for separationfromaccompanyingim- must be located elsewhere, the book is PADDING work, consisting of gum arabic purities and ingredients which might numbered before binding. Numbering dissolvedin water and mixed with he harmful to the paper; 3) availability before binding may be done either as a small quantities of glycerin and honey. in very large nyantities and within a separate operation in the bindery after nonpareil marble. A marble pattern con- reasonable dis Ince from the mill; 4) the sheAs have been ruled or printed, sisting or red, black, yellow, blue, and no, too great bulk per unit of fiber or on the printing press by means of buff, executed on a size of gum traga- produced; and 5) low cost per ton of a numbering machine in the form, a canth. The red is dropped first so as fiber produced. (324) process called "numbering at press." to cover the entire surface of the size, non-woven covering materials. 1.See: Sheets on which the same number followed by the black, yellow, blue, LEATHER. 2.Naturalandsynthetic appearS two, three,, or more times are and buff. A peg rake the length of the materials used in the manufacture of described as doUble-numbered, triple- troughis drawn across the surface, covering materials for books. They in- numbered, etc., while sheets on which followed by a fine comb drawn from left clude granulated leathers and paper the same number repeats on more than to right across the width of the trough. fibers bonded with latex, impregnated one sheet are described as being num- The paper is then laid on. The reversed paperfibers, matted polyethylene bered in duplicate, triplicate, etc. nonpareil is executed in the same man- fibers, and tly: like. 3. A clothlike ma- Numbering machines may be de- ner except that the comb is drawn terial composed of paper fibers longer signed to impress the same number from left to right and then back again. than those normally used in papermak- over and over, consecutive numbers, The nonpareil marble represents a ing,but which are not woven but or, in the case of the skip-wheel num- revival of the early comb pattern. It matted by felting on a fine mesh screen bering machine, may omit numbers as came into use in about 1838 and was from a suspension of-water or air, and desired. (264, 320) used throughout the middle of the 19th with or without binders. (17, 220) nylon. Synthetic materials developed by century for endpapers and later for normal moistureSee:AIR DRY. E. I. du Pont de Nemours & Company rover papers on all classes of stationery nose. A term sometimes applied to the in 1938, consisting of polyamides pre- bindings.It was also used for edge point at either side of the top of a pared from a dicarboxylic acid and marbling from about 1840 to the 1920s text block caused by the head being a diamine, or from omega-amino acid when edge marbling virtually went out knocked up out of square. (97) or its lactone, that can be formed from of existence. Nonpareil marbles were novel paper. A class of paper once used a melt or solution in fibers,fabrics, lessartisticthan theearlier combs, extensively inthe production of so- filaments, or sheets. and, although executed by hand, suf- called pulp magazines, and now popu- Soluble nylon is a chemically modi-

198 nylon size 178 nylon thread

fied form of nylon produced by treat- in which case it is applied by heat. It and as a fixative for water colors and ing nylon with formaldehyde.Itis is also used in resizing paper.See also: manuscript inks when paper is being solubleinalcohol,oralcohol and NYLON SIZE; SEWING THREAD.(198, bleached or subjected to other aqueous water, and is particularly useful when 235) treatment.See also:SIZING; RESIZING. flexibility and penetration are required, nylon size. A size for paper prepared (237) as in an adhesive. Soluble nylon film from soluble nylon dissolved in an in- nylon thread. See: SEWING THREAD. is used in archival restoration as an dustrial methylated spirit. A 2% solu- adhesive backing for fragile documents, tion is used for sizing very weak paper, oak 179 oil of neroli

oak (oak bark: oak wood). The bark and occur during printing, in the printing wood, principally the former, of sev- warehouse storage area, during folding eral species of Quercus, including the of the sheets, or during binding (press- pedunculate oak (Q. robur) and ses- ing) before the ink is completely dry. sile oak (Q. petraea) in England and Offsetting from illustrative matter onto Europe; the evergreen oak (Q. cerris), text matter is probably more common wooly oak (Q. pubescens) and kermes than that from text sheet to text sheet. oak (Q. coccifera) in Europe; and the Also frequentlycalled "rub off"or white oak (Q. alba), chestnut oak (Q. "set off." See also: BARRIER SHEET. 3. prinus), tanbark oak (Q.densiflora), The result of undried ink or excess ink and black oak (Q.kelloggi)inthe a accumulating on some partofthe United States. As the bark has a much printing press after the paper leaves higher tannin content than the wood, the impression cylinder. This inkis generally onlyitis used for tannin quality binder's board. See also: MILL- transferred to the paper at the second extraction, but at times both the heart- BOARD (1); TAR BOARD. (65) impression and, if the registrationis wood and bark are utilized. oasis (oasis goat). A trade name for a not absolutely accurate, the offset will Oak bark is not as high in tannin second quality NIGER goatskin tanned give a shaded edge effect to the print. content as many other materials, and and processed in England.Ithas a See also: DOUBLING. (17, 69, 316) its use, which has extended over many smoother surface than the usual goat- offset ink. An ink used for offset lith- centuries, has been due more toits skin. ography. Such an inkisvery finely ready availability than to any other oblique corners. A half-leather binding ground, free from water soluble par- factor. A high quality oak bark will with corners at an angle other than ticles, and contains only lithographic contain 12 to 14% tannin, while old 45°. Oblique corners are usually asso- varnish or certain lacquers as the bind- oak heartwood will contain 6 to 9%. ciated with oblong books. (86, 234) ing medium. Itis necessary that the Despite its relatively low tannin con- oblong. A book of a width greater than ink be insensitive to sulfur, s;lce this tent, oak bark was at one time used its height. This can result from fold- is one of the ingredients of the rubber extensivelyinthemanufactureof ing a sheet of paper across the long printing rollers.(140) some very fine leathers, especially in way, i.e., halving the short side, or by offset paper. A printing paper designed England. In fact, the English leathers putting together a THIRTY-SIXMO gath- for use in offset lithography. The offset of the past, which were known through- ering. Also called"cabinet size"or printing process is based on the antip- out the world for their high quality, "landscape." (12) athy of grease (ink) for water, con- were produced largely by means of octavo. The book sizeresulting from sequently offset paper must be free high quality stock and a long, slow, folding a sheet of paper with three from excess water soluble chemicals oak tannage. Slowness of penetration, right angle folds, thus producing a leaf and particularly surface active agents. however, along with declining avail- one-eighth the size of the sheet and The paper, which may be coated or ability, are important reasons why its forming a 16-page section. To define uncoated, is produced in basis weights use is not nearly so extensive as in the fully,the paper sizemust alsobe of 50 to 150 pounds (25 X 38 500). past. stated. The typical book paper, for ex- Uncoated offset paper may be used for Oak tannin is a combination of the ample, which is 25 by 38 inches, will periodicals, brochures,etc.,and for pyrogallol and condensed tannins, in give an untrimmed book size of 121/2 single or multi-color work. (52, 58, the ratio of one to two, but the real by 91/2 inches. Also called 8vo or 80. 182) nature of the tannin is still somewhat octodecimo. See: EIGHTEEN-MO. oiling off. The process of coating the obscure. The tanning has a medium Offal. The leathertrade termfor the grain surface of a wet leather with oil pH and moderate salts and acid con- shoulders, bellies, cheeks, face, or tail before drying. tent.See also: VEGETABLE TANNINS. rounded from the choicer parts of a oil of egg. A leather dressing obtained by (175, 306) cowhide. oak-barktanned. A lightweight,un- extracting egg yolks withetheror off and on. See: TWO ON. chloroform. When oil of egg is used, bleached, bark-tanned leather, which offset.1. A printing process which in- it is usually followed by a dressing of is defined as having been pit-tanned, volvesthetransferralof the image without hot-pitting, for not less than from a litho stone or a plate to a beeswax to impart a polished surface. 5 to 6 months. The process involves rubber-covered cylinder, which is then Oil of egg is seldom used today as the layering the skins for not less than 6 offset by pressure onto the paper. The sole ingredient of a leather dressing, months, with OAK bark being used as image area of the plate is receptive to although LEATHER DRESSINGS making the basis for tannage. (61) ink, whereas the balance of the plate use of itarestillused to a limited oakum board. A loosely twisted fiber, is water receptive. 2. The inadvertent extent. (218) usually of hemp or jute, impregnated transfer of (printing) ink from one oil of neroli. A fragrant, pale yellow es- with tar and used up until about the printed sheet or illustration to another sential oil obtained by steam distilla- Second World War to produce a better sheet.Offsetting of thisnature may tion from fresh blossoms of Citrus

2 oil tanning 180 ooze

aurantium,and at one time used to pattern than rtually any other mar- application of a hot-melt adhesive is perfume books (152) ble, the Old 1 itch has been used since applied to the spine of each book, in oil tanning. A "tannage" which involves about the miudle of the 17th century. distinction to the application of both the incorporation offishor marine The marble is executed on a size of hot and cold adhesives. The one-shot mammaloilsintoinnersplitsor GUM TRAGACANTH.See also:DUTCH method is extremely rapid, as the ad- frizzed-grainskins,usuallywooled MARBLE. (217, 269) hesive begins to set almost as soon as sheepskins. The tanning agent is gen- oleic acid. A colorless liquid (C1,H3402), it is removed from the source of heat erally raw cod liver oil, which, subse- soluble in alcohol and ether, but in- and has practically fully set within a quent to being incorporated into the soluble in water. It occurs naturally in matter of seconds, depending on the skin, is induced to undergo oxidation greater quantities than any other fatty type of adhesive used. This allows the and other chemical changes while in acid, being presentas glycerides in booktohehandled and trimmed contact with the fibers, leading to a most fats and oils. It is used in deter- straight from the adhesive binding ma- chemical combination of oilderiva- mining the oil penetrability resistance chine.Problemsdevelop,however, tives with the fibers. The liberation of of book cloths,especially buckram. when the one-shot method is used in heat accompanies and speeds up these (209) binding heavily coated or loaded pa- chemical reactions; however, thereis one-letter index. An INDEX consisting of pers, because ifallof the coating or the danger of the oiled skins being 24, 26, or (rarely) 27 divisions for loading dust is not removed from the heated to the point where they may the letters of the alphabet. The 24- paper, the adhesive may not adhere smoulder or even burn. Cod liver oil division index generally omits the let- welltotheleaves.2. A colloquial is not readily taken up by the skins; ter X and either omits I or combines term for the plocess of deacidifying therefore, for the success of this proc- it with J; the 26-division index includes paper through the use of one alkaline ess, itis essential to bring the oil into all the letters, or adds Mac and omits solution,as opposed to methods re- the closest possible contact with the X; while the 27-division index includes quiring the use of double treatments. fibers; this is accomplished by vigorous X along withMac. See also:TWO-LET- See also:ADHESIVE BINDING; DEACIDI- mechanical action. Oil tanning is used TER INDEX. (264) FICATION; DOUBLE DECOMPOSITION; principallyinthemanufactureof one on.See:ALL ALONG. HOT-MELT ADHESIVE; TWO-SHOT METH- . At one time it was one on and one off. One of the simplest OD. (294) referred to as "chamoising." (248, 291, forms of the HOLLOW, consisting of a onion skin. A durable lightweight paper 306, 363) stripofpaper,linen,jaconet,etc., that is thin and usually nearly trans- old Dutch marble. A comb marble pat- twice the width of the spine of the parentso called because ofitsre- tern executed by placing the colors on book, one half of which is glued to semblance to the dry outer skin of an the size in a particular sequence and the spine, the other half being folded onion. It is used for making duplicate manner. The four colors, red, yellow, over the first and glued to it only along copies of typewritten material, perma- green, and blue, are placed in a series the edge. The one on and one off nent records where low bulk is im- of small pots which are set in a frame method does not give fully adequate portant, and for airmail correspond- so that they stand in a row about 3 support to the spine in most cases, but ence.Itisproducedentirelyfrom inches apart from center to center. The it is useful when fastening a book back cotton fibers, bleached chemical wood total number of pots of color is de- intoatightclothcase.Additional pulps, or combinations of these. The termined by the length of the rake, strength may be gained by folding the fibers of the paper are long and the which must be as long as the trough paper across the grain.See also:ONE paperissized with rosin, starch or is wide. Two rakes are used in the ON AND TWO OFF; TWO ON AND ONE glue;itis usually supercalendered or execution of this marble; the first takes OFF. (339) plated to a high finish, or is given a up the colors so they may be dropped one on and two off. A method of con- cockle finish. Basis weights range from on the size with precision, while the structing a tube fora HOLLOW, in 7 to 10 pounds (17 )< 22 500).See second is used to put the Chinese white which a strip of paper, linen, cambric, also:MANIFOLD PAPER. (17, 316) on the size. The red is dropped first, etc., three times the width of the spine onlay. A method of decorating a leather and the second rake is then dipped in of the book is cut, the middle width binding by means of thin, variously the Chinese white and lowered onto of which is glued to the spine, the two coiored pieces of leather, usually of a the surface of the size, each peg of the end widths being folded over the mid- differentcolorthanthecovering rake dropping a spot of the white onto dle and glued to each other. This leather, which are attached by means the red, which has already spread out. method is generally superior to ONE of paste or P.V.A. to the surface of the The points of the first rake are then ON AND ONE OFF, and, although it does covering leather, thus giving it a kind dipped into the pots of color and then not offer adequate support to the spine ofmosaiceffect.Thepiecesof placed on the surface of the size so of a large book,itisadequate for leather are usually, but not necessarily, that a single drop of color is placed some light,thin volumes, depending of the same type of leather as that cov- as near the center of the white spots upon the weight of the paper.See also: ering the book. The onlay was cer- as possible. A stylusisthen drawn TWO ON AND ONE OFF. (236, 335) tainly in use in England by the 17th through the center of the colors from one piece cover. A term used in edition century and was also a technique occa- front to back of the trough, followed binding to indicate a book completely sionally adapted to publisher's cloth by a fine or coarse comb which is covered in one type and color fabric bindings between 1840 and 1860, with drawn through the colors from left to only. (329) onlays sometimes made of paper.Cf: right, causing the pattern to form with one sheet on.See:ALL ALONG. INLAY (4), for which the onlay is often well distributed colors in even scales one-shot method. 1. The trade name for mistaken. (69, 236, 335) of red, white, yellow, green, and blue. a method of applying adhesive in high- ooze. An obsolete term for the vegetable Although probably a more mechanical speed paperback binding, in whichone tanning liquor used in converting hides ooze leather 181 organic pigments

and skinsinto leather.Also called on the adherend and the completion together than the NN, in the relative WOOZE.(Seealso:VEGETABLE TAN- of the assembly of the parts for bond- NING.) distance of 1to 11/2 to 2 spaces ing. In general, the use of paste and optimum binding method. An expression ooze leather (oozecalf).Originally,a glue allows a greater assembly time leather sometimes applied to the method used produced fromcalfskinby than does theuse of thepolyvinyl to secure the leaves or sections of a forcing OOZE through the skin by me- adhesives.See also:AssEMBLY TIME; book,e.g.,fold sewing, oversewing, chanical means, producing a soft, finely CLOSED ASSEMBLY TIME. (309) adhesivebinding,sidesewing,etc., grained finish like velvet or suede on opened. A book which has not had the which will offer the best (optimum) the flesh side. The term is also used bolts cut during the binding process binding for a given book in terms of incorrectly with reference to sheep- hut which has had the leaves separated usability, skin. Today, ooze leather includingopenahilityand isa vege- with a paper knife, or other instru- durability (strength and longevity). It table- or chrome-tanned skin of bovine ment.Cf:UNOPENED. isconcededthatthereisno one origin, generally calfskin, witha very opening boards. The operation in hand method which can satisfy all require- soft, glovelike feel and a natural grain, binding of opening the hoards of ments for all books. whichissometimes accentuated by a HOARDING (1). (61, 363) book when theleather coveringis orderbook style. A style of blankhook well set but not completely dry. As bindinginwhichthe hook hasa opacimeter. An instrument used tomeas- ure opacity. It each board is opened itis pressed to- leatherspine and roundedcorners, is,in effect, a reflec- ward the joint, both being pressed at canvas sides, ink blocking on the sides, tometer designed especially to measure the opacity of paper. The reflectance the same time so that the boards will and gold blocking on the spine. (256) of the sheet is open just at the top of the shoulders. ordinary book-volume. A book defined first measured using a by the Library Binding Institute to be black background and then witha opening up. The process of "opening"a newly bound book (other than an edi- an ordinary-sized graphic work con- standard white background behind it. sisting of an appreciable number of The instrument can be designedto tion binding), in order to improve its give the ratio of the two measurements flexibility. The usual method is to hold leaves or sections produced originally directly. (93) the book fore edge up, then by regular, as a unit and submitted for binding, rebinding, or prebinding as sucha unit opacity. That propertyofamaterial uniform motions, a few leaves at a which restricts the passage of light and time, pressing the leaves down, first at and not requiring special handling. An thus prevents one from seeing through the front, then at back, and thenre- ordinary book-volume ranges in height it or seeing objects onor in contact peating, until the center of the book from approximately 6 to 12 inches, a has been reached. "Opening up" helps proportional width and a thickness not with the reverse side. Opacity is ofcon- exceeding 2 inches. (209) siderable importance in paper that is avert strain on the binding and also to be used for printing. In printing permits freer opening of the book.See ordinary periodical-vohime. A (periodi- also:BREAK ( 1 ).( 127 ) cal) volume defined by the Library papers opacity is measured in percent- Binding Institute ages,e.g.,a lightweight bond paper open joint.See:FRENCH JOINT. to heaseriesof multi-leaved,like-constituted, may have an opacity as low as 79%, open warbles.See:WARBLES. serially numbered graphic units submitted for i.e., 21% of the light that strikesit opisthograph. An ancient manuscript in- binding or rebinding into a scheduled passes through, while a 24-pound bond scribed or written on both sides of the multi-unit volume and not requiring paper of high opacity may rate a per- leaves. The term was also applied to special handling. An ordinary periodi- centage of 93, meaning that only 7% early printed books bearing letterpress cal volume ranges in height from about of thelightpenetratesit.Different on both sides of the leaves. (156, 192) opacities may he obtained by: 1) vary- 8 to 16 inches, a proportional width optical spacing.1. The spacing of the and athickness not exceeding 21/2 ing the paper pulp; 2) varying the de- raised hands on the spine of a hook gree of hydration; or 3) using loading inches.( 209 ) in such a manner that the bottom panel organic acids. The class of acids, suchas materials and special opacifying agents. is slightly larger (the amount depend- (17, 350) acetic,formic,lactic.oxalic,tannic, ing on the size of the book) than the etc., which are usually found in living opaque. The property of being impervi- other panels, so as to give the spine a ous to light, i.e., non-transparent. organisms or which can be made from See: balanced appearance. If the bands were them. These acids are characterized by OPACITY. so spaced that all of the panels were being openability.That relativelyvolatileand weak, characteristicofa infactthe samesize,thelowest consequently they are considered to he bound book which allows the leaves to (bottom) panel would appear to be less lie harmfultoarchivalmaterials, relativelyflat when the book is much smaller. The bottom panel usu- especially paper and leather, than the open, with no weight or pressure ap- allyhasthedate,orextra(and more powerful inorganic acids; how- plied(especiallyalongthebinding different) tooling of some nature, at ever, they can he very destructive if edge). Openahility depends to a cer- the very tail of the spine, and the size allowedtoremainincontact with tain degree on the size of the book, of the panel above this tooling is the leather or paper, especially the latter. and to a considerable degree on the same as the panels above it.2. The for long periods of time. weight and thickness of the paper, its spacing of the lettering on the spine organic pigments. Originally, grain directioninthe book (which pigments of a book in such a manner as to make obtained from vegetable or animalma- should he parallel to the spine), the all of the letters of a word appear as terials, as distinguished from the in- method of sewing, and theoverall though theyarethe same distance organic pigments obtained from min- quality and structure of the binding. apart. In the combinations oo, ot. and erals. Cf: More recently,however,pig- LYING FLAT. NN, for example, the oo combination ments have been classed as organic if open assembly time. The time interval would be spaced closer together than they contain the element carbon in between the spreading of an adhesive the of., which in turn would he closer their composition. Most modernor-

2 9 2 oriental leaf 182 oversewing

ganic pigments are prepared syntheti- overbands. See: BANDS (2). strength. It is usually assumed that the cally from coal-tar derivatives, such as overcastclothjoint. A reinforcement term applies to paper which is dried phthalocyanine blue, alizarin crimson, used to strengthen the attachment of excessively during manufacture, but it and the lakes produced from synthetic the cover to a text block. One side of may also be applied topaper,i.e., dyes. (233) a strip of cloth is sewn to the shoulder books, documents, etc., stored in an oriental leaf. A type of imitation GOLD of the text block and the other side is excessively dry (and usually very hot) LEAF composed of brass and bronze. pasted to the inside of the board. (237) environment. The expression "brittle- See also: DUTCH GOLD. (169) overcasting. A method of hand sewing in ness" is appropriate here even though original binding (original boards). The whichgroupsofsinglesheetsare in a strict sense brittleness refers to a binding of a book which has been sewn together using a single length of breakdown of the cellulose linkages in bound only once, or, in edition binding, thread which passes through the paper a paper, generally as a result of chemi- the earliest of several bindings used and over the back edges of the leaves. cal degradation. (72) for a particular edition of a book. Overcasting is sometimes used when oversewing. A method of sewing the orihon.1. A strip of paper, papyrus or sewinga book made up ofsingle leaves of a book by hand or machine, vellum accordian folded so that writ- sheets,the"sections"createdbeing almost always the latter in library bind- ing or printing, which appears on only sewn flexibly. It is also a method used ing. The sewing thread passes through one side, is formed into pages or col- by library binders when attaching new the edges of each "section," in consecu- umns. The resulting "book"isthen endpapers to a book being recased, or tiveorder,using pre-punched holes secured by cord passed through holes to reinforce the first and last sections through which the sewing needles pass. punched along the length of the bind- of a book being rebound without re- The oversewing process generally en- ing edge. Covers were also at times sewing. tails the removal of the original spine laced on. Single sheets, folded but also Overcasting is a strong form of sew- lining cloth, glue, original sewing, and uncut, were also at times treated in ing,butitresultsinconsiderable the folds of the sections, which is usu- this manner. 2. A "stabbed" binding strain on theleaves and frequently ally accomplished by planing, grind- of Oriental origin. See: JAPANESE SEW- cuts the paper, partly because of the ing, sawing, or cutting the spine of the ING. (156, 370) diagonal at which the thread passes book, thus removing an eighth of an ornamental inside lining. See: DOUBLURE. through the paper. In addition, when inch or more of the binding margin. ounce. A measurement of the thickness groups of leaves are overcast and then Sometimes the spine is first nipped to of leather, one ounce being equal to sewn on cords or tapes, unsightly gaps remove the original backing shoulders 1/64 inch.Originally,it meant the are seen between the "sections." (84) before the folds are removed. The book, thickness of 1 square foot of finished overcharged. A leather or other binding havingbeenreducedtoindividual leather that weighed 1 ounce avoirdu- having too much ornamentation, usu- leaves, is then jogged, and a very light pois.See also: LEATHER SUBSTANCE ally gilt, giving the entire decoration a coat of glue is applied along the binding TABLE. (325, 363) crowded and overburdened appearance. edge to hold the leaves together tempor- outer joint. The grooves in the covering (203) arily. A number of leaves, or a "sec- materialat which the boards open. overdfied. Paper which has been dried to tion." between 0.055 and 0.065 inch in Also called (outer) hinge. The term the point of brittleness and loss of thickness (depending upon the thick- "joint"is sometimes used to indicate the ridge or abutment formed by the backing operation to accommodate the OVERCASTING boards; however, thisridgeis more appropriatelyreferred to as the SHOULDER(S) (1) of the book. See also: FRENCH JOINT. (237) outof boards. A bookthatiscut (trimmed) before the boards are se- cured to the text block. It is an abbre- viation of "cut out of boards." Cf: IN BOARDS. (335) out of register. An imperfect REGISTER (3), meaning that the two sides of a printed sheet do not back each other perfectly, or the impression is not in correct position in relation to the other matter already ruled or printed on the sheet. See also: FOLD TO PRINT. (365) outsert. An additional folio placed around the outside of a section. outside margin. See: FORE-EDGE MARGIN. ovals, in. An oval arabesque centerpiece decoration blocked or tooled on both covers of a book. This was a popular method of decoration of the late 16th andearly17thcenturies,and was executed in both gilt and blind. (156) oversize 183 oxycelluloses

ness of the paper) is then sewn, either a cracky, distorted (drawn) grain. See that Oxford binders were the firstto b,' hand, or, more commonly, in an also: CASEHARDENING. (306) use it, namely for leather-bound Bibles. oversewing machine. The thread passes overweight kip. A cattle hide weighing Itis actually a ONE ON AND ONE OFF through the section perpendicular to the from 25 to 30 pounds in the green. hollow. (140) plane of the paper (Holloway method) salted state. Oxford style. See: DIVINITY CALF (1 ). or obliquely. This later, diagonal meth- ownership mark. A bookplate,rubber ox-gall. The bile obtainPd from the gall od, k known as the CHIVERS method. stamp,label,perforation,orother which bladder of a bovine animal, usually a is employedinoversewing means of marking the ownership of a domesticated cow. It consists of a ropy. machines. Altogether, about 51e; or nin book. (156) mucous, semi-transparentliquid, and inch of the binding margin is consumed oxalic acid. A dibasic, highly toxic acid by the process. contains sodium salts of taurocholic and (H.2C..04). soluble in water and alcohol. glycocholic acids, cholesterol, lecithin. Hand oversewing was in common and slightly soluble in ether. It occurs etc. Ox-gall is used as the expanding use by the end of the 18th century and as the free acid in beet leaves, and as and binding medium forthe colors the beginning of the 19th. particularly potassium hydrogen oxalate in wood used in MARBLING. Itis necessary in for large books and those with loose sorrelandrhubarb.Commercially, all marbling, and itis important that plates. The oversewing machine, which oxalic acidisprepared from sodium it be pure and free from water. When was invented and perfected in the first formate (HCO..Na). It can also be ob- inits original stateitis yellowish or quarter of the 20th century. is the prin- tained as a byproduct in the manufac- greenish brown, but becomes clear and cipalsewing machine employed by ture of citric acid and by the oxidation dark brown when allowed to settle. library binders inthe United States. ofcarbohydrateswithnitricacid The liquid is then drawn off and mixed (22. 236. 255) (HNO,;) in the presence of vanadium with alcohol. Its effect on the colors is oversize. 1. A hook which is too large to pentoxide (V00:-,). It is used by some to make them spread out in large flat he shelved in normal sequence in the bookbinders to clear the leather before rings when they are dropped on the bookstack. In the United States, hooks applying paste for tooling. It must be size. Ox-gall is also used in engraving over 30 cm. (11.81 inches) are gen- applied in very dilute solution, other- and lithography. (217, 264, 369) wise erallyincludedinthiscategory.2. itwill bleach the leather.Itis ox hide. Leather made from the hides of Paper made to allow for trimming to also used in the manufacture of dye- domestic cattle. See: COWHIDE. the size offered. stuffsfor cloth,inbleaching cotton oxidization. The chemicalreactionin linters, and in the manufacture of ink. which a material combines with oxygen overstitching. See: OVERCASTING. Potassium hydrogen oxalateis some- to form an oxide,i.e.,thepositive over-tanned. A condition in which the times used to remove ink stains from valence of the material increases. Oxi- grain and flesh sides of a hide or skin paper. (152. 195) dization results in the deterioration of have received an excess of tannin in Oxford corners. Border lines that cross adhesive due to atmospheric expo- relation to the interior, or corium. of and project beyond each other, ls on sure, to the breakdown of a hot-melt the skin. It results from the grain and titlepagesand(sometimes)book adhesive because of prolonged heating. flesh sides being exposal to a strong covers. (SI, 156) and to the deterioration of paper due to tannin liquor and becoming over-tanned Oxford hollow. A particular form of the an excessive amount of alkali which while the corium has had insufficient HOLLOW consistingof a simpleflat results in an excessively high pH. See exposure. The problem can be avoided paper tube which is glued to the spine also: HYDROGENION CONCENTRATION, by using weaker liquors initially, and of the text block on one side. and to oxycelluloses. A degraded form of cellu- building to stronger solutions as tan- the inside of the spine of the covers, lose produced by oxidation. Oxycellu- ningprogresses.Over tanningpro- leaving a hollow opening between. The loses vary in chemical nature according duces a hard, thin leather, often with term presumably derives from the fact to the oxidation agent used. (17, 72)

2 Pab los, Juan 184 Padeloup, Antoine Michel a

Pab los, Juan. An Italian printer (Gio- edges, leaving either of two edges, one vanni Paoli), appointed by Juan Corn- long and one short, available for PAD- berger, the leading printer of Seville, DING (2). to serve as compositor and manager of padding compound. A liquid adhesive, a printing establishment inMexico. usually consisting of gum arabic plas- Pablos thus became the first known ticized with glycerin, glycol, or sorbitol, printer in the Western Hemisphere. The and used in PADDING (2) work. (142, first book issued by the press, of which 269) there is any definite record, was dated paddle dyeing. A method employed in 1539, the same year the press was es- dyeing the more fragile leathers, includ- tablished. Records do not indicate that ing bookbinding leathers, skivers, etc., any bookbinder was associated with the that might otherwise be damaged by press; therefore it is possible that Pab- thes igorousmechanicalactionin- los himself did the binding. the adjustable blade is slid into the pile, volved in drum dyeing. Paddle dyeing Some anthorities contend that print- the counter will pick up approximately requires considerably higher ratios of ing in the Western Hemisphere began the number of sheets desired. See also: dye solution to weight of leather than even before 1539. Early Mexican rec- CHECK PILE. (74, 164) are used in drum dyeing, and utilizes ords mention a printer by the name of padded boards (padded leather; padded the dyes less effectively; however,it Estaban Martin, but there is no record sides.) A book which has boards padded does havetheadvantagethatthe of anything he may have printed. An with cotton batting, blotting paper, or leather is visible during dyeing and ad- early letter from the Archbishop to the other compressible material, so that justments to shade and strength can be King of Spain, however, would seem to they are thicker than normal boards, made continuously. (248) indicate that attempts were made to especially toward the center, and are Padeloup, Antoine Michel (1685-1758). establish a press before Pablos arrived soft to the touch. Such boards are gen- A French bookbinder who was prob- in Mexico. (235) erally covered in genuine or imitation ably the outstanding craftsman of a packing. See STUFFING (1). leather, and are used for diaries, pre- distinguished family that was associ- packthread. A strong thread or small sentation books, and the like. (264) ated with the craft for more than 150 twine over which the PURL was sewn padding. 1. The blank leaves added at the years. Padeloup was apprenticed to his on embroidered bindings. end of a thin publication so as to form father,Michel(c1654-1725), and pad. A number of sheets of paper (printed, a volume with sufficient thickness to probably became a master bookbinder ruled, or blank), generally backed with be rounded and backed and/or to be in about 1712. More commonly known thin board, secured at one edge (fre- lettered on the spine. Unfortunately, as Padeloupe "le jeune," he was ap- quently the top) with a padding com- the paper used for this purpose is usu- pointed royal binder to Louis XV in pound, and sometimes reinforced with ally of an inferior qualitY, and becomes 1733, succeeding Luc Antoine Boyet. a cloth or other type of lining. See also: embrittled and transfers its acidity to Padeloup was esteemed both for the PADDING (2). (264) the leaves of thepublication. Also solidity of his forwarding and the em- pad counter. 1. A simple type of gauge called "filler," or "filling." 2. A method bellishment of his bindings. He had an used to divide the leaves of a book of securing ruled,printed or blank eclectic taste and most of his bindings into "sections" of the appropriate thick- leaves by the application of a padding displayed several diverse styles of orna- ness for oversewing. Two gauges are compound, and sometimes a cloth or mentation mingled together. Padeloup generally used, one to divide the leaves other reinforcing liner,to one edge often decorated his books with DEN- Into sections 0.055 inch in thickness, (frequently thetop)of thesheets TELLE (lace-work) borders, and has the other to divide bulkier paper into which have been jogged even on the even been credited by some with the sections 0.065 inch thick. 2. A device binding edge and placed under pres- introduction of this border, although consisting of two flat blades, one of sure. Special padding troughs, clamps there is no real proof of nis. He also which isadjustable to any distance and presses are used to facilitate pad- executed, but with less success, several from the other, and used to determine.ding large quantities at one time. See bindings with onlaid work in different the number of sheets in a pad. The also: PAD COUNTER (2); PADDING COM- colored leathers. Although these mo- number of sheets wanted in each pad POUND. 3. A method of applying dye- saics were well executed, the tilelike of a production run is counted out (five stuff to the grain surface of a leather design of many of them is considered extra sheets being added to allow for a or tawed skin, particularly the latter, in by some authorities to be too feeble. snug fit when setting the gauge). The cases where it is not feasible to immerse He is also credited with the introduc- counted pile is placed between the two the skins in the dyestuff liquor because tion of the "repetition" design. Some blades and the movable blade is tight- of the increased fullness and decreased of Padeloup's bindings are in imitation ened, following which the five extra stretch which willresult from such of the work of FLORIMOND DADIER, sheets are removed. If the fixed blade immersion. (179, 196, 234, 291) sometimes repeating the silver-threaded is placed directly on top of the pile of padding damp. A compressiontable headbands of that period. Padeloup stock and firm pressure is applied as clamp designed to secure pads on two was also one of the first binders to 185

An 18th century binding with dentelle borders by Antoine Michel Padeloup. Dente Ile borders are sometimes called Derome style after the work of Nicolas Derome. This binding is onLes Amours Pastorales de Daphnis et Chloe,by Longus, printed by Quillau, Paris, 1718. (17.2 cm. by 11.5cm. by 2.3 cm.)

20,0G page 186 palm leaf book

"sign" his bindings, by means of a pagination. A system of numerals or other the parchment in this manner softened ticket bearing his name and address. characters, or a combination thereof, it to such an extent that it was neces- (109, 342, 347) assigned to the pages of a book or sary to treat the skin with dry lime to page. One side of a leaf, whether blank manuscripttoindicatetheirorder. make it dry and white once again. The or containing letterpressor writing, Numbering of the leaves of both manu- word "palimpsest" derives from the and regardless of sequential arrange- scripts and printed books beganin Greek roots meaning "rub away again " ment. about 1470, and by 1480 the practice Also called "rescript." (143) page flex test. A binding endurance test had become general. Page numbering, palladium leaf. A silver-white, moderately designed to determine the number of however, was comparatively rare until ductile, malleable metal (Pd) of the times a leaf of a bound book can be 1500, and did not become general until platinum group. It can be beaten into flexed under light tension before it be- 1590. See also: FOLIATION (3). leaf form, although not as thin as gold comes detached from the book. The "painted" bindings ("painted" leather). 1. leaf, for use in lettering and decorating book is placed open on a flat plate, A late 17th and early 18th century books. It is suitable for use alone or in with both covers flat on the surface. A method of ornamenting thecovers combinations with gold leaf. Although single leaf is selected and held in a ver- ofbooks,consistingoflandscapes itis somewhat duller than silver and ticalposition,whiletheremaining "painted" with a chemical (possibly an has a slightly leaden quality, unlike leaves on either side are clamped down. iron salt, e.g., ferrous sulfate) on the silver, it does not tarnish under normal The vertical leaf is passed between two cover or covers. The paintings were circumstances. (130, 233) bars approximately 3/16 inch in dia- usuallyexecutedonfawn-colored pallet. 1. A finishing tool having a long meter, 1/4 inch apart, and longer than leathers that had been paste-washed. narrow face bearing a line or design, the leaf, and positioned at a fixed dis- See also: EDWARDS OF HALIFAX.2. and used for decorating books, usually t nce of 2 inches above the gutter of Leather and vellum bindings of the mid those bound inleather.Straight-line the book. A clamp is attached to the andlate16th c-mtury, which were pallets are available in various lengths, leaf to hold it in a vertical position, as tooled and painted in various colors, and a complete set, used for building well as to exert an upward force of 3 including gold,silver,green, purple, designs, ranges from 1/16 inch to a to 5 pounds. The bars on either side of red, etc. (124, 236, 347) maximum of 2, 3, 4, or more inches, the leaf are moved back and forth a painted edges. See: FORE-EDGE PAINTING. increasing (in very complete sets) by distance of 31/2 inches, causing the leaf painted papers. Decorative cover papers as little as 1/16 inch at a time. Pallets to flex at an angle of 45° to either side or endpapers produced by painting de- are generally used to impress lines on of the vertical, or a total of 90°. The signs directly onto the paper, either the spines of books, although they are flexing is at the rate of 88 per minute, freestyle or in a controlled and organ- also used on the covers, especially to and the test continues until failure of ized plan. Paint alone, or paint mixed finish off lines impressed with fillets, or the leaf, or a maximum of 1,000 flexes. with black or colored inks, is generally other tools. Very short pallets are usu- To accelerate thetest,the upward used in the execution of these papers. ally referred to as "short-line pallets" force exerted on the leaf can be in- pale. Sixteen karat gold leaf. Because of or, occasionally, as "short-line tools." creased. the alloys used to reduce the gold from The edge of the pallet is made very page pull teA. A binding endurance test 24 to 16 karat, "pale" leaf is much slightly convex in order to avoid cut- designed to determine the force re- lighter in color and somewhat thicker ting the leather in the process of tool- quired to pull a leaf from a bound than the customary 23 to 231/2 karat ing. A decorative palletiscalleda book; its purpose is to determine the gold leaf. See also: LEMON. "band pallet," while one with more strength of the method used to secure palette knife. A blunt-tipped knife with a than one line on its face is called a the leaves or sections of the book. The very flexible steel blade having no cut- "two-, "three-," etc., "line pallet." 2. A leaf is pulled with uniform force along ting edge, and used for mixing the tool used for holding and heating type its entire length, usually by means of colors, paste, etc., for marbling, dec- for lettering a book. See: LETTERING an Instron tester. The book is clamped orative endpapers, etc. (261) PALLET (1 ). (161, 236, 335) into position by the bottom jaw of the palimpsest. A manuscript consisting of a palleted. A term sometimes applied to a testing device with a single leaf held in later writing superimposed upon the binding which is "signed," usually in a vertical position by the top jaw. The original writing, which was firstre- gilt,at the tail of the inside of the jaws are separated and the force re- moved to the extent possible. A double upper cover, generally by means of a quired to tear the leaf or pull it from palimpsest is one that has two subse- stamp or pallet. The term does not in- the adhesive or adhesive-thread layer quent writings, and therefore two re- clude paper tickets, which are often is measured. The total force in pounds movals. The extent to which the earlier used in lieu of a pallet. See also: LET- is divided by the length of the leaf in writing could be removed depended to TERING PALLET (2); SIGNED BINDINGS. inches to give the page-pull unit of a great degree on the ink used. Early palm leaf book. A manuscript book, pro- measurement as pounds per linear inch. carbon inks, which merely lay on the duced in India, Burma, and contiguous The page-pull test does not measure surface of the parchment, could be re- areas, consisting of strips cut from the individually the binding strength of a moved more or less completely simply leaves of the palmyra, or talipot palm book, e.g., an adhesive binding, having by sponging, but the later iron gall inks (Corypha umbraculifera). Each strip is a stiff, high-bulking paper, may display were much more difficult to remove be- about 16 to 36 inches in length, and a satisfactory page-pull test of 5 to 7 cause of the interaction with the fibers about 11/2to 3 inches in width. The pounds, yet if the volume is subjected of the tannin present in the ink. They leaves were first inscribed with a stylus, first to the SUBWAY TEST, and then the had to be scraped and then treated the incisions then being filled with an page-pull test,it may show a much with a weak acid, such as the citric ink prepared from charcoal and oil. lower value, even as low as 1 to 2 acid of an orange. Even then traces of The strips were then gathered, pierced pounds. the original writing remained. Wetting through the middle, secured with cord palm oil 187 panel stamp bindings

or twine, and attached toa board. each is complete in itself, itis not un- lications or a group of such publica- (156, 225) common to issue pamphlets in a series, tions, which are expected to be little palm oil. A semisolid or solid, red or yel- usually numbered consecutively. In a used. The typical publication is side lowish-brownoilobtained from the bibiiographical sense, a pamphlet has stitched, covered with plain boards, flesh or fruit of the oil palm, especially been variously defined as a publication heavy paper, paper-covered boards, or the African palm, Elaeis guineensis, of not more than 8 pages, one not ex- limp cloth, usually with no lettering. and used to dress Niger goatskin before ceeding 5 sheets, one not more than (12, 102) drying. (130, 280) 100 pages, one less than 80 pages, one panel (paneled, paneling). I. A form of pamphlet. In a limited sense, an inde- not less than 5 nor more than 48 decoration consisting of single, double, pendent publication consisting of a few pages. and as a publication consisting or triplelines, rectangular in shape, leaves of printed matter stitched to- of one folded section (signature), re- formed by a fillet or pallet, in gilt or gether but not bound, and with or gardless of the number of pages (but blind, either on the sides or between without self-, or other paper, covers. generally never more than 128). In the bands on the spine of a book. Cf: While independent in the sense that early 18th century England, a pamph- BORDER (1); FRAME ( 1). 2. fm: CAM- let was described as work consisting of BRIDGE STYLE. (99, 105) 20 leaves in folio, 12 in quarto and 6 panel stamp. A relatively large block of PAI.1.FT in octavo. A periodical issue is not gen- metal or wood, usually the former, en- erally regardedasa pamphlet. See graved intaglio, and used to impress a also: PAMPHLET BINDING(1).(12, design on the cover of a book. Al- 139, 142, 234) thoughlittleused today, the panel pamphlet binder. A cover of pasteboard, stamp dates back perhaps 700 years or with a gummed and stitched binding more, to the 13th century where it was strip, used to hold one or more pamph- used in Antwerp. The panel stamp was lets. The quality of the board generally in use throughout the 14th century in used for this type of binder, which is the Netherlands,in Cologne before used in many libraries as a permanent 1400, and in Paris before 1500. The binding, is such that it sooner or later first use of such stamps in England (and usually sooner) becomes highly was the period 1480 to 1490. Except acidified, transferring its acidity to the in Germany and the Netherlands, they first and last leaves of the publication, were used very little,if at all,after thus acidifying them, also. 1550 until revived in the 1820s for use pamphlet binding.1.The business of in embossing bindings. The designs binding sheets as they come from the created by the use of panel stamps press. The folded sheet (or sheets)is were almost invariably in blind. (156, wire-stitched, or the leaves are secured 236, 347) by an adhesive, usually a hot-melt. The panel stamp bindings. A method of dec- binding may include a cover of a stock orating leather bindings by means of heavier than that of the publication it- panel stamps. Throughout the middle self.Pamphlet binding includesthe ages the normal method of decorating binding of pamphlets, periodical issues, a book was by means of repeated im- and other publications, and represents, pressions of variously arranged small in total volume, the largest branch of stamps. The great increasein book "bookbinding." The term.however, production near the end of the 15th which stems from the days when the and beginning of the 16th centuries, writing ofpoliticalpamphlets was however, led to various methods of re- popular,isunfortunate,inthat the ducing the labor involved in bookbind- binding of telephone books, directories, ing, of which the panel stamp was one. and similar publications, is classed as The large stamp required the use of a pamphlet binding. 2. The style in which press because the pressure required was such publications are bound when they considerable, patticularly for the oc- are issued by the publisher, i.e., saddle tavo and folio size stamps. The earliest stitched, side sewn, or side stitched. stamps were employed in the Nether- (320, 339) lands, and Flemish binders continued pamphlet box. An open or closed box de- to use finely designed and engraved signed to hold a number of pamphlets, stamps well into the 16th century. The sheets, and the like. See also: PRINCE- French began using the technique near TON FILE. the end of the 15th century, when, in pamphlet-cover paper. A type of cover Paris and Normandy, they began pro- paper for small publications produced ducing bindings of great beauty, often from mixes of cotton fiber and chemi- pictorialindesign.Panelstamped cal wood pulps ina wide range of bindings were not produced in England thicknesses,colors,designs, and fin- to any great extent until near the end ishes. of the 15th century. pamphlet-style library binding. A style of Virtually allpanel stamp bindings bookbinding used for PAMPHLET pub- produced in England were calfskin, pane sides 188 paper boards cut flush

which, of all leathers, best produces to 105 A.D., there is evidence that it in the 1860s, and about 20 years later the details of the engraving, mainly may have been known a hundred or chemical and mechanical wood pulp because of its fine, smooth-grained sur- more years earlier. Nearly a thousand papers were being produced in great face. The panel stamp binding declined years later the invention spread from quantities for use as book papers. in popularity in England after 1550 China,moving eastwardtoJapan, Early in the 19th century papermak- until revived in the 1820s when stamps south to India, and west to the Near ers discovered that it was more eco- were used to emboss bindings. These East. From there is spread to Egypt, nomical to add rosin to the pulp while were usually small books, covered in Morocco, and Spain (Toledo) in the it was being beaten instead of dipping roan or morocco of a dark color, 12th century. At about the same time the sheet of waterleaf into a solution blocked in blind, and usually with gilt theItalianslearnedtheprocessin of gelatininthe manner practiced edges. The lettering on the spine was Palestine and returned with it to Italy. since the 12th century. Rosin reduced in gilt. The covers were often embossed From Spain it spread to France, Hol- the absorbency of the paper, but, un- in huge fly-embossing presses before land, Germany, and the rest of Europe. likegelatin,didnotincreaseits covering. The impressions made by the In 1490, papermaking was begun in strength. A great deal of the machine- blocks on the dark leather were strik- England by John Tate at Stevenage in made paper of this period is of low ing in their effect, particularly so be- Hertfordshire. William Rittenhouse es- quality, having little tensile strength. It cause they were in blind. This type of tablished the first paper millin the is also subject at times to severe FOX- binding appears to have been popular United States (Philadelphia) in 1690, ING. The weakness, however, is prob- for about 20 years, although blind some 100 years after paper was first ably due more to the ALUM used to blocking continuedintothe1850s. made in Mexico. precipitate the rosin than the rosin it- (141, 236, 347) The quality of early European paper self. pane sides. See: CAMBRIDGE sTYLE. (all of which was made from linen or Paper coated with one of the clays, paper. In general, all types and categories cotton rags, or a mixture of the two) e.g., china clay, came into common of matted or felted sheets or webs of was very superior. Most of it seems to use at the end of the 19th century. This fiber formed on a fine screen from a be of a relatively heavy substance with type of paper is ideal for printing fine water suspension. The word "paper" is considerable character in the texture of halftones, but it lacks strength, is easily derived from PAPYRUs (although papy- the surface.It was also wellsized. damaged by moisture, and unless syn- rus is by no means paper), and is one Subsequent to theinvention of the thetic resins instead of starch are used of the two broad sub-divisions of paper stamping mill, in Valencia, Spain, in as binders, the surface strips off easily. as a general term, the other being the 12th century, which shortened and See: HANDMADE PApER; PAPERMAKING. BOARD. The distinction between paper facilitated the maceration of the pulp, See also: ABSORBENT PAPERs; AccELER- and board, however, is not sharp, but, the fibers of paper became shorter and ATED AGING TEsTs; ACID-FREE pAPER; in the usual case, paper is lighter in thecharacterofpapergradually AIR PERMEABILITY; BASIC SIZE; BASIS BAsIs WEIGHT, thinner, and more flex- changed,becomingsmootherand WEIGHT; BREAKING LENGTH; BRIGHT- ible than board. Usually, all sheets 12 thinner. NESS; BRIGHTNESS REVERSION; BRITTLE- points (0.012 inch) or more in thick- Very early in the 19th century, the NEss; BULK (2, 3, 4); BULK EQUIVA- ness are classed as boards, while those manufacture of paper became mechan- LENTS; BURST FACTOR; BURSTING less than 12 points are classed as paper. ized, an event which was to have a pro- sTRENGTH;COMPRESSIBILITY;CONDI- The exceptions to this include blotting found effect on the craft of bookbind- TIONING; COTTON FIBER CONTENT PA- paper, which is greater than 12 points ing. Whereas in paper made by hand PER; DECKLE EDGE;DUPLEX (1); in thickness, and chipboard, which is the stretch caused by pasting or other FOLDING ENDURANCE; FORMATION; less than 12. moistening is virtually the same in all FOURDRINIER MACHINE; FOURDRINIER Paper may be produced from animal directions, the stretch in paper made WIRE; GROUNDWOOD FREE PAPER; M. M. fibers, e.g., wool, fur, hair, silk; mineral on a machine is far greater in the cross sYsTEM; MOLD-MADE pApER; sIZES OF fibers,e.g., asbestos; synthetic fibers, direction than in the MACHINE DIREC- PAPER; WATERLEAF; WATERMARX. (17, e.g., rayon or nylon; and even ceramics, TION. This affects the bookbinder in 58, 77, 79, 80, 143, 144, 176, 268, metals, glass, and other materials. Most many important ways; e.g., if the ma- 323) paper, however, is produced from cel- chine direction of the paper making up paperback. A book generally defined as a lulosic plant fibers, principally those the leaves of a book runs the wrong flat back book with a paper cover that obtained from wood pulp (trees), cot- wayat right angles to the spinethe is usually, but not always, of a heavier ton and linen (rags), EsPARTO (GRASS), leaves will probably not lie flat under stock than that used for the leaves of and cereal(straw). Other materials their own weight, unless the paper is the publication itself. Paperback books used at times and in specialized places very thin or the surface area of the are often made up of single leaves se- include: Abaca, Addar grass, Arundo leaves is very great. cured by a hot-melt adhesive. They donax (Spanish grass), bagasse, bam- When the shortage of rags became usually have relatively narrow binding boo,baobab,carob,cottonlinters, chronic late in the 18th century, paper- margins, are often printed on paper of hemp, henequen, Johnson grass, jute, makers were forced to turn to other poor to very poor quality (frequently manila hemp,sisal,andsunflower potential sources of vegetable fiber. Ex- with a high proportion of mechanical stalks. perimental papers were produced, but wood pulp), and are generally cut The earliest known paper was made nothing new was adopted on a large flush. (123) inChina,by Ts'aiLun,although scale until early in the 19th century paperboard.See: BINDER'S BOARD; whether he actually invented the proc- when straw was first used. EsPARTO BOARD. ess or simply recorded its importance (GRAsS), the first really successful sub- paper boards cut flush. An old style of is debatable, and, while its origin has stitute for linen and cotton fibers, waS bookbinding in which the spine of the been tentatively established to be 104 put into commercial production early book was slightly rounded and covered paper clay 189 paper-stiffened cover

with skiver. Pulp boards were pasted Subsequent to further dilution of the calender stack or it may be reeled ini- on and covered with manila paper. The stock with white water (which is water tially without calendering. Thus, mod- book was then cut flush. (256) containing fibers and other materials ern papermaking involves essentially paper clay. A white to light-colored clay retrieved from the papermaking ma- seven hasic operations:1)fiber pre- having a very low free silica content. chine), the stock is screened through treatment; 2) fiber blending; 3) furnish Most paper clays are processed to ob- sand traps or other purifying devices to cleaning and screening; 4slurry dis- tain properties required for their use as remove lumps or clumps of fibers, im- tribution and metering; 5) web forma- fillers or coatings for paper. (17, 58) purities, etc. The screened stock then tion and water removal by mechanical paper cloth. 1. A cloth faced with paper. entersthe flow(head)box of the means; 6) web compaction and water 2. A fabric made by the Polynesians papermaking machine, where it is agi- removal by means of heat; and 7) from the inner bark of the PAPER MUI- tated and spread onto the wire, which. sheet finishing, by means of calender- BERRY andothertrees.3.Twisted by means of forward movement and ing. sizing, coating, or glazing. paper woven or knittedina fabric. lateral agitation, forms the fibers into The method used today to prepare 4. Any of several types of paper spe- a matted web of paper. The wire, which cellulosic material for papermaking is cially processed for use in hookbinding. is endless,is supported by the breast almostentirelymechanized.Wood paper converting. roll, followed by a series of foils or chips are treated with chemicals, under 1. An edition binding table rolls. term used with reference to the binding It also moves over several heat and pressure (see: SULFATE PROC- and finishing of publisher's books. 2. suction boxes which remove water from ESS; SULFITE PROCESS), various impur- The processing of raw paper, as pro- the suspension, and then under the ities (notably LIGNIN) being removed duced on the papermaking machine, to MINDY ROI I ,before returning over a in the process. The chips are partially obtain an improved grade or a finished suction couch roll. The breast roll and processedintopulpandarethen product, such as a coated or laminated the suction couch roll represent the two bleached to the desired brightness and paper. extremes of the wire. On its return to washed. Following washing, the par- tlie breast roll the tautness of the wire tially processed pulpis ready to be paper covered and overlapped. A binding is controlled by a number of stretch consisting of a paper cover glued to processed into paper pulp. The pulp, at rolls. The water draining through the this stage called "half stuff," is ground the spine of the text block and end- wire, i.e., the white water, is collected papers, both of which extend beyond in a beater, by means of refiners (see: and returned tothe head box. The JORDAN; REFINER),and, in the usual the edges of the leaves. See also: YAPP fibrous slurry is prevented from run- S FyLF. process,loadingagents.sizingand ning off the edges of the wire in various coloring materials are also added. paper covers. An economical styleof manners, e.g.. by means of a DECKI The properties of the finished paper binding used for reprints, or, especially on either side of the wire. When the depend largely on the loading agents, in Europe. a temporary binding of paper web passes under the dandy roll as well as the fibrous materials used original works, in which the cover con- itis still sufficiently wet to receive an and the degree of their treatment. These sists of stiff paper attached at the spine. impression. It is at this point that the agents consist of mineral substarces, The cover may overlap the edges, or it web is given a WATERMARK, or, if de- principallyone oftheclays(see: may be trimmed and turned so that in sired. a laid or wove finish. The former effect it KAOLIN ), which affect the opacity of is flush with the edges of the is produced by covering the roll with the paper, itssuitability for printing, book. See also: BRADEL BINDING; LESNE., evenly spaced parallel wires, while the etc. SIZING (2) materials are usually FRANçOIS A. D.; STIFFENEDPAPER wove finish requires that theroll be added to the pulp to impart water (ink) COVERS. (140, 169) covered with woven wire. The paper resistance. See also: ADDITIVES (2); AIR- paper cutter. Any machine or device used web proceeds from the wire to a series DRIED;ALKALINEFILLER;Al KALINE to divide a sheet, or sheets of paper, or of wet presses. When the web reaches PROCESS;ALKALINERESERvE; ANIMAL hoard into smaller sizes, for squaring the couch roll it still contains approxi- SIZED; ASH; ATTAPULGITF. CLAY; BEATER paper or board, or for trimming the mately 80 to 85% water and therefore SIZED; CALENDER; CELLULOSE;CEIILT- edges of books. See, for example: Gun,- cannot support itself. The required sup- lOSE CHAIN; CELLUI OSE FIBERS; CHAIN OTINE; PI OW; ROTARY BOARDCUTTER; port is provided by woolen felts which LINES; CHEMICAL WOOD PULP; CLAY; THREE-KNIFE TRIMMER. carry the web through the presses, each COATED; COATING; COATING ('I AY: papermaking. The craft or process of pro- press being supplied with its own felt. COUCH(3, 4); COUCH ROLL; DIGESTER; ducing a sheet or web from the matted Suction boxes are also usuafly provided FILLER CLAY; HARI)SIZED: MACHINE and felted fibers of vegetable and/or to remove water from the felt. The wet DIRECTION; MECHANICAL WOOD PULP: other materials. Although paper is still presses reduce the water content of the NEUTRAL SUI.FITE PROCESS; PULP: ROS- produced in small quantities by hand web to about 70%, and at this point IN SIZE; SEMICIIEMICAL PULP: SIZING; (see:HANDMADEPAPI:R), the great bulk the web is self supporting. The web SLACK SIZED; SUPERCAI.ENDER; SURFACE of paper is now made by machine. than passes from the "wet end" of the SIZED: TUB SIZED: UNBLEACHED SULFATE After the paper stock (consisting of paperrnaking machine to the "dry end." PULP: UNBLEACHEDSULFITE PULP: the fibrous material, and, usually, siz- This section consists of a series of cast WEI.I -CLOSED FORMATION.(58,140, ing materials,loadings and coloring iron driers arranged in two or more 144, 162, 176, 177, 230, 324, 340) matter) is compounded, it is collected rows. The web is held tightly against paper mulberry. An Asiatic tree, Brous- inthemachine(ormixing)chest the drying cylinders by means of felts. sonetia papyrifera, the bast fiber from where it is further diluted from about By the time the web emerges from the the inner bark of which is used in the 3 to 6% down to about 2 to 3%. The last drying press,its water has been manufacture of paper, especially hand- stock is then pumped into a regulating reduced to less than 10%. Depending made paper. Also called "kozo." box which controls the flow of the on the finish desired, the paper may paper sizes. See: SIZE (3);SIZES OF pApER. stocktothepapermaking machine. pass from the drying section to the paper-stiffened cover. A binding consisting

21 u paper substance 190 parchment

of a paper cover attached to the spine writing material. Presumably, the sheets parallellaminated. A board orother of the text block and stiffened on the were then sized, dried, and otherwise laminate having both or all layers ori- sides by means of heavy paper or card finished. When ofahighquality, ented, with the grain direction of each inserted between the cover and the papyrus was very supple and flexible. running in the same direction. See also: board paper. See also: CLOTH-STIFFENED The individual sheets were generally CROSS LAMINATED. (17, 309) COVER. glued together side by sideto form paralleltransmittance. Thedegreeto paper substance. The weight of paper per long sections which wcre usually rolled which light beams reflected from an unit area, as contrasted with density, up. object pass through a material, such as which is the weight per unit volume. Papyrus was sold in large quantities paper, within a predetermined small See also: BASIS WEIGHT. (93) in the form of bales or rolls from which range of angles.Itismeasured by paper tree. Varioustreesfrom which sheets could be cut off as required. The means of a standardized instrument de- paper is made in the Far East (and size of the sheets ranged from 6 or 7 signedspecificallyforthepurpose. other areas),including Broussonetia inches up to about 18 to 20 inches. The Parallel transmittance is important in papyrifera(see: PAPER MULBERRY); better grades were more brownish in determining the transparency of trans- Daphne cannahina, Edgeworthia card- color. parent papers,i.e.,the more parallel ner:, and Trophis aspers, the last three One common characteristic of papy- the light beams, approaching 00 angle, found in the East Indies. There is also rus, regardless of quality, is the differ- the more transparent the paper. (17) the paperbark tree, Melaleuca leuca- ence between the two sides of the sheet, parchment. A translucent or opaque ma- dendron, as llas species of Canis- which stems from the strips being at terial made from the wet, limed, and lemon, which rre Australian trees from right angles to each other. The recto unhairedskinsofsheep,goats,or which the bark peels off in layers. (197) side, on which thestripsrun hori- similar smaller animals, by drying at paper wrappered and overlapped. A bind- zontally, was the side generally pre- room temperature under tension, gen- ingconsistingofapaper wrapper ferredfor writing,whiletheverso, erally on a wooden frame known as a secured to the spine of the text block hich had vertical strips, was less fre- stretching frame. Wood is used because only, the covers of which extend be- quently used. A material as pliable as a frame of iron, for example, is likely yond the edges of the leaves. (343) papyrus was well suited to be rolled, to cause blue iron stains which are paper wrappered, turned over. A binding and when this was done the recto be- difficultto remove. Good parchment consisting of a paper wrapper secured came the inner side and the verso, with must be finethat is, thin, strong, yet to the spine of the text block only, and no writing, the outer side. flexibleand must have a smooth sur- folded over onto itself or the endpaper The greatest use of papyrus as a face if itis to be used for writing. so as to be flush with the edges of the writing material was between the 4th In the manufacture of parchment, leaves. (343) century B.C. and the 4th century A.D. the skin is first limed and unhaired (or papeterie. A class of papers normally cut (192, 218, 236) dewooled), a process generally accom- to size, boxed, and used for writing. paraffin (wax). A waxy crystalline sub- plished by scraping the skin with a Papeteries are produced from cotton stance that in the pure form is white, blunt knife. Following unhairing, the fiber or chemical wood pulps, or mix- odorless and translucent and has the skin is dried under tension. While this tures thereof, and are given many spe- approximatechemicalformulaof is taking place, more lime is applied to cialtreatments,suchasembossing, C.2,,H4.,(and above).Itisobtained remove moisture and grease,partic- mottling, watermarking, aniline print- from petroleum by distillation and is ularly the latter in the case of sheep- ing, and thelike,to obtain desired then purified by sweating or solvent skins. Finally, the parchment is finished colors and appearance. The majority of refining. Paraffin, which is not a true while still in a taut condition; the sur- them have low strength, high bulk, and wax, consists mainly of a mixture of face is smoothed by shaving itwith, good folding qualities. They normally saturatedstraight-chainsolidhydro- asemi-circular(oftensemi-lunar) carryaconsiderablepercentageof carbons. Its melting points range from knife,and rubbingitwith pumice. filler, in order to give them the required 50 to 57° C. It is used in the manufac- DespiZe this treatment, the flesh side finish and opacity, and are sized to give ture of certain types of paper. in leather can usually be distinguished from the satisfactory pen-and-ink writing quali- dressings,inmarbling,in producing grain side of an unsplitkin by its ties. Basis weights normally range from paraffin prints, etc. (17, 183, 335) rougher texture and often darker color. 16 to 32 pounds (17 X 22 500). paraffin prints. Decorative cover paper In books, the pages are usually ar- (17) and endpaper prints produced by etch- ranged grain- to grain-side and flesh- papyrus. A giant sedge, Cyperus papyrus, ing a paraffin (or other waxy material) to flesh-side in order to provide a more native to the region of the Mile, the surface with a stylus, inking, and press- uniform appearance. pith of which was usedt make a ing on paper or cloth. Only an oil-base Parchment manufacture, which sub- writing material by the ancient Egyp- printer's ink will work on the wax jects the fiber network of the skin to tians, Greeks, and Romans. Papyrus surface. ( 183 ) the simultaneous action of stretching was the forerunner of paper and the parallel fold. A method of folding in and drying, causes changes in the skin origin of the word, although itis not which each fold is parallel to the pre- very different from those which take paper becauseitis not a matted or ceding.Parallelfoldingisgenerally place in the manufacture of leather. felted sheet made from a fibrous mate- usedfor narrow book formats,for The dermal fiber network is reorganized rial. After the pith was sliced, the strips books printed two-up, and for maps. by the stretching, and the network is were laid out in a row with the edges Printing should be done so that the then permanently set in this new and slightly overlapping. Another row was folds can be made along the machine highly taut form by drying the fluids laid crosswise on top of the first, and direction of the paper. Cf: RIGHT ANGLE i.e., ground substance of the skinto a the two layers were moistened with FOLD. See also: FOLDING; FOLDING MA- hard gluelike consistency. The fibers water and pounded intoa sheet of CHINES. (320) of the skin are thus fixed in a stretched parchment bond 191 paring

condition and, as long as the skin re- to the brown-black shades of sheep- with water, neither should it be allowed nr.ins more or less dry, they will not skins. to dry out. reverttotheir originalthree-dimen- Cpntrary to the process in leather The manufacture of parchment dates sionalnetwork. Thisgivesataut, manufacture, the lime used for un- back to at least the Middle Kingdom highly stressed sheet that is relatively hairing skins in parchment is not subse- of Egypt, ur approximately 2000 B.C. inelastic and has a stiff handle. In addi- quently removed. The presence of so Its manufacture arrived in Northwest- tion, the alignment of the fibers into much alkaline substance may explain ern Europe along with , layers parallel to the grain and flesh why parchment is not affected as much where it became the most important surfaces of tit! skin (resulting in very as leatheris by the action of acids writing material of the Middle Ages. low or virtually zero angle of weave) resulting from atmospheric pollution, From the 12th century onwards, how- involves a certain extent of breakage mainly from the presence of sulfur ever, its use slowly declined in favor of fibers in the dermal network. It is dioxide(SO.,). Parchment, however, of paper. Its use today is limited, being this variation in mechanical processing is readily affected adversely by water, restrictedlargelytostate and legal that results in the fundamental differ- and water can very easily permit the documents, certificates, and the like; ence between parchment and leather. multiplication of bacteria, which can in the construction of musical instru- The extent of the alteration of fiber rapidlydegradeandevendestroy ments; and in certain aspects of ar- orientation depends on several factors, parchment. In addition, if parchment chival conservation. including the species of the animal; is permitted to absorb large quantities Someauthoritiesusetheterms the age, sex, diet, etc., of the skin being of water, the setting and fixing action parchment and VELLUM interchange- processed; the intensity of the liming ofitsdriedground substancewill ably, contending that vellum is simply ithas received; and the tension and eventually break down allowing the a superior form of parchmentone rate at which the wet, stretched skin fiber network to relax sinceitis no made from the unsplit skin of a calf. is driel. The fiber orientation of parch- longer fixed in a taut condition. When Others, however, maintain that, what- ment is such that it tends to tear fairly the parchment is subsequently dried in ever the historical derivations may be, easily into a number of thinner sheets, this relaxed condition, the very prop- parchment is a material made from the whereas leather cannot he torn in this erties that made it parchment initially flesh split of a sheepskin, while vellum manner because itretainsits original are lost, and a hard, horny sheet, not is made specifically from an unsplit three-dimensional network. unlike rawhide, is all that remains. It calfskin. In either case, both materials Originally,parchmentwas made follows then,that parchment should are produced by the same process. See from the full thickness of a skin, and not be washed, at least in the manner also:GOLDI3EATER'S SKIN; IMITATION was made thinner in the Middle Ages that leather may be washed, or allowed PARCHMENT. (198, 236, 263, 291) by shaving. The modern practice, how- to remain in an environment saturated ever, is to use only the flesh layer of a with water vapor. parchment hot d. A classofwriting paper used in lieu of genuine or vege- split skin, which means that neither Medievalscribesusually pounced side of the finished parchment has any their parchment a second time (also table parchment for bonds, legal docu- grainpattern. The remaining grain with pumice) before writing. It was ments, etc.Itis a superior grade of split is generally used to make a thin also given a coat of glue sizing before paper made from cotton and bleached leather, usually a skiver. it was illuminated. In the 18th century, chemical wood pulps which are usually As in leather manufacture, it is usu- however, a new method of sizing parch- well beaten to produce adequate hy- ally the skins of animals slaughtered ment was developed in which thz size dration of the fibers. The paper is tub- for their meat that are used in' making was actually formed in the surface of sized, and loft, air, or machine dried. The basis weights range from 24 to 40 parchment. As the blood drains from the sheet by dissolvingitwith hot the animal, the minute network of der- water. As a result of this new tech- pounds (17 x 22 500). Durability, mal blood vessels becomes colorless and nique, pouncing is no longer usually toughness, and good surface for writing is usually undetected in the flayed skin. required. are significant properties. (17) Proper drainage of the blood vessels In the modern method of parchment parchment size. A resizing material made isessential, otherwise the iron com- manufacture, the shaving knife is still from scraps of parchment. Itis pre- pounds of the blood will react with the used, but the skins are rapidly unhaired pared by boiling 21 grams of parch- lime liquors to form dark colored pig- by the use of sodium sulfide, split by ment scraps soaked in21/2liters of ments which are extremely difficult, if machine, and dried in an oven under water for 45 minutes, or longer if a not impossible, to remove. If, however, tension.If a transparent skinisre- stronger size is required. It is used at a some blood does remain in the vascular quired, the tension is relaxed somewhat. temperature of 35 to 45° C. for resiz- system during the processing of a skin Transparent parchment was at one time ingarchivalpapersthat have been into parchment, so that a colored pat- used in decorative schemes displaying washed. An alkaline buffering agent is tern of blood vesselsisleft on the paintings underneath the covering ma- qometimes added to the size to provide finished material, the parchment is said terial of books. A patent for making an alkaline reserve in the paper. to be "veined." Assuming the veining transparent parchment (vellum) was parchment writing paper. A VEGETABLE pattern is of an attractive character, it issued to James Edwards in 1785. See: PARCHMENT PAPER used for various may actually enhancetheaesthetic EDWARDS OF HALIFAX. handwritten documents. It is produced appeal of the parchment for use in Ideal storage conditions for parch- from cotton fiber or cotton plus chemi- bookbinding. The colors and depths of ment are temperatures between 0° and cal wood pulps, in basis weights of 28 shading of finished parchment vary 20C. (32' and 68' F.), with a rela- to 32 pounds (17 X 20 500). Per- with the animal skin, ranging from the tive humidity of 50 to 65%. Although, manence, strength and durability are greenish markings of goatskin, through under no circumstances should parch- required characteristics. (17) the light brown patterns of calfskins, ment he allowed to become saturated paring. The process of thinning leather paring knife 192 pasteboard

by cutting away the flesh side, or shav- leather, or performs any other opera- navigational exercises with a title page ing the edges, i.e., beveling the edges tion requiring a smooth, hard surface. printed in Williamsburg in 1731, was that are to be turned in. A PARING (237, 335) one of the first products of his press. MACHINE is generally used for the thin- Parks, William (d 1750). A printer and The binding of this work is skillfully ning process (or a SPOKESHAVE if no bookbinder, who, between 1726 and decorated in blind with a roll and two paring machine is available), while a 1737, was printer to the Lord Proprie- other ornaments that were also used on PARING KNIFE is used fa: shaving Or tor of the Province of Maryland. Parks, books issued by his Annapolis shop and beveling. an Englishman by birth, was one of the later on bindings executed in Williams- Very little if anything is known of most influential figures in the history burg. (200, 301, 347) the method or methods used by binders of printing in Colonial American times, part binding (parti binding). An obsolete to reduce thickness in the early days of and had an important role in American style of library binding consisting of a covering books with leather, but itis literary history as well. He did book- cloth spine, paper sides with no cor- entirely possible that from about the binding as well as printing in his estab- iers, or, at times, a paper spine, with latter part of the 16th century they ment, advertising that "Book-Binding sides of a different type of paper, but purchased leather from the manufac- is done reasonably, in the best manner." again no corners. turer in the required thickness and then In 1730 Parks establisheda branch parts of a book. The different segments simply pared the edges. business in the Province of Virginia at of a hook, gathered in the following During the 19th century there were Williamsburg, and operated both busi- order: half title page, frontispiece, title no paring machines in use in binderies, nessesuntildisagreementwiththe page, printer's imprint and nor were there any spokeshaves. There Assembly at Annapolis in 1737 caused notice, ,preface, acknowl- is no evidence of any paring of leather him to move his entire operation to edgments, tableof contents,listof other than edges during the first half Williamsburg. He was the first success- illustrations, introduction, errata, text, of the 19th century; consequentlyit ful printer in Virginia, and The Com- appendices,author'snotes,glossary, must be assumed that the leather was plete Mariner, a manuscript volume of bibliography,index,andcolophon. purchased already pared, or was pur- Publishers sometimes vary the order of chased and then sent out to be pared inclusion, and not all works contain all as required. (161, 236, 335) PARING KNIFE segments indicated. (140) paring knife. A knife used for paring the passing. Ametallicthreadworked edges of leather to be turned over the through the material of an embroidered edges of the boards. The knife has its binding or sewn to it with silk thread cutfing edge at the end, and is ground of the same color. See also: TAMBOUR flat on the underside and beveled on (2). (280) the upper. There are several varieties paste. A soft, plastic, adhesive composi- of this type of knife: the English par- tion, having a high order of yield value, ing knife has a flat cutting edge; the and generally prepared by heating a French knife is rounded; the German mixure of starch and water and subse- knife, while rounded like the French quently cooling the hydrolized product. version,isalso ground at an angle. Paste has been used for centuries to Except for paring the edges of leather, join porous, non-greasy materials. At theparingknifehasbeenlargely one time it was made from flour (fre- superseded by the SPOKESHAVE. (154, quently wheat flour) mixed with water, 204, 236, 335) but other materials now are frequently paring machine. A hand-operated, power- added to achieve particular results. The driven machine used for paring leather present-day tendency is to use ready- to the required thickness. Any required made paste in which the proportions width within the scope of the foot above oftheingredientsarescientifically the feed roll may be pared. The feed roll blended. is always close to the inside edge of the Paste has many uses in bookbinding, circularknife(whichisconstantly although its use is declining in favor sharpened by a grinding stone beneath of the increased use of cold resinous it), but not touching. When the foot adhesives, such as polyvinylacetate. pedal is depressed, a feed roller propels Itisstill used, however, in covering, the leather against the knife. The depth for pasting down endpapers, and in of cut iscontrolled by stops, which casing-in, etc. It is also used for deco- limit the distances between roller and rative work (see: PASTE PAPERS), in knife edge. The leatherparedfalls repairing torn leaves, and the like. In away in thin scraps. In the use of the paper conservation,ricestarchand paring machine the condition of the wheat starch pastes are used for hing- skin is important; it must be flexible ing, lining, and in long-fiber repairs. and pliable enough to bed down flat on (183, 186, 218, 309, 339) the feed rollers, but if it is too soft or pasteboard. 1. A class of board produced loose the fibers tear and drag rather bylaminating(pasting)sheetsof than cut cleanly. (154, 264) (brown) paper and used for the boards paring stone. Usually a lithographic stone French English of books, or,iflined,forprinting. on which the binder cuts and pares Originally pasteboards were generally pastebox 193 pattern board

of threetypes:1)those made by flesh side. This treatment rapidly draws paste water. Paste that has been thinned pasting together sheets of plain paper. water from theskin,resultingina down to the consistency of milk. See: leaves of books, or printing spoilage: quick cure. The salts also have a bac- PASTE-WASHING. 2) a better grade produced by matting teriostatic effect so that drying need pasting. 1. A general term applied to the together sheets of newly made hand- not be as thorough as in the case of air process of joining two or more sheets made paper; and 3) an inferior grade drying. Paste-dried stock is also easier of paper or board, cloth and board, produced from shavings and even floor to rehydrate than that whichisair leather and board, cloth and paper, sweepings. The last named was not dried. Paste drying as a method of etc., by means of an adhesive. 2. The actually "pasteboard." by definition, as curing has been used for centuries and application of paste to a surface, either it was not built up of laminated layers. isstillemployed inIndia,Pakistan, by hand with a brush, or by machine. Pasteboard was not in general use in Iran. and Turkey. (291) Pasting machines are used to a con- Europe before about the first quarter paste-grained roan. A tanned grain split siderable extent, either as independent of the16th century. although in the of a sheepskin, sp:it while in the limed units or built into other machines, e.g., East its use for book boards originated state. When in the finishing stage, a casing-in machines. The pasting ma- centuries before. By the second quarter flour paste is applied to the flesh side. chine usuallyconsistsof arotating of the 16th century. however, the use which causes the skin to plump, ena- cylinder to which the adhesive is car- of pasteboard for books exceeded that bling it to take a bright cross or straight ried from a container or through trans- of wood. Pasteboard continued to he grain. The flesh splitis either tanned fer cylinders, and against which the used in economy trade binding until or converted into parchment. Paste- paper is fed. (140, 234) late in the 18th century, even though grained roan is sometimes referred to pasting down. In hand binding, the proc- it had begun to be replaced by rope- as "French morocco." (335) ess of pasting the board papers to the fiber millboards in the latter part of the paste papers (starch papers). Decorative insides of the boards of a book. In 17th century. Genuine pasteboards are endpapers and cover papers produced library and edition binding, the proper seldomusedinbookbindingtoday. by pressing or sliding objects into a wet term is CASING-IN. Also called "pasting (See also: BINDER'S BOARD.) paste or starch mixture that has been off," or "pasting up." See also: PASTE- 2. A general term applied to those spread on the paper. When dry the DOWN; PASTING-DOWN OPEN; PASTING- and formed by paper is then glazed. The paste is usu- DOWN SHUT. (335, 355) pasting a liner on stock of a different ally colored with poster paints, dyes. pasting-down open. The traditional meth- grade. The term also denotes anv stiff colored inks, or the like, worked into od of pasting the board papers to the hoard or cardboard of medium thick- the thinned paste. Paste papers, which boards in hand binding (and almost ness. (58, 198, 236. 339) were one of the earliest forms of deco- always when itis a leather binding), pastebox. A wooden box lined on the in- rative papers, were used for both cover while the boards are open and resting side with zinc or galvanized iron, and papers and endpapers from the 16th on the block. (161, 335) fitted with a rod across one end to en- through the 18th centuries, and are still pasting-down shut. A method of pasting able the bookbinder to work surplus used to some extent today. (133. 217) the board papers to the boards in hand paste from his brush into the box (264) paster. L A machine used for pasting binding. The board papers are spread pastedown. The plain. colored, fancy, or sheets together, either in a continuous withadhesiveand theboardsare marbled paper attached to the inside roll or as separate sheets. 2. A device closed onto them and pressed. In hand of the board of a book after it has been for applying a fine line of paste or and edition binding, this technique is covered, or when itis cased-in. The other adhesive on one or both sides of used for cloth or case bindings,re- pastedown serves several purposes: 1) a web of paper, the web then being spectively. (310, 335) it hides the raw edges of the covering cut,printed, and folded to produce pasting off (pasting up). See: PASTING material where itis turned over the booklets in which paste is used in lieu DOWN. edges of the board; 2)it forms the of sewing or stitching. The adhesive patent leather. A cattle or horse hide, hinge between the text block and the can be applied only in the direction the which is coated, usually on the flesh board or case: and 3) in edition and web travels. (17, 339) side, with a flexible, waterproof film library binding. particularly the former. paste tins(paste boards). Zinc-covered having a lustrous and highly glazed the pastedown and hinge are frequently boards used mainly in trade binding for surface produced by successive coat- the only means by which thetext pasting guards and cloth joints. The ings of daubs, varnishes, and lacquers, blockissecured toitscase.If the zinc is pasted and the guards and/or some of which may be pigmented. pastedown islaid down indepedently cloth joints are laid down, a sheet of These were formerly based on boiled of. and is separate from, the flyleaf. it waste paper is laid on top and rubbed linseed oil ("Japanning") but some or is called a DOUBLURE (1), in which down, resulting in the laid down mate- all may now consist partly or entirely case it is joined to the flyleaf by means rial picking up the adhesive. (256) of plasticized cellulose nitrate and/or of joint, usually of leather. The paste- paste-washing. 1. The process of applying plastic resins. (351, 363) down is frequently referred to as the a coating of thinned paste to the flesh pattern. 1. See: RUB. 2. In edition binding. "board paper."Itisalso sometimes side of leather, soastocause the the base used as a pattern for the en- called the "endpaper" (singular), "end leather to shrink slightly and also to tire edition. 3. Metal plates, the exact lining," "end sheet" (singular), or "lin- help it maintain its shape when cover- size of the covers of a book, and used ing paper." See also: PASTING-DOWN ing. 2. The process of applying thinned as guides in cutting leather covers or OPEN; PASTING-DOWN SHUT. (83. 237) paste to the grain surface of calfskin spines. (256, 261) paste drying. A method of curing freshly and sheepskin bindings before tooling pattern board. A board on which the flayed hides or skins by means of a so as to clean the leather and fill in the bookbinder mounts a specimen of the watery paste of natural salty earth (see: pores to prevent absorption of the glair. covering material to show the titling KHARI) rubbed into the skin on the 3. See: CLEANING OFF. (236, 335) layout, color, size, etc., to ensure uni- patterned papers 194 penetration

formity in the binding of a series of scription of his work. Oftentimes he pressure. Because it is more difficult to books. See also: RUB (1). (156) presented his customers with highly de- print on roughened paper than on pa- patterned papers. Papers printed or pat- tailed invoices describing the work he per which is smooth, paper is usually terned in relief with a design and used had done. He made his ornamentation pebbled subsequent to printing. A fine- for book jackets or covers. One of the appropriate to the subject matter of the screen halftone cannot be printed on more common patterns has been a book and while the spines were often eggshell or antique paper by letterpress simulation of leather. Patterned papers richly embellished,the covers were processes, butit can be printed on are produced by passing the web of generally quite simple. smooth paper that is later pebbled to paper through rollers engraved with The leathers he used were generally, an antique finish. the pattern on the papermaking ma- olive, red or blue morocco, or brown Pebbling is often employed to im- chine. For linen or crash patterns the Russia. Payne's endpapers were nearly prove the appearance, bulk, or pliabil- rollers may be wrapped with the ma- always solidin color. He preferred ity of paper so that a cheaper paper terial itself. (182) purple (sometimes pink) and generally may be substituted for more expensive paumelle. A wooden toothed instrument used endpapers which chshed with the stock. It may be used to finish small sometimes used to impart a straight or covers. His headbands were flat (up- quantities of paper which otherwise cross grain pattern to MOROCCO leather. right) and sewn with green silk which could not be purchased with a pebbled (172) sometimes had a gold thread in it. The finish except in large quantities. (234, pawl press. A very powerful type of edges of his bindings were rough gilt or 278) STANDING PRESS, equipped with a pawl plain. (112, 347) peccary. Leather made from the skin of (a device which permits motion in one p. c. p. Abbreviation for PENTA-CHI ORO- the wild boar, genus Tayassu, of Cen- direction only until released) to enable PHENOL. tral and South America,i.e.,South the press to maintain constant pressure. peacock marble. A drawn marble pattern American PIGSKIN. (363) It was used in the past by printers and thatisessentially a variation of the peel. A wooden implement in the shape of bookbinders. (274) NONPARIEL MARBLE, the difference be- a "T" square, used mainly by printers, Payne, Roger (1738-1797). The most ac- ing that after the colors (black, blue, but also by bookbinders for carrying complished and influential of the 18th yellow, and red; or black, brown, yel- washed sheets and book leaves to the century English bookbinders. Payne low, and white) have been drawn by drying hies. (83, 94) was born in Windsor, England, and thestylus into wavy lines, they are peeling. 1. A form of leather decay char- was probably apprenticed to an Eton then drawn with a comb, whichis acterized by peeling off of the grain bookseller named Pote. Later he was extendible in such a manner that itis surface. Peeling seems to be particu- employed by the Holborn bookseller, made wider and narrower at intervals larlyassociatedwiththoseleathers Thomas Osborne. In about 1770 Payne of 1/2 inch. This widening and narrow- tanned with the condensed class of was set up inbusiness by Thomas ing is continued until the entire surface vegetable tannins, although at this time Payne(norelation),theprincipal is crossed by this opening and closing the cause or causes of the defect are bookseller of London. comb, resulting in a pattern resembling unknown. 2. A defect in paper in which Roger Payne was an outstanding the tail of a peacock. (264) the surface scales or peels off. craftsman. His books were very well peacock roll. A ROLL (1) cut in the shape peg rake. An implement consisting of a forwarded and his style of finishing of the raised and spread tail of a pea- series of round wooden pegs set in a displayed not only a high level of skill cock as part of the design. This type of frame. The pegs are smooth and taper but also very good taste. He usually design is characteristic of some English slightly at the points and are set about sewed his books with silk thread and Restoration bindings, as well as some 11/4 inch apart. The device is used to lined the spines with leather. He fre- 18th century Irish bindings. (96, 156) "rake" marbling colors on the size. The quently used elaborately designed doub- pearl ash. A crude form of potassium pegs should be of sufficient length to lures, made his endpapers with leather carbonate (K2CO3) leached from wood touch the bottom of the trough. (159, joints, and covered the books with rus- ashes, purified by partial crystallization 217) sia leather or morocco. Since Payne and then dried by evaporation. It is dis- pelt. A contradictory term defined both was usually short of cash, he cut his solved in water and used to wash the as the skin of an animal with the hair, own (iron) finishing tools, building up coversofleatherbindingsbefore wool or fur still on, and specifically in beautifuldesignswitharelatively marbling. (97, 159) the leather trade, as a hide or skin pre- meager assortment of small ornaments. pearl edge. A 19th century method of pared for tanning by the removal of Payne developed a style of splendid the hair or wool, epidermis, and flesh. simplicity, perhaps made necessary by edge decoration executed by gilding the edge of the book, tooling a pattern (61, 261) having to cut his own tools, which gave pencil case (pencil box). A colloquial ex- his design a simplicity and individuality on the gilt and then removing the gold where the tools have not impressed a pression for a fold of unadhered paper whichtheyotherwisemighthave pattern. At one time pearl edge bind- in the hinge of a book caused by the lacked. His style consisted essentially endpaper not adhering properly, by too of the repetition of small floral forms ings were considered to be ideal wed- ding gifts. loose a turn-in, or by a spine inlay that in borders of radiating corners, the is too large, etc. (97, 133) background being formed with dots pearl filler. CALCIUM SULFATE. pencil in. The process of applying glair and circles. pearl-sewn bindings. EMBROIDERED BIND- directly into the blind impressions of a Paynedescribedhisbindingsas INGS incorporating seed pearls. decoration before laying on the gold "bound in the very best manner," or pebbled-grain. See: BOARDING (1). leaf. (130) "finished in the most magnificent man- pebbling. A rough finish on a coated penetration. 1. The entering of an adhes- ner," not because of mere vanity on his paper, produced by passing the paper ive into an adherend. This property is part, but simply as the only true de- between roughened rollers under high measured by the depth to which the penning 195 permanent paper

adhesive penetrates the adherend. See perfect binding. See: ADHESWE BINDING. laterally on the spindles to change the also: ABSORBENCY; PERMEABILITY; perfected. An edition binding term indi- spacing between the lines of perfora- STRIKE IN. 2. A general term for the cating that both sides of thesheet tions. The minimum spacing varies infusion of a tanning material into the (i.e., the outer and inner forms) have with different makes of machines. thickness of a hide or skin.3. The been printed. The sheet is then ready The angle perforator can punch in entering of an ink vehicle into the sur- to be folded and gathered with other both directions at one feeding. This face of a paper or cloth.(17, 143, perfected and folded sheets to form a machine is actually a combination of 309) book ready to be bound. two rotary perforators at right angles penning. The process of blackening the perforating. I. The process of punching to each other, with feed rollers to carry blind impressions of a decoration with round or slotted holes in paper, either the sheets of paper from one set of carbon or Chinese ink,in order to during printing or as a separate opera- perforating heads to the other. accentuate the blind lines. (130) tion, so that one portion of the sheet By means of specialattachments, pen ruling machine. See: RULING MA- may be detached from another, e.g., most rotary perforators can also per- CHINES. checks from a checkbook. 2. The proc- form other operations, such as scoring, penta-chlorophenol (p. c. p.). A crystal- ess of punching holes, generally ar- crimping, and slitting. (320, 339) line compound (C6C150H), produced ranged in the form of a letter or let- perforator. A punch or stamp which per- by the reaction of hexachlorobenzene ters, symbol, etc., in one or more leaves forates a mark of ownership in the leaf with sodium hydroxide, or of chlorine of a publication, for the purpose of of a book. They may be hand- or with phenol, and used, in concentra- identifying the ownership of the mate- power-operated, the latter usually by tions of 0.1% by weight of the paper, rial. See also: EMBOSSING (3). (189, means of compressed air. as a fungicide. It is applicable either as 264, 339) performance standards. Standards that an aqueous or non-aqueous solution. perforating at press. PERFORATING (1) measure the performance of a product Being a highly chlorinated substance, it done on a printing press by means of as a unit, e.g., a binding, but which do must be used in the presence of suffi- a special perforating rule in the print- not specify materials and methods of cient alkali to compensate for the prob- ing form. Perforating at press gener- manufacture. Performance standards, able liberation of hydrochloric acid, or ally does not produce as satisfactory at least as related to edition and library in such small quantities, i.e., less than results as perforating as a separate op- binding, are largely meaningless, be- 0.1%, so as not to endanger the paper eration, butitismore economical. ,:ause by implication, if not fact, they severely evenifitdoes decompose (274) measure the durability of the binding slightly. To avoid the danger of acidity, perforating machine. A machine used for in the short run only, while the nee4 p. c. p. is sometimes used as the sod- perforating paper. Two types of per- for the book, and therefore its binding, ium salt, sodium pentachlorophenate, forating machines are in general use: may extend well into the long run. which is less likely to produce difficulty 1) the vertical, or flat-bed perforator, periodbinding.See: CONTEMPORARY because of acidity. P. c. p. is colorless in which the punches and dies are set BINDING (2). and is not likely to produce an apprec- in a straight line, with the punches set permanent-durable paper. See: DURABIL- iable odor. (198) in a moving bar and the dies in the ITY (OF PAPER); PERMANENT PAPER. pepper boxes. The pattern appearing on surface of the table. Several sheets may permanent materials. Those (book) mate- the grain surface of a leather produced be fed at one time between the punches rials, as defined by the Library Binding from grubby hides. The pattern actu- anddiesagainstadjustableguides. Institute,which alibraryconsiders ally consists of grub holes, and often When the machine is activated, the bar basictoitscollection.Literaryor resembles (in miniature) the holes pro- descends and punches a series of holes monetary value, replaceability, age, ac- duced by shotgun pellets. See also: in the paper. The punches are adjust- curacy of information, etc., may be WARBLES. (363) able so that some may be removed pertinent criteria, but the essential cri- per cent points. A method of expressing when the holes are to be punched only terion is the importance of a specific a strength factor in paper. It is calcu- part way across the sheet; and 2) volume to a particular library's collec- lated to a basis weight of 100 points by rotary perforators, which are capable tion. (208) dividing the actual test results by the of punching round holes, slots, or slits. permanent paper. A paper manufactured actual basis weight and multiplying by The punches and dies are mounted on in such a manner as to resist chemical 100. (17) discs that revolve against each other, action which may result from impur- percent wet tensile strength. The tensile the paper being fed between them, with ities in the paper itself, as a result of strength of a paper when itis com- one edge against a guide. This type may materials or methods used in manufac- pletely saturated with water. It is ex- be set to perforate struck lines as well. ture, or agents from the surrounding pressed as a percentage of the dry ten- Some types of perforators raise the atmosphere while in storage. A "per- sile strength of the same paper. See punches for struck lines, while others manent" paper, therefore, is one which also: WET STRENGTH PAPER. (17) drop the dies; however, in either case, resists the effects of aging to a greater perching. The process in the manufacture the punches do not enter the dies, so degree than is usual in ordinary paper. of some leathers wherein the skin is the sheets are left unperforated. This Several levels of permanence have clampedina wooden frame(the movement of dies or punches is syn- been arbitrarily established. In descend- "perch") and flexed by a scraping ac- chronized with the opening of a paper ing order, they are: tion on the flesh side with a moon gate so that the perforating will start 1. The greatest degree of permanence knife (or arm perch). Perching is done at the desired point. The same result obtainable, within the limits of present- on very soft, delicate skins, as well as may be obtained on other machines by day technology. These papers would be on some furred or wooled skins. Es- removing some of the punches. Rotary usedforstateorotherarchives, sentially, it is a variation of STAKING. perforatorscanaccomodateseveral treaties,politicalrecords,etc.This (306) perforating heads which are adjustable quality of paper would be manufac- permanganate bath 196 phloroglucinol

tured from 100% rag (new linen), These specifications do not of course again in running water and resized. flax, cotton, or hemp, undyed and un- have any bearing on the permanence (198, 364) bleached, and produced by hand or (or lack of it) of papers already in permeability. The rate at which a fluid machine. It would contain no loading existence. The prevailing opinion today (in either gaseous or liquid form) pene- or color additives, and beating and seems to be that any paper can be made trates into a material. The rate may be drying would be controlled so as to ob- more or less "permanent" by the addi- a result of pressure differentials and/or tain maximum foldingandtearing tion of a suitable alkaline reserve. Mod- capillary forces. Permeability is of con- strengths. The physical and chemical ern papers containing, for example, at siderable importance in both paper- criteria of permanence would be: least 3% (5y weight of the paper) of making and printing. (17, 58) Persian. A vegetable-tanned leather pro- pH valueminimum of 7.0, maximum 9.5 duced from sheepskins originating in aciditymaximum of 0.04% the Indian Subcontinent, and tanned in India, mainly in the south, and espec- folding strength decrease after 72 hours at 100 C.maximum of 25% ially around Madras. See also: E.I. alpha-cellulose contentminimum of 95 %decrease after 72 hours at (61) 100' C.maximum of 1.5 Persian calf. A vegetable-tanned leather closely resembling calfskin, at one time copper numbermaximum of 1.2; maximum after 72 hours at 100° C..5 produced in Persia (Iran) from the rosin contentmaximum of 1.2%, skins of mountain sheep. (291, 306) Persian morocco. Reputedly, a vegetable- iron contentmaximum of 0.005% tannedleatherproducedoriginally chlorine contentmaximum of 0.05% from goat skin and subsequently from the skins of various hair sheep. Itis 2.Intermediatelevel, providing a calcium of magnesium carbonate are said to be tough and strong but lacking high degree of permanence, yet consid- sometimes classedasarchival, since in permanence, supposedly because it erably lower than that of the highest they are expected to last in the range is tanned from the condensed class of level. This type of paper would be used of 300 to 500 years. The addition of an tannins. The leather is finished with a for important documents, including let- alkaline reserve into any given paper, smooth grain surface in imitation of ters of government officials, and special however, will not restore strength to calfskin, which makes the expression editions of books intended for perman- the paper if it has already been weak- "morocco" misleading. (264) ent retention (and which are to be re- ened by deleterious influences, either Persian skiver. A thin grain-layer split of tained under the best of environmental during manufacture, or thereafter. Fur- leather taken from a PERSIAN sheepskin. conditions while still being made avail- thermore, the length of time an alkaline (61) able to readers). This class of paper reserve will retain its effectiveness de- petitsfers. "Small irons." Small hand would consist of 100% rag (clean, pends, at least to a certain extent, on finishing tools. undyed rags of linen, cotton, or hemp), the level of pollution in the atmos- pit See: HYDROGEN-ION CONCENTRATION. with any materials used for coloring to phere, and the quantity of harmful phenol (carbolic acid). A soluble, crystal- be as lightfast as possible and free from chemicals added to the paper during line compound (C6H00), that is acidic, acid. The maximum decrease in folding manufacture. Finally, while an alkaline forms metallicsalts,andisreadily endurance after 72 hours at 100' C. reserve may retard or prevent chemical halogenated, sulfonated, and nitrated. should not exceed 30%, and the alpha deterioration, it has no influence on the It is used in the manufacture of phe- cellulose minimum should be 92%. fundamental durability of the paper, nolic and epoxy resins, various dyes, 3. The lowest level, used principally i.e., its inherent strength, which is en- and the like. Phenol, even in its purest for printing first editions, issues of im- hanced, for example, by the use of form (ice crystals), has a tendency to portant books, periodical publications, long-fibered stock, and decreased by turn a pinkish color. It is also used at important reference books, and the theuse of excessive loadings,filler times as a preservative inpaste. In like, all of which will be stored under clays, etc. (17, 143, 198) concentrated forms it must be carefully relatively good storage conditions. This permanganate bath. A solution of one of handled, as it can cause severe burns. paper would consist of 30% rag, mixed the permanganate salts, such as salts of (198) with 70% carefully bleached sulfite permanganic acid, potassium perman- Philadelphia patent-back guard. A heavy wood pulp, or 35% wood pulp and ganate, sodium permanganate, etc.. used cloth guard to which a folio of a large 35% other fiber, e.g., esparto, straw, to remove stains from paper. Thirty blankhook is sewn before being sewn etc.; maximum ash content to be 10%, grams of the permanganate in one liter to webbings. Itis used mainly where except for coated and other special of slightly warm water is the usual con- the sewing must have greater flexibility papers required for color printing, etc. centration. The sheets, subsequent to than that afforded by sewing on web- The coloring material would not be treatment, are washed under running hings alone.Italso contributes con- poorer in light fastness than ultrama- water until as much of the purple stain siderably to the strength of the sewing. rine, or poorer than Prussian blue in its of the permanganate as possible is re- phloroglucinol(phloroglucinstain). A resistance to acidity. Alpha cellulose moved. Not all of the salt can be re- sweet, crystalline phenol (C6F13(OH)3), minimum would be 87% and the maxi- moved bywashing;therefore,the used in conjunction with hydrochloric mum decrease infolding endurance sheets are generally placed in a bath of acid and alcohol as a test solution to after 72 hours at 100' C. would be 1 ounce of sulfurous acid to 1/2 liter of detect the presence of mechanical wood 40%. Other specifications would be the water until the original colorisre- pulp in paper, which it turns red. It has same as the intermediate type. stored. The sheets are then washed noadvantageOverthe HERTZBERG photocopying paper 197 pigment

STAIN other than that it can be applied ing. The defect itself does not register in the late 1830s and the 1840s. A directly to the paper. (143) from sheet to sheet, but its effect may similar technique was used on cloth, photocopying paper. A base paper of su- be seen on succeeding sheets. Picking and althoughglazedpictorialcloth perior quality that is coated with a fast can usually be overcome by reducing bindings were never as common as light-sensitiveemulsionforusein the viscosity of the ink and/or running those boarded or wrappered, they were photocopying machines, and also for the press at a lower speed. (17, 323) used occasionally until the end of the designs and layouts. The paper is pro- pickling. The process in leather manufac- 19th century. (69) duced from pulps ranging from 100% ture of bringing hides and skins into pictorial calf bindings. Bookbindings pro- cotton fiber to 100% chemical wood a condition of equilibrium in prepara- duced in the early 19th century, ex- pulps,thelatter being generallyof tion for tannage. Pickling, which is a ecuted by painting the leather a brown papermaking alpha grade. The pulp process developed specifically for use or black color, generally by means of must be highly purified as all metallic inmodern chrometannages,takes acid, or by transferring a decoration to residues must be removed. The paper placefollowing LIMING,UNHAIRING, the leather from copperplateprints. is also given wet strength treatment to and DEL1MING (and BATING), and is See also:"PAINTED" BINDINGS. enable itto withstand the acids and used particularly in the case of sheep- pieced. 1. Any space on the cover of a alkalis and other photographic solu- skins. The skins are de-wooled (the book which has a piece of another tions used in photographic processes. wool being more valuable than the material attached toit. The termis Inertnesstophotographic sensitizing skins) and are then pickled, drained most often applied to leather used for solutions is important, as are uniformity and packed, ready for transportation labels and titles. Also called "titled." of ccl.or and surface. The base paper is to the tannery. Pickling takes place in 2. A book cover made up of several finished with gelatin sizing so as to pre- asolution of 12% salt and 1.2% different parts or pieces of different vent the photographic emulsion coating sulfuric acid (previously diluted with materials. 3. The process in fine bind- from penetrating too deeply into the water). The salt solution should re- ing of joining two smaller pieces of the sheets. (17) main above 10% and the acid above same leather to make a full cover by . Paper used as the 0.8%. Furthermore, if the proportion using pieces which individuallyare base for various photosensitive systems of salt to acid is incorrect the skins may not large enough to cover the book. which use silver halide crystals as the be damaged; consequently, both must (12, 25, 94) light sensitive receptors. It is acare- be carefully controlled. Pickled skins pigment. A natural or synthetic, organic fully made paper produced either from also must not be allowed to become or inorganic substancethatimparts cotton fibers or highly purified chemi- dry, as drying may cause the acid to color, as well as black and white, and cal wood pulp. The paper must be free weaken theskin structure, and the is used in the manufacture of paint, of all substances, especially chemicals, crystallization of salt on, or in,the printing inks,etc. A pigmentisin- which might adversely affect laterproc- grain may lead to SALT SPROUT. soluble in its liquid medium, and im- essing and it must also possess high wet The salt serves to preserve the skin, partsitscoloringeffectsimply by strength so as to permit processing in just as in the case of salting for the spreading over the surface to which both acid and alkaline solutions. Photo- purpose of curing, while the acidity, it is applied. A pigment produced by graphic paper ranges in thickness from if below a pH of 2.0, inhibits nearly precipitating a dye on a colorless, or 0.0025 to 0.015 inch. (17) all known putrefyingbacteria. The inert, base, thus rendering the dye in- pick. 1. Paper pulp or fibers which adhere treated skins, therefore, may be stored soluble, is called a LAKE, while a syn- to the wet or dry sections of the paper- for several months, provided they are thetic organic compound thatisin- making machine.See also:PICKING. 2. kept cool; however, at temperatures soluble and can be used directly as a A particle of hardened ink, dirt,or above 32C., the acidity may cause pigment is called a "toner." paper, or a piece of , damage to the skins. Pickling, while Pigments are generally classified ac- embedded in the hollow of printing stopping bacterial damage, does not cording to their origin. Those produced type, filling up its face and causing a stop the formation of molds, which by processing colored earths arere- dark spot to appear on the printed favor pH values of less than 5.0, and ferred to as EARTH COLORS, while those sheet. 3. A small particle of metal on which can cause green, black, or white produced by chemical processes from anelectrotypeorstereotypeplate, discolorations,aswellasaloss of inorganic raw materials that are not caused by a slight defect in the mold, gloss or face on the finished leather. in themselves coloring matter are called and resulting in a spot or blot on the This is due to their attack on the grain artificial inorganic pigments. The finest printed sheet. 4. A white spoton the structure, and often manifests itself in grades of earth colors occur in specific printed surface of a sheet, and caused uneven dyeing. Mold growth can be areas, e.g., French yellow ochre, Italian by ink adhering to the form and pulling prevented by theuseof fungicides raw and burnt sienna, etc. Early pig- a particle from the surface of the paper. added to the pickle liquor in a con- ments included the native earths, e.g., 5. The condition in an adhesive which centration of about 0.001% of the red iron oxides and yellow ochre, as causes it to transfer unevenly from an weight of the liquor. A typical pickle well as manufactured pigments, such adhesive applicator due to high surface fungicideisparanitrophenol.(248, as crimson lake, lampblack, and white tack. 306, 363) lead. picking. A lifting of the coating of a pick strength. See: BONDING STRENGTH. Pigments should be chemically inert, paper, or even the paper fibers them- pictorial bindings. Wrappered bindings so as not to react in an undesirable selves, from the surface of a sheet. withpictorialdecorations,generally manner with other pigments or liquids It generally occurs during printing and executed in one color, and usually on with which they may be mixed, and is caused when the lifting stress result- a black or colored background. Gilt they should also be lightfast and not ing from tackiness of the ink exceeds pictorial decoration on the spines of fade or darken when exposed to typical the strength of the paper or its coat- publishers' cloth bindings was common indoor lighting, such as indirect sun- pigment leather 198 P. I. R. A. tested

light,artificial light of normal inten- look something like a pineapple, and each GATHERING (2) and are also dis- sity, and controlled temperature and used in the same position as a FLEURON. cernible evenifthebolthas been humidity variations. All pigments of See also: TWISTED PINEAPPLE. (250) opened. See also: POINT (5, 6). (17, very high quality will endure indefi- pin grain. A small pebbled grain pattern 341) nitelyunderproperconditions,al- inaleather,characteristic of such pin seal. 1. A leather produced from the though some may undergo loss of color leather as MOROCCO. skin of a baby or very young seal. if exposed to direct sunlight. Cf: DYE. pinhead morocco. A MOROCCO of the It has a much finer grain and a more (17, 195, 233) hard-grained type, but with a grain lustrous finish than the usual sealskin. pigment leather. A leather finished with pattern smaller and less distinct than 2. A very small, fine-grained leather materials containing opaque pigments that of the morocco commonly re- effect resembling the natural grain of which obscure the grain pattern, in- ferred to as hard-grained. As genuine a young seal. (156, 256) cluding any defects it may have. When morocco leather always has this "hard- pipey leather. A leather having a grain a leather is buffed very deeply in order grained" surface, the so-called pinhead surface that forms coarse, sharp, and to remove grain defects,itisoften morocco is a misnomer. (154) loose wrinkles when itis bent grain necessary to apply large amounts of pinhead style. A style of decoration ex- surface inward. It is a defect caused pigment in the finish to obtain a uni- ecuted by means of a stamp cut with by the action of bacteria on the grain form appearance. An increase in the fine dotted lines on its face. The fine surface of the hide or skin. See also: amount of pigment used requires an curved or spiral lines are broken into PIPING (1). (363) increase in the amount of binding ma- a series of small dots and are arranged piping. 1. A defect in leather appearing terial used, so as to prevent the pig- to form a web or network over the as a double-skin effect when the leather ment from chalking and flaking off. entire cover or around a central panel is bent or flexed, and resulting from See also: ANILINE LEATHER. (363) surrounding a coat of arms. This style the grain layer of the leather separat- pigment properties. The characteristics or came into existence in France in the ing from the corium. It is caused by attributes of a pigment in addition to later years of the reign of Louis XIII. excessive staking during manufacture, its color properties, and used in evalu- Inthis type of ornamentation there or by too great pressure during bur- ating or describing it. (233) were fainttraces of baroque orna- nishing. Sheepskin, because of the ex- pigskin. A leather produced from the ments. The dotted stamps were also cessive fatty tissue in the interior of skin of the domestic pig (Sus scrofa). used on the spines of books and inside the skin (especially in older animals), For use in bookbinding, it is vegetable the covers when doublures were used. is particularly affected. 2. A type of tanned (or alum tawed). Pigskin has See also: POINTILLt ( 1). (104) crease or ribbing in paper caused by the characteristic grainpatternpro- pinholes.1. Defects in paper appearing irregular tension in reeling, by mois- duced by the hair follicles, which are as small punctures which are caused ture, or because the paper was wound arranged in (roughly) triangular groups by fine particles of alum, clay, sand, too tightly after sizing. (60, 291, 363) of three. The nature of pigskin is such etc.,being crushed andfallingout P. 1. R. A. tested. An accelerated deterio- that the holes remaining following re- when the paper is calendered. Very ration (decay) test designed for vege- moval of the bristles car te seen on hard grit may also be imbedded in table-tanned bookbinding leathers, and the flesh side as well as the grain side. the steel rolls of the calender itself and developed by the Printing Industries Pigskin is a tough and durable leather produce pinholes at each revolution. Research Association of Great Britain. (and iseven more durable perhaps 2. Large pores in a thin paper where Essentially, the test involves treating a when alum tawed) but is somewhat fine fibrous material or fillers fail to specimen of leather with sulfuric acid stiff and intractable. In addition, it does fill the voids between larger fibers. 3. and hydrogen peroxide. The P. I. R. A. not tool readily, except in blind, al- Minute, almost imperceptible pitsin test is actually an ACCELERATED AGING though very finebindings tooledin the surface of a coated paper. 4. Very TEST and itis said that it will reveal both blind and gold have been pro- small transparent dots which appear (in the course of seven days) whether duced. It is a rugged leather best used in a lithographic paper after develop- the leather is likely to undergo greater on large books which can more readily ment and which, unless covered by an deterioration in a polluted atmosphere emphasizeitsruggedcharacteristics. opaque medium, may affect printing. than in one that is not polluted. Pigskin was used extensively as a book- 5. Very small holes in a fabric. 6. Small A sample ofleather21/2 inches binding leather in Germany from about punctures foundintheuntrimmed square and weighing from 2 to 6 grams 1550 to 1640, usually on books having margins of printed books and caused is placed on a glass plate, flesh side up, wooden boards. by the pins attached to the tympan and evenly dampened with a 5% solu- The term "pigskin" does not apply to used in obtaining perfect registration tion of sulfuric acid in the proportion leather produced from the FLESH SPLIT of inner and outer forms. They are of 1 ml of acid solution per gram of (1) of a pigskin. (69, 236, 351, 363) usually not seen in folios because they airdry leather.After remainingat areinthe fold,unless, asin some room temperature overnight, hydrogen pile-up. The volume of leather per unit very early books, there are two pairs peroxide (10 vol. strength) is applied weight, i.e., the number of square feet of pins, in which case they will be uniformly tothespecimen,inthe of leather 1/41 inch (8 iron, or approxi- seen in mately 10.67 ounces) thick per 100 the center of the top and proportion of 0.6 ml per gram of bottom margins of each leaf. In quartos leather. The specimenisthen given pounds of leather of 12% moisture, they will be in or very near the crease additionaltreatments with hydrogen or115.5dividedbytheapparent of the head BOLT, and evidence of peroxide every 24 hours. This pro- specific gravity of the leather of 12% them can often be found even if the cedure is said to cause unsatisfactory moisture. (363) bolt has been opened. In they leather (leather lacking in permanence) piling. See: CESSING. appear in the lower fore edge margins tobecomeblackenedandgelatin- pineapple. A decorative ornament cut to of the first four or last four leaves of ized whereas satisfactory (permanent) plain binding 199 plate

leather will be unaffected, except for France during the 15th and 16th cen- of a paper such as glassine, or used possiblediscolorationoftheedges. turies as a center decoration for book in the papermaking mixtures, to impart Changes in the color of dyestuffs are covers. Hand-painted specimens are to softness and flexibility. Usual paper- said to be immaterial. (237, 351) be found on books bound for Jean making plasticizersincludeglycerol, plain binding. A style of binding executed Grolier, the plaquette being impressed sorbitol,invertsugar,phthalicacid in Colonial America and characterized in gesso, painted, and then fitted into esters, various minerals oils, organic by the use of sheepskin and calfskin the upper board. See also: CAMEO BIND- esters of phosphoric acid, and the like. decorated sparsely in blind. This austere INGS. (347) (17, 235, 309) and rugged "style" of binding certainly plasticity. That property of a material. plastic jacket. A removable plastic cover accounted for the largest number of such as an adhesive, which permits or designed toprotect books books bound in Colonial America. A continuous and permanent deformation expected to receive hard use. It is often limited number of plain vellum and half without failure upon the application used on school books. sheep bindings with leather corners and of a force which exceeds the yield plastic welding. The process of sealing marbled paper sides were also produced. value of the material. (309) two or more layers of material by (115, 200) plasticized cover material. A transparent means of the introduction of a high plain edges. See: WHITE EDGES. film laminated to a decorative cover frequency voltagefield between two plain-finishedfabric. A finishedfabric paper. A heavy cartridge paper is gen- electrodes. The electrodes conduct the which has been given no surface de- erally used as the base paper to avoid highfrequency current throughthe sign, such as embossing, graining, etc. the possibility of the paper splitting material and also bring the surfaces (341) after the book has been in use for inclosecontact,thusensuringan plain finishing. A book decorated entirely some time. Some library binders lami- efficient weld. When power is applied, with a single or double fillet border nate the jacket of a book and incor- the agitation of the molecules within ingilt on the covers, and only the porate it in the cover of the case. (139) the plastic causes a rapid rise in tem- author and title lettered on the spine. plasticizer. I. A material, such as glycerin peratureuntilthe softening pointis (256) (glycerol), sorbitol, triethylene glycol, reached, whereupon the plastic sheets plain gilt. The edges of a book that are etc., incorporated into an adhesive dur- fuse along the seam of the electrodes. gilded with no color, marbling, or pic- ing manufacture to increase itsflexi- Because the line of fusing must be torial images under the gold, and no bility, workability, or distensibility. The outside the area of the document being tooling or gauffering following gilding. addition of the plasticizer may cause sealed, it is necessary to cut the plastic (154, 371) a reductionin melt viscosity, lower sheets somewhat larger than the doca- plaited headband. A HEADBAND consisting the temperature of the second-order ment. (276) of strips of skin, usually alum-tawed transition, or lower the elastic modulus plate. 1. An illustration printed separately and stained pink. The plaited head- of the solidified adhesive. 2. A material from the text of the book, cften on a band, while rare in English fine bind- added to the stock in the manufacture different type of paper. Plates may be ings, is common in German examples of the late 15th and early 16th cen- turies. It represents the strongest type PLAITED HEADBAND of headband ever constructed. Two thongs were plaited around a former of rolled vellum which was already sewn to the text block. In addition, the thongs were threaded through holes made in the leather at the head of the spine where it was cut off instead of being turned in. The closely formed and set appearance of these headbands indicate that the thongs were worked while wet. (236) plant wax. A WAX obtained from various plants, including Rhus verniciflua, as well as species of Euphorhiacea, which is frequently included in leather dress- ings. Plant waxes are cheaper and gen- erally more easily available than many of the organic waxes, and are said to be useful in providing body to the dressing at a slightly higher softening temperature. In addition, unlike the animal waxes, they are more resistant to rancidity, and they also emulsify well with water. See also: CANDELILIA WAX; CARNAUBA WAX; JAPAN WAX. (291) 15th century German plaited headband plaquette. A small tablet of metal baying a design in relief and cast from a wax mold. The principle was adopted in

22 plate attachment 200 point

bound into a book, tipped onto a blank other than that which identifies it and,' left hand part of the plow fits into a leaf (or a leaf bearing a printed cap- or whichrelatesspecificallytothe runner on the left cheek of the LYING tion), loose in a pocket or portfolio, illustrations. (156) PRESS, while the other block is fitted or bound in a separate volume. Plates platina. See: PLATINUM I EAF. with the adjustable knife. The knife are not generally included in the pagi- plating.1. The process of imparting a is generally moved inward by the turn nation of the book. See also: PLATE AT- smooth, glossy surface to a leather by of a screw, cutting into the leaves as TACHMENT. 2. A flat block of wood or pressing itagainst a highly polished, the plow is moved back and forth. metal, usually of copper, nickel or zinc, heated metal plate under very great When, where, or by whom the plow on the surface of which is a design or pressure. The process is analogous to was invented is unknown, but inall reproduction of a type form, and which embossing exceptthatinthelatter likelihood it was not used to any great is used for printing, engraving, emboss- process the plateis engraved with a extent before the early part of the 16th ing, etc. The method of printing may "grain." The term also refers to the century.Itsuse thereafter, however, be relief, intaglio, or planographic. 3. process of imparting a smooth and was widespread in all classes of bind- To make an electrotype or stereotype. polished surface to the leather covers ing until sometime around 1840, when (156, 234) of a book. See also: POLISHING PLATES. the GUILI OTINE cutter was introduced. plate attachment. The method used to 2. The process of imparting a special The plow is now used very little ex- attach a plate to a leaf or section of finish to a paper by subjecting itto cept in the best of fine leather bind- a l-ook. The various methods include: heavy pressure (and sometimes slight ing. (236, 237, 339) 1) an illustration printed on a separate friction) between plating rollers while ply.1. One of the separate layers of sheet and pasted to a narrow guard itis interleaved between metal plates paper or board comprising the sheet of paper or linen which is then folded that are polished or covered with a formed on a multi-cylinder papermak- around the section and sewn with it material different from the paper itself, ing machine. Each cylinder adds one (plate guarded and hooked); 2) a plate e.g., linen, thus producing on the paper layer (web), which is then pressed to secured by folding the margin of the animpressioncharacteristicofthe another, both or all of which adhere edge of the leaf on which it is printed material used. (17, 306) firmly upon drying. The thickness of around the section and sewing it with platinumleaf. A very heavy metallic theresultant boardisgenerally ex- thesection(platehooked on own element (Pt), that is typically grayish pressed in the number of layers of guard); 3) plates printedto form a white, non-corroding, ductile and mal- which itis composed. The equivalent section of two or more leaves and leable, and which can be beaten into ply ratings in thousandths of an inch inserted into or folded around a section leaves, although not as thin as gold are given below: and sewn with it(plates folded in or leaf. It is used with, or in lieu of, gold around sections); and 4) two plates leaf in decorating bookbindings. Itis Ply Inches joined together by means of a strip of suitable for the best work and, being 2 0.012 paper or linen, thus forming a section thickerthan goldleaf,iseasierto 3 0.015 which is inserted into or folded around handle. 4 0.018 asection and sewn withit(plates pleat(pleating). Any seriesoffolds, 5 0.021 guarded and joined). (82, 343) parallel but in alternating directions, 6 0.024 plate folding. An alternative name for such as the fold frequently used for 8 0.030 buckle folding. See: FOLDING; PLATE largeinserts.Seealso: CONCERTINA 10 0.036 ATTACHMENT. FOLD. 12 0.042 plate mark (plate line). An impressed line pleated corner. The folds in the cloth or 14 0.048 denoting the boundary of a plate used leather made when the covers have 16 0.056 in making an engraving. Itis caused rounded corners. See: ROUND CORNER. 2. One of the sheets laminated to build by the pressure applied to make the plow (plough). A device used for trim- up a pasted board of given thickness. impression on the sheet. The part of ming the leaves of a book, usually one (17, 278) the paper on which pressure was ap- bound by hand.Itconsists of two plied is depressed and smoother than parallel blocks of wood about 4 inches pneumatic press. A type of press in which thesurroundingarea.Occasionally wide and 8 inches long connected by pressure is applied by means of com- faint traces of ink can be seen along two guide rods and one threaded rod, pressed air. Such presses are used in the platelineif the plate was not with a cutting blade attached to the mechanized binderies for a variety of properly cleaned before printing. (156) lower edge of one of the blocks. The purposes, and, although they cannot platen. The flat part of a printing press supply the extreme pressures available which pressesthe sheetagainstthe PLOW with the HYDRAULIC PRESS, they do form; also the movable plate of a offer the advantages of speed of opera- standing or nipping press which de- tion and cleanliness. (140) scends and pressesbooks or other pocket. See: BOOK POCKET. materials against the bed of the press. poetical binding. A bookbinding deco- plate folded in or around sections (plates rated with looped banderoles impressed guarded and joined). See: PLATE AT- withpoeticalinscriptionsingothic TACHMENT. type. It was a style of decoration be- plate stamp. See: PANEL STAMP. lieved to have been executed in Austria plates volume. The volume or volumes in the latter half of the 15th century. of asetcontaining theillustrations (347) pertaining to the text. The plates vol- point. 1. One thousandth of an inch. The ume usually has no printed matter point is used in expressing the thick-

221 pointillé 201 polyester fibers

ness of paper or board, as well as other Florimond Badier and Mac6 Ruette, materials, but not leather. leather covers of a book. Polishersare See:LEATHER although in terms of sheer magnifi- generally made of brass, and are either SUBSTANCE TABLE. 2. The expression of cence of execution, it reached its pin- round on inthe shape of a wedge, certain values of the properties of pa- nacle earlierinthe bindings associ- the former being used on the covers, per, e.g., points per pound, or pounds ated with the name (LE) GASCON. 2. A per point. 3. The unit of measure for the latter on the spine.See also:BURN- generic termindicatingaformof ISHER(S) (2); POLISHING. (130, 152) printer's type. A point is approximately dotted book decorations. 3. A small inch, 12-point type, for example. polishing. The process of smoothing and dotted finishing tool.See also:FANFARE adding gloss to the covers of a book being 12/72 or inch in body. One STYLE; PINHEAD STYLE.SeePLATE \mt. inch equals 72.25433 points, while 72 by mechanical means. The process in- (94, 140, 280) volves working the leather at first with points equal 0.9962 inch. The width of points per pound. A ratio derived by a line of type (or "measure") is deter- a slightly warm tool, followed by re- dividing the basis weight of a sheet peated workings with polishers heated mined inpica (12-point) ems. The of paper in pounds by itsthickness depth of a page of type is similarly to higher temperatures. Small circular inmils.Itisusedtodescribethe motions are used to prevent wide areas measured in picas or ems. 4. A book density of paper or board.See also: of darkened streaks from showing. The collector's term for a particular char- APPARENT DENSITY. ( 17, 60) technique of polishing leather covers acteristic of text, type, form, etc., that poker-work. A form of decorationin- dates back at least to the second half distinguishes states, issues, and editions volving the burning of designsinto' from one another. 5. A thin piece of of the 14th century. (161, 236, 335) the leather with hot pokers or elec- polishing iron.See:POLISHER. metal with a point projecting from one trically heated tools. (261) end, and secured at its other end to polishing plates. Large smooth plates, polaire. The leather case or satchel in usually of metal, usedinthefinal the tympans of some printing presses; which monks in earlier times placed pressing of a book to impart smooth- itis used to insure accurate register their books. Polaires were usually lack- ness to the leather. The use of polish- in feeding. 6. A mark or hole made ing any decoration, unless made for ing plates was probably infrequent be- on or in sheets in printing to serve as a wealthy persons, in which case they fore the19th guide in folding. (17, 42, 156) century.Early plates were usually decorated witl, a design were made of tin or horn, while later pointini. 1. A luxurious style of finishing stamped in relief. (94, 280) consisting of dotted lines and curves materials included japanned tin, iron, pole mark.See:BACK MARK. nickelledsteel,and German silver. impressed on the covers of a book. In polishedcalf. A calfskinbookbinding In more recent times, stainless steel thefirsthalf of the17th century, that has been polished to a high gloss. pointill6 was used by numerous French and polished aluminum have been used. polisher (polishing iron). A Land tool Also called "crushing plates." (236) bookbinders and/or gilders, including usedtocrush down orpolishthe polychrome decoration. A style of deco- ration characterized by the use of gold and various colors painted over the design. (347) POLISHER polychrome plaque-embossed bindings. A 15th century (Persian) style of decora- tion characterized by covers embossed with panel stamps or plaques, and then painted. The coloring gives the effect of cutwork tracery to the raised de- sign. (347) polycondensation.See:CONDENSATION (1). polyester fibers.Synthetic paper fibers prepared and spun by procedures simi- lar to those used in producing nylon. The long polymer chains in the fila- ments are arranged randomly and have very little orier'.+tion in line with the longitudinal axis of the filament; con- sequently the filaments have relatively littlestrength. Strengthisadded by drawing or stretching the filaments ap- proximately two tofivetimes their originallength. The polymer chains become oriented in this stretching, with an accompanying decrease in filament diameter along the major axis of the filament. In addition, itis possible to develop arelatively high degree of lateralorder(crystallinity)ofthe polymer chains by means of heat or solvent treatment. The filamentsas- sume the cross-sectional configuration of the spinneret hole, which is usually

2 9 rl 4. 202 portfolio

circular,althoughnon-circular cross of identical molecules linked together. nitrogen pressure. The terms "PVC" sections are also used. The drawing The polymer form of a particular type and "vinyl" are commonly used with process leaves the circular cross-sec- of molecule has both a higher molecu- reference not only to the polymer, but tional configuration unchanged; how- lar weight and a different set of physi- toallmaterials of which polyvinyl ever, it does reduce the sharpness of cal properties than a monomer, which chlorideisa constituent. PVC com- the non-round cross section. (42) is composed of single molecules. An positions are prepared by hot mixing polyesters. Resins, plastics, and synthetic example of a polymer is POLYVINYL the polymer with plasticizers and small fibers based on resins produced by con- ACETATE, while another polymer, LIN- proportionsofstabilizers, stearate densation of polyhydric alcohols with SEED OIL, containstriglycerides,i.e., lubricants, and coloring materials to polybasic acids. Linear polyesters, e.g., molecules of glycerides of linolenic give materials of a wide range of hard- polyethyleneterephthalate, aresatu- acid (C1H3202) linked togetherin ness, from rigid(withlittleor no rated thermoplastic materials that are threes.Virtuallyeveryfilm-forming plasticizer) to very soft (equal propor- widely applied in the form of drawn material is a polymer. tions of plasticizers and polymer), and melt-spun fibers and orientatedcast polymerization. A chemical reaction in- in a wide range of colors, as well as film. Unsaturated polyester resins, such volving the linkage of the molecules crystalclear.Unplasticizedflexible as the polycondensate from phthalic of a monomer to form large(r) mole- PVC foils are normally produced from anhydride,propylene glycol, and cules with a molecular weight greater vinylchloride-acetate copolymers by maleic anhydride,willcopolymerize than that of the original monomer. calendering and stretching. The prod- with minor proportions of styrene and When two or more monomers so react, uct is usually flexible, relatively non- methyl methacrylate under the influ- the processistermed copolymeriza- flammable, hard wearing, and resistant ence of an organic peroxide catalyst, tion or heteropolymerization. See also: to water and corrosion. to produce thermoset materials. CONDENSATION (1). PVC film can be heat sealed, either by polyethylene (polythene). A waxy, trans- polyvinyl acetate. A vinyl resin, one of the high frequency vibration (see: PLASTIC lucent, somewhat flexible thermoplas- clear, water-white, thermoplastic syn- WELDING), or by means of a press tic, prepared by polymerizing ethylene thetic resins produced from its mono- equipped with a special barrier to pre- at high pressure (1,000 to 4,000 atm) mer by emulsion polymerization. Poly- vent the film from adhering to the and high temperature (180 to 190°C.) vinyl acetate, abbreviated PvA, has the heated jaws. Another method of seal- in the presence of a trace of oxygen. advantage over the other resinous ad- ing is to sew the sheets together, which It is one of the lightest of the plastics, hesives in thatitis available in the is possible because of the remarkably having a specific gravity of 0.92 to form of an emubion thatis readily high tear strength of the material when 0.93. Below 60C.,polyethylene is diluted with water,iseasily applied, properly plasticized. ipsoluble in all 3olvents and is resistant and is safe to use because it contains PVC film has an attractive matte to the action of most reagents, other no flammable solvents.Inaddition, surface; however, in tne more hard- thanstrongoxidizingacids.Above there is no need to use preservatives wearing gradesitisslightly opaque. 115' C., the polymer changes from a or fungicides because it does not de- The grades used for the protcction of clear solid to a relatively low-viscosity teriorate quickly and is unaffected by archival materials are readily available melt. At this temperature and above, mold or fungi. The emulsion does ina wide range of thicknesses and exposure to air causes relatively ex- slowly hydrolyze, however, and should widths. tensive oxidativedegradation,unless not be stored for more than one or two As with other highly chlorinated ma- antioxidantsareincludedwiththe years beforeuse. Freezing also de- terials, the use of PVC should be very polymer. stroys the emulsion; therefore, precau- carefully considered in view of the pos- Polyethylene is widely used as a film tions must be taken to avoid exposing sibility of the formation of hydrochloric by itself or as a hot extrusion onto it to temperatures near or below the acid. (81, 198, 235) paper to provide additionalstrength freezing point. (37, 198, 235) porosity. That property a material has of and moisture-resistant characteristics. polyvinyl alcohol. A polymer obtained containing interstices. Itis defined as Itisalso applied to printing pape:s by alcoholysis with methanol of POLY- the ratio of the volume of the inter- to providefinish and strength. The VINYL ACETATE. The polymer is com- stices to the volume of the mass of material is also made in sheets for use pounded withglycolplasticizersto the material, and depends upon the as a facing to preventmaterials from give thermoplastic compositions that number, shape and distribution of the sticking to a surface in operations re- are available in the form of clear films, voids, as well as their shape and orien- quiring theapplicationof pressure. sheeting, and other sections, as well tation. The termissometimes used The film which does not adhere per- as monofilaments. These materials are incorrectlytoindicatepermeability. manently to waxes and many plastics all distinguished by their elastomeric (17, 139) in the unhardened state, is easily peeled properties, complete resistance to hy- porphyry vein marble. A cover marble off when the operation is completed. drocarbon solvents, and ready solu- consisting of black in large drops, a In sheet form, itis used in conserva- bility in hot water (unless specially in- brown sprinkle, followed by a scarlet tion work, in lieu of cellulose acetate solubilized).Polyvinylalcoholsolu- sprinkle, followed by large spots of lamination, to protect brittle paper, in tions are used as sizes, in water-based yellow and weak blue. The colors are which case the paper is placed between adhesives, and as aqueous suspending followed by applications of aqua regia, two sheets of the film, which is then agents. (235) all of which is made to flow down the sealed with double-sided adhesive tape polyvinyl chloride. An ethenoid polymer covers of the book to form a distinct around the edges. It may also be sealed produced as a fine white powder by vein. (97, 152) by means of plastic welding. (81, 233) both emulsion polymerization and sus- portfolio. 1. A case used to protect loose polymer. A synthetic or natural substance pensionpolymerizationofthegas, drawings, plates, papers, and the like. having a structural basis of a number vinyl chloride, when liquified under Itusually consists of two sheets of

22 j portrait 203 Powell, Roger

board covered with paper or cloth, or other preservative operation. See in the blackening of both. (173, 265, with a wide cloth or paper joint form- also: PUTREFACTIVE DAMAGE. (363) 366) ing the "spine." It generally has flaps potassium carbonate. A white deliques- potassium metabisulfite. A white, crystal- of cloth or cloth lined with paper, at- centsalt(K.,CO3),whichdissolves line salt (K0S.,05), used (infrequently) tached to the three edges of the lower readily in water to give a strong alka- in bleaching paper, and also in con- board which turn into contain the line solution. It was used in the exe- junction with sodium hypochlorite to material encUed. Tapes are attached cution of BEDFORD STYLEbindings, neutralizeanyresidualchlorinein at the head, tail, and fore edge, or TREE cm F bindings, etc. Also known paper. at the fore edge alone, to secure the as "pearl ash," and "salts of tartar." pot life. See: WORKING LIFE. contents. Abbreviatedpf.2. A size potassium ferrocyanide. A yellow, crys- pouch binding. See: GIRDLE BOOK. of board 27 by 34 inches. (102, 156, tallinesalt(K1Fe(CN)(3), prepared pounce. 1. A finely ground powder, gen- 183 ) by the reaction of potassium cyanide erally prepared from GUM SANDARAC podrait (portrait way). A leafthatis with ferrous salts, and used in combi- mixed with pumice or cuttlefish bone. taller than it is wide, i.e., the ordinary nation with other substances as a paper Originally, it was used to prevent ink upright or folio leaf. Also called "long fungicide. Although only slightly toxic from spreading on unsized paper or way." (276) under normal circumstances,itcan over an erasure, as well as to prepare post. 1. A pile of WATERLEAF (2) sheets, form extremely toxic gases if heated vellum to .ake writing ink. See: POUNC- fresh from the mold. The post is built strongly or mixed with hot, concen- ING. Itis now sometimes used as an up of recently formed sheets couched trated acids. Also called "yellow prus- adhesive in gold tooling and inthe withalternatefelts, which are then siate of potash." 098) coloring of the edges of books. 2. See: pressed. The "post"isactuallythe potassium lactate. A potassium salt of REPOUSE. quantity, which varies with the area lactic acid (KC3I-I:P3H..0), used to pouncing. The process of roughening the of the sheets, that can be conveniently treat leather in order to counteract acid surface of vellum or parchment with pressed, and usually ranges from 130 present in the leather due to manufac- POUNCE (1 )or pumice to counteract to 144 sheets. A "white post" is a pile turing processes or because of air pol- the natural greasiness of the material of several posts of pressed paper after lution (sulfur dioxide), or as a safe- and enableitto takeinkreadily. the removal of the felts. 2. The solid guard against the future incursion of Pouncing, which hasa tendency to or sectional device, usually threaded, acid or acid-forming materials.It is spoil the grain surface of vellum, has used in a POST BINDER. (140, 256) used in an aqueous solution of 7% been made less necessary by the use post binder. A form of loose-leaf (me- potassiumlactate, 0.25%paranitro- of special sizes. (140) chanical) binder. The screw posts for phenol (to inhibit mold growth), and powdered. A background decoration con- the binders may be either solid or sec- distilled water. The potassium lactate sisting of minute dots in gold. See also: tional, the former being used for stor- is said to act as a buffering agent, e.g., GOLD-POWDERED BINDINGS; SEME. age binders, the latter for books being 2KC3I-1;03 }10SO4 -> K,SO4 ( potas- powdering. A printing defect caused by actively used. As the volume of the sium sulfate) -I- 2C3I-11103 (lactic acid). thevehicle and pigment separating book increases, half-inch or inch-long There is some controversy over the during or following printing. The ve- sections are added to the posts. use of this salt as a leather/acid buf- hicle penetrates the paper but the pig- The typical binder has two posts, fer. The major arguments againstit ment is left lying loosely on the sur- which may either be self-locking or seem to be that it may cause a whitish face. The defect is caused either by lockedby capsorknurled thumb discoloration to appear on the surface an ink thatis too mobile, or by a screws. In the so-called flexible chain of the leather (potassium sulfate dis- paper that is too absorbent. 040) post binder, the book is compressed coloration)and,unlessappliedto Powell, Roger (1896- ). An English by a link mechanism operated by a both the flesh and g,ain sides of the bookbinder and restorer, born in Lon- key or crank.Itisalso possibleto leather,itis ineffectual. If the latter don and educated at Bedales. Powell construct post binders that cannot be argument iscorrect,it would mean did not become seriously interested in tampered with. A lock in the back of thatleathersusedforbookbinding bookbindinguntil1930,whenhe the binder which must be opened with could be treated only one time. studied for a year at the Central School its own key is provided for this pur- Potassium lactate should not be ap- of Arts and Craftsunder Douglas pose. plied to powdery (red rot) leathers, Cockerell and others. In 1931 he estab- Post binders use punched or slotted nor to suede leathers, as it will result lished his own bindery in Welwyn Gar- leaves, the latter allowing exchange of sheets without the binding having to be removed. A superior type of post POST BINDER binder has the top and bottom strips of metal, with the posts fastened to the bottom plate, the top plate sliding on them. The top plate has a lock ,///,/, which grips both posts, which can be /////////////////,////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////,//, ////////////////////// released by turning a key or sliding a latch. Also called "transfer binder." (320, 339) post-mortem changes. Chemical and struc- tural changes that occur naturally in ////////////////,///////////////// ///////////////////////// //////////////// ,////////////'/////////////////////// a hide or skin between the time the animal is slaughtered and the curing

22 4 practice block 204 press pin

den City and maintained it for 4 years, be a forwarding operation, rather than pressing blocks. Blocks of wood used to before joining the firmof Douglas a pre-forwarding one. (157) fill up the space in a standing press, for Cockerel! & Son in 1935. The follow- pre-library bound. A new book either in the purpose of reducing the effective ing year hc. became a partner, continu- soft or hard covers, which has been DAYLIGHT of the press and thereby the ing on with the firm until 1947. He bound by a library binder prior to, or distance the platen must be lowered. succeeded Douglas Cockerell as tutor at the time of, the original sale, but in (261) in charge of bookbinding at the Royal either case before being placed in use. pressiug boards. Flat boards of solid or College of Art, remaining there until Abbreviated "pre-bound."(12,129, laminated wood, or fiberboard, used to 1956, when he left formal teaching to 156 ) insure even pressure when books are devote himself full time to his book- preliminary leaf. Any leaf preceding the pressed. Since they are placed between binding and restoration business. text of the book, whether numbered covered books, they must be smooth Powell has maintained a long stand- (often with Roman numerals) or not. and lined with clean waste. See also: ing interest in the field of restoration Many times a preliminary leaf will be CASING-IN BOARDS. Pnd repair, together with an abiding in- blank, although it is a part of the first pressing tins. 1. Sheets of tin or zinc used terest in problems relating to the dur- gathering of the book as issued. to separate gatherings that are to be ability and permanence of materials, . A copy of a book hav- compressed before sewing 2. The thin sewing methods, and forwarding in inganinscriptionofpresentation, sheets of metal used between the free general. Because of this, as well as his usually by the author. The term is also endpapers and the board paper during outstanding craftsmanship, he has been applied to a copy of a book presented final pressing to insure even pressure of commissioned to restore many price- by the publisher. the entire surface of the text block, to less (and irreplaceable) volumes, in- preservatives. Chemical additives that pre- prevent any dampness from the ad- cluding The Book of Kells, for the vent orinhibit the development of hesive used in pasting down the board TrinityCollegeLibraryinDublin spoilageorganismsinpaper,glue, papers from reaching the flyleaves, and (1953), The Book of Durrow (1954), leather, cloth, etc., or prevent or retard to prevent indentation of the turn-ins The Book of Armagh, and The Book the deterioration of leather or paper. into the text block. (237, 335) press mark. 1. A design impressed into a of Dimma (1956-1957), as wellas press. 1. A relatively simple piece of ma- numerous comparatively early books wet web of paper, usually at the sec- chinery used to al.ply pressure evenly ond or third roll of the papermaking in the Aberdeen University Library. In over the surface of a material, e.g., one recognition of his outstanding service, machine, by means of a rubber of the various screw presses used to which carriesthedesign. See also: he was awarded the degree of Master keup a book or books in position under of Arts, honoris causa (1961), from pressure to effect adhesion of pasted WATERMARK. 2. The symbol given to a TrinityCollege,Dublin,andthe book to indicate its location in British 0. B. E. (Officer of the Order of the or glued adherends, or for some other (rarely American) usage. In the late British Empire) in 1976. purpose. See: ARMING PRESS; BACKING medievalperiodmanuscriptswere PRESS;BUNDLING PRESS; FINISHING often kept in large chests (presses), Roger Powell places soundness of PRESS; HYDRAULIC PRESS; LYING PRESS; construction,inboth materialsand and when books later came to be NIPPING PRESS; PNEUMATIC PRESS; RE- shelved in book cases, the term press method, ahead of decorative design. MOVABLE PRESS; STANDING PRESS. 2. He believes that the actual design of The machine, or apparatus, used to continued to be used. The press mark a binding must be an integral part of is still used in some older libraries to press paper onto the type, plate, en- indicatethe"press," and oftenthe the binding itself, because a book is a graving, or block. 3. In a papermaking tangible object meant to be used. His shelf and the numerical position of the machine, a pair of rolls between which volume on the shelf. As a location sys- desire to make bookbinding a work of the web of paper is passed in order to: artistic merit, and his ability to carry tem it indicates the precise position of remove water in the wet press, smooth the volume (and it can also be used to out this desire have made him one of and level the sheet in the smoothing England'soutstandingbookbinders. press, or apply surface treatments to maximize the number of volumes that (50, 205) can be shelved in a given area), but it the sheet in the size press. (17, 156, lacks flexibility and is completely use- practice block. A device on which to prac- 261) less as a browsing system. The simplest tice lettering and decoration of the pressboard. A tough, dense, highly glazed form is a letter followed by two num- spine of a book. It consists of a block rag or chemical wood pulp board used bers, indicating the section, the shelf, of wood, the edge of which is rounded where strength and stiffness arere- and the volume on the shelf, as A.2.13, to simulate the curved spine of a book. quired of a relatively thin sheet. It is This edge is covered with leather that or section A, second shelf, thirteenth produced in several colors, including volume. Other, more complex, systems has been pasted over a strip of board brown, black, red, and gray, with a are also used, sometimes to indicate the width of the spine. The board gives mottled surface thatissmooth and subjects,sizes,etc.Press marks are a resiliency and response to the pres- highly polished. It is almost as hard as found on the spine of the volume, on a sure of the finishing tool similar to that a sheet of fiber board and is used for of the spine of a book. (130) label attached to the spine, on the fly- the covers of notebooks and tablets. leaf or the pastedown, on the title page pre-bound (pre-binding). See: PRE-LIBPARY (339) or its verso, or on the fore edge of BOUND. pressing. 1. The process in leather manu- books that were at one time shelved pre-forwarding. The processes in book- facture of removing the bulk of water fore edge outward (usually because binding preliminary to the gluing-up of from wet leather by means of a hy- they were chained). Press marks can the spine, i^^'uding folding, gathering, draulic press. 2. A paper, usually ma- often be a valuable indication of pro- insertion ot illustrations, collating, and chine glazed, used for the covers of venance. (17) sewing. Sewing is often considered to pamphlets, notebooks, etc. press pin. An iron bar used to tighten a pressure bulker 205 printing inks

large standing or lying press. Such pins between1820 and1830,assuming crude woodcuts in one color only to come in two sizesa short pin used by copies issued later were bound in gilt- patterns printed in two or more colors. one man, and a long pin operated by lettered cloths, i.e., after 1832. (69) There were papers in a multitude of two or more persons. The long pin primarycolors.The threechromatic stripes, including wide bands of color permits the application of very great colorsred, yellow, and bluefrom with a floral stripe between, horizontal pressure. (97, 335) which all other hues, tones, and shades lines broken up with sprays of flowers pressure bulker. An instrument used to may theoretically be obtained by mix- tied in knots of ribbon, designs of small determine the bulk, or hie ratio of ing, sometimes with the addtion of flowers on cream backgrounds, bold weight to thickness, of paper, or to de- black and white. To obtain another patterns with conventional carnations, termine the number of leaves of a stip- color, however, it is necessary to use grapes, roses,intricate strapwork in ulated stock that will be required to secondaryandintermediatecolors, three colors, etc. (183, 217) make a book bulk to a specified thick- e.g., green and violet, as well as red, printed paper warehouse. The area in ness, under application of a specified yellow, and blue pigments of various which printed sheets are stored while pressure. (274) shades to obtain many hues because awaiting instructions for binding. In pressure-sensitive adhesive. An adhesive pigment is not pure color. See also: book printing, it is not unusual for a that will adhere to a surface at room COLOR (1). (233, 316) number of printed sheets to be left un- temperature by means ot briefly ap- Princeton file. A free-standing, boxlike bound, so as to avoid the additional plied pressure only. (309) container open at the top and back, as expense of binding (and costs of in- pressure-sensitive tape. Strips of paper, well as the lower half of the front. It is ventorying)ifthefullquantity of plastic,etc., opaque or transparent, used to hold pamphlets, single sheets, books should not be required. Printed coated or impregnated on one or both etc., usually for storage on the book sheets were stored from an early date sides (usually the former except for shelves. See also: CUT CORNER PAMPH- by their printers, and later by book- use in encapsulation) with a pressure- LET FILE. (156) sellers. There were professional ware- sensitive adhesive. In the form of cello- print. 1. A copy (reproduction) of a draw- housemen who were employed some- phane tape, which is a clear plastic that ing,photograph,etc., done by any times by several booksellers to store is glossy on one side and coated with printing process. The term is generally their sheets. Usually they were stored adhesive on the other, it is sometimes applied to , engravings, mezzo- unfolded, but there are many indica- used in the repair of torn leaves, docu- tints, etc. 2. To apply ink and then tions that they were sometimes stored ments,etc.,andforencapsulating paper to blocks, plates, or type to make folded and gathered. (58) archival papers. In the usual ;aseit an "impression" or a "print" of an print finishing processes. A generic term darkens with age, is difficult to remove, image. 3. See: NEWSPRINT. (12,17, for the wide range of pre-printing and removes the print when it is detached, 156) post-printingoperationsinvolvedin and stains the paper to which it ad- printability. That characteristic of a mate- converting paper into the printed book, heres. The acetate tape, or transparent rial, such as paper, which perr its high or o'ller salable item. These include: mending tape, which has a matte sur- quality printing, and which, though not 1) actual print finishing processes, such face and appears colorless when in the capable of precise definition, is gener- as the storage and preparation of un- roll, has a much higher degree of per- ally judged visually in terms of uni- printed paper, the cutting to correct manence and does not change color; formity of color of the printed areas, size of unprinted and printed sheets, however, it, too can be damaging to uniformity of ink transfer, quality of the production of booklets and period- archival materials. "black on white," and rate of ink set- icals (pamphlet binding, stationery and Masking tape is strong brown paper ting and drying. In paper, hardness, file material, stationery, miscellaneous tape of crinkly texture, made in rolls smoothness, opacity, color, and pick binding, etc.), the production of labels, of various widths. Its pressure-sensitive resistancearesomecharacteristics posters, calendars, etc., assembly work adhesive secures the tape firmly to any which lend themselves to good print- (boxing, set-making, etc.), as well as hard, dry, non-fibrous surface, and it ability. (17, 139) gumming, varnishing, laminating, pack- is easiiy peeled away. It is used to ma:.:k printed edges. The edges of a book that ing,and shipping; 2)BOOKBINDING; areas that are not to be treated. Mask- have been printed by means of rubber and 3) box and manufacture. ing tape generally becomes difficult to type. This is done at times on the fore (229) remove if left in place for more than a edge as a means of indexing, and is printing inks. Inks used in printing, con- few days or if exposed to high tem- frequently done on one or more edges sisting of a coloring agent, which may perature. of directories, and the like, for pur- be a plant dye, mineral, or an earth, in Benzene or ether, both of which are poses of advertising. (140) a medium (or vehicle) of oil, water, toxic(especially the former), flam- printed papers. Decorative end- and cover or varnish. mable, and therefore dangerous to use, papers printed or stencilled with de- Printing inks are categorized accord- are solvents capable of removing pres- signs, figures, borders, etc. Many of ing to the process for which they are sure-sensitive tapes. (233, 309) these original papers, printed in the intended, and, within each category, primary binding. The earliest of any dif- 18th century by the dominotiers (from they may be further divided according ferent publisher's binding styles found the Italian domino, little cloak or hood, to color and categories of quality. Let- on copies of the same edition. The part of the costume of the men who did terpressinks,forexample,include term is applied only to edition bindings, marbling) of France, had their origin colored inks and black inks (halftone and, as a matter of practice, is seldom in early wall papers, except that most ink, jobbing ink, ornamental printing used with reference to anything other had smaller designs than those used for ink, rotary printing ink and special thanpublisher'scloth,althoughit wall decorations. They were printed on ink). There are also newspaper inks, could perhaps be applied to a "boards- small sheets of paper in a wide variety lithographic printing inks(collotype and-label" copy of a book published of designs, ranging from simple, almost ink, litho ink and offset ink), photo-

2 9 G printing processes 206 publisher's cloth

gravureinks(eitheractualphoto- the process. Both have been largely re- from an engraved plate or block, or a gravure ink or copperplate ink) and placed by tar and mineral oils.Inks lithographic stone. Usually calleda die stamping ink, aniline printing ink, fornewspaperprintingarecom- "trial proof." 4. An impression taken and special inks of various kinds, e.g., pounded in mineral oils, and are very from a finished plate or block before carbonizing ink. thin.See also:ANILINE INK; CARBONA- the regular impression is published and Printing inks are also categorized ac- CEOUS INK; CARBON INK; CHINESE INK; usually before the title or other inscrip- cording to the manner in which they DOUBLE-TONE INK; HEAT-SET INK; IRON- tion is added. Also called "proof print" dry, because rate of drying is consid- GALL INK; METALLIC INKS; OFFSET INK; or "proof impression." (12, 156, 241) ered to be one of the most important SEPIA INK. (21, 140, 143, 195) protected leather. A leather which has had properties of an ink. Lithographic and printing processes. The various processes chemical incorporated into it in an ef- ordinary letterpress inks dry by oxidiza- by which printing jobs are done. There fort to render it more resistant to de- tion, and partly by penetration and are, in general, four fundamental print- terioration.See:P.I.R.A. TESTED; evaporation; newspaper ink dries by ing processes: letterpress (relief print- POTASSIUM LACTATE. (261) absorption; and anilineandphoto- ing); intaglio (gravure printing); plan- protection tissue.See:BARRIER SHEET. gravure inks dry by evaporation. ography(flat-surfaceprinting); and protective containers. A BOX (1), PORT- Modern inks which dry on contact silk screen. Letterpress includes print- FOLIO (1), PULL-OFF BOX, SLIPCASE, with the paper 'nave been perfected, ing fromraisedtype,halftone,or SOLANDER BOX, or other container, de- and are used principally on high-speed woodcuts on a platen,cylinder,or signed to contain and protect a book, rotary presses. A recent development in rotary press printing. Intaglio includes pamphlet, manuscript, map, or other inks is the monomeric ink which dries printing from engraved plates, etching, archival material. (173) instantaneously when exposed to cer- photogravure, or rotogravure. Plano- protective sheet. A sheet of paper tem- tain radiations, such as ultraviolet light graphic printing includes lithography, porarily attached to the endpapers of a or gamma radiations. This type of ink offset, aquatone, collotype, etc., print- book during forwarding processes to is designed to be used on ultra-high- ing. Silk-screen printing utilizes a sten- protect them. If it is part of the end- speed presses. There are also heat-set cil(silk or other material) through papers it is known as a WASTE SHEET inks which dry when the paperis which ink or paint, e.g., is forced. (17) (1). passed through a heating chamber at printing sticks. Small piecesof wood, proteinaceous. A substance having a pro- a temperature of about 300° C. (infra- usually about three inches in length tein base, such as animal glue, casein, red radiation is also used for heating). and of various cross sections, made of leather, etc., all of which are protein- Cold-set inks, which are solid at room close-grained wood in order to impress aceous materials. temperature, and which must be heated an even print, and used in the execution provenance. A record of previous owner- for printing, diy when the paper is con- of decorative end- and cover papers. ship (of a book or manuscript). A book- veyed, following printing, over a cool- (86) plate, inscription, signature, motto on ing cylinder. Steam-set inks, which con- processing. A term sometimes applied to che title page or elsewhere, PRESSMARK sist of artificial resins dissolved in a the finishing operations performed on (2), price notation, manuscript date, hygroscopic solvent, such as ethylene printed literature, such as trimming, coat of arms on the covers, and some- glycol, dry when the paper web is folding,punching,die-cutting,per- times even a style of binding may indi- passed through a steam chamber, where forating, and laminating. (139) cate previous ownership of a book. a small quantity of water is absorbed prong binder.See:RING BINDFR. provinical made endpaper. A modification by the layer of ink causing the artificial proof. I. A leaf or leaves of a book pur- of the conventional MADE ENDPAPER, resin to be deposited in solid form. posely left untrimmed by the binder as designed to overcome the tendency of Another type of quick drying ink is one evidence that the book has not been that endpaper to drag at the first and which is combined with a vehicle which unduly trimmed. Proof assumes that at last sections of the book.See also: ordinarily solidifies at room tempera- least one of the sections of the book is ZIG-ZAG ENDPAPER. (81) ture but is prevented from doing so by shorter than the others. The practice, Prussian blue. A blue pigment used in an admixture of substances. In print- which is now virtually obsolete, stems dyeing and the manufacture of ink and ing, the admixtures are absorbed by from the time when binders, and even paint. Itis produced from potassium the paper and the impression then dries very fine binders, had the reputation of ferrocyanideandferricsalts.Also quickly. cutting down the leaves of a book as called"ferric ferrocyanide," "bronze Consistency of a printing ink is also much as possible.2. An impression blue," and "Chinese blue." of considerable importance. Ink is said made from type before the printing run prussic acid.See:HYDROGEN CYANIDE. to be thin when it is easily set in mo- is begun. The first proof is corrected by psychrometer. A hygrometer used for de- tion, and stiff when it offers compara- the printer's reader or corrector and re- termining relative humidity. It utilizes tively strong resistance to changes in turned tothe compositor. After the wet and dry bulb temperature form. A so-called long ink is viscous printer is satisfied with the type as set, which are compared with a chart which and can be drawn out into threads, a proof is sent to the author for correc- shows the measure of dryness of the while the opposite is a "short ink." In tion. This proof is usually on a long surrounding air. (269) printing varnishes, a distinction is made sheet of normal width, called a galley publisher's binding.See:EDITION BINDING. between weak, medium, and strong proof. After the author has made his publisher's cloth. The cloth used as the (rigid) varnish. Oils are also used as corrections the type is made up into covering material for edition bindings. vehicles, and at one time linseed oil pages, page numbers and running heads The use of cloth has been widespread was used most often because ofits are added, and a final page proof is in edition binding since about 1850. good drying properties, although tung sent to the author. In modern practice Originally introduced as a novelal- oil was also used extensively. Tung oil the author often sees only the galleys. ternative to paper-covered boards and, dries very rapidly but loses its gloss in 3. A preliminaryimpression taken like them, looked upon as only a tem- publisher's decorated wrappers 207 pulp

porary covering (the purchaser having and solidity to the fold areas. (311) pastes were freqeuntly used in the ex- the book bound in leather according to puering. A process now included with ecution of these papers. his own needs), itspossibilities as a BATING. Formerly, it consisted of the Pulled paste papers were used as "permanent" covering material became treatment of unhaired skins with solu- cover papers on German and Italian apparent by the early 1830s. Although tionsof fermented dog dung ina pamphlets and as endpapers for the many collectors continued to have their heated infusion, the purpose being to heavily blocked or plain leather bind- books bound in leather, this practice effect the removal of certain undesir- ings of the 18th century. A variation of has steadily diminished over the years. able constitutents and to furtherpre- (69, 299) the technique consisted of laying a soft pare the skins for tanning. Puering was string or thin strips of felt between the publisher'sdecorated wrappers. Cover a faster and more powerful method two sheets. When these were rubbed wrappers, generally decorated with a than bating because of the greater down, the material which had been laid oodcut, and usually produced on the strength of the puering liquor, but for over left white areas on the paper in same paper as the text. These covers this very reason it was also potentially whatever pattern it had been arranged. appear to have been issued by the pub- more dangerous. (363) These papers seem to have been pro- lisher as a means of making unbound pull. 1. A tie secured to the inside of a duced mosl often ina single color, books more attractive to the customer, slipcase in such a manner that theen- usually dull blue or terra-cotta; how- and were intended simply to advertise closed material may be removed from ever, there are also examples, often the book, not to serve as a permanent the case by pulling the tie. 2. A trial found in German and Italian books of or usable binding. As such, they seem print produced before the printing of the 18th century, in red, yellow, and to have been an experiment by several an edition. 3. See: DRAW (1, 2). (156, violet,in which circles of felt were competitiveAugsburgprinters,the 256) used to produce an effect of small earliestexamplesbeingissuedby pulled. A book which has been taken round doughnutfike patterns. (217) Schonsperger in 1482. (347) apart for rebinding. A book has been pulling. The process of reducing a bound publisher's dummy. See: DUMMY (1, 2). "pulled" when the case or covers have book to individual sections (or, in the publisher's endpapers. Ordinary edition been removed, the spine lining and/or case of a book insheets,toloose ENDPAPERS on which thepublisher old glue has been cleared off, the sew- leaves). 2. The condition arising from printed advertisements, and especially ing threads have been cut, and all the DRAW (2) during trimming or cutting. the tith - of other books he published. sections have been separated from each pull-off box. A simple or elaborate book- Publisher's endpapers were a fashion other. shaped box designed primarily to hold of the middle 19th century, and were pulled paste papers. Decorative end- and a book, butalsousedtocontain used on almanacs, inexpensive editions cover papers produced by applying pamphlets,manuscripts,etc.Occa- of the classics, popular novels, publish- colored paste to the surface of two sionally it opens at the side or front, ers' series, and the like. In a strict sense sheets of paper, pressing the pasted but it more often consists of two sep- they are not really endpapers atall. surfaces together, and slowly pulling arate parts, one telescoping over the (217) them apart. The result is a veined or other, hence its name. In its most elab- publisher's reinforced binding. A now feathery design on both paste-covered orate form, it often has a rounded back more-or-less obsolete term, used at one surfaces, and, if more than one color of (spine) with raised bands, projecting time in the publishing trade to identify paste is used, the various colors blend squares, a leather covering, and pos- bindings purported to be strengthened in a free design. Blue, red, and yellow sibly one or more spring catches. When for use in (circulating) libraries. Mis- properly constructed, it provides nearly use of the term, in that it was used by PULL-OFF BOX air-tight protection. The book is gen- some publishers for bindings that were erally provided with a separate wrap- actually no stronger than regular bind- per.Also called"pull-off case"or ings of other publishers, has made it "pull-off cover," and frequently, though virtually meatungless. (16) incorrectly, a SOLANDER BOX. publisher's trade edition binding. See: pulls. Metal handles, or pieces of tape or EDITION BINDING. ribbon, attached to the tail of a book pucker.1. The tendency of the inner or the base of a shelf, case. or file box leaves of a section to become wrinkled forconvenient removal.Pullswere at the corner folds when thick paper is used frequently on large blankbooks in folded at right angles. 2. A cocklelike which case they were usually riveted or condition in the surface of a paper that laced to the center band. has contracted unevenly while drying. pulp. The mechanically and/or chem- puckered leather. Leather which, while ically prepared mixtures obtained from still tractable, during the covering of a vegetable fibers and used in the manu- book is pushed into wrinkles or folds, facture of paper and board. The gen- induced at times by thinning leather on eral classes of paper pulp are listed be- the flesh side in areas where folds are low. Any of the various pulps listed required. Sometimes higher folds are so may be further classified as unbleached, located as to take the wear and abra- semi-bleached, or bleached. sion such bindings are likely to suffer, I. Wood pulp thus protecting the remaining surface A. Mechanical areas of the covers. The leather is first 1. Groundwood impregnated with paste which, when 2. Defibrated dry, imparts a high degree of rididity 3. Exploded

2 9 pulpboard 208 put out

B. Chemical 1. Sulfite Conifers (softwoods) 2. Neutral sulfite Black spruce Picea mariana North America (N. A.) 3. Sulfate Douglas fir Pseudotsuga taxifolia N. A. 4. Chemical cellulose(sulfate Jack pine Pinus banksiana N. A. and sulfite) Norway spruce Picea abies Europe (E.) a. Papermaking alpha pulps Radiata pine Pinus radiata New Zealand Red spruce Picea rubens N. A. b. Chemical conversion pulps Scots pine Pinus sylvestris E. 5. Soda Silver fir A bits alba E. 6. Semi-chemical Sitka spruze Picea sitchensis N. A. 7. Chemigroundwood Slash pine Pinus caribaea N. A. 8. Screenings White fir Abies concolor N. A. 9. Miscellaneous White spruce Picea glauca N. A. II. Cotton fiber or rag pulps Broadleaf trees (hardwoods) Aspen, poplar Populus tremula and E. III. Reclaimed papers P. tremulbideS N. A. A. Paper stock European birch Betula verrucosa E. B. De-inked paper stock European oak Quercus robur E. C. Paper shavings and cuttings Paper birch Betula papyrifera N. A. IV. Other fibrous pulps Red maple Acer rubrum N. A. Red oak Quercus rubra N. A. A. Manila hemp Saligna gum Eucalyptus saligna South Africa B. Jute Sycamore Acer pseudoplatanus E. C. Esparto Tasmanian oak Eucalyptus regnans D. Cereal straw and E. obliqua Australia E. Seed flax straw F. Bagasse (60, 72) G. Bamboo H. Reeds I.Leaf fibers pumice. A cellular or highly porous vol- quent to tannage, has been dressed J.Kenaf solely by the introduction of grease, K. Miscellaneous fibers (17, 72, canic glass used in "stone" form to whichisusually DUBBIN applied by 143) smooth vellum and parchment for writ- ing or when preparing them for re-use, hand. (61) and also to smooth the gold cushion. puritan filler. See: GYPSUM. pulpboard. A type of BINDER'S BOARD pro- It is also used in very finely powdered purl (purfling). The spiral wires cut into duced either in a single web, a one-ply form in the manufacture of vellum and lengths,threaded on silk,and sewn board, or from two webs on the same parchment. It is composed largely of down (generally on packthread), in the machine, thatis,a twin-wire board. aluminum silicate. See also: PALIMP- raised areas of the designs of an em- Pulpboard quality depends on the fur- SEST; POUNCE (1). (130, 198 ) broidered binding. Purl was sometimes nish used, which may be mechanical or punch and tie. See: JAPANESE SEWING. manufacturedwith acoloredsilk chemical wood pulp, or a combination punching gauge (punchingguide). A twisted around the metal but which did thereof. It differs from PASTEBOARD in template, consisting of a strip of card, not concealit. The small corkscrew- that the pulpboardis made directly wood or metal, punched with holes in like rings made by this coiled process from the pulp, whereas pasteboard is the required positions and used for sparkledwithreflectedlight.(111, built up from thinner sheets of paper punching sheets in exactly the same 280) or board laminatedtogether.Pulp- positions, as in loose-leaf work. purple marble. A type of leather cover board is the principal board used in punching machine. A machine used to marble consisting of solid purple, which library and edition binding. (17, 58, produce holes in paper. It consists of isglaired and thenfollowed by a 156, 264) a flat plate on which the pile to be sprinkle of sulfuric acid, which pro- pulping. The process of reducing cellu- punched is placed, an arm which car- duces red veins inthe purple.(97, losic raw materials,e.g.,pulpwood, ries the hollow punches, and lay guides 152) rags, straw, esparto, reclaimed papers, to which the sheets are fed, so that pustaka. A type of book consisting of etc., to a condition suitable for fur- the holes are punched in the same posi- long strips of thin bark, or an imita- ther processing into paper materials, tions throughout. The punches, which tion paper produced from the bark of or for chemical conversion into some are generally positioned about 'A to 'A trees. The Sanskrit word "pustaka" is other cellulosic product. Pulping may inch from the back edge of the sheets, used for this kind of book in North vary from a simple mechanical action descend and punch the holes. The discs Sumatra, Java, and other areas, while to complex digestingsequences and of waste paper produced areleftin the word "pustaha" is used in South may be done in batches or by means the hollow center of the punches and Sumatra. Pustakas were written in bril- of continuously operating equipment. eventually clearthroughtheir open liant ink on long strips, which were (17, 72, 320) tops. The punching machine has been foldedconcertina-wiseandtiedto- pulpwood. Those woods suitable for the largely superseded by the paper drill- gether with string woven from rushes. manufacture of chemical and mechani- ing machine. (179, 189) (164) cal wood pulp. The principaltrees puppy. An alternative name for the GOLD put out. The removal of tanned skins from which wood pulp is obtained in- RUBBER. from the drying drum or paddle and clude: pure dressed. A leather which, subse- their placement on alow,slanting putrefactive damage 209 pyroxylin-treated fabrics

bench to have the wrinkles pressed out. This type of damage is not intensi- in color.Pyrogallolisused in pho- putrefactivedamage(putrefaction). A fied by liming, butitis not unusual tography, as well as in the manufacture general source of hide and skin dam- for both putrefactive and suN DAMAGE of dyes and in dyeing processes. (175, age caused by bacterial action on the to be present in the same skin, in which 195) stockfollowingflayingand before case even greater damage will be ap- pyrogalloltannins(pyrogallols).See: curing, or, at times, following soaking, parent after liming than before. More- VEGETABLE TANNINS. but before tanning. A wet,unsalted over, the presence of fatty tissue left pyroligneous acid. A crude brown liquor skin at any point before tannage is in after flaying may encourage putrefac- obtained by the distillation of wood. a very perishable state and is very sus- tive as well as sun damage. Its acidic properties are due chiefly to ceptible to the invasion of putrefac- The first indication of putrefaction its acetic acid content. It is used as a tivebacteria, especially on the flesh (aside from odor) is hair slip, usually substitutefor sulfuricacidin some side of the skin. This isparticula ly accompanied by a sensitive condition PICKLING processes. the case under the climatic conditions of the grain surface, so that the grain pyroxylin.1. A substance consisting of generallyprevailinginareas where layer tends to rub away during normal lower-nitrated cellulose nitrate, usually skins are dried, rather than being cured processing of the stock. Slight rubbing containing less than 12.5% nitrogen. by one of the salting processes. Often gives a "dull grain," generally accom- Itis used in the manufacture of py- thebacteriawilldevelop along the panied by blotchy finishing. Putrefac- roxylin coated and impregnated hoc.. vascular system and leather produced tion also causes the general structure cloths.2. The celluloseplastics and from such stock is said to be VEINY of the skin to become loose and flabby. solutions, suchas lacquers prepared LEATHER. (248, 363) from cellulose acetate. (164, 235) Putrefactive damageisoften ob- putting out. See: SETTING OUT. pyroxylin-coated paper. A paper coated vious before a skin is dried (but not PVA. See: POLYVINYL ACETATE. with pyroxylin lacquer,i.e.,cellulose necessarilyduring or subsequentto PVC. See: POLYVINYL CHLORIDE. mono- or di-nitrate in a suitable sol- wet-salting,brining,etc.);however, pyrethrum. An insecticide derived from vent, and used for book covers, labels, subsequent to drying the damage is the chrysanthemum (Chrysanthemum imitation leather, etc. The lacquer may not readily perceptable and therefore coccineum or C. cinerariae), at one be clear or colored. (17, 316) may not he suspected. Once the af- time used to inhibit bookworms. pyroxylin-treated fabrics. A cotton fabric fected skins reach the tannery, how- pyrocatechin; pyrocatechol. See: CATE- completelyand (usually) heavily ever, the damage isusually detected CHOL. coated with the cellulose nitrate com- before they reach the limed condition. pyrogallol. A crystalline,toxicphenol pound, pyroxylin;or,a fabric com- Once they are in soak they display a (CGH603), having weak acidic prop- pletely filled with the same compound. pitted condition, often honeycombed erties, prepared by heating gallic acid The former is usually called a "py- with small holes that may penetrate with water.Itisreadily solublein roxylin-coated fabric," and the latter through theentirethickness of the water,alcohol,andether.Alkaline a "pyroxylin-impregnated fabric." See skin. They may also be pitted and cor- solutions rapidly absorb oxygen from also: BOOK CLOTH. (102, 208, 366), roded, mainly on the flesh side. the atmosphere, becoming dark brown -410

23 quad mark 210 quebracho

quad mark. See: BLACK STEP. quarto. A book in which the sheets have quadrigesimo-octavo. See: FORTY-EIGHT- been folded twice, the second fold at MO. right angles to the first. The result is quadrille. Paper ruled in such a manner often squarer than the upright rec- as to form a large number of small tangular characteristic of the FOLIO, squares, e.g., . While this orrAvo, and DUODECIMO.In books type of paper was formerly produced with laid paper the chain lines are by ruling, today it is largely produced horizontal. In England the quarto be- by offset printing. (156) came an elegant format for published quadruple folder. A folding machine de- works in the first half of the 18th cen- signed principally for book production, a tury. which produces either four 16-page or a In the 19th century, when the rapid two 32-page sections. It has three fold- mechanization of the printing industry ing levels and six sets of folding rol- BINDING; THREE-QUARTER BINDING. took place, librarians began to apply lers. The sheet is folded on its longest (161, 264) the termformataccordingtosize dimension in the first section, and is quarter-bound cut flush. A type of sta- rather than the way a book was put folded in a parallel fold in the second, tionery binding thatiswire stabbed together. This has contributed consid- while at the same time being slit into and has cloth-jointed endpapers. The erably to the general confusion con- four units, each of which is folded at boards,whichareplacedapproxi- cerning format. right angles in the third section. When mately one-quarter inch from the wire quarto leaf.One-fourth of a sheet of insetted sections are required, the two stabbing are glued to the endpapers paper of any size. center sections are conveyed to posi- before trimming. The cloth covering is quebracho. A South American tree, genus tions under the right and left outside then attached to the spine overlapping Schinopsis, the wood of which is rela- sections by means of hickey rolls be- the paper-lined boards. The book and tively rich in tannin. The name "que- fore the final fold is made. Here the its covers are then trimmed flush. This bracho" (pronounced "kay-brat sho") two sections are folded together with style of binding, which is now vir- derives from a contraction of the col- one operation of the right- and left- tually obsolete, was used mainly for loquial Spanish or Portuguese term hand folding knives, and are then de- order books. (58) "quiebra-hacha" (ax breaker), and re- livered to the receiving hopper as two quarter cloth. A binding having a cloth fers to the extreme hardness of the 32-page sections. See: FOLDING MA- spine and paper sides, with the cloth wood (specific gravity 1.12 to 1.39). CHINES. (320) extending from one-eighth to one-third The trees expl&ted for tannin include quagga. A wild ass, Equus quagga, found across the width of the boards. (204) Schinopsis bala7.sae (quebracho colo- in the southern part of Africa, the skin quarter flush, edges turned in. A style of rado chaquerno) and S. lorentzii (que- of which was once used in the manu- stationery binding similar to QUARTER- bracho colorado santiagueno). facture of an imitation sealskin leather. BOUND CUT FLUSH, but with the boards The heartwood of S. balansae aver- (261) lined and turned in all around. ages 20 to 25% tannin, while that of quaker colored. Drab or gray colors, or quarterfoil. A finishing tool consisting of S. lorentzii averages 16 to 17%. Un- the dulling effects produced by modi- a conventionalized representation of a treated quebracho tannin isrelatively fying brighter shades, sometimes by flower with four petals or a leaf with insoluble in cold water and is usually the addition of black pigment. The four leaflets, or an ornamental design sulfited to overcome this disadvantage. term refers to shades of book cloth having four lobes or foils. The untreated tannin also has a high sometimes used on devotional books, quarterleather. A binding havingthe pH value and low salts and acids con- and is presumably derived from the spine and a small part of the sides tent, while the sulfited product is the predilection of members of the Society (about one-eighth the width of the same except that the salts content is of Friends for muted colors. (197) boards) covered with leather, and the high. Quebracho belongs to the con- quarter binding (quarter-bound). A bind- remainder of the boards covered with densed class of tannins. ing having the spine and a small part a different material, usually paper but Quebracho tans very rapidly, con- ofthesides(about one-eighththe sometimescloth.See also: HALF verting hide substance into leather in width of the boards) covered with one LEATHER; THREE-QUARTER LEATHER. about one-third the time required by a material, with the rest of the boards quarternion. A gathering consisting of tannin such as oak bark. Used alone, covered with another. A quarter bind- four sheets folded once, and insetted. however, it produces a leather that is ing may consist of leather and paper, This was the form in which some man- light,lackinginfirmness, and with leather and cloth, cloth and paper, vel- uscripts and early printed books, espe- poor resistance to wear; therefore,it lum and paper (with or without vellum cially those of vellum, were assembled, is commonly mixed with other tannins, tips at the corners), etc. In fine bind- with the first and eighth, second and such as hemlock, mangrove, oak bark, ings,leather and paper,as well as seventh, etc., leaves being conjugate. myrabolans, and sumac. vellum and paper, are the most com- See also: QUINTERNION; SEXTERNION; Quebracho has been used extensively mon quarter bindings. See also: HALF TERNION. (225, 278) in the tanning of leather since it was

23i quercitron 211 quirewise

first introduced over one hundred years creased, the surface of the sheets re- "quair" or "guaer." When parchment ago. It has been used so extensively, main morereceptivetosubsequent was the prevalent book material, quires in fact, that its use has declined sharply printings, asinmulti-colorprinting. of 4 sheets made convenient gather- in recent years largely because of over- (140) ings for sewing; however, when the exploitation. (175, 306, 363) quinternion. A gathering consisting of use of paper spread it was possible to quercaron. A tannin, and yellow coloring five sheets folded once, and insetted. use from 5 to 7 sheets without forming material, obtained from the bark of This was the form in which some too thick a gathering for sewing, and the black oak,Quercus velutina,and manuscripts and early printed books, theoriginalassociationof "quaire" used to a very limited extent in tanning especially those of vellum, were as- with "four"eventually became ob- and dyeing leather. The bark contains sembled. The first and tenth, second scured.See also: INSHEETS. 3. To lay about 6 to 12% tannin.See also:OAK. and ninth, etc., leaves were conjugate. together two or more folded sheets, (197) See also:QUAR,TERNION; SEXTERNION; one within the other.See:QUIREWISE. quick-drying inks. PRINTING INKS Which TERNION. (258, 278) 4. In blankbook binding, a term indi- have had driers added for the rapid quire.1.One-twentieth of a ream of cating 80 pages. 5. A small book or conversion of the ink vehicle (varnish) paper,or 25 sheets (sometimes 24 pamphlet consisting of, or asif con- to a solid film. (140) sheets plus an outside sheet)in the sisting of, a quire of paper. (94, 234, quick-set inks. PRINTING INKS containing case of a 500-sheet ream, or 24 sheets 316) thin mineral oil and varnish. The thin in the case of a 480-sheet ream. 2. A quirewise. A method of imposing a book oil is quickly absorbed into the paper gathering (section), particularly when Qrpamphlet,inwhichthefolded during printing, while the pigment and unfolded (i.e., printed but unfolded). Meets fit one within another, and are varnish remain on the surface of the A quire was originally a gathering of saddle sewn or stitched, instead of be- paper, thus allowing the sheets to be 4 sheets, forming 8 leaves or 16 pages ing gathered side by side and side- handled sooner than if regular linseed after one folding.Itis thus synony- stitched or sewn through thefolds. oil-basedinks were used. Since the mous With QUATERNION. The low-Latin (142, 179) final setting time of the varnish is in- word quarternum was shortenedto

232 rabbit back 212 rayon a alwwww a

rabbit back. A text block that has been drop of concentrated sulfuric acidis rounded and backed in such a manner thenapplied, which turnsthearea that, instead of forming the arc of ap- treated a bright red color if rosinis proximately one-third of a circle, the present in the paper. (143) spine is peaked in the center and slopes rasped. 1. A book that has had the sharp steeply to the shoulders. The "rabbit edges of its boards rounded but not back" is generally a result of improper beveled.2. The roughened edges of rounding and backing procedures, too sheets that are to be adhesive bound much swell in the spine because of instead of sewn. added bulk of the sewing thread, or ins WI" Ratcliff, John. A bookbinder of Colonial loose sewing. See also: HOG'S BACK (1). a America who came tothis country (97) from England between 1661 and 1663 rabbit skin glue. A high quality animal to bind copies of the Indian Bible of GLUE produced fromtheunhaired other suitable areas. The fibers are ob- John Eliot. A number of other books skins of rabbits. tained by decorticating and degumming exist that documentary evidence indi- raddle. See: RED OCHER. Boehmeria nivea(white leaves) and cates were bound by Ratcliff, including rag board. Originally, a hard-calendered B. tenacissima (green leaves), the lat- ablind-tooledbindingexecutedin paper board used as a support for the ter being the more important of the 1677, as well as a binding produced leather covering of carriages, and pro- two. The degummed material is prac- two years later, which was tooled in duced from rags and waste paper in tically pure cellulose and is identical in gold wtih the same tools. Ratcliff sewed thicknessesofapproximately0.125 composition with bleached cotton and his books on both raised and sawn-in inch. Today the term refers to a gen- linen.Ramie fibersare among the cords (thongs), gilded the edges of eral type of binder's board used for strongest vegetable fibers known, and some of his bindings, used marble end- mounting prints,art works, matting, are durable and not as much affected papers,and coveredthebooksin etc., or as the boards for fine bindings. by moisture as are many other fibers. leather. Nothing is known of John Rat- Its outstanding characteristic is its high It is used in the East as a textile fiber cliff after 1632, and it is surmised that dimensional stability and permanence. and in Europe for paper. It he returned to England in that year. (17) isa potential source of papermaking (171, 200, 301) rag book paper. A wide range of book fibers.Also called "rhea."(17, 77, rattle. That property of a sheet of paper papers having a cotton fiber content 143) which produces noise when the sheet of 25, 50, 75, or 100%, the one with range. A strip of leather cut from a is shaken. While rattle is generally con- 100% being known as "Extra No. 1." hide. A "butt" range is a strip of con- sidered to be dependent on such char- A "rag content" paper is one that con- venient width cut from the for ;:. end acteristics as density and stiffness of tains a minimum of 25% rag or cotton of a range usually after, but sometimes the sheet, recent investigations indicate fiber. Such paper is used for currency, before, the hide is tanned. (61) that the property is primarily associated ledger, manifold and onionskin, blue- Ranger, Edmund (d 1705). A bookbinder with thepresence of numerous ex- print and other reproduction papers, of Colonial New England, and a con- tremely short fibers among the normal maps and charts, etc. See also: BIBLE temporary of JOHN RATCLIFF. Ranger (longer) fibers of the paper, as well PAPER; COTTON FIBER CONTENT PAPER. was admitted as a freeman of Boston as a high proportion of hemicelluloses (17, 350) and established his business in1671 binding them together.(17,139) raised bands. The cords or thongs on as a publisher, bookbinder, and book- rawhide. A (cattle)hide rendered re- which the sections of a book are sewn. seller. The earliest known gold-tooled sistant to putrefaction by unhairing, The cords, of ,;:hich there are tradi- bindings of his date from 1682. Ranger liming, stuffing with oils and greases, tionallyfive(but which historically was one of the first American book- and sometimes by other preparatory have varied from two to as many as binders to use silk headbands in lieu processes. As the name implies, itis fourteen)are seenas ridges across of linen threads and, like Ratcliff, he not tanned. Itis sometimes used for the spine of the covered book. Raised sewed his books on both raised and lacings or trimmings, of books, but it is bands have long been associated with sunken cords (thongs). Ranger cov- far too stiff and intractabe to use as a the best of fine hand binding and ered his books in leather and employed covering material. (291, 325, 363) the TIGHT BACK. False raised bands, marbled endpapers,giltedges,and rayon. A fine, smooth, hygroscopic tex- which are generally glued to the hol- gold tooling, all in addition to his work tile fiber made from various solutions low of the spine, are sometimes used te in so-called PLAIN BINDING. (171, 200, of modified cellulose, such as wood give the impression of FLEXIBLE SEW- 301) pulp or cotton linters. The were ING. Such books are generally sewn raspail test. A method of determining the among the first, if not the first, of all on sawn-in cords. (236) presence of rosin size in paper. One the man-made fibers consideredfor raising. See: DRENIMING; SWELLING. drop of a strong solution of ordinary use in papermaking from which simu- ramie. A tall herb of the nettle family, sugar is applied to the sheet, the ex- lated paper structures were produced native to tropical Asia and cultivated in cess being blotted after one minute. A on conventional papermaking equip-

9 '10j 3 r. e. 213 reclaimed papers

ment. Rayon fibers are among the bet- the text block, over which the original tration is abetted by the pressure of a ter synthetic papermaking fibersbe- spine is glued. The leather beneath is nip. See also: ABSORBENCY; HOLDOUT. cause: 1) they are far less expensive extended under the leather on the sides, (17) than most of the organic or inorganic thus effectivelycreating new joints. recessed-cord sewing. A method of sewing syntheticfibers; 2)beingcellulosic, (69, 237) a book by hand which itr olves cutting and, therefore, compatible with water rebind. As a noun, a volume that has grooves into the spine of the gathered slurries of other cellulosic fibers, they been rebound; as a verb, to subject a sections and recessing the cords into can be handled by conventional paper- book IC0 REBINDING. those grooves. A single length of thread making equipment and techniques; and rebinding. The more-or-less complete re- is carried from kettle stitch to kettle 3) they have most of the inherent ad- habilitation of a worn and/or damaged stitch,asin FLEXIBLE SEWING, but vantages of synthetic fibers, such as book, the minimum amount of work passes across the cords instead of en- controlofdenier,length,strength, involving resewing and the attachment circling them. The sewing may be done elongation, cleanliness, and optical uni- of new covers. For the general steps in ALL ALONG, TWO ON, etc., as in flexible formity. rebinding a book, see: BOOKBINDING. sewing. The compatibility of rayonfibers rebound. A book that has had its (origi- Sewing on recessed, or sawn-in, cords with less expensive pulp furnishes, as nal) binding removed and replaced with is relatively old, having been used in wellastheease with whichtheir another, usually after resewing. France as long ago as 1580. It con- diameterscanbecontrolled, make reLuilding corners. The repair and recon- tinued in use in France until about them useful for adding bulk to paper struction of the corner or corners of 1650, and in England, particularly for when an improvement of porosity is the covers of a book that have become thin books bound in sheepskin, until required. In addition, their cleanliness, worn, soft, bent, mashed, or broken. about 1770. The technique seems to strength, and bulking properties also Corner rebuildinggenerally involves have died out afterthat time until make them valuable components in the application of paste or other adhe- revived, somefiftyyearslater,by saturating papers. (42, 143) sive between the plies of the board. Nicolas Denis Derome. See: DEROME r. e. Abbreviation for RED EDGES. See also: The adhesive is sometimes injected be- STYLE. RED UNDER GOLD EDGES. tween the plies by means of a hypo- Recessed-cord sewing has been used reactive dyes. Dyes which are bonded dermic syringe. If a part of thecorner extensively in craft bookbinding since to fibers by irreversible, covalent bonds, is missing, or so badly damaged that it the latter part of the 18th century. Al- ratherthan by theusual hydrogen cannot be rebuilt as described above, though inferior to flexible sewing in bonding, electrovalent bonding, or sol- the covering material and board paper soundness of technique, it has several vationeffects,allof which arere- are lifted, permalife paper cut to proper advantages over that method in that: versible. Most reactive dyes may be size is glued to both sides of the board, 1)the sewing proceedsfaster,thus used to color fibers other than cellu- and the corner is then rebuilt by pack- effecting savings in time; 2) it reduces lose, the only criterion being the pres- ing the space between the permalife the cost of subsequent forwarding oper- ence in the substrate of a reactive hy- paper with shreddedblotting paper ations in that there is no need to fill in drogen atom, which is present in wool, mixed with an adhesive, plastic wood, between bands, the bands do not have nylon, and cellulose acetate. (195) etc. (173, 236) to be straightened, and thereisno ream. 480 or 500 sheets of paper, ac- rebuilding old covers. See: COVERS BOUND necessityof moldingthecovering cording to grade. Handmade and draw- IN (1). leather about the bands; and 3) in com- ing papers may "ream" at 472, 480, reamed. In a strict sense, a text block bination with the HOLLOW BACK,it or 500 sheets. Originally, a ream was thatis separated from its case, and, usually allows more THROW-UP in the 526 sheets, while today a "short" ream following repair to text block and case, spine, thus facilitating opening of the consists of 480 sheets, and a "long" is then placed back into the same case, book. See also: FLEXIBLE NOT TO SHOW; ream 500 or 516 sheets. (17, 316) perhaps with new endpapers, or pos- TAPE SEWING (1). (236, 355) rebuked (rebuking). The renewal or re- sibly simply with new hinges. In a more reclaimed papers. A paper and/or board placement of the material covering the general sense, a book is recased when made frompaper stock,reclaimed spine of a book. The term is used pri- the text block is removed from its origi- "waste" (so-called recycled papers), de- marily with reference to books cov- nal case (usually a publisher's binding) inked paper stock, and paper shavings ered in ieather, as this type of repair and placed in a new case made specifi- or cuttings. Somewhat over 20% of the is seldom feasible in the case of paper- cally for it. The first method might be total fibrous raw material employed in covered books, or a publisher's cloth said to be the work of the hand binder, the manufacture of all grades of paper (edition) binding, unless the book is and the second the work of the library and board is secondary fiber obtained rare or has a binding of unusual at- binder. 09. 94) from reclaimed paper and board. tractiveness,e.g.,a Victorianillus- receptivity. The acceptance of a sub- The reclaimed papers are mechani- trated cover. Used in a strict sense, stance, such as oil, water, or other cally disintegrated in water to produce however, it refers to the renewal of the liquid, by the surface of a material, a pulp suspension, after which foreign original spine covering. The term may e.g., paper or cloth. Receptivity de- materials are removed. This type of also be applied to the reattachment of pends upon the ability of the liquid to pulp is characterized by low color, as the original spine material, usually after wet the surface, as well as upon the well as low strength, unless produced repair or restoration. Unless a sub- initial rate of penetration of the liquid fromcarefullyselectedlong-fibered stantial portion of the original spine into the surface of the material. In the stock. can be restored and reattached,itis usual interpretation,receptivitycon- De-inked paper stock is used in the usually replacedinitsentirety.In notes penetration occurring under the manufacture of several grades of paper, either case, it is customary to lay a action of capillary forces only; how- including book papers,groundwood new strip of leather over the spine of ever, in some printing processes, pene- specialty papers, newsprint, etc. It may

2 3 reconstructed binding 214 reflectance

be used either alone or combination applied to the outside of the upper metal flow more freely when casting with virgin fiber. It is produced from cover of a book. (12, 208) very small sorts. Also called "raddle." printedand/or unprintedreclaimed red decay. A type of aeterioration of (156, 310) papers by means of mechanical disin- leather(bookbindings),whichgen- red porphyry marble. A cover marble tegration, and treated with chemicals erally takes two forms: 1) a hardening excuted by sprinkling black color over and dispersing agents which make pos- and embrittling of the leather, which the covers in small spots, glairing when sibletheremoval of most ofthe occurs most often in leathers up to dry, and then sprinkling with red and ink, filler, and other undesirable mate- about 1830, i.e., books published (or scarlet. When dry, scarlet was again rials during subsequent washing. The at least bound) up to that date, and sprinkled on in small spots. (152) cooking and washing operations are which is especially noticeable in calf- reds. A thick, reddish sludge deposited by usually followed by bleaching. In gen- skin bindings; and 2) a powdering of certain vegetable tannins when diluted eral, the secondary pulp is of shorter the leather, which can be so severe as and allowed to stand. The sludge stems fiber length and is somewhat lower in to destroy it completely. This latter de- from part of the phlobaphenes found strength than the original pulp; there- terioration appears to affect virtually in plant materials which yield the con- fore, it is given a minimum of beating allleathers, and isapparently influ- densed tannins. Cf: BLOOM. See also: and refining. Use of de-inked paper enced by severalfactors,including RED DECAY. (298) stuck results in paper which possesses (possibly) the tanning agent or agents reducing the grain. See: IRONING; PLATING good formation, opacity, bulk, dimen- used, light (ultraviolet radiation), at- (1); ROLLING. siond stability, and printability. mospheric conditions (air pollution red under gold edges. The edges of a book Paper shavings and cuttingse.g., sulfur dioxide), and, finally, how fre- that have been trimmed, colored red, from binderiesare used to produce quently (or, more accurately, how in- and then gilded. "Red under gold edge" another grade of reclaimed paper stock, frequently) the book is handled. See would be a more appropriate term, as which is used extensively in the manu- also: POTASSIUM LACTATE; REDS; VEGE- the treatment islargely restricted to facture of writing and printing papers, TABLE TANNINS. (237, 298) the head edge. (156) as well as board and board linings. red earth. A hard, deep red clay found in redwallet. A relativelythin,flexible These are converted into pulp by me- tropical areas. It is usually leached and board, used for file folders, expanding chanical disintegration in water. Their low in combined silica and is used, in envelopes, and in some libraries as a qualities depend upon the grade of powdered form, to chalk goldbeater's temporary cover for periodical issues. paper from which they are made. In tissue when assembling the gold book, It is produced from rope, jute, chemi- general,their physical strengths are and also on the gold cushionin both cal wood pulps, and in some cases, with lower and the formation superior to cases to prevent the leaf from sticking. the addition of mechanical pulp. Thick- those of the original stock. (130) nesses vary from 7 to 20 po:nts. (17) reconstructed binding. A now virtually red edges. The edges of a book that have reed. A tall grass, a species of which, obsolete form of library binding applied been trimmed smooth, colored red, and Phragmites comrmmtis,coversvast to a pre-library bound book, in which burnished. "Red edge" would be a more areas of some river deltas in Europe, the volume is removed from its case, appropriate term, as the treatment is Asia, and the Middle East, and which resewn, and then placed back into the largelyrestrictedto the head edge. is used in the manufacture of paper. original case. In general, a reconstructed (156) Reed produces a pulp of medium fiber binding may be either a rebinding or a red heat. A defect in hides and skins, length,thatissoft and bulky, and first binding, depending on whether the appearing as red or colored patches on which is particularly useful in making book is received ,in a hard cover, or in the flesh side of the skin, and caused printing and writing papers, as well as a self-cover or gathering. The purpose by the action of halophilic bacteria, unbleached papers and board. Reed of this type of binding supposedly was which are bacteria acclimated to living pulpisalmost always blended with to provide the book with a form of in salt solutions. The presence of "red stronger,longer-fibered wood pulps. sewing (oversewing) that was stronger heat" suggests putrefaction and conse- (144) than the original, thus enabling the quent damage to the skin. The presence refiner. A unit in which cellulosic raw book to withstand more circulations. of halophilic bacteria in the cured skin material in a water suspension is ma- (102, 164) may result from the use of marine salt, cerated, rubbed, cut, etc., in order to rectangular style. A style of binding deco- or the reuse of salt previously used in reduce it to a fibrous state as part of rationexecutedinthebinderyof wet salting. (306) the process of converting wood into SAMUEL MEARNE for Charles II of red marble. A cover marble executed by paper. See also: DISC REFINER; JORDAN. England, while Mearne was the Royal coating the leather before covering with (17) bookbinder.Itconsists of a simple a heated mixture of Brazil dust (bra- refining. The operations involved in the three-line gilt rectangular panel with a zilin,i.e.,Brazil wood), alum and mechanical treatment of cellulosic ma- crown orsimilar emblemateach vinegar, and, after covering, a coating terial in a water suspension designed corner, often with a roll on the inside of glair followed by potash water and to develop the papermaking properties of the rectangle in blind. Although the vinegar black. Aqua regia added to the of HYDRATION (1) and FIBRILLATION usual leather used was crimson mo- basic Brazil dust solution supposedly and to cut the fibers to the desired rocco, many such bindings were in produced a brighter and more "perma- length. See also: REFINER. (17, 42) calfskin or sheepskin. (156) nent" red. See also: ROCK MARBLE. (95) reflectance. The ratio of the fraction of recto. 1. The right-hand page of an open red ocher. A red, hematite, used either in light reflected by a specimen to the book or manuscript, usually bearing an paste or solution form for sprinkling fraction similarly reflected by a stand- odd page number. 2. The first side of a the edges of books, and in powdered ard reflector,under specified condi- printed or ruled sheet as distinct from form by type casters to coat the inner tions. The spectral reflectance curve the VERSO (2). 3. A term sometimes surfaces of their molds to make the gives the reflectance of a specimen as

2 35 refraction 215 relative humidity

it varies with wavelength throughout the and plow, except that it has a table on each time the cover is opened. (69, entire visible spectrum. Reflectance is which the work is placed and a gauge 236) important in the physical measurement at the back for the accurate positioning relative humidity. The ratio of the amount of color brightness and opacity. (17) of the pile to be cut. When in the cor- of water vapor in the air to the amount refraction (refractive index). A term indi- rect position, the top beam is screwed which would be present at the same cative of the bending or deflection of down and the paper is plowed. The temperature were the atmosphere to be a ray of light from a straight course registered cutting machine is seldom if fully saturated. Relative humidity is ex- as it passes obliquely from one medium ever used today. pressedasapercentage.Saturated to another, e.g., form air to water, with rehinged. A book that has had a strip of water vapor pressure for various tem- the extent of deflection being related to linen attached across the hinge from peratures is given below: the speed of light in the two mediums. the flyleaf onto the board paper, so as The refractive index (RI), or index of to reinforce a torn or broken hinge. If Saturated Vapor refraction, of any substance is the ratio the board paper has been lifted from Temperature Pre.zsure between the speed of tight in air and the board tor some other operation, in ° C. (mm. of mercury) its speed in the substance. The greater e.g., the insertion of an overcast cloth 0 4.58 the difference between the refractive joint, the new hinge can be secured to 5 6.54 index of a substance and its surround- the board. In cases where the book is 10 9.20 ing medium, the more light will be also to be strengthened across the joint 15 12.78 reflected and the less absorbed, while with a new strip of leather, it is prefer- 20 17.51 the smaller the difference, the less light able to replace the hinge first, other- 25 23.69 will be reflected and the more absorbed. wise the additional thickness of the 30 31.71 (233) linen inside may exert pressure on the 35 42.02 register.1. The ribbon or cord marker outer joint when the book is closed 40 55.13 attached to a book to serve as a book- and create severe strain across the joint. Thus, at 25* C., for example, if the mark. It is usually run under the head- See also: REJOINTEI/ band (if any) and glued to the spine. pressure of water vapor actually pres- Generally, the register is about 1 inch reinforced. Any section, endpaper, hinge, ent in the atmosphere is 13.77 mm of longer than the distance from the head joint, or cover that has been strength- mercury, the R. H. is: of the book at the spine, taken diago- ened by means of stitching,pasting, mounting, guarding, etc. actual vapor pressure nally to the outer corner of the tail. R. H. = X 100, Registers are not used as often as in the reinforced binding. A term sometimes saturated vapor pressure past, possibly because of the rising cost used for "pre-library binding." See: 13.77 PRE-LIBRARY BOUND. See also: PUB- or X 100, or 58% of edition binding. They are still found 23.69 fairly frequently in devotional books, LISHER'S REINFORCED BINDING. especially Bibles, and . When reinforced library binding. A type of re- All organic fibers, including paper two registers are used, as with some placement (secondary) binding in a and leather, are hygroscopic and absorb cookbooks and other publications, they "pre-library bound" style. The term, or emit water vapor so as to adjust are called "double registers." Also called whichis now virtuallyobsolete,is their moisture content to that of the "bookmark." 2. A list of the quires or properly used only with reference to air in which they are stored. Although sections of a book, often printed at the so-called Class "A" pre-library binding; the R. H. factor varies with different end of early printed books, particularly however, it is sometimes also used with kinds of organic fiber, it remains con- those printed inItaly,toassistthe reference to a pre-bound book which stant for the same kind of fiber. Since binder in assembling and collating a retains thepublisher'soriginalcase. the moisture content of paper affects complete copy in the correct order. The (12) its weight and printing properties, its list may contain , signature reinforcing fabric. A fabric, such as cam- R. H. must be known. It may be meas- marks, or a combination thereof. 3. In bric or linen, used for strengthening ured by a sword hygrometer inserted printing, a term used to indicate that the endpapers at the hinges. The Library in a pile of paper. type area of the recto of the sheet co- Binding Institute standards call for a incides exactly with that of the verso; Corresponding fabric that is the standard 80 by 80 Water Content of also the adjustment of color blocks so thread count, print cloth construction, that colors are superimposed with exact equal Weights of prorated to 39 inches, 4.0 yards to the R. H. of the Aira Cellulose Fiber accuracy. Register is of considerable pound. (209) 30% importance in multi-colored printing. 4. rejointed. A leather binding that has had 5% In folding, the exact alignment of im- one or both joints repaired or replaced. 40% 6% ages so that the print of one leaf is Replacement joints are the length of 50% 7% exactly over that of the preceding and 60% 8.5% the book and about 3/4 inch wide, the 70% following leaves. 5. A book in which exact width being determined by the 10% binding and other records are kept. 6. size of the book and the distance the 80% 13% In paper ruling, a sheet is said to be in strips are to extend underneath the The change in rate of increase, e.g., register when ruled on both sides the spine and sides. The strips, which are between 50 and 60%, stems from the lines coincide exactly. (17, 83,107, pared moderately thin, have a long fact that the curve is not flat but "S" 156, 241) feathered bevel onallsides. While shaped; and, also, because of hysteresis, registered cutting machine. A type of cut- paring does weaken the leather, if it is equilibrium water contentishigher ting machine which operates on the too thick along the line of the joint, it when approached from the wet side same principle as that of the lying press will tend to lever itself off the spine than from the dry side. remainder binding 216 resin

Any changes in water content of a binding than the one originally made sized and its more important properties fiber immediately manifestsitselfas forit.Thereisnot a comparable include chemical purity, good wet and changes in its dimensions, especially in English word for this expression, re- dry strengths, and a relatively high de- the cross direction of the paper. The casingbeingtheclosest;however, gree of permanence. (17) fiber diameter swells considerably at in craft bookbinding, "recasing" con- reptile calf. An imitation lizard skin pro- increased moisture contentresulting notes a book that has been removed duced from calfskin, the grain pattern in stretching of the paper. Other prop- from its covers, repaired and/or re- being created by embossing. (278) erties of the paper are also affected, sewn; and then returned to the original rescript. See: PALIMPSEST. but the most significant change affect- covers, while in library binding, it indi- reset. A leaf, leaves, or an entire section ing printing is the change in dimen- cates a new, but usually just ordinary, of a book which has become detached sion. The absorption and emission of case. (69) and has been glued back into place. moisture require time, absorption gen- removable press. A type of press that is Although the technique is used by some erally requiring less than emission. The not designedtoexert pressure but bookbinders, itis a poor and usually edges of paper in storage come into simply to hold pressure that is applied. ineffective method of repair. The term contactwiththeatmospheretoa In the days when standing presses were is also used (improperly) to describe greater extent than other areas, and are used in edition and library binding, an entire text block that has become therefore exposed initially to changes many presses were required because loosened in its case and has been reset. in R. H. A rise in R. H. will cause the books were generally kept under pres- (69) edges of the paper tc buckle, while a sure for 24 hours. Use of the remov- resewing. The process of removing a text decrease may cause undulations in the ablepressreduced the number of block from its case or covers, remov- middle of the pile. In order to avoid (hydraulic) standing presses required ing the spine lining (if any), old ad- dimensional changes in paper it is not because it divided the application and hesive, as well as the original sewing unusual to hang it before printing. In maintenance of pressure between two thread, and then resewing the sections. offset printing, where attention must be implements. The books were loaded on In conservation bookbinding, "resew- given to the moisture transferred to the a separate base supported on casters ing" usually implies the same method paperdirectlyfromthe dampened instead of the base of the press. When of sewing as the original;in library plates (by way of the rubber cloth), a the press was filled, a special board binding, however, the term generally relativehumidityofapproximately was placed on top of the last pressing implies the substitution of OVERSEW- 60% has been found to be suitable for board, and, after the pressure was ap- ING for edition sewing. (130) purposes of register, whilein other plied, threaded steel rods connected resilience of leather. The degree of per- printing methods and paper handling the top board and the caster-mounted centage rebound of a standard plunger firms, a lower moisture content may base. The pressure of the hydraulic dropped onto the surface of a leather be more suitable. press was then released and the entire under specified conditions. Resilience remainder binding. The business of bind- load of books rolled out of the press. of leather is a property closely asso- ing unsold copies of a book that are in With this equipment it was necessary to ciated with TEMPER. (363) sheets or gatherings. These are sold to have only one press for each casing-in resin. Any of various hard, brittle, solid, a jobber, bound in a different format machine; however,sufficientspecial or semi-solid amorphous, organic, fus- from the original binding, and offered bases, top boards and pressing boards ible substances that are insoluble in for sale, sometimes with a different for the day's work were required. See water but soluble in organic solvents, title. Such bindings are usually very also: BUILDING-IN MACHINE. (339) and which are classified as natural or economically priced. For 19th and 20th Renaissance ornament. A conventional synthetic. Resins contain a high pro- century books, the term "remainder finishing tool cut in the shape of col- portion of carbon but little oxygen, binding" is used correctly only with umns, urns, vases, beasts, birds, gar- and have an indefinite and often high reference to a book bound for the lands, or foliage found in Renaissance molecular weight. The natural resins wholesale book trade by someone other architecture. (250) are excretion or exudation products than the original publisher of the book. reponse. A book cover of metal, usually principally of plant origin (a notable A later (and sometimes less expensive) silver,produced by hammering or exception being shellac), fusible, usu- publisher's binding was a SECONDARY shaping the metal into a design from ally yellowish to dark brown in color, BINDING. (69, 70, 261) the reverse side, generally into a mold and transparent to translucent. "Recent remargined. The replacement or restora- of wood, or other solid material, that resins" are those obtained from living tion of part of one or more of the outer has been carved intaglio. The metal is plants, while those dug from the earth margins of a leaf, either by means of then attached to the book board, which where they were deposited, are known paper cut to size and pasted to the leaf isusually made of wood. Repousé as "fossil resins." or by LEAFCASTING. If all four margins work is often refined by chasing. (233) Chemically, resins consist of com- are replaced, the leaf is said to have reproduction paper. A base paper used in plex mixtures of organic (resin) acids been INLAID. (69) numerous reproduction processes or and alcohols, which are generally aro- remboitage. A French term applied to the systems. It may be sensitized, as in the matic in nature, and inert substances process of transferring a book, i.e., text case of negatives, blueprints, photo- (known as resenes), together with ex- block and endpapers, from its original graphic paper, etc., or plain, as that traneousfatty,mineral,orother binding to another. The new binding usedforelectrostaticreproduction materials. Gum resins contain carbo- may be more luxurious, more nearly paper. It is usually produced from high hydrate gums, while oleoresins are mix- contemporary, or simply more appro- grade bleached chemical wood pulps tures of resins and volatile oils. The priate, than the original. The term also and/or cottonfiberpulpsinbasis non-volatile residue of conifer resins is refers to the process of transferring a weights ranging from 11 to 32 pounds called ROSIN, which is the most impor- superior text of a work into a better (17 X 22 500). It is generally well tant resin used in the manufacture of resin milk 217 retrospective binders

paper. Other more-or-less familiar res- and has excellentpenetration.(37, binding, and reconstruction. Cf: CON- ins include copal and dammar, which 309) SERVATION. (102, 233, 237) are natural resins used in the manu- resistance of leather to acid. The maxi- restored. A book that has been repaired facture of varnish, accroides, , mum percentage of acid that a leather or rebound in such a manner as to re- elemi, ester gum, manila copal, mastic, iscapable of absorbing without de- tain all, or at least as much as possible, sandarac, and shellac. See also: SYN- teriorating with time. Experiments in- of the original covering material, and THETIC RESINS. (17, 233, 235, 309) volving both chrome- and vegetable- (frequently)the original boards and resin milk. A RESIN that has been finely tanned calfskinsindicatethatrapid endpapers. It is generally accepted that divided in the form of an emulsion be- destructionofthechrome-tanned everything possible should be done to fore being used as a sizing material. leather may be expected if the per- retain as much as possible, and that (197) centage (by weight of leather) of (sul- added materials should be functional, resinoids. A class of thermosetting resins, furic) acid exceeds 10%, while a per- chemically safe, strong, durable, and either in their initial temporary fusitle centage greater than 4% of the same unobtrusive (although with no attempt state or in their final (infusible) state. acid will cause rapid deterioration of at deception). (309) the vegetable-tanned skin. Most of the restrike. A second or subsequent impres- resinous adhesives. A group of adhesives acid found in the chrome-tanned skin sion of a lettering or finishing tool, or containing as their principal constitu- is probably in chemical combination a second impressioninablocking ent a water emulsion of POLYVINYI with the chromium, whereas inthe press. (310) ACETATE (PWA) resin. There are several vegetable-tanned skin it exists as free retanning. The process of subjecting a formulas for PVA resinous adhesives, acid. (363) hide or skin, which has been more-or- some of the principal ones used in con- resistance to grain cracking. The extent to less completely tanned by one process servation work being listed below: which leather may be stretchedor (or one kind or blend of tanning 1. PVA 95% flexed without causing the grain surface agents), to a second tanning process, Plasticizer 5% to crack. (363) involving similar, or, more usually, dif- Water (sufficient to thin as resistance to wear. That property of a ma- ferent tanning agents. A typicalre- required for best working terial that enables it to withstand abra- tanning process is CHROME RETAN. (61) consistency) sion or other forms of wear, or, in a retention. The quantity of filler or other more general sense, degradation dur- material remaining in a finished paper. This composition is used both in hand ing use. See also: ABRASION RESISTANCE. It is expressed as a percentage of the binding operations and in gluing ma- (17) quantity of those materials added to chines, and is particularly suitable in resite. See: C-STAGE. the paper stock prior to sheet forma- those operations involving the use of resitol. See: B-STAGE. tion. (17) pyroxylin coated or impregnated fab- resizing. The process of applying sizing reticular layer. The fibrous part of a hide rics, e.g., buckram, which are difficult material to paper that has had part of or skin located between the grain layer to attach by means of ordinary glues. its original sizing removed, either ac- and the flesh. 2. PVA 78.0% cidentlye.g., by wettingor deliber- reticulin. Fibers in a hide or skin that are Dibutyl phthalate 6.3% ately during washing to remove stains, believed to compose a network which Gamma valerolactone 7.8% deacidification, etc. Regardless of the surrounds the collagen fiber bundles Water 7.9% original size, the material used for re- and assists in holding them together. sizing is generally some form of gelatin Reticular fibers are found in most con- Thic formula produces an adhesive or glue,or, more frequently today, nective tissue (skin) as a network of which will adhere paper, leather, plain carboxy methyl cellulose. Vellum or fine fibrils which, in sharp distinction cloths, or pyroxylin coated or impreg- parchment size is used occasionally, as tocollagenfibers,exhibitmarked nated, starch filled, or rubberized cloths is nylon, when the paper is very weak branching anastomosis. (26, 248) to cellulose acetate surfaces. and cannot be immersedinwater. retrogradation. A reversal to a simpler 3. PVA 90% (237) form, suchasaphysicalreaction Gamma valerolactone 10% resol. See: A-STAGE. involving vegetable adhesives, charac- Water (sufficient to thin as restoration. The process of returning a terized by a reversion to a simpler required for best working book, document, or other archival ma- molecular structure. An example of consistency) terial as nearly as possible to its origi- retrogradation would be a change in nalcondition. The entire scope of starch pastes from low to high con- This is a quick drying adhesive. "restoration" ranges from the repair of sistency upon aging, and, in extreme 4. PVA 32% a torn leaf, or removal of a simple cases,aseparationof more-or-less Isopropyl alcohol 39% stain, to the complete rehabilitation of solid gel from the aqueous solution. Plasticizer 4% the material, including, at times, de- (309) Water 25% acidification, alkaline buffering, resiz- retrospective binders. Bookbinders who ing, filling in missing parts, resewing, imitate earlier styles of binding. In the This adhesive provides excellent pene- replacementofendpapersand/or 1 gth and 19th centuries, many cele- tration. boards, recovering orrestorationof brated and not so celebrated bookbind- 5. PVA 89% the original covering material, and re- ersimitated earlierstyles,including Hexylene glycol 7% finishing in a manner sympathetic to Padeloup and Thouvenin, who were Isopropyl alcohol 2% the time of the original binding of the perhaps the most famous, as well as Water 2% publication. Restoration, therefore, en- Cape, Trautz-Bauzonnet, Lortic, Cham- compases virtually the entire range of bolle-Duru, Taffln-Lefort and Gruel This is an adhesive that is quick drying book workmending, repairing,re- amongtheFrench,andRiviere,

23 8 retting 218 Richenback, Johann

Zaehnsdorf, Lewis, and Clark among which a section is sewn, the folds of pigments with synthetic oils ard is ap- the English. the guard meetinginreverse. The plied in several layers, each being dried In the 19th century, the demand of guard consists of several strips of paper before the next application. Polyvinyl antiquarian book collectors for retro- folded with the two open ends being chloride may also be used for the coat- spective bindings was so great that folded back on the guard, either to- ing. Embossing is done with engraved there was a concerted effort on the gether or in opposite directions; the steel rollers, usually to imitate the grain part of bookbinders to copy earlier guard may be folded over in one direc- pattern of a leather, but sometimes styles. Many of these binders produced tion on itself and the section sewn at with modern geometric designs. This outstanding designs of earlier years, either end, or it may be folded over in type of cloth has been in use since the offtiines surpassing their models in the opposite directions on itself and one or first decades of the 20th century. (25) precision and brilliance of their tooling. two sections sewn to it, depending on Reynes, John (d 1544). A native of Hol- The vogue for such lavish bindings con- thethicknessofthesectionsand land who by 1510 had established him- tinued well into the 20th century. (363) amount of sewing swell required. Gen- self as a bookseller in London. Reynes retting. 1. The process of soaking or ex- erally, the paper used for the guard was active as a publisher and book- posing a substance, such as flax or (before folding) should be one-fourth seller, and the bindery under his direc- hemp, so as to promote the loosening the thickness of the section, so that tion was the most prolific of his time. of the fiber from the woody tissue by when it has been folded it will be of His bindings usually bear his device, bacterial action. The term also refers equal thickness. The reversed V tech- initials, or, in many cases, both. Besides to chemical treatment to loosen fiber nique is used if the paper of the book using panels depicting emblems of the from the woody tissue. 2. The rotting is too thick to be sewn in the usual Passion, etc., Reynes also employed a or damage to a material caused by ex- manner, and ifitis not possible or fineroll cut with his trademarka posure to moisture. desirable to hinge the leaves on linen hound, a falcon, and a bee, amid sprays reverse calf. A calfskin finished on the guards, such as in an album. In addi- of foliage and flowers. His name is also flesh side by light buffering. The skin tion, such a guard may be required associated with the early use of gold is used flesh side out. Reverse calf was because there is writing in the folds of tooling in England. (132, 347) sometimes usedinplace of suede the sections which would be made in- R. II. See: RELATIVE HUMIDITY. leatherasacoveringmaterialfor accesible by the usual manner of sew- rhea. See: RAMIE. ledgers and blankbooks during the lat- ing and binding. The reversed v-guard rheology. A term pertaining to viscosity ter 18th and early 19th centuries. Also technique places considerable strain on behavior, e.g., the viscosity of an ad- called "rough calf." (173, 325) the sewing thread and folds of the sec- hesive under conditions of shear, or the reverse cover. See: LOWER COVER. tion, particularly if the guards throw plastic flow properties of an adhesive. reversed cloth. A book cloth used with out far from the spine. Also called Rheological behavior may be thixo- the reverse (unfinished) side out. The "meeting guard." (236) tropic, where viscosity decreases greatly practice of covering books in this man- reversible cloth. A book cloth that is fin- with shear; dilatant, where viscosity ner began in the late 1880s and was ished on both sides, so that either side increases greatly with shear; or New- important at the time because, while may be used as the "outside" of a book tonian, where viscosity is directly pro- washable cloths were not common, the cover or case. (261) portional to shear. (221) reverse side of the fabrics then in use reversion. The condition of shrinkage and rice glue. A type of glue (actually a paste) were not affected by water. (236) the exuding of clear water from a paste prepared by boiling ground rice in soft reversed fold book. A method of binding following gelling. See also: RETROGRA- water. The resulting adhesive is white single sheets without sewing, the leaves DATION. (198) in color and dries to a film that is al- instead being glued to a continuous rexine. A strong, coated cloth, usually in most transparent. (371) stub folded concertina-wise. See also: the form of an imitation leather, and rice marble. A "marble" executed by CONTINUOUS GUARD. (58, 183) used as a covering material for books. scattering particles, such as rice, bread reversed nonpareil marble. A NONPAREIL The weave and composition of the base crumbs, etc., in a random manner on MARBLE executed by drawing the comb (gray) cloth depend on the grade of the edges of a book, or, more com- through the colors on the size from cloth being manufactured at the time, monly, on the covers of calfskin bind- right to left instead of left to right, as and may be cotton or a cotton and ings, and then sprinkling the edges or in the nonpareil. (159) rayon mixture. The cellulose nitrate covers with color. This decoration was reversed v-guard. A folded GUARD (1) to coating is colored by mixing powdered popular on calf bindings of the first half of the 19th century. When used on the edges of books, the edge was REVERSED V-GUARD sometimes first colored, the particles were scattered over, and a lighter color was then sprinkled over the first. (152, 236, 241) -(4 rice paper. A non-fibrous, delicate, paper- like material made from the pith of the rice paper tree, a small Asiatic tree or shrub, Tetrapanax papyriferurn, that is widely cultivated in China and Japan. The pith is cut into a thin layer of ivorylike texture by means of a sharp knife. (17, 156) Richenback, Johann (if1467-1485). A

r) ricing 219 rolled edges

German bookbinder and chaplain of ing, and, in addition, the bulk of the produced from a superior grade of un- the church at Geislingen (Wurtem- spine is large in proportion to the quan- split sheepskin. Roan issofter than berg). Richenback generally included tity of paper it can hold. The binder is BASIL, and is colored and finished in his name and address on his bindings, usually constructed with two or three imitation of MOROCCO. The typical roan as well as the name of the person for rings mounted on a metal backpiece. has a close, tough, long, boarded grain, whom the book was bound. Some 40 A mechanism inside the metal back a compact structure, andisusually or more of his bindings have been links the rings together so that they all dyed a red color. Originally, roans authenticated, most of which are cov- open and close simultaneously, being were leathers tanned exclusively with ered in white pigskin, a favorite leather held closed by spring tension. Some sumac (as were the moroccos); how- of the early German binders. The use binders open when a small latch at the ever, in later years they were often of coloring on many of his bindings end of the backpiece is pressed, and tanned with other vegetable tannins. gives them a bright appearance, mak- close when the latch at the other end They were used extensively for cover- ing them stand out from the blind- is depressed, while others have fiber ing books from about 1790 until well tooled calf and pigskin bindings of his strips designed to slip over the rings. into the 19th century, but have been time. He was using rolls,as well as When these strips are pulled in opposite seldom used since that time. (69, 264, stamps, as early as the 1460s, and had directions the rings snap open. In the 343, 351) a font of 7 of the former and some 49 usual case, the bindery produces the rock marble. A cover marble executed by of the latter. (94, 339, 347) binding, but purchases the assembled throwing large drops of black color on ricing. A mottled or grainy LOOK-THROUGH mechanism. (276, 339) the leather, which, when partially dry, of a paper, especially one produced ring color test. A test designed to deter- was followed by diluted potash water. largely from esparto, caused by the mine the presence of different tanning When this was dry, scarlet was sprink- crowding or crushing of the fibers. The agents usedinthe manufacture of led on in small drops, followed by aqua term is generally used when the paper leather. Concentrated sulfuric acid is regia, which was supposed to brighten displayscharacteristicsmallknots added to a small quantity of the test thescarlet.See also: RED MARBLE. caused by over cooking and/or by the solution of ground leather fibers mixed (152) wet beating of the pulp. (197) with water. A dark red ring will form roll.I. A finishing tool consisting of a right angle fold. One of the principal at the juncture of the two liquids in the brasswheel,thecircumferenceof methods of folding, in which at least case of a condensed tannin, while a which is engraved so as to impress a one fold is at right angles to the others. pyrogalloltannin gives a yellow or continuous repeating pattern as it re- Right angle folding is the most com- brown ring. (291) volves under (considerable) pressure. monly used fold in book work. Cf: ringing out. A ceremony observing the The decorative roll was used in Ger- PARALLEL FOLD. See also: FOLDING; apprentice's last day as an apprentice. many at least as early as the 1460s, and FOLDING MACHINES. (320) On noon of that last day, the next was in common use by the second dec- right reading. 1. An image that appears in senior apprentice begins the ringing by ade of the 16th century. Most of these the normal reading position and not banging his press pin on the platen of early rolls were cut intaglio, so that the laterally reversed. 2. The arrangement a press, or some other metal object. design on the leather was raised, but of the papers that are to be printed on Following the ringing, the new journey- many were also cut in relief. The aver- one side of a sheet so that, when cut man puts on his jacket and walks into age length of the pattern impressed by and folded, they will be "right read- the office of the owner of the estab- early rolls was approximately 5 to 6 ing," i.e., in correct numerical sequence. lishment to ask for a job. See also: inches, which would give a wheel dia- (156, 316) KISSING THE BOOKBINDER'S DAUGHTER. meter of approximately1.6 to1.9 right side. The so-called correct side of a ring test. A test designed to determine the inches. The common diameter of rolls sheet of paper. It is the wire (mold) water resistance of a (book) cloth. The used today is about 3.5 inches, which side in a handmade paper, and the up- Library Binding Institute standards call is capable of producing an impression per (felt) side of a machine-made pa- for a book cloth that will permit no of about 11inchesinlength. The per. In both, it is the side from which penetration of water within a period of smaller size, however, isstill in use. the WATERMARKisreadcorrectly. 10 minutes, or oleic acid(grease) Rolls have been produced in an enor- Printers often have to know which side within 5 minutes. (341) mous varietyofdesigns,including of the paper is the "right side" because Riviire, Robert (1808-1882). An English simple lines, simple and intricate pat- of differences in surface, as well as the bookbinder of French descent. Riviere terns, as well as edge and title rolls. undesirable effect of using sheets laid was an accomplished craftsman and 2. The design impressed by a roll. See: one way with those laid another way excelled in imitating the best historical SCROLL (2). (69, 83. 94, 301) in the same publication. Flat papers styles with a fidelity and technique that rolled-back. A type of SPRING-BACK con- are usually packed with the right side have not often been surpassed. His sisting of a thin strip of millboard that uppermost, while, if folded, the right craftsmanship is evidence by the fact is wetted and glued to a strip of paper side is outermost. In blue and azure thathe restoredand reboundthe that is wrapped around it.Both are papers, the right side is usually darker Domesday Book. then rolled to the shape of the spine of in color than the reverse side. Rivière established himself at Bath the text block. If the book is unusually ring binder. One of the earliest forms of in 1829, relocated in London in 1840, thick, two boards are used, the outer LOOSE-LEAF BINDING. The ring binder and died in 1882. His grandson, Perci- one being cut slightly wider than the is a form of mechanical binding similar val Calkin, became a partner in 1881, inner so asto compensate forthe to the ring notebook paper binder, only and thereafter the firm was known as largerarcitmust transverse.The much larger. This type of binder has Riviere and Son, until it closed in 1939. "shoulders"oftherolled-backare declined in popularity in recent times (94, 140) formed before the glue hardens. (99) because it is prone to accidental open- roan. A variety, or varieties, of leather rolled edges. I. The edges of the covers

2 4 rolled pattern 220 Roman numerals

of a book which have been decorated roller basil. A leather with a smooth fin- rolling machine. A bookbinding machine with the roll, usually in gilt. 2. Paper ish, a very fine grain pattern, and a at one time used to flatten and con- which curls on the edges. (17, 156) compact, firm structure. While of a solidate the sections of a book before rolled pattern. A blind or gilt decoration natural color, it is sometimes dyed red. sewing. It consists essentially of two produced with a ROLL (1 ). Roller basil is produced from vegetable iron cylinders, each of which is about roller backer. A bookbinding machine, in- tanned sheepskin, and is used to some a foot in diameter. The distance be- vented by the American, Charles Starr extent in the binding of blankbooks. tween the rolls can be adjusted by and exhibited by him in 1851 at the (61) means of a screw. The sections are London exposition. It is used to create roller shoes. The SHOES for large and/or gatheredintopacketsofanywhere the backing shoulders of a text block heavy books which have been fitted from two to four and placed between which has previously been rounded, with tiny rollers, enabling the book to tin plates. The number to be rolled at usually by hand. It consists of a heavy roll off the shelf instead of sliding. a time depends on the thickness of the roller pivoted above a pair of jaws. The Roller shoes have been in use since sections. The "book" of sections is then book is clamped with that part of the about 1857. (339) passed between the rollers and removed text block equal to the extent of the rolling (rolling machine). The process of by the workman turning the crank. Be- backing shoulders projecting above the smoothing and compressing the grain fore the invention of the rolling ma- jaws. The reer is adjusted so that it surface of leather by subjecting it to chine (in 1827), which was the first swings back and forth across the jaws the action of a metal roller under pres- machine to be used in the craft of in an arc that corresponds to the round sure. Unlike GLAZING, rolling involves bookbinding, sections were compressed of the spine. The roller is then lowered the use of a revolving steel roll and is by pour ding them with heavy beating so that it presses on the spine and is usually done in a rolling machine, or hammers. Not all books were suitable rocked back and forth to shape the rolling jack, which is very much like forrolling,e.g.,old books with a spine into the proper shape, bending the glazing machine, except that the heavy type impression and deep corru- the sections over the jaws and thus latter has a stationary roll made of gations across the type area; therefore creating the shoulders. If too great a solid glass in place of the revolving the hammer continued to be used dur- pressure is applied directly to the spine, steel roll. While the steel roll strikes ing the remainder of the 19th century, thesections may bebuckledand the leather with considerable pressure, although itsuse diminished steadily. creased on the binding edge; in addi- there is no great friction, as in glazing, The modern counterpart of the rolling tion, the endpapers and several leaves and no measurable heat is generated. machine is the BUNDLING PRESS. (83, of the first and last sections may be cut While being rolled, the leather is usu- 203, 236) by the edges of the jaws. See also: ally rotated so that the entire area is Romanesque bindings. A group of book- BACKING; ROUNDING AND BACKING MA- rolled twice, a process referred to as bindings dating from the 12th and early CHINE. (164, 339) "rolling twice around." (363) 13thcenturies.Thesebindings,of which more than a hundred examples are recorded, are always in leather, ROLL usually of a dark brown color. Their decorative patterns were not incised with a knife or graver, as was common in that time, but were produced by means of repeated impressions made with engraved metal stamps. The finest examples are of French or English origin, but the style was also prevalent in Germany, although not in Italy or Spain. Romanesque bindings are the earliest of the blocked bindings and represent a fully developed art of book decoration by means of deeply en- graved metal dies, which left er,:ellent impressions inrelief in theleather. These 12th century stamps are well en- graved, and seem to have no known antecedents. There is evidence indicat- ing that they were produced by the members of a small group of monas- teries, and within a relatively short period of time. 7-tost of the extant ex- amples are bindings of individual books of the Bible, each usually having a different design on the upper cover. (69, 167) Roman numerals. The capital letters used as numbers in books, for chapter head- ings and the designation of part num- bers,appendices, on title pages for

2 41 room-temperature setting adhesive 221 rounding

dates of publication, etc. They are also materials (notably turpentine) of the although usually to an almost imper- used in lower case for the pagination of gum ofthesouthernpines,Pinus ceptibleextent.Thistechniquehas preliminary pages. The Roman capitals palustris and P.elliottii. Gum rosin been widely used in England and Amer- most commonly used as numerals are: exudes from the living tree, while wood ica,especially by those bookbinders C-100 rosin is obtained from the wood by who do not care for the solid "block V-5 D-500 steam and solvent processes. Rosin is of metal" appearance of edges gilt sub- X-10 M-1,000 essentially an organic acid, the main sequent to sewing. See also: GILT IN L-50 constituentbeingabieticacid(Coo THE ROUND; TRIMMED BEFORE SEWING. H3002). See also: ROSIN SIZE.(17, (156, 236) Combinations of numbers are made by 143, 235, 309) roughtanned.Usually, avegetable- theadditionandsubstraction,e.g., rosin size. A solution or dispersion ob- tanned leather which has received no XX = 20, XIX = 19, XXI = 21, tained by treating ROSIN with a suitable further processing following tannage, MCMLXXVI = 1976, etc. 1,000 was alkali. The resulting size may be fully other than drying. The term is used at first represented by the Greek letter saponified or it may contain free rosin mainly with reference to hide leathers. phi sb, which in lettering and architec- acids. When properly converted in the (61) turalinscriptions became CI, which papermaking process, usually by the rough trimmed. See: ROUGH CUT. then became M. 500 was half a phi, or addition of ALUM, the size precipitates roulette. An alternative term used in the ID, which later became D. 100 was and imparts water (ink) resistance to United States to indicate a FILLET (1). represented by the symbol for theta 0, paper. Since in its natural state rosin round back. 1. The natural configuration which later became T, then C, while is insoluble in water; it must be altered of a thin booklet, the individual folios 50 was represented by the Chaleidian chemically before it can be used as a of which have been inserted inside each form of the letter chi Ul , which became sizing material. Although several meth- other and saddlestitched,sewn, or 1 and later L. Below are listed most of ods of treatment exist, the one in gen- corded to the cover through the center the known numerals: eral use today is basically the same as fold. 2. A book which has been shaped that used in the manufacture of soap, 300 ID D 5,000 during the binding process to give it the i.e., saponification of a portion or all familiar convex spine. The opposite of 100 L 50 of the rosin with caustic soda or soda CD 1,000 M 1,000 "flat back." See: ROUNDING. (156, 256) CID CID2,000 ash to form a soluble rosin soap. Un- round corner. A book cover which has N 900 reacted rosin, which is held as an emul- 500 Q had the corners at the fore edge and 500 sion, is known as free rosin. The per- head and tail cut off before covering. 250 R 80 centage of free rosin has been found 40 T 160 The round corner is used extensively toaffectthesizing efficiency of a 400 V 5 inthe binding of Bibles,passports, material to a certain degree, the extent diaries, as well as some ledgers, blank- 200 X 10 depending on variations in conditions 1,000 books, and the like. (139, 339) 1 X in local paper mills. (17, 98, 143) round cornering. The process of trimming ID 500 oo 1,000 rotary board cutter. A machine used ex- the corners of a lift of paper to a A bar or dash placed over a letter in- tensively in library binderies, and to rounded shape to prevent the edges creased its value a thousand times. some extent in edition binderies, for from becoming frayed or dog-eared. Roman numerals were used by early cutting boards to trimmed size. The round cornering machine. A hand- or printers because they had no Arabic circular blades of the cutter are fixed power-operated machine used for cut- numerals; their use today, however, on an axle, and the board passes be- ting round corners on lifts of paper. especially for dates of publication, is neath them on a flat bed. One pass cuts Power-operatedcorneringmachines largely an affectation. (156) thP boards to the set length, and, after can make two round corners simul- room-temperature setting adhesive. An adjustment If the setting, a second pass taneously on lifts of paper up to 6 adhesive which sets in the temperature cuts them to the required width. (81, inches in height. (256, 278) range of 68 to 86° F. Such adhesives 203) round corner lapper. A device shaped encompass the majority of those used rotary gatherer. See GATHERING TABLE something like a bent trindle, with two in bookbinding. (309) (2). tines, and used in shaping leather over rope pattern. A form of decoration intro- rough calf. See: REVERSE CALF. a ROUND CORNER. (264) duced into Italy from the Near East in rough cut (rough edges). The edges of a rounded and backed. A rounded text the 15th century. It consisted of an book that are left rough intentionally block that has had itsspine further interlaced, or reticulated, design, usu- in cutting,i.e.,the opposite of CUT shaped with a shoulder at front and ally of a very intricate nature, formed SOLID (1). During a part of the 19th back to receive the boards. (256) by a narrow fillet, and decorated with century rough cutting was the fashion, roundel. A finishing tool consisting of a a series of oblique lines, in imitation of but more as a matter of affectation double ring, usually surrounding a dot the twist of a rope. The rope pattern than to indicate PROOF (1). The edges in the center. (156, 172) continued to be used frequently in the of books are cut solid tofacilitate rounding. The process of molding the gauffering of book edges during the turning of the leaves, for aesthetics, spine of a text block into an arc of first 30 years of the 16th century, and and to reduce the incursion of dust. approximately one-third of acircle, was used from time to time into the Also called "rough trimmed." See also: which in the process produces the char- 19th century. The technique was prob- DECKLE EDGE. (256, 433) acteristic concave fore edge of the ably an Oriental innovation. Also called rough gilt. The edges of a book that have book. Rounding takes place after the "cable pattern." (172, 347) been cut solid and gilded before sew- spine has been given a light coat of rosin. A residue derived from the distilla- ing, so that when the book is later sewn adhesive, and is accomplished by means tion and subsequent removal of volatile the edges are slightly uneven (rough), of light hammering along the spine rounding and backing machine 222 rub-off

with a round-headed hammer. It may finishing off the rounding and form- were flexible and were not turned in also be done by pushing in on the fore ing the shoulders. The rockerisa but overlapped the head, tail, and fore edge while holding the sides of the text heavy piece of metal with a concave edge. Sometimes the covers were not block firmly, or, in the case of library edge, and is brought down until the attached to the text block by any other or edition binding, by means of a concave is in contact with the spine. In means other than cords laced through roundingor morecommonly, a librarybinding,theroundingand holes drilled from front to back of the rounding and backing machine. Edition backing machine operates in a similar entire text block at the binding edge. bindings are generaly rounded after the manner, except that each book is in- This style was popular for suede leather spine lining has been applied. serted by hand, fore edge up, and the bindings. (256) A book is rounded to help prevent mechanism must be adjusted to the rub. 1. A representation of the spine or the spine from falling in, i.e., assuming thickness of each book. The text block sides of a book, showing the lettering a concave shape (and a convex fore is both rounded and backed by the bands, lines, decoration, etc. The rub edge), which would result in severe action of the concave rocker arm. is made by placing a piece of paper, strain on the hinges of the book. It (203, 320, 339) tracing tissue, or linen against the part also facilitates the outer sections being roundlet. A finishing tool cut in the shape of the binding on which the impression knocked overto form the backing of a small circle. is to be made, and rubbing it with a shoulders, and, in conjunction with this round plow. A hand-operated, hand-pow- cobbler's heel ball, lead pencil, or soft backing process, helps accommodate ered cutting machine with a circular crayon until a recognizable copy of all the swell in the spine resulting from cutting blade. It was usually employed detailsis obtained. The rubisused the bulk added by the sewing threads. when a number of books were cut principally in library binding to enable The practice of rounding the spines together. See also: PLOW. (371) the binder to match sets when binding of books dates back to at least the Roxburghe style. A particular style of a serial publication, or when rebinding middle of the 15th century, and, dur- quarter binding characterized by plain one volume of a set. Also called "pat- ing the course of years, the "proper" flatspines covered with brown and tern," or "rub-off." 2. To take an im- shape of the round has ranged from a green calfskin, no raised bands, and pression by rubbing a sheet of paper nearly flat spine to a highly exaggerated dark red cloth or paper sides. The placed on an ink block or inked type arc. See also: BACKING; ROUND BACK. lettering, which is ingilt,is near the form. (12, 156 ) (161, 196, 236, 335) head within a border. Only the head rubber adhesives. Adhesives consisting of rounding and backing machine. A book- edge was gilt and the other edges were solutions of rubber and naphtha or binding machinewhichperforms rough cut. The style was originally de- carbon tetrachloride. They are used as the two operations of rounding the signed for the publications of the Rox- temporary adhesives for paper or thin spine of a text block and forming the burghe Club, founded in England in board. Upon drying, the film of rubber shoulders for the boards. The book is 1812 by a group of wealthy biblio- which remains has but little holding placed in the machine fore edge down, philes, and named in honor of John power, but is often sufficient for cer- and is drawn along until it arrives over Kerr, Duke of Roxburghe. (69, 94) tain purposes. Their principal advan- a forming bar, where it is gripped be- royal bindings. A general term applied to tage is that the rubber film can readily tween facing rollers revolving in oppo- bindings which have a sovereign's arms be peeled off when it has served its site directions while the bar is pushed in the upper or upper and lower covers. purpose without damage to the surface up against the fore edge. The two sides Despite the presence of a sovereign's of the adherend. (198) of the text block are dragged down- arms, ..o-called royal bindings did not rubber-back binding. See: ADHESIVE BIND- wards while the middle is being pushed necessarily have any royal provenance, ING; CAOUTCHOUC BINDING. up, forming an arc of approximately as such bindings were produced rather rubbing-off chest. A large chest of wood one-third of a circle. The text block is frequently, especially in the 16th and that was part of the equipment of every gripped between jaws that serve the 17thcenturies.Englishbookbinders gold blocking firm of the latter decades same function as the backing boards in used royal arms indiscriminately as a of the 19th century. It was topped with hand backing, anda rocker above means of decorating their books well a grill upon which surplus gold was swings in an arc against the spine, intothe19thcentury. Theblind- cleaned off blocked cases. Once or stamped bindings produced in the reign twice a year the contents of the chest of Henry VIII, for example, which are were sent to the refiner for reclamation. ROUNDING embellished panels of the royal arms, In the great days of gold blocking, the are all trade bindings, as are almost all saving was considerable, for the sides of the plain calfskin bindings bearing as well as the spines of books were the arms of Queen Elizabeth, or her often covered almost entirely with gold. crowned falcon badge. Large prayer (106) books or Bibles with royal arms may rubbing-up stkk. See: BANDSTICK (2). have come from one of the Royal rub-off. 1. The wearing away by abrasion Chapels, or they may have been bound of the cloth covering of a book. The for any (loyal) local parish. (69) Library Binding Institute standards call Roycroft. An old term applied to full for a cloth that will resist rub-off to leather or paper-bound books bound the degree that the loss by abrasion will bytheRoycroftBindery,inEast not exceed 8% of the weight of the Aurora, New York, and founded by fabric, when subjected to abrasion for Elbert Hubbard in1896. The books 2 minutes by fine flint paper (2/0), on were not backed and had the covers a disc 2 inches in diameter turning at glued to the lined spine. The covers 1,250 r.p.m. under 3 pounds pressure. rubric 223 run in

2. Printing ink which has rubbed onto ruling inks. Essentially, ruling uses the sheet for RUN THROUGH ruling. For the fingers from a printed sheet which same technique commonly known as "struck work" the carriage may be has not driedsufficiently. See also: SPLIT FOUNTAIN printing, in which the lowered or raised at any required posi- OFFSET (2). See: RUB (1). (34) reservoir is compartmented, each sec- tion on the sheet. It is automatically rubric. The heading nf a chapter or sec- tion containing ink of a different color. operated by a system of cam wheels at tion of a manuscript or printed book Printing ink, on the other hand, is a the side of the machine that are syn- written or printed in red. The term is highly viscous material that must pass chronized with a gate in front of the also used at times with reference to through a series of rollers before it can feed board which retains and releases borders,underlinedwords ontitle be applied to the image carrier. Ruling each sheet in such a manner thatit pages, etc., of books of the 16th and ink is of low viscosity and can be fed passes under the pens at the proper 17thcenturies,althoughthisusage to the ruling pens or discs by capilliary time. The pens may be set in a slide in would better be called ruled in red. action; therefore many different colors a straight line so that they drop and A book having rubrics is said to be can be ruled extremely close to each lift in a straight line, or they may be "rubricated" andtherubricationis other); and 3) writing done in ink will staggered so that they drop and lift in done by a "rubricator" or "rubrisher." not skip as it may if the ruled lines differentalignments,e.g.,forbox (69, 165) are printed. headings. Different colors of ink may rubricated;rubrication;rubricator;ru- 2. The ruling on the printed pages be ruled at the same time from the brisher. See: RUBRIC. of letterpress t-ooks for the purpose of same set of pens on the same carriage Ruette, Mace (fl 1598-1644). A Parisian settingoff thetext from headlines, provided they are not too close to- bookbinder and bookseller who suc- pagination, notes in the margins, etc. gether. Pen rulers are designed with ceded Clovis Eve as royal binder to This type of ruling was prevalent from one or more carriages, which permits Louis XIII in the early part of the 17th about the mid-16th century on the additional sets of pens to be used on century. Ruette was at one time given continent to the end of the 18th cen- the same sheetifrequired by the credit for the invention of MARBLING, tury in England. The color of the ruling pattern, or separate carriages may be but as that art is known to have come is almost always red, now often faded used for different colors of ink. to Europe by way of the Near East, to brown, particularly inthe earlier The disc ruler transfers the ink to his part may have been to introduce it continental books. The practice was the sheet by means of thin revolving into Parisian bookbinding. He and his usually reserved for large paper copies discs instead of pens. Its principal ad- son, Antoine, who was royal binder to or special copies. Professional rulers vantage over the pen ruler is that, on Louis XIV, produced many bindings were available forthis work. (256, two-sided machines, both sides of the tooled in the "au pointille,"i.e.,the 320) sheet can be ruled in one operation; POINTILLE style. (94, 100, 140) ruling inks. The special aqueous, low vis- in addition, some disc machines will ruling.1. The process of marking or cosity,rosin and dye fluids used in rule, count, perforate, slit, and jog the ruling lines on paper, usually by means ruling machines. See also: RULING. sheets,allin one operation. Despite of one of the types of RULING MA- ruling machines. The machines used to these advantages, however, they are CHINES. is used for county, rule lines on paper according to a pre- still considered to be less versatile than court and other record books, forms, determined scheme. Therearetwo pen rulers in the combinations of intri- notebooks, checkbooks, loose-leaf basic types of ruling machines in use cate patterns they can rule. In addition, books, etc. today: the pen ruling machine and the disc rulers have a tendency to produce It is also possible to print patterns discruling machine. The pen ruler broken lines. On one-sided disc rulers, of lines similar to those produced by applies ink in lines by means of mul- the discs are arranged on spindles ac- ruling.Ruling, however, has several tiple pens. It is the most common type cording to the pattern of ruling re- distinct advantages over printing, in- of ruling machine in general use, and is quired. The spindles are set around a cluding: 1) the absence of glare. (Glare also the one usually regarded as pro- cylinder over which the paper is con- in this context refers to the effect pro- ducing the best results. It is used for veyed by means of thin cords. On duced when more lightisreflected short-run general ruling and is capable "striker"machines thespindlesare from the printed lines than the paper of producing lines in the most intricate arranged so that they can drop and itself, and results in strain on the eye patterns.Itsoperationisrelatively lift the discs as required by the ruling of the user. Ruled lines do not produce simple. The paper is fed from the feed pattern; however, since each row of glare because the ruling inks are aque- board onto an endless moving blanket, discs is set on one spindle, and there- ous liquids, and their color, therefore, each sheet being kept in position on fore in one line, a separate spindle has does not stem from insoluble pigments, the blanket by means of thin cords to be used for each "step" (and also but from dyes which are absorbed into stretched around a series of plain and for each color on most machines), the surface of the paper. Modern offset grooved rollers. The pens are held in a whether or not the lines run off one lithography appears capable of pro- slide fitted on the carriage and posi- end of the sheet. Two-sided (perfect- ducing less glare than other printing tioned according to the pattern to be ing) machines have an additional cylin- methods, and today, certain kinds of ruled. The pens rest lightly on the paper der and after the sheet has been ruled ruled lines are now often produced by and rule the lines as the sheet passes on one side it is carried by the cords web offset printing. Loose-leaf books, beneath. After passing under the pens, to the second cylinder to be ruled on checkbooks, and other mass produced the sheet is carried on cords under- the reverse side before being convc-yed items are today always printed); 2) the neath the machine and onto another to the delivery pile. (190, 320) simplicity of multi-color work. (The blanket to permit the ink to dry before run in. The tendency of the sections of ease with which various colors can be delivery to the pile at the end of the a book, particularly the sections at or ruled side by side in one operation is machine. The pens on the carriage are near the center of a large book having also closely related to the nature of arranged to rule along the length of the considerable sewing swell, to collapse

2 1 running out 224 Russia leather

inward, causing the book to lose its vertical lines, extending to the edges highly valued as a bookbinding leather, shape, and (generally) to become loose of the spine. The run-up gilt back particularly between 1780 and 1830, in its case. Run in is usually caused by represents one of the few cases where partly because its pleasing odor was excessive swellinthe spine, or by the filletis used on the spine of a supposed to repel insects. It was first sewing that is too loose. book. (339) introduced into Europe before 1700. running out. See: FANNING OUT. russet (russet leather). The condition of Russia cowhide. See: AMERICAN RUSSIA. run out. 1. The fading or "running out" a vegetable-tanned hide leather that has RUSsia leather. A more-or-less obsolete of the pattern lines in paste-graining. been dressed and is ready for staining trade name originallyapplied to a It is caused by the use of paste that or finishing by other processes. Such shaved cowhide, and latercalfskin, is too thin. 2. See: FANNING OUT. leather is also frequently referred to as horse hide, goat skin, or sheepskin, run pelts. Sheepskins with grain surfaces "skirt" or "skirt leather." (61, 325) :egetable-tanned with tannins obtained pitted or otherwise damaged in de- Russia bands. See: BANDS (2). from willow and other barks, curried woofing by SWEATING. RUSsili calf. Originally, a leather produced on the flesh side with a mixture con- run-through ruling. Down line ruling in inRussia from calfskin,vegetable- taining birch-bark extract to giveit which the lines run the full length of tanned with tannin obtained from the its characteristic odor, and dyed black the sheet without a break. (256) bark of willow, poplar, or larch trees, and in colors other than the original run-up gilt back. The double gold lines curried from the flesh side with a mix- red or reddish brown. Russia leather produced by a two-linefillet which ture containing birch-bark extracts (or imitation Russia calf) was pro- runs along sides of the spine of a book, which gives it the characteristic odor duced as early as the 17th century. and which are intersected at intervals for which it was famousand dyed Its use as a bookbinding leather in the by double gold lines on either side of red or reddish brown. It was often 20th century has been mainly for BAND- each raised band. The horizontal lines given a grain pattern of latticed lines. ING blankbooks. (94, 172, 264) are not mitered, and they cross the Genuine Russia calf was at one time sabal grass 225 Sangordd, Francis

sabai grass. A fiber grass, Ischaemum greenish-blue or rusty-brown in color, augustifolium, indigenous to India, and may developinthe corium of the usedinthemanufactureofpaper skin, in which case they are usually similar in characteristics to that pro- flat, oriented parallel to the skin sur- duced from BAN{Boo. Also called "bha- face, and surrounded on all sides by bar." (143) normal hide fibers. They may also de- saddle. The part of a sewing or stabbing velop on the flesh side, or on the grain machine on which sections are placed surface of the skin. All three types are to be brought up under the sewing characterized by a hardening of the needles and loopers, or the stitcher fibers caused by a grainy deposit which head. (139) MEI can be removed by treatment with saddle sewing. The process of sewing a strong acid solutions. As bacteria are section, e.g., a periodical issue or pam- found only in the stains which form phlet, through the center fold by means salicylanilide. A crystallinecompound on thefleshor grainsurfaces and of thread. The term "saddle" derives (HOC6H4CONHC61-15),usedasa not in the corium, itis not believed from the SADDLE of the machine. Sad- fungicide.Itisapplied either as an that they are caused by these orga- dle sewing affords full openability of aqueous (weak alkaline) solution, or nisms, but by deposits formed from the section, i.e.,to the gutter of the as a non-aqueous solution, in a con- alkaline earth salts present in the salt binding margin. Saddle sewing may centration of 0.1% by weight of the and autolytic decomposition products also be done by hand, usually employ- fabric or paper. Since it does not have of blood and non-collagenous hide pro- ing a figure-eight stitch, but it is more a great affinity for cellulose fibers,it teins. Their presence reduces the value often done by machine, usually one can be washed out fairlyeasilyif of thefinishedleathersignificantly; which has the capability of varying necessary,and, being both colorless however, the addition of 3% soda ash the length of the stitch. Cf: SADDLE and odorless,itis not likely to alter and 1% naphthalene by weight of the STITCHING. the appearance of the material treated. salt virtually eliminates the problem. saddle soap. A mild soap made with some As it is relatively non-volatile, it should (248, 363) additional unsaponifiedoiland used make the material treated immune to sammying (sam; sammie; sammy). A in removing dirt from vellum bindings attack for long periods of timeat method of conditioning newly tanned andincleaningandconditioning normal atmospheric temperatures.It hides or skins with water to bring leather bindings. (173) does not contain chlorine. (198) about a uniform distribution of mois- saddle stitching. The process of securing salicylic acid. A crystalline phenolic acid ture of approximately 30 to 40%. A the leaves of a section, e.g., a periodical (C71-1603), solubleinalcohol, ether leather is sammed to condition it for issue or pamphlet, through the center and hot water, but less soluble in cold STAKING. (306, 363) fold by means of wire staples. The water. At 200° C. it decomposes into sample back. A strip of material such as term "saddle" derives from the SADDLE phenol and carbon dioxide. It is used leather, cloth, etc., intended to repre- of the machine. The machine cuts the in the manufacture of dyes, and as a sent the spine of a book and used as wire, forms the , drives it through preservative for paste. (142, 371) a sample for matching colors, ma- the paper and clinches it from the other salimeter (salometer). A hydrometer espe- terial, lettering, etc. See also: RUB (1). side. The section is stitched in two or cially graduated to indicate the per- (12, 156) more places depending on the height centage of salt (sodium chloride), in sandarac gum. See: GUM SANDARAC. of thepublication. The number of a pickling or brine solution. It is used sanding. 1. The process of rubbing down leaves that can be satisfactorily stitched in developing pickling solutions and in the edges of a book with fine sand- in this manner depends to a great de- measuring thesaltconcentration of paper, or a sanding machine, so as to gree on the thickness of the paper. brining solutions used in curing hides remove as small an amount of margin Saddle stitching, whichisfast and, and skins. (363) as possible. 2. The process of sanding therefore, more economical than SAD- salt. See: SODIUM CHLORIDE. down the paper or leather spine lining DLE SEWING, enjoys the same advan- salts of tartar. See: POTASSIUM CARBON- of a book to make it smooth, chiefly tage of that method, namely, full open- ATE. so that no undulations or lumps will he abilityto the gutter of the binding salt sprout. The crystallization of salt on, seen under the leather covering. 3. The margin. The staples usedin saddle or in, the grain of a hide or skin, process of sanding the edges of hook stitchingareusuallyformedfrom which may cause damage to the grain boards to impart smoothness. round wire and are generally made of surface.Itiscaused by allowing a Sangorski, Francis (1875-1912). An Eng- copper, galvanized iron, or aluminized pickled skintodryout.See also: lish bookbinder apprenticed to Charles iron. Also called "wire stabbing." See PICKLING. (305) Ferris and employed in the workshop also: SIDE STITCHING. (179, 234) salt stains. Discolorations which appear of Douglas Cockerel( in 1899. In 1901 sailcloth. A strong, heavy CANvAs some- on thegrain surface of hides and Sangorski and the English bookbinder times usedfor covering verylarge skins that have been cured by wet salt- GEORGE SUTCLIFFE opened their own blankbooks. (183 ) ing. The stains,whichareusually bindery, whichisstillinoperation,

2 G saponification 226 Scottish style

and commenced producing thefine was the forerunner of SMYTH-CLEAT by pressing it between two metal sur- jeweled bookbindings on which, over SEWING. (183 ) faces, one of which has a recessed the course of years, their great reputa- sawn-in cord sewing.See:RECESSED-CORD groove and the other a tongue. The tion was largely built. Of the hundreds SEWING. scoring may also be done with a dull of such volumes they executed, the scaleboard (scabbard). The thin wooden blade. The scoreis made along the most outstanding, and their crowning boards, which are only slightly thicker line at which the sheet is to be folded achievement, was a binding known as than modern pasteboard, made of oak, or turned. It alters the sheet structure the GREAT OMAR. (94, 236, 347) maple, or birch wood, and used by by compressing the fibers in such a saponification. The hydrolysis of nters by bookbinders in Colonial America in manner as to provide a hinge and in- alkalis,and especially the hydrolytic lieu of paper boards, principally be- creases the number of times the sheet action by which fats and oils contain- cause of their availability and ease of can be flexed before failure. Scoring ing glycerides are converted into soap use.It was used, even after paper may be done on the printing press, and an alcohol, which, in the case of became generallyavailable,for the folding machine, or inthe bindery. glycerides, is glycerin.See also:FAT- cheaper sort of work well into the In bookbinding, and especially library LIQUORING; ROSIN SIZE. (195, 233) 19th century. Scaleboard is not to be binding (when a book is to be over- satin. A smooth fabric woven in satin comparedwiththepasteboardof sewn), scoring is frequently necessary weave, and having a very lustrous face earliertimes, which was sometimes because of the weight of the paper and dull back. Satin is woven of silk very thick. (115, 200) (particularly cover papers), incorrect and other fibers and at one time was scales binder. An anonymous London machine direction of the paper, i.e., used extensively in the production of binder active from before 1460 to vertical to the binding edge, or both, EMBROIDERED BINDINGS.Thefabric about 1491, so called because one of (17, 58) lacks the durability of velvet or canvas, the stamps he used most frequently scored calf. A calfskin subjected to an which were the other principal cloths represents a pair of scales. The scales embossing process (subsequent to the used for such bindings. (111, 280) binder used decorative stamps on his covering of the book) so as to produce bindings andis safin stitch. A padded or unpadded em- believed to be the on the grain surface an indented effect only English bookbinder to have used that was supposed to simulate straight- broidery stitch that is nearly alike on boththestamped- and both sides and is worked in various cut-leather grained morocco. This type of emboss- methods of decoration. (167, 236) ing was popular in England from about lengths and parallel lines. It is closely scenic binding. A style of library binding 1800 to 1830. (69) woven and evenly made so as to re- which utilizes the book jacket or cover semble satin. (111) scored hides. Hides damaged during flay- illustration as part of the case.See also: ing by cuts that do not completely satin white. A paper filler prepared from JUVENILE PICTURE-BOOK BINDING. (123) penetrate the hide. (363) aluminum sulfate (A12504)3) and cal- scent of Russia. The particularspicy scoring.See:SCORE. cium hydroxide (slaked lime) (CaOH)2). scent characteristic of genuine RUSSIA scoring machine. A machine used to score It is used as a coating pigment in coat- LEATHER, and imparted by the applica- heavypaperorlightweightboard. ing mixtures,particularlyincoated tion of an oil obtained from the bark Mere are two basic types in use: the paper of high white color requiring an of birch trees. (152) rotary scorer and the bender scorer. enamel finish. Satin white isdifficult school prize binding. A style of fine bind- Each produces a blind impression in to ham:a., and does not keep well; ing employed in northern France and the sheet compressing and stretching thereforeitisusually prepared im- the Netherlands as early as the 17th the fibers. The machine may be a sepa- mediately before use. Very close con- century, in Ireland (Trinity College, rate unit, or part of the printing press trol of its preparation is necessary to Dublin) from the 18th century, and or folding machine. (58) obtain fully satisfactory results. (17) in England from the last quarter of the Scotch grain. A pebbled grain pattern in sawing in. The process of sawing grooves 19th century until the First World War. leather produced by embossing. Itis across the spine of the gathered sec- In England, the bindings were pro- usually applied to cow hide or calfskin tions of a book for reception of the duced in a common pattern consisting and is intended to resemble the heavy cords used in sewing a book on re- of a full calfskin cover (usually of a coarse-grained leather originally pro- cessed(sawn-in)cords. "Sawing-in" dark color), worked headbands, run up duced in Scotland. (325) was introduced as part of the search gilt backs and colored title labels, two- Scotch knife. See: SLIDING KNIFE. for economical binding processes which line fillets on the covers ending with a Scottish style. A style of decoration de- began as early as the 16th century. rosette,and withthe arms ofthe veloped by Scottish bookbinders of the Centuries later,in combination with particular school blocked on the upper 18th century. The designs, which are the HOLLOW BACK, it was to have a cover. The endpapers and edges were referred to as "wheel' and "herring- significant effect on the future of craft marbled, often matching in both color bone," were well established by 1725 binding.See also:RECESSED-CORD SEW- and pattern, while the turn-ins and and continued in use until about 1775. ING. edges of the boards were decorated The central design on the upper cover saw kerf binding. A method of bind- with a roll in blind. The books often consisted of either a large wheel-shaped ing single sheets by means of both included, inserted before the title page, devicewithradiatingspokes,sur- thread and adhesive. Kerfs (dove-tailed a printed or manuscript form giving rounded by numerous sprays of foliage, grooves) are cut across the spine at the subjectin which the prize was the idea for which derived from the an angle and are filled with adhesive. awarded, the name of the recipient, the fan bindings of the previous century, Sewing thread is then woven around date, etc. (236) or a vertical pattern, often enclosed, the kerfs to supplement the adhesive, score (scored; scoring). To impart a linear withbranching ornamentsradiating following which the kerfs are again indentation or crease in a sheet of outward, i.e.,a herringbone pattern. filledwith adhesive.This technique heavyweight paper or lightweight board The bindings often had DUTCH GILT scouring 227 section

PAPERS withembossed floralorna- ing unhairing. See also: BATING; SCUD- secondary bevel. An extra narrow bevel, ments. (1, 312) DING. honed on the cutting edge of a paring scouring. I. The process of removing the scudding. A process used to remove rem- knife. sediment of tannin particles which be- nants of hair and hair sheaths, hair secondary binding. A second or sub- come fixed in the grain of the skin pigments, fat, and undesirable protein sequent binding of a publication. Al- followinga prolonged tannage. The constituents, lime soaps, etc., from a though the term may also be applied machine used in scouringissimilar skin when a very clean grain for both to hand or library bindings, itis used tothe regular unhairing or fleshing smoothness and level dyeing properties principally with refereace to different machine, except that the cylinder has is required. A skin is usually scudded times of edition binding. When a pub- carborundum cementedinplacein following unhairing, and, while it may lisher does not know how many copies lieu of blades. The speed of the ma- be done following bating, itis always of an edition will be sold, and does chineisalso much slower. See also: done before tanning. The processis not want to assume the cost of bind- SCUDDING. 2. The removal of surplus carried out over the beam with a ing and inventorying copies which may oil from an oil-tanned leather,e.g., curved, blunt-edged knife,or, more not sell, he may have copies bound in CHAMOIS (2), by washing in water and oftentoday,inamachinewhich segments, and, as this may spread the a 2 to 4C'r solution (by weight of the squeezesandpushestheunwanted binding of thefulledition over a skins) of soda ash. (306) material (scud) out of the skin. (291, period of time, the different bindings scraper. A steel implement with slightly 363) may vary because of changes in cloth rounded ends, used to scrape the edges scuffing. The lifting of the fibers on the color, spine lettering, etc. The practice of books before gilding. (154, 161) surface of a material when one piece of deterred b;nding was more preval- scrattedpaper. An imitationmarbled of the material is ;ubbed against an- ent, and the periods of time much paper, produced by "spiriting" or spot- other or comes into contact with a longer, in the 19th century than today, ting various colors on paper by means rough surface. (17) as edition binding is now very highly of a brush. Scratted papers date back scuff resistance. The resistance a material mechanized and standardized. A RE- to at least the 17th century. (17) offers to scuffing, usually measured in MAINDER BINDING is not a secondary terms of the number of cycles required Screw binder. See: POST BINDER. binding. (69, 140) to produce a specified degree of abra- secondary colors. The colors which re- scrinium. A receptacle in the shape of a sion when abraded by an object of cylinder with a removable lid, and used sult when the three primary colors are designated size and weight (or pressure mixed. The secondary colors are green in ancient Rome as a container for applied) rotating or reciprocating at a scrolls. (156) (blue and yellow), orange (red and designate(' speed. (17) yellow), and violet (red and blue). scroll.1. A roll of material, e.g., parch- sealskin. A light, tough leather of very ment,usuallybearingwritingand fine quality and distinctive appearance, second impression. The second working rolled onto rods, which were usually with excellent wearing qualities, pro- of the finishing tool following blinding- fittedwith handles. The scroll, and duced from the skins of various species in through the paper on which the early forms of manuscript, was called of seals.It may be finished with its designis drawn, immediately before volu:nen (roll)by the Romans, and own delicate grain pattern and lustrous tooling in gold. See also: BLIND TOOL- isthe word from which volumeis surface, or with a bold grain produced ING; RESTRIKE. (130) derived. The scroll (or roll) consisted by a combination of embossing and second lining. A strip of paper, usually of a number of sheets of papyrus, boarding. While customarily black it kraft, the full width of the spine and parchment, etc., glued together to form isalso produced in colors. Although about 1/8inch less than the length at a long strip and wound on a rod. The its use as a covering material for books both head and tail.Itis glued over scroll was generally fitted with a parch- goes back hundreds of years,itis thefirst(cloth)lining. The second ment cover, fastened with laces, and little used today because of the de- lining is applied to large and/or thick finished with a "sittybus". or title label. clining number of seals, and the ex- books to provide additional support to Sometimes the scroll or scrolls were cessive oiliness of the skin. See also: the spine. (156, 343) kept in a SCRINIUM. The text was writ- FLESHER; PIN SEAL (1). (83, 295) seconds. Materials such as cloth, leather, ten in relatively narrow columns on seasonedsplits.Splitsheepskins, of a or paper, that are below the established the recto side of the material, which natural or dyed color, that have been standard of quality,and which are in the case of papyrus was the side treated with milk and white of egg, sorted out and sold at a lower price. having the horizontal strips. 2. A deco- which impart a s,-ft, semi-bright finish See also: GOOD SECONDS. (17, 82) rative motif consisting of any of several without the hardness produced on the section.1. The unit of paper thatis spiral or convoluted forms, resembling brighter, machine-glazed skins. printed and folded, and which,to- the cross section of a loosely rolled seasoning. The process of exposing paper gether with other like units, makes up strip of paper and generally used be- or board to relatively uniform atmos- a complete book. A section is usually tween flowers on a ROLL (1).(12, pheric conditions so that its moisture folded from 1 183, 250) sheet of paper, but it content will attain to equilibrium and may consist of11/2or 2 sheets, or scrow. Strips, clippings, or other waste become evenly distributed throughout even one sheet and an additional leaf parts of hide or skin used in the manu- thesheet.Seealso:CONDITIONING; or leaves. Each section of a book bears facture of glue, and at one time used MATURE. (17, 287) a different SIGNATURE (1)identifica- by papermakers as a source of animal sebaceous gland. An oil produdng gland tion. See also: FOLDINGS. 2. In library gelatin for sizing paper. (197) of the skin located in the grain laver. binding, a group of leaves of a book, scud. The remnants of epithelial tissues, The glandsareeffectivelyremoved suitable for oversewing, not exceeding hair pigments, glands, lime soaps, etc., from the skin by liming, scudding, and 0.055 inch in thickness, except those left in the grain layer of a skin follow- bating. (363) of flexible, pulpy paper which may be

2 sectional post binder 228 set-off boards

0.065 inchinthickness.(173, 208, thefiller has not been applied and cover pamphlets, of which the usual 264) which is meant to be cut off and dis- periodical issue is a typical example, sectional post binder.See:POST BINDER. carded. 2. The edges or an edge of a may be saddle stitched, side stitched, section B. Thefirst section or gathering fabric so woven as to prevent raveling. of (rarely) saddle sewn.Thecovers of a book following the preliminary semi (semeé; semis).An heraldic term are usually of a heavy stock stitched matter, usually beginning with the first indicating a form of decoration con- to the publication; however, at times page of the text proper. (97) sisting of a scattered (sown) pattern the pamphlet is sewn or stitched and sectioning machine.See:PAD COUNTER of diminutive figuresflowers, leaves, the cover is then glued on. (339) (2). sprays, etc., often repeated at regular sepia inks.Inks that are compounded selection factors. Thecondition of hides intervals by means of one, two, or from the dark pigment discharged by or skins as to soundness, good cure. three small tools, resulting in a sort of the commoncuttle-fishandother pattern, and freedom from defects, powdered effect. Sometimes a coat of cephalopods, family Sepiidae, in order etc., as related to stock bought or sold arms, or other vignette, is added in the to mask retreat. The effect of this fluid on futures . (363) center of the cover, or at the corners. is somewhat remarkable, in that 1 part self-cover.A cover printed on the same There may alsobeatooledfillet ink in 1,000 parts of water is sufficient stock and in the same format as the around the edges of the cover. Early to make the latter opaque. It was used text, with the cover pages being so examples of this style date from 1560 as an ink in ancient Rome, but is little imposed that when the sheet is folded on books bound for Charles IX of used today except as an artist's color- theywillappear asthe upper and France. (81, 156) ing. The dried ink is pulverized and lower covers of the book, which is semi-chemical pulp.A paper p7Ilp pro- boiled withalkali,whichissubse- usually a single-section pamphlet. Also duced by mild chemical treatment of quently neutralized with acid so as to called "integral cover." (339) the raw materials followed by a me- precipitate the pigment.Thepigment self-endpapers.Endpapers which are also chanical fiberization operation. De lig- is then washed, dried, and incorporated leaves forming part of the first and nificationisonlypartiallyaccom- with oil. The main feature of this nroc- last sections of the book. (156. 365) plished;consequentlytheindividual ess, with regard to permanency, is the self heating.A condition wherein skins cellulose fibers are not completely sep- amount of acid used to precipitate the burn or smolder during tannage.It arated.Thestock coming from the pigment, because acid in ink is as detri- applies especially to the oil tannage of digester is made up of either softened mental to paper, as is acid in the paper sheepskins and is caused by the oxidiz- chips or a mixture of free fibers and itself. Although sepia inks are reason- ation of the cod liver oil used in the Foftened chip centers; therefore, it must ably permanent in dull light, they tend tannage with the accompanying libera- be mechanically fiberized in attrition to fade rapidly when exposed to bright tion of heat. (306) mills to produce a pulp that can be natural light. (20, 143) self-vulcanizing.An adhesive that achieves readily felted. (17, 320) set.I. A term used with reference to the vulcanization withoutapplicationof semi-chrome box calf.A black calfskin transformation of an adhesive into a heat. (309) leather having a grain pattern of fine se-lin labeling system.A method of pre- solid (hardened) condition by means box-shaped creases produced by board- of chemical or physical processes, such paring labels for books developed at ing the skins in two directionshead as condensation, polymerization, oxida- Battelle Memorial Institute under the to butt and belly to belly. (61) sponsorship of the Library Technology tion, vulcanization, gelation, hydration, semi-chrome tannage.A complete vege- or evaporation of the volatile constitu- Program of the American Library As- table tannage followed by retannage by ents. Adhesives vary greatly in their sociation. The system utilizes a regular the chrome method. In this particular "sets," both in time and conditions typewriter (but with a special platen tannage, most of the available space and usually with larger than normal under which they take place. Glue sets between the protein chains of the skin by cooling, paste by evaporation of the type),specialplasticstrips,anda will be occupied by the large vegetable volatile constituents, e.g., water, etc. transparent laminating material. tannin molecules, consequently, unless The final set of most adhesives used in The base tape is fed into the type- thevegetable tannage is heavily from a reel, the appropriate in- archival work usually takes place by strippedout,theprincipaleffectis evaporation. This type of setting almost formation is typed on the tape and the likely to be the coordination of chro- clear (laminating) strip is applied over always results in shrinkage which, if mium with the vegetable tannins, so that severe, may cause the adhesive to with- the tape by means of a pressure lami- the characteristics of the leather will nating roll assembly. After the strip of draw from the surface of the joint, tend to approximate those of a vege- leaving it weakened or defective. 2. The combined base and clear tapes is cut tabletannedleather.Cf: CHROME distance between the left- and right- intolabelsize,the backing release RETAN.(248, 306) paper is removed, the label is placed hand sides of a piece of movable type. semi-elliptical spine.A book rounded in Type is said to have a wide or narrow in the proper position on the book, the form of an ellipse and having pro- "set" according to the width of the a shieldisheldover the label, and nounced shoulders. This type of spine body. 3.Thepeculiarities of a sheet of heatisapplied by means of a hot shaping began in fine binding in the last iron or plate. Although the labels can paper, as manifest during folding. 4. quarter of the 18th century.Thetech- The permanence or "set" of the fibers subsequently be removed by the ap- nique gives the spine additional sup- in a sheet of paper produced by heavy plication of heat, which softens the port because the sections are knocked calendering. (16, 154, 156, 309) adhesive, inpracticethisisdifficult well over on either side. (236) to do without damaging thefabric semis.See:SEMg. set-off. See:BARRIER SHEET; OFFSET(2). covering of the book. separate cover.A pamphlet cover printed set-off boards.Boards with a greater than selvage (selvedge).1. The border of a separately from the text and usually normal space between the shoulder and roll or section of book cloth to which on a different paper stock. Separate- the inner edge. They are used on side-

.1 j set out 229 sewing frame

stitched text books so as to allow for strain on the joints when the leather has folds of the sections, e.g., FLEXIBI E easier opening of the covers. (256) dried. Setting the joint is done follow- SEWING; and 2) through the sides of set out. To attach an insert to a guard so ing covering but before setting the the leaves, e.g., ovERsEvviNo. There is thatitstands out from the binding headcaps so as not to damage the also a subdivision of thelatter, one edge. (102) headcaps by the opening of the boards. which involves penetration of the sew- set square. A modified try square having 2. In library and edition binding, the ing thread through the entire thickness an adjustable head. It is used by some process of creating the joints of the of the text block, e.g., SIDE SEWING. bookbinders in taking precise measure- book by pressing it between layers of For many years sewing was distin- ments, including marking off the head boards ridged with bands of metal, or guished from stitching, in that sewing of the text block for trimming with the by applying pressure ina casing-in involved joining groups of leaves or plow or guillotine, board cutting, cut- machine, or heat and pressure in a sections to each other, gradually build- ting of mats, etc. The critical part of building-in machine. (276) ing up a complete text block; whereas this implement is the sliding arm (or setting the squares. A fine binding process stitching involved unitingtheentire head), which must move freely but of placing the boards in such a manner group of leaves or sections from front not wobble. that the SQUARES are equal in extent at to back through the entire thickness of setting meters. See: MITERED (1). head, tail, and fore edge. (335) the text block, as in JAPANESE SEWING setting out. The process of smoothing, setting time. The time interval during or side sewing. Both types, however, in- stretching and removing excess water which an adhesive is subjected to heat volved the use of thread. Today, on the from newly tanned skins. Setting out is and/or pressure to setit.See also: other hand, sewing is considered to be similar to SUCKING (1), except that the CURING TIME; DRYING TIME. (309) construction of a text block by means skin is placed flesh side down and a Settle, Elkanah(1648-1724).An English of thread, while stitching is done by much blunter blade is worked over the playwright and hackversifier,who means of wire staples. See also: OVER- grain side. Setting out may also be done composed topical poems which he CASTING; RECESSED-CORD SEWING; RE- in a machine similar to a fleshing or bound himself, or, more likely, had VERSED V-GUARD; SINGER SEWING; unhairing machine;theskinisfed bound, as there is no direct evidence SMYTH-CLEAT SEWING; TAPE SEWING againstarotating,blunt,helically that he was a bookbinder. Settle's bind- (1). (22, 161, 179, 335) bladed cylinder while being supported ings were in leather and were decorated sewing bench. See: SEWING FRAME. on a soft rubber roller. Another type of with a rectangular frame within which sewing clamp. 1. See: SEWING FRAME. 2. setting-out machine clamps the skin he had the binder set the arms of a A device consisting of two narrow over a half cylinder covered with rub- likely patron. If the book did not sell, metal plates with small holes about one ber, and rotates it forward and back- he had the original coat of arms cov- inch apart, clamped together at one end ward against a bladed cylinder. While ered with leather and tooled with a and secured to the bench. By means of setting out removes some water,its different arms for another prospective the clamp, books, pamphlets, or sheets distinctivepurposeisto"set"the purchaser. (158) to be stabbed through the side are held grain, i.e., flatten and smooth the grain du Seuil, Augustin(1673-1746).A cele- securely while the sewing holes are surface to remove any irregularities, brated Parisian bookbinder who held drilled through the holes in the plates. and also stretch the skin to its maxi- the position of royal binder to Louis (183) mum area. Also called "putting out." XV of France. Du Seuil employed sewing frame. A frame or press on which (306) lavish doublures and rectangular panels books are sewn by hand. It consists of setting temperature. The temperature to with an armorial panel in the center. a flat baseboard, two uprights threaded which an adhesive, or adhesive assem- He was one of the first bookbinders to on both ends, a crossbar and two sup- bly,is subjected to set the adhesive. execute MOSAIC BINDINGS,although porting wooden nuts. Tapes, cords, or The temperature of the adhesive in the PADELotm isgenerally credited with bands are stretched from the slotted process of setting(adhesivesetting theirintroduction. Heistheonly baseboard, where they are secured by temperature) may differ from the tem- French binder written of in English keys, to the crossbar, where they are perature of the surrounding atmos- literature, being mentioned in Pope's attached to loops (laycords), or,in phere (assembly setting temperature). fourth moral : German models, to hooks. See also: CURING TEMPERATURE; DRY- His study! With what authors isit The sewing frame was certainly in ING TEMPERATURE. (309) stored? use in Northern Europe by the 12th setting the caps. The process of adjusting In books, not authors, curious is my century, and probably as early as the the leather at the head and tail of the Lord; spine of a book so as to form a protec- To all their dated backs he turns you SEWING FRAME tive cap over the headbanls. The caps round; may also be set at an angle, usually These Aldus printed, those du Seuil 45% when there are no headbands. In bound. blankbook binding, as well as quarter- Du Seuil married into the Padeloup bound bindings wi'h French joints, the familyandworkedwithAntoine cap is usually molded over a length of Michel Padeloup at the beginning of cord the width of the spine. See also: Padeloup's career. (94, 732) HEADCAP. (274) sewing. The process of securing the sec- setting the joint. 1. In hand binding, the tions or leaves of a publication by processofpositioningtheboards means of thread in such a manner as against the shoulders of the text block to insure a consecutive and permanent at such a distance and in such a man- unit. There are two basic approaches to ner that the boards open easily with no sewing a book: 1) through the center

250 230

SEWING

flexible sewing double raised cords

tape sewing

single-cord sewing two-on

recessed-cord sewing sewing heart 231 sewn regular

llth, because in all likelihood the need combination of cotton and terylene. This can be overcome by soaking the for some type of frame became ap- Sewing thread is available in a range of thread in polyvinyl acetate, diluted to parent as soon as flexible sewing was thicknesses, which are designated by about three times its original volume introduced. Also called "sewing number, e.g.,1 pound of flax spun to with water, followed by drying of the bench," "sewing press," and "sewing a length of 300 yards is Number 1; if thread in air under normal conditions. rack." (161, 236) spun to 600 yards, Number 2; 900 This cements the individual filaments sewing heart. A piecc of card, roughly the yards, Number 3; and so on. Number together slightly, and also insures that shape of a heart, cut with a flap, and 16 is 4,800 yards. For example, 16-4, the tension is shared equally among all used to facilitate locating the center is made from four cords of Number 16. of the filaments and not thrown onto fold of a section when sewing a book Number 50 is a strand of 15,000 yards, only one, as might otherwise occur if TWO ON. which, if doubled, becomes Number one filamentinaloosebundleis sewing in the round. A method of sewing 50-2 thread. slightly shorter than the others. The use the sections of a book on cords or tapes Whetherthethreadisofone of PVA does not appear to have any which utilizes a special sewing frame (knotted)continuouslength,asin adverse effect when theaccelerated having a base which curves at the back, hand sewing through the folds, or con- aging test is applied to the thread, al- thus allowing the sections to form into sists of a number of individual threads, though it naturally reduces the softness a round as they are sewn to each other. as in the usual machine sewing, it is a and flexibility of the thread to some Some frames of this type have a sliding fundamental part of the make-up of a degree. For the most part, these threads block witha convex edge,against book. When consideration is given to are used only in machine sewing. which the fore edges of the sections are the strain imposed on the sewing in the Linen thread is produced from straw placed, thus assisting in forming the course of the normal handling of a of the flax plant. See: LINEN. It is usu- round as the book is being sewn. Sew- book, especially a large volume, itis ally unbleached and is superior to cot- ing in the round helps the sewn book obvious that the thread used in sewing ton thread in both strength and dura- to maintain its proper shape better than a book must be both strong and dur- bility. Thicknesses of threads used vary rounding after sewing because: 1)it able. from Number 12, which is relatively does not have to be put into a rounded Sewing thread, whether for a pub- thick, to Number 30, which is very configuration after sewing, as it origi- lisher's binding or a book sewn by fine and suitable for most books. At nated in the round; and 2) a book sewn hand, is selected with regard to the one time linen thread was used exten- with the correct amount of thread ten- thickness (and softness) of the paper, sively in library binding, but it has sion, and in the ordinary manner, will as well as the number of sections to be largely been replaced by cotton, syn- tend to have .a concave shape -to the sewn. A thread that is too thin will not thetics (principally nylon), and com- spine when it comes off the sewing give sufficient swelling in the spine to binations of cotton and synthetic sew- frame, which makes rounding even enable the book to be properly rounded ing threads. more difficult.Inaddition,a book and backed, while thread that is too Nylon thread maintains a smooth, rounded after sewing stands a greater thick will produce a book that has too kr,ct-free surface and is stronger than chance of losing its round. The dis- much swell, and that leads to difficul- thread made from either cotton or advantages of sewing in the round are: ties in nipping and rounding and back- linen. It has the advantage of being 1)the sewing takes longer (andis ing, as well as a tendency to prodrce relatively inexpensive and can be man- therefore more expensive); 2) a special creases in the inner margin. ufactured in finer grades so that books or (adapted) sewing frame is required; Cotton thread is a fine continuous sewn with it can more easily nipped, and 3) several special convex blocks strand produced by plying two or more rounded, and backed,astheswell are needed to accommodate different lengths of cotton strands with a tight caused by the sewing is not excessive. thicknesses of books. twist and smooth finish. It is also made Its principal disadvantages seem to be sewing key. See: KEY. in varying thicknesses for various types that it may cut the paper if the diam- sewing machine. See: MACHINE SEWING. ofsewing.Althoughitisusually eter of the thread is very small, and it sewing not to show. A method of sewing bleached, and bleaching is detrimental has a tendency to contract upon release a book consisting of one section, which to the durability of thread, it is, and has of tension, so that when a group of is sewn through the fold without the been for more than 100 years, the most sewn booksiscut apart the nylon cover, the cover then being attached, widely used thread for book sewing, thread tends to contract and loosen the thereby covering the sewing. See also: especially in edition and library bind- end sections. (81, 92, 198, 259, 335, SEWING TO SHOW. ing. The breaking strength of cotton 339) sewing on cords. See: FLEXIBLE SEWING; thread commonly used in bookbinding sewing to show. A method of sewing a RECESSED-CORD SEWING. is as follows: book that consists of one s_ction in sewing on tapes. See: TAPE SEWING (I). which the cover is first placed over the sewing press (sewing rack). See: SEWING Breaking Strength Thread Size Number (in pounds) section and is sewn with it, thus being FRAME. visible on the outside. The three- or sewing stick. A length of wood, weighted 50-4 2.5 five-stitch method, using fancy thread at one end, and used to knock the sec- 36-4 3.4 or cord, is frequently used for this type tions of a book down as they are 24-4 4.4 of sewing. CI: SEWING NOT TO SHOW. being sewn. CI: BUNDLING (1). (65) 12-4 8.5 (335) sewing thread. The filament or group of 10-4 11.0 sewn regular. An obsolete library binding filaments used for securing the leaves 14.0 expression applied to the sewing of or sections of a book. Book sewing One of the disadvantages of silk and books through the folds, generally on threads include linen (with a glazed terylene thread is their tendency to un- tapes, as distinguished from oversew- finish), cotton, nylon, terylene, and a ravel and "catch-up" during sewing. ing. (129) sexternion 232 shearing strength sexternlon. A GATHERING (2) composed resembling small pearls. In its natural skive leather. The term is also applied of six sheets, each folded once and in- form it has been used for many years to the areas of the leather covering of setted. This was the form in which in both the East and the West for a a book that have been pared or skived, some bound manuscripts and early variety of purposes, including book- usually the turn-ins and the area cover- printed books, especially those of vel- binding; however, in the early years of ing the spine. See also: PARING. (256) lum, were assembled. The first and the 18th century it became the practice shaved weight. The weight of a pack of twelfth,second andeleventh,etc., to grind the surface flat and smooth, leather taken after shaving or when leaves being conjugate. See also: QUAR- leaving only the pattern of small con- itswatercontentisapproximately TERNION; QUINTERNION; TERNION. tiguous circles. The leather was dyed 50%. (363) (140) from the flesh side so that the dye did shaving. 1. See: PLOW. 2. The process of shade. A term used in describing or com- not reach the small circles of calcified reducing the overall natural substance paring colors to indicate a full or defi- substance but only colored the epi- of a tanned hide by removing small nite degree of difference between two dermis where it could be seen between pieces with a currier's knife (the sharp colors. A particular red, for example, the circles. This is the leather which for edge of which is at right angles to the may be a shade darker, lighter, deeper, a century has been called ""; blade), the blade being held at right more bluish, yellowish, etc., than an- how confusion arose with sharkskin, anglestothefleshsurface ofthe other red. The term applies also to a which is completely different both in leather. The operationisperformed chromatic color darkened by the addi- character and in appearance,is not over a special beam, one having a tion of black. (233) clear. (97, 261, 351) flatter surface than that of the beam shade-craft watermark. A WATERMARK shake. A device on the wire of the Four- used for other leather-making proc- produced by means of a design on the papermaking machine which esses. The pieces shaved off are useless dandy roll of the papermaking machine drinier. causes the wire to oscillate in a plane at as leather and were sometimes boiled that is intaglio instead of in relief, thus right angles to the forward movement in water to make glue or gelatin sizing thickening the sheet at the point of con- of the wire. Its purpose is largely like for paper. The purpose of shaving is to tact. It causes the watermark to appear that of the vatman's shake of the mold make the skins even in thickness, as darker than the rest of the sheet, rather in hand papermaking, which assists in well as to smooth and clean them. Vir- than lighter, as is the case with the true securing the desired intermingling of tually no hides and very few skins are watermark. The earliestshade-craft fibers of the sheet. The oscillations may shaved today, the process having been watermark (known as a "light-and- be varied in frequency and length of replaced by splitting. Any shaving that shade" watermark) was produced by stroke to obtain the required results. is still done is usually of light skins and the Frenchman Jannot in about 1812. (17, 60) is done by machine. (363) His, of course, was not produced by a shaken back. The loosening or breaking shaving machine. A machine usedto dandy roll. (17) of the sewing of a book, particularly in shave part or all of the flesh side of a shaded tool. A finishing tool cut partly edition binding, resulting in gaps ap- tanned skin. The shaving cylinder con- in outline and partly solid. (156) pearing between the sections. Brittle- sists of spiral blades set in a revolving shadow watermark. See: INTAGLIO (2). ness of the glue on the spine, inade- cylinder. The portion of the skin to be shagreen. A somewhat obscure and am- quate spine lining, loose sewing, and shaved is fed between a bolstered back- biguous term which seems to have careless use can, individually or col- ing roll and the shaving cylinder, with been used, at different times, for very lectively, lead to this condition. See the flesh side facing the cylinder. The different materials. The word, along also: START. (64) skinisforced against the revolving with its French and German equiva- shammy. See: CHAMOIS (2). knife blades and moves forward until lents, chagrin,is said to have been sharkskin. A leather covered with minute stopped by the operator. The same area derived from the Persian expression scales bearing short spines. It has been can be fed into the machine repeatedly siighari, which applies to a leather pro- used frequently as an abrasive material so as to reduce its thickness gradually. duced from an ass, and which had an and was popular during the 18th cen- (363) indentedgrainsurfacecausedby turyfor covering boxes of various shaving tub. A receptacle used in hand spreadingseeds ofChenopodium types. For this latter purpose it was binderies, located beneath the lying (goose foot) over the surface of tne usuallyvegetabletanned,withthe press and plow, into which the shavings moist skin, covering the skin with a spiny scales being ground down leav- fall from edges being trimmed. (152) cloth, and trampling them into the skin. ing a slightly roughened surface which, shea butter. The solid, grayish, yellowish When the skin was dry the seeds were under magnification, could be seen to or whitish fat obtained from the seeds shaken off, leaving the surface of the be composed of tiny, detached, lozenge- of the shea tree, Butyrospermum parkii, leather covered with small indentations. shaped scales which sparkled. Shark- and used for oiling leather during the In the 17th and early 18th centuries, skin was usually stained black. See process of tanning. however,theterm"shagreen"(or also: SHAGREEN. (291, 351, 363) shearing strength. 1. The shear force re- "chagrin") began to be applied to a sharpening agent. A material added to quired to produce failure in a paper or leather made from sharkskin having the lime liquor to accelerate the loosen- board. The shear force is the internal a curious grain surface of lonzenge- ing of the hair of hides and skins dur- force causing two contiguous parts of a shaped, raised and spiny scales of mi- ing LIMING. Sharpeners are usually one body to slide relative to each other in nute size,the character of which is or more of the alkali sulfides, of which a direction parallel to their plane of difficult to perceive without optical as- sodium sulfide is frequently used. (248, contact. 2. The relative resistance of an sistance. The term was also applied to 306) adhesive film to a stress in such a man- the skin of a rayfish (probably Hypo lo- shave. 1. To take a very slight trim from ner that the adherend surfaces slide in plms sephen), which is covered with the edges of a book. See also: SANDING a plane parallel to their plane of con- round, closelyset,calcified papillae (1); TRIMMING (1).2. To pare or tact. (17, 222) shears 233 shellac shears. 1. A hand-operated, single, curved ture of the reticular layer, places sheep- For printing thatis done on afull cutting device for cutting single sheets skin leather in a class by itself. sheet and then slit, however, "machine of paper or light board. 2. A large pair Sheepskinisa reasonably durable trimmed" paper will not always suffice. of scissors uscd for cutting leather and leather if properly prepared and cared Broadsides, folders, labels and similar cloth for covers. (183) for.It has been used as a covering forms of printing that must be accu- sheepskin. A soft, porous leather pro- material for books for more than 500 rately trimmedrequire guillotine duced from the skins of wooled or hair years. See also: LAW SHEEP; ROAN; trimmed paper. Uncoated paperin- sheep.Itisusually vegetable-tanned SKIVER; SMYRNA MOROCCO. (161, 207, tended for such printingisusually andgrainedinimitationof other 291, 306, 363) ordered guillotine trimmed on at least (more expensive) skins, e.g., morocco, sheepskin split. A sheepskin that has been two edges. Coated papers are guillotine a process to which it lends itself very split after liming but before tanning trimmed as a regular practice. 2. The well. The term "sheepskin" always in- and finishing. See also: SKIVER. formation of a sheet on the paper- dicates an unsplit skin, and is not ap- sheep vellum. A term sometimes applied making machine. (17, 198, 350) pliedtosplit sheepskinorsicIvEa. to VELLUM produced from the split sheet stock. Unbound printed sheets of a Split sheepskin is the traditional mate- skin of a sheep rather than the skin of publication which are inventoried by rial used in producing PARCHMENT. a calf. (154) the printer until receipt of a binding Sheepskinis somewhat difficult to sheet. 1. A single piece of paper, board, order from the publisher. See also: describe because the individual skins paper pulp, cellulose acetate film, etc. SECONDARY BINDING. (156) differ so greatly in size, fat content, 2. The continuous web of paper as it sheetwork. A term used in edition binding and general quality of the dermal net- is being manufactured by machine, or for the binding operations of folding, work. From the standpoint of leather, the single unit as it is being made by tipping, gathering, endsheeting, sewing, the closer a sheepskin approaches the hand. 3. A general term applied to and smashing. Cf: FORWARDING. (101, hair sheep, the tighter arid firmer the paper and/or board in any form and 287) fiber network, and, therefore, the better in any quantity which, when used with shelfback. That part of a bound book seen the skin for producing leather. This appropriate modifiers, indicates general when the book is on the shelf, i.e., the is the case because the numerous fine or specific attributes of that sheet, in- spine. wool fibers, as opposed to the lesser cluding quality, class,use, grade, or shelf life. See: STORAGE LIFE. number of coarse fibers of the hair physical properties, such as an opaque shell. A kidney-shaped section occurring sheep, cause the skin to be more open sheet, etc. 4. To cut paper or board in the butt area of an equine animal and loose in texture. In addition, the into sheets of desired size from a roll hide which contains the dense mass of wool follicles are associated with ex- or web. 5. A piece of paper printed in fibers known as the glassy layer. The tensive glandular structures, consisting such a manner that it may be folded to collagen fibers of this area are so dense of sebaceous and sudoriferous glands, form consecutive pages for publication (perhaps the most dense of any leather) which also interrupt the dense packing of the required size. See: IMPOSITION. that the leather made from it is nearly of the connective-tissue fiber network 6. To place freshly printed sheets be- air-tight and weatherproof. It is isolated in the papillary layers, as well as the tween unprinted sheets for drying and by removing the skin layer above and dermis itself. to prevent OFFSET (2), i.e., to slipsheet. below it. The remaining part, the shell, The grain layer of sheepskin occu- 7. As used in collation, a separate sheet isfrequently split, both splits being pies more than a half of the total thick- of any size printed to be read unfolded, finished on the cut surfaces. Although ness of the skin; furthermore, in the i.e., with the text or illustration im- the butt area of the hide is extreme in reticular layer, the collagen fibers are posed on a single page on one side or its tightness and solidity of structure not as compact and run in more closely on each side of the paper. 8. A sheet of for a large hide, the remainder of the horizontal directions. any material, such as a leaf of gold, hide is extremely loose. The shell is The proportion of adipose tissue to silver, etc. 9. Another term for the sur- used in producing CORDOVAN LEATHER. collagenfibersinsheepskinvaries face or cover of the mold or dandy roll, (363) widely according to the feeding of the but sometimes restricted to this before shellac. A resinous secretion of the insect, animal. There is frequently an almost it is placed in position. (17, 264, 343) Tachardia lacca, which breeds on the continuous layer of fat cells separating sheeting.1.The operation ofcutting twigs of certain Indian trees.It was the grain layer and the reticular layer. sheets from a web or roll of paper. A originally used as a source of dyestuff, Because much of the fatty tissuesis rotary cutter, which is somewhat simi- but is now used almost entirely for ;ts destroyed or removed in the liming, lar to a web-fed cylinder press, with content of resinous matter. Shellac has bating, and scudding operations, itis a steel cutting edge, is attached along a softening temperature of 60 to 75° not unusual to find the grain layer and the length of a cylinder, to which the C., but decomposesifheated much reticular layer of sheepskin leathers web of paper is fed. At every revolu- above 100° C. It is soluble in alcohol, separated, sometimes over wide areas. tion of the cylinder, the cutting edge except for about 4% wax, which is The tanner at times separates these two cuts a sheet of paper off the roll. Sev- insoluble in cold alcohol. It represents layers by splitting after liming, and eralrolls may be fed to the cutter the most highly refined form of LAC then tans the grain layer for bookbind- simultaneously, thus cutting multiple and is prepared in the form of thin ing purposes, etc.,and the reticular sheets. orange or yellow flakes. The term is layer for chamois. Rotary cut paper is usually referred also used with reference to the varnish During the beamhouse operations, to as "machine trimmed" paper and the prepared by dissolving shellac in alco- thc glands in the grain layer are de- cut is sufficient for the requirements of hol. Shellac is used in the manufacture stroyed, leaving the grain layer rather most booklets, pamphlets,etc.,that of leather, in lithography, in the prep- spongy in structurc. This, together with arc to be printed "work and turn" and arat'ln of finishing sizes, etc. See also: thc relatively loose and empty struc- folded as a full sheet. See: IMPOSITION. SHELLAC SIZE. (233, 235) shellac size 234 side shellac size. A size prepared by dissolving carried throughout the leather manu- creaseinthe dimensions of paper, shellac flakes in alcohol. It is used as an facturing processes, appearing on the leather, etc.See also:YIELD. (17) adhesive in ,,old tooling and blocking. finished leather. Short hairs can ac- shrink temperature. The water tempera- After being painted into the blinded-in tually enhance the appearance of a ture at which a specimen of leather impressions on the leather, the alcohol skin such as vellum. (291) begins to shrink. Shrink temperature evaporates,leaving athinlayer of shortness. Said of an adhesive that does will differ for each kind and degree of shellac which serves the same purpose not string, cotton, or in other manner tannage, although, in general, tannage as GLAIR. (102) form filaments or threads when applied usually increases the resistance of a shell gold. Gold leaf that has been re- to an adherend. (309) leather to heat in the wet condition. duced to powder form by grinding it shorts (short copy; short set).1. The Most chrome-tanned leathers are re- with honey, which is then washed away. copies of different printed sheets re- sistant to the action of boiling water, It is used to produce powdered effects quired to complete an imperfect or in- while vegetable-tanned leathers are not. on leather bindings, to repair or restore complete edition.See also:CANCEL (1). If leather that cannot withstand the gold tooling, and for gilding manu- 2. A copy of a book having margin boiling test is placed in cold water and scripts. Very early gold "tooling" of tl-e greatly trimmed by the binder.See the temperature of the water is grad- Near East may have been shell gold, also:CROPPED (1,2).3. A multi- ually increased one degree at a time, a or something likeit, painted on the volume work that lacks one or more point will be reached where the leather leather. The name derives from the volumes. (69, 156) suddenly begins to shrink, which is the mussel shellsit was once stored in. shoulder(s). 1. That part of the spine of "shrink temperature." Shrink tempera- Today itisavailable in tablet form. a text block at the outer extremities ture is generally taken as a measure of See also:GOLD-POWDERED BINDINGS. which is bent over in the backing proc- the degree of tannage of a leather. (152, 236) ess to form the projectionatright (291, 363) shingling. A technique used to prevent angles to the text block to accommo- shut. 1. An expression used by the vat- creep or push-out in a sewn or stitched date the board. 2. The portion of a man when the liquid pulp in the mold pamphlet made up of a great number cowhide covering the shoulders and is formed into a uniform sheet of hand- of folios of thick paper. The page sizes neck of the animal together with the made paper. "Shut" also takes place are selected with the idea of allowing two cheeks, and the leather produced on the papermaking machine, assisted sufficient material for variation in bind- therefrom. A squared shoulder is ob- by the action of the suction boxes and ingmarginsandoutside margins tainedbycuttingoffthecheeks. dandy roll.Itis the point at which whereby creepiscounteracted. This Shoulders usually provide good, firm fiber movement within the web ceases. means that the page (leaf) size dimin- leather; however, that part of the hide (197, 335) ishes from the outside folio moving is prone to growth marks and creases shuttle mark. A fine line parallel to the inward. In some cases an adjustment is which cannot be entirely eliminated filling in a cloth, caused by damage in necessary in order to properly align during manufacture. 3. The top of the the shuttie to a group of filling yarns. page numbers for folding and trim- shank of a piece of movable type. Its shuttle threads. The threads in the OVER- ming. (320) parts include the bevel, beard, line, and SEWING method which pass through . 1. A group of incompletely sepa- side bearing. 4. A term sometimes ap- each loop created by the needles of the rated fibers. A shiveisseen inthe plied to the upper, outer corners of a machine. Punches descend from above, finished sheet as small dark specks or leaf of a book. (151, 161, 3131 penetrate the paper, and then with- splinters. These are particularly preva- draw. The needles then enter from lent in groundwood papers. In the case show side. The side of a paper, cloth, etc., below and, when they reach the top of of esparto and straw pulp papers they which will be seen,i.e.,will show, the pile of leaves making up the "sec- often appear as transparent spots. 2. when the binding or other operation is tion," they drop slightly leaving a series The non-bast fiber portion of the flax completed. The term is used especially of loops of thread through which the plant. (17) with reference to book cloths, which shuttle needles carry their thread from shoder. The packet of 1,160 gold sheets are generally finished only on the one left and right, meeting in the center. As interleaved between sheetsof gold- side. (140) they reach the center, two catch teeth beater's skin 41/2inches square. The show through. Printed matter which can emerge and snag the threads, holding "shoder" is the second beating stage in be seen from the other side of a leaf them untilthe shuttlesretract. The the the manufacture of GOLD LEAF, and when viewed by reflected light.Itis cycle is then completed and the head is a more delicate stage than the CUTCH caused by excessive ink penetration, of the machine drops, tightening the (1) but less so than the MOLD (2). insufficient opacity of the paper, or loops around the shuttle threads. It is, Seealso:GOLD BEATING. (29) excessivepressureduringprinting. therefore,theshuttlethreads which shoes. Metal attachments fixed on the tail Show through may be particularly no- secure the individual oversewing edges at the corners of the covers of ticeableif the printer hasfailed to stitches in the "section." large books, e.g., ledger books, to pre- achieve proper REGISTER (3).See also: side. 1. The outside surface of the upper vent abrasion of the leather, which may STRIKE IN; STRIKE THROUGH. (17, 316) or lower cover of a bound book. 2. The otherwise occur when the book is slid shrinkage. 1. The decrease in the width of paper, cloth, or other material used on off the shelf.See also:BOSSES; ROLLER a paper web as it travels through the the sides of a book. 3. The half of a SHOES. (339) papermaking machine. The degree of cowhide, either in full weight or as a short hair. A defect in leather stemming shrinkage varies, depending upon the split. Cowhides are frequently cut in from a very fine, deeply embedded weight of the paper, and the degree to half down the backbone for ease of young (newly formed) hairs in a hide which the pulp is refined, the nature handling, so that they may be hung in or skin, which are not removed by un- of the fibrous material used, and the the tanning pits without being folded, hairing and scudding, and which are tension in the wet driers. 2. Any de- etc. 4. The left- or right-hand of a side cut 235 silica gel

piece of movable type when the print- used in removing excess grease from alphabet have been used, a lower case ing surface is uppermost and facing skins in process of being converted into sequence or a new sequence of double the viewer. The front is the belly and PARCHMENT. (130) letters followed by tripleletters,or rear the back. (102, 156, 363) sighting. The procedureofobserving sequences combining capital and lower side cut. An obsolete term applied to the where the finishing tool is to be im- case lettersare used,e.g., AA, BB, cutting or trimming of the fore edge pressed or "struck." Sighting is usually Aa, Bb, 2A, 2B, etc. If the same se- (only) of a book. (256) done over the top of the shank of the quence is used again, itis known as side papers. The met h2s of a quarter, tool. It is not an uncommon practice to duplicated or triplicated signatures. half, or three-qu .nding. (302) file a notch in the top edge of the shank Thepreliminaryleavesaresome- side sewing. A , of securing the to give a better view of the letter or times not signed, in which case the text leaves of sections of a book with thread ornament. may begin with section B; however, the near the binding edge, from front to signature. 1. A section or GATHERING (2) preliminaries are sometimes assigned a back through the entire thickness of the of a book, either in the flat or folded lower caseletter or letters and are text block. When a book is said to be state, to which a SIGNATURE MARK has occasionally signed with an asterisk (1 side sewn, itis implied that the text been assigned. Technically, the sets of or similar symbol. The titleleafis block does not consist of individual 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, or 128 printed pages, almost never signed (especially in 16th sections which arefirstfastened by when folded,constitute a"section," and 17th century English publications). themselves and then to each other, but hilea "signature"isonly the se- In the United States, when they are that all of the leaves are sewn through quential mark of identification printed used at all, which today is very infre- at one time. Side sew ing is an extremely on the initial page of the section; today, quently, printers have tended to use all strong form of sewing; however,it however,littleif any distinctionis the letters of the alphabet. affords very little openability, unless the made between the two expressions. The When the quire includes additional inner marginisvery extensive, the term is not altogether synonymous with sheets or a portion of a sheet (inset), paper is very flexible, e.g., JAPANESE SHEET (5), because a sheet as printed these are also signed to indicate how SEWING, or the bookisvery large, may contain more than one section they are to be folded and inserted. Also e.g.,an unabridged dictionary. Also (see: FOLDING), and, in the case of a called "signature" (1). See also: COL- called "stab sewing." Cf: SIDE STITCH- half sheet, may constitute a section of LATION (1 ); DESIGNATION MARK; VOL- ING. (92, 183, 320, 339) fewer pages than others in the same UME SIGNATURE. (140, 278) side stitching. A method of securing the publication.Thus booksconsistof signed bindings. Bookbindings signed by leaves or sections of a book with wire many sections but those sections may the binder. Several forms of "signa- staples, from front to back of the entire not consist of the same number of tures" have been used over the years, thickness of the text block. Side stitch- leaves. 2. The name or initials, written including:1)the initials, cypher, or ing is one of the strongest forms of con- in a person's own hand, for the purpose name of the binder tooled in blind on struction and is frequently used in bind- ofauthenticatinga document.(69, the outer surface of one of the covers, ing textbooks;itisalso a common 140, 189, 287) either by means of a tool or with a roll; method of binding periodical issues signature and catchword line. The line of 2)BINDER'S TICKET; 3)a stamped made up of leaves or more than one type in an old book which bears both name, mainly on the inside edge of section, and which, therefore, cannot the signature and the CATCHWORD. It the lower cover, but also at the tail be saddle stitched. The stitching is done is usually located below the lowest line of the spine, inside the upper cover, by means of a machine that cuts the of the text. If the signature and catch- on the inside of the front hinge, and, wire, forms it into a staple, drivesit word are on separate lines, the lower is in modern times, in ink at the edge through the paper, and clinches it from called the DIRECTION LINE. (156) of one of the flyleaves; 4) a note in- the otherside.Flat-wire staplesof signature mark. The letter or number, or serted in the book by the owner; and galvanized iron or aluminized iron are the combination of letters and numbers, 5) sometimes external evidence, such usually employed. Flat staples are used printed at the foot of the first page (and as a description of the work done, as to provide flatter surface on the side of sometimes on subsequent leaves of a with Roger Payne, or correspondence; the publication than could be obtained section) as a guide to the bookbinder or a famous styleEdgar Mansfield, with round staples. in the process of gathering. Signature Paul Bonet, etc. (69) The disadvantage of side stitching is marks were written or stamped in until signet. A type of REGISTER (1), consist- that it affords almost no openability in 1472, when Johann Koeloff of Cologne ing of a silk ribbon, often lavishly the book; consequently the publication printed a signature as the last line of a ornamented with precious stones, and must be designed with wider margins text page. The binders of manuscripts used frequently by French bookbinders and more flexible paper in order to usually cut off the signature letters. of the 16th century. (140) compensate for the lack of flexibility. Each section has a different signa- sig water. An alkaline solution of soda Also called "stab stitching." Cf: SIDE ture, and when letters are used for ash, borax or ammonia, used to wash SEWING. (179, 316, 339) identification, as is the usual practice, the grain surface of leather preparatory side title. A title lettered or blocked on they progressinalphabeticalorder, totheapplication of dye solutions. the side, i.e., the upper cover of a book. with J, V. and W usually omitted to Formerly, sig water was a solution of (156) avoid confusion, although their exclu- stale urine. (363) siding. 1. See: SIDE (2). 2. The process of sion does have an historical basis, in silica. A powdered quartz prepared in siding-up, or attaching, the paper sides thatmanuscripts and earlyprinted several degrees of fineness. It is inert, to quarter, half, or three-quarter bind- books were usually in Latin, in which has a sharp grain, and is used to im- ings. See also: FILLING IN (1). (92, I stands for both I and J, V for both part tooth to coating materials. (233) 236) U and V, and there is no W. silica gel. A colloidal form of silica, avail- sifted chalk. A finely powdered chalk When all designated letters of the able in the form of pale amber colored, silk 236 Singer sewing

highly absorbent granules, and used as quentlyusedinconjunctionwith cate Bibles and prayer books sewn a dehumidifier. Itis generally kept in leather joints. See also: DOUBLURE (1): with silkby means of a tiny gold small cloth bags near objects on dis- DRUMMING ON. (343) stamp "silk sewn" on the inside of the play or in storage that are prone to silkgauze. A verythin,transparent, upper cover. (256) cockling or other damage. By absorb- strong, finely meshed silk cloth, which silk stitch. A style of sewing at one time ingmoisturefromtheatmosphere, is used in archival work for reinforcing used extensively for sewing booklets silica gel helps prevent formation of paper and other materials. Pure silk of a superior quality in lieu of wire mold, softening of water-soluble coat- is one of the strongest materials avail- stitching. (256) ings,cockling,warping,etc.When able for reinforcing paper, and is al- silk thread. See: SEWING THREAD. saturated, it can be dried by heating. most invisible when properly applied. silvered. A term used to describe a book Sometimes color-codedparticlesare Itisstronger thaneitherJapanese whose edge or edges have been cov- added which change color when the copying paper or lens tissue, but its ered with silver leaf instead of gold. gel has become saturated.Itisalso permanence is much less than that of '56) available in an air-floated, extremely a high quality paper because it tends silverfish. A small wingless, silveryin- fine powder form thatisuseful for to deteriorate relatively quickly, espe- sect, of the order Thysanura, and espe- adding slip resistance to coating, and cially if exposed to natural light. De- cially Lepisma saccharina, which flour- dulling effects to varnish and similar terioration proceeds even more quickly ishes in a damp environment, feeding finishes. if the adhesive used to attach the silk on the glazed surfaces of photographs, silk. The elastic, hygroscopic protein fiber contains alum as a preservative. The and the starchy content of paper, board, produced by the larvae of many species use of silk gauze in archival work has and paste. It has done extensive dam- of moth of the natural arder Lepidop- declined over the years in favor of age to book collections in the past. tera, the most important of these being various cellulose products, e.g., CELLU- It can be controlled by the use of the Bombyx moths,andespecially LOSE ACETATE. (237) properfumigants, suchasethylene Bombyx mori (the silkworm or mul- silking. The process of applying a thin, oxide, methyl bromide, hydrogen cya- berry worm). Raw silk threads consist transparent,finely meshed silkcloth nide, etc.; however, as the use of these principally of sericin and fibroin, which to one or both sides of a leaf as a chemicals can be dangerous, a better are proteins containing carbon, nitro- means of repairing or preserving it. A procedure is to create a cool, dry en- gen, hydrogen, and oxygen but not leaf so treated issaid to have been vironment which theinsectscannot sulfur. Silk is widely used in spinning "silked." In general, the process may tolerate. See also: BOOKWORMS. thread and weaving fabrics, andis be said to be reversible. See also: SILK. silver leaf. A thin sheet of silver (Ag) used in bookbinding for sewing, for silk pattern. A book cloth embossed with metal used in lieu of gold leaf for tool- doublures, for covering books (gen- small diagonal lines, imparting an ap- ing books. Because silver is somewhat erally embroidered bindings), and in pearance of silk. (264) less malleable than gold, silver leaf is the repair of torn leaves, etc. Silk as silk-screen printing. Essentially a stencil usually about three times as thick as a covering materialis somewhat ex- process used to duplicate original de- gold leaf and is, therefore, easier to travagant,particularlysincebooks signs, largely in situations where the handle. Unlike gold, however,itre- covered with it usually must have boxes run is too short to justify the expense quires lacquering or varnishing to pre- to protect them, asit does not wear of lithography. A fine mesh material, vent tarnishing. Because of this, pal- well and is particularly susceptible to such as phosphor bronze, steel gauze, ladium or platinum leaf is often used deterioration in natural light. Silk used bolting silk, etc , is used in the process. instead of silver when a silvery effect for doublures, however,isprotected The design is cut in a stencil (or the is desired. from the deteriorative effects of light areas not be reproduced are painted Silver was used in the very early and air and often out-lasts the covers. out on the screen itself) which is se- days of tooling with metal, and its use See also: JAPANESE SILK; MOIRE BOOK cured to the underside of the screen. in England has been recorded as early CLOTH; SEWING THREAD; SILK GAUZE; Ink, paint, or another material is then as 1550. Silver paint was used occa- SILKING; SILK-SCREEN PRINTING; SILK- forced through the screen onto paper, sionally in the 17th century, although SCREEN pRINTS; wATERED SILK.(81, glass, or another material. (17, 146) the silver was not painted into blind 143, 280, 335) silk-screen prints. Decorative end- and impressions tosimulate tooling, but silk cord (silk floss). Braided and twisted cover papers produced by the same was used to supplement thetooled strands of silk used for tying or sewing principle as the stencilprint, except areas so as to provide a more solid booklets,brochures,pamphlets,etc. thatthepaintisforced througha effect of the tooling. (83, 236) (256) cloth,producingaprintingquality. Singer sewing. A method of side- or fold silkflyleaves. The freeflyleavesand Paint used for these papers can be sewing pamphlets, periodicalsissues, board paper of an endpaper assembly made from a mixture of frothed wall- textbooks, etc., with thread. Despite made of silk. While very attractive, the paper or wheat paste and water, to the fact that the term implies the use use cif silk for flyleaves causes prob- which poster or powder paint has been of a particular machine, it has come lems because it tends to fray at the added. It should be the consistency of to be more-or-less a generic term for edges and must, therefore, be turned whipped cream, but thin enough to sewingofpublications whichordi- in. Since this can only be done after flow freely and not clog the screen. narily would be stitched. Pamphlets the bookis trimmed, they must be Silk-screen paint may also be used. are generally Singer sewn through the attached as one of the last operations. The less pigment used the more trans- fold, while multi-section journals and This problem can largely be overcome, parent the color will be. (183) books, especially textbooks, are sewn however, by the use of JAPANESE SILK, silk sewn. An expression sometimes ap- through the side. The machine used which has less tendency than ordinary plied to books sewn with silk thread. for this sewing utilizes a single needle silktofray.Silkflyleavesarefre- At one time it was common to indi- and can side sew books up to11/2 single coated paper 237 sizes of paper

inches in thickness with stitches up to pages. For a full definition, the size Book (uncoated): 171/2 x221/2, one inch in length. A high-speed drill of the sheet must also be given. A sheet 19 x 25, 221/2 x 35, 23 x 29, 23 x is loca:ed in front of the needle and 25 by 38 inches produces a book size 35, 25 x 38, 28 x 42, 28 x 44, theyareraised and lowered simul- (untrimmed) of 61/2by 91/2inches. 32 x 44, 35 x 45 and 38 x 50; taneously. The drill produces a hole Written as 16mo or 16°. Also called Book (coated two sides); 221/2 x 35, in the shelts and is then withdrawn. "sextodecimo." 24 x 36, 25 x 38, 26 x 40, 28 x The book is then moved forward for sixty-fourmo. A book size produced by 42, 28 x 44, 32 x 44, 35 x 45, the length of the stitch desired and folding a sheet with six right angle 36 x 48 and 38 x 50; the threaded needle enters the hole folds, giving a leaf size 164 the size of Cover (wood pulp and cotton con- while the next hole is being drilled for the sheet and forming a section of 128 tent): 20 x 26, 23 x 29, 23 x 35, the succeeding stitch. See also: SIDE pages. As itis both difficult and im- 26 x 40 and 35 x 46; STITCHING. (179, 234) practical to fold a sheet with six right Document manila: 221/2 x 281/2 and single coated paper. A paper which has angle folds, the 64mo is generally com- 24 x 36; received but one -application of coat- posed of a sheet folded with both Glassine: 24 x 36, 25 x 40 and 30 x ing, either on one or both sides. The parallel and right angle folds, or by 40; term does not indicate a paper coated using more than one sheet of paper Index bristol (woodpulp and cotton only on one side, which isa paper and insetting. Written as 64mo or 64°. content): 201/2 x 243/4, 221/2x properly termed "coated oneside." size.1. The dimensions of a book as 281/2, 221/2 x 35, 251/2 x 301/2 and (17 ) measured by its height. Size is usually 35 x 45; single-section book. A book, pamphlet, given in centimeters (or inches), or, in Label (coated one-side book): 20 x etc., consisting of one folded section. the case of miniatures and fine bind- 26, 25 x 38, 26 x 40, 28 x 42, Most periodical issues are single-sec- ings, in millimeters. The fold symbol, 28 x 44, 32 x 44, 35 x 45, 36 x tion publications. (335) e.g., f°, 4°, 8°, etc., is used as an in- 48, 38 x 50 and 41 x 54; single-shear stroke, A paper cutting ma- dication of approximate size. A book Ledger (wood pulp and cotton con- chine which utilizes a knife that moves is said to be "narrow" if its width is tent): 17 x 22, 17 x 28, 19 x 24, with a sidewise motion at the same lessthanthree-fifthsofitsheight, 22 x 34, 221/2 x 221/2, 221/2 x time that it descends. Because its edge "square"if more than three-fourths, 341/2, 24 x 38, 241/2 x 241/2 and isalways parallel to the top of the and "oblong" or "landscape"if the 28 x 34; table, the single-shear knife cuts the width of the cover is greater than the Litho label (coated one side): 25 x entire width of each sheet at the same height. The width of a book is gen- 38, 28 x 42, 28 x 44, 32 x 44, time allthe way down through the erally given only when unusual, or for 35 x 45, 36 x 48, 38 x 50 and pile. Cf: DOUBLE-SHEAR STROKE. (145) old books, fine bindings, and in resto- 41 x 54; single spread. The process of applying an ration work. When both aregiven, Manifold: 17 x 22, 17 x 26, 17 x 28, adhesive to only one adherend of an height is given first. In describing fine 19 x 24, 21 x 32, 22 x 34, 24 x assembly. See also: DOUBLE SPREAD bindingsitisnot unusual forthe 38, 26 x 34 and 28 x 34; (2). (309) thickness to be given also. See also: Manuscript cover: 18 x 31; singleton. A vague expression used with BOOK SIZES; FOLDINGS; SIZES OF PAPER. Newsprint: 21 x 32, 22 x 24, 24 x reference to a singleleaf, especially 2. A glutinous substance prepared by 36, 25 x 38, 28 x 34, 28 x 42, where a conjugate pair is normal in boiling the hides and bones of animals. 34 x 44, 36 x 48 and 38 x 50; a gathering. This single leaf will be Itis sometimes used for sizing paper. Offset book(uncoated): 171/2 x the leaf remaining after the other has See: GELATIN; GLUE. 3. Any material 221/2, 221/2 x 35, 25 x 38, 28 x been removed, the removed leaf itself used in the internal sizing or surface 42, 32 x 44, 35 x 45, 36 x 48, in a new location, or an additional sizing of paper or board. Typical siz- 38 x 50, 38 x 52 and 41 x 54; leaf printed for insertion. (69) ing agents include rosin, gelatin, glue, Offset book(coated): 22 x 29, sisal (sisal hemp). A West Indian plant, starch,modifiedcelluloses,synthetic 221/2 x 35, 25 x 38, 28 x 42, Agave sisalana, or A. rigida, whose resins,latices,solublenylon, waxes, 28 x 44, 32 x 44, 35 x 45 and leaves yield a fiber used in making etc. 4. A material, such as GUM TRAGA- 38 x 50; hard fiber cordage. Some of it is used CANTH, boiled in water and used as a Photomount board: 23 x 29 in rope papers obtained from cordage base (size)to support marbling col- Rotogravure: 25 x 38, 28 x 42, waste. Also called "sisal hemp." (17) ors. See also: ALBUMEN; EGG ALBUMEN: 28 x 44, 32 x 44, 35 x 45 and six on. A rarely used technique of sew- GLAIR; LETTERING SIZE; SIZING.(82, 38 x 40; ing a hocon raised cords, the number 139, 259) Text: 23 x 29, 23 x 35, 25 x 38, of cords being the same in number as sizes of paper. The common or standard 26 x 40, 35 x 45, and 38 x 50; the sections to be sewn with a single sheet sizes of paper. They are: Writing: 17 x 22, 17 x 28, 19 x 24, length of thread. Because each of the in the United States (in inches) 22 x 34, 24 x 38 and 28 x 34. sectionsis sewn to only one of the Bible: 25 x 38, 28 x 42, 28 x 44, in Great Britain (in inches) six cords does not mean that the method 32 x 44, 35 x 45 and 38 x 50; Foolscap 131/2 x 17 is unduly weak, because when all six Blotting: 19 x 24 and 24 x 38; Foolscap, oblong 131/2 x 34 sectionsare sewn theyarepierced Bond (wood pulp and cotton con- double and fastened together at head and tail. tent): 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 13, 81/2 x Pinched post 141/2 x 181/2 (236) 14, 10 x 14, 11 x 17, 17 x 22. Crown 15 x 20 sixteenmo. A booksizeproduced by 17 x 28, 171/2 x 221/2, 19 x 24. Post 151/4 x 19 folding a sheet with four right angle 20 x 28, 22 x 251/2, 22 x 34, Large post 161/2 x 21 folds, giving a leaf size the size of 221/2 x 35, 23 x 29, 24 x 38, 28 x Foolscap, double 17 x 27 the sheet and forming a section of 32 34, 34 x 44, and 35 x 45; Demy 171/2 x 221/2

25 sizing 238 sliding knife

Medium 18 x 23 book consisting entirely of guards, and skipped coating. A defect in a coated Post, double 19 x 301/2 meant to contain photographs, clip- paper caused by failure of the coating Royal 20 x 25 pings, etc. (274) machine and seen as areas on the web Crown, double 20 x 30 skeletonmarked. Anunevennessin or sheet that are not coated. (17) Large post, double 21 x 33 leather produced from an underfed skirt (skirt leather). See: RUSSET. Imperial 22 x 30 animal, especiallyinthose areas of skive (skiving). The process of cutting Demy, double 221/2 x 35 the skin that covered bony structures, leathermore-or-lesshorizontallyfor Medium, double 23 x 36 such as the ribs. (363) the purpose of thinning it for a particu- Royal, double 25 x 40 skewings. Waste gold leaf generated in lar end use. When performed by hand FooPcap, quad 27 x 34 the process of blocking and sent to the itis done with a PARING KNIFE Or Crown, quad 30 x 40 refinery for recovery. See also: GOLD SPOKESHAVE. See also: SHAVING (2); Imperial, double 30 x 44 RUBBER; RUBBING-OFF CHEST.( 140) SKIVER. Demy, quad 35 x 45 skimming. The process of removing film skiver (skiverlabel). The outer grain Medium, quad 36 x 46 from the surface of marbling size. The split of a sheep-, lamb-, or (occasion- Crown, double quad 40 x 60 filmresultsfromevaporationand ally)goatskin, vegetable-tanned, and (17, 52, 140, 316) must be removed before the colors are usually from 0.25 to 1.0 mm thick. placed on the size, otherwise they will Skivers are finished in a wide variety sizing. I. A property of a material stem- not expand properly. It must be done of colors and embossed grains, as well ming from an alteration of its surface quickly and the colors dropped on as with a plain, smooth surface. At one characteristics, which, in the case of immediately so as to prevent another time skiver was used very extensively paper, pertains to fiber characteristics. film from forming. Skimming may be for labels of many kinds of bindings, In so far as internal sizing of paper done with a skimmer, a device attached e.g., the red and black labels of law is concerned, itis a measure of the to the marbling trough, and which is books. See also: FLESHER. (164, 343, resistance of the paper to the penetra- raised and lowered on both ends, ac- 363) tion of water and/or various liquids, cording to the quantity of size in the slack sized. A lightlysized, somewhat e.g.,ink; while in terms of surface trough. The rubber blade which skins absorbent sheet of paper. Slack sized sizing, it refers to the increase of prop- the size allows for a clean skim, and, also refers to below standard degree erties such as water and abrasion re- being supported on the rim of the of water resistance. Newsprint is an sistance, abrasiveness, creasibility, trough, assures an even and quick pull example of a slack-sized paper. See finish,printability,smoothness,and which does not disturb the size. (264) also: HARD SIZED; SIZING; WATERLEAF. surface bonding strength, as well as a skin. 1. The raw integument of a mature, (17) decrease of porosity and surface fuzz. fully grown animal of the smaller type, slack tanned. A hide or skin which has 2. The process of adding materials to e.g., goatskin, sheepskin, pigskin, etc.; undergone an insufficient degree of tan- a papermaking furnish or the applica- or the covering of an immature ani- nagei.e., less than that necessary to tion of materials to the surface of a mal of the larger type, e.g., calfskin. produce the desired characteristics in paper or board to provide resistance to The term also applies to a small hide; the leather. (363) the penetration of liquids and, in the among cattlehides,for example,it slicker. A blunt blade of brass,steel, case of surface sizing, to affect one would include one weighing less than glass, or plastic, used for the more or more of the properties listed under 15 pounds in the green salted state. delicate procedure in SETTING our, i.e., 1.Traditionally, papers are BEATER For a description of the physiology SLICKING. The slicker is also used to SIZED, SURFACE SIZED and TUB SIZED. of the integument, see: LEATHER. 2. work DUBBIN into a skin. (306) Papers are generally classified into The leather produced from such a ma- slicking (slicked). The process of SETTING three groups according to sizing; un- terial which has not been split. See OUT very thin, delicate leathers and/or sized,weak-sized,andstrong-sized. also: BASIL; ROAN. 3. The covering of those with very high requirements of Unsized papers are WATERLEAF (1 ); a fur-bearing animal, dressed and fin- smoothness of grain surface. The op- weak-sized papers are SLACK SIZED; ished with the fur on,i.e., a PELT. eration is done by means of a SLICKER andstrong-sizedpapersare HARD 4. A high, hard finish on paper or and its primary purpose is to remove SIZED. Blotting paper is an example of board.5. An expression sometimes water and stretchtheleather,thus waterleaf,whilesizednewsprintis used to indicate the tearing of paper, making itperfectly flat and smooth. slack sized, and bond paper is hard with reference to the fact that when The slicker is applied with consider- sized. paper is torn the fibers are not broken able pressure to the flesh side of the Rosin sizing is the principal size used but pulled apart, i.e., the paper "skins" skin(called "setting on theflesh") for machine-made papers, while gelatin better when torn along the length of and thenlightly on thegrainside is often used for handmade papers. the MACHINE DIRECTION rather than (called "setting on the grain") to re- 3. The application of a sizing ma- across it. (17, 26, 363) move any final slight irregularities. 2. terial, e.g., albumen, to the edges of skin dresser. An obsolete term for the The process of smoothing and remov- a book before laying on the gold leaf. workman who shaved or pared leather. ing residual hair from a skin that is 4. The process of applying size (glair) (241) being stretched and dried in the proc- to the covers of a book or directly into skinned. 1. A pasted or glued surface on ess of making PARCHMENT or vellum. the blind impressions before tooling which the adhesive has been equalized (306, 363) in gold. 5. The process of sorting books by being rubbed over through another sliding knife. A PLOW knife that slides similar in size into batches for treat- sheet of paper. 2. An adhesive which along in a dovetail groove. Any length ment. (17, 52, 62, 67, 161, 309, 320, has been allowed to stand too long of the sliding knife may he exposed 350) allowing the surface to partially dry for cutting, unlike the sour KNIFE, skeleton guard book. A type of guard and form a non-tacky "skin." (309) which, being attached to the shoe of

9 77 slip 239 smashing machine

theplowisunavoidablyafixture wise the case itself, should hold the section at a place other than the center. and must he worn down by cutting book snugly so that it cannot move and See also: BONE CUTTING. (339) beforeitwilltrimaccurately. The rub against the board, which in turn slunk. The skin of an unborn or prema- sliding knife was invented toward the should provide a sliding fit in the case. turely horn animal. The term is applied end of the 19th century and rapidly But the case (or box) should not be particularly to calves, from which the superseded the bolt knife. Also called so tight that the hook must he pulled very finest grade of PARCHMENT is pro- "Scotch knife." (236, 371) from it, nor so loose that the book will duced. Slunks are also used in making slip.I. A fluid or semi-solid mixture of fall out. See also: PULL-OFF Box. (81, SUEDE LEATHER, and the smaller the a pigment, such as clay and water. 2. 173. 339) fibers, the finer the nap that can he Any printed leaf considerably smaller slippage. A physical property of an ad- produced. The skins of unborn or pre- than the leaf of the book to which it hesive manifest in the ability to move maturely born animals have skins with is attached or inserted into, including or reposition the adherends, such as very fine fibers and a much less highly errata sheets, a CANCEL ( I ) notice, and the movement of theleather when developed vascular network. (363) thelike.Alsocalled"slipcancel." covering a book. small paper copy (small paper edition). 3. The ease with which papersor A copy, or edition of a book printed slips. I .The free end of thecords, boards slide over one another. Too thongs, or tapes on which a book has on paper of a smaller size than that much "slip"isundesirablein paper been sewn, that are used to attach the of a LARGE PAPER COPY. The paper, because it then becomes more difficult boards (or case)to the next block. however, is usually the normal size for to stack, whereas too little is also un- Tapes may be glued to the inside sur- the edition and therefore perhaps should desirable becauseitmakes the ma- face of the boards, or they may he he called "plain paper copy," or not terial too difficult to sort and handle. glued into boards that have been split be given a designation at all. (69, 222) smalt. A potassium cobalt silicate glass slipcase. A more-or-less elaborate box horizontally (or between two hoards gluedtogether);thisis"split-board of a deep blue color. It is pulverized made to order for a specific book, or binding," that was at one time the tra- under water for use as a coloring ma- other archival material, and used for ditional method for library binding. terialin papermaking. Itconsists of protection. The simplest form of the In library binding today, when tapes 50 to 70% silica, 12 to 22% potas- slipcaseisa cloth- or paper-covered are used, the slips are glued to the sium oxide, and 6 to 16% cobalt oxide, box with one open edge into which the overhangingspineliningclothand and is prepared by fuzing crude co- book is slipped with its spine exposed. both are then glued to the insides of balt oxide (called "zaffre") with silica The addition of a cloth dust wrapper the boards of the case. See also: SPLIT and potassium carbonate. It must he or chemise affords additional protec- BOARDS. When cords or thongs are pure; otherwise its color is adversely tion; however, since the spine is then used,asincraft binding, they are affected. It is usually used as a loading covered, the title must either be blocked strung through holes punched in the agent, and because of its resistance to directly on the closed edge of the box boards, in which case they are said acids,alkalis, heat, and moisture,its or a label musthe attached to the to be "laced-in." See also: HOLING OUT; fastness is excellent; however, because chemise. The substitution of an inner I ACING-IN. 2. A term sometimes ap- of its relatively low coloring power it box for the chemise is a further elab- plied to the paper forms used in writ- is expensive to use, and is, therefore, oration. The inner box is usually made inginstructionstothebinder.3. used mainly for the more costly hand- of chipboard covered with cloth, and Matter not set up into pages, hut pulled made and better machine-made azures frequently itis lined with felt or a felt as proofs, on long slips of paper called used for writing papers. Its high specific substituteto protectthecontents galley proofs. See also: PROOF (2). gravity usually causes it to sink through against friction within the inner box. (156, 236, 335) the pulp and color one side (the wire A cloth tab may he attachedasa side)more than the other. At one means of pulling the inner box from slipsheet (interleaf). The paper or other time the term "smalt" was used to de- the case, or the sides of the case may material insertedbetweenprinted scribe the vitrified pigment used for he thumb-notched to permit grasping sheets in order to avoid offsetting an painting on glass and was not neces- of theinner box. Simple slipcases, image on one sheet onto the back of sarily limited to blue. (156, 197) which have no inner box or chemise, the next sheet. In terms of the prepa- smash. A relatively large hole in a fabric should not be notched as this places ration of copy, "slipsheet" means to characterized by many broken warp considerable strain on the joints of the insert pages into proper sequence to ends and floating picks. (341) book whenitisremoved and also indicate the placement of illustrations smashing. The operation of reducing the causes soiling of the covering material. that have not yet been prepared. Each bulk of the entire text block, as op- The outer case may be improved in page. or slipsheet, identifies its particu- posed to NIPPING (). Smashing com- appearance by roundingthe dosed lar illustration, along with information pacts and consolidates the text block, edge togive the appearance of the as to whether the illustrationisline drivingtheairfrombetweenthe spine of a hook, but thisis seldom or halftone, foldout or horizontal, as leaves. Smashing is particularly impor- done, except for very valuable books. well as the size, the negative or art tant in edition binding because itis The hooklike appearance may be fur- filenumber, the figure number and essential that the hooks be of uniform ther enhanced by attaching false bands titles, and any other information that thickness so that the machines, e.g.. to the closed edge to give the effect of might serve to key illustration toits rounding and backing, casing-in, etc., sewing on raised bands, and by cover- proper page for printing or collating. can be set up just once for the entire ing the case with a leather spine and See also: BARRIER SHEET. (17, 156) run of the edition. (182, 320) cloth sides. slitting. The operation of cutting a fold smashing machine. A vertical press that A slipcase shouldfitthe hookit or BOLT by hand for the purpose of isused toapply enormous pressure protects. The inner box, if any, other- inserting a map, plate, etc., within the to material. Smashers are often pro-

2 61 tj Smith, (Charles) Philip 240 Smyth-Cleat sewing

vided with automatic conveyer belts, which is deposited on the14. ather to an earlier European method by .ne the hooks heing piled at one end of the darken the impression in blitid tooling Smyth Manufacturing Co. in the late press on the belt in equal numbers in a hook. Originally, the carbon was de- 1960s and early 1970s.It combines severalpiles and automatically con- posited by holding thetool over a threadand adhesivetosecurethe veyed under the smasher head. There smoking flame; today, however, carbon leaves of a book. In a separate ma- the books are smashed either once or paper is usually used to blacken the chine, the back of the sections are twice,as required, and thennoved tool. (83, 152) planed off leaving the spine as smooth out of the press by the same cc aveyer, smoke tanning. A method of tannage as possible. This is a very critical part of from which they are remove Iman- used in combination with an oil tan- the operLtion, because if the cut spine ually. The smasher remains for a pre- nage, whereby the fat-saturated skins is not smooth and even, subsequent set timeinitscompressed position are subjected to the smoke of wood operations are affected detrimentally. (DWELL TIME). Ithas no clamp to fires. The smoke from the charring The block of leavesisthen placed prevent the slippage of sections and wood containsaldehydes,acetalde- spine down in the Smyth-Cleat ma- can therefore be used to smash only hyde, and formaldehyde, which have chine and is moved into position where those hooks that have so little swell tanning properties. The heat also as- a circular saw cuts a number of cleats in the spine that they will not RUN IN, sists in the oxidation of the oil, pro- completely across the back from head otherwise they must first he nipped. moting further aldehyde and polymer to tail (the number depending on the See: NIPPING PRESS, At times it is pos- production. Some volatile tarry sub- long dimension of the book). The sawn sible to smash books with considerable stances also often become included in leaves t.n move into the sewing posi- swell by feeding them in pairs of two the skin. Smoke tanning, simply be- tion where a single hollow needle laces with thespinesalternating and the causeitinvolves aldehyde formation thread around the cleats in the manner foreedgesprojectingbeyondthe from the partial oxidation of woody of a fiddle or figure-eight stitch. The spines.Seealso:BUNDLINGPRESS. materials, can be used to tan hides sewn text block is then ready for the (320, 339) and skins without the need to use fats. application of adhesive to the spine. Smith, (Charles) Philip (1928-). An Although a minor tannage method, it is The adhesive used may be one of the English bookbinder and painter who still being used in North and South hot-melts or cold polyvinyl adhr,sives. receivedhis educationat Ackworth America, as well as in China. (291) For books that are not to he rounded School and hisarttrainingatthe smooth calf. A smooth, uncolored calf- and backed, the hot-melt may be pref- Southport CollegeofArt. He also skin, used rather extensivelyinthe erable because of its extremely rapid studied under Roger Powellatthe latter years of the 19th and early part Royal College of Art, and was awarded of the 20th centuriesfor covering a lst Class diploma in1954. Smith books when the binding was to be SMYTH-CLEAT SEWING worked with Sydney Morris Cockerel! marbled, or sprinkled, or just left plain. from 1957 to 1960, and since then has See also: SMOOTH CALF BINDING; TREE worked as a free-lance creative book- CALF. (264) binder and painter. His bookbindings smooth calf binding. A fullcalfskin have been exhibited widely bothin binding lacking any tooling or other Great Britain and abroad, and are to decoration, except for the title in gilt be found in the collections of the Brit- on the spine. This type of binding was ish Museum, the Victoria & Albert popular in the latter 19th and early Museum, the New York Public Li- 20th centuries. See also: PLAIN BIND- brary Spencer Collection, and other ING. libraries and museums, as well as nu- smoothness. That property of a surface, merous private collections. e.g., cloth, board, paper, or other ma- Smith has been responsible for many terial, as determined by the degree to innovations in construction and cov- which itis free of irregularities, de- ering technique, design, and the use of pressions, etc. materials. He created the BOOK WALL, smut tape. A tape used to prevent the as well as several new techniques in offset of ink when pages are being cover treatment, including the feath- numbered ina numbering machine. ered ONLAY, andre-constitutedand When numbers areprinted on both sectioned onlay3, which allow a greater sides of the sheets, the second number variety, suhtlety, and fluidity of color will cause the firstto offset c- the and surface, all essential to his par- table, so that when the next sheet is ticular mode of expression. laid in place it will be smeared. Smut Smith isa member of the Crafts tape prevents this by taking up the ink Centre of Great Britain (1956), the as it offsets and then moving before the Guild of Contemporary Bookbinders next impressionismade, sotly2ta 1959), and tha Society of Artists and clean surface is brought into position Designers (1967). He is also the au- for every sheet. (339) thor of The Lord of the rings and smyrna morocco. A sheepskin, split and other bookbindings (1970), and New embossed with an imitation MOROCCO direction:: in bookbinding (1974). grain pattern. (156) smoked tool. A finishing tool, the face Smyth-Cleat sewing. A method of ma- of which is covered with carbon black. chine sewing or lacing adapted from

2G1 Smyth, David McConnell 241 soda pulp

rate of setting; however, if the book of one part black and two or three serves as a diluent as well as a vehicle is to be rounded and backed, an ad- parts sprinkling water, all dropped on for penetration into the fibrous struc- hesive other than a hot-melt is required. in the order give .and drawn into ture of the astringent chemicals em- because of the DRYING MEMORY of snails; 3) the dark blue snail (a bril- ployed to effect hair loosening, plump- hot-melt adhesives. liant marble designed for light-colored ing.andrequiredalkalineaction. Sm3,th, David McConnell (1833-1907). bindings),whichconsistsofblack, Removal of extraneous organic and An Irish-American, who was for the light brown, light blue, lemon yellow, inorganic matter, except epidermis and most part self taught. and who become gall water and the body color, which flesh, by soak-washing is essential be- a prolific inventor and one of the fore- consists of one part black and two cause:1)solidmatter inexcessive most pioneers in the design of book- partsindigoblue,sprinklingwater amounts can result in both stock and binding equipment. One of hisfirst plus a solution of shellac and am- machine damage during fleshing and machines was an "all along" sewing monia; 4) the dark red snail (which unhairing: 2) manure and urine are machine which he patented in 1868. was frequently used with half bindings ideal foods for bacterial growth during This machine used straight needles. the having light colored spines and endpa- soaking. (Such matter, along with cer- number depending on the long dimen- pers of the same pattern), consisting tain salts in the soaks, can result in sion of the book (but always one more of black. light red, pink, light gray, discoloration and stains on the stock than the number of tapes used). The gall water and the body color, which that cannot subsequently be removed): notched (sawn) sectiom, open and flat, consists of two parts carmine lake, one 3)the cementing effect of globular were fed by hand above the needles and part black and two parts sprinkling proteins upon dried tanned fibers re- positioned so that the needles protruded water plus the shellac-ammonia solu- duces fiber mobility necessary for soft- through the saw cuts. A spring-loaded. tion;and5)thegray-greensnail, ness and good handleinthefinal hand-operated rod passed threadto consisting of black, claret red (two leather; 4) curing salts transferred to the hooked needles and retracted. The parts carmine lake and one part black), thelimeliquorsaffectthealkaline operator had torefoldthe section. pink, gall water (which forms the re- plumping action, reduce the rate of closing it over the stitch before feeding quiredwhiteveins)andthebody unhairing, and cause a contraction of another. color, which consists of one part black. the grain surface of the stock; and 5) Smythalsopatentedamultiple- three parts sprinkling water, as well the presence of extraneous matter pre- stitch, off-and-on book sewing it,hine as green. (151) sents a false and variable hide substance in1879. the same year the Smyth snakeskin. Leather produced from the weight in determining the amounts of Manufacturing Company was orga- skins of the larger snakes, and tanned materials required for liming. nized.Sincethattime,theSmyth by processes that include sumac, alum, Because of many variable conditions, Company has developed more than and salt (tawing). and chromium salts. the time and temperature of soaking fifteen versions of the Smyth sewing The skin of the python has a striking varies considerably according tothe machine, including a machine that will pattern of black and white; however, its kind of stock being treated. Generally, simultaneously. sew "two-up." i.e., two scales are rather large. A more deli- few soaking aids are used in soaking separate, but not yet cut apart, books cately patterned skinisthat of the cured and brined stock unless a con- (imposed for printing "two-up.") This watersnake. Snakeskin has been used siderable number of a given lot have model can take sections from 3 to 101/2 for covering books upon occasion and been stored under exceptionally dry inches in width, up to 71/2 to 19 inches also for decorative bands on leather- and warm conditions. In such cases, in height at a speed up to 85 sections covered books. (261, 351) either sodium sulfide (63% ) or sodium a minute. The company has also de- snuffing. The process of lightly BUFFING hydroxide may be used to the extent signed and produceda number of (2) the grain surface of a leather, usu- of 1.0 to 0.5 pound respectively per other bookbinding machines. includ- ally by means of carborundum paper 100 gallons of water. These chemicals ing case-making, gluing and pasting, wrapped around a revolving cylinder. are frequently employed in the soaking ,casing-inmachines, Snuffing is a degree of sandpapering be- of dry stock. Excessive amounts will etc. tween buffering and CORRECTED GRAIN, cause a high grain in the leather. David Smyth's contribution to book and the leather treated is said to be 2. The process of wetting the grain sewing was such that his name is vir- "snuffed." (363) ske of a leather with water and the tually synonymous in the United States soak-fleshing. See: GREEN FLESHING. flesh side with paste to improve the with machine book sewing. See also: soaking. 1. The process of treating raw pliability of the leather preparatory to MACHINE SEWING. (89) hides and skins with water. The res- covering.(161, 248, 291, 298, 306, snail marble. A drawn marble pattern toration of moisture lost luring curing 363) executed by dropping the colors on and storage, as well as the removal of soda. I. SODIUM CARBONATE. 2. See: SODA the size as for the NONPAREIL MARBLE extraneous matter are of prime impor- PULP. and then drawing them into wavy tanceinconverting raw stockinto soda ash. A commercial anhydrous so- lines, one by one with the aid of a leather. The restoration of moisture is DIUM CARBONATE. It ISused inthe stylus, thus producing snail-like forms. essential because;1) the stock may manufacture of leather to neutralize Variations ofthispattern, whichis otherwise be physically damaged by acids and to clean and prepare vege- usually used on the edges of books. the action of washing under agitation, table-tanned leather for acid bleaching. include: 1) the gray snail, with green and flexing during green or lime flesh- (306) added to the gray until the desired ing; 2) sufficient moisture within the soda pulp. A chemical wood pulp pro- tone is obtained; 2) the common green- stockisnecessary for solutionand duced by high temperature digestion gray snail, with black, light blue, yel- elimination of salts and globular pro- of papermaking material with sodium low, pink, light red, gall water, and teins contained within the fibrous hide hydroxide. The soda pulp method is finally, the body color, which consists structure; and 3) the replenished water used in making paper from poplars, sodium bifloride 242 soft cover

birches,oaks,andotherdeciduous for bleaching and the delignification of low salt (NaNO2), usually formed by trees. Papers containing a high propor- wood pulp, dyeing, and other purposes. the absorption of nitrogen oxide in a tion of soda pulp are very white and When an acid is added to an aqueous solution of sodium carbonate, and used soft, and possess high bulk and opacity solution of sodium chlorite, it liberates in the application of developed dyes. but low strength. Soda pulpisfre- chlorine dioxide. (363) quently used to give a soft finish to a sodium cyanide. A salt (NaCN), usually sodium peroxide. A nearly white com- sulfite-pulp base paper. (17, 143, 198, prepared byreacting methane with pound (Na000), having vigorous oxi- 320) hydrogen cyanide, followed by neu- dizing properties, and used in bleaching sodium bifloride (sodium hydi Igen flor- tralization with sodium hydroxide, or mechanical paper pulps and as a final ide). A white salt (NaHE,), prepared by passing carbon monoxide and am- stageinthebleachingof chemical by dissolving sodium floride in aqueous monia over finely divided sodium car- paper pulps in some multi-stage bleach- or anhydrous hydrofluoric acid.Itis bonate at 600 to 650° C. It has been ing sequences. Itis dangerous to use used to disinfect restricted-import hides used to some extent as a (powerful) because, when in contact with organic and skins. (363) sharpening agent in lime liquors; how- matter,itreacts so vigorously with sodium bisulfite. An acid salt (NaHS03), ever, its extremely toxic nature makes atmosphericmoisturethatsufficient usually prepared by passing sulfur di- it dangerous to use. (363) heat can be generate to cause organic oxide through a solution of sodium sodium formate. A white, crystalline salt matter to burn or even explode. carbonate. It is unstable and is gener- (HCO2Na), prepared by passing car- so diump-toluenesulphon-chloroamide. ally known only in solution. It is used bon monoxide through heated sodium See: CHLORAMINE T. to sulPte oils employed in fatliquoring hydroxide. Itis soluble in water and sodium silicate. An alkaline salt, prepared leather, and, because of its capability forms complex compounds with chro- by calcining diatomaceom earth, of liberating sulfur dioxide, in bleach- mic salts. It is used in chrome tannages quartz, or sand with sodium hydroxide ing ieather. (306, 363) tobring about grcater tanfixation. or sodium carbonate. The salt consists so diumborohyd ride.A whitesolid (363) of vatying proportions of sodium oxide (NaBH1), prepared by reacting sodium sodium hydrosulfide. A salt (NaSH). the and silica, such as Na9SiO3. It is used hydride or sodium methoxide with di- anhydrous form of which is generally in the manufacture of paper for im- borane. Itis soluble in water, and is preoared by saturingasolutionof proving physicaltests, increasing the stable under alkaline conditions. Itis sodium in alcohol with dry hydrogen retention of fine particles, and pH con- used to reduce the effects of FOXING. sulfide. It is used as a sharpening agent trol. In this final use, it provides an- sodiumcarbonate. Amildalkaline in lime liquors and is equally as eftec- other means of increasing alumina in (Na0C0), also known as "soda" or tive as, but less caustic inits action the stock preparation system, one that "soda ash." It is prepared by dissolving than, SODIUM SULFIDE. (363) is accomplished by raising the pH value ammonia in purified brine, the result- sodium hydrosulfite. A crystallinesalt of the stock, thereby forcing the use of ing solution being treated with carbon (Na05004), prepared by the reaction additional alum to lower the pH. Also dioxide. It is used in leather manufac- of sodium bisulfite with zinc, or by the called "water glass." (98, 235) ture, particularly in chrome tannages, action of sulfur dioxide on sodium sodium sulfide. A reddish-yellow com- to control pH, and, in the manufacture amalgam. It is used in bleaching paper pound (NaS), generally prepared by of paper, in the preparation of chemical pulps, especially mechanical pulps, and the reduction of sodium sulfate with pulps. (144, 306) in leather manufacture as a reducing carbon monoxide or hydrogen.Itis sodium chlorate. A white, crystalline salt agent in dyeing. (17, 306) soluble in water and is used as a sharp- (NaC103), formed either by the action sodium hydroxide. A white, translucent, ening agent in lime liquors.It forms of chlorine on hot aqueous caustic soda, highly deliquescent, extremely caustic both sodium hydrosulfide and sodium or by the electrolysis of sodium chloride alkali (Na0H), prepared mamly by hydroxide when dissolved in water. Its in solution. It is used in bleaching paper the electrolysis of sodium chloride. It action is much more caustic than that pulps and also to remove stains from is used in the manufacture of paper of SODIUM HYDROSULFIDE. (291, 363) archival papers.Its chlorine content, pulps, and can also be used for the sodium thiosulfate. A salt(Na0S003), which is extremely difficult to remove, rapid degradation of hair and other prepated by treating a solution con- makes it detrimental to the permanence epidermal structures of hides and skins; taining sodium carbonate and sodium of paper.Its bleaching action stems itis seldom if ever used for this pur- sulfide with sulfur dioxide, or by boiling from its strong oxidizing potential. It pose in practical tannages, however, as sodium sulfite with sulfur.Itis used also supports combustion. it dissolves the hair (which is commer- extensively in photography because of sodium chloride. Common salt (NaCI). cially valuable) and can severely dam- the ability of its solutions to dissolve which occurs naturally as rock salt, and agethecollagenofaskinunless silver halides, and as an anti-chlor when is distributed over the land surfaces of very carefully controlled. Also called sodium hypochlorite is used in bleach- the earth, as well as in sea water. It is "caustic soda." (144, 306) ing archivalpapers.Itisalso used used in \ ery large quantities in brining, sodium hypochlorite. A salt(NaOCI), extensively in the chrome tannage of wet-salting, and dry-salting(curing) formed, together with the chloride, by leather. (144, 306) hides and skins for transporation and/ the reaction between chlorine and cold soft. Said of a paper of a soft nature and or storage.Itisalso used to pickle dilute sodium hydroxide. It is used as surface, which has little or no sizing. sheers:I:ins, and in deliming, bating, and an oxidizing agent in bleaching archival Such a paper requires but little pressure other ,eather manufacturing processes. materials.Itschlorine content, how- during printing. (17) (363) ever, which is extremely difficult to re- soft cover. Sometimes said of a book sodium chlorite. The sodium salt of chlor- move from the paper, makes it detri- cover other than one that is hard or a ous acid(HCI02). Sodium chlorite mental to paper permanence. SELF COVER. Itis produced from any (NaC100), an oAidizing agent, is used sodium nitrite. A colorless to nearly yel- type of paper other than that on which softener 243 spangles

the text is printed. A soft cover is not solid board. A boat I made of the same formaldehyde, and used in non-aque- the same as a LIMP BINDING. See also: stock throughout, as distinct from a ous resizing of paper. Its major impor- PAPERBACK. ( 316 ) combination board where two or more tance is that it can be used in a 2% softener. See: PLASTICIZER. stocks are used. A PASTEBOARD ( 1 )IS solutionin methyl or ethylalcohol softening the back (spine). The process of not considered to be a solid board even and sprayed or brushed on the docu- applying water or paste to the spine of though the same stock may be used ment (depending on the fragility of the a book in order to soften the glue throughout. (17) paper) in cases where the paper is too preparatory to rounding and backing. solid fraction. That part of a paper which weak to handle easily when wet or or to remove the old glue when pulling consists of the fibrous material, as well where it is suspected or known that the a hook for rebinding. (196) as sizing, loading, pigments, etc. It is ink may be sensitive to water. It also soft sized. See: SI ACK SIZED. the ratio of solids to total volume. See imparts strength to weak papers. (265) Solander box (Solander book-box port- also: VOID FRACTION. ( 17, 72) solvents. Liquid substances which, to a folio). A more or less elaborate book solid gilt. See: GILT IN THE ROUND. greater or lesser degree, are capable of or document boxinventedbyDr. solids content. The percentage by weight dissolvingordispersingothersub- Daniel Charles Solander, a botanist, of the non-volatile matter in an adhe- stances. In addition to water (the so- during his tenure at the British Mu- sive. (309) called universal solvent), acetone, ethyl seum (1773-1782). The Solander box, solid tool. A finishing tool cut so that it alcohol, normal and isopropyl alcohols, which is generally of a drop-back con- produces a solid or completely filled-in ethylene glycol, naphtha, carbon tetra- struction, is made of wood, has dove- impression, as contrasted with an out- chloride, carbon disulfide, many esters, tailed joints and a back shaped from a line tool, which impresses an open fig- etc., are used as solvents. The fact that single piece of wood. The top and bot- ure, or an AZURED TOOL. (94, 335) water is neither flammable nor toxic tom are held in place by screws and solid tooling. The solid ornamentation of makes it a very valuable solvent; un- glue. The box is secured by two spring a book with metal, usually gold, but fortunately, its adverse effect on some catches fixed in the "fore edge" frames sometimes aluminum, paladium, plati- inks, colors,etc., makes the use of near the head and tail. When properly num, or silver. other solvents necessary at times. constructed the Solander box is very soluble nylon. A N-methoxymethyl nylon solvent sizing. A method of sizing paper nearly dustproof and almost water- prepared by treating nylon 66 with in which the size (rosin)is dissolved proof. The box, which can he made as in a suitable solvent, and applied to elaborate as the maker desires, is gen- the paper; the solvent is then recovered erally covered incloth,or,in more SOLANDER BOX for reuse. (17) elaborate instances,full morocco.It solvPnt tannage. A non-aqueous tannage may even have raised bands on the system which utilizes organic solvents, hack (corresponding to the spine of a e.g., acetone, in lieu of water as the book) and may be tooled. vehicle for the tanning agents. (325) The drop-back Solander is intended sorbitol. A hexahydric alcohol (C6H1406), to house a book. For document storage, correspondingtoglucose.Itoccurs specifically to facilitate removal from naturally, and is also produced by the the box, a drop-front box may actually reduction of glucoseinan aqueous be preferable, although in a strict sense solution. It is used in lieu of GLYCEROL it may be argued that such an arrange- as a plasticizer incertain adhesives, mentisnotreallya Solander box. notably animal glues, and as a soften- Aside from this, however, the drop- ingagentfortextiles,paper,and back box has a distinct advantage over leather. Sorbitolis cheaper than gly- the drop-front type in that the former cerin and its plasticizing effect is said imposes virtually no strain on the hinge drop hack box to last longer because it is less volatile. of the box because it is in a right-angle Seealso:INTERNALLY PLASTICIZED. position when closed and assumes a (198, 235) straight "ne position when opened. The sorghum guineense dye. A reddish-purple drop-flt box, on the other hand, with dye obtained from the leaf sheaths and its fixe ack, strains the hinge at the stems of plants of the genus Sorghum, back btiuse of the approximate 60° and used in dyeing Niger goatskins. angle at the top when the box is open. (130) If the top is accidently struck when the sour dip. An acidsolutioncontaining box is open the top may break off. magnesium sulfate and fermenting corn (155) sugar, into which some leathers are solid. 1. See: BUNDLING ( 1 ) : NIPPING ( 1 ) dipped before drying to improve their SMASHING. 2. See: CUT SOLID: GILT IN color and enhance their feel. (363) THE ROUND. 3. See: SOI ID TOOL. 4. GOLD spangles.Smalldiscsand geometrical TOOLING which has no breaks, cracks. shapes of shining metal used for the or other imperfections. 5. That part of further ornamentation of embroidered a printing surface printed in full color drop front box bindings. Spangles were never used to as distinguished from parts that are any great extent on velvet, but found grained. stippled, or otherwise made to their greatest use on satin embroidered print in gray or a light color. (12, 83. books. They were usually held in posi- 335). tion either by a small section of PURL,

2!34 Spanish 244 spine

or by a seed pearl, in both cases very while it was being lowered. (152, 217, specific gravity. The ratio of the weight of effectively, so that the use of gimp or 241, 369) an object to the weight of an equal pearl was not only ornamental but s pattern. The code name for afine- volume of pure water at its maximum served the same protective purposes as grained, silklike pattern embossed on density, which is at 4 C. Because pa- bosses. ( 1 1 1 ) a book cloth. (256) per, leather, cloth, etc., do not lend Spanish. The name by which the best spatter papers. Another form of PASTE themselves well to measurement of spe- grade of ESPARTO (GRASS)is known. PAPERS. A very thin mixture of colored cific gravity, density is used more often Cf: TRIPOLI. (156) paste is applied to the paper by rub- as the reference in describing these ma- Spanish grain. A grain pattern on leather bing a stiff paste-charged brush across terials. produced by embossing the skin with a hair sieve, which is held well above specific heat. The number of calories of a modified natural grain surface. This the paper and moved across the surface heat required to raise the temperature type of grain was formerly produced of the sheet as the fine specks of color of one gram of a material by one de- by drawing a hide or skin in a strong are sprayed through it. Three or four gree centigrade. tan infusion so as to shrink the grain, colors are generally used in making speckled calf. See: SPRINKLED CALF. resulting in a particular grain pattern these papers, which are often executed speckled sand edge. A book with edges due to the unequal shrinkage of the on a colored paper background. that have been abraded with fine sand- different parts of the skin. (325) This simple form of decoration was paper and then colored by sprinkling Spanish leather. See: CORDOBAN LEATHER; used for the sides of half bindings in or spraying. See also: SPRINKLED EDGES. CORDOVAN LEATHER. calfskin and sheepskin in the early 19th spent tannin. A vegetable-tanning material Spanish marble. A marble pattern of soft century. They were produced all over or solution from which all, or prac- colors, including pale green, old rose Europe until about 1850, and were tically all, tannin has been removed. and brown (or fawn), with a Monti usedasendpapersinbookswith spermaceti wax. A pearly white,fatty EFFECT. It was used in Spain from the marbled-paper covers but seldom for substance obtained from the cavities of early 17th century and is found on the bindings in full leather. the head ofthecachalot(sperm) more familiarlater Spanish marble A variation of this paper, used in whale, Physeter macrocephalus, by hot papers that have been used in both Prance, England and the United States water treatment. Upon cooling,the England and the United States since in the latter part of the 19th century, wax separates out and is pressed to re- the end of the 18th century. consisted of dull gray-blue or lavender- move some of the (sperm) oil. The The best size for executing the Span- purple paperspatteredwithcoarse wax is then remelted and washed with ish pattern is said to consist of a com- black spots. This was done by striking a weak carbonate solution before being bination of gum tragacanth and flea a brush filled with color on a bar and cast into molds for setting into blocks. seed. In mixing the colors for this pat- distributing the color as it fell over the It has a softening range of 40 to 44° C. tern, each successivecolorrequires surface of the paper. These papers andiseasily emulsified with water. more ox gall than the preceding one. were used as covers for inexpensive It is sometimes used as a lubricant for The main, or body, color must also be books but seldom for endpapers. The leather bindings, usually in combina- thicker and mixed with more gall than earlier examples had a dull finish, but tion with other materials in LEATHER any of the other colors. others, used mainly for music scores, DRESSINGS. (195, 291 ) The wavy effect of the early Spanish had a glossy surface. This type of spat- sperm oil. A pale yellow oil found with marbles was not nearly as even as in ter paper was sometimes hung up be- spermacetiinthe cachalot(sperm) the later examples, and was almost in- fore it was dry, the surplus color run- whale, Physeter macrocephalus. When variably executed on a relatively heavy ning down across the paper in uneven spermaceti wax is obtained by treat- laid paper. The distinguishing moire or streaks. This dribbled pattern is almost ment with hot water, the sperm oil is watered effect, which sets the Spanish always found in tones of brown or pressed out. It is classed chemically as marble apart from all other types, is orange and black, and is considered by a liquid wax and is sometimes used as produced by a series of lines, shading many to be less appealing than the a lubricant for leather bindings, gen- from dark to light, crossing the entire simpler spatter papers. (217) erally with other materials in LEATHER sheet in a diagonal direction, and is the special edition. To the bookbinder, an DRESSINGS. (173, 291) result of the method by which the paper edition of a work that differs from a spew. Material that exudes or is exuded. is laid on the size after the colors have regular edition because of some dis- In the manufacture of leather, it is seen been dropped on. The sheet is held at tinctive feature, such as superior paper as a portion of the oily constituents of two diagonally opposite corners and is and binding, more extensive margins, a leather that appears on the grain sur- kept in as upright a position as pos- illustrations not to be found in another face in the form of white crystalline sible. With the sheet inclined toward edition, etc. (143, 156) fatty acids, or as a gummy deposit in the left, the corner held by the right special volume. A book defined by the the form of dark oxidized fatty acids. hand is lowered until it barely touches Library Binding Institute as one that is (325) the floating color. As soon as the paper undersized, oversized or odd-sized, or spine. 1. The collective fold-areas sections startstofall on thesurface,itis any volume that requires special hand- of a gathered book after sewing. Some- slightly agitated with a regular motion, ling. (208) times called "back." 2. That part of the while at the same time being gradually specific adhesion. The adhesion which covering material of a book which lowered with the left hand until the exists between surfaces which are held covers the folds of the sections of a entire sheet is on the size. If properly together by VAN DER WAALS forces of book and which isthe part usually done, shaded stripes will appear on the the same type as those which give rise visible as it stands on the shelf. It gen- paper when it is removed from the size. to cohesion. See also: MECHANICAL AD- erally bears the title, author, name of These strips vary in width, depending HESION. (309 the publisher (when an edition bind- on how much the paper was agitated specification slip. See: BINDING SLIP. ing), and (in a library) frequently a

9 Ave spine fold 245 split boards

location (classification) number, or a to tail of the text block, should be of a or other apparatus. Lap splices are symbolof some kind.Alsocalled thickness appropriate to the size and those in which the two pieces overlap "back," "backbone," or "shelfback." weight of the book. It is generally ap- and are joined, while butt splices are (69, 173) plied over the initialcloth lining of those where the two pieces are abutted spine fold. See: BOLT. large and/or heavy hand- and library- and welded with no overlap. 2. The spine lining. 1. The process of reinforcing bound books. Spine lining paper is sel- joining of the ends of two or more webs the spine of a sewn book, after gluing- dom used in edition binding. of paper to make a continuous roll. up, rounding and backing, and before spine marking. The spine area of a tanned Materials used for this include adhes- covering or casing-in. The spine lining skin, w hich is sometimes of a darker ives, gummed tapes, or splicing tissue. material (which is usually a fabric) shade than the remainder of the skin. (17, 156) does not generally extend closer than spinner. A marbling comb having a han- split. Any one of the several layers of a within inch of the head and tail of dle attached in such a manner as to hide or skin produced by the mechani- the text block. In edition and library allow the comb to be twirled in the cal operation of SPI ITFING (1), e.g., binding, the lining material, or initial marbling size in order to form particu- grain split, middle split, or flesh split. liner, if there is more than one, extends lar patterns. (335) In ordinary usage, however, the term beyond the edges of the spine, and is spiral binding. A form of MECHANICAL usually indicates an under layer of a attached to the boards of the case: any BINDING usedforartreproductions, hide or skin, i.e., a layer other than the subsequent lining, however, stops at commercial catalogs, instruction books, grain layer, or the leather made there- the shoulders of the spine. books in single sheets, etc. The leaves from. A grain layer splitis generally The purpose of lining the spine is to are drilled or punched near the binding referred to as a sicIvr.a. If the name of support it and to impart a certain de- edge to take a spiral-twisted wire or the animal from which the split origi- gree of rigidity, while still maintaining plastic coil which is drawn through the nates, or the word "hide" or "skin," or thenecessaryflexibilityforproper holes. A tendency for the coil to be the part of the animal from which it is opening; consequently the weight and tc:n through the holes makes this type taken,is included in the description, stiffness of the spine lining material is of mechanical binding unsuitable for then the word "split" must be used as of considerable importance. See also: publicationslikelytobe subjectto a noun, e.g., pig split, hide split, butt SPINE LINNG FABRIC; SPINE LINING much use or careless handling. The split, and not as an adjective, e.g., split I &PER. binding margins of such publications pigskin. Cf: SPLIT HIDE. (61) 2. A term used incorrectly with ref- are frequently less than 1/2inch, and split back-gauge. A type of movable BACK erence to the strengthening or stiffen- part of thatis taken by the holes, GAUGE 0: a paper cutting machine made ing of the area between the boards of hich makes rebinding difficult if the up of two or more sections. Split back- the covering material of case bindings. publication must be sewn, as the holes gauge machines are designed especially This lining is more appropriately called can cause breakage of the needles and for trimming books and pamphlets (in the mi AY (1 ). (236, 339) punches of an oversewing machine. edition and pamphlet binding), and spine lining fabric. The fabric used to line Furthermore, in many cases, the type are unlike machines designed for cut- the spine of a book.Itis generally of paper used for these publications ting piles of paper, which have solid made of cotton, napped on the side does not lend itself well to adhesive back gauges. Each of the sections of which goes against the spine, and of a binding. Also called "coil binding," or the split gauge may be set at a different weight that will help support the spine "spirex binding." (139, 234, 338) distance from the knife, so that the while not decreasing its flexibility. spiral laid. A special type of DANDY ROLL, trimming gauge for two or three dif- The Library Binding Institute's Speci- having the laid wires running around ferent margins of a book may be set fications for Libary Binding callfor the circumference of the roll, produc- simultaneously. This permits trimming cloth of a weight not less than 4.0 ing lines parallel to the machine direc- a book or a pile of books or pamphlets ounces per yard, a thread count of not tion of the paper. This laid mark is without changing gauges or waiting less than 45 in the warp and 38 in the characterized by the absence of chain for entire lots to go through the trim- filling, and a breaking strength (by the lines. (17) ming of one edge. If the split gauge is strip method)of notlessthan 42 spirex binding. See: SPIRAL BINDING. in three sections, the middle section is pounds per inch for the warp and 531/2 spirit of salts. An old name for HYDRO- generally setfor trimming the fore pounds for the filling. For books less CHLORIC ACID. edge, and the left and right hand sec- than 1/2inch in thickness, these speci- splash papers. Decorative end- and cover tions for trimming the tail and head fications may be reduced to a cloth papers produced by sprinkling the pa- edges, respectively. with a weight of 21/2 ounces per square per with alum water, followed, after The split gauge trimmer was used yard, plain weave, single ply yarn, a pressing for several hours, with colors, extensivelyineditionbindinguntil thread count of not less than 33 in the e.g., yellow, dark red, bright red, green, largely superseded by the THREE-KNIFE warp and 25 in the filling, and a break- purple,andbrown.Generallythe TRIMMER. When both types are used in ing strength (by the grab method) of lighter shades are splashed on first. one bindery, the three-knife machine is not less than 44 pounds per inch for Usually one or two colors, sometimes generally used for pamphlets (periodi- the warp and 40 pounds per inch for in combination with black ink, are used cal issues) and the split gauge machine thefilling.See also: SPINE LINING; for these papers, which are burnished for books. (142) SPINE LINING PAPER. (208) after being colored. (95) split boards. The boards of a book that spine liniug paper. A relatively heavy pa- splice.I. A join made by bringing to- are made up of two or more plies of per, usually kraft, sometimes coated, gether two pieces of film or paper, by board glued together, except for a dis- and with either a creped or flat finish. means of an adhesive or heat, so that tance at the inner edge into which the The paper, which is applied with the they function as one piece when run slipsor tapesareglued when the machine direction running from head through a camera, processing machine, boards are being attached. Generally,

2 split cover 246 spot marble

if two boards are used they are of dif- in thickness by SHAVING (2) after tan- of a hide or skin by splitting, the opera- ferent thicknesses, with the thinner of ning. The modern splitting machine tion may also have undesirable effects. the two adjacent to the text block. If has a flexible knife in the form of an The strength of leather is not uniform three boards are used, the thinnest is endless band moving at high speed over throughout its thickness, and the grain placed in the center and does not ex- a pair of largepulleys. When the layer, which contains the thermostat tend all the way to the inner edge, thus leather to be split is placed on the bed mechanism of the living skin, is rela- providing the space for the tapes or of the machine and pushed forward, it tivelyweak. As nearlyallof the slips. In the past some "split boards" is gripped by pairs of rollers and pro- strength of leather lies in the corium, were made by splitting a single ply pelled forward in such a manner that the strength of a grain split will de- board, either by hand or by machine, the band knife cuts it into two layers. pend upon the thickness of the corium thus eliminating the cost of laminating. The propelling rollers are made up of layer which itcontains. Splittingal- a large number of small ring rolls with ways causes a loss of strength per unit rubber centers which allow for initial width and the sum of the strengths of SPLIT BOARDS variations in the thickness of the hide. thesplitsisalwayslessthanthe The knife can be adjusted toslice strength of the unsplit leather. In fact, through the thickness of the hide at any the breaking strength of the grain split desired depth below the grain surface of a vegetable-tanned calfskin, for ex- 11/411171.1.114121110111110.11. by adjusting the level of the rollers. ample, will be between 3.5 and 12% While the machine is in operation, the of the unsplit skin, while the breaking band knife is automatically sharpened strength of the flesh split will be be- by grinders on its underside. tween 54 and 70% of the unsplit skin; Splitting may be done while the hide thus the leather loses between 18 and The split stopped an inch or so short of is in the limed or partially limed con- 42.5% of its strength because of split- the head and tail of the board (in case dition, or following tannage. Hides are ting. binding), which made itpossible to sometimes split in the limed condition 2. Separating the plies of a paper or make the case separately and then at- so that a grain layer of desired thick- board. (291, 306, 363) tach it to the text block by gluing the ness may be taken off and tanned sep- spokeshave. A wheelwright'sdrawing tapes into the splits of each board. arately from the splits. A gain in yield knife used for shaping and finishing Split boards are used today almost of the resultant grain leathers may be spokes, and used by bookbinders for exclusively in hand binding and then expected as a result of the slight "let- paring leather and beveling boards. It only for books sewn on tapes, although ting-out" of the fiber structure conse- has an adjustable blade which may be the technique has also been used oc- quent to splitting before tannage. In flat or curved. The tool is modified for casionally for books sewn on recessed certain tar lages, such as vegetable tan- paring by widening the gap between cords. (161, 236, 335) nage of leather for purposes not re- the blade and the guard to prevent split cover. A two-piece pamphlet cover consisting of separate sheets for upper and lower covers side stitched to the SPOKESHAVE pamphlet. A strip of cloth is glued to the spine and onto the sides, thus cover- ing the stitching. (142) split fountain. A type of ink fountain by means of which two or more inks of differentcolors may berun simul- taneously on the same printing press or ruling machine. The trough of ink that feeds the press or ruling machine is the "ink fountain," which may be quiring the full thickness of the hide, clogging. In addition to this, the bot- split into two or more compartments savings in materials and shortening of tom of the blade is generally ground at by means of dividers. (320) processing time may also be effected. ashallower angle,because asteep split hide. The outer or grain layer of a When the hides are to be split in the angle would result in too much of a hide from which the under or flesh side unhaired or limed condition, the stock scraping action. Because it is safer (in has been removed to produce a reason- is plumped to a condition of sufficient that there is little or no possibility of ably uniform thickness of less sub- firmness or solidity so as to be fed cutting completely through the leather), stance than the entire hide. The resul- through the splitting machine smoothly as well as faster, the spokeshave has tant leather is generally slightly thicker in order to split off the grain layer of largely replaced the paring knife. (92, than 1.5 mm. (351) desired thickness uniformly across the 154, 236) split stitch. A fine chain stitch used on full width and length of the hide. The spot binding. An economical form of embroidered bindings, and executed by fibers have a more vertical position SPIRAL BINDING, consisting of a short beginning each successive stitch slightly when the hide has been plumped and spiral at the head and tail of the book within the one immediately preceding. will stand up against the beveled cut- or, sometimes, a short spiralat the ( 1 1 1 ) ting edge of the band knife with less head and tail and in the center. (54) splitting.1. The process of dividing a tendency to leave gouges or uneven spot marble. A general type of marble hide or skin horizontally into two or ridges and valleys. consisting of a base or "ground" color, more layers. Before the introduction of Although it may be highly desirable usually of a dark shade, followed by splitting machines, a hide was reduced (or necessary) to reduce the substance colors of lighter shade. The color con-

24. spotting 247 sprinkling water

taining the greatest amount of gall is hook to snap open and shut. The levers are intended to he decorative and to dropped on the size last so that it will assist in this snapping effect, which is prevent the edges from appearing to be spread out and crowd the other colors enhanced by the fact that the machine soiled. The technique has been used together. (371) direction of the lever boards is at right since the 16th century, generally on spotting.1. See:FOXING. 2. A form of angles to the length of the spine. trade and edition bindings, ordinary geometrical powdered decoration on a 2. Th3 degree to which a sheet of library bindings, and also on dictiona- leather binding, with the background paper will assume its original flat con- ries and similar publications. Venetian occupying a larger area than the orna- ditionafterbeing foldedand then red has always been the color most ment.See also:GOLD-POWDERED BIND- released. (241, 264, 339, 343) often used, possibly because it does not INGS; SEME. (94, 261) springchannelbinder. A mechanical clash with other colors, such as end- sprays. A cluster or mass of leaves, binding used to hold less than 1/2 inch papers or the leather covering. A good branches, etc., tooled in blind or gold thickness of paper. The back of this deal of the early sprinklingisvery on the covers of a hook. They are type of binder has a spring steel chan- fine and even, so much so that at first generally built up with a combination nel, the leaves being held between the glance it appears to be a solid color. of tools and gouges. (83) sides of the channel by spring pressure. (343) spread.1. Two facing pages.See also: The boards are hinged to the edge of sprinkling. The process of sprinkling or CENTER SPREAD. 2. The quantity of ad- thechannel,and,whenbothare spattering irregularly shaped spots or hesive used in the joint area of an thrown back and pressed together, the splotches of coloring matter on the adherend.See also:DOUBLE SPREAD channel is forced open fcr removal or leather covers of a book, usually calf- (2); SINGLE SPREAD. 3. The entire in- insertion of sheets. It is not necessary skin or sheepskin, or on the edges, to side section, when unfolded, of a folder to punch or drill the paper for this type achieveadecorativeeffect.Tradi- or broadside. (309, 365) of binder. (339) tionally, sprinkling was done by means spreading. The tendency of an oilto sprinkled calf. A calfskin that has been of a large brush knocked against an creep over the entire surface of water givenaspeckledappearance by a iron bar, but itis now usually done on the fibers of a hide or skin. This sprinkling of coloring matter, or, more with a brush and sieve, or by means of behavior is of importance in the proc- often, ferrous sulfate. It has been used a mechanical device.See:MOTTLED ess of fatliquoring and stuffing leather. in England since the 17th century, if CALF;SPRINKLEDCALF;SPRINKLED (363) not earlier.See also:MOTTLED CALF; EDGES. (236, 264) spready hide. A hide or skin with a poor TREE CALF. (83, 264) sprinkling water. A mixture of soap dis- or ill-defined shape, or a hide with a sprinkled edges. The head, or all three solved in alcohol, boiled, and mixed large area inrelation toits weight. edges, of a book which have been cut with water for use as a size in the (363) solid and sprinkled, usually with an execution of certain marble patterns. spring-back.1. A device or technique earth pigment, such as bole, dissolved Hair vein and Turkish marbles require invented by the Englishmen John and in a non-spirit solvent. Sprinkled edges a stronger expanding medium than ox- Joseph Williams, in about 1799 and used ever since in the binding of large blankbooks. The spring-back consists of a strip of millboard, or other hard SPRING-BACK binder's board, the length of the hoards of the hook and of a width that, when curved, will fit around the spine and spring-back onto the sides of the text block at least one fourth of an inch on both sides. The hoard is first soaked in water and a strip of kraft paper four times its width is then glued around it. Thepur- pose of the paper is to stiffen the hoard further so that it will maintain its form after it is curved to the proper shape. The assembly is curved around a core (the thickness of the hook), or by means of a BACK-mot DING IRON.A cloth liner is then glued to the interior of the curve, overlapping the edges by 2 inches on either side. These overlaps are glued tothe LEVERS. After the spring-hack is attached, both ends are softened, paste is applied, and the ends of the spring-back are bent over to form the headcaps. The purpose of the spring-hack is to cause the book to lie flat so as to facili- tate its being written in.It acts as a spring, and its pressure on the sides of the hook near the spine causes the square 248 stab-sewn endpaper

gall for the first color, and sprinkling cation of "square sheet"isthat the changes in any of itscharacteristics water forces the color and gall into paper is handmade. (17) upon exposure to various conditions veins. In addition, sprinkling water pro- stabbing (stabbed; stab holes).1.See: during use or storage. See:BRIGHTNESS duces oval spots which enhance the JAPANESE SEWING; SIDE SEWING; SIDE REVERSION; BRITTLENESS; COLOR FAST- attractiveness of the vein. See also: STITCHING.2. See:HOLINGouT. 3. The NESS; DIMENSIONAL STABILITY; DUR- VEINING LIQUID.(264) process of punching or drilling holes ABILITY (OF PAPER); PERMANENT square.I. The name applied to a book for the sewing needles, as in oversew- PAPER; YELLOWING. when the width of the cover is more ing, overcasting, etc. (58) stabilized. A material, such as leather or than three-fourths of its height. 2. An stabbing machine. A hand- or power- paper, whose moisture contentisin L-shaped measuring device, made of operated device for the simultaneous equilibrium with that of the surround- steel, and used both for measuring and punching of holes through the sides of ing atmosphere. See also:CONDITION- for obtaining square orrightangle a pile of leaves preparatory toSIDE ING. corners. 3. A book which has had its SEWINGorSIDE STITCHING.See also: stab sewing. See:SIDE SEWING. boards (covers) cut atperfect right JAPANESE SEWING.(259) stab-sewn endpaper. A type of endpaper angles. (183, 335) stability. Thz permanence of a paper or consisting of a single leaf and a folio square back. See:FLAT BACK BINDING (1). board as reflected in its ability to resist attached to a strip of linen. The end- square blanks. The length of brass on the face of which the bookbinder or tool cutter cuts the design of a finishing STAB-SEWN ENDPAPER tool. (335) square corner. A book corner in which a A = height of backing shoulder plus 1/16 inch B = height of backing shoulder piece of the covering material is cut at the corner so that one turn-in overlaps linen ,paste down the other considerably without the need adhesive fly leaf of additional folding. See also:CORNER leaf MITERING; LIBRARY CORNER.(156, 256) squared. 1. Paper or board that is trimmed on at least two sides to ensure exact- ness of angle. For allhigh quality printing and folding jobs, and partic- ularly in a work-and-tumble imposition, the paper must be squared before print- ing. In other impositions it is only nec- essary that the side guide edge and the gripper edge are at a right angle. 2. Another termforsectionaland/or scale paper. square form. A cattle hide with a mini- mum amount of tissue in the neck, leg and belly areas. The "square form" has resulted from programs of breeding cattle to produce a body conformation which will yield the greatest amount of lean beef per unit weight of animal. Dairy breeds, on the other hand, have an overall distribution that is much less than "square." (363) paste down is folded back squares. The marginal difference between and glued to shoulder the edges of the text block and the edges covering sewing thread of the case or boards of the book. Normally, squares vary both in propor- tion to the size of the book and accord- ing to taste. They are described rela- tively from the least extensive, or pin- head, to the most extensive, bold, with neat, ordinary, and full being intermedi- ate sizes. Books with projecting index tabs will have very extensive squares on the fore edge. Cf: cm FLUSH;YAPP STYLE.See also:STILTED.(97,173, 306) square sheet. A paper or board which has equal tensile strength and tearing resist- ance in both machine and cross direc- tions. Although not so stated, the impli- stab stitching 249 stapled

paper is attached to the text block by The staking machine consists of a table and months are placed in alignment on sewing through holes drilled through that is divided into two parts with an volumes of all sizes and titles are placed the leaves of the book in a staggered opening of about 10 inches between in alignment within each group size. pattern. The thread is passed hack and them. The machine is equipped with ( I 31 ) forth through the holes in a crisscross two jaws, one above and one below the standing instructions. The overall instruc- pattern using two needles. This type of table. The upper jaw has a rubber roll tions pertaining to the binding of a endpaper is said to be useful when a at its end, while the lower jaw has a library's books, given to the binder in book is to be re-covered (recased) but bladed opening into which the toll of lieu of preparing a binding slip for not resewn. It provides a strong end- the upper jaw may sink. The operator each volume. It is in effect a "blanket paper attachment and reinforces the slides a portion of the skin between the order" to the binder. (326) first and last few sections or leaves of jaws, which then come together and standing press. A large floor press, at one the book. pull back. As they do so, they force time used extensively in virtually all stab stitching.See: SIDESTITCHING. the leather to flex sharply over the binderies for operations requiring the stag hide. The hide of an ox thatis blades of the lower jaw and around the application of great pressure; it is used castrated later in life than a steer, often roll of the upper jaw. The operator today almost exclusively in hand bind- when a year old. The longer castration holds the skin in place against the back- ing. Pressure is applied by means of a is delayed, the more the hide will re- ward movement of the jaws and shifts platen which usuallyis powered by semble that a bull. It has no recognized theposition of the skinafter each turning a screw, first by hand, then designation on the hide market, but is motion of the jaws. There arealso with a short bar, and finally, in opera- classed as steer or bull depending on machines with automatic clamps that tions requiring very great pressure, by which it more nearly resembles. (363) hold the skin when the jaws are staking means of a long pin. The size and stain. A suspension or solution of a dye it. Instead of a roll in the upper jaw. weight of this type of press permit or other coloring matter in a suitable some machines have a smooth blade exertion of very great pressure. vehicle. The principaldifference be- which forces the skin into a slot; both The standing press is used not only tween a stain and other coloring agents blade and slot pull backward with the for the final pressing of a book, but is that the former has little or no power skin betwen them, flexingitsharply also during the operation of cleaning to opacify; consequently, when applied along their path. (306, 363) off the spine and to press the backing to leather, for example, a stain imparts staling. Another term for putrefaction. shoulders out of the sections of a book color whilestillallowingthegrain See:PUTREFACTIVE DAMAGE. pulled for rebinding. pattern of the leather to remain clearly stamp. 1. A finishing tool, cut in brass, It is not known for certain if stand- visible. The two types of stains most bearing figures or patterns inrelief. ing presses existed in binderies before often used in coloring leather in res- Stamps range in design from a simple the end of the 15th century; however, toration work arespirit stains,which dot to the most intricate lacework de- as the use of paper in bookmaking had are dyes dissolved in methylated spirit, sign, and can be used by hand or in a become more widespread by this time, andwater-solublestains,which are blocking machine. In a more restricted resultinginincreased production of dyes dissolved in water. Those most sense, however, the simpler tools, or books, the importance of a large press often used today for this purpose are those meant to be used by hand; they capable of simultaneously pressing a the synthetic dyes, such as those pre- are probably more correctly referred to number of books may have become pared from aniline tars.Spirit stains as hand tools, fancy hand tools, or apparent. In addition, a heavy press tend to give greater penetrating power UNIT TOOLS. 2. An engraved design on was needed because the paper of that and are faster drying than water-soluble a block, or the impression of a block time was bulky and spongy as com- stains.Bothtypesareavailallein or stamp on the covers of a book, as pared with parchment. powder form, or as prepared solutions. distinct from a decoration executed by The form of the early standing press, (64, 236) a roll, or one cut into the leather.See: with itssingle screw and descending stained edges. The edges of a book that ARMORIAL BINDINGS; BLOCKING(1); platen, changed verylittleuntilthe have hen stained a uniform color, as BLOCKING FOIL; BLOCKING PRESS; introduction of the hydraulic press.See distinguished from SPRINKLED EDGES, PANEL; STAMP. (25, 137) also:BOOMER PRESS; BUILDING-IN MA- marbled edges, etc. If only the head stanchgrain. A hard, firm sheet of very CHINE; FRENCH STANDING PRESS; RE- edge is so treated, it is termed "stained white PARCHMENT, produced by means MOVABLE PRESS. (161, 236, 320) top." (156) ofspecial finishing compositions. staple. One of the several wire fasteners stained label. A colored(usuallyrec- Stanchgrain was an English technique used in SADDLE STITCHING and SIDE tangular) panel printed or painted di- of modifying parchment to produce a STITCHING pamphlets, periodical issues, rectly on the spine covering of a book firm, smooth, grease-free writing sur- and the like. Staples for this type of as a background for the lettering. It is face of uniform whiteness. The compo- work are of two general types: those intended thatit have the appearance sition used for this consisted essentially already formed and fed automatically, of leather. (156) of lime and flour; or lime, quicklime and a continuous roll of wire that is stained top.See:STAINED EDGES. and flour, eggwhite and milk, all mixed snipped off, formed into a staple, and staking. The process whereby the fibers together and spread on the skin, which clinched. Round wire staples are used of a leather are separated to a degree, was then dried slowly outdoors in the forsaddlestitching,andflatwire thus softening the leather and improv- sun. (291) staples for side stitching. (234) ing itsfeel and handle. The process standardized lettering. A simplified meth- staple binder. A hand-, treadle-, or power- involves flexing the skin, either by hand od of lettering the spines of library- operated machine for saddle stitching or machine. Staking by hand is done bound serial publications, in which all pamphlets and periodical issues with by pulling the skin inalldirections unnecessary words, abbreviations, and wire staples. (199) across a blunt blade fixed in a stake. decorative stamping are omitted. Years stapled. Describes a thin book, pamphlet,

27( starch 250 stencil

periodical issue, or similar thin publi- to cover the costs incidental to begin- ing court record hooks, which are gen- cation, secured with wire staples. Wire ning the binding of an edition, espe- erally required for permanent records, stitching (stapling) in lieu of thread cially those costs relating to setting up are hound in a different style from sewing was introduced by publishers the machines for the run. (140) letterpress work because not only must inabout1880.Unlessbronzed,or starved joint. A joint having toolittle the binding withstand heavy use,it otherwise treated, the staples tend to adhesive to permit a satisfactory bond. must also open very flat for writing rust. While inadequate for securing the A starved joint may be a result of the purposes. See: SPRING BACK. To a large leaves or sections of larger hooks and/ adhesive being spread too thin to allow extent, loose-leaf books are replacing or hooks of quality, they are probahly complete filling of the gap betwen ad- sewn blankbooks, but this branch of adequate for many pamphlets (if rust herends, by excessive penetration of the stationery binding is rather specialized resistant), and are in fact used exten- adhesive into the adherenas, by inade- and is not often undertaken by printing sively for securing the leaves of many quate assembly time, or by too great establishments.Manifoldandother periodical issues. (69) pressure. (309) books designed for use with carbon starch. The carbohydrate(C1/111005),, static electricity. A condition of electrical paper, of which there is a tremendous whichisbeing continuously formed charge associated with friction, which variety, are generally of a less perma- and broken down in the living cell and is a phenomenon occurring in paper nent nature and inmost casesare which also serves as a reserve material. and other non-conductors. In the paper hound in various styles of CUT FLUSH Like CELI ULOSE, itis made up of a millit may be due to circumstances bindings appropriate to the intended longchainofglucopyranoseunits involvingitsmanufacture,suchas use. Stationery bindingissometimes joined together through oxygen by x- evaporation, friction rigaimt the cyl- referred to as "vellum binding" because glucosidic bonds. Chemically, starch is inders and felts during shrin (age which at one time the books were generally a polymer of glucose, and yields glu- takes place during drying, or when it covered in vellum. See also: BLANKBOOK cosealoneoncompletehydrolysis, is being glazed, calendered, etc. It also BINDING; MECHANICAL BINDING; RUL- maltose when broken down by en- occurs when the paper is on the print- ING. (58, 95, 276, 339, 343) zymes, and dextrine under other condi- ing press, folding machine, or other stationery endpapers. Endpapers that are tions. The starches commonly used in converting equipment. The electricity tipped on to, rather than being sewn to, papermaking are obtained from corn, causes the sheets of paper to adhere to the text block. (335) potatoes, tapioca and wheat, the last each other or to machine parts, and stave. A folded sheet of a blankhook. (99) named being the principal source of may cause operating slowdowns. The steamboat boards. Any hoards used for starch for paste used in bookbinding. drier the paper the more easily it re- cutting books OUT OF BOARDS. (241) Starch was the original material for tains static electricity, so that increasing steamboating. The process of cutting or sizing paper and may have been the the amount of water vapor in the air shearingapileof hooks OUT OF first adhesive. See also: PASTE. (143) and storing the paper under carefully BOARDS (241 ) starched edges. Decorative book edges controlled conditions in an atmosphere steamset. A trade name for an English produced by the use of colored starch of 65 to 70% relative humidity may process of edition binding, in which (paste), whichissprinkled on the reduce the problem. the spine of the book is lined with an edges in very fine drops. When the Static electricity in the papermaking expandable cloth before rounding and starch is dry a darker color is sprinkled or processing machine may be reduced backing. The lining and the adhesive on, and, when that is dry, the starch by passing the paper through electrical on the spine are softened by the ap- paste is brushed off. Blue-gray (mixed fields or by having grounded netting or plication of steam, and the book is with the paste) and dark brown were trailing wires by the paper web. rounded and backed while the adhesive the colors commonly used forthis stationery binding. One of the two broad is in the softened state. Full rounding decoration. Unsized book paper was subdivisions of bookbinding, the other with good formation of the shoulders, best for this technique because it per- being LETTERPRESS BINDING. By defini- togetherwithdurabilityandgood mitted absorption of thepaste and tion, stationery binding is that branch openahility, are said to he merits of color. When sized papers were used, of bookbinding which deals with books the process. (89, 140) the colors did not adhcre.well and often meant to be written in, such as ledger, steenbok. A small antelope of the genus ran together unless the edge was first record, and account books, and the Rhaphicerus, especially R. campestris, treated with gall water. (151) like; however, it also encompasses the which lives on the plains of Eastern starched-filled fabric. A BOOK CLOTH hav- bindingofmanifoldand duplicate and Southern Africa, and is used in ing the interstices of the cloth filled books, receipt books, check books, pass- producing a fine, ,loft leather. (261) with starch. Cf: IMPREGNATED FABRICS. ports, bankbooks, loose-leaf volumes, steer hide. The hide jf the male bovine starch place (starch lume). A section in a and other forms of mechanical binding, animal that was castrated when only book cloth where the WARP contains an as well as punching, perforating, pad- several months old. The hide of such excessive quantity of sizing. ding, ruling, and other miscellaneous an animal is finer, tighter in structure, start. A section of a book that projects binding operations. and more uniform in thickness than beyond the other sections at the fore The style of binding applied to books the hide of a bull. (363) edge. A start is generally caused by: used for written records, e.g., blank- stencil.1. A method of printing which 1) the sections being too thick; 2) a books, is by necessity much different utilizes wax, silk,or other material. large number of sections; or 3) the from that for books meant to be read. The ink, paint, etc., is applied to the sewing thread being too loose. (140, Their shape, size, and durability de- hack of thestencil, and covers the 256) pend on the purpose for which they paper, cloth, etc., only where the stencil starting charge. A term sometimes used are intended; consequently, stationery is open. See also: SILK-SCREEN PRINT- by editionbinderstoindicatethe bindings vary greatly in style, complex- ING. 2. A thin cut metal plate which amount included in their hid or price ity, and quantity. Blankbooks, indud- allows the transfer of a design, letter, stencil prints 251 stone papers

etc., to a surface when an inked brayer been dipped in colortothepaper. stilted. The SQUARES of a hook that are or brush is passed over its surface. (156) Poster paint mixed with paste, glue, unusually extensive. A book is stilted stencil prints. Decorative end- and cover or rubber cement is used for printing. so as to make it of the same height papers produced by the application of The results are improved if the color as other books on the same shelf. Stilt- paint to paper through a stencil. Pre- is used sparingly and the stick is rocked ing may be required when one volume pared transparent wax stencilpaper slightly to form a good impression. of a set is rebound (and trimmed), in can be used for the stencils. The paint (86, 133, 183) order to make it range with other vol- is applied very sparingly with a stiff- stiffen.I. The process of making a glue umes of the set.In addition, books bristled brush by starting at the edge or paste more dense, or stiff, by in- issued in parts were sometimes stilted of the cut-out at the top of the stencil creasing the ratio of solids to solvcrit. by a binder who trimmed excessively. and then into the open area. This pre- 2. To increase the rigidity of a board (66, 69) vents the paint from seeping under the by gluing paper or another board to it. stippled edges. The edges of a hook which cut edge and leaves a sharper outline. stiffened paper covers. A temporary form have been spotted irregularly with color The paint can also be applied with a of binding consisting of paper covers mainly to keep them from appear- spray gun,or byrolling an inked glued to thin boards, cut flush at head ing to be soiled.See also:SPRINKLED BRAYER over the stencil. Either water- and tail, with the fore-edge flaps turned EDGES; STAINED EDGES. (91, 156) colors or dyes may he used for these over. prints. (86, 183) stitcher-trimmer machine. A hand-fed stiffener. A thin millhoard used for stiff- machinethatcollates,stitches,and steps. Irregularities in the fore edge of a ening another hoard or other material. trims up to 7,000 units per hour. It can book usually resulting from the sec- The term is also applied to an INLAY be made to accommodate up to eight tions of the book being too thick, or ( I ).See also: LEVERS. (133,371) hand feeding stations. Two or four because of starts in the sections.See stiff leaf. I . The blank leaf of an end- wire-stitchingheads for stitching also:START. (154) paper pasted directly to the first leaf stiasny test. A chemical test designed to through the folds are available and are of a hook. The firstfolio number is laterally adjustable. The machine can determine the type of vegetable tanning then on a left-hand page. It is a tech- agent used in tanning a leather. It con- handle a maximum size of 171/2by niqueusedinblankhookbinding. 111/2 inches and a minimum of 4 by 3 sists of boiling the specimen in a solu- 2. Two ruled leaves pasted together inches. (343) tion of formaldehyde and hydrochloric at any place where the ruling changes, acid, which causes any condensed tan- stitching.See:SADDLE STITCHING; SIDE so as to have uniform ruling at any STITCHING. nins present +a he completely precipi- SPREAD ( I)to whichthe hookis tated. while any pyrogallol tans remain opened. Leaves are also glued between stock. 1. The hides or skins in a tannery in solution. The testsolutionisob- the front fly leaf and the first page awaiting processing, or in some stage tained by extracting a fragment of the of the index, as well as between the of processing into leather.2. Paper sample (a piece 4 by 4 mm) by re- index and the main part of the hook. pulp which has been beaten and re- fluxing, for 4 hours, first in a 50% (276) fined, treated with sizing, color, filler, aqueous solution and then equal vol- stiffness. A term relating to the ability of etc., and which after dilution is ready umes of 6N hydrochloric acid, acetone a material such as paper or board to for sheet or web formation. 3. Paper, and water. resist bending while under stress. Re- cloth, leather, etc., on hand in inven- Even under the best of conditions sistance to the bending is called flex- tory. 4. Paper or other materials to be this test is difficult to use. Since most ural stiffness, and may be defined as printed, especially paper for a particu- vegetable tannins contain both pyro- the product ot the modulus of elasticity lar printing job. 5. All of the books, gallol and condensed tannins, it is fre- and the moinent of inertia of the sec- manuscripts, etc., in a library. (17, 42, quently impossible to judge the colors tion. Other factors being equal, stiff- 74, 363) and precipitates with any degree of ness of paper and hoard varies as the stocking. The process of forcing oil into certainty. Usually more information of cube of its thickness and directly with a skin mechanically during oit, TAN- a qualitative nature can he obtained the modulus of elasticity. Stiffnessis NING. (291) by paper chromatographic separation improved by increasing the degree of stone marble. Perhaps one of the earliest of the tannin constituents. (291) hydration of the pulp used in making of the cover marbles. The cover was stick. I. A device used to hold the leaves the sheet, because a high degree of first sprinkled with black, followed by of a current issue, or several current hydration makes paper dense and hard, brown, in large drops in three or four issues, of a newspaper. It is, in effect, and provides cohesive strength. The places, which ran down the sides. a split stick which grips the newspaper property is obtained more readily with streams. This was followed hy an appli- at the fold both inside and outside, some pulps than withothers. Soda cation of dilute sulfuric acid on the and is held at the end by a thong or pulp, for example, does not produce areas not covered hy the brown. (97, ring, or other type of fastener. 2. The particularly stiff paper because the rela- 152) metal holder in which type is set for tively long heating period required to stone papers. Plain, dull-coated brown, stamping titles in a blocking press. 3. develop the degree of hydration re- green, andslate-gray papers, which The implement used in setting printing quired virtuallypulverizes the short were used for Bibles beginning in about type by hand. and called a composing soda pulp fibers. Sulfite pulp, on the 1821, and a short time later appeared stick. (12, 259) other hand, can he hydrated to the intheearlyclothbindings.Their stick mark.See:BACK MARK (I ). point of hardness before the fibers are smooth-coated finish, usually in very stick prints. Decorative end- and cover entirely broken down; consequently, somber shades, were very respectably papers produced by the application of long-fihered sulfite pulp is more often Victorian, and although perhaps prac- wooden doweling, spools, bamboo, and used in the production of stiff, hard tical, were unattractive; however, their wood scraps of various kinds that have papers. (17, 98, 350) use continued until the end of the cen-

2 ^7) stops 252 string prints

tury. See also: SURFACE PAPERS. (217, straight-grained roan (long-grained roan). be stiffenedthe entire board would 236) A sheepskin thatissplit, dyed, sea- then become more rigid. The additional stops. Small, circular finishing tools, de- soned, machine finished, and grained rigidity may be obtained by pasting a signed to "stop" a fillet when it inter- horizontally on the grain surface with hard, tough paper on both sides of the sects another line at an angle. It is used a straight-grain. When the flesh split is board, thus producing a board that is to avoid the time required for mitering. so treated,itiscalleda"straight- lightweight and stiff, free from exces- The same tools are also used in stop- grained split." sive lamination, and relatively easy to ping up a full gilt spine. (94, 241) strappings. See: CLOTHINGS. produce. Vellum tips could also be used storage life. The length of time an un- strapwork. A form of decoration consist- to strengthen the board at the corners opened package of adhesive can be ex- ing of interlaced double lines, usually in some instances. pected to remain in usable condition forming a geometrical pattern. (264, While not as strong mechanically as under specified conditions of tempera- 347) millboard,strawboardis much less ture and humidity. (309) straw. A fibrous material used in the pro- laminated and is therefore less likely stormont marble. A marble pattern de- duction of two distinctly different pa- to split or open out when handled. If veloped in the late 18th century and per products: 1)a coarse, yellowish its weakness to bending stnnses could one especially identified with English fiber used for STRAWBOARD and cheap be improved, as described above,it bookbinding (sometimes being called wrapping papers; and 2)a bleached would actually be preferable to mill- the "English stormont"). Its distinctive fiber that has some of the properties of board for use in bookbinding. In addi- feature is the red vein running through F.SPARTO PAPER, aS well aS the shorter- tion,ithas been demonstrated that a network of slaty blue. Indigo is espe- fibered wood pulps, and which is used strawboard is less likely to form sul- cially suitable for this pattern because in the manufacture of relatively high furic acid because it contains a lower of the absence of any pasty or sticky grades of paper. percentage of iron impurities than does quality to it. Instead of the usual ox- Any of the cereal straws may be used millboard, and it is alkaline, which in gall, a small amount of turpentine is to make paper pulp, and although itself promotes greater permanence. added to the blue, which causes the wheat is the one most often employed, The use of strawboard in bookbind- color to break up into a fine network barley, rye, oat and rice straws are ing was unknown until about the mid- of lacy spots. Because the turpentine also used. There is probably no signifi- dle of the 18th century, and its use has evaporates rapidly, the marbler must cant difference in the grade of pulp never been extensive. (58, 198, 236) handle the colors quickly, keeping them obtained from them. Even though the stretch. An extension of the length of a stirredconstantly. The name "stor- supply of straw runs into the millions material to the point of rupture to de- mont" applies to all colors mixed with of tons,it has not found very wide termine its tensile strength. Stretch is turpentine, which may be used in com- application in the manufacture of pa- generally measured as a percentage of bination with a French or shell color. per and board, except forits wide- the original length. (17) The pattern is usually produced on a spread use during the Second World strike.1. The impression created by a size of gum tragacanth and flea seed. War. The cereals are all annual crops finishing too!. 2. In paper ruling, strike (217, 368) and the bulk of the supply for a year's is the point at which the pens drop and straight. A term prefixed to a tanning or production of a would have come into contact with the paper; at coloring process to indicate that only to be gathered within a very brief this point ruling commences. (82, 274) the process thus specified has been em- period, which means thatthemill strike in. The relative penetration of a ployed in the manufacture of a leather, would have to have a very large capac- liquid into a material. The term is gen- e.g.,"straightvegetable,"indicating ity for baled straw. In addition, unless erally used with reference to printing, tannage solely by the use of vegetable the mill has means to protect the straw where it refers to the absorption of the tannins, or "straight dyed," indicating from the weather, deterioration might ink vehicle into the paper. Newspaper coloring solely by immersion of the take place. In most cases the pulp mills ink "dries" by means of strike in (ab- leather in a dye bath without subse- are not located near the areas where sorption). Strike in, however, may not quent application of pigmented finishes. the straw is produced; therefore, trans- be desirable as the absorbed ink may (61) portation costs would have to be con- result in SHOW THROUGH. (17) straight-grain(morocco).Ostensibly,a sidered. This is particularly significant strike through. A severe case of STRIKE goatskin having creases in one direc- since the bulk of straw is so much IN, where the ink used in printing actu- tion on the grain surface. The term is greater than that of wood, which means ally penetrates the sheet and is visible generally applied to leathers other than that the amount of paper pulp obtain- on the opposite side. See also: SHOW goatskin, which makes the expression able from a given digester capacity is THROUGH. (17) "morocco" virtually meaningless. Orig- relatively low. striking out. See: SETTING OUT; SLICKING inaHy, the creasing was done by BOARD- Chemical tests for determining the (1 ). ING (1) the skin in the wet condition; presence of straw in paper include the stringiness. The property of an adhesive however, a similar effectis now ob- aniline sulfate test, which gives a pink which causesittoform filaments, tained by platingtheskinwitha stain. (143, 198) threads,etc., when the applicatoris (heated) engraved steel plate, which strawboard. A coarse, yellowish board removed from the adherend, or when renders the term completely meaning- producedlargelyfromstrawpulp. transfer surfaces are separated. Trans- less, as well as inaccurate, because the Strawboard lacksthe mechanical fer surfaces include rolls, picker plates, grain of a true morocco is always pro- strength to be used as the boards of a stencils, and the like. (309) duced by boarding in the wet condi- book; however, as the bending of a ma- string prints. Decorative end- and cover tion. The technique dates from the terial results in the maximum stretch- papers produced by using string as a second half of the 18th century. (61, ing and compression at the outer sur- medium for printing. This technique, 97, 154) faces, if the surface of the board could in which a line pattern is emphasized, strip covers 253 suede leather

involvLs tying string around a block, of cloth or paper to pads, check books, of a hide or skin suitable for conver- inking it with a brayer and then press- composition books, and the like. The sion into leather. While "substance" in ing the block against the paper. The machine can accommodate books up this context will vary greatly, depend- paper may also be pressed against the to 2 inches thick and apply strips 1/2 ing on the type of hide or skin, age block. The string may also be tied to 3 inches wide. It can be used with and sex of the animal, etc., as an ex- around the brayer, which is then rolled hot melt or cold adhesives, or water if ample of substance, 100 pounds of over the printers' ink and then onto the the material used is pre-glued. (264) green salted calfskin will average: paper. As the brayer rolls across the stub (stubbed). 1. That part of an original 43.8 pounds water sheet the pattern repeats itself. Rolling leaf which is left after most of it has 5.9 pounds (dry) hair in different directions and using more been cut away from its conjugate leaf. 3.8 pounds (dry) fleshings than one color results in a variation See also:CANCEL (1). 2. A narrow .8 pounds pate or cheekings of design. For more control in shaping strip of paper or linen sewn between 2.0 pounds (physiologic) fat the design in a formal arrangement, the sections of a book for the purpose of .5 pounds minerals string can be glued to the block in the attaching plates, maps, etc. A book 12.0 pounds salt (NaC1) pattern desired and then inked and which has had stubs bound in is said 31.2 pounds hide substance printed. String prints may also be com- to be "stubbed."See also:COMPENSA- (17, 248, 306) bined wtih other media, the paper be- TION GUARD; GUARD (2).(12,102, substantive dyes.See:DIRECT DYES. ing rolled first with one color and the 335) substrate. A broader term than ADHER- string print applied over it in a differ- stub book.See:GUARD BOOK. END, used with reference to the surface ent color. The technique is also used stuck-on headband.See:HEADBAND. upon which an adhesive, e.g., acrylic intheproductionofpastepapers. resin, stuffing. is spread for bonding, coating, (183) 1. The operation of inserting etc. (309) layers of chipboard into a book having strip covers(strip advertisements). An subway test. A test designed to simulate instruction to a library binder to re- excessive sewing swell before nipping, so as to prevent the book from start- the distortion imparted toa paper- move and discard the covers of period- bound book by a reader holding it in ical issues before binding. "Strip ad- ing. Also called "packing."See:START. 2. The process of incorporating grease one hand with covers touching. The vertisements" is an instruction tore- volume is bent through 3600 to bring move all full-page advertisements (on into a tanned hide, either by hand or by drumming, so as to improve its quality its covers back to back. If a leaf be- both of the leaf) be- comes detached, the volume fails the fore binding. Their removal makes for or to impart special properties. DUBBIN test. In flattening a book in prepara- a thinner volume, and thus reduces is frequently employed in this process, although other materials are also used. tion for use in most copying machines, shelf space required; but thespace a book also undergoes a partial distor- actually saved compared with the cost The mixture spreads over the damp fibers, and penetrates into them as the tion, so that the subway test, with its to the library of having covers and resultant stresses on the binding,is advertisements removed, plus the loss leather dries. The oil enters the hide valid, at least to a limited extent, in of potentially valuable historical ma- easily, while the harder fat remains on the surface or in the surface layers. determining the durability of the bind- terial, make the practice of debatable ing. The test, nevertheless, is subjective Stuffingisgenerally used on heavy value.CI:BIND ALL. (259) and care must be taken that it is con- strip gumming. The application of a line hides in lieu of FATLIQUORING. (305, 339, 363) ducted by the same trained individual of adhesive along the edge of a sheet, every time in order to avoid operators' either by hand or by means of a gum- stumpwork embroidery. An elaborate variablesas much aspossible. The ming machine. (58, 82) coloredembroiderywithintricate name of the test derives from the habit stripping.1. The process of removing padded designs and scenes in high re- some (standing) public transit riders dirt, grease, or uneven tan deposition lief. Stumpwork embroidery was espe- have of holding the overhead strap or from the grainof anewly tanned cially popular in English embroidered bar with one hand while holding a leather by drumming the skins ina bindings of the 17th century. (347) book (usuallya paperback)inthe solution of warm water (40° C.) and stylus. An implement for writing, used in other.See also:PAGE FLEX TEST. a small amount of milk alkali,e.g., ancient and medieval times for writing sudoriferous glands. The sweat glands of 1% by weight of the stock of soda on wax or clay. The stylus is pointed a hide or skin, usually more or less ash, borax, or sodium bicarbonate. Too at one end and is sometimes flattened completely removed during the beam- vigorous or prolonged stripping is to on the other end for flattening out pre- house operations of liming, unhairing, be avoided asif. can seriously de-tan vious writing. bating, and scudding. (363) the leather. If heavy stripping is car- substance. 1. The weight of a paper ex- suede (suede calf; suede kid; suede splits) ried out, or if the original tannage was pressed in terms of weight per ream of leather. A term taken from the French, not satisfactoryfor the leatherre- sheets of a given size.Itis usually "gants de Suede" (Swedish gloves), quired, it is possible to retan the skins based on a ream of 500 sheets. The and applied to a leather finished on the at this stage. 2 A term used mainly in weight of a ream of a given size and flesh side by buffering so as to raise a library binding to indicate GUARDING. number of sheetsiscalled the sub- velvet-likenap.Thetypicalsuede (306) stance number, the "substance" being leather is produced from the smaller stripping macliine. A device used to apply the product of the density,i.e.,the skins, such as calfskin, kidskin, lamb- a strip of cloth or paper to endpapers, degree of dilution of the pulp suspen- skin and goatskin, although cowhide reinforce side stitched or sewn books sionflowingontothe papermaking has also been used. between the cover and outer sections, machine wire, the rate at whichit The nap is produced by huffing or reinforce the folds of sections, hinge ;lows, and the speed of the wire.See wheeling the surface on the flesh side, or guard folded maps, and apply strips also:BASIS WEIGHT. 2. The total weight or the split side of flesh splits; velvet

2 7%i sulfate paper 254 sulfuric acid

suedes, however, are buffed on the quantities of hardwood sulfate pulps sulfur dioxide. One of the oxides of sul- grain side. A common criterion of good are also produced. Mixtures of hard- fur.Sulfur dioxide (SO.,), whichis suede leather is that the fibers of the woods, with their longer fiber improve probably the most common cause of nap should be of uniform length and the formation and surface features of thedeteriorationof paper,ispro- tightly packed together,in order to the paper or board. (17, 72, 143, 198, duced when sulfur, or materials ccn- give a resilience to the nap so that it 320) taming sulfure.g.,coal, oilis does not readily shown fingerrnarks. sulfite process (sulfite pulp). One of the burned in air. It is present in varying The firmness of the nap depends upon two principalchemical methods of amounts in the atmosphere of almost the density and s.cmpactness of the converting wood into pulp for paper- all industrialized nations. Sulfur dioxide, fiber structure. Veivet suedes are finer making, the other being the SULFATE even at higher concentrations than are than flesh suedes and a younger ani- PROCESS. Bleached or unbleached sul- normally found in the atmosphere, is mal, such as a SLUNK, produces an fite pulp is used in the manufacture of not in itself harmful to paper or book- even finer suede. nearlyallclassesofpaper,and binding materials, but it can be con- A principal concern in making suede bleached sulfite pulp is also used in the verted into highly destructive sulfuric leatheris to retain the fine nap and manufactureofrayon,cellophane, acid, either by being oxidized to sulfur still produce a soft leather; however, and other cellulose esters and ethers. trioxide (SO3), and then into sulfuric the leather must not be made soft by Althoughitispossibleto toduce acid (SO3 + HO = 1-12SO4), or by means of improper FATLIQuoruNio, be- bleached sulfite pulp from the hard- reaction of SOo with water to form sul- cause even a small excess of oil will woods, the pulp is usually made from furous acid, which in turn oxidizes to produce a greasy suede nap. softwoods of low resin content, e.g., form sulfuric acid (H2S03 + 1120 = Suede leather, often tooled in blind, spruce,balsam,fir,andhemlock. H0504 + 2H). Some authorities main- was used in England as early as the Traditionally,sulfite pulping has in- tain that this conversion of sulfur di- 17th century, and in the 18th and early volved the digestion of the wood with oxidetosulfuricacidrequiresthe 19th centuries in blankbook binding. a calcium acid sulfite cooking liquor, presence of small amounts of copper or (61, 173, 291, 306, 325) generally a mixture of calcium bisul- iron,i.e.,minute particles of metal sulfate paper. See: KRAFT PAPER. fite and excess sulfurous acid; how- broken from therefiningapparatus sulfate process (sulfate pulp). One of the ever, since processing for waste liquor and entering the pulp,asis almost two principal chemicalmethods of recovery is both difficult and impracti- always the case with papers produced converting wood into pulp for paper- cal with calcium-base liquors, more during the past 150 to 200 years; making, the other being the SULFITE soluble bases, such as sodium, ammo- whereas others maintain that the proc- PROCESS. Today, the terms "sulfate" nium, and magnesium are now being ess will take place regardless of metal- and kraft,when appliedtopaper substituted for calcium. lic content and that the copper and/or pulp, are generally used interchange- The sulfite cooking process may be ironimpuritiessimplyfunctionas ably, although there are slight differ- modified to produce pulps that can be catalysts and thus quicken the rate of ences between them. The term "kraft" Toughly classified as soft, medium, or deterioration. was first applied to the strong brown strong, which are classifications that Archival papers should be protected paper produced from pulp made by the depend to a great extent on the degree againstatmosphericsulfurdioxide, sulfate process, and later to indicate to which lignin is removed and the cel- insofar as possible, by:1) removing the pulpitself.Originally, the term lulose of the fiberis depolymerized. dangerous or potentially dangerous im- "sulfate" designatedallpaper pulps Sulfitepulpingissuperiorinthe purities, e.g., catalytic materials, from made by the sulfate process; later,it amount of lignin removed, and pro- the paper, or, alternatively, manufac- was used strictly with reference to spe- duces papermaking fibers that are white turing paper free from them; 2) the cial grades of pulp, s'ich as bleachable in color and can be bleached to higher additionofalkalineandbuffering sulfatepulp,bleachedsulfate,etc., whiteness with less chemicals than re- agents to neutralize any sulfuric acid while "kraft" became restricted to that quired for the sulfate process. Sulfite thatdoes form;3)destroyingthe particular quality of unbleached sul- fibers also give fewer problems in main- chemical(catalytic)activityof the fate pulp which had been cooked so taining desired formation characteris- metallic impurities by the use of inhib- as to produce a high yield or pulp of tics of the finished paper; however, itors, such as magnesium salts; and 4) exceptional strength. Today, however, paper made from sulfite fibers is not storing paper in an atmosphere as free the term "sulfate"isgenerally used as strong as that made from sulfate as possible from sulfur dioxide. in the paper industry to indicate all pulp. (17, 72, 98, 143) Sulfur dioxide is also used as a re- grades of pulp prGduced by a process sulfonated oils. Oils rendered soluble in ducing agentin the preparation of which utilizes sodium sulfateasits water by chemical treatment with sul- basic chrome tanning liquor from so- principalchemicalconstituent.The furic acid. Most sulfonated oilsare dium dichromateinacidsolution: only exceptions to this common prac- actually soaps, but the fatty acid has a Na2Cr.,01, + ILO + 3S02 = 2Cr ticeare certain speciality grades of soluble sulfonic group combined with (011)504 Na0504. (193, 198, 248) pulp, such as easy-bleaching sulfates it,which tends to giveita limited sulfuric acid. A heavy, viscous, colorless, made from both softwood and hard- water solubility even when the soap odorless,andrelativelynon-volatile wood trees. is decomposed by the addition of the acid (H.,SO4). It is miscible in all pro- Sulfate pulps were first used pri- acid. Sulfonated oils are used in FAT- portions with water and can be formed marily for the production of various LIQUORING leather, in the preparation in book materials, especially in paper. grades of paper and board where physi- of cotton fiber, as mordants for certain See: SULFUR DIOXIDE. It is a very poW- cal strength was of greatest importance. dyes, as finishing oilsin silk,linen, crf ul acid and is highly destructive to Although the stronger grades are pro- and leather manufacture, and in paint cellulosic and proteinaceous materials, duced from the softwoods, very large and varnish making. (305, 363) such as paper and leather. Sulfuric acid

19 sulfurous acid 255 superficial fascia

was also used, particularly in the 19th slowly. Unlike most of the pyrogallol ventional laminating. In addition, the century, in the execution of many so- tannins, sumac does not form tiLoom treated document need only be soaked called cover marbles, and is still used (1). Its first recorded use as a tanning in water (assuming tne document itself in leather manufacture for bleaching, agent was in England in 1565. See also: is not sensitive to aqueous solutions) deliming, pickling, pH control, and the VEGETABLE TANNINS. (175, 207, 363) for delamination to take place. An- like. (207, 235, 363) sun damage. Damage that occurs to a other important advantage claimed for sulfurous acid. An unstable,relatively hide or skin when it becomes heated the process is that the components of weak acid (H2S03), formed by dissolv- above acertaincritical temperature the sandwich are closely related ma- ing SUI.FUR DIOXIDE in water. It is used while it is still moist and is laid out in terials, and the adhesive is compatible as a reducing and bleaching agent, and the sun to dry (cure). A completely with both. The final sandwich is there- forms SULFURIC ACID when oxidized. dry skin can become very hot and still fore more mechanically and chemically sulfurous anhydride (sulfurous acid an- not be affected under normal condi- homogeneous than the usual laminated hydride. See: SUI FUR DIOXIDE. tions of cure, but prior to this a skin is sandwich, and consequently less liable sulfur oxide. Any of the several oxides very susceptible to damage. Also, the to unbalanced stresses due to changes of sulfur. See: SULFUR DIOXIDE; SULFUR drying of a salted skin proceeds so uni- in moisture content and temperature TRIOXIDE. formly throughout its entire thickness of the surrounding atmosphere. (198) sulfur trioixde. A compound (SO3) that that the cooling effect produced by sunfast. See: FAST COLORS. reactsviolently with water to form evaporation off its surfaces maintains sun spots. A variation cif the Turkish, SULFURIC ACID.Itis formed by the the temperature of the entire skin be- snail, or wave marbles, consisting of a oxidation of SULFUR DIOXIDE. low the danger point untilitisuni- color or colors which are made to sumac. A vegetable tanning material ob- formly dry. Without salt, however, a spread out in a raylike effect some- tained from the dried leaves of cer- skin tends to dry unevenly when laid what like the rays of the sun. The effect tainspeciesof Rhus,especiallyR. out in the usual manner, which is flesh is produced by adding a small amount coriaria (from the Mediterranean re- side up. This can happen because the of kaolin (in water) and boiled potash gionSicilian sumac) and more re- flesh side can dry out completely and to the colors. The colors are then cently from various American sumacs, begin generating heat, while the under- dropped on the size, a drop o' potash including the dwarf sumac (R. copal- side remains moist, and, being shielded water is dropped on, causing the color lina), the white sumac (R. glabra), from evaporation, also begins to gen- to contract, followed by another drop and the staghorn sumac, (R. typhina). erate heat. This is especially the case of the color directly over thefirst, Sumac provides a very desirable tannin when pieces of flesh, generally of a which causes the color to radiate out- where white or light-colored, sott and fatty nature, are present on the flesh ward. (264) supple leathers are required. Because side, and further retard the drying of super. See: mutt. it produces such desirable qualities of areas beneath them. The result of over- "super" binding. An obsolete termonce drape, feel, flexibility, etc.,itis used heating moist skins is to "cook," and used in the United States to describe in the tannage of goatskins (morocco therefore gelantinize, the skin fibers, so a binding having the spine lined with leather), skivers, roans, etc. Another that they are no longer leather-forming both cloth and paper.See: SECOND important advantage of sumac is that collagen. The damage, however, is not LINING; SPINE LINING (1). (169) the leather produced with it does not visible in the dried skin, nor can it be supercalender. An off-machine calender darken upon exposure to light and is detected even after the skin is soaked stack used to impart density,gloss, less likely to decay than leather pro- to return it to the pre-cured condition. and smoothness to paper. It is similar duced by use of some other tannins. It is only after liming that the damaged to the calender except that alternate In spite of its special value for cer- areas tend to disintegrate, leaving holes chilled cast iron and softer rolls are tain classes of leather, the use of sumac in the skin, that the damage becomes used. The rolls used to supercalender as a tanning agent has declined ine- apparent. In many cases the damage is uncoated paper usually consist of cast cent decades. This decline has been largely limited to the grain surface, iron and highly compressed paper, due in part to the development of less which becomes deeply corroded, giving while the rolls used for coated paper expensive tannins, such as wattle, que- rise to the trade term "blister" for this are usually cast iron and highly com- bracho, and myrabolans for general partiar type of damage. See also: pressed cotton. The finishproduced tanning, and also perhaps to the adult- PUTREFACTIVE DAMAGE. (248) varies according to the raw material eration of the product by commercial sundex process. A British process of lam- used to make the paper and the pres- harvesters of sumac in the Mediterra- inating a paper document. The process sure exerted on it, and ranges from the nean region utilizes semi-transparent glassine paper highestEnglishfinishtoahighly Good quality sumac is sold in the in lieu of cellulose acetate foil, with glazed surface. Supercalendered papers form of a light, yellow ish-green pow- the three components of the "sand- are sometimes used for books contain- der, which has a tannin content of wich," i.e., the document and the two ing fine line blocks or halftones be- about 26 to 27%; however, the tan- sheets of glassine being sealed together cause they print well from type and nin content may vary from 25 to 30%. with an aqueous adhesive, such as halftones, although for the latter they Sumac generally has a higher pH value carboxymethylcellulose (C. M. C.) or are not as good as coated paper. (17, than other tannin materials in its class, starch paste. The sandwich is then con- 52, 182, 287) i.e., about 4.0, and also a very high solidated by pressing it between heated superficisdfasda. Therelativelythin acids and salts content. A large propor- surfaces. The Sundex process is safer layer of flesh on a hide or skin, known tion of the salts are weak acids. Sumac, than conventional LAMINATION in that in the leather trade simply as "flesh" which is one of the pyrogallol ciass of an operating temperature below 100" C. and containing adipose(fatty)and tannins, is very mild in its action and isneededinplaceofthemuch areolar (loose connective) tissues and penetrates the hide substance very higher temperature requiredin con- sometimes muscle tissues. (363) superfinish 256 sweet oil superfinish. A polishing process applied in publishers' cloth and leather bind- lish binder George Bagguley, in 1896, to some book cloths, especially those ings, as well as in miscellaneous bind- tooling in color had never been suc- with a hard surface. Finishing is done ings of cloth and leather. The color cessful and foils, of course, did not by die-embossing the cloth, and air- was applied to the paper in pigment exist. brush coloring. (164) form, which imparteda somewhat Solid tooling was not possible, but supported French joint. A modification of artificialeffect,unlike the vegetable- very beautiful and delicate tooling on the FRENCH JOINT. It is used to impart stained, surface-colored papers which bright colors with highlights in gold additional support to the shoulders of preceded them. Crudely pigmented sur- was done by means of fine gouges and large books. A thin board is glued to face papers were used in the later 18th pallets.Because the decoration wa- the book board; however, instead of century, but only rarely. This type of much too delicate for normal handling, paper is never found on the sides of Bagguley usually restrictedhistech- half-bindings because it was too easily nique to doublures, and even then SUPPORTED FRENCH JOINT stained by grease; however, it was used generally vellum doublures. (94, 236) for the covers of inexpensive "yellow- sweat glands.See:SUDORIFEROUS GLANDS. back" books of the 19th century. The sweating.1. A pressing operation em- darker colors, especially brown, mauve, ployed in handmade papermaking fol- and black, were often used for devo- lowingtheinitialpressingofth tionalbooks.Alsocalled"coated WATERLEAF sheets between felts. Each papers." (236) sheet is removed from the felt, pressed, surface sized. Paper or board sized when laid one on top of another, with the the web or sheet is dry or partially other of the sheets being rotated after stoppingattheinside edge of the dry, usually on the papermaking ma- each pressing, until the desired pres- thicker board, it extends the exact dis- chine but also as a separate operation. sure has been reached. This process of tance of the intended gap between the (316) repeated pressing was not a common board and the shoulder, i.e., the dis- surface-size press. A part of the coner- practice until the 16th century, as evi- tance of the French joint. When the making machine, usually located ty.- denced by the roughness and absence boards are attached, these thin boards tween two drier sections, and used to of finish of paper made before that press against the shoulders and help apply relatively light coatings of a sur- time. support them. face size or other material to the sur- 2. An old and virtually obsolete surface-active agent (surfactant). A sub- face of the paper web. The unit may method of loosening the hair of skins, stance that, when used in small quan- be vertically or horizontally oriented by allowing controlled putrefaction to tities, modifies the surface properties and is equipped to spray or otherwise take place in a confined, warm area. It of liquids or solids. A surface-active apply material to one or both sides of is probably the oldest method of un- agent reduces surface tension in a fluid the paper web as it moves through the hairing and possibly is still being used or the interfacial tension between two papermaking machine. (17) insome countries,particularlyfor immisciblefluids,suchasoiland surfacc tension. A force which tends to sheepskins (where the hairisoften water. Surfactants are particularly use- bring the contained volume of a body. more valuable than the skin). Sweating ful in accomplishing the wetting or e.g., a liquid, into the form having the consists of little more than putrefac- penetrationofsolidsbyaqueous least surface area, as in the tendency tion of the Malpighian layer. Because liquids and serve in the manner of of a drop of water to assume a spheri- of the danger of damage to the skins detergent,emulsifying,or dispersing cal shape, i.e., the smallest surface area in the sweat chambers, unless the proc- agents. They are more effective than for the given volume of liquid. (17) essis very carefully controlled(see: soap in certain situations and are used surfactant.See:SURFACE-ACTIVE AGENT. RUN PELTS), its use was discontinued by conservators for such purposes as Sutcliffe, George (1878-1943). An English for the best grades of skins following cleaning, wetting, and dispersing.See bookbinder apprenticedto Maudie's the introduction of safer methods of also:WETTING AGENT. Library and then employed in the shop unhairing(see:LIMING). surface color. 1. The color of a coating of Douglas Cockerel!in1899.In The skins are generally hung from or top layer as opposed to a substance 1901, Sutcliffe and FRANCIS SANGORSKI beams in a closed room in which the that is colored throughout its mass. 2. opened their own bindery and began air is kept warm and humid. During The color effect presented by a surface producing the jewelledbindings on the process a considerable amount of when viewed by reflected light, espe- which their great reputation was largely ammonia and amines are generated, cially when associated with metals, e.g., built. Of the hundreds of such bind- which assist in the unhairing action. As the yellow of gold, the white of plat- ings, the finest and their most out- soon as the hair slips away easily, the inum, etc. (233) standing achievement was a binding skins are taken from the sweat cham- surfacepapers.Decorativeendpapers, known as the GREAT OMAR. (94, 236) ber and placed in saturated lime water, colored on one side only subsequent "Sutherland" decoration. A manner of which retards further bacterial actions to the manufacture of the paper. They tooling in colors, usually carried out and causes some swelling of the skins. were producedinseveral(usually on vellum and analogoirsmaterials, (79, 291, 363) drab) colors and some were glazed. and called "Sutherland" because of the sweet oil. A mild oil, e.g., olive oil, mixed Endpapers of this type were in com- patronage of the Duchess of Suther- with paste, colors, and water to make mon use by the 1820s, generally with land. The process involved the use of the coloring matter used for sprinkling thedrabcolorspredominating,al- a resin, which was applied to the vel- the edges of books, largely in the 19th though clear yellow papers of varying lum, followed by colors which were century. The oil apparently was used shades were also produced later on in sprinkled on and then tooled. Until this to promote the penetiation of the color the century. The endpapers were used technique was introduced by the Eng- and paste into the paper. (371) swell 257 synthetic resins

.3well. The additional thicknessinthe leather. The most widely known syn- and 6) some syntansretard mold spine of a book caused by the sewing tans are made by treating aromatic growth and/or remove ironstains. thread and/or extensive guarding. If substances, e.g , cresols, phenols, naph- (248, 291, 306. 363) the sections are thin and large in num- thalenes, etc., with formaldehyde and synthetic glues.See:RESINOUS ADHESIVES. ber, the sewing swell may become so sulfuric acid. There are many varia- synthetic leveling agents.See:NEUTRAI great as to cause problems in subse- tionsintheingredientsof syntans, SYNTANS; SYNTANS. quent operations. This isparticularly relative quantities used, and methods synthetic resins. A group of complex, true with hard-finished papers, because, of manufacture. Syntans produce white partially amorphous, organic semi-solid when a book is made up of soft paper, or buff-colored leather, depending on or solid substances that are produced the sewing threads will become em- theingredients,which darken upon by chemical reaction or by polymeriza- bedded in the paper to some degree exposure to light, and generally behave tion of relatively simple compounds. when the book is smashed or nipped much likevegetable-tannedleathers. Synthetic resins are comparable to na- and the swell reduced; however, since Although syntans do exist which can tural resins in various physical prop- the threads will not be forced into hard he used alone to produce leather (so- erties but are considered to be superior paper by smashing without cutting it, called exchange or replacement syn- to them in that they are more uniform, the l'ook retains the swell. Excessive tans), many syntans lack thefilling possess greater clarity, durability, flexi- swell can cause the spine of the book power of vegetable tannins and pro- bilityandresistance to chemical to buckle and run in, uneven trimming, duce an undesirablythin,"papery" change. The synthetic resins include: and poor rounding and backing. While leather. They are also more expensive 1)formaldehyde condensation prod- excesiveswellisundesirable,some than the natural tannins. Syntans do ucts of phenol, urea, and melamine; swell is required for proper rounding havedesirableproperties,however, 2) reactionproductsof polyhydric and backing.In hand binding,the and are widely used in both chrome alcnhols and polybasic acids(alkyd danger of excessive swell can sometimes and vegetable tannages. When used in and polyester resins);3)polymeriza- be avoided by sewing the bookTW conjunction with other tanning agents, tion products of acrylic acid and its ON.(256, 339) where they are known as "auxiliary derivatives (acrylic resins) or styrene swelling. An increase in the volume of syntans," they perform the following (polystyrene);and 4)polymers of the protein fibers and jellies of a hide functions:1)thepresence of 5% butadiene and itsderivatives, or co- or skin caused by the absorption of syntan helps dissolve solid vegetable polymers, with other materials(syn- water, and seen as an increase in the tannin extracts and reduces any tend- thetic elastomers, etc.). thickness of the skin. Swelling is an ency to formREDS(condensed tannins) According to the manner in which important aspect in liming, unhairing, orBLOOM(pvrogallol tannins);2)a they react to heat and pressure, syn- and splitting. pretannage with 5 to 10% syntan im- thetic resins are classified broadly as symmetrical design. A decorative design proves the shade, i e., makes it paler, being either thermoplastic or thermo- for a book built up by means of re- and the levelness of color of a sub- setting. Although thecellulosepoly- peating tools at regular intervals--as sequent vegetable tannage; 3) a pretan- mers, celluloseacetate,celluloseni- in a diaper design, for exampleor by nage with a syntan or admixture with trate, and ethyl cellulose, are prepared drawing some symmetrical form and a vegetable tannage improves pene- from natural materials and, therefore, repeating small toolsinconjunction tration of tannin intotheskin; 4) do not conform to the definition of a with this form, in order to carry out a when syntan is used with a vegetable syntheticresin,theyare nonetheless decorative scheme. (115) tannintheleather develops a more classed along with them. These resins syneresis. The separation of a liquid from uniform but paler color upon being also find use in papermaking as ad- a gel, as, for example, water from dyed. but the syntan generally prevents hesives in coating and laminating, as paste, upon standing.(309) the development of deep, full shades; barrier materials, and as agents to im- syntans. A contraction of "synthetic tan- 5) some types of syntan may be ad- ran special properties to paper, e.g.. nins." which are chemicals that com- iusted with an alkali to a pH of6.0to improved wet and dry strength. Syn- bine with, or affect, the protein con- become "neutral syntans." often called thetic resins are also used extensively stituents of hides and skins and pro- syntheticmordants(butshouldbe in the anplicaiion of finishes to the duce a product that is flexible, porous, caned"syntheticlevelingagents") grain surface of leather. (17,306) andhasthedesirablequalitiesof which have value in dyeing leather: tab 258 tag board

tab.1. The crescent-shaped tongue of leather lacing were passed through the leather extending above and below the holes from the inside, wound around spine of some 12th century bindings each other and knotted at each end. and probably intended to facilitate the When tacketing stationery bindings, the removal of the book from achest holes were punched through the sec- where it was stored spine uppermost. tions, the cover, and the hands, and 2. A small square or rectangular piece then wound around each other. Those ofpaper,card,plastic,leather,or stationery bindings having spring-backs fabric attached to the fore edge of a were tacketed to help secure the folios leaf, and bearing one or more char- to the clothings on the spine,or,if acters to serve as a guide or INDEX. a a webb;ng were used, the folios, web- See also:TAB INDEX. (12, 156, 236) hirgs and clothings. tab index. A form of the index used when When tacketing is employed in mod- the ordinary cut INDEX is not feasible, ern-day stationery binding, the tackets, such as with loose-leaf bindings. The an adhesive film, the resistance offered which are usually made of catgut, are set of 24 tabs (I and J are generally by an adhesive film to divisior of the used at each webbing, but only on the combined and X is omitted) are pre- adhesivesurface,ortheresistance first and last three folios.(99, 236, pared in one strip of material, which offered by the adhesive (while in the 343) is glued along half its length, leaving plastic state)to removal of the ad- tacking. The operation of attaching a splits for attachment to the leaves. The herends. Some printing inks, varnishes, tanned, damp hide or skin to a wooden letters are printed or blocked on the and similar viscous liquids also display frame so as to allow it to dry in a strip and the individual letters are then tack.See also:BLOCKING (2, 3).2. smooth and somewhat stretched con- separated. The tabs are attached to the That property of an adhesive which dition. As this method of drying is leaves in a complete series along the resultsinabondofconsiderable slower than tunnel d-ying, itis more fore edge from headtotail(and strength immediately after application expensive. The stretching action, which usually from front to back) with the and contact under low pressure. 3. The isaccomplished by"enlarging"the letters projecting. (276) resistance of an ink film to being split frame must be carefully controlled be- table book. 1. An elaborately decorated between two surfaces, such as between cause excessive stretching may weaken edition of a book, often covered in rollers, between plate and blanket, or the leather, resulting in a loose and velvet or silk, and intended for display between blanket and paper. (164, 309) PIPEY LEATHER. It is an operation re- on a drawing room table. This type tacketing. A method originally employed quiring considerable skill on the part of binding was popular in the 19th in non-adhesive binding to secure the of the workman tacking the skins to century. Its 20th century equivalent is section or sections)and covers of theframe,especiallysincemany the "coffee table" book, usually a large limp vellum bindings. The technique leathers are sold by the square foot; illustratedartbook.2. An ancient was later used to secure the loose, conseauently, judicious tacking (and writing book consisting of wax-covered jacketlike cover to the text bloci. stretching)can add to the area of tablets of metal, ivory or wood fastene some bindings, and, frtnil fate medieval the leather. (363) together at the back by rings or ''uer times, as a method of decorating the tack range. The length of time an ad- thongs. The writing was e covers of stationery bindings. Tacket- hesive will stay tacky-dry after applica- stylus.See also:DIPTYCH. 3. , ing in one form or another dates back tion, under specified conditions of tem- solete name for a notebook. (156, 203, to at least the early 12th century. In perature and humidity. (309) 310) the past 100 years or so, tacketing has tack stage. The length of time during tablet. 1. An early writing material made been used to reinforce the sewing of which an adhesive is sticky, or resists of clay (which was inscribed while soft large blankhooks. The tackets are se- removal or deformation of thecast and then firedto make the writing cured around the folio, webbing, and adhesive. (309) nermanent),stone,wood,orivory clothings of the spine. In this latter tacky-dry. The state of an adhesive when (covered with wax, which was then use,itwasrestrictedtothebetter the solvent and other volatile ingredi- inscribed with a pointed instrument). grades of stationery bindings. Over a ents have evaporated sufficiently,or 2.See: pAD. (156,264) period of some 800 years, therefore, have been absorbed enough, so that the tablet-back board. A board used as a tacketing has evolved from a method adhesive is in the proper tacky state. (more or less) stiff backing for a PAD. of constructing a bookbinding toa (309) It is generally produced from ordinary method of reinforcing and decorating tag(s). 1. A grade of manila board used chipboard, or newshoard, and ranges the spine and covers of a book. for the boards of semi-flexible bind- in thickness from 0.020 inch and up- Early tacketing involved punching ings. 2. The hand to which a sealis ward. (17) two holes through the center fold of attached in old manuscripts. 3.See: tack (tackiness).1. A general term ap- each section,aswellas the vellum CATCHwORD. 4. The straight or crossed plied to the state or property of tend- cover, about 1/2 to 3,4 inch apart. The tins of a lace. (94, 154, 261) ing to adhere, the relative stickiness of ends of astripof vellum,gut,or tag board. A lightweight board used for tail 259 tan

envelopes, file folders, temporary wrap- is available in a wide range of colors. tensile strength, good resistance to tear- ping, and the like. It is manufactured Basis weights range from 80 to 300 ing, and a finish suitable for writing or from jute, rope, chemical and mechan- pounds (221/2 X 281/2 500), the most printing. (17, 142, 264) ical wood pulps, or combinations there- common weights being 80, 100, 125, tail.1. The lower or bottom edge of a of, usually on a cylinder machine but 150, 175, 200, and 275 pounds. Tag book, usually implying the very edge sometimes on a FOURDRINIER MACHINE. board should have good bending and of the covers and spine. 2. The lower The board has a smooth surface and foldingstrength,highburstingand portion of a letter, e.g., "g" and the projection of an upper case letter, e.g., "Q." (287) TACKETING tailband; tailcap. See: HEADBAND; HEAD- CAP. tail edge. See: TAIL (1). tail margin. The area between the bottom line of letterpress or writing and the bottom edge of theleaf.See also: MARGIN (1). take off. A term applied to the flaying (removal of the skin) of an animal. talc. A hydrous mineral consisting of magnesium-silicate (3Mg04Si02H20). Commercial talc is seldom if ever a pure mineral and therefore its physical and chemical properties usually vary over a relatively wide range. A com- mercial talc, such as soapstone, when ground into a very fine powder gen- erally has a soft and greasy feel and is usually creamy to greenish-white in color. Talc is used as a filler in cul- turalpapers, to whichitimparts a limp vellum cover attached by tackets raglike feel. (17) talipot palm. A fan palm, Corypha um- braculifera, found in Ceylon and the Philippines, and other areas of the Far East.Ithas verylarge,fan-shaped leaves which are cut into strips and processed for use as a substitute for paper. See also: PALM LEAF BOOK. tall copy. 1. A book which has had its head andtailedges trimmed very slightly.2. A comparison of several copies of the same book in the same edition and on the same paper, one of which may be taller than the others. 3. See: LARGE PAPER COPY. (69) tambour. 1. A form of embroidery con- sisting of looped stitches similar to a chain stitch and worked with a fine hook. Tambour was used on em- broidered bindings. 2. A metallic em- broidery thread either worked through the material or sewn to it with silk of the same color. It was sometimes sewn flat and sometimes raised over thread or cord if the relief was to be high; however, this technique was never em- 9ZSSSSSSSSSSA ployed on silk, only on satin and velvet. It was usually double, the lines being laid down side by side with only the blankbook spine reinforced by tackets ends being taken through the back. Occasionally, it was sewn down with a bright lustrous red silk. See also: COUCHING (2). (280) tan (tannage; tanned).1. To convert a tannery 260 towing

hide or skin into leather. 2. Tannage, Great Britain and on the Continent of taping. A technique used to impart ad- which is the act, process, or result of Europe. ditional strength to blankbooks; it in- tanning a hide or skin. 3. A tanned 2. A method of machine sewing in volves pasting strips of linen to the hide or skin, i.e., one which has been which the sections of a book are sewn folds of certain folios within a section. converted into leather. by theconventionaledition sewing Each section is taped inside the fold tannery. The establishment or place in method, on a machine adapted for the of the outside folio and outside the which the processes involved in con- use of tapes. The sewing proceeds from fold of the inside folio. The number verting raw hide or skin into leather section to section in the usual manner of sections to be taped depends on the take place. of machine sewing but through tapes size of the book, but generally the tannic acid. A tannin, usually in the form rather than simply through the folds first and last six sections are so treated. of a yellowish-white or pale brown of the sections. This results in sewing Strips of linen are also attached be- powder, obtained from fermented oak that is considerably stronger than the tween the first and last three or four galls by extraction with water-saturated ordinary edition sewing, although, be- sections so as to fill in any gaps that ether. Tannic acid is soluble in water, cause the threads are secured to the may appear when the book is rounded, alcohol, and acetone, and gives pre- tapes (and not around them, as in hand especially when the sections are very cipitates with most metallic salts, pro- sewing), flexibility in the spine of the thick. (82, 343) teins, and alkaloids. Chemically, itis book is somewhat reduced. tara. A vegetable tanning material ob- apenta-m-digalloyl-glucose having a 3. A method of sewing single leaves tained from the dried pods of a tree high molecular weight. Upon hydrolysis in lieu of conventional oversewing or or shrub, Caesalpinia spinosa, which with sulfuric acid, it giv,ts gallic acid side sewing.'Groups of leaves are over- is found in widespread areas of north and glucose. See also: VEGETABLE TAN- cast (or oversewn) to form "sections," western South America. The tannin NINS. which are then sewn to tapes in the content of the pods is said to range tanning. See: CHROME TANNING; VEGE- usual manner. While this method does from 35 to 55%. The principal value TABLE TANNING. not enable the book to be opened any of tamisinthetanning oflight tapa cloth. A coarse type of "cloth" pro- better than does oversewing,it does leathers,and, under certain circum- duced in the Far East from the mashed provide slips to help secure the boards stances, it may also be used as a sub- bark of the paper mulberry and bread- to the text block. (161, 264) stitute for sumac or gambier to pro- fruit trees and used as a covering ma- tape slotting. A form of stabbing per- duce light-colored leathers. Tara is of terial for books. It is usually decorated formed by hand or machine, invented the pyrogallol class of tannins, some- with geometric patterns. (332) by the Englishmen F. C. Gould and what similar to, but more astringent tapes. The strips of cloth (usually linen), Thomas Harrison, in whose names a than, sumac.Its major shortcoming vellum, nylon, etc., to which the sec- patent was granted in 1934 for a tape- seems to be the presence in it of dif- tions of a book are sewn, and whose slotting machine. The purpose of tape fusion-Inhibitingmucilaginousmate- free ends, or sues (1), are attached slotting is to enable tapes to be passed rial. It is also used to some extent in to the boards, or are glued between through slots near the spine of the dyeing and the manufacture of ink. SPLIT BOARDStoimpartadditional leaves, thus securing them as one unit. See also: VEGETABLE TANNINS. (175) rtrength to the binding structure. Cf: The advantage of this method over tar board. A tough, strong, heavy Nnu..- BANDS( 1); CORDS; WEBBING(S)( 1). stabbing (with cords) is that the width BOARD (1), manufactured from old (183, 198) of the tapes not only provides support tarred rope, sail cloth, sacking, etc. It tape sewing. 1. A method of fold sewing to the leaves of the book, but also is virtually impossible to obtain today, which utilizes strips of cloth, vellum, imparts strength without the bulk that except as discarded boards from old etc., in lieu of raised or recessed cords. would result from the use of cords. books. (256) In this method of sewing, the tapes rest Grooves arefirstcut acrossthe tarnish. To dull or discolor the surface against the backs of the gathered sec- spine, and then parallel to the spine, of a mineral or metal, either by chem- tions and the thread passes across but producing a shape something like that ical reaction, such as the tarnishing of does not loop around them. The width of an inverted T with a long bar and silver by oxidation, or by the deposi- of the tapos, which should be in propor- a very short stem. When done by ma- tion of a thin film of grime. (233) tion to the size of the book, generally chine,theslotsmay bepunchzd towing(tawed"leather"). An ancient ranges from 3/3 to 3/4 inch. In general, through the leaves,thus eliminating process of treating prepared hide or a larger number of narrow tapesis the grooves. The latter method, how- skin (usually pigskin or goatskin) with probably superior to a smaller number ever, makes it more difficult to insert aluminum salts and(usually)other of wide tapes, as the former reduces the tapes through the slots. In the hand materials, such as egg yolk, flour, salt, the possibility of the thread loosening method, the grooves can be filled in etc. A skin may actually be tawed between tapes. It is recognized, how- with cord or other material after the simply by immersing it in an aqueous ever, that the problem of looseness of tapes have been inserted. solution of potash alum at a tempera- sewing thread can be overcome by the Tape slotting is particularly suitable ture between 20 and 30° C; however, use of the CATCH STITCH. for large books printed on thin paper, saltisusually included in the alum The useof 3/4 inchtapeshas e.g., unabridged dictionaries, encyclo- solution because it improves the sub- long been the standard method em- pedias, etc., which lack the margin re- stance (thickness) of the final product. ployed in sewing blankbooks (station- quired for side sewing. At times, two After treatment the skin is dried in air ery binding), and was also theac- tapes are put through each slot for ad- (crusted) and held in this condition cepted method of sewing library beoks ditional strength. (236) for several weeks to allow the develop- (on 1/2 inch tapes) in the United States tapestry stitch. An embroidery stitch on ment of stabilization or "aging" effects. until superseded by OVERSEWING. Tape canvas that somewhat resembles tap- Tawed skins also undergo :STAKING IO sewing library books isstill done in estry. (111) impart of soft, flexible handle. Apart tearing resistance 261 template

from this soft, warm handle, the tawed ing32.Fahrenheitisconvertedto 9.4 49 120.2 skins have a high degree of stretch. Centigrade by subtracting 32 from the 10.0 50 122.0 Handle and stretch may also be im- Fahrenheit figure, multiplying by 5 and 10.6 51 123.8 proved by the addition of egg yolk dividing by 9. In the chart below, the 11.1 52 125.6 and flour to the basic alum and salt center figure represents the tempera- 11.7 53 127.4 solution. A tawed skin is usually white ture one has read; the figure to the left 12.2 54 129.2 in color but may yellow slightly with is the conversion of that figure into 12.8 55 131.0 age. Centigrade if read in Fahrenheit, while 13.3 56 132.8 Tawing docs ...ot actually produce a that to the right represents the conver- 13.9 57 134.6 skin that is stable in the wet condition, sion to Fahrenheitif read in Centi- 14.4 58 136.4 i.e., imputrescible in the wet state, and grade, e.g., the temperature 88 (Fah- 15.0 59 138.2 thereforecannotaccuratelybede- renheit) converts to 31.1 C., while the 15.6 60 140.0 scribed as having been tanned; con- temperature 88 (Centigrade) converts 16.1 61 141.8 sequently, in a strict sense, a tawed to 190.4 F. 16.7 62 143.6 skin is not leather. (61, 237, 291) 17.2 63 145.4 C. tearing resistance (tearing strength).1. F. 17.8 64 147.2 The force required to tear a specimen -17.8 0 32.0 18.3 65 149.0 of paper under specifiedcontrolled -17.2 1 33.8 18.9 66 150.8 conditions. In archival work, the two -16.7 2 35.6 19.4 67 152.6 most important measures of tearing -16.1 3 37.4 20 0 68 154.4 resistance are: 1) internal (or continu- -15.6 4 39.2 20.6 69 156.2 ing) tearing resistance, where the edge -15.0 5 41.0 21.1 70 158.0 of the sheet is cut before the actual -14.4 6 42.8 21.7 71 159.8 tear is made; and 2) edge tearing re- -13.9 7 44.6 22.2 72 161.6 sistance, i.e., the resistance offered by -13.3 8 46.4 22.8 73 163.4 the sheet to the onset of tearing at -12.8 9 48.2 23.3 74 165.2 the edge, and which appears to be -.12.2 10 50.0 23.9 75 167.0 dependent on both theextensibility -11.7 11 51.8 24.4 76 168.8 and the tensile strength of the paper. -11.1 12 53.6 25.0 77 170.6 The Library Binding Institute speci- -10.6 13 55.4 25.6 78 172.4 fications for library binding call for -10.0 14 57.2 26.1 79 174.2 endpapers(60 pound basisweight, - 9.4 15 59.0 26.7 80 176.0 24 X 36 - 500) to have a tearing re- - 8.9 16 60.8 27.2 cll 177.8 sistance with the machine direction of - 8.3 17 62.6 27.8 82 179.6 the paper of 140 pounds per one-inch - 7.8 18 64.4 28.3 83 181.4 strip and 160 pounds in the cross di- - 7.2 19 66.2 28.9 84 183.2 rection; the test being conducted on - 6.7 20 68.0 29.4 85 185.0 the Elmendorf tester. 2. The force in 6.1 21 69.8 30.0 86 186.8 pounds required to tear a specimen of 5.6 22 71.6 30.6 87 188.6 leather at a place where the specimen - 5.0 23 73.4 31.1 88 190.4 is cut before the actual tear. (17, 62, 4.4 24 75.2 31.7 89 192.2 209, 363) - 3.9 25 77.0 32.2 90 194.0 tear ratio. The relationship between the - 3.3 26 78.8 32.8 91 195.8 machine direction and cross direction - 2.8 27 80.6 33.3 92 197.6 tearing resistance of paper, or the warp - 2.2 28 82.4 33.9 93 199.4 and filling direction of a fabric. - 1.7 29 84.2 34.4 94 201.2 T. E. G. (t. e. g.). Abbreviation for TOP - 1.1 30 86.0 35.0 95 203.0 EDGE GILT. - 0.6 31 87.8 35.6 96 204.8 tellers.Thesmallrightanglemarks 0.0 32 89.6 36.1 97 206.8 printed on a page to indicate to the 0.6 33 91.4 36.7 98 208.4 binder the proper position for tipping 1.1 34 93.2 37.2 99 210.2 plates or mounts. (307) 1.7 35 95.0 37.8 100 212.0 temper. The resistance offered by a light 2.2 36 96.8 leather to bending, and the extent to 2.8 37 98.6 template. A pattern made of board, metal, which itrecovers its shape after re- 3.3 38 100.4 cm plastic and used as a guide in cutting lease of the bending force. Quickness 3.9 39 102.2 leather for covers or spines and cor- of rebound to its orilaal shape is an 4.4 40 104.0 ners, or cases for library or hand edi- indication of good temper in a leather, 5.0 41 105.8 tion bindings. Before the days of ma- which is a property closely associated 5.6 42 107.6 chine edition binding, a template made with resilience and elasticity. (248, 363) 6.1 43 109.4 to the proper size for the edition being temperatureconversion.Centigradeis 6.7 44 111.2 bound, when positioned on the sides, converted to Fahrenheit by multiplying 7.2 45 113.0 level with the outer edge of the cover, the Centigrade figure by 9, dividing by 7.8 46 114.8 could be marked to give the trimming 5, and adding 32, or by multiplying 8.3 47 116.6 positions, which not only saved time the Centigrade figure by 1.8 and add- 8. 48 118.4 by eliminating the necessity of making

2 3.; 2 tender 262 thirty-twomo

hundreds of marks with dividers, but scripts and early printed books, espe- thermoplastic binding (thermoplastic also made it possible to cut all siding cially those of vellum, were assembled. binding machine.)See: ADHESIVE BIND- papers together to one size. (236, 256) with the first and sixth, second and ING; ADHESIVE BINDING MACHINE. tender. Sometimes said of a paper which fifth, etc., leaves being conjugate.See thermoplastc resins. Resins composed of is lacking or has lost a certain amount also: QUARTERNION; QUINTERNION; SEX- separatelinearnon-reactivemacro- of its strength, ether because of some TERNION. (156) molecules which, upon being heated, aspect of its manufacture, or as a result terra alba.See: GYPSUM. become plastic due to the reduction of of deterioration. (17) tertiary colors. Any hue produced by a intermolecular forces. Such resins can tenon saw.See: BACK SAW. mixture of secondary colors. In pig- be made to flow under pressure in this tensile energy absorption. The ability of ment mixtures, such colors tend to be state; upon cooling they regain their a material, such as paper, to absorb subtle and blackish, and are usually original physical properties. The heat- energy in tension. The property is pro- chromaticvariationsofgraysand ing-cooling cycle can be repeated as portional to the area between the load- browns.See also: COLOR (1).(233) long as there is no thermal degrada- elongation curve and the elongation terylene. A generic name for a synthetic tion of the polymer. Most thermoplas- axis, and is expressed in energy units thread which has the advantages of tic resins are produced by forcing the per unit area of material, e.g.,foot- nylon thread, but does not have the heated material into a mold or through pounds/squarefoot,kilograms-centi- undesirable high degree of elasticity. a die under pressure, followed by cool- meter/square centimeter, etc. Measure- Because of its lower elasticity, it does ing. The important thermoplastic proc- ment of tensile energy absorption has not present the problem of thread re- essing techniquesincludeinjection beenrecommended asaneffective traction after cutting. As with nylon molding, extrusion, and calendering. means of determining the deterioration thread, it is highly resistant to moisture Many such resins are also soluble in of paper; to date, however, it has not and retains a large part ofitsdry various organic solvents, with the same received widespread acceptance. (17) strength when wet. Terylene is also al- intermolecular cohesivefotces being tensile strength. 1. That property of a ma- most entirely free from contaminating overcome in the process cf solution. terial, such as paper, which enables it metals which might tend to cause deg- The more important thermoplastic res- to resist rupture under tension. The radation. It is also used in sheet form insinclude polyvinyl chloride, poly- force used to cause rupture is applied in the repair of documents and the ethylene,polystyrene,andcellulose parallel to the plane of a paper speci- leaves of books. (81) acetate. (233) men of specified width and length and texodern. One of the earliest of the imi- thermosetting. That property which en- under specified conditions of loading. tation leathers. It was said to be strong, ables a material to be hardened, or Tensile strength of paper is expressed durable, as well as resistant to water, fused and hardened, by means of heat as load per unit width, or as BREAKING stains, an.1 insects. (264) Materialshavingthispropertyare LENGTH, and of cloth as the breaking text block. The body of a book, consist- called"thermosets." Once hardened load or force in pounds per inch, or ing of the leaves, or sections, making they cannot subsequently be softened BURSTING STRENGTH. up the unit to be bound, rebound, or by reheating. The synthetic resins, ac- The Library Binding Institute speci- restored. It excludes all papers added cording to the manner in which they fications for endpapers used in library by the bookbinder, including board react to heat, are classified as either binding call for a paper having a ten- papers, endpapers, doublures, etc. thermosetting or thermoplastic. (179, sile strength in the machine direction textile bindings. A very ornate style of 233) thickness. The smallest of the three di- of not less than 44 pounds (1inch fabricbinding,popularinEngland strip and in the cross direction of not and France during the Renaissance, mensions of a material, such as leather less than 25 pounds (1 inch strip) for .ind in England into the 18th century. or paper, usually expressed in thou- sandths of an inch, or, in the metric 60 pound basis weight paper (24 )< The books were sumptuously bound in system, in millimeters. The thickness 36 500). satin and velvet of various colors, and 2. In leather, tensile strength is de- were often embellished with needle- of leather is measured in millimeters, fined as the force per unit area of cross work in multi-colored , as well as or in fractions of an inch, e.g..OUNCE orIRON sectionrequired to producefailure. gold and silver threads.(156, 254, (2). In the measurement of paper, it is also calledCALIPER ( 1 ). Numerous factorsaffectthetensile 347) thinner. A volatile liquid added to an strength of any given leather, including texture. A term applied to the general the kind of tannage, the length of the adhesive,ink, or other substrate. to identifyingcharacteristicsofpaper, modify tbe consistency or other prop- tannage, the species and age of the cloth, leather,etc.. pertaining to the erties.See also: DII UENT.(309) animal, the degree of splitting, and so feel and appearance of the material. thirty-sixmo. A rarely encountered gather- on. Most leathers will show a tensile See also: FEEL; FINISH (1,3):FORMA- strength of between 2,000 and 6,000 ing consisting of 36 ;eaves or 72 pages. TION; GRAN; HANDI F; LOOK-THROUGH; The 36mo can be obtained by folding pounds per squareinch.(17, 209, WILD(1). (17) 363) three sheets, each with two parallel t4s.AbbreviationforTRIMMED FOUR folds followed by two right angle folds. tension. The degreeof firmness with SIDES. resultinginthree24-pagesections which the thread used in sewing a book Thamesboard. A binder's board made in which are then insetted. The 36mo is is drawn from section to section. The England and used to a considerable used when anOBLONGformat isre- tenson of all stitches should be equal. extent in edition binding. Itis a soft quired. Written as 36mo or 36°. (172, 306) gray board and is sometimes lined with thirty-twomo. An uncommon gathering ternion. A gathering consisting of three kraft paper to impart stiffness, provide consisting of 32 leaves or 64 pages. sheets folded once and insetted. This equalsurfacetension,andafirm, Although such a section may be form-d was the form in which some manu- smooth surface. (156, 237) by making five consecutive right angle thixotropy 263 three-plane watermark

folds, in practice it is unusual to fold the latter part of the 16th century. threadless binding. See: ADHESIVE BIND- a sheet with more than three consecu- (236) ING; SADDLE STITCHING; SIDE STITCH- tive right angle folds, because of buck- Thou, Jacques Auguste de (1553-1617). ING. ling, trapped air,etc.;therefore the The French historian, statesman, royal three and one half times the width 32mo is generally formed by folding librarian, and perhaps the most famous method. A technique used in applying afull sheet with two parallelfolds, bibliophile since JEAN GROLIER. Thou a second (paper) lining to the spine followed by three right angle folds, and inherited his father's library of (rare) of a book. A heavy piece of paper a half sheet with two parallel and two books in1583. Many of his books three and one-half times the width of right anglefolds, and insetting the were simply bound in red, olive, or the rounded spineiscut and glued latter. Written as 32mo or 32°. citroncolored morocco,withplain across the spine from a line approxi- thixotropy.I. A phenomenon exhibited boards, a few border lines in gilt, and mately 36 inch in from the edge of by various gels, in which the system his coat of arms in the center of the the spine. The paper is then folded displays the mechanical properties of uppercover,surroundedbylaurel back on itself and glued to the re- a gel when undisturbed, but becomes branches, but with only the title and maining 3/1G inch of the cloth spine a ,iquid when mechanically agitated his cipher on the spine. Other volumes lining. Finally, the paper is folded back and again becomes a gel when allowed Were bound in the celebrated FANFARE and glued to itself.Itis a somewhat to stand. This "reduction in viscosity" STYLE. Thou had books printed on poor technique as it does not provide is due to a temporary breaking down paper made especially for him, and by for a HOLLOW at the :Ho inch area. of an internal structure of a system the time of his death had accumulated (259) under shear. The viscosity of thixo- a library of some 1,000 manuscripts three-dimensional appliques. A form of tropic systems depends on the "shear and 8,000 books. His library was sold book decoration consisting of textured history,"i.e.,the extent of previous in a series of sales by several owners andraised-surfacedesignsonthe mechanical agitation to which the ma- from 1680 to 1789. Because of the covers. They are in the form of col- terial has been subjected. The property high quality of his books and the ease lages,appliques, mosaics, sculptured is important in paper coating colors with which they can be recognized, forms, onlays, etc. Common materials, because it allows the mixing of color their survival rate is very high. such asstring, yarn, cloth, and the formulation to a viscosity which per- Thou isgenerally called de Thou like, are used in the execution of such mits the color to be applied and allows and isoften indexed under D,al- bindings today, along with fired enamel, surface leveling due to after flow of though his Latin name, and the one glazed clay, metals, and glass. (183) the color on the material. 2. A prop- under which he wrote, was andis three-knife trimmer. A cutting machine erty of adhesive systems which causes Thuanus. (50, 94, 286) designed to trim all three edges of a them to thin upon isothermal agitation Thouvenin, Joseph (1790-1834). A 19th book in two cuts but with only one and thicken when allowed to stand. century French bookbinder (gilder), handling of the book. The stack of (17, 309) Thouvenin (l'aine), as he was often books to be cut is placed in the ma- thong binder. A binding consisting of called, was the oldest of three brothers, chine and secured by the clamp. The twospeciallyconstructedwooden allbookbindersactiveduringthe fore edge knife makes the first cut, boards joined together by woven cotton FrenchRestoration,orthereafter. returns to its raised position, and the or nylon thongs. One end of each Joseph Thouvenin actually did most of other two knives simultaneously cut thong isfastened to a clamping bar his work during the period of the the head and tail. If a book has too which is hinged to the back edge of Empire,startinghisapprenticeship much sewing swell, a shaped piece of the upper board, while the other end with the younger Bozerian in 1802. chipboard must be glued to the clamp is fastened to a movable bar enclosed Although he is generally credited with to compensate for it, so that the same in the lower board. A key allows the raising the standards of French book- pressureisapplied to both the fore thongs to be slackened between the binding from the depths to which it had edge and spine of the pile, otherwise clamping bars, enabling the punched declined during the Revolution and the pull of the knives may cause the leaves to be added or removed from thereafter, he is probably best remem- pile to shift due to the shearing action the binder. The clamping bar, together bered for his revival of a style of bind- of the knives exerting a diagonal pres- with the oval T-shaped punching, se- ing, which, because of him, came to sure. The three-knife trimmer is de- cures the leaves firmly. A relatively be known aS the FANFARE STYLE, tak- signed for relatively large numbers of extensive binding margin isrequired ing that name from his binding of books of the same dimensions, as in for this type of binder, which is equally Fanfares et Corvées abbadesques. He edition binding. See also: GUILLOTINE. as strong and usually lighter in weight is also credited with the introduction (320) than the POST BINDER, and is reason- of the FLY EMBOSSING PRESS.(288, three on. A method of sewing a book by ably durable. (276) 347) hand in which three sections are sewn thongs. 1. Narrow strips of leather, alum- thread count. The number of warp and on one length of thread from kettle tawed skin, etc., used to attach vellum filling yarns per inch in a woven fabric. stitch to kettle stitch. The technique covers in limp bindings, as well as to The Library Binding Institute stand- is designed to reduce sewing swell in hold the covers of books closed. Thongs ards for library binding call for 110 the spine and is generally used only were usedbeforetheinventionof threads in the warp (grade F buckram) when sewing books made up ofa CLASPS and were, infact, used on forpyroxylinimpregnatedcovering relatively large number of thin sec- COPTIC BINDINGS. 2.Thenarrow fabric, 45 in the warp and 38 in the tions. See also: ALL ALONG; TWO ON. stripsof vellum,leather,or alum- filling for spine lining cloth for books (236) tawed skin used in the early days of more than 1/2 inch thick, and 33 in the three-plane watermark. A WATERMARK FL EXIBI E SEWING. Thongs had begun warp and 25 in the filling for books showing three thicknesses in the same to be replaced by cords in this use by 1/2 inch thick or less. (209, 341) sheet of paper. three-quarter binding 264 tied down three-quarter binding. 1. A binding hav- paper cut three times the width of the to facilitate removal of the enclosed ing one type of material, e.g., vellum rounded spine of the book. The paper book. The semi-circular cut is used in or cloih, covering the spine and part is folded into thirds, the center third the best work, while the triangular cut, of the sides, as well as enlarged cor- isglued to the spine, and the two which isused principally by library ners, and a differentmaterial,e.g., wings are glued to each other. It is a andeditionbindersintheUnited paper, covering the remainder of the superior form of the hollow to the States, is much more economical, espe- sides. The material extends almost to THREE AND ONE HALF TIMES THE cially sinceitisusually made after the corners on the sides,i.e., much WIDTH METHOD. (259) the case has been covered. more thaninthe case ofa HALF three up. A method of imposing periodi- thumb index (thumb cuts). A type of BINDING. Since it is difficult to imagine cal issues which results in three issues INDEX which utilizesaseriesof thatthethree-quarterbinding was (in a line) folded and saddle stitched rounded notches cut into the fore edge originated to economize on the more together and then cut apartinthe of the book. Each generally has a label expensive covering material (cloth, or trimming operation. (320) bearing aletter or lettersindicating even vellum or leather),thethree- throwing colors. See: DROPPING COLORS. the arrangement. The index proceeds quarter binding may have been de- throw out. A map, table, diagram, etc., from head to tail and front to back veloped simplyasa new style.In designed to be consulted regardless of of the volume. The maximum number the eyes of many, it is a style that ap- the page of the text the reader is con- of thumb cuts, and therefore the num- pears badly proportioned on the sides. sulting.Itis done by means of an ber of letters represented by each, de- 2. In stationery (blankbook) binding, extended guard (the size of the leaf pends on the height and thickness of a three-quarter binding is one having of the book), to which the map, etc., the book. The thumb index isused a spine of Russia leather, with leather is attached at the outer edge. If the principally for Bibles and dictionaries. corners extending over the edges, a map is to be folded, a compensation The cuts are usually made by a ma- spring-backandraisedbands,tar guard may be required to compensate chine designed for the purpose. Also board sides covered with cloth, and for the thickness of the map. The map called "cut-in index." (264) gold lettering on the spine. See also: and its guard are usually printed on thymol. A colorless, crystalline compound QUARTER BINDING. (256) paper that differs from that of the (C101-113 OH), obtained from origa- three-quarter leather. A term applied spe- text. (156, 339) num and other oils, or prepared syn- cifically to a book having the spine throw up. The rising up or buckling of theticallybythehydrogenationof and part of the sides, as well as en- the spine of a book when it is opened. piperidine, obtained from Eucalyptus larged corners, covered with leather, Itisa characteristic of the HOLLOW dives and E. piperita. Thymol is very and the remainder of the sides covered BACK, and because of it the leaves lie slightly soluble in water, and is soluble with cloth or paper. The leather on the flatterthantheyordinarilywould. in alcohol and chloroform. Itis used sides extends almost to the corners, "Throw up" is especially important in as a preservative in paste and also as i.e., much more than in the case of a librarybinding,wherethesewing, a fungicide.It can be applied as a HALF LEATHER BINDING. See also: QUAR- which is usually oversewing,isrela- solution in alcohol or vaporized for TER LEATHER; THREE-QUARTER BIND- tively tight and inflexible. See also: use as a fungicide. (237) ING. SPRING-BACK (1). tide marks. Markings on the grain sur- three times the width method. A form of thumbhole, A semi-circular or triangular face of a leather caused by paste soak- the HOLE OW consisting of a length of cut in the sides of a slipcase designed ing through from the flesh side in areas which happen to be thinner or more porous than others. Tide marks gen- THROW OUT erally occur only when the grain side has not been moistened or has been inadequately moistened. (204) tidying. A 19th century practice of issu- ingpaper-boardedandcloth-cased books untrimmed, but with the longest leaves trimmed or "tidied" to the gen- eral level of the other leaves. Early in the 19th century, this was done with trimming shears which were fixed to the press; however, by about 1830 the shears had been superseded by trim- ming knives. This type of trimming was also done in the better binderies. usually in combination with a gilt top, (236) tied down (tied bands). A simple binding ornamentation consisting of lines im- pressed along either side of each raised band, which continued onto, and were joined part way across, the sides. A small floral or leaf design was used to terminate the lines. The lines were either in gilt or blind and were exe- 9 Ave tie down 265 titanium dioxide

cuted with a pallet. The decoration is boarded books had tightbacks and book. The technique is used frequently derived from the early technique of boards that were laced in this practice in edition binding.See also:SELF-END- TYING DOWN the bands. Also called continued from the 1770s, when the PAPERS. (365) "ties." (156) style was first used, until the 1820s, tipped in. A separately printed illustra- tie down. The stitch which iscarried when casing-in was introduced. Others tion, etc., cut to the size of the leaf under the kettle stitch when working had tight backs until the late 1830s, of a book and pasted along the inner headbands. Its purpose is to secure the when "boards" more or less passed out margin of the appropriate text page band solidly to the text block.(83, of existence. prior to gathering. Such an illustration 335) The tight back was revived in craft is said to be a "paste in." Tipping is ties. 1.Tapesorribbons, sometimes bookbinding, at least to a certain ex- a time-consuming, and therefore costly, made of leather, and usually in pairs, tent, by T. J. Cobden-Sanderson and aspect of book production. (140) attached to the sides of a book close to Douglas Cockerel!, who influenced a tipping (tipping in).1. The process of theforeedge,and occasionallyat host of amateur fine binders for several pasting the edges of a sectio.1 to ad- head, tail, and fore edge, and designed decades. jacent sections.2. The operation of to prevent the covers from warping or The objectiontothetightback, tipping on an INSET (2) around or in gaping. They often consisted of linen, other than the fact thatitis a more a larger section. (58, 320) about 3/4inch wide, and were gener- expensivetechnique,isthatifthe tipping front and back. The process of ally of a drab green color, although leaves of the book are relatively thick placing a narrow line of adhesive on brown and blue were alsousedat in relation to their area, they will not the sides of a sewn pamphlet near the times.Tieswereusuallythreaded lie flat by themselves, but, because of spine, for the purpose of securing the through a hole (not a slot)in the the inflexibility of the spine, will tend cover of the publication along the sides board and, on the .inside of the cover, to open like a fan. This tendency may instead of simply at the spine, which the end was frayed out and attached be lessened by having the grain direc- may have insufficient surface area to to the leather turn-in. They were fre- tion of the paper run parallel to the hold the cover securely. However, it quently used on fine bindings from spine. In addition, some bookbinders is usually necessary to score the covers about 1530 to 1640, and elaborate silk objectto thetight back becauseit at the edge of the line of adhesive, ties were used on Bibles and devo- causes the leather on the spine to flex otherwise thereisthe riskthat the tional books well into the 18th cen- every time the book is opened, which cover paper will break at the adhesive tury. Their use today islargelyre- can cause cracking of the gold tooling line. 2. The process of attaching end- stricted to portfolios.See also:CLASPS. on the spine. papers in edition binding. (142) 2. See: TIED DOWN. (94, 236) Also called "fast back." (83, 236) tipping machine. A machine used for glu- tight back. A book which has the cover- tight fit. The case of a book which is too ing plates or endpapers to sections of ing material, usually leather, glued di- small for the text block, resulting in a book. In the usual case, the sections rectly to the spine or to the (leather) a tendency for the covers to gape. It and endpapers are fed into the ma- lining on the spine. is caused by an error in the measure- chine, edged with adhesive along the Inthe early days of the English ment of the boards resulting in an binding edge, and pressed together. A codex, the leather cover was not at- INLAY (1) that is too narrow, with the plate is generally tipped along the left tached directly to the spine, nor, for consequence that the covering material or right edge and pressed onto the that matter, was the spine glued up at on the spine is not the full width of leaf. (156, 343) all. Aside from these early bindings, the spine. tips.Tinycorners,usuallyof vellum however, as wellas limp (vellum) tight joint.See:CLOSED JOINT. when leather is used on the spine, and bindings and some vellum-covered sta- tinny. An expression used to describe a employed mainly by French book- tionery bindings, the use of the tight leather thatis "empty," i.e.,lacking binders. back was virtually universal until the in substance, and weak. The defect is tissued plate.See:BARRIER SHEET. times of the Deromes in France(see: caused when BATING is carried too far, tissue papers. A class of papers, made in DEROME STY! E). It was at this time resultingin excessive "digestion"of basis weights lighter than 18 pounds that the Hot Low BACK began to be the collagen of the leather. (291) (24 X 36 500). These papers are used in France. tip. 1. The thinnest available MILLBOARD made on any type of papermaking ma- Until about the last quarter of the (1). It is used in some instances for chine, from any type of pulp, including 18th century,it was not unusual to makingthe SPRING-BACK(1)ofa reclaimed paper stock, and may be line the spines before covering, and blankbook,astheinner boards of glazed or unglazed. Some tissues are bindings that did not have raised bands SPLIT BOARDS, and to a considerable relatively transparent.See also:BAR- were often lined with three or more extent as a lining board. 2. A thin, flat RIER SHEET. layers of paper, or, at times, canvas. brush consisting of a relatively small titanium dioxide. A white compound, the Craft bookbinders in17th and 18th number of camel or squirrel hairs fixed oxide of titanium(Ti02).Itoccurs century Francegenerallylinedthe between two pieces of card. It is used naturally in therutile,anatase, and spines of books with strips of parch- by some gilders for picking up gold brookite crystalline forms. The rutile ment manuscripts which overlapped leaf and placing it on the surface to form is used in the manufacture of the joints and were pasted down under be gilded. 3.See:TIP-ON. (97, 159, pigmented paper coatings, while the the endpapers.See:SPINE LINING (1). 233) anatase form is used as a filler pigment The use of the tight back declined tip-on. A leaf that has been pasted onto in paper manufacture. Both types (as dramatically after about 1820, except the stub of another leaf, e.g., a CANCEL used in papermaking) are important by fine binders who often used it along (1). because of their whiteness, high bright- with falseraised bands.See:MOCK fipped endpapers. Endpapers tipped onto ness, and high refractive index (2.52 FI EXIBI E. Similarly, all so-called the first and last sections (leaves) of a to 2.76),allof which resultsina dtanium potassium oxalate 266 tortoise shell

paperofimprovedbrightnessand MOROCCOleathers.Seealso:VEGE- toolingleaf.See: ALUMINUM LEAF; opacity. (17, 235) TABLE TANNINS. (175) DUTCH GOLD; GOLD LEAF; PLATINUM titaniumpotassiumoxalate. A white, toggling. The operationofstretching LEAF; SILVER LEAF. crystalline substance (K2TiC205 damp leather and securing it in place tooth. A characteristic of the grain sur- 2H20), thatissoluble in water.It for drying in a smooth and stretched face of various papers. Tooth is often precipitates vegetable tannin materials condition by means of toggles, which a result of the wove marks impressed and acts as a mordant with the dyes are metal clamps equipped with jaws on the underside of the web of paper and dyewoods used in coloring leather. to grip the leather and prongs to hold by the Fourdrinier wire of the paper- (306) it in place in a slotted metal frame. See making machine, but it may also be title.1. The inscription printed on the also: TACKING. (363) caused by very small depressions be- title page of a book or other publica- toluene. A colorless, refractive, aromatic tween fibers or groups of fibers in the tion, and usually intended to describe liquid hydrocarbon (C7H8), obtained surface of the paper, or by the impres- the contents of the publication. In its from coal-tar light oil by cracking, by sion of the mesh of the felt fabric on broadest use, it includes the sub-title, heating toluic acid with lime, and by the web of paper as it travels through alternative title, or associated descrip- other processes. It is used as a solvent the press rolls. Tooth is a characteristic tive matter, but not the author and/or to remove pressure sensitive tape from of low finish in drawing papers, and is editor, translator, etc., unless the name paper, in finishing leather, and in re- characteristic of virtually all handmade forms a gramatically inseparable part moving grease from leather. (173, 235) papers. The"tooth,"meaningthe of the title. See also: BINDER'S TITLE; tongue and slot. One of the techniques roughness of apaper, expressesits COVER TITLE (1). 2. In hand binding, used to attach the covers to a book. ability to take pencil and crayon writ- usually the space or panel between the The tongue is formed by covering the ing or drawing. Also called BITE (2). first two raised bands (from the head) spine of the book and carrying the (17, 316) on the spine of a book, on which the leather onto the waste sheet of the top. 1. See: HEAD (1-4). 2. The felt side titleis lettered. (156, 183, 241) endpapers, together with the spine lin- of a machine-made paper. 3. The side titled. See: PIECED (1). ing and slips. The leather or cloth of superior quality of boards composed title leather. A highly polished, very thin hinges are also glued to the same sheet. of different grades of stock. See also: SKIVER attached to the title panel of The laminated flange(tongue)thus TOP OF THE HIDE. a book, and lettered with the title of formed is cut to shape to fit a slot (not top combs. See: MARBLING COMBS. the book. See also: LABEL. (264) unlike an enclosed split board) cut top cover. See: UPPER COVER. title mounted. A title page that has be- into the back edge of the board. The top edge gilt. The head edge of a book come frayed or otherwise damaged, board is then covered and finished in which has been cut smooth and gilded. and has been mounted on another leaf whatever manner is required, separate The other two edges, which are not to preserve it. (169) from the book, and is attached to it gilded, may be cut smooth, trimmed title page. In the usual case the recto of by gluing the tongue into the slot. The slightly,orleftuncut.Abbreviated the second leaf of a book, displaying entire assembly is then pressed to in- or "g.t.e " Also called "gilt top." the full title, the sub-title (if any), and sure proper adhesion. See also: TRIMMED BEFORE SEWING. usually the name of the author, the The tongue and slot techniqm is said (69) edition, the publisher and date of pub- to offer the following advantages: 1) lication (sometimes the date is printed the boards can be finished, e.g., doub- top finished. A leather which has been on the verso of the same leaf). The luresattached, more easilyoffthe given a final coating of a finish for the verso may also give particulars of the book; 2)largeand/or very heavy purpose of impartingspecialprop- edition, i.e., the printer (and perhaps books can be handled more easily; 3) erties, such as gloss, level color, fast- his address), the binder, specifications more than one skin can be used in cov- ness to wet rubbing, water resistance. etc. (61) of type and paper, registration of copy- ering; 4)adesign which callsfor right, as well as (in the United States) blocking the covers can be handled top margin. The area between the top the Library of Congress card number, with greater facility; 5) attachment of line of print and the upper edge of the ISBN number, and CIP information. the covers in this manner facilitates re- leaf. See also: MARGIN (1 ). (156) In cases where more than one page moval by a future restorer for work on top of the hide. The finestgrade of giving particulars of the title are pres- the text block; and 6)at least part leather used for the covering of a book. ent. that giving the fullest information of the original bookbinder's design can Literally, it means the area of the skin is the title page. (156) be preserved if and when a more or on the top, i.e., the back of the animal. title roll. See: ROLL (1 ). less complete restoration of the book This seldom used expression is some- tizra. A vegetable tanning material ob- is required. (311) what inaccurate in that, although the tained from the roots and heartwood toning. The process of reducing the shade best part of a hide or skin is located of a shrub or small tree, Rims penta- (whiteness) of a document or leaf as on the back, the very best is found in phylla. occurring throughout the west- nearly as possible to its original color the butt area of the back. (164) ern part of North Africa. The heart- following washing and/or deacidifica- torn paper designs. A collage technique wood may be expected to produce 20 tion. The "toner" may be the gelatin of decorating a binding, using designs to 23% tannin, while the roots may size itself, which will reduce whiteness produced by tearing paper into shapes have a tannin content as high as 28 to to a slight extent, or, if a greater ton- and pasting them to the covers of the 29%. Tizra, which is of the condensed ing effect is required, a surface active book. ( 183 ) class of tannins, closely resembles QUE- (cationic) vegetable dye in very dilute tortoise shell. A cover sprinkle executed BRACHO bothin chemical properties solution may be used. (154, 235) by washing the leather with yellow dye and tanning qualities. It has long been tooling. See: BLIND TOOI ING; FINISHING and, when dry, sprinkling heavily with used in Morocco inthe tanning of (1); GOLD TOOLING. black. When thisis dry the cover is tortoise shell covers 267 Trautz, Georges

then spotted with blue, red and black. tranchf;lle ch3piteau. A type of double (154, 280) pared by first executing the usual TREE HEADBAND of French origin. (115) CALF, placing an oval of paper on each tortoiseshellcovers. A17thcentury transfer binder. See: POST BINDER. cover,andblackeningthecovers technique which used tortoise shell to transfer box (transfer file). A box simi- around the ovals. When this color is decorate the CON. ers of a book. Addi- lar to a PAMPHLET BOX but not ofas dry, the areas are sponged with basil tional decoration sometimes consisted sturdy construction. It is used for stor- water, and then red is thrown on in simply of a border of silver corners age of lesser used pamphlet or sheet and clasps, but more often included spots. When the red is dry, the ovals material.( 156 ) are removed and theredspots are inlays of silver and mother of pearl. transfer marble (transfer edge). See: MAR- (154, 280) washed with water. As a further em- BLE TRANSFER. bellishment, the ovals are sometimes fory, Geoffrey (1480-1533). A French transitorymaterials.Librarymaterials colored with a mixture of wine and printer, wood engraver, designer, and designated by the Library Binding In- powdered tumeric. Also called "varie- royal printer to Francis 1. For the em- stitute as being:1) materials subject gated." (95) bellishment of bindings, he designed to "normal library usage" that are com- transparentvellum. VELLUMrendered two panels in the form of arabesques plete but which may at some later date transparent by any of several proc- in the contenlporary Italian style, of be discarded and thus are not consid- which the esses, some of which date back to me- famoutt- -pot easvj device ered to be a permanent part of the li- dieval times (when vellum was some- forms a part. In his smaller stamps, brary's collection; and 2) materials not times used in lieu of window glass). only the broken pitcher appears, but subjectto normal libraryusage,so The most common method of making in his larger panel the Vase is pierced little used that completeness is not a by a wimble (gimlet, drill, vellum transparent seems to have in- auger, or factor of importance, and not consid- volved treating a wet (thin) skin with "toret"). The device apparently was ered to be part of the permanent col- fluid substances of high water-binding employed in allusion to the death of lection. For the former category. the his daughter: however, capacity, such as egg white, gum arabic, it may have L. B.I. recommends that such ma- animal glue or size, before drying the been a pun on the name Tory,al- terials be considered permanent insofar skin on the stretching frame. Other though he used the device on hisown as binding is concerned and therefore methods included smearing oliveoil publications. (94. 347) bound according to the L. B. I. stand- or cedar wood oil over both sides of total transmittance. A special form of ards; for thelatter, treatment would the skin, or steeping the skin in very TRANSMITTANCE of amaterial.Itis depend on the purpose of the library, hot water for a brief period of time. measured by means of a special in- the physical condition of the materials, strument In the 18th century EDWARDS OF HALI- designedforthepurpose. andreaderrequirements. Such ma- FAX patented a method (1785) which Totaltransmittance,inconjunction terials do not require library binding in With proved to be the simplest of all the PARALLEL. TRANSMITTANCE, IS accordance withI..B.I.standards; methods. He soaked ordinary vellum in usefulin determining the degree of however,CertifiedLibraryBinders a weak solution of potassium carbo- transparency of atransparent paper. (L. B.I. members), will either de- nate(pearlash)and.stretchingit ( 17) velop a type of binding meeting the t tightly, placed the skin under consid- pattern. A pattern on a book cloth library'sparticularrequirements,or erable pressure. (236, 291) consisting of longitudinal regular ridges bind according to the specifications for transverse porosity. See: LATERAL POR- and valleys.( 256) lesser used materials. See: 1UMSPECS. OSITY. . A paper used for dupli- (208) cating drawings, figures, Trani z, Georges (1808-1879). A German etc.Itmay' translucency. The propertyofpartial bookbinder who emigrated to Paris in be eitheratranslucent,greaseproof transparency that indicates the ability paper. or a bond or manifold paper 1830 and entered the employ of An- of a material to transmit strongly scat- toineBauzonnet.Bindingsproduced treated chemically. or oiled.so as to tered light waves. A translucent ma- increase in Bauzonnet's workshop before 1848 itstransparency.Itispro- terial admits light but does not trans- were signed Bauzonnet-Trautz. It was ducedfromcottonfiber,chemical mit sharp images. (17) possibly inthis year that Trautz as- wood pulps, or combinations thereof, transmittance. The fraction of incident sumed control of the bindery, changed in basis weights ranging from 71.4to light that can be seen through a ma- the name to Trautz-Bauzonnet, and 16 pounds (17 X 22 500). Important terial. The fraction actually has mean- rapidly became one oftheleading properties include proper receptivityto ing only when the nature of the inci- bookbinders of 19th century France. drawing ink and transparency,so that dentlightandthedesignofthe Many of the books, which are excep- prints from the tracings can be made. measuringinstrumentarespecified. (17, 316) tionally well bound, are in the style See also: PARALLEL TRANSMITTANCE: of JOSEPH THOUVENIN. The forward- trade binding. Plain calfskinor sheep- TOTAL TRANSMITTANCE. ( 17 ) ing is good, the tooling delicate. and skin bindings issued by publishers in transparency. That property of a ma- thematerialsexcellent.Manyof England from the15th to the 18th terial which permits the passage of Trautz's tools were modelled on the centuries. They were rarelylettered. light. The more transparent the ma- (236) work of previous binders, and he was terial, the more clearly objects can be highly successful in incorporating the traditional format. A term usedocca- seen on the other side. (17) styles of such bookbinders (or gilders) sionally to indicate the format ofsome transparency ratio. One of the measures as Le Gascon, Padeloup. and Derome. Oriental books, consisting of doUble of TRANSPARENCY ( 1 )being the ra- fact, he was one of the most impor- leaves with the folds at the fore edge tio of parallel transmittance tototal tant of the RETROSPECTIVE BINDERS. and with the free edges serving as the transmittance, and generally expressed Trautz always varied his designs. so binding edge. (156) as a percentage. (17) that no two bindings were alike. In tragacanth. See: (WM TRAGACANT H. transparent marble. A cover marble pre- addition. aside from being an excellent tree calf 268 trimming

craftsman in gold tooling, he wasan tually passed from existence. The first theproperregistrationintwo-side expert in the art of inlaying. See: PLATES known tree calf decoration dates from printing, as well as folding. Abbrevi- VI, VII, VIII. (94, 140) about 1775. See: PL ATE V.(83, 94, ated T4S. (269) tree calf (tree marble). A form ofcover 236. 264) decorationconsistingofa trimmed in the round. A book thatis smooth. trial binding. A term descriptive ofa trimmed after rounding. Books that light-coloredcalfskin treatedwith tentative cover design for a book sub- chemicals in sucha manner asto are to be gilded on all three edges are mitted to the publisher by the pub- sometimes trimmed in this manner to represent a tree trunk with branches. lisher's (edition) binder. Such bindings facilitatethe work of the In In the usual manner, a dual design have been produced regularly since the gilder. appears on upper and lower covers. order totrim thefore edgeinthe early days of edition cloth bindings. round, the round must first be removed The leather isfirst paste-washed, and Today, thebindingsaregenerally temporarily by forcing the spine against the book is then hung between two dummies made up of blank leaves. rods which keep the covers flat. The the guide of the cutting machine, or See: DUMMY (1). In the 19th century, by the use of TRINDLES, if the book book is tilted so that it inclines upward however, finished copies were often has laced-onboards andistobe towards its head. In order to bend the used, as there are examples of books boards outwards, i.e., warp slightly to trimmed with the plow. It is very diffi- with identicalcontents butdifferent cult and frequently impossible to re- a concave shape, so that the solutions bindingsfromthat oftheversion movealloftheroundby will run properly, the insides of the offered for sale. Some publishers used either boards are not filled in until the deco- method. If the book is to be trimmed trial bindings to fulfill copyright obli- in the guillotine, the concave fore edge rationisdone. A small amount of gations or gave them as free copies to water is applied to the center of both the author. (69) is filled in with CHIPBOARD to keep the covers to form the trunk, then more paper from breaking away when the triethanolamine. One oftheetbanola- headandtailare water is thrown on the covers so that mines trimmed.Cf: ((HOC1-12CH1s1),usedin TRIMMED IN THE SQUARE. (339) it runs down to the trunk and toa conjunction with fatty acids to produce central point at the lower edge of the fine, stable emulsions of oils and waxes trimmed in the square. The mostcom- boards. Copperas (a green hydrated in water. It is used in the manufacture mon method of cutting a sewn book, ferrous sulfate)isthen sprinkled in o leather. (262) in which the edges are trimmed be- fine drops on the covers, followed by trim.1. A term applied to the w idest fore the book is rounded. In cuttirg potassium carbonate (salts of tartar), sheet of machine-made paper, trimmed the head and tail,the spine of the which causesthecbemicalreaction of its deckle edges, that can bepro- hook is placed in the cutter against the that etches the leather to forma per- duced on a given papermaking ma- guide so as to avoid breaking pieces manent pattern in shades of gray, rang- chine. 2. To cut a sheet of paper toan out of the folds. If there is much sew- ing from faint to very dark. Calfskin exact size. 3. The paper that is trimmed ing swell in the spine, it may he neces- was used for this decoration in prefer- off of the edges of a leaf, or group of sary to built! under the clamp of the ence to she :pskin (although 19th cen- leaves of a book. 4. To cut the edges cutter to compensate for theswell, tury examples of sheepskintree do of a leaf, or group of leaves ofa book. otherwise the book may slip under the exist) because in addition to beinga 5. The operation of cutting off the clamp because of the shearing action much superior leather, it takesa bet- bleeds or bolts of a book. 6. The ex- of the guillotine knife. Cf: TRIMMED ter polish, which suits this style of dec- cess of paper allowed around a printed IN THE ROUND. (339) oration admirably. sheet for bleeds. (12, 17) trimmed size. The final dimensions ofa The spine of the book is protected trimmed.I.Paperwhichhasbeen sheet of paper or the text block ofa during the marbling so that it will not trimmed on one or more sides to in- book. (156) be touched by the water or chemicals. sure exactness of corner angles and to trimming.1. The operationinwhich The entire process calls for consider- reduce the sheet to the size required. able experience and dexterity of bound books and other printedma- exe- 2. A book which has had oneor more terials are reduced to their final size cution, because if the result is to be of its edges cut in the guillotine, three- effective the copperas and potassium before casing or attachment of the knife trimmer, or with the plow,so boards. Trimming a book removes the carbonate must be applied in the cor- that they are smooth, even and solid. folds at head and fore edge (bolts), rect amounts, as well as in the proper Usually all three edges are so cut, but thus freeing the leaves for turning; it manner, while the initial water is still sometimes only the head edge. (156, also smooths the edges, and divides running down the covers; otherwise the 343) effect will be little more than sprin- two-up or three-up books or periodical trimmed before sewing. A hook that has issues into individual units, the latter kling. had its edges cut beforeitissewn. Late in the 19th century attempts operation usually being referred toas Trimming before sewing is a technique "splitting"or"cuttingapart,"even were made to produce the tree calf employed when the book is to be rough though it may be done as part of effectwith the use of an engraved gilt. Trimming is usually done section block, which was used to print trimming. In edition- and library-bind- a de- by section in a paper cutter,so as to ing, trimming is done after smashing sign on the covers in black, but the provide a degree of roughness if only resultswereineffective or nipping, while in hand binding it becausethe the head is to be gilt. (83) may come either before or after round- blockdidnotprovidetheshading trimmed four sides. Lifts ofpaper, usu- which the genuine method achieved. ing.See: TRIMMED IN THE ROUND; allyprinting paper, thathave been TRIMMED IN THE SQUARE. In the manu- The popularity of tree calf beganto trimmed in the guillotineon all four decline before the First World War, facture of cut flush books, the book sides. This is done becausepaper as and covers are trimmed together, and, and by the late 1920s thisonce very it comes from the papermaking mill popular form of decoration had vir- as most paperback books and periodi- is not uniform in size as required for calissuesare withinthiscategory. 2 {- trirmning out 269 Turkey papers

trimming is,in such cases, the final "third" lining. In some cases the head- step in binding. paper is sized as it travels through the bands are glued to the crepe manila papermaking machine. Sometimes a set Many devices are used for trimmirg lining and a second cloth lining is glued books, of horizontally oriented rollsis used including the GUILLOTINE, over the first, the crepe manila then and the size solution is then pumped PLOW, THREE-KNIFE TRIMMER, knife, becoming the third lining. This is un- into the "valley" created on both sides shears, or even a chisel. One of the usual,however,as two consecutive earliest methods was to cut each leaf of the paper. 1 he tub-size pressis cloth linings are seldom encountered designed for relatively heavy applica- separately(inalllikelihoodbefore in bookbinding. (140) tions of size to paper. oee also:SUR- sewing) and probably with shears in- triple liner and headbanding machire. An stead of a knife and straight edge. FACE-SIZE PRESS. (17 ) edition binding machine used forap- tuck. A flap on the edge of a book cover The Library Bindir g Institute speci- plying the spine linings and headbands designed to be inserted into the edge fies that when volumes are trimmed, to a book. The machine receives the of the other cover. Its purpose is to the trimming shall be as slight as pos- books from the rounding and backing sible,andthat keep the covers of the book closed. The periodicalsshallbe machine and inserts them spine down extension is usually on the lower cover, trimmed to sample, or recorded size, into spring-loaded pockets bymeans of and tucks into a slit in the upper. The where possibleotherwise, as slightb a formed lifting bar corresponding to as possible. In practice, the standard tuck was a common feature of the the shape of the spines of the book bindings of mid-19th century Bibles trim in library binding is inch at being processed. When the bookis head, tail, and fore edge. and prayer books, althoughitwas properly oriented in the pocket, the rarely used for the larger sizes. See 2 In leather manufacture, the proc- machine then applies one cloth and one ess of cutting away unwanted or un- also:CLASPS; WAI.LET EDGE.(274) or two paper linings, with or without tumbling drum. A device designed to test sightly parts of hides, skins,or the headbands. It operates at speeds up to leatheritself.(106, aspects of a binding.Itconsists of 161, 209, 236. 40 books per minute. (320) a 320, 335) revolvingoctagon-shapeddrum tripoli. An inferior grade ofESPARTO equipped with a pocket that lifts the trimming out. The operation of cleaning (GRASS),grown in North Africa. See surplus leather, cloth. book to the top of the drum and lets etc.. from the also:SPANISH. (156) it free-fall (about 2 feet) to strike the inside of the boards of a book bound triptych. An ancient hinged writing tablet by hand before filling-in lower sides. The number of impacts or pasting consisting of three tablets of wood, required down. Trimming out the sides of half toproducefailureofthe metal, or ivory, covered with wax on joints is recorded. The tumbling drum leather bindings before attaching the the inside surfaces, on which writing papersideswas was developed by the United States virtually unknown was done with a stylus. (156, 373) Testing Company. See also: UNIVERSAL. until approximately the middle of the true skin. A term used in the leather ROOK TESTER. 19th century, consequently the edges trade to denote the derma or corium of tumeric. A yellow or saffron coloring of the leather spine and cornersare a hide or skin. ragged, and the raggedness is usually material prepared form the roots of the trypsin. A crystalline proteinase produced East Indian perennial herh, Curcunla emphasized by the abrasion and dark- in the pancreas of an animal and used ening of the paper over the humps. longa, and used in dyeing andas a inBATINGhides and skins. It is usually coloring material for certain marbles. Not until about the 1870s, whensu- obtained fromthepancreas ofthe See also:TRANSPARENT MARBLE. perior craftsmanship was appliedto sheep or pig. (306) some half leather bindings, did trim- Turkey leather. A vague and obsoleteex- t. s. Abbreviation for TunSIZED,tub siz- pression used variouslyattimesto ming out become customary, except in ing, orTYPESCRIPT. indicate a leatherperhaps economy bindings. The outside finish an early tub. The stand which supports theLYING moroccoor for the color of leather, of half bindings was also impr:wed by PRESS,and also catches the shavings "filling-in" with a layer or layers of for instance, Turkey red,a brilliant from thePLOW. madder red usedinthe dyeing of paper under the marbled paperor tub sized. Paper that has been sized by cotton. (69) cloth sides, making them level with passing the web through a size press, the leather. (236, 335) Turkey marble. A vein marble featuring or by dipping the waterleaf sheet into a white streaks, and executed by dropping trimming to recorded size. A volume, tub of size by hand, or by carrying it blue color on a weak size of sprinkling usuallyaperiodical,thathas been through the size bath between two felts, trimmed to the extent that the bound water (which allows the blue to ex- which are either perforated or have an pand), followed by green sprinkledon volume is of the same heightas that open weave so as to allow the excess of previously hound volumes of the the blue. The ox-gall used to produce size to run off during passing through the white veins is then sprinkledon the run. See:MATCHING SETS. the squeeze rolls. Most papers of high trindles. The U-shaped pieces of metal blue and green, followed by the ground or rag content are tub sized and the sizine color in large drops. Also called "stone wood placed between the cords and the issometimes done with the use of marble." (161) boards at the spine of a book tore- 100% animal gelatin, followed by air move the round, and thus flatten the Turkey morocco. I. Reputedly,a strong, drying. If done properly, a tub-sized durable leather produced in the 18th spine when the book is to beTRIMMED paper is stronger than a similar paper century in Turkey from goatskin, with IN THE ROUND. (161) that is internally sized. (17, 156, 198) the characteristic MOROCCO grain. 2. A triple lining. A procedure for lining the tub-size press. A sizing device that isusu- spine of a book, generally used for term applied tj a leather, frequently ally part of the papermaking machine. produced from calfskin, embossed with higher quality edition bindings. The It is essentially a vat (tub) whichcon- a hard grain or bold cross grain in triple lining consists of the customary tains the size, and a set of vertically imitation of a Turkey morocco. (129, cloth lining, a crepe manila lining, and oriented rolls, the lower part of the 264) the headbands, which representthe unit heing immersed in the size. The Turkey papers. An early name for marbled turnaround time 270 tying up

papers, so called because at one time it right angle fold, another parallel fold isglued on, this method gives "two was thought that the art of marbling and insetting the second within the on and one off" or "one on and two was introduced into Europe by way of first. Also written 24mo or 24°. off." Variations of this technique may Turkey. ( 236 ) twin-wire paper. A type of duplex paper be achieved by increasing the width turnaround time. The time interval (or produced by forming two webs of of the kraft paper to give "two on and time required) between the pick-up of paper and then uniting them wire side two off," "two on and three off," etc. unbound books from the library, in- inward so that the resulting sheet has See also: SPINE LINING (1). (236) cluding loading and unloading, and two felt (top) sides. This type of paper two page spread. See: DOUBLE SPREAD their return to the library. The com- is said to give superior results in offset (1). monly stated turnaround time for li- printing. (17, 140, 156) two sheets on. See: TWO ON. brary binding is anywhere from four twisted pineapple. A decorative ornament two-shot method. A method of applying to six weeks. found on several English and French adhesive in high speed paperback (ad- turn-ins.1. The extra length and width rolls, and consisting* of twisted stems hesive) binding. The adhesive binding of the covering material of a book interrupted at intervals by conventional machine appliesapolyvinyl(cold) overlapping the head,tail,and fore pineapples. (250) adhesive as a primer followed by a hot- edge of the cover, and turned over the two-letter index. An INDEX consisting of melt adhesive. It is not as fast a method edges of the board and glued to the thirteen divisions of twc letters each. as the ONE-SHOT METHOD (1), but it inside surface. In leather binding, the If Mac is used, two other letters, usu- results in a stronger hinge and good leather is usually pared around these ally I and X are omitted, or I, J, and cover adhesion. See also:ADHESIVE edges so as to make it thinner on the K are combined and X is omitted. (82) BINDING. (179, 294) inside of the boards. The extent of the two-line tool. A roll or fillet with two two sided sheet. A term used with refer- turn-in varies according to the SQUARES lines of designs, or two plain lines (in ence to the difference in shade and/or of the book, the taste of the times, or the case of the fillet), on the circum- texture between the felt and wire sides the judgment of the binder.Z. The ference. (335) of a sheet of paper. The term is gen- extensions of a book jacket which fold two-on. A method of sewing a book by erallyappliedto dyed papers,and over the fore edges of covers of a book hand in which two sections are sewn usually refers to a difference in the and in over the inside of the covers. on a single length of thread from kettle depth of color, with the felt side being (82, 156) stitch to kettle stitch. After the first (or darker and the wire side lighter. Two- turning-in steel. A thin length of steel first two or three) section is sewn ALL sidedness in paper may also be pro- about 8 inches long and 21/2inches ALONG, two sectionsatatime are duced by using a mixed furnish, e.g., wide, rounded at the ends, and used to placed in the sewing frame, and the long- and short-fibered stock, the short turn in and rub down die cloth when sewing alternates from section to sec- fibers (as they are lighter) being on making cases by hand. (264) tion. There are several techniques of the top or felt side and the long fibers turpentine. A light, volatile essential oil sewing two on,a common method on the bottom or wire side. Another obtained as an exudate from coniferous being to alternate from one section to form of thetwo-sided sheetisthe trees. Turpentine is a mixture of cyclic the next at each cord. Whatever the filled paper, in which more pigment terpene hydrocarbons.Itisusedin method used, two sections receive as isretained on the top side of the place of ox-t,allin the execution of many stitches as does one in the all sheet. (17, 98) stormont marbles. (335, 368) along method, and when sewing on five two up.1. A method of imposing and twelvemo. A sheet folded to form 12 cords, alternating sections received two processing two books (or periodical leavesor 24pages.Although two and three stitches, respectively. issues)as a single unit,all the way parallel folds followed by two right Sewing two-on was quite common from p;inting form through all of the angle folds will produce this gathering, until the last quarter of the 19th cen- binding processes. The two books or the more common method is to print tury, at which time sewing machines issues are separated at the trimming the sheet 12 up on each side, and then began to be used in trade (edition) station during binding. See also: THREE cut the sheet into 2 sheets of 8 and 4 binding. Even the thinnest books were tie. 2. The process of printing two texts, leaves. The larger sheet if folded three sewn two-on, not so much to reduce or duplicate stereos made from the times, and the smaller twice, the latter sewing swell as to reduce costs. Sewing same form, side by side on the same being insetted. The insetted section may two-on today is used in fine binding sheet of paper. It is an economical way be given a sub-signature, e.g., B1 or only to reduce swell. Also called "two of printing short runs. (156, 320) B*, which the binder notes when bind- sheets on" and "off and on." See also: tying down. One of the steps employed ing the book. If the printer imposes 2 THREE ON. (94, 236, 335) in working headbands. The thread used rows of 6 pages (on each side), the two on and one off. A form of the in forming the headband is taken down result is known as "long twelves," but HOLLOW, consisting of the basic cloth the spine to a point beneath the kettle if 3 by 4, "short" or "square" twelves. lining applied directly to the spine of stitch and then back up to be wound Where the width of the leaf is greater the book followed by a strip of heavy around the core of the headband once thantheheight,theterm"broad kraft paper three times the width of the again. The purpose is to anchor the twelves" is used. Also written 12mo or rounded spine gluedtothislining, headband solidly to the spine. In the 12°. See also: OBLONG. overlapping the spine on one side only. early days of headbanding, tying down twenty-fourmo. A sheet folded to form The overlapping part is folded back on was done in the center of each section; 24 leaves or 48 pages. There are sev- itself even with the joint, slid off the today, however, itis usually done at eral methods of producing a 24mo, spine, and then folded over to make a every three or fotr sections and even one of the most common being to fold tube. This is replaced on the spine and then not always in the center. (236) twosheets(separately)withtwo the superfluous paper is trimmed off. tying up. The technique of wrapping parallel folds in thirds, followed by a Depending on the way the hollow cord tightly around a book from spine

2 QAL tying-up boards 271 typography

to fore edge, one cord on either side the sides and fore edges of the leather e.g., !Opt., 12pt.in which the parti- of each raised band. Tying up is done of a book during TYING UP. (237) cular design is made. Type faces are subsequenttocovering,itspurpose type.1. A small rectangular block of available in hundreds of designs, sizes, being to make the leather adhere se- metal or wood, usually the former, cut and weights. (157, 234) curely to the sides of the bands. The on its top with a raised letter, figure, or type font. See: FONT. term is also applied to the process of other character, for use in letterpress type metal. An alloy of tin, lead, anti- tying cord from head totailat the printing, or in a letteringpallet for mony, and sometimes copper, used for spine so as to pinch the headcaps. letteringthe spine ofa book. The casting type. 2. The handle or pallet nomenclature of a single piece of type letters used by bookbinders, which are for letterpress work has always been usually made of brass. (156, 278) compared to a headless human being type pallet. See: LETTERING PALLET (1). standing erect: a body, a face, beard, typescript. A copy of a work in type- neck, shoulder, back, belly and feet. written form, as distinguished from one Type lettersare formed with three thatisprintedor handwritten. Ab- imaginary lines:the "baseline" on breviated t. s. which the bases of capitals rest, the type size. The measure of the dimensions "mean line" along the top of lower-case of type, taken from the body of the letters which do not have ascenders, individual type rather than from the and the "cap line" across the top of the actual printing area. (179, 365) capital letters.2. A number of such typewriter paper. Often a good quality characters. (156, 189) paper, usually a bond cut to 81/2 by 11 typJ area. The area, usually a vertical inches. It receives the usual bond finish rectangle, or a page of a book, or other and has no special surface other than publication, which is, or will be, filled the customary bond paper texture. The with printed matter. (156) quality of typewriter paper varies con- Tying up, which represented the first type face. 1. The printing surface of the siderably, with higher grades containing effort to mold the leather around the upper end of a piece of type which up to 25% cotton fiber content. (17) raised bands, was first used in the early bears the character to be printed or typography. The art or process of print- 13th century. Tne technique seems to impressed. 2. The style, or design, of ing from movable type, as in LETTER- coincide more or less with the first use characters on a set typee.g., Times PRESS PRINTING. of thegroove method of attaching Romanand comprising all the sizes boards. Virtuallyall books sewn on raised cords were "tied up" until early in the19th century. Although BAND TYING UP NIPPERS are now used in lieu of tying up, the practice is still employed in the restoration of pre-19th centuryrare books, primarily to give the appearance of the binding technique of the times. That tying up declinedafter the early 19th century was probably due to several factors, including:I )leather in trade binding was replaced by cloth: 2) sewing on raised cords itself de- clined; and 3) standards of finishing in fine binding were improving and neater work could be done without the use of cords, and, in any event, tying up was unnecessary if the leather was properly prepared and drawn on. Large books were (and still are) tied up, especially when the covering leather is intractable, e.g., pigskin. Indenting of the leather on the fore edge of thc boards is prevented by the use of specially shaped wooden boards. See TYING-UP BOARDS. As an alternative method, millboard can be bent to shape. The leather of old bindings is some- times marked by the pressure of the tying-up boards, because the cords used for large books were tied very tightly. (173, 236, 335) tying-up boards. Thin, sturdy boards with right-angle projections, used to protect ultramarine 272 unhairing

ultramarine. A blue pigment occurring most of the examples of this type of naturally in small amounts as the min- leather in bookbinding are the skins of eral lapiz lazuli, and manufactured in wild animals. (332) very large amounts. Itisa complex underbands. See: BANDS (2). silicate of sodium and aluminum. Ul- unfinished. 1. A book of which only part tramarine is used as a mineral coloring was published,the remainder never agent in the manufacture of paper and having been completed or published. leather. (60, 235) 2. A completely forwarded volume that ultrasonics. Vibrations with frequencies has not been tooled, blocked, or let- in the range of 2.0 X 105 cycles per tered. 3. A binding that has not been second. Ultrasonic vibrations may be completed. (256) generated by applying alternating elec- ungathered. The printed sheets of a book tric current to quartz, , or which may have been folded but whose Rochelle salt, or by the effect of oscil- well closed up, and has a uniform sections,iffolded,havenotbeen lating magnetism on a rod of magnetic printing surface. (17, 98) gathered into correct order. material immersed in a liquid. Ultra- unbleached sulfate pulp. A paper pulp unhairing. The beamhouse processin sonicsareusedtosealdocuments produced mainly from softwood trees leather manufacture of removing the within polyester foils by fusing. (195) containing a relatively high proportion hair (or wool) and other epidermal ultraviolet light. Electromagnetic radia- of resin,e.g.,the pines, which are structures from hides and skins,fol- tion of shorter wavelengths than visible cooked for relatively short cycles. The lowing liming (or any other prelimi- light. See: WAVELENGTHS. It has much pulp has a very low color, is relatively nary unhairing process), but before greater energy than visible radiation, shivey, and is unsuitable for bleaching tannage. Unhairing is generally con- but also much less power of penetra- because of its high chlorine require- sidered to be the second of the three tion. Ultraviolet light is capable of ini- ment. It is characterized by exceptional major beamhouse operations, the others tiating photochemical reactions, includ- strength. (17, 98) being LIMING and BATING. The term ing fading of pigments, dyes, etc., and, unbleached sulfite pulp. A tan or brown "unhairing" isperhapslimitingin being destructive to all organic matter, paper pulp that requires 2.5 to 4.5% scope, because not only does the lim- it can have a deleterious effect on such chlorine to bleach it to a suitable white ing-unhairing process loosen the hair materials as paper and leather. For- color. Characteristics expected of this and other epidermal structures, it also tunately, its poor power of penetration type of pulp include softness, absorb- cleans, loosens, and expands the dermal ency, cleanliness, and brightness. Per- (probably)reducesitslikelihood of fiber network and alters the swelling causing much damage, except on the oxideis sometimes used in a single characteristics of the skin. surface of a material. Glass is opaque stage or final stage of bleaching to gain Unhairing may be accomplished by: to ultraviolet light below 3300 A, and brightness and improve brightness sta- 1) treatment with lime (calcium hy- most other substances (quartz being a bility. (17, 98) droxide), caustic soda (sodium hy- notable exception) below 2000 A. Ex- unbound. A book that has never been droxide), barium hydroxide, sodium posure over a period of years, however, bound, i.e., a "book" in sheets, signa- carbonate, or ammonium hydroxide, conceivably could be damaging; there- tures, or gatherings. The term is some- etc.; 2)treatment with lime,asin fore, fluorescent lighting, which emits times used improperly to describe a treatment 1, sharpened by the addition more ultraviolet radiation than does book which has been PULLED for re- of sodium sulfide,sodium bisulfide, incandescent lighting, should be prop- binding. (69) antimony sulfides, or other appropriate erly filtered with ultraviolet absorbing unctuous. Leather which has a soft, full, chemicals; 3) treatment with lime, as plastic panels. (143, 198, 235) oily feel. in treatment 1, sharpened by the addi- uncut (uncut edges). The edges of a newly tion of amines, such as methylamine, umber. A natural product composed of printed book which have not been cut ordegradationproductsthemselves magnesiumsilicateandironcom- or trimmed, thus leaving the "bolts," from the skins being processed; 4) pounds, and used as a coloring pig- which must be cut before the book can treatment with aqueous buffer systems ment. The "false" umbers are brown be read. Until this is done the book is containing inorganic salts,e.g.,am- ochers produced artificially by burning said to be "unopened." In rebinding a monium sulfate, sodium chloride plus the hydrated iron earths. Burnt umber book, the term signifies that the edges enzymes with proteolytic and/or car- is the calcined raw umber. (60, 233) are left in the original uncut state, with bohydraseactivity,usuallyderived unbleached groundwood paper. A paper or without bolts as received. (93, 196) from molds, bacteria, fermenting plant manufactured from pulp produced by un-dehaired leather. A rarely encountered materials or animal tissues; 5) treat- grinding wood to a relatively fine fiber bookbinding leather, one that has been ment with aqueous soluf Ins of inor- length. The pulp is well screened to tanned in the natural state (with the ganic salts, such as potassium perchlo- eliminate shives and dirt., and possesses hair left on). Although calfskin, usu- rate,potassiumthiocyanate,sodium relatively good brightness. The paper ally a SLUNK, has been tanned in this chloride or sodium silicofluoride; 6) produced from it is relatively opaque, mannerforbookbindingpurposes, treatment with hot water, i.e., scalding;

2 3 uniformity 273 utilitarian protective binding

7) treatment with strong aqueous solu- of a rectangular test chambercon- on labels for those particular books was tionsof sodium hydroxide, sodium structed of aluminum, lined with 50 by usually stuck on at a later date. (69) sulfide, etc., i.e., pulping; 8) action of 50 mesh of No.304stainless steel wire unopened. A book whose "bolts," i.e., the bacteria, or SWEATING (1); 9)treat- 0.009inch in diameter. The chamber folded edges of the sections, have not ment with ammonia; and 10)alter- is supported and rotated by a drive been trimmed off or opened with a nating cycles of freezing and thawing shaftattached perpendiculartothe knife. The term is not to be confused in water. The last two methods are not center of its base. Viewed from the with UNCUT.(83,156) in commercial use; scalding is used only front, the drive is inclined at an angle unsewn binding. See: ADHESIVE BINDING. for certain skins, such as peccary and of20'from the horizontal, and rotates unsized paper. A paper having no sizing pigskin; andtreatmentwithstrong in a clockwise direction (at a speed of material added either during or subse- aqueous solutions of strongalkalis, 20 r.p.m.). The dimensions of the test quent to manufacture, i.e.,a WATER- e.g., sodium hydroxide, is useful only chamber vary with the size of the vol- LEAF (1 ) sheet. (17) when the tanner has no market for the ume being tested, according to the fol- unsplit. A hide or skin in its entire origi- hair. Treatment by sweating is virtually low ing table: nal thickness. See also: FULL WEIGHT. obsolete. Conventional unhairing involves loosening the hair by means of one of Test (luonber the lime solutions given above,fol- Internal 1)nension., overall Dimensions lowed by mechanical unhairing by ma- TYPe of Chanzber of rolutne to he Tested chine. The unhairing machine is similar (in Inches) (in Inches) Width Height to the fleshing machine, excePt that the Depth W idth II eight A 13 16 4 5 to 7 7 to 10 blades of the cylinder are smooth in- 15 19 4 8 to 10 10 to 13 stead of sharpened, and the machine C. 15 15 4 to 10 6 to 9 runs at a slower speed so that the spiral 111'2 13 4 4 to 7 5 to 6 blades scrape or rub the hair off with- 18 23 4 11 to 13 14 to 17 out damage to the grain surface of the hide or skin. The hairisgenerally gathered, washed,dried,baled, and Each chamber is rounded to a 11:. inch untouched (untouched edges). I. A book weighed for shipment.(248, 291, 306, radius along the sides of the bottom to whose pages have not been rubricated 363) concentrate the abrasive stresses along or illuminated. 2. The edges of a book uniformity. A term applied to the forma- the edge of the spine of the book. The thathavenotbeentrimmed,cut, tion of a sheet of paper, i.e., the regu- chamber was designed in this manner larity of fiber distribution throughout marbled, sprinkled, or decorated in any to stimulate observed patterns of wear. manner.(140 ) the sheet structure, as well as other The Universal Book Tester is said to untrimmed. A book that has not had its properties of the paper, including color produce the following results: 1) abra- edges cut smooth intheguillotine, and finish. (17) sion of the shoulder of the spine;2) plow,orthree-knifetrimmer,and unit tools. The various finishingtools impact and abrasion of the headcaps which may have unevenly projecting which have some device or design cut (if any), otherwise the edges of the leaves, generally at the head and fore on the end of a brass shank. They are head and tail of the spine;3)light edge, or fiat paper which has not been used separately or in conjunction with abrasion lf the covers (sides); 4) lim- trimmed in the guillotine or other cut- each other, as well as with line tools to ited flexing of the joints; 5) breaking ting machine. (17) form patterns. They may be "solid" or and tearing on the internal hinge; and upper cover. The top or first cover of a "line" in form, and when meant to be 6)ocesional failure of the sewing, i.e., book, or the portion of the covering of used by hand, generally do not exceed loosening of the sections and splitting a book over the front or first part. 34 by 3/4 inch in size; otherwise they of the spine. (16) upright. A book which is taller than it is become very difficuit to use. A larger unlettered. A book which has not been wide. Cf: OBLONG. tool meant to be used in a press or blockedorotherwisemarked with urea. A nitrogenous substance( (NH 1):. blocking device, is more appropriately identifying information on the spine or CO3), abundantinperspiration and called a STAMP (2). Unit tools range cover. Before about 1600, books that urine. It is readily attacked by micro- in complexity from a simple dot to were lettered at all generally had the organisms which may result in the for- very intricate lacelike designs. The use title inked or painted on the fore edge, mation of ammonia compounds detri- of unit tools has declined in recent as books were shelved fore edge out- mental to the permanence of leather. It years, primarily because of the differ- ward, and binders did not bother to is also used in the manufacture of pa- ent conception of design prevailing to- letter the spines of books. Nor did they per.(363) day, but the same principle of building bother to letter them long after the umbility. The durability of a binding in patterns from separate tools instill practice of shelving fore edge outward terms of the circulation it is likely to be valid. (66, 161) was discontinued. Possiblyitwas a capable of withstanding before rebind- universal book tester. A device designed matter of economy and perhaps the ing or replacement becomes necessary. to test the durability of several aspects PRO-SS MARK (2)suffi...ed.Labels on (16) of a binding, including the durability of spines were unusual in England before uterine vellum. See: SLUNK; VELLUM. See the covering material, the strength of about 1660, so that few books were also: PARCHMENT. the hinges, the stiffness and resistance lettered before the middle of the 17th utilitarian protective binding. See: GIRDLE to delamination of the boards, and, to century. Many owners wrote the titles BooK. a limited degree, the durability of the on paper labels or directly on the cover- sewing. The device consists essentially ing material of the books. Gilt lettering V 274 varnishing machine sarP

V. The Roman equivalent of 5.See: NON-AQUEOUS DEACIDIFICATION. (198) ROMAN NUMERALS. vapor pressure. The pressure which exists vacuum deposition. A process used for over every liquid (or solid). Inclosed coating a film or other base material. vessel, given sufficient time, equilibrium The coating materialisheated and is attained, in which as many mole- evaporated in a high vacuum and con- cules leave the liquid surface to form denses on the chilled surface of the vapor as return to it from the vapor materia1 to be coated. Blocking foils phase to form liquid. The pressure of are an example of vacuum deposition. vapor above any liquid or solid at any valence. The power of combining with temperature, when equilibrium exists, another element or radical,i.e.,the a a iscalled the vapor pressure of the number of atoms of other elements liquid or solid atthat temperatuie. with which the atoms of any one ele- (235) ment can combine directly. Hydrogen, of anothergas(usuallyhydrogen) variegatedmarble.See:TRANSPARENT for example, is univalent and therefore measured under the same conditions of MARBLE. can only become attached to one atom pressure and temperature. Vapor den- varnish. A solution of a RESIN in a sol- of another element, e.g.,it combines sity is not an integer but may be com- vent, such as turpentine, boiled linseed with chlorine, another univalent ele- pared with a value based on whole oil, etc., containing a drier, which, after ment, atom for atom, forming H-Cl mass units. (235) evaporation of the volatile constituents (hydrochloric acid). Bivalent elements, vapor permeability. That characteristic of of the vehicle and oxidization of the e.g., oxygen, can combine with two, a material which permits the passage of nonvolatilevehicle,leavesathin, such as with two hydrogens, forming a vapor or gas. The PERMEABILITY is glossy, more-or-less uniform layer of H20. Valencies up to eight are possible. measuredundercarefullyspecified the dissolved materials. At one time valonea (vallonea; valonia). A vegetable conditions, such as total pressure, par- varnish was used to impart additional tanning material obtained fromthe tial pressure on the two sides of the gloss to leather and cloth. Book jack- dried acorn cups and beards of the specimen,temperatureandrelative ets, showcards, and the like, are also Mediterranean (valonea) oak, Quer- humidity. As the fibers of a material varnished to enhance their appearance cus aegilops, and allied species. The such as paper have such a high affinity and improve wear resistance. Small cups contain tannin in the amount of for water (vapor), vapor permeability sheets are usually varnished by hand 25 to 31%, while the beards usually should not be confused with air per- with a brush, but large sheets are gen- contain 40% or more. Valonea is of meability or porosity. See also: WATER- erally varnished in a varnishing ma- the pyrogallol class of tannins and pro- VAPOR PERMEABILITY. (17, 42) chine. In the latter case drying in a dust duces a leather of firm texture and vapor-phase deacidification. A method of free atmosphere is made possible by light color. It also deposits considerable deacidifying paper which involves the the use of a drying apparatus usually bloom because ofits relatively high use of a material thatis capable of attached to the varnishing machine. content of ellagitannic acid. It has a supplying the deacidification agent in Varnishing can also be done on letter- fairly high natural pH (3.6)for a the form of a vapor. Ammonia, diethyl press and lithographic printing presses pyrogallol tannin, as well as a moder- zinc, morpholine, or other volatile alka- but the finish is usually not equal to ately high acid and salts contents. See line substances can be used, but most that obtained by hand or in a varnish- also: VEGETABLE TANNINS. (175, 306) are not permanent inthe presence ing machine. Paper to be varnished Van der Waa ls forces. The physical forces ofhigh relativehumidity. Another must be hardsized,otherwisethe of attraction and repulsion existing be- method, and one which has received varnish will be absorbed rather than tween molecules and which are respon- considerable notice, involves the use of remain on the surface. Varnish is also sible for the cohesion of molecular crys- cyclohexylamine carbonate. The books used to dilute ink, or as an ingredient tals and liquids. The forces stem partly are interleaved with tissue paper im- in its manufacture. The correct selec- from dipole-dipole, or dipole-induced- pregnated with the compound, while tion of printing inks for work which is dipole interactions; however, even non- loose documents may be treated by to be varnished is important because polar molecules and atoms exert a cer- placing sacks containing the compound some inksareaffected by varnish. tain attraction on one another. Van der with the documents in box files. The (320) Waals forces act only over relatively deacidification agent is the free am;ne varnishing machine. A machine resem- short distances, and are proportional to given off as a vapor. No alkaline re- bling a printing press in many respects the inverse of the seventh power of the serve is left in the paper by this method, and used to varnish printed sheets, intermolecular distances. The forces and this, along with its disagreeable usually for the purpose of brightening are important in the mechanics of AD- (fishy) odor, represent its chief short- and preserving colors, as well as to im- HESION. (235) comings. Some authorities also contend part additional wear resistance. The vapor density. The ratio between the that the vapor is potentially toxic. See varnish is applied from a fountair by weight of a given volume of a gaseous also: BARROW, WILLIAM J.; DEACIDIFI- means of rollers, as in printing, and the substance and that of the same volume CATION; DIETHYL ZINC; MORPHOLINE; sheets are then conveyed on a canvas vaseine 275 vegetable tanning

web into a drying oven for drying in a oughly so as to remove the acid or zinc the tan liquor isgradually increased dust free atmosphere. (320) salt, after which it is dried. The chem- (the stock being transferred into pits vaseline. A trade name for soft paraffin. ical partially dissolves or gelatinizes the containing progressively stronger liquor) Yellow and white varietiesare pro- paper, which is then regenerated when until the tanning has just penetrated duced, consisting of semi-solid, partly the chemical is diluted by the washing. through the entire thickness of the skin, translucent mixtures of hydrocarbons 'This forms a very tough, stiff, smooth i.e.,ithas struck through. Splitting, of theparaffinseriesranging from paper with an appearar ze somewhat if required and if not done previously, C1,H30 toC.,1-140. White vaselineis like that of a genuine parchment. Be- finishing, etc., are then carried out after sometimes used to make gold leaf ad- cause paper treated in this manner has drying. here to the surface of leather before a tendency to become brittle and to The traditional method of vegetable application of the tool. Under no cir- wrinkle upon drying,itis frequently tanning was slow and expensive and, cumstances shoulditbe applied to treated with a plasticizing agent, usually furthermore, did not always give the leather as a dressing. (235, 335) glycerineorglucose. The waterleaf characteristics desired in the leather. vat dyes. Dyestuffs that are insoluble in sheet is made from rag or (more usu- Not only was there sometimestoo water, but the "leuco" compounds of ally) chemical wood pulp. (17, 82, 143) much firmness to the leather, but fre- which, subsequenttoreduction,are vegetable tanned. Leathers that have been quently the color of the leather was not soluble in dilute alkalies. In this state tanned exclusively with vegetable tan- as pale or as uniform as it can be made vat dyes have a great affinity for cel- ning agents, or with vegetable tannins by the use of more modern methods lulosic fibers,e.g.,cloth,paper, etc. plus small amounts of other agents, the of tanning. After being impregnated with the re- latter being used solely to assist in the The use of stronger liquors, mecha- duced dye, the material is then exposed tanningprocessortoimprove or nical action, pH control, and control to the oxygen of the air, w hich causes modify the leather, but which are not of the contents of acids and salts have re-oxidation of the leuco compound present in sufficient quantities to notice- enabled the tanner to produce satisfac- back to the insoluble state. Vat dyes ably alter the essential vegetable-tanned tory leather in a much shorter time, are among the fastest dyes known, and, characteristicsoftheleather.Cf: and efforts are constantly being made despite the development of new classes CHROME RETAN. See also: VEGETABI E to reduce the time of tannage even of fast dyestuffs, they continue to be TANNING. (61) further. Increased mechanical action. used where high standards of color sta- vegetable tanning. The process of con- suchasdrumming,acceleratesthe bility are required. (17, 235) verting the protein (collagen and its speed of tannin penetration but also vat machine. See: CYLINDER MACHINE. related proteins) of a raw hide or skin results in pebbling of the grain, unless vat papers. I. A term sometimes applied intoI EATHER by means of vegetable some form of pre-tannage is employed. to papers that are made by hand. 2. materials. Vegetable tanning produces Some tanners in both Europe and the An English term for papers produced a relatively dense leather, one that is United States employ such systems, in on a CYLINDER MACHINE. (156) firm and solid and yields a high weight which a comparatively short rocker pit veal. A leather produced with a grain pat- of leather per unit of raw stock. It also tannage is used to assure sufficient tan- tern similar to, but somewhat coarser produces a leather that is pale brown nage to protect at least the outer quarter than, calfskin, and made from the skins in color, and which tends to darken or third of the stock, with the stock of immature bovine animals which upon exposure to naturallight. De- then being drummed with strong liquors have not been fed on grass subsequent pending upon the finishing treatment so as to rapidly tan the interior of the to weaning. The animals are allowed to employed, the tanning material washes corium. There are many variations of grow to a comparatively largesize, out of the leather very slowly. this method, ranging from stock struck yielding skins larger and heavier than Vegetable tannages are used to pro- through in the rocker pits, and then calfskins but smaller than cowhides. duce bookbinding leather, not only be- being tumbled in liquors of 100° Bk. See also: KIP (2). (61) cause of tradition, but because they or more for as long as 48 hours, to vegetable glue. An adhesive made from produce leathers having a soft drape stock only partially penetrated and then vegetable materials,as,for example, and handle (in addition to their firm- being hung on sticks in slowly rotating by treating starch with an alkali. Vege- ness), which retain applied grain pat- rotors, being drawn through a com- table glue is soluble in water and gives terns particularly well. Unless specifi- paratively small volume of tanning a high "solids to water" ratio, which cally treated, however, vegetable tanned liquor of gradually increasing strength. justifies its use as a substitute for ani- leathers have but little water resistance. Leather to be used for bookbinding mal glue in certain applications. The The classical method of vegetable should be tanned to give a pale, uni- glue lack the rapid initial set character- tanning, especially where flatness of the form, biscuit shade--one which can be istic of animal glue but it can be made leather (and particularly of the grain readily dyed and finished in a variety to give reasonably satisfactory results surface) is of great importance, as with of colors. The tannins in the leather with careful use. Because it does not hookbinding leather,ispit tannage should be well fixed and not easily re- have to be heated, it offers the impor- usually accomplished by means of sus- moved by wetting the leather, other- tant advantage of always being ready pension in a rocker vat. Traditionally. wise they may cause stains when the for immediate use. See also: DEXTRIN. the skins are limed and unhaired, and leatherispaste-washed or otherwise (198, 355) delimed to a pH of 4.0 to 5.0, bated moistened. vegetable parchment paper. A paper made (and sometimes dienched with bran or Light leathers, e.g., goatskins, calf- by passing a WATERLEAE sheet through acetic acid). The stock is then sus- skins,etc.,in the finished state,are a bath of sulfuric acid, or (at times) pended as smoothly and flatly as pos- usually sold on the basis of area (price zinc chloride, under established condi- sible in rocker vats containing used or per square foot); therefore, there is not tions of time, temperature, and the like. new tanning liquor of a relatively low the temptation to fix an unduly high The treated paper is then washed thor- BARKOMETER reading. The strength of proportion of tan on the fibers, as is vegetable tannins 276 vegetable tannins

sometimes done in the case of leathers characistic of divi divi, myrabolans. peratureisnot too high, as well as sold by weight. Overly prolonged vege- sumac,ara, valonea, and other well- coloringmatterssuchasbrasilin, table tannage is to be avoided as it may known .annins. The condensed tannins fisetin, and quercetin. cause difficulties in dyeing and finish- are not hydrolyzable and are character- Vegetable tanning liquors areex- ing. See also: BATING; DRENCHING; FAT- istic of hemlock, mangrove, quebracho, tremely complicated in their chemical LIQUORING; LIMING; SOAKING (1 ); wattle, and thelike. The condensed composition, and the tannin/non-tan- SPLITTING ( 1 ); UNHAIRING. CI: CHROME tannins are more astringent, i.e., they nin ratio, the color, and the particular TANNING. (248, 291, 306, 351, 363) tan more rapidly, than the pyrogallols, substances involved have a consider- vegetable tannins. A group of complex hy- have larger molecules and are less well able (and far from completely under- drocarhon substances common through- buffered. They yield less sediment, or stood) bearing on their tanning prop- out most of the vegetable kingdom, and lose less upon standing, but the leather erties and, therefore, on the quality having the capability, to a greater or they produce often tendstoturn a of the leather produced. lesser degree, of converting hide and reddish color upon exposure to natural Although tannins occur throughout skin, i.e., protein, into leather. Tannins light. They also yield phlobaphenes or the greater part of the vegetable king- are complex organicmaterials,and REDS. dom, they are more prevalent among frequently have very large molecules The terms "condensed" and "pyro- theAngiosperms,orhigherplants, and high molecular weights, on the gallol," as such do not mean that the especially in certain Dicotyledon fami- order of 2,000 or greater, although it tannins contain these substances but lies, than they are among the lower is still not certain whether they might simply indicate that dihydric and tri- types, such as fungi, algae, etc. The hetter he considered macro-molecular hydric phenols are produced respec- Gymnospermsalsohaveclassesin substances, i.e., those with very large tively when the materials are heated which tanning is well developed, e.g., molecules and high molecular weights (drydistillation).Quiteoftenthe the pines, spruces and hemlocks. which break down into smaller frag- "tannin" derived from a plant material, TheDicotyledonsincludemany ments.Tannins wereatonetime e.g., oak bark, has characteristics of families in which tannin occurs quite classed with the glucosides because of both groups and consequently is gen- freely, among which the most note- the sugar groups that most of them erally considered to be a mixture or worthy are the Leguminosae, e.g., the contain, but they are now more often compound of the two principal types. black wattle; the Anacardiaceae, e.g., regardedasconstitutingaclass by The two classes of tannin also dis- quebracho and sumac; the Combrem- themselves, as some, e.g., the hemlock play differentreactions towardsac- retie,e.g.,myrabolans;Rhisophora- tannins, do not have the sugar group in queoussolutionofironsalts.The ceae. e.g., mangroves; Myrlaceae, e.g , the molecule. In addition to carbon, condensed tannins produce green-black eucalyptus;andPolygonaceae,e.g., hydrogen, and oxygen, some nitrogen, colors, while the pyrogallol class gives canaigre. phosphorus, as well as traces of in- blue-blacks (a reaction important in Tannin may occur in almost any part organic ions, may be present. the manufacture of some inks). Fur- of a plant, including roots, stems or Vegetable tannins for the most part thermore, they differ in their tanning trunk,bark, leaves,fruit,and even are uncrystallizable colloidal substances properties. Pyrogallol tannins, for ex- hairs. It may occur either in isolated with pronounced astringent properties. ample, being less astringent than the individual cells, in groups or chains of They have theabilitytoprecipitate condensed class, tan more slowly and cells (the more common occurrence), gelatin from solution and to form in- produce leatheroflesssolidity.In or in special cavities or sacs.It may soluble compounds with gelatin-yield- addition,whenextractedfromthe also be presentinlatex vessels and ing tissues, which is the property which plant, they generally contain smaller lactiferous tissue accompanied by other enables them to convert raw hide and molecules of tannin, and, being better substances. skinintoleather,consolidatingthe buffered, i.e., containing weak organic In the living plant, tannin is present dermal network of the hide into firmer acids and their salts, they resist changes chiefly in solution in the vacuoles. As anddrierstructuresofimproved in pH value when acid or alkaliis the cell ages and loses its protoplasmic thermal stability, durability, and water added. contents, the tannin usually becomes resistance. For a complete and even reaction absorbed in the cell wall in dead plant Because they are extremely complex with the skin or hide to take place tissuetanninoftenaccumulatesin substances, vegetable tannins are diffi- during tannage, itis necessary to use considerable quantities. Tannins often cult to classify; however, they are usu- the tanning material in the form of a occur in green or immature fruits, the allyconsideredtoconsistofpoly- liquor, i.e., an aqueous infusion of the quantity decreasing as the fruit ripens, phenolic systems of two types:the plant material. Modern tanneries use and they may also occur in seeds, often hydrolizedtannins(thepyrogallol extracts that are concentrates of ac- becoming more abundantfollowing class), the main constituents of which queous liquors, the latter usually being germination. Tannin is also quite preva- are esters of glucose with acids such as concentrated under reduced pressure lent in tissues as a result of pathologi- chebulic, ellagic, gallic and m-digallic: to provide highly viscous or even solid calconditions,suchasplantgalls. and the condensed (catechol) tannins, products. Other materials extracted are Certain of thesegalls constitute the which are based on leuco-anthocyani- knownasnon-tannins(abbreviated richest sources of tannin in plants, e.g.. dins and like substances joined together non-tans) and may include; hydrolysis Chinesegalls,which have atannin in a manner not clearly understood. products of the tannins, starches, gums, content ranging from 50 to 80%. The pyrogallol tannins may be hydro- hemicelluloses,poly-saccharides, hex- The use of vegetable tannins in the lyzed by acids or enzymes and include oses,pentoses,uronicacid,organic manufacture of leather probably pre- thegallotannins(from plantgalls) acids (lactic and acetic), together with dates recorded history, and thereis and the ellagitannins, which produce their salts, inorganic salts, proteins and creditable evidence that they were in tu.00s,4 (1) on leather, and which are zymoproteins (enzymes), if the tem- use in Egypt as far back as 5000 B.C. vegetable vellum 277 velvet wrapper binding

The ancient Greeks and Romans were shell, and the like, all of which may be these were not actually "vellum paint- well veNed in the art of vegetable tan- covered and permanently protected by ings." See also: EDWARDS OF HALIFAX. ning, and evidence indicates that vege- the vellum. The surface of the vellum (347) table tannins were used in China many itself can he tooled in gold, thus further vellum parchment. A very tough hand- thousands of years ago.(175, 24, enhancing the entire effect. See also: made vellum paper, produced in Eng- 291. 306, 363) EDWARDS OF H.ALIFAX. (94, 236) land, somewhat similar in appearance vegetable vellum. A term at one time vellum.Originally, atranslucentor to genuine vellum. Itis said to be ex- appliedtoa Japanese vellum paper opaque material produced from calf- tremely durable and not easily affected specially prepared in imitation of gen- skin that had been soaked, limed and byheat,mildew,andinsects.Its uine vtl.t um. (197) unhaired, and then driedatnormal equivalent in the United States is ART vehicle. The liquid portion of a material temperature under tension, usually on PARCHMENT. such as ink, paint, varnish, or a coating a wooden device calleda stretching velvet.I. A fabric produced in a wide composition, including the hinders, ad- frame. Today, however, vellum is gen- range of construction and weights from hesives. modifiers, and the like. eraly defined as a material made from silk,rayon, cotton.nylon, or wool. veincolors. The colorsemployedin calfskin,sheepskin, or virtually any Velvet is 'characterized by a short. soft, marbling to produce the veins of the other skin obtained from a relatively dense pile produced either by weaving pattern. They are applied to the mar- smallanimal,e.g.,antelope.Some an extra warp into a single cloth, which bling size prior to the dropping on of authorities do not even distinguish be- is looped over wires and later cut, or the FRENCH (or body) COLOR.( 217) tween vellum and parchment, although by weaving a double cloth with an veining liquid. A special marbling size traditionally the former was made from extra warp connecting the two fabrics designed to promote the formation of an unsplit calfskin, and consequently which are later separated by cutting. veinsinthecolorsaftertheyare had a grain pattern on one side (unless Uncut velvet, or terry,is sometimes dropped. The size is produced by mix- removed by scraping), while the latter woven simultaneously with the cut to ing soft water. e.g.,rain water, and was produced from the flesh split of a createfiguresonthecloth.Velvet soap, in the proportions of 11'spints sheepskin, and consequently had no brocades, which are the most luxurious of water to 2 ounces of soap. See also: grain pattern. The important distinc- of all velvets, are made with gold and SPRINKLING WATER. (161) tion between vellum (or parchment) silverthreadsasanextraweft,or veiny leather (veined). The colored pat- and leather is that the former is not filling,the figures being wrought by tern of arteries, veins, and other blood tanned but is prepared essentially by hand, as with embroidery. Velveteen vessels sometimes seen in parchment soaking the skin in lime and drying it and plush are cotton or wool fabrics and vellum, or even leather, where the under tension. For a description of its woven in much the same manner as pattern of the larger vessels appears manufacture, see PARCHMENT. true velvet. on the grain surface in the form of Most medieval manuscripts, whether Book covers of velvet, often studded indentations. In parchment and vellum illuminated or not, were written on with jewels, were produced, (for roy- itis caused by insufficient removal of vellum. Uterine vellum was made in alty) as early as the middle ages: how- blood from the vascular system of the the 13th and 14th centuries from the ever, velvet attained to its greatest use skin, while in the case of leather itis skins of unborn or still-horn animals. in bookbinding in F.MBROIDERED BIND- due to bacterial degradation of collagen See: SLUNK. Limp vellumor limp- INGS. As velvetisdifficultto work, fibersinthevicinities of the blood parchmentbindings wereusedfre- embroideredvelvetbindingsusually vessels. Veininess usually results from quently in the 16th and 17th centuries, included a large area of applique, laid, the use of skins of animals found dead and were sometimes gilt but were also or couched work incolored silkor of natural causes, from improper or de- often not embellished. In later centuries satin.always with large spaces that layed curing after flaying, or for some vellum has been more commonly used were unworked. Such work as actually reason wherein the blood is not drained like leather, that is, as the covering for was done on the velvet was always in fromtheanimalimmediatelyafter stiff hoard bindings. thick gimp or gold cord. . slaughter. In some cases, veininess can Vellum can he stained virtually any 2. A leather finished with a fine nap actually enhance the beauty of vellum, color hut seldom is, as a great part of on the grain side, in contrast to SUEDE, especiallyifthe blood vessels form its heauty and appeal rests in its faint which has a (usually cOarser) nap on geometrical and/or attractive patterns. grain and hair markings, as well as its the flesh side. (111, 280) (291, 363) warmth and simplicity. See also: VEINY velvet calf. A calfskin leather finished vellucent binding. A method of decorating LEATHER. (192, 218, 236, 291) with a fine nap on the grain side. See: (and protecting) a bookbinding utiliz- vellum binder. A term sometimes used VELVET (2). ing TRANSPARENT VELLUM. The tech- in Great Britain to indicate one who velvet Persian. A term sometimes applied nique was developed by CEDRIC CHIVERS hinds account hooks (blankbooks), as to a sheepskin. The origin of the term sometime around 1903, and is designed well as other stationery bindings.It is obscure. (133) not only for the protection of leather derives from the time when stationery velvet wrapper binding. A form of pro- bindings, hut alsotoprotect covers binding was referredtoas "vellum tective covering for book covers, de- bearing colored designs (usually pic- binding." signed to be wrapped over the edges of torialinnature)painted on paper, vellum binding. See: STATIONERY BINDING. the book. Used in medieval times, the attached to the hoards, and then cov- vellum painting. A painting executed on velvet wrapper bindingisfrequently ered with the vellum. The vellucent theunder surfaceof TRANSPARENT represented in Flemish paintings of the coveringisalsosuitablefor highly VELLUM, or on white paper, prior to 15th century. The wooden hoards, with decorative designs because it is possible covering. Many vellum paintings were no preliminary covering, are covered tofurther embellishthedesignby also executed on the outer surface of in velvet cut so as to extend above and means of mother-of-pearl, irridescent vellum, although by strictdefinition below head and tail, and beyond the "v" endpaper 278 vulcanization

fore edge of the upper cover. The edges It is used as an astringent to help close by joining the first flyleaf and the board of the velvet were sometimes finished the pores of a porous leather before paper. It is sometimes reinforced to the with embroidery of red floss and silver. tooling. This operation is essential, as text block by mounting or sewing. See (347) close tooling may ruin adjacent lines also: HINGE (1). (256) "v" endpaper. See: ZIG-ZAG ENDPAPER. unless the surface of the leatheris void fraction. The ratio of the volume Venetian binding. A style of binding, ob- compact and solid. Vinegar also helps taken up by air spaces (the voids) to tained directly from the Near East, to raise the grain of leather and thus the total volume of a material. (17) probably in the 1480s, the boards of accentuate the pattern. (130, 335) volant. A term at one time applied to a which were composed of, or coated linyi coating. A relatively heavy coating print or illustration hinged at one edge with, some form of paper composition of a plastic material applied to a sub- only so that it could be turned over for that permitted the corners and centers strate, such as a fabric. Impregnated view ing of the reverse side. to be stamped in sunken panels or buckram is an example ef a cloth hav- volumen. The papyrus roll used in ancient shaded compartments. The entire board ing a vinyl coating. The finished glossy, Egypt, Greece, and Rome, written on was generaly covered with thinly pared soft, pliable surface is obtained by heat one side only with a reed pen. The text leather, which was then coated with a curing. (309) was in columns, the lines of which ran colored laquer and painted with ara- vinyl resin. Any of the thermoplastic syn- parallel the length of the roll. The final besques in gold. This style of binding thetic resins prepared by the polymeri- papyrus sheetofthe volumen was often incorporated the lion of St. Mark zation or copolmerization of various rolled around ,a knobbed rod which painted on the center panel, and was vinyl compounds, principally vinyl ace- served as a handle. The rolls were perhaps used as the official binding of tate,vinylchloride,andvinylidine stored in boxes or on shelves, and, in the Statutes and Commissions of the chloride. Vinyl resins are clear water- the latter case, had an identifying Venetian Senate. (124, 280, 371) white, non-yellowing materials, some of vellum attached to the end of the Venetian red. A coloring earth of a deep, of which are used in the preparation of roll. The label, which was sometimes reddish brown, which, initsnatural coating materials, foils, and the like. colored, bore the title of the work. A form, may consist of nearly pure ferric See also: POLYVINYL ACETATE; POLY- wooden case (manuale) was some- oxide (Fe203) of the hematite type. VINYL CHLORIDE. (233) times used to protect the edges of the It is prepared synthetically by calcining viscosity. 1. That property of a fluid mani- roll. "Volumen" is Latin for "a thing ferrous sulfate in the presence of lime. fest as a resistance to flow and meas- rolled up." (156) and is then known as "caput mortuum." ured by the tangential force per unit volume signature (part signature). The It is used in coloring paper. Also called area of either of two horizontal planes number of the volume or part, or a let- "India red" or "Indian red." (72) atunitdistanceapart,ore of the ter indicating its sequence, placed on ventilating power. The capability of a planes moving with unit velocity rela- the same line as the signature, in order leather to transfer water vapor from an tive to the other, the space between to prevent the binder from mixing the atmophere of higher to one of lower being occupied by the flowing liquid. If sections of various volumes of a work. relative humidity. (363) the velocity of flow is proportional to (156) verdigris. A green or greenish-blue pig- the force applied, the fluid is said to volute. A decorativeornament,often ment prepared by the action of acetic exhibit Newtonian behavior; however, foundonheads-in-medallionsrolls, acid on copper. Verdigris, whichis many colloidal dispersions and suspen- which consists of a large curl (spiral) toxic, was at one time used to make a sions display anomalous non-Newton- in roughly volute form at one end, the green marbling color. Itis also very ian flow, i.e., the velocity of flow is not other end having a small curl turning in destructive to paper because it acts as proportional to the force applied. the opposite direction. The volute was an oxidation catalyst. (97, 152) Viscosity diminishes as temperature always used in pairs. Its use as a single vermicular. Inlays which resemble some- rises, often by about 2% per degree C; tool, with a reverse partner, was com- what the track of a wriggling worm. italso increases with an increase in mon in English restoration bindings, (261) pressure. often pointille. (250) verso. 1. The back or reverse side of a 2.That property of a cellulose pa- V through. A V-shaped device, usually leaf of an open book or manuscript, per pulp, or other polymer, expressed constructed of wood or sheet metal, and one which usually bears an even by the viscosity of a solution of the and used for punching holes by hand page number. 2. The reverse, or second. material in a suitable solvent and under in single-section publications in prep- side of a sheet to be printed. 3. The specified conditions. Viscosity in this arationfor saddle sewing by hand. back of aseparatelyprintedsheet, respect is related to the strength, as well (259) which in former times was called the as other properties of the paper pulp vulcanization. 1. The process of reacting "folio verso."4. A term sometimes fibers. (17, 72, 195, 309) rubber w ithsulfur or other suitable applied to the outer side of the lower viscosity coefficient. The tangentially ap- agent so as to change its physical prop- cover of a book. (209) plied shearing stress capable of induc- erties in the direction of decreased plas- vertical stroke. A device that can be at- ing a velocity gradient. When a shear- tic flow, diminished surface tackiness, tachedtoashearordouble-shear ing stress of 1 dyne per square centi- and increased tensile strength. See also: stroke GUILLOTINE so as to bring the meter produces a velocity gradient of SELF-VULCANIZING. 2. The Cross linkage knife down vertically, instead of in a 1 centimeter per second/second, a ma- of an adhesive substance obtained by shearing motion. It is used with knives terial is said to have a viscosity of 1 the application of heat and catalysts. of aspecial shape designed to cut poise. (309) (309) irregular or fancy edges. (145) visible cloth joint. An inner hinge made vinegar. A dilute solution of ACETIC ACID. of cloth (usually cambric), constructed wagon 279 water

wagon. A hand instrument somew hat re- ponents of the covercloth, boards, sembling a sled (with its runners) and board paper, and, to a lesser extent, used in the manufacture of gold leaf to thefilms of adhesive which secure trim the edges of the leaves to proper these components together. Warping is size. A finely sharpened knife made of found to occur in the direction of: 1) the bark of a reed is used in conjunc- the side of the material which has the tion with the wagon. This knife is said greater stretch; 2) the side of the ma- to be so sharp that not even the finest terial with the least moisture content; steel can be honed to an edge equally and 3) the side which is lined or has suitable for trimming the leaves. (29) the greater number of layers. On newly wainscot. A cover marble executed by a bound books these factors are at work first painting the covers with a brown because of the setting and drying of coloring and then water, followed by case leather produced from a w arbled the adhesives; subsequent to binding, splashes of copperas (ferrous sulfate). hide is unsatisfactory in both strength stresses may occur because of atmos- A solution of alum is then thrown on, and appearance. (363) pheric changes. The practical means of followed by a bold sprinkle of dilute warehouse work. An expression some- minimizing warping include the use sulfuric add. An alternative "wainscot" times applied to the bookbinding work of well-matured boards, cutting the consists of bi own, a coating of glair, consisting of simple forms of binding, boards and board papers so that the black in large spots, brown again, this suchaspamphlets,periodicalsand grain (machine direction) runs parallel time in largespots, and finally the booklets,aswellasmiscellaneous tothespine of the book,theuse dilute sulfuric acid. (95, 97, 152) operations, such ascutting,folding, of adhesives containing a minimum wallet edge. A type of limp binding which and stitching. (58) amount of water (and no more than has the covering of the lower cover, warm colors. Colors having red and yel- the minimum amount required of plas- along the entire length of the book, low as the dominant hue. Yellowish or ticizer), and adequate pressing of the overlapping the fore edge of the book, brownish grays are ciped the "warm books after casing-in or covering. In terminating in a tongue w hich isin- grays." All warm colors lie in the red- addition, maintenance of a stable at- serted through a slotinthe upper yellow half of the color circle.Cf: mospheric environment is important. cover. See also:YAP P STYLE.( 1 40) COOL COL ORS.(233) waste sheet. 1. A sheet of paper tipped to walnut marble. A type ofTREE CALFexe- warp. A series of parallel yarns extended the outside over the permanent end- cuted by spruikling the covers with lengthwise in a loom, thereby forming paper topreventitfrom becoming black and brown coloring only. (S7, the lengthwise threads of a fabric. They damaged or soiled during the binding 152 ) are usually twisted tighter than the fill- of the book. Special instructions on walrus hide. A leather produced from the ing yarns and are sized so as to protect binding the book may also be written hide of a walrus, or the skin of a seal them during the weaving of the filling onthissheet.Originally,thewaste or sea lion, split, and used occasionally threads. sheet was printed with an abbreviated for covering books. Subsequent to tan- The warp direction of a cloth is the title so that the publication could be ning and splitting, it is difficult to dis- stronger of the two directions. There identified. The so-called printed waste tinguish between leather made from is some disagreement as to which direc- sheet is known as the half-title paper sealskin and walrushide,andthe tion the warp of a book cloth should and is always found in books of any names are often used interchangeably. run with relation to the spine of the pretension to high quality. 2. An old "Walrus grain" is a term used to indi- book. Some contend thatthe warp term for the advertisements, , cate a cowhide, sheepskin, or goatskin, should run across the joint of a case- etc.,at the front and back of some as well as splits of various hides, em- bound book, as this will give more publications. 3. Sheets of paper used in bossed in imitation of walrus hide. In strength in the joint; others maintain press makeready and register, or the such cases, the proper description is that the warp should run parallel to spoiled sheets resulting from errors in "walrus-grained cowhide," etc.(261, the spine because: 1) it makes a neater printing and binding. (69, 94) 351) joint; 2) in the event the cloth becomes water. A colorless or faintly blue-green warbles. A defect in leather seen as small damp or wet there is less likelihood of liquid (H20). Molecules of water enter pinholes or as tiny scars. Warbles are the covers warping in such a manner into the constitution of many crystal- caused by the larvae of the grub or that the head and tail pull outward thus linesalts, e.g., alum-1(0504 Al., warble fly (family Oestridae), which damaging the inner hinge; and 3) the (SO4)1 24H00, in which they may be develop under the skin of the animal cloth will adhere better in the joint. reversibly held. The outstanding chemi- and emerge in the area of the back- (152, 209) cal reactions of water are: 1) its reac- bone. If the animal is slaughtered be- warping. The distortion of the covers of tion with certain metals, e.g., Na, Ca, fore the wounds heal, the defectis a book subsequent to binding, to the Fe, more or less easily, with the libera- known as "open warbles," while if suffi- extent that the covers do not lie flat tion of hydrogen, such as, Na H20 -* cient time elapses for the animal to against the text block. This distortion NaOH H; 2)itsreaction with develop scar tissue, they are then called is caused by the difference in expansion oxides of non-metals, e.g., withSO3to closed or' blind warbles." In either and contraction of the various com- form acids, such as,SO3+ H20 -* watercolor inks 280 Waters, Peter

H0SO4; 3) with halides of nonmetals, hand. The place whvre the dandy roll troduced in the 17th century, and was to form hydrogen halides and an oxy- impresses, or the location of the wired generally located in the opposite half acid, such as PC13 + 3H00 H3P03 design, wia contain less fibrous mate- of the sheet to the watermark itself. +3HCI; 4) with dissolved salts of weak rial and, therefore, will have greater in paper, particularly in cids or weak bases, forming solutions translucency. Another method is to use endpapers, can provide valuable infor- with an alkaline or acid reaction (hy- a bronze, intaglio-type device on the mation about the history of bookbind- drolysis), such as Na0CO3 H00 <-=- dandy roll, the resulting modification ing. (17, 69, 143, 177, 198) NaOH NaHCO3; and 5) with coke being that more fibrous materialis waterproof. A relative term indicating at high temperature to form water gas, located at the point of impress, See: that a material has been treated, i.e., C + H20 -4 CO + Ho. (235) SHADE-CRAFT WATERMARK. A variation sized, coated, impregnated, etc., in such watercolor inks. Thin, semi-transparent of the letterpress method incorporates a manner as to increase its resistance inks that contain no oils, and which are the use of a soft rubber, letkrpress-type to the penetration of water. The basic used when printing in colors from a device that impresses a design in the principle of waterproofing is that the rubber surface. As they remain water web of paper on the underside of the presence of the waterproofing chemical soluble, even after printing, they can- web,i.e.,the wire side(where the or other material in or on a fibrous sub- not be used where inadvertent wetting watermarkisfoundinhandmade stance modifies the surface tension be- may occur, nor can papers printed with paper), so that it is seen through the tween water and the substances of the them be washedordeacidifiedby sheet from the top. This type of water- fiber. WATER RESISTANCE is probably a means of aqueous systems. (140) mark, which is produced at a point on better term to use with respect to any watercolor paper. A paper designed to be the papermaking machine where the of the materials used in book and paper used with watercolors. Itis a typical web is no longer sufficiently wet to conservation. (17 ) drawing paper, either made by hand or modify the formation and opacity of water resistance. That property of a mate- machine; tub sized, and machine, air, the paper, is actually, therefore, a form rial which enables it to resist, but not or loft dried. The paper has a hard- of embossing and cannot be called a completely prevent, the action or pene- sized surface, and a texture designed true watermark. tration of water. A material may be to enhance the absorption of water- Forms of the watermark are generally made water resistant to a greater or colors so that they willnot run or divided into four very broad classes: lesser degree by the application of siz- penetrate too deeply into the paper. 1) the very earliest, generally consist- ing,coating,impregnating, or other When intended for use with oil paints, ing of simple circles, crosses, knots, materials. the paper is made to simulate the sur- ovals, three-hill symbols, triangles, and Waters, Peter (1930 ). An English face of canvas. (17) the like, which were easy to construct bookbinder and conservator who stud- watered silk. A silk cloth having a wavy simply by twisting and bending soft ied bookbinding under William Mat- or damasklike pattern,i.e., a MOIRE wires. (These early marks also included thews at the Guilford College of Art, EFFECT. While seldom used as a Cov- many pomme crosses, based on the Surrey, after which he attended the ering material, it is sometimes used for Greek cross with balls or circles at the Royal College of Art, London. He then doublures and flyleaves. Seealso: ends of the cross bars. A similar water- worked for three years with Roger MOIllg BOOK CLOTH. (140) mark, found on Italian paper of the Powell before entering as a partner in water glass. See: SODIUM SILICATE. 14th century, consists of a circle above the firm of Powell and Waters in 1956. waterleaf. 1. A completely unsized sheet which is a patriarchal or papal cross. In this same year, Waters succeeded of paper, and one having low water These earliest marks were prevalent Powell as lecturer in bookbinding at resistance. See also: ABSORBENT PAPERS. from about 1282 to 1425); 2) water- the Royal College of Art. From 1956 2. Handmade paper in its initial stage marks emphasizing man and his works. to 1971, he executed a number of bind- of manufacture, consisting of paper (Thousands of designs of this nature ings for private collectors, museums, fibers spread evenly over the surface of have been noted, a large number of andpresentation,and worked with the hand mold; they are then removed them featuring human hands in various Powell in the repair and rotoration of and pressed between felts. As it is un- forms); 3) watermarks consisting of a number of valuable books inthe sized, it is very absorbent and has low flowers, fruit, grains, trees and other libraries of Trinity College, Dublin, water resistance. It is generally surface plants, etc.; and 4) watermarks con- Aberdeen and Winchester Universities, sized to make it suitable for writing or sistingofwild,domesticated,and and others. In 1966 Waters served as printing. See also: SIZING (1).(17, legendary animals. consultant to the Biblioteca Nazionale, 156) More recent developments of the Florence, Italy, as Technicial Director watermark. A distinguishing letter, de- watermark have resulted in some com- for the restoration of flood-damaged sign, symbol, etc., incorporated into a plicated and occasionally artistic forms, collections and was principally respon- paper during manufacture. True water- reflecting an increasing skill in design sible for the design and incorporation marks are a localized modification of and manufacture. "Light and shade" of the restoration system employed the formation and opacity of the paper watermarks have been used from time From 1968 to 1971 he was codirector while it is still wet, so that the marks to time in the 20th century, but they with James Lewis of a research project can be seen in the finished sheet of are relatively uncommon because of at the Imperial College of Science and paper when viewed by transmitted the difficulty and expense of producing Technology, London, relating to the light. This type of sheet modification them. conservation of library materials. In may be accomplished by means of a The papermaker's initials or name, 1971 Waters was appointed Restora- bronze letterpress-type dandy roll that the place or date of manufacture of the tion Officer in the Preservation Office impresses a design in the wet web, or paper (if included) were more likely to of the Library of Congress. There he by means of a design wired to the grid be found in the COUNTERMARK, which inaugurated new concepts and pro- of the mold in paper that is made by was a subsidiary and smaller mark in- grams relating to the conservation of water stain 281 web

the Library's extensive collection of of these waves ranges from several wax emulsion. A stable aqueous emulsion books, manuscripts, maps, and other miles (low frequency transmis- usually made of paraffin or microcrys- archival materials. sions) to as short as 10-'2 cm (7-rays). talline wax; it sometimes contains rosin. Waters' philosophy has been rooted Wavelengths may be expressed in centi- It is prepared by means of emulsifying in the Bauhaus tradition of "fitness for meters; however,the shorter wave- agents and mechanical agitation. The purpose" in desian, which through his lengths are more commonly expressed emulsion may be either acid- or alkali- extensive knowledge of book structure in Angstrom (A) units, defined as I A stable, depending on the emulsifying has found expression ranging from the 1 X 10 g cm. Approximate wave- agent employed. Wax enwlsions are binding of individual books tothe lengths for various types are: used for sizing and waxing paper, and planning of comprehensive conserva- tion measures, culminating in his now widely followed concept of "phased preservation." Wavelength Type in Centimeters In A water stain. A blemish on book papers, -f-rays documents, etc., caused by the move- 10-12 to 10-10 0.01 X-rays 10-9 to 10-7 0.1 to 10 ment of materials within the paper, Ultraviolet light 10-6 to 4 X 10-5 100 to 4,000 such as coloring matter, dust, acids, Visible light 4 X 10-5 to 8 X 10-5 4,000 to 8,000 and the like, resulting from the paper Infrared light 8 X 10-5 to 0.1 8,000 being wetted with water, either acci- Radio waves to 105 dentally or during washing. The water (195) itself does not stain the paper, unless it contains impurities which leave it and enter the paper fibers. Water stains can wave marble (wave nonpareil marble). A in the maufacture of leather. (17) frequently be removed or reduced by marblepatternconsistingof colors waxresist.A methodofproducing hot water or a size bath. drawn into an undulating form, with decorative end- and cover papers, sim- water-vapor permeability. A formof the points of each row meeting each ilar to the process used in BATIK. The PERMEABILITY applied specifically to other. The colorsred, yellow, blue, wax acts toresist the paint inthe water vapor.Because thecellulosic and greenare dropped on the size, CRAYON-RESIST process. Approximately fibers of paper have a very high affinity over which the marbler beats a small equal parts of beeswax and paraffin are for water, water vapor permeability quantity of white. The colors are then used. The mixture is heated, and, if a does not generally correlate with the raked with a double rake (one having crackled effectisdesired,additional permeability of other vapors and gases. teeth 3 or 4 inches apart, those of the brittleness may be imparted by the ad- See also: VAPOR PERMEABILITY. (17, rear rake being adjusted so as to be dition of more paraffin. The melted 72) exactly in the center of the spaces of wax is applied to the paper in lines, wattle (bark). A vegetable tanning mate- the forward rake, and about 11/2 inches spots and/or various shapes. A water rial obtained from the bark of the black behind it). The rakeis then drawn color wash is applied over the entire wattle (Acacia mollissima), indigenous through the colors in a manner similar surface of the paper, and adheres only to Australia but cultivated extensively to that used in executing the NON- to the unwaxed areas. The wax is re- in South Africa and other areas. Large PAREIL MARBLE. i.e., from left to right. moved by placing the paper between quantities of wattle are exported, much The raking is done with an undulating protective sheets and pressing with a of it to England, in the form either of or see-saw motion, but only enough to warm iron. The wax-resist process is the bark itself, or as the extract. The make the top of the last wave touch the also used at times in decorating the tannin content of the bark ranges from bottom of the first, thus producing a leather covers of books. (183, 311) 30 to 45%, with the average being uniformity over the entire sheet and wax size. A sizing agent containing par- about 35 to 39%. Wattle is essentially giving the pattern the appearance of affin or as similar type of wax. a tannin of the condensed class; it has squares. (241) wear resistance. A term used in the leather a high pH value, a low salts and acids wavy edges. An effect in book and other trade to indicate the reciprocal of the content, and a relatively low viscosity, printing papers similar to the warping lossinthickness of a specimen of especially in warm solutions. It is very of book covers. It is usually caused by leather after a specified degree of abra- astringent,penetratesthehide sub- a more rapid rate of change in the sive action upon it. stance rapidly, and has a high degree moisture content of the edges of sheets web. Paper on, or as it comes from, the of tan fixation. Like most other vege- in a pile as compared with the center. papermaking machine in its full width, table tannins, it is seldom used alone, (17) or from a roll of paper in any convert- but generally in mixtures with myra- wax. An animal or plant substance, such ing operation. The expression "in the bolans,sumac,valonca,etc.Also as BEESWAX or CARNAUBA WAX, that direction of the web" means in the known as "mimosa." See also: VEGE- differs from fat in that it is less greasy, direction of the run of the papermaking TABLE TANNINS. (175) harder, and more brittle. Wax is essen- machine when the paper is being made. waved. A term used occasionally to indi- tially an ester of monohydric alcohols It also means the direction in which the cate a book cover that has warped or andfattyacidsof high molecular greater proportion of the paper fibers curled. weight, in association with some free are oriented, i.e., the grain (machine wavelengths. The electromagnetic spec- acids and alcohols. See also: CANOE- direction) of the paper. The direction trum consisting of a continuous range ' ILLA WAX; CHINESE WAX; INSECT WAX; of the web is important in work printed of electromagnetic waves travelling at JAPAN WAX; LANOLIN; MICROCRYSTAL- toregister,as paper stretches more the speed of light, or approximately LINE WAX; PLANT WAX; SPERMACETI across the web than in the direction of 186,300 miles per second. The length WAX. (291) it.

3 2 webbing 282 Whatman, James webbing(s). 1. The strong, narrow fabric, reduces the amount of water in the ing wettable, or the relative affinity of closely woven of plied yarns, on which web. The paper web is carried through liquid for the surface of a solid, such heavy blankbooks are sewn. 2. Fila- the nip of each wet press on aFELT as the affinity of water for paper or ments or threads that sometimes form (2), whichitself,being both bulky leather. Wettability increases directly when adhesive surfaces are separated. and porous, absorbs and thus temoves with increasing affinity,as measured Seealso: STRINGINESS. (83, 309) water from the paper. (17) by the contact angle formed between wedge shaped. A bound book thatis wet-rub resistance. The abilityof the the liquid and the solid. This increases thicker at the spine than at the fore coating of a material to resist softening from non-wettability at an angle greater edge. The condition is caused by exces- and abrading due to rubbing, or, in the than 90° to complete wettability when sive, uncomp.nsated sewing swell, com- case of aprintingpaper, from the the contact angle is 0'. (17) pensation guards that are too thick for combined action of fountain solution wetting. The relative capability of a liquid the inserted material, excessive guard- and blanket. adhesive to display affinity for an ad- ing of damaged folds, or by guards wet-salting. A method of curing hides and herend, i.e., to flow uniformly over the made of paper that is too thick. Such skins for storage and/or transporta- adherend surface. a condition may at times also be the tion subsequent to flaying. The hide is wetting agent. A substance,usuallya reverse, where the fore edge is thicker spread out,flesh sideup, and well SURFACE-ACTIVE AGENT,which reduces than the spine, because of swelling of sprinkled with salt (sodium chloride). the surface tension of a liquid and the paper, or an improperly folded Coarse, or round saltis preferred to therefore increasesitsadhesion to a map, etc. In the latter case, the fore fine salt, as the former spreads evenly, solid surface. Improved wettability is edge swells but the spine, being fixed while the latter tends to form patchy, observed as a lower (often zero) con- in position, does not. (236, 256) wet cakes. A second hide is laid over tact angle between the solid and liquid. weft. The threads or yarns in a fabric the first and sprinkled with salt, a proc- A wetting agent usually consists of a that cross theWARPand extend from ess which is repeated until a stack 5 to molecule with a hydrophilic (water at- selvage to selvage, i.e., the threads car- 8 feet highis formed, the top hide tracting) group at one end and a hydro- ried by the shuttle. The typical cloth is being well overlaid with salt. The pack phobic (water repelling, and therefore stronger, i.e., has a greater breaking is left for approximately 30 days, dur- oil attracting) group at the other. Wet- strength, in the warp direction than in ing which time the salt dissolves in the ting agents are used to improve ob- the weft. Also called "filling." (341) moisture of the hides and the brine sorbency of blotting papers, and for well-closed formation. A paper is said to thus created permeates throughout the improving dispersibilityof pigments. have a well-closed formation when the pile. The amount of salt used is gen- such as calcium carbonate and titanium paper fibers are arrayed in an even, erally 1 pound of salt for each pound oxide. (98, 222) regular manner so that the paper has a of hide. When the hides are ready for wetting down. The process of dampening uniform appearance. It is the opposite shipment, they are "taken up," the salt paper before printing. Wetting down of aWILD (1)formation. (17) is knocked off and the hides are then was necessaryintheearly days of "w" endpaper.See: ZIG-ZAG ENDPAPER. bundled and tied. Also called "green printing because of the non-uniformity west &rid marble. A marble pattern exe- salting."See also: BRINING; DRYING (1); of the height of the type used, and cuted in much the same manner as the DRY-SALTING.(248, 306, 363) because type was usedlonger and. SPANISH MARBLE,the major difference wet strength. The resistance to breakage therefore, wore down more. In addi- being that the paper is laid down with- of an applied adhesive as measured tion, the early hand-operated presses out shading. Aside from the veins,it immediately after removal from im- were not as powerful as later presses. consists of two hues of the same color, mersion under specified conditions of Slightly dampened papertakesink one of which is dark and dotted all time, temperature, and pressure. (72, more readily than dry paper, and does over with small white spots, while the 309) not require as much pressure to make other, or top color, is lighter in shade. wet-strength paper. A paper which, even the impression on the softened surface The vein colors are mixed with gall when saturated with water, has an un- of the paper. The impression, however, and water, as in the case of the Spanish usually high resistance to rupture or makes a thicker line and may also marble. The dark color is sprinkled on disingtegration. This property ispro- show on the other side of the sheet. full so as to drive the veins up well, duced by subjecting the paper or the Wetting down also often resultedin and the white is then beaten on finely fibers from which the paper is made uneven stretching of the paper fibers and evenly all over. The light or top to chemical treatment. Wet strength, during impression, causing the book to colnr is sprinkled on lightly and evenly, which is most evident and significant he thicker in the printed area than in and the paper is then laid on. (159, when itoccurs in absorbent papers, the margins.See also: CONVEX COVERS. 241) should not he confused with water re- wetting out. The process of dipping large wet press. A dewatering unit on the pellency or the resistance of paper to sheets of handmade paper into cold Fourdrinier papermaking machine, sit- wetting when exposed to water. Norm- water so as to remove wrinkles and uated between the sheet-forming equip- ally, a paper loses most of its strength cockles. The paper is then again made ment and the driers. It uses pressure, when saturated with water, and one up into packs and pressed. (197) or a combination of pressure and suc- which retains more than 15% of its Whatman, James (1741-1798). An 18th tion to remove water from the wet web dry strength when completely saturated century English papermaker. His father, before it reaches the driers. The press with water may correctly be referred James Whatman (1702-1759), acquired consists of pressure nips, each formed to as a "wet-strength paper." A very a part ownership in the Turkey Mill by a pair of heavy rollers. One of each superior wet-strength paper may re- papermaking establishment near Maid- pair is usually covered with rubber and tain as much as 60% of its dry strength stone in 1740 and developed ituntil may be perforated and fitted with an when wet. (17, 42) itbecame one of England's leading internal suction device which further wettability. The state or condition of be- papermaking firms. The Whatmans are

3 fj wheeling 283 withenite

credited with the first manufacture of are then colored in the usual manner. leather from head to butt over a dull in Europe, in about 1755, When the wax is removed, the edges blade. (130, 156, 172) and they may also have invented the appear to be colored with white spots. willow calf. A leather produced from wove-wire mold (about 1756). What- The pattern may be vacied by using calfskin, usually brown in color, and man paper is still being made, and is two or three colors, or by sprinkling generally with a typical box grain pat- used for special editions and privately the edges before the wax isapplied tern. It is a full chrome-tanned leather printed books. (140) and then again afteritis removed. boarded either in one directionhead wheeling. The process of tumbling hides (241) to buttor in two directions, as with and skins, or leather, in a revolving whittawed leather. See: TAWING. box calf. (61) drum. Newly tanned leather is wheeled wholesale trade binding. 1. A term syn- willow side. A side of a cattle hide, i.e., afterpressinginordertoremove cut down the backbone, full chrome, wrinkles and creases. (363) onymous with TRADE BINDING (1) in the 18th and 19th centuries. 2. A term semi-chrome, or vegetable tanned, and 7/hipping. The process of overseaming or usually colored brown but also pro- overcasting a-, sometimes associated in England in the insert in a book. See first duced in other colors, but never black. also: WHIP STITCHING. half of the19th century with bindings of wholesale booksellers, espe- Ithasagrainpatternformed by whip stitching. The process of sewing cially those who catered to the pro- BOARDING (1) in one direction (head single sheets into "sections," the num- vincial and foreign book trade. The to butt). There is some confusion con- ber of sheets so sewn depending on the cerning this leather because at times it thickness of the paper. The "sections" booksellers brought new books in sheets and had them bound independ- is boarded in two directions, producing are then sewn on tapes or cords in the ently of the publishers. This type of a grain pattern similar to that of BOX usual manner of hand sewing. (82) SIDE. (351) whistling joint. A wrinkled joint (inner binding was prevalent before the intro- duction of modern EDITION BINDING windows. The uncolored areas of marbled hinge) caused by the board paper not paper. adhering securely in the joint and in- 1825-30). It was most prevalent in the field of fiction, and because it con- "window" copy. A leaf with an illustra- side edge of the board. (65) tinued to satisfy the demand of distri- tion, or other printed matter, on both white dressing. A 19th century and earlier butors of the novel, such publications sides, attached along its edges to a process of treating skins with weak were the last type of book, at least larger leaf provided with an opening organic acids during the manufacture those published in large editions, to be or "window" so that the image area of vellum and parchment. Subsequent bound in publisher's cloth. This was on both sides of the smaller leafis to soaking, washing, and fleshing, the essenfially the reason why equal num- visible. (156) skins were immersed in a series of acid bers of boarded and half-cloth books wire binding. Any form of binding in vats, much in the same manner skins of fiction were issued in wholesalers' which the leaves are secured by wire. are limed today. There were generally as well as in publishers' bindings be- The term formerly restricted to wire- five such baths; the first was usually tween 1820 and at least 1845. Similar stitched pamphlets but is now applied intended to cleanse the skins, the sec- to various forms of spiral,coil,or ond to soften the hair and epidermis (printed) labels were applied to each anditwas usually very difficultto comb bindings. (339) for unhairing, and the final three to distinguish between them. (69) wire lines (wire marks). See: CHAIN LINES swell and plump the skins and give (1); LAID LINES. them body. The entire process gen- wide lines. See: CHAIN LINES. wire sewing. A 19th century method of erally took 5 to 6 weeks. (291) wild.1. An irregular formation of the "sewing" the sections of a book through white edges. The edgcs of a book which fibers in a sheet of paper, resulting in the folds and onto tapes, webbings, or have been trimmed smooth but not a mottled appearance inthe LOOK- muslin, by means of wire staples. This colored, marbled,gilt,sprinkled,or THROUGH of the sheet, as opposed to method of "sewing," which originated otherwise decorated or treated in any a CLOSE FORMATION, it is caused by: in Germany inabout1880,while manner. Alsocalled"plainedges." 1) partial clotting or lumping of the strong, fell into disuse because of the (156) fibers; and 2) high freeness or exces- development of edition (thread) sew- white gold. A pale gold alloy which some- sive vacuum at the first suction box of ing machines, and also because the what resembles silver or platinum and the papermaking machine. It is espe- staples rusted and disintegrated and the usually contains nickel with or without cially noticeable in long-fibered papers, books came apart. See also: SADDLE other metals, such as copper, tin, or although it is possible to imitate a wild STITCHING. (25) zinc. It is used to a limited extent for formation in paper made up of short wire side. That side of a sheet of paper embellishing books. It is considerably fibers by manipulating the sheet form- formed in contact with the wire of the thicker than regular (231/2 karat) gold ing equipment. Also called "cloudy." mold in handmade paper, or the wire leaf. (130) 2. See: MARBLED GRAIN. (17, 42) of the papermaking machine. See also: whiteness. The condition of being white, willow. 1. A machine consisting essenti- FELT SIDE. (17, 52) i.e., the degree to which the color of allyof tworotating drums having wire stabbing (win; stitching). See: SADDLE a material, such as paper, approaches spikes attached to their interior sur- STITCHING; SIDE STITCHING; WIRE SEW- thatof "ideal white." Whiteness in faces. The willow is used to tear raw ING. paper in associated with low colori- material, e.g., rags, waste paper, etc., wire thread. A very small gauge steel or metric purity and high luminous re- for use in making paper. The willow brass wire in reels, which is drawn and flectively. (17) frequently utilizes air currents to re- formed into staples for use in saddle- white size. See: ACID SIZE. move dust fromthe usablepaper- or side-stitching pamphlets and book- white spot. A technique used in coloring making material. Also called a "devil." lets. (199, 339) the edges of a book. Drops of melted 2. A long grain in leather. The willow witherite. A naturally occurring barium wax are spattered on the edges, which grainisproduced by drawingthe carbonate (BaCO3), used as a coating without spring-back or hubs 284 wrong side

material in the manufacture of paper. wood flour. See: FINES. to produce wove paper, and it was first ( 17 ) wood paste. A paste made from finely used by John Baskervillein1757. without spring-back or hubs. An eco- ground wood meal mixed with wheat for Baskerville's type, which was con- nomical form of blankbook binding paste, or other adhesive, and used to sidered to give a superior appearance used in the United States. The book fill in cracks or holes in book boards, on paper that did not have chain lines. is bound without a SPRING-BACK (1) of orforrebuilding damaged corners. Wove paper, in addition, does not have HUBS and isusually covered in half (237) laid lines. (69, 156, 287) leather with canvas or a lighter cloth woof. See: WEFT. wraparound cover. A soft cover used for on the sides. Although the book some- wool wax. See: LANOLIN. pamphlets, etc. It consists cf one folio times has a hollow back, it more often wooze. See: oozE. See also: VEGETABLE that forms the spine as well as the has a tight back, as the latter imparts TANNINS. two covers. See also: SELF COVER. (316) additional strength to what is essenti- workei headband. See: HEADBAND. wrap arounds. Units of 4 pages (2 leaves), ally a weak form of blankbook bind- working life. The length of time during or multiples of 4, generally consisting ing. (339) which an adhesive, after being mixed of illustrative matter, wrapped around with the grain. Paper that has been folded withcatalyst,solvent,etc.,remains a section and sewn with it. (156) in the direction in which the majority suitableforuse. See also: STORAGE wrapper binding. See: GIRDLE BOOK. of the fibers of a machine-made paper LIFE. (309) wrapperl; (wrappered).1.Originally,a are oriented. See also: MACHINE DIREC- wormhole (worm bore). A hole or series temporary paper covering for books TION. of holes bored into, or through, a book designed to protect them until they witness. The leaves of a book which are or board by one or more BOOKWORMS. are bound ina permanent binding. untrimmed andtherefore show the A book containing such holes is said They were plain, marbled, printed, or original size of the sheet of paper. Even to be "wormed." (83, 261) otherwisedecorated.2.Thepaper if the other leaves are trimmed, this Wotton, Thomas (1521-1587). An Eng- cover of a book, such as the modern leaf (or leaves) functions as a "wit- lish bibliophile sometimes referred to paperback. 3. See: BOOK JACKET. (69, ness" that the book has not been ex- as the English Grolier, not only be- 82) cessively cut. See also: UNCUT. (25, cause he adopted Grolier's motto for wrapping. The process of attaching a 140, 371) use on his own books, but because he paper or board cover by means of a wood. A heterogeneous material consist- also used decorative designs similar to line of glue at the spine of a side-stitched ing essentially of cellulose (the prin- those found on Grolier's books. See: or sewn book. The book usually has a cipal constituent of the cell wall of all JEAN GROLIER. The more elaborate of flat spine. plants), hemicelluloses, lignin. organic Wotton's bindings, which are distin- wrapping bands. An early form of the extratives(essentialoils,resins, and guished by theirpainted strapwork, clasp. In its earliest form, which was the like), water, and soluble salts. It were collected during his youth, prob- on Coptic bindings, it consisted of a isthe raw material for making me- ably before 1553, while his later bind- strap attached to the fore edge of the chanical and chemical pulps used in ings are decorated only with armorial upper cover and wound around the the manufacture ofpaper,aswell stamps. All of his elaborate bindings book over the fore edge several times. as numerous other products. Wood. were probably executed in Paris for with the end, which was fitted with an usually in the form of sawdust and him during visits there in the period ornamental piece of bone, being tucked shavings,isalso used extensively as from 1545 to 1552. The Parisian bind- between the strap and the lower cover. an inexpensive source of cellulose in a ings seem to he the work of four or Another strap was similarly wrapped wide varietyof chemicalprocesses. five differentateliers. Some of these around the head and tail.See also: Wood bark, and wood itself to a lesser bindings have the motto: Thonwe Wot- CLASPS. ( 236 ) extent, is an important source of vege- toni et Amiconnn, while another group wringer. A power-driven device, consist- table tanning materials. has the date1552 stamped on the inz of two rubberrollers,through Green wood contains approximately cover. Most of his bindings are of which handmade cases are passed to 40 to 60% water, while dry wood con- brown calfskin. smooth the covering material and se- sistsof approximately 50% carbon, Most of Wotton's books, of which cure it on the outside and to the boards 6% hydrogen, 40 to 42.5% oxygen, some 130 to 140 are extant, descended at the turn-ins. The wringer is used 1% nitrogen, and yields 0.81 to 3.3% through one female line to the Earls of principally in library binding. (256) ash. Chesterfield, who moved them from wringing. The process of removing the wood ashes. The residue of burned wood, Kent to Derbyshire in 1747, and even- bulk of water from wet leather by which contains potasha very strong tually to the 5th Earl of Carnarvon, passing it through a wringing machine, alkali. The alkali is recovered by leech- who sold the collection in 1919. (132, which conskts essentially of two large. ing the ashes with water, and either 253) felt-covered rollers. Wringing generally it or the ashes themselves are used in wove. The type of wire mark on a sheet follows tannage and precedes fatliquor- some areas of the world, in a mixture of machine-made paper. Wove papers inc. Cf: PRESSING: SETTING OUT. (363) with indigo, to render the hair of a do not have the wire marks known wringing down. The process of bringing hidebrittleand easily removed by as LAID LINES. (17) the platen of a press closer to the bed scraping. (130) wove paper. A paper having something plate, i.e . screwing a press shut. (115) woodcut book covers.Pasteboard,or of a clothlike appearance when viewed writing foil. A BLOCKING FOIL backed similar binder's board, covered with by transmitted light. The effect is pro- with a pressure-sensitive adhesive, and paper and printed from a woodblock. duced in machine-made papers by the used for writing titles or classification They were produced in Ferrara, Italy, weave of the dandy roll, and in hand- numbers on hooks with an electric pen at the end of the 15th century, and at made papers by the wires of the mold. or stylus. (92) Augsburg at about the same time. (347) James Whatman was probably the first wrong side. See: RIGHT SIDE.

3 I j 5 X 285 xylographic book

X. The Roman equivalent of 10. See: 7" xylographic book. See: BLOCK BOOK. ROMAN NUMERALS.

dIMMII VIIIMMIIIO

XX. A symbol indicating 23 karat, or "deep" GOLD LEAF. (82)

3 Yankee machine 286 Yoshino a a

Yankee machine. A type of papermaking especially pronounced in papers pro- machine that utilizes one large steam- # duced from mechanical wood pulps, it heated cylinder for drying the newly occurs to a greater or lesser degree in formedsheetofpaperinsteadof virtually all types of vegetable fibers. numerous smaller cylinders. The wet It is frequently associated with brittle- paper web is pressed against the sur- nessin paper (although not neces- face of the cylinder and is usually held sarily), and is sometimes referred to in place by a canvas drier felt as the as "color reversion." (17, 72) cylinder revolves. The Yankee drier yellow prussiate of potash. See: POTAS- produces a machine-glazed finish on SIUM FERROCYANIDE. the side next to the cylinder. The wet yield. The amount of a substance, usually end of the machine may be either a expressed as a percentage of the start- cylinder or Fourdrinier machine and ingmaterial,whichremainsafter may have any number of presses or books were published in yellow en- manufacturing or processing action or auxiliarydriers of the conventional ameled paper covers with an illustra- actions. In papermaking, yield is the type. The characteristic features of the tion is blue or green and black ink on pulp obtained from pulpwood,the Yankee machine are its large cylinder the upper cover. Yellowbacks, which amount of paper produced from the (ranging from 9 to 15 feet in diameter) were originated by the Englishman pulp, etc. In leather manufacture, it is and its very smooth surface. (17, 67) Edmund Evans,flourishedbetween defined as the number of pounds or Yapp style (Yapp edges). A style of bind- 1855 and 1870, but their production square feet of finished leather obtained ing featuring a cover (leather, or other continued until the 1890s. They sold from 100 pounds purchased weight of material, but customarily leather) that for 1 or 2 shillings and measured raw stock (17, 363)- overlaps the three edges of both upper 41/s by 6% inches. Their yellow covers yield value. The stress (either normal or and lower covers continuously. The earned them the nickname of "mustard shear) at which a significant increase covers are always limp or semi-flexible, plasters." (69, 89, 236) indeformation occurs with noin- and are sometimes fitted with a , yellow edge. See: HYMNAL STYLE. crease in load. (17, 309) which was a later refinement. Yapp yellowing. A process or result of a grad- Yoshino. A Japanese tissue paper pro- books, named after the English book- ual change from the original appear- duced from the fibers of the paper seller of the second half of the 19th ance of a material, such as paper, due mulberry, and named after the town century, William Yapp, always have to aging or environmental changes, or of Yoshino in central Honshu, Japan. round corners, and the endpapers are both. While yellowinginpaperis ( 17 ) frequently made froma"surface" paper, usually black. The edges are sometimes gilt, frequently over red, or YAPP are stained or otherwise colored. The Yapp style is especially associated with books of devotion (almost exclusively today), although a half century ago books of verse were sometimes bound in somewhat similar covers. See also: CIRCUIT EDGES. (81, 82, 236) yarn. A continuous strand, often cot two or more plies, composed of carded or combed fibers twisted together by spin- ning filaments laid para1131 or twisted together, or a singlelament.Itis made from natural or synthetic fibers and filaments, or blends of these, and is used for the warp and filling in weaving cloth. yawning boards. Book cover boards that curl away from the text block of the book. See also: WARPING. (115) yellowback. A cheappopularnovel, usually of an inferior quality (although not without a certain glittering appeal), and usually sensational in nature. The name derives from the fact that such

! 3_ Zaehnsdorf, Joseph 287 zirconium tetrachloride

Zaehnsdorf,Joseph(1816-1886).An posed betweenliftsofflatprinted Austro-Hungarian bookbinder, born in India or other thin papers on automatic Budapest and apprenticed at the age feeders of folding machines. They are of 15 to a Herr Knipe, a bookbinder used to prevent sagging of thelifts. of Stuttgart, with whom he worked for 3. Polished sheets of zinc used in plat- 5 years. ThereafterApe travelled to ing paper. Vienna 4v/here he wffliked in ye shop zinc sulfide. A compound (ZnS), which of a lierr Sterlan. Zaehnsrfleft occurs naturally as "blende," and is Vienna in about1836, travelledin prepared directly from the elements Europe, and finally arrived in London and by precipitation of a zinc salt solu- in 1837. There he went to work for tion with ammonium sulfide. It is used Messrs. Westley & Co., stayed for 3 a as a pigment, or as a component of years, and then went to work for John LITHOPONE as a loading material or Mackenzie for another 3 years, 1840 thing usually accomplished by sewing coating pigment in the manufacture of to 1842. He then established his own the endpaper below the gusset so that paper (17) bolkbinding firm, which flourished un- it can expand with the movement of zinc white. Zinc oxide (ZnO), a perma- til his death, and was then taken over the board as the book is opened. Un- nent white pigment produced by a byhisonlyson,JosephWilliam fortunately, sewing the endpaper at flameprocessinhightemperature Zaehnsdorf (1853-1930). only one point is structurally unsound, furnaces. It is used as a white pigment One of the most influential book- as it leaves the fly leaves, as well as in making water colors and imparting binders of his time, Zaehnsdorf was the leather joint (if used), secured only opacity and color to paper. Because considered to be an excellent crafts- by tipping.If the endpaper is sewn of its ability to pick up, retain, and man, with his forwardinp and finishing through both the fly leaves and the release electrostatic charges, itis also being of equal merit, although in the made endpaper, whichisthe usual usedinthe manufacture of certain latter he copied more than he inno- practice, the advantage of flexibility copying rapers. While zinc white is Cie vated,althoughinvariablyingood is negated and drag results, which the whitest of all pigments,itlacks the taste.Duringhislifetime,fineex- endpaper was intended to eliminate. opacity of a pigment such as titanium amples of his workmanship were to Also called "v" endpaper, "w" end- dioxide; however, it is also less expen- be found in libraries of all of the great paper. (81, 161, 343) sive. (17) English book collectors. (94, 347, 371) zig-zag fold. See: CONCERTINA FOLD. zirconium tanning. A method of produc- zebu, marble. A marble pattern consist- zig-zag guard. A continuous one-piece ing leather utilizing salts of zirconium, ing of red, black, blue and orange guard prepared by folding a sheet of usually under very acid conditions. The raked from front to back on the size, heavy paper, linen, or Japanzse copy- highaciditypermitsthe zirconium followed by application of buff or yel- ing paper concertina-wise. Itis used salts to precipitate basic salts at lower low top colors in spots. The paper is in the construction of photograph al- pH values (on the order of 2.0) than either laid flat or shaded. The lines of bums and similar guard books, as wr..:11 either aluminum or chromium, which red, blue, black, and orange are formed as for sewing the folios of large blank- arealso usedinthe production of into irregular wavy lines by the spots books and for resewing the sections of leather. Zirconium saltstendto be of top color. (369) books inconservationbinding. For very astringent, and normally produce zero angle. A completely flattened con- conservation sewing, the thin Japanese a tight, firm leather; they also cause figuration of the fiber bundles of a copying paper is used, its purpose being rapid tannage of the grain of a leather skin, in which the fibers are not dis- to prevent the adhesive used in glu- and produce a fine, short nap on suede tributedinthecustomary complex ing up from reaching the sections and leathers. By the use of masking salts, three-dimensional network, as in the inside of the book. (367) such as acetates, their astringency can leather,but are aligned intolayers zinchydrosulfite. Acrystallinesalt bereduced,resultinginasofter, parallel to the grain and flesh surfaces (Zn5203), prepared by the reaction of smooth-grainedleather.Zirconium- of the skin. A true zero angle is prob- sulfur dioxide with an aqueous suspen- tanned leatherisusually fuller and ably not attainable, although PARCH- sion of powdered zinc, and used for firmer than that produced by chrome MENT and vellum generally have a bleaching mechanical wood pulp. (17) tanning and actually feels more like very low angle. This type of configura- zinco. A economical metallic substitute a vegetable-tanned leather. The leather tion results from drying a skin under for BINDER'S BRASS, produced by a so producedisof a pleasing white high tension. (291) photomechanicalprocess.Zinco is color, has good light fastness, and is zig-zag endpaper. A type of ENDPAPER much less durable than brass, and im- superior to alum-tawed skin in that it devised by either Douglas Cockerell or pressions made with it tend to be lack- does not wash out and has a higher T.J.Cobden-Sanderson toward the ing in sharpness. (140) (90*C) shrinkage temperature. (248, end of the 19th century. The zig-zag zincs. 1. Metal plates used for interleav- 306, 363) endpaper is designed to eliminate drag ing or for fences in casing or covering zirconium tetrachloride. A white, crystal- on the fly leaves and text block, some- books. 2. Large sheets of metal inter- line solid (ZrCI4), that reacts vigor- zirconium tetrachloride 288 zirconium tetrachloride

ously with water, and is prepared by coal, or by the action of chlorine and erties and is used in producing white the action of chlorine on a mixture carbon tetrachloride on the oxide at leathers. (309) of or zirconium oxide and char- 800*C, The basic salt has tanning prop- 289

SOURCES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

1.Abbey, John Roland. English bind- 14. - Committee on bookbinding. 26.Bailey, Frederick T. on ings, 1490-1940, in the library of Care and binding of books and histology. 16th ed. Ed. by Wilfred J. R. Abbey. Edited by G. D. Hob- magazines. Ch icago. Ame rican M. Copenhaven, and others. Balti- son. London. Privately printed at Library Association. 1928. more. Williams & Wilkins. 1971. the Chiswick Press. 1940. 15. - Library Technology Program. 27.Banister, Manley Miles. Pictorial 2. - An exhibition of modern Eng- Development of performance stand- manual of bookbinding. New York. lish and French bindings from the ards for library binding, phase I. Ronald. 1958. collection of Major J. R. Abbey. Chicago. American Library Asso- 28.Barber, Giles. Textile and embroid- London. Arts Council. 1949. ciation. (L. T. P. publications no. ered bindings.Oxford.Bodleian 3, - French and Italian collectors 2). 1961. Library. 1971. and their bindings, illustrated from 16. - Library Technology Program. 29.Barnes, Richard H. Gilding & the examples in the library of J. R. Ab- Development of performance stand- making of gold leaf. n.p. 1962. bey. Edited by A. R. A. Hobson. ards for binding used in libraries, 30.Barrett. Firm. Bookbindery. Bar- Oxford. Printed for presentation to phase 11. Chicago. American Li- rett reading room supplies. Chi- the members of the Roxburghe brary Association. (L. T. P. publi- cago. Barrett. 1914. Club. 1953. cations no. 10). 1966. 31.Barrow, WilliamJ.The Barrow 4.Adrosko, Rita J. Natural dyes in 17. American Paper and Pulp Associa- method of preserving deteriorated theUnitedStates.Washington, tion. The dictionary of paper, in- documents.Richmond, VaThe D.C. Smithsonian Institution Press. cluding pulp,paperboard,paper author. 1965. (United States National Museum properties and related papermaking 32. - Deterioration of book stock, Bulletin 281). 1968. terms. 3rd ed. New York. Amer- causes and remedies .. . Ed. by 5. Ainsworth, John H. Paper; the fifth ican Paper and Pulp Association. Randolph W. Church. Richmond, wonder. 2nd ed. Kaukauna, Wisc. 1965. Va. Virginia State Library Publica- Thomas. 1959. 18. American Society for Testing and tions, No. 10. 1959. 6.Alexander, Jerome. Glue and gela- Materials. Committee D-6 on paper 33. - Instructions for the deacidifi- tin. New York. Chemical Catalog and paper products. Paper and cation and lamination of docu- Co. (American Chemical Society, paperboard; characteristics, nomen- ments. c. 1954. series). 1923. clature, and significance of tests. 34. - Manuscripts and documents, 7.Americanarchivist.Societyof 3rd ed. Philadelphia. American So- their deterioration and restoration. American Archivists. Washington, ciety for Testing and Materials. 2nd ed. Charlottesville, Va. Uni- D.C. (Special technical publication 60- versity of Virginia Press. 1972. 8. American dictionaryof printing B), 1963. 35. - Procedures and equipment and bookmaking... Ed. by W. W. 19. American Society for Testing Mate- used in the Barrow method of re- Pasco. Detroit. Gale Research Co. rials. Symposium on testing ad- sorting manuscripts and documents. 1967. hesives for durability and perman- Richmond, Va. W. J. Barrow. 1952. 9.American Institute of Graphic Arts. ence. Philadelphia. American So- 36. Barrow (W. J.) Research Labora- Bookproduction; How? Why? ciety for Testing Materials. (ASTM tory. Physical and chemical prop- When?, by C. E. Nicholson, and specialtechnicalpublicationno. erties of book papers, 1507-1949. others. New York. American Insti- 138). 1952. Richmond, Va. Barrow (W. J.) Re- tute of Graphic Arts. 194-. 20. Apps, E. A. Ink technology for searchLaboratory.Permanence/ 10. American leather chemists associa- printers and students. New York. durability of the book, no. 7. 1974. tion. Easton, Pa. American Leather Chemical Publishing Co. 1963. 3 37. - Polyvinyl acetate (PVA) ad- Chemists Association. vol. hesives for use in library bookbind- 11. American Library Association. 21. - Printing ink technology. Lon- ing. Richmond, Va. Barrow (W. J.) American libraries. Chicago. Amer- don. Hill. 1958. Research Laboratory. Permanence/ ican Library Association. 22.Atkins, J. Howard. Tying the future durability of the book, no. 4. 1965. 12. - Editorial Committee. Sub- to a thread. Medford, Mass. Over- 38. - Spot testing for unstable book committee on library terminology. sewing Machine Co. of America. and record papers. Richmond, Va. A. L. A. glossary of library terms, 1968. Barrow (W. J.) Research Labora- with a selection of terms in related 23.Baarlaer, Joseph L., comp. and ed. tory. Permanence/durability of the fields. Compiled by Elizabeth H. Graphic arts encyclopedia... Cin- book, no. 6. 1969. Thompson. Chicago. American cinnati. Cincinnati Typesetting Co. 39. - Spray deacidification. Rich- Library Association. 1943. 1966. mond, Va. Barrow (W. J.)Re- 13. - Committee on bookbinding. 24.Bailey, Arthur Low. Bookbinding. searchLaboratory.Permanence/ Binding for libraries. 2nd ed. Chi- Chicago. American Library Asso- durability of the book, no. 3. 1964. cago. American Library Associa- ciation. 1911. 40. - Strength and other character- tion. (A. L: A. library handbook 25. - Librarybookbinding. New istics of book papers 1800-1899. no. 5). 1915. York. Wilson. 1916. Richmond, Va. Barrow (W. J.) Re-

31u 290

searchLaboratory.Permanence/ printing. London. British Federa- Modern paper-making. 3rd ed. Ox- durability of the book, no. 5. 1967. tion of Master Printers.1967. 7 ford. Blackwell. 1952. 41. - Test data of naturally aged vol. 78. - Paper and its relationship to papers. Richmond, Va. Barrow (W. 59.British Museum. Bookbindings books. London. Dent. 1934. J.) Research Laboratory. Perman- from the library of Jean Grolier. 79. - Paper; an historical account ence/durability of the book, no. 2. London. British Museum. 1965. of its making by hand from the 1964. 60.British Paper and Board Makers' earliest times down to the present 42.Battista,OrlandoA.Synthetic Association. Paper making; a gen- day.Oxford.Shakespeare Head fibers in papermaking. New York. eral account of its history, proc- Press. 1934. Interscience. 1964. esses and applicationsRev. ed. 80. - The paper-making machine; 43.Beckwith,TheodoreDay,and London. British Paper and Board its invention, evolution and devel- others. Deterioration of paper; the Makers' Association. 1965. opment. New York.Pergamon cause and effects of foxing. Berke- 61.British Standards Institution. Brit- Press. 1967. ley, Calif. University of California ishstandard glossary of leather 81.Clough, Eric A. Bookbinding for Press. 1940. ternis. B. S. 2780: 1956. London. librarians. London. Association of 44.Bibliographica.Westport,Conn. British Standards Institution. Assistant Librarians. 1957. Greenwood Reprint Corp. 1970. 62.Britt, Kenneth W., ed. Handbook 82.Clowes, William Beaufoy. A guide 45. of America. of pulp and paper technology. 2nd toprinting.London. Heineman. Papers. New York. The Society. ed. New York. Van Nostrand Rein- 1963. 46.blades, William. Books in chains hold. 1970. 83.Cockerell, Douglas. Bookbinding, and other bibliographical papers. 63.Browning, Bertie Lee. Analysis of and the care of books; a textbook Detroit. Gale Research Co. 1968. paper. New York. Dekker. 1969. for bookbinders and librarians. 5th 47. - The enemies of books. Lon- 64. Buck, Mitchell Starrett. Book re- ed. London. Pitman. 1971. don. Stock. 1896. pair and restoration; a manual of 84. - Some notes on bookbinding. 48.Blomquist, Richard Frederick. Ad- practical suggestions. Philadelphia. Oxford. . hesives; past, present and future. Brown. 1918. 1929. Philadelphia. American Society for 65. Buffum, Clara. Hand-bound books 85.College & research libraries. Chi- Testing and Materials. Edgar Mar- ... Providence, R.I. 1935. cago. Association of College & Re- burg Lecture 1963. 1963. 66.Burdett, Eric. The craft of book- search Libraries. 49.Bookbinding Leather Committee. binding; a practical handbook. Lon- 86.Collins, Arthur Frederick. Book The causes and prevention of the don. Davis & Charles. 1975. crafts for senior pupils; a handbook decayofbookbindingleather. 67.Calkin, John Burgess. Modern pulp for teachers and students. Leicester. Memorandumno. 6. London. and paper making. 3rd ed. New Dryad Press. 1938. Printing Industry Research Asso- York. Reinhold. 1957. 87.The ; a quarterly for book ciation and British Leather Manu- 68.Carlsen, DLtvey E. Graphic arts. lovers. New York. Pynson. facturers ResearchAssociation. 4th ed. Peoria, Ill. Bennett. 1970. 88. ColumbiaUniversity Quarterly. 1933. 69.Carter, John. A B C for book col- New York. Columbia University 50. Bookcollector.London.Queen lectors.5thed.London.Hart- Press. Anne Press. Davis. 1972. 89.Comparato, Frank E. Books for the 51.The Bookman's glossary. 3rd ed. 70. - Binding variants in English millions; a historyof the men New York. Bowker. 1951. publishing,1820-1900.London. whose methods and machines pack- 52. Book Manufacturers' Institute. Constable. 1932. aged the printed word. Harrisburg, Helpful aids in book production. 71. - Publisher's cloth; an outline Pa. Stackpole. 1971. New York. Book Manufacturers' history of publisher's binding in 90.Conference on a Permanent/Dur- Institute. 1953. England, 1820-1900. New York. able Book Paper. Washington, D.C. 53. Book manufacturers' monthly. New Bowker. 1935. 1960. Permanent/ durablebook York. Book Manufacturers' Insti- paper; summary. Richmond, Va. tute. 72.Casey, James P. Pulp and paper: chemistry and chemical technology. Virginia State Library.(Virginia 54. Book Production.Tricks of the State Library publication, no. 16). trade. New York. Bookbinding and 2nd ed. New York. Interscience. 1960-61. 3 vol. 1960. Book Production. 1944. 91.Conkey, W. 13. Company. What a 55. Book production industry. Cleve- 73.Chamber's encyclopedia. New York businessman should know about land. Penton. Market Publications, and London. W. & R. Chambers. printing and bookmaking. Rev. ed. Inc. 74.Chidester, Otis Holden. First year Hammond, Inc. W. B.Conkey. 56.Bouchot, Henry Francois X. M. graphic arts. Tucson, Ariz. Graphic 1928. The book; its printers, illustrators, Arts Press. 1949. 92.Corderoy, John. Bookbinding for and binders, from Gutenberg to the 75.Chivers, Cedric. The paper of lend- beginners. New York.Watson- present time. London. Grevel. 1890. ing library books, with some re- Guptill. 1967. 57.Brassington, William Salt,ed. A marks on their bindings. London. 93. Coupe, Raymond Richard. Science history of the art of bookbinding, Truslove & Hanson. 1909. of printingtechnology.London. with some account of the books of 76.Clapp, Anne F. Curatorial care of Cassell. 1966. the ancients. London. Elliot Stock. works of art on paper. Rev. ed. 94.Coutts, Henry T., and George A. 1894. Oberlin, Ohio. Intermuseum Con- Stephen. Manual of library book- 58.British Federation of Master Print- servation Association. 1973. binding; practical and historical. ers. Preliminary technical course in 77.Clapperton,RobertHenderson. London. Libraco. 1911.

3 ! 291

95.Cowie's bookbinder's manual; con- duced book. New York. Hutchin- (U.S. Department of Agriculture, taining a full description of leather son's Scientific and Technical Pub- leaflet no. 69). 1930. and vellum binding...7th ed. lications. 1953. 135.Garnett, Porter, ed. The fine book; London. Strange. (186-). 117. - The illuminated book; its his- a symposium ... Pittsburgh. The 96.Craig, Maurice James. Irish book- tory and production. Rev. ed. New Laboratory Press. 1934. bindings, 1600-1800. London. Cas- York. Praeger. 1967. 136.Gaskell, Philip. New introduction sell. 1954. 118. Donnelley (R. R.) & Sons Co. to bibliography. New York. Oxford 97.Crane, W. J. E. Bookbinding for Extra binding at the Lakeside Press. University Press. 1972. amateurs ... New York. Scribner. Chicago. Donnelley. 1925. 137.Gaskill & Cooper. Firm. Book- 1903. 119. - A rod for the back of the binders tool engraving and furnish- 98. Crown Zellerbach Corp. Making binder.. .Chicago. Donnelley. ingestablishment.Philadelphia. pulp and paper. San Francisco. 1929. n.p. Crown Zellerbach Corp. 1958. 1 120.Douglas,Clara,andConstance 138.Gaylord Brothers. Firm. Bookcraft vol. Lehde. Book repairing ... Seattle. .. by Donald M. Kidd, Syracuse. 99. Cummins, John Francis. The print- University of Washington Press. Gaylord Bros. 1941. er's guide. 2nd ed. Dublin.n.p. (University of Washington exten- 139.Gazurian, Johnny A. The advertis- 1952. sionseriesno.7; University of ing & graphic arts glossary. Los 100.Cundall, Joseph, ed. On bookbind- Washington bulletin 624). 1940. Angeles. Los Angeles Trade-Tech- ing, ancient and modern. London. 121. Drewery, R. F. Library binderies. nical College. 1966. Bell. 1881. London. Library Association. (Li- 140.Glaister, Geoffrey Ashall. An en- 101. Cuneo (John F.) Co. Plan for a brary Association pamphlet no. 3). cyclopedia of the book. Cleveland. good book ... Chicago. John F. 1950. World. 1960. Cuneo Co. 1951. 122.Duff, Edward Gordon.Early 141.Goldschmidt, Ernst Philip. Gothic 102.Cunha,GeorgeDanielMartin. printedbooks.London.Kegan and Renaissance bookbindings. 2nd Conservation of library materials. Paul, Trench, Trilbner. 1893. ed. Amsterdam. Israel. 1967. 2 vol. Metuchen, N.J. Scarecrow. 1967. 123. Dunn and Wilson Group. The art 142. Goodwin, Bancroft L.Pamphlet 103.Curator. New York. American Mu- and craft of bookbinding. Falkirk. binding.. .Chicago. United Ty- seum of Natural History. Dunn & Wilson. 1968. pothetae of America. (Typographic 104. Dahl, Svend. History of the book. 124. Dutton, Meiric Keeler. Historical technical series for apprentices, pt. 2nd English ed. Metuchen, N.J. sketch of bookbinding as an art. 5, no. 30). 1925. Scarecrow. 1968. Norwood. Holliston Mills. 1968. 143.Grant, Julius. Books & documents; 105. Dana, John Cotton. Notes on book- 125. Eddy (E. B.) Co. The Eddy hand- dating, permanence and preserva- binding for libraries. Rev. ed. Chi- book of production. Hull, Canada. tion. London. Grafton. 1937. cago. Library Bureau. 1910. Eddy Co. 1944. 144. - A laboratory handbook of 106.Darley, Lionel S. Bookbinding, then 126. Ede, Charles. The art of the book pulp and paper manufacture. 2nd and now ... London. Faber and ... New York. Studio. 1951. ed. London. Arnold. 1961. Fabet. 1959. 127.Eggeling, Arthur, and associates. 145.Gray, Niel. Paper-cutting machines 107. - Introduction to book binding. Bookbinding by hand. New York. ... Chicago. United Typothetae of London. Faber and Faber. 1965. Eggeling Bookbindery. 1925. America. (Typographical technical 108. Davenport, Cyril James Humphries. 128.Ellis. Firm. Booksellers. London. series for apprentices, pt.1,no. Beautiful books. London. Methuen. A collection of armorial bookbind- 10). c. 1918. 1929. ings of the Tudor, Stuart and Han- 146. Grimm, Francis W. A primer to 109. -The book; its history and de- overianperiods, describedby bookbinding.Boston.Houghton velopment.NewYork. Smith. George Smith and Frank Benger. Mifflin. 1939. 1930. London. Ellis. 1927. 147. Groome, George C. Bookbinding 110. - Cameo book stamps, figured 129. Emerson, Gilbert D. Bookbinding materials. Washington, D.C. U.S. and described.London. Arnold. forlibraries.Philadelphia.n.p. Government Printing Office. 1938. 1911. 1909. 148.Guldbeck, Per Ernst. The care of 111. -Englishembroideredbook- 130. Fahey, Herbert, and Peter Fahey. historical collections; a conserva- bindings.Loadon.KeganPaul, Finishing in hand bookbinding ... tion handbook for the nonspecialist. Trench, Triibner. 1899. San Francisco. The authors. 1951. Nashville.AmericanAssociation 112. - Roger Payne, English book- 131.Feipel, Louis Nicholas, and Earl W. for State and Local History. 1972. binder of the eighteenth century. Browning.Librarybookbinding 149. Guttman, Werner H. Concise guide Chicago. Printed for the Caxton manual ... Chicago. American Li- to structural adhesives. New York. Club. 1929. brary Association. 1951. Reinhold. 1961. 113. - Royal English book bindings. 132.Fletcher, William Younger. Book- 150. Hague, Clifford Wilson. Printing New York. Macmillan. 1896. binding in England and France. and allied graphic arts. Milwaukee. 114. - ThomasBerthelet,royal London. Seeley. 1897. Bruce. 1957. printer and bookbinder to Henry 133.Forsyth, K. Marjorie. Bookbinding 151.Halfer, Josef. The progress of the VIII...Chicago. . for teachers, students and amateurs. marbling art. . .Translated by 1901. London, Black. 1932. Herman Dieck,Buffalo.Kinder. 115.Diehl,Edith.Bookbinding;its 134.Frey, Ralph Wylie,and F.P. 1893. background and technique. New Veitch.Preservationofleather 152.Hannett, John. Bibliopegia; or, the York. Rinehart. 1946. 2 vol. boo kbindings.Washington,D.C. art of bookbinding ...London. 116. Direnger, David. The hand-pro- U.S. Government Printing Office. Simkim, Marshall. 1848.

3 .4.1 4.,0 292

153. - An inquiry into the nature mund Ranger.... Worcester, Mass. PIA joint research bulletin, B-4). and form of the books of the an- The Society. 1929. 19- cients ... London. Groombridge. 172. Horne, Herbert Percy. The bind- 187. - Pyroxylin-treated book cloths. 1837. ing ol books; an essay in the his- Washington, D.C. U.S.Govern- 154.Harrison, T. The bookbinding craft tory of gold-tooled bindings. 2nd ment PrintingOffice. (GPO-PIA and industry; an outline of its his- ed. New York.Haskell House. joint research bulletin, B-7). 1948. tory, development, and technique. 1970. 188. - Starch-filledbookcloth. London. Pitman. 1926. 173. Horton, Carolyn. Cleaning and pre- Washington, D.C.U.S.Govern- 155. - Fragments of bookbinding serving bindings and related ma- ment PrintingOffice.(Technical technique. terials. Chicago. American Library bulletin, no. 21). 1934. 156. Harrod, Leonard Montague. The Association. (Conservation ofli- 189. Karch, Robert Randolph. Graphic librarians' glossary of terms used in brary materials pamphlet no.1; arts procedures. 4th ed. Chicago. librarianship and the book crafts, Library Technology Project publi- American Technical Society. 1970. and reference book. 3rd ed. Lon- cations, no. 16). 1969. 190. - Printing and alliedtrades. don. Deutsch. 1971. 174. Howes, Frank Norman. Vegetable 5th ed. New York. Pitman. 1962. 157. Harrop, Dorothy. Modern book gums and resins. Waltham, Mass. 191. Katz, Irving. Adhesive materials, production. London. Bing ley. 1968. Chronica Botanica. 1949. their properties and usage. Long 158. Harthan, JohnP.Bookbindings. 175. - V egetable tanning materials. Beach, Calif. Foster. 1971. 2nd ed. London. H. M. Stationery London. Butterworth. 1953. 192. Kenyon, Frederick George. Books Office. (Victoria & Albert Museum 176.Hunter, Dard. Paper-making; the and their readers in ancient Greece illustrated booklet no. 2). 1961. history and technique of an ancient and Rome. 2nd ed. Folcroft, Pa. 159. Has luck, Paul Nooncree, ed. Book- craft. 2nd ed. New York. Knopf. Folcroft Library Editions.1971. binding. Philadelphia. McKay. 1947. 193. Kimberly, Arthur Evarts, and B. W. 1903. 177. - Papermaking through eight- Scribner. Summary report of Na- 160. Heckman Bindery,Inc. For the een centuries. New York. Frank- tionalBureauofStandardsre- lack of a stitch. North Manchester, lin.(Burt Franklin research and search on preservation of records. Ind. Heckman Bindery, Inc. 195-. source series, 735). 1971. Washington, D.C.U.S.Govern- 161. Hewitt-Bates, James Samuel. Book- 178. Husayn, Muhammad Admad. Ori- mentPrintingOffice.(National binding. 8th ed. Leicester. Dryad. gins of the book; Egypt's contribu- Bureau of Standards miscellaneous 1967. tiontothe development ofthe publications, M 154). 1937. 162. Higham, Robert R. A. A handbook book from papyrus to codex, by 194.Kinder, Louis Herman. Formulas of paper board and board; its man- Mohamed A. Hussein. Translated for bookbinders... London. Put- ufacturing technology, conversion by Dorothy Jaeschke and Douglas nam. 1905. and usage. London. Business Books. Sharp. New York. GraphicSo- 195.Kingzett, Charles Thomas. King- 1970-71. 2 vol. ciety. 1970. zett's chemical encyclopedia; a di- 163. - A handbook of papermaking. 179. Hutchings, Ernest A. D. A survey gest of chemistry & its industrial London. Oxford University Press. ofprintingprocesses.London. applications. Ed. by D. H. Hey, 1963. Heinemann. 1970. and others. 9th ed. London. Bail- 164.Hitchcock, Frederick H. The build- 180.Ireladd, Graham H. Paperboard here, Tindell and Cassell. 1966. ing of a book. . .2nd ed. New on the multi-vat cyclinder machine. 196.Klinefelter, Lee Miller. Bookbind- York. Bowker. 1929. New York. Chemical Publications. ing made easy. Rev. ed. Milwau- 165. Hobson, Geoffrey Dudley. Bind- 1968. kee. Bruce. 1960. ings in Cambridge libraries. . . 181.Jamieson, Eleanore. English em- 197. Labarre, E. J. Dictionary and en- Cambridge. Cambridge University bossed bindings, 1825-1850. Cam- cyclopaedia of paper and paper- Press. 1929. bridge. Cambridge University making. 2nd ed. London. Oxford 166. - Blind-stamped panels in the Press. 1972. University Press. 1952. 198. Langwell, WilliamHerbert. English book-trade, c. 1485-1555. 182.Jennett,Sean.The makingof The London. The Bibliographical So- books. 4th ed. New York. Praeger. conservation of hooks and docu- ciety. 1944. 1967. ments. London. Pitman. 1957. 167. - English bindings before 1500. 183. Johnson, Pauline. Creative book- 199. Latham. Firm. Monitor book wire stitchers.Chicago. Latham Ma- Cambridge. Cambridge University binding. Seattle.Universityof Press. 1929. Washington Press. 1963. chinery Co. n.d. 168. - Maio li, Canevari and others. 200. Lehmann-Haupt, Hellmut Emile. 184. Kantrowitz, Morris S., and others. BookbindinginA merica; Boston.Little,Brown.(Mono- Bindery glues. Washington, D.C. three graphs on bookbindings, no.1). essays.Portland,Maine.South- U.S. Government Printing Office. worth-A nthoensen. 1941. 1926. (GPO-PIA joint research bulletin, 169.Holden, John Allen. The book- 201. - The hook in America... 2nd B-3). 1948. ed. New York. Bowker. 1951. man's glossary . . .3rd ed. New 185. - Flexible glues for bookbind- 202. - The life of the book... New York. Bowker. 1951. ing. Washington, D.C. U.S. Gov- 170. Holme, Charles, ed. The art of the York. Abelard-Schuman. 1957. ernment Printing Office. (Techni- 203. Leighton, Douglas. Modern book- book ... New York. The Studio. cal bulletin, no. 24). 1941. 1914. binding: a survey and a prospect. 186. - Miscellaneousbookbinding New York.OxfordUniversity 171. Holmes, Thomas James. The book- adhesives. Washington, D.C. U.S. Press. 1935. bindings of John Ratcliffe and Ed- Government Printing Office. (GPO- 204. Lewis,ArthurWilliam. Basic 293

bookbinding. New York. Dover, bindings in cloth and leather. Lon- library; style and designs of book- 1957. don. Fraser. 1974. bindings, from the twelfth to the 205. The library; a quarterly review of 225. McMurtrie, DouglasCrawford. twentieth century. London. Maggs. bibliography. London.Milford. The book; the story of printing & 1956. 206. LibraryAssociation.Bookcon- bookmaking. 3rd ed. New York. 243. - The development of certain struction. London. Library Asso- Oxford University Press. 1943. stylesofbookbinding.London. ciation. 1931. 226. - The golden book; the story Private Libraries Association. 1963. 207. Leather for libraries, by Ed- of fine books and bookmaking 244. Fivecenturiesof English ward Wyndham Hulme, and others. past & present. 3rd ed. New York. bookbinding. London. Scolar. London. Library Supply Co. 1905. Covici-Friede. 1934. 1978. 208. Library Binding Institute. Library 227. Madagan,JohnR.Bookbinding 245. - Sixteenth-century gold-tooled binding handbook. Rev. ed. Bos- methods and aids for the printing bookbindings in the Pierpont Mor- ton.LibraryBindingInstitute. trade. Charlotte, N. C. Washburn gan Library. New York. Pierpont 1971. Printing Co. 1952. Morgan Library. 1971. 209. - LibraryBindingInstitute 228.Mansfield, Edgar. Modern design 246. - Studies in the book trade in standard for librarybinding. 5th in bookbinding; the work of Edgar honour of Graham Pollard. Ox- ed. Boston. Library Binding Insti- Mansfield. London. Peter Owen. f1o9r415.. OxfordUniversityPress. tute. 1971. 1966. 210. LibraryBindingInstitute 219.Martin, A. G. Finishing processes 247. O'Conor,JohnFrancisXavier. standard for pre-library bound new inprinting.New York.Focal Facts about bookworms; their his- books.3rded.Boston.Library Press. 1972. tory in literature and work inli- Binding Institute. 1960. 230. Mason, John. Paper making as an braries. New York. . 1878. 211.Library journal. New York. R. R. artistic craft, with a note on nylon 248.O'Flaherty, Fred, and others, eds. Bowker. paper. London. Faber and Faber. The chemistry and technology of Library quarterly.Chicago. Uni- 1959. leather.NewYork.Reinhold. versity of Chicago Press. 231. - A practical course in book- (American Chemical Society mono- 213. Library resources & technical serv- craf ts and bookbinding. Leicester. graph series,no.134). 1956-65. ices. Richmond, Va. Library Re- C. H. Gee. 1935. 4 vol. sources & Technical Services. 232. Matthews, William F. Bookbind- 249. Oldham, James Basil. Blind Panels (American Library Association). ing, a manual for those interested ofEnglishbinders.Cambridge. 214. Library trends. Urbana, Ill. Uni- in :he craft of bookbinding. Lon- Cambridge University Press. 1958. versity of Illinois Library School. don. Gollancz. 1929. 250. English blind-stamped bind- University of Illinois. 233. Mayer, Ralph. A dictionary of art ings. Cambridge. Cambridge Uni- 215.Linton, C. Burton. Hints on for- terms and techniques. New York. versity Press. 1952. warding, finishing and ruling. Wil- Crowell. 1969. 251. Organ,Robert M.Designfor liamsport, Pa. Burt. 1910. 234. Me !cher, Daniel. and Nancy Lar- scientific conservation of antiqui- 216. London. University. Historical rick. Printing and promotion hand- ties. Washington, D.C. Smithsonian armorial bookbindings in the uni- book ... 3rd ed. New York. Mc- Institution Press. 1968. Graw-Hill. 1966. versity library... London. Uni- 252. Oswald, John Clyde. A history of versity of London. 1937. 235.Miall, Laurence Mackenzie, and printing; its development through 217.Loring, Rosamond Bowditch. Dec- D. W. A. Sharp, eds. A new dic- fivehundred years. New York. tionary of chemistry. 4.11 ed. New orated book papers. .. 1st ed. Appleton. 1928. 1942; 2nd ed.1952. Cambridge, York. Wiley. 1968. 236. Middleton, Bernard C. A history 253. OxfordUniversity.BodleianLi- Mass. Harvard University Press. brary.Finebindings1500-1700 218. Lydenberg, Harry Miller, and John of English craft bookbinding tech- nique. New York. Hafner. 1963. from Oxford libraries: catalogue of Archer. The care and repair of anexhibition.Oxford.Bodleian books. 4th ed. New York. Bowker. 237. The restorationofleather bindings.Chicago. American Li- Library. 1968. 1960. 254. - Textileandembroidered 219. McDonald,Margaret.Hot-melt brary Association. (A. L. A. Li- braryTechnologyProject,LTP bindings. Oxford. Bodleian library. adhesives. Park Ridge, N. J. Noyes (Bodleianpicturebooks,special Data Corp. 1971. publication no. 18). 1972. 238.Mitchell, William Smith. A history series, no. 2). 1971. 220. - Nonwoven fabric technology. ofScottishbookbindings,1432- 255.Pacific bindery talk. Los Angeles. Park Ridge, N.J.Noyes Data 1650. London. Oliver and Boyd. Pacific Library Binding Co. Corp. 1971. 1955. 256.Palmer,EthridgeWoodman. A 221. McGuire,EdwardPatrick.Ad- 239. New colophon; a book-collector's course inbookbinding for voca- hesiverawmaterialshandbook. . New York. Duschnes, tional training. New York. Em- Mountainside, N. J. Padric. 1964. Crawley. p1o2y7ing bookbinders of America. 222. Americanadhesiveindex. 240. New Y ork public library. Bulletin. Mountainside, N. J. Padric. 1962. New York. New York Public Li- 257. Thepapermaker.Kalamazoo, 223. McLean, Ruari. Modern book de- brary. Mich. Paper Makers Chemical De- sign, from William Morris to the 241. Nicholson, James B. A manual of partment. Hercules Powder Co. present day. Fair Lawn, N. J. Es- the art of bookbirding ...Phila- 258.Percival, GeorgeStanley,and sential books. 1959. delphia. Baird. 1856. Rigby Graham. Unsewn binding. 224. - Victorian publishers' book- 242. Nixon, Howard M. Broxbourne 2nd ed. Leicester. Dryad. 1966.

31 4 294

259.Perry,KennethFrederick,and hams complete guide to the print- Richardson. Leather for bookbind- Clarence T. Babb. The binding of er's craft, edited by Harry Whet- ing and upholstery . . . 3rd ed. books. Rev. ed. Bloomington, Ill. ton.3rded.London.Odhams Nev castle-on-Tyne. 1910. McKnight & McKnight. 1967. Books. 1965. 296. Robinson, Ivor. Introducing book- 260. - Instructionunitsn book- 277.Pratt, Guy A. Instruction sheets in binding, New York. Watson-Gup- binding; Pt. I: fabrikoid and buck- bookbinding.East Chicago,Ind. till. 1968. ram books. Greeley, Cob. Colo- The author. 1937. 297. The Rothschild library; a catalog rado State College of Education. 278. - Let's bind a book. Rev. ed. of eighteenth century printed books 1935. Milwaukee. Bruce. 1944. and manuscripts formed by Lord 261.Philip, Alexander John. The busi- 279. Prideaux, Sarah Treverbian. Book- Rothschild. Cambridge. Cambridge ness of bookbinding for librarians binders and their craft. New York. University Press. Privately printed. ... Gravesend. A. J. Philip. 1935. Scribner. 1903. 1954. 2 vol. 262. Pierpont Morgan Library. A guide 280. -- An historical sketch of book- 298. Royal Society of Arts.London. to an exhibition of armorial and binding. London. Lawrence & Bul- Committee on Leather for Book- relatedbookbindings,1500-1800. let). 1893. binding. Report of the committee New York. Pierpont Morgan Li- 281. - Modern bookbindings, their on leather for bookbinding . . . brary. 1935. designand decoration.London. London. Bell. 1905. 263.Pinner, H. L. The world of books Constable. 1906. 299. Sadlier, Michael The evolution of in classical antiquity. Leiden. Sijt- 282.Procter, Henry Richardson. Leather publishers'bindingstyles,1770- hoff. 1948. industries laboratory book of ana- 1900. New York. Smith. 1930. 264. Pleger, John J. Bookbinding. Rev. lytical and experimental methods. 300. Salade, Robert Francis. Finishing ed. Chicago. Inland Printer. 1924. 2nded. New York. Spon and the printed job . .. New York. 265. Plenderleith, Harold James, and Chamberlain. 1908. American Printer. 1926. A. E. A. Werner. The conservation 283. - The making of leather. New 301. Samford, C. Clement, and John M. of antiquities and works of art; York. Putnam. 1914. Hemphill IL Bookbinding in Co- treatment, repair and restoration. 284. Putnam, George Haven. Books and lonial Virginia. Williamsburg, Va. 2nd ed. London. Oxford Univer- their makers duringthe middle Colonial Williamsburg. 1966. sity Press. 1971. ages ... New York. Putnam. 1897. 302. Sawyer, Harriet Price. How to care 266. - The conservation of prints, 2 vol. for books in a library. 2nd ed. drawings, and manuscripts. Oxford. 285.Quaritch,Bernard. Examples of Madison,Wisc.WisconsinFree Oxford University Press. 1937. the art of bookbinding... Lon- Library Commission.(Wisconsin 267. - The preservation of leather don. Quaritch. 1897. Free Library Commission. Instruc- bookbindings. London. British Mu- 286. Quayle, Eric. The collector's book tional Dept. Pamphlet no. 7). 1912. seum. 1967. of books. New York. Potter. 1971. 303. Scribner, Bourdon Walter. Protec- 268. Plungerian, Mark. Cellulose chem- 287.Radford, Richard George. Letter- tion of documents with cellulose istry. Brooklyn. Cl'emical Publish- press machine work. New York. ing Co. 1943. acetate sheeting. Washington, D.C. Staples Press. 1951. 2 .vol. U.S. Government Printing Office. 269. Pocl-ot encyclopedia of paper & 288. Ramsden, Charles. French book- (U.S. National Bureau of Stand- graphic art terms. 2nd ed. Kau- binders, 1789-1848. London. Hum- ards, Miscellaneous publication, M kauna, Wisc. Thomas. 1965. phries. 1950. 168). 1941. 270. Pollard,Alfred William.Early 289. Reed, John Henry. The science of 304. Schoen. Harriet Hetta. Let's bind illustrated books; a history of the imposition . . . Chicago. Inland decoration and illustration of books a book. New York. Macmillan. Printer. 1928. 1934. in the 15th and 16th centuries. 2nd 290. Reed, Robert Findlay. What the ed. New York.HaskellHouse. 305. Sharphouse, John Henry. Leather printer should know about paper. technicians 1968. Pittsburgh. Graphic Arts Technical handbook. New ed. 271. - Finebooks. New York. London. Leather Producers' Asso- Foundation. 1970. ciation. 1971. Cooper Square. 1964. 291. Reed, Ronald. Ancient skin, parch- 272. - A short-titlecatalogue of ments and leathers. London. Semi- 306. - The leatherworker'shand- books printed in England, Scotland, nar Press. 1972. book. London. Leather Producers' & Ireland1475-1640.London. 292. - Scienceforstudentsof Association. 1963. The Bibliographical Society. 1926. leather technology, edited by Ron- 307. Simon,Oliver. Introductionto 273.Portalis,Roger,Ed.Researches ald Reed. New York. Pergamon typography. 2nd ed. London. Faber concerning Jean Grolier, hislife Press. 1966. and Faber. 1963. andhislibrary.Translatedby 293. Remploy Limited. An introduction 308. Skeel,EmilyEllsworth(Ford). CarolynShipman. NewYork. to librarybinding. Newcastle-un- Mason Locke Weems, his works Grolier Club. 1907. der-Lyme. Remploy. 1967. and ways. New York. 1929. 3 vol. 274.Porte, Roy Trewin. Dictionary of 294. Research and Council 309.Skeist,Irving. Handbook of ad- printing terms. 4th ed. Salt Lake of the Graphic Arts Industry. Com- hesives.NewYork.Reinhold. City. Porte. 1941. mittee on Binding and Finishing. 1962. 275.Post, Daniel. Chemical treatment Proceedings of seminar on perfect 310. Smith, Frederick Richard. Book- of hides and leather, by John Part- binding ... Washington, D.C. Re- binding. London. Pitman. 1929. ridge. Park Ridge, N.J. Noyes search and Engineering Council of 311. Smith, Philip. New directions in Data Corp. 1972. the Graphic Arts Industry. 1963. bookbinding. NewYork.Van 276. Practical printing and binding; Od- 295. Richardson, Edward, and James Nostrand Reinhold. 1974. 295

312. Somerlad, Michael John. Scottish 329.Teigen, Kit. Graphic arts, an intro- Polluted atmosphere a factorin "Wheel" and "Herringbone" bind- duction ... Wayne, Pa. Manage- the deteriorationof bookbinding ings in the Bodleian library... ment Development Institute. 1968. leather.Easton,Pa.American Oxford.Oxford Bibliographical 330. Thomas,Henry.EarlySpanish Leather Chemists Association. (Re- Society. 1967. bookbindings, XI-XV centuries. printed from the Journal of the 313.Steinberg, Sigfrid Henry. Five hun- London. Oxford University Press. American Leather Chemists Asso- dred years of printing. 2nd ed. 1939. ciation, Mar. 1926). 1926. Baltimore. Penguin. 1962. 331. Thompson, Elbert A., and Law- 345.Vervliet, Hendrik D. L., ed. The 314.Stephen, George Arthur. Commer- rence S. Thompson. Fine Binding book through five thousand years; cial bookbindings. . .London. in America; the story of the Club a survey. New York.Phaidon. Stonhill. 1910. Bindery. Urbana, Ill. Beta Phi Mu. 1972. 315. - Machine book-sewing with re- (Beta Phi Mu. no. 2). 346.Virginia. State Library. Richmond. marks on publishers' binding. Aber- 1956. The manufacture and testing of deen. Aberdeen University Press. 332. Thompson, Lawrence Sidney. durable book papers. Based on the (Reprinted from the Library Asso- Bibliopegia fantastica. New York. investigationsof W.J.Barrow. ciation Record. June 1908). 1908. New York Public Library. 1947. Edited by Randolph W. Church. 316.Stevenson, George A. Graphic arts 333. Thrift,TimothyBurr.Modern Richmond, Va. (Virginia State Li- encyclopedia. New York. McGraw- methods in marbling paper. Win- brary publications, no. 13). 1960. Hill. 1968. chester, Mass. Lucky Dog Press. 347. WaltersArtGallery,Baltimore. 317. - Graphic arts handbook and 1945. The history of bookbinding 525- products manual. Torrance, Calif. 334.Toldo, Vittorio de. The Italian art 1950 A.D. Compiled by Dorothy Pen and Press Publications. 1960. of bookbinding. London. Batsford. Miner. Baltimore. Trustees of the 318.Stewart, Alexander A. The printer's (Monographs of decorativearts, Walters Art Gallery. 1957. dictionary of technical terms. . . 3). 1925. 348. Walton, Robert Petrie. Causes and Boston. School of Printing, North 335. Town, Laurence. Bookbinding by prevention of deterioration in book End Union. 1912. hand, for students and craftsmen. materials. New York. New York 319. Stonehouse, John Harrison.The New York. Pitman. 1950 (1951). Public Lib,rary.(Reprinted from story of the Great Omar bound by 336. Tsuen-Hsuin,Tsien.Writtenon the New York Public Library. Bul- Francis Longinus Sangorski and bamboo and silk; the beginnings of letin. April 1929). 1929. its romantic loss. London. Picca- Chinese book inscriptions. Chicago. 349. Wardle, David Bernard. Document dilly Fountain Press. 1933. University of Chicago Press. 1962. repair. London. Society of Archi- 320.Strauss, Victor. The printing indus- 337. Turnbull, Arthur T., and Russell vists. 1971. try ... Washington, D.C. Printing N. Baird. The graphics of com- 350. Warren (S. D.) Co. Boston. Facts Industries in America. 1967. munication; typography-layout-- and views of papermaking at S. D. 321. Studies in conservation. Etudes de design. 2nd ed. New York. Holt, Warren Company. Boston. S. D. conservation. Journal of the Inter- Rinehart, and Winston. 1968. Warren Co. 1965. national Institute for the Conserva- 338.U.S. Bureau of Naval Personnel. 351. Waterer, John William. A guide to tion of Historic and Artistic Works. Printer 3 & 2. Washington, D.C. theconservation and restoration London. U.S. Government Printing Office. of objects made wholly or in part 322.Summerfield, Melvin B. Bound- 1952. of leather. 2nd ed. London. Bell. to-stay-bound: the story of a book 339.U.S. Government Printing Office. 1973. ... Jacksonville, Ill. New Method Theory and practice of bookbind- 352. - Leather and craftsmanship. Book Bindery. 1956. ing.Rev.ed. Washington, D.C. London. Faber and Faber. 1950. 323.Sutermeister, Edwin. Chemistry of U.S. Government Printing Office. 353. - Leather craftsmanship. Lon- pulp and paper making. 3rd ed. 1962. don. Bell. 1968. New York. Wiley. 1941. 340.U.S. Library of Congress. Paper- 354. - Leather in life, art and indus- 324. - The story of papermaking. making, art and craft... Wash- Boston. Warren. 1954. ington, D.C. Library of Congress. try... London. Faber andFaber. 325. Tanners' Council of America, Inc. 1968. 1946. Dictionary of leather terminology. 341.U.S. National Bureau of Stand- 355. Watson, Aldred Auld. Hand book- 6th ed. New York. Tanners' Coun- ards.Fabricsforbookcovers. binding, a manual of instruction. cil of America. 1969. Washington, D.C.U.S. Govern- New York. Reinhold. 1963. 326. Tauber, Maurice Falco lm. Library mentPrintingOffice.(Product 356. Wehmhoff, Byron Louis, and F. R. binding manual ...Boston. Li- Standard PS 9-68). 1968. Baylock. The evaluation of bronze brary Binding Institute. 1972. 342. Uzanne, Louis Octave. The French stamping leaf. Washington, D.C. 327. Tavik, Anton. The art and practice bookbinders of the eighteenth cen- U.S. Government Printing Office. of edge marbling. Baltimore. The tury.Translated by Mabel Mc- (Technical bulletin, no. 17). 1933. author. 1908. Ilvaine.Chicago.CaxtonClub. 357. Wheatley, Henry Benjamin. Re- 328. Technical Association of the Pulp 1904. markable bindings inthe British and Paper Industry. Adhesives Test- 343. Vaughan, AlexanderJ.Modern Museum ... London. Low, Mars- ing Committee. Testing of adhe- bookbinding; atreatisecovering ton, Searle, and Rivington. 1889. sives. William H. Neuss, ed. New bothletterpressandstationery 358. Wheelock, Mary E. New books for York. Technical Association of the branches of the trade ... New ed. old. St. Louis. St. Louis Public Li- . (TAPPI London. Ski lton. 1960. brary. 1916. Monographs Series, no. 26). 1963. 344. Veitch, Fletcher Pearre, and others. 359. Williams, Alec. Printing inks. Park 296

Ridge, N. J. Noyes Data Corp. ments by lamination.Washington, edges and paper.2nd ed. London. 1972. D.C. U.S. Department of Com- Hey lin. 1854. 360. Williamson, Hugh Albert Fordyce. merce. (National Bureau of Stand- 369. The whole art of marbling as Methods of book design; the prac- ards, monograph 5). 1959. applied to paper, book edges... tice of an industrial craft.2nd ed. 365. Winans, LeonardG. The book Rev. ed. London. Bell. 1881. London. Oxford University Press. from manuscript to market.New 370. Young, John Lockwood.Books; 1966. York. Grosset & Dunlap. 1941. from ms. to the bookseller.3rd ed. 361. Wilson, John Arthur.Analysis of 366. Winger, Howard W., and Richard London. Pitman. 1947. leather and materials used in mak- D. Smith, eds.Deterioration and 371. Zaehnsdorf, Joseph William.The ingit. New York. McGraw-Hill. preservation of librarymaterials art of bookbinding ...London. 1931. . . . Chicago. University of Chi- Bell. 1890. 362. The chemistryofleather cago Press. (34th Annual Confer- 372. Zaehnsdorf.Firm.Bookbinders. manufacture.New York. Chemi- enceoftheGraduateLibrary London.A short history of book- cal Catalog Co. 1923. School). 1970. binding. . .London. Chiswick. 363. Modern practice in leather 367. Woodcock, John.Binding your own 1895. manufacture.New York. Reinhold. books.Harmondsworth, Middlesex. 373. Zahn, Otto.On artbinding,a 1941. Penguin. 1955. monograph.Memphis. Toof. 1904. 364. Wilson, William Kester, ard B. W. 368. Woolnough, Charles W.The art Forshee.Preservationofdocu- of marbling as applied to book

3 Type Times Roman (Linotype) 9 point, leaded 1 point Folding Endurance (1 kg. tension) Paper pH Alkalinity Basis Weight Machine Cross (CaCO3) (pounds per ream) DirectionDirection Text 9.7 4.2% 70 50 36 Plates 8.7 8.3% 80 131 99 Endpapers9.4 3.5% 100 45 35 Binding Smyth sewn on tapes; 19 signatures. Case binding. Cloth. Stuck-on headbands. Gold (22 karat) stamping.